diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 861260 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/20729-h.htm | 13319 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/1.jpg | bin | 0 -> 38062 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/2.jpg | bin | 0 -> 127923 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 33521 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/b.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29487 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/c.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29493 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/d.jpg | bin | 0 -> 31392 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/e.jpg | bin | 0 -> 28333 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/f.jpg | bin | 0 -> 30541 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/g.jpg | bin | 0 -> 31674 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/h.jpg | bin | 0 -> 35075 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/i.jpg | bin | 0 -> 41424 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/j.jpg | bin | 0 -> 28256 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/k.jpg | bin | 0 -> 25026 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/l.jpg | bin | 0 -> 31834 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729-h/images/m.jpg | bin | 0 -> 40918 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729.txt | 15543 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20729.zip | bin | 0 -> 277189 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
22 files changed, 28878 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/20729-h.zip b/20729-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c1b8d7b --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h.zip diff --git a/20729-h/20729-h.htm b/20729-h/20729-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..52e6069 --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/20729-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,13319 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of At the Point of the Bayonet, by G. A. Henty</title> +<style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[*/ + body {background:#ffffff; + color:black; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + font-size:14pt; + margin-top:70px; + margin-left:10%; + margin-right:10%; + text-align:justify} + caption { font-weight: bold; letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-family: "Arial"; + text-transform: uppercase; font-size: 18pt; } + div { text-align: center} + em {font-weight: bold} + h1 {text-align: center; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.05em} + h1.pg {text-align: center; text-transform: none; letter-spacing: 0em} + h2 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + h3 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + h3.pg {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0em} + hr {height: 5px} + p {text-indent: 4% } + table {text-align: center} + td { font-family: "Arial"; text-align: left} + td.ltoc { letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; + text-transform: uppercase; text-align: right; vertical-align: top } + td.rtoc { font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; text-align: left} + thead { font-weight: bold;} + hr.full { width: 100%; + margin-top: 0em; + margin-bottom: 0em; + border: solid black; + height: 5px; } + pre {font-size: 70%; + text-indent: 0%; } +/*]]>*/ +</style> +</head> +<body> +<h1 class="pg">The Project Gutenberg eBook, At the Point of the Bayonet, by G. A. Henty, +Illustrated by Wal Page</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: At the Point of the Bayonet</p> +<p> A Tale of the Mahratta War</p> +<p>Author: G. A. Henty</p> +<p>Release Date: March 3, 2007 [eBook #20729]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE POINT OF THE BAYONET***</p> +<p> </p> +<h3 class="pg">E-text prepared by Martin Robb</h3> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<h1>At The Point Of The Bayonet:</h1> + +<h2>A Tale Of The Mahratta War</h2> + +<h2>by G. A. Henty.</h2> + +<h2>Illustrated by Wal Paget.</h2> + +<center> +<h4>1901</h4> +</center> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr /> +<p> </p> +<center> +<table summary="Table of Contents"> +<caption>Contents</caption> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"></td> +<td class="rtoc"><a href="#Preface">Preface</a>.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch1">Chapter 1</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Faithful Nurse.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch2">Chapter 2</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Strange Bringing Up.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch3">Chapter 3</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Change In Affairs.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch4">Chapter 4</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A British Resident.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch5">Chapter 5</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Down To Bombay.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch6">Chapter 6</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">In The Company's Service.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch7">Chapter 7</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">An Act Of Treachery.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch8">Chapter 8</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Nana's Release.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch9">Chapter 9</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Popular Tumult.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch10">Chapter 10</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Mission By Sea.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch11">Chapter 11</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Prisoner.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch12">Chapter 12</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Defence Of Johore.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch13">Chapter 13</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Break Up Of The Monsoon.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch14">Chapter 14</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Great Andaman.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch15">Chapter 15</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Assaye.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch16">Chapter 16</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Disastrous Retreat.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch17">Chapter 17</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">An Escape.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch18">Chapter 18</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">An Awkward Position.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch19">Chapter 19</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Bhurtpoor.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch20">Chapter 20</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Home.</td> +</tr> +</table> +<br /> +<br /> +<br /> +<table summary="Illustrations"> +<caption>Illustrations<br /></caption> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicA">For a year he worked with the +shikaree.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicB">Harry went up to him and salaamed.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicC">Harry . . . saw a party of soldiers coming +along the road.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicD">There was a little haggling over the +terms.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicE">Harry ran up to the proclamation and tore it +down.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicF">As he rode through the streets he saw . . . how +fierce a feeling of resentment had been excited by the +news.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicG">'Well, sir, I will now return to shore,' the +governor said.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicH">Without a cry the rajah fell back, shot through +the head.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicI">The rattle of musketry broke out +again.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#Map1">Plan of the Battle of Assaye.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#Map2">Plan of the Battle of Laswaree.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicJ">Harry succeeded in crossing the river.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicK">Abdool at once slipped down.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicL">Harry drew out his handkerchief, and waved +it.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicM">View of the Rajah's Palace, Bhurtpoor.</a></td> +</tr> +</table> +</center> +<h2><a name="Preface" id="Preface">Preface</a>.</h2> +<p>The story of the war in which the power of the great Mahratta +confederacy was broken is one of the most stirring pages of the +campaigns which, begun by Clive, ended in the firm establishment of +our great empire in the Indian Peninsula. When the struggle began, +the Mahrattas were masters of no small portion of India; their +territory comprising the whole country between Bombay and Delhi, +and stretching down from Rajputana to Allahabad; while in the south +they were lords of the district of Cuttack, thereby separating +Madras from Calcutta. The jealousies of the great Mahratta leaders, +Holkar and Scindia, who were constantly at war with each other, or +with the Peishwa at Poona, greatly facilitated our operations; and +enabled us, although at the cost of much blood, to free a large +portion of India from a race that was a scourge--faithless, +intriguing and crafty; cruel, and reckless of life. The Mahrattas, +conquering race as they were, yet failed in the one virtue of +courage. They could sweep the land with hordes of wild horsemen, +could harry peaceful districts and tyrannize over the towns they +conquered; but they were unable to make an effective stand against +British bayonets and British sabres. They were a race of +freebooters; and even the most sentimental humanitarian can feel no +regret at the overthrow of a power that possessed no single claim +to our admiration, and weighed like an incubus upon the peoples it +oppressed. The history of the Mahrattas, as written by Grant Duff, +whose account I have, throughout, followed, is one long record of +perfidy, murder, and crime of all sorts.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch1" id="Ch1">Chapter 1</a>: A Faithful Nurse.</h2> +<p>On a swell of ground, in the wild country extending from Bombay +to the foot of the Ghauts, stood a small camp. In the centre was a +large pavilion; the residence, for the time, of Major Lindsay, an +officer whose charge was to keep the peace in the district. It was +no easy matter. The inhabitants, wild and lawless, lived in small +villages scattered about the rough country, for the most part +covered with forest, and subject to depredations by the robber +bands who had their strongholds among the hills. Major Lindsay had +with him a party of twenty troopers, not for defence--there was +little fear of attack by the natives of the Concan--but to add to +his authority, to aid in the collection of the small tax paid by +each community, and to deter the mountain robbers from descending +on to the plain. He generally spent the cool season in going his +rounds while, during the hot weather, his headquarters were at +Bombay.</p> +<p>He had with him his wife and infant child. The child was some +three months old, and was looked after by an ayah, who had been in +Major Lindsay's service ten years; for three elder children had +been born to him--all, however, dying from the effects of the +climate before reaching the age of five. The ayah had nursed each, +in succession, and had become greatly attached to the family, +especially to her youngest charge. She had come to speak English +well; but with the child she always talked in her native tongue, as +the major saw the advantage it would prove to the boy, when he grew +up, to be able to speak fluently one, at least, of the native +languages.</p> +<p>The nurse was a Mahratta. She had been in the service of the +British Resident at Poona and, when he was recalled, had entered +that of Major Lindsay, at that time a captain who acted as +secretary to the Resident.</p> +<p>A young officer from Bombay had just ridden out, to spend a day +or two with the major, and was sitting with him at the entrance to +the tent.</p> +<p>"The news from the army," he said, "is most unsatisfactory. As +you know, to the astonishment of everyone Colonel Egerton was +appointed to the command, in spite of the fact that he was so +infirm as to be altogether unfit for active service; and Mostyn, +our late Resident at Poona, and Carnac accompanied him as deputies +of the Council."</p> +<p>"That is altogether a bad arrangement," the major said. "It has +always been a great disadvantage for a general to be accompanied by +civilians, with power to thwart his combinations. Against Mostyn's +appointment no one could raise any objection as, having been for +some years at Poona, he understands the Mahrattas, and indeed is +much liked by them, so that in any negotiations he would have far +more chance of success than a stranger; but Carnac is hot headed +and obstinate, with a very high idea of his own importance, and it +is certain that there will be difficulties between him and +Egerton."</p> +<p>"I am sorry to say, Major, that these anticipations were very +speedily verified. As you know, the advance party landed at Aptee, +on November 23rd, and seized the roads over the gorge; and on the +25th the main body disembarked at Panwell. No sooner had they got +there than there was a quarrel between Egerton and Carnac. Most +unfortunately Mostyn, who would have acted as mediator, was taken +ill on the very day after landing, and was obliged to return to +Bombay; and I hear there is hardly any chance of his recovery. The +army did not reach the top of the Ghauts till the 23rd of +December--instead of, at the latest, three days after landing--and +actually spent eleven days before it arrived at Karlee, only eight +miles in advance of the Bhore Ghauts. Of course this encouraged the +enemy, and gave plenty of time for them to assemble and make all +their arrangements and, when we last heard, they were harassing our +march. For the past two days no news has arrived, and there seems +to be little doubt that the Mahrattas have closed in round their +rear, and cut off all communications."</p> +<p>"It is monstrous that they should march so slowly. The whole +thing has been a hideous blunder, and the idea of encumbering a +force of four thousand men with something like thirty thousand camp +followers, and with a train of no less than nineteen thousand +bullocks, to say nothing of other draught animals, is the most +preposterous thing I ever heard of. In fact, the whole thing has +been grossly mismanaged.</p> +<p>"I don't say that the conduct of the Mahrattas has not for some +time been doubtful, if not threatening. It is well known that the +Governor General and the Council at Calcutta have most strongly +disapproved of the whole conduct of the Council at Bombay. Indeed, +no explanation has ever been given as to why they took up the cause +of Rugoba, the scoundrel who grasped the crown; and who was privy +to, if he did not instigate, the murder of his nephew, the young +Peishwa.</p> +<p>"He was not unopposed, for Nana Furnuwees and Hurry Punt, two of +the leading Mahratta ministers, formed a regency under Gunga Bye, +the widow of the murdered Peishwa. While matters were undecided, +the Bombay Council opened communications with Rugoba, who they +thought was likely to be successful; and promised to assist him, if +he would advance a considerable sum of money, and cede to the +Company Salsette, the small islands contiguous to Bombay and +Bassein, which had been captured from the Portuguese by the +Mahrattas--an altogether inexcusable arrangement, as the Mahrattas +were at peace with us, and Rugoba was not in a position to hand the +islands over. That matter, however, was settled by sending an +expedition, which captured Salsette and Tannah in 1775, four years +ago. Since then Rugoba has become a fugitive and, without a shadow +of reason, is making war against the whole force of the Mahratta +confederacy; who, although divided amongst themselves and +frequently engaged in the struggles for supremacy, have united +against us--for they say that Scindia, Holkar, and Hurry Punt are +in command of their army. To send four thousand men, of whom less +than six hundred are Europeans, against the whole Mahratta power is +a desperate step.</p> +<p>"I know we have fought and won against greater odds, many times +in the history of India; but our forces have always been well led, +marched with the smallest amount of baggage possible, and made up +for inferiority in numbers by speed, activity, and dash. Here, on +the contrary, we have a force hampered to an unheard-of degree by +baggage and camp followers; with an invalid at its head, controlled +by two civilians; and moving at a rate which, in itself, testifies +to divided councils and utter incompetency on the part of its +commander. It is almost impossible even to hope for success, under +such conditions."</p> +<p>"The lookout is certainly bad," the younger officer agreed. +"However, before now the fighting powers of the British soldier +have made up for the blunders of his commanders; and we may hope +that this will be the case, now."</p> +<p>"If a disaster happen," the major said, "we shall have the +Mahrattas down at the gates of Bombay; and as soon as I hear a +rumour of it--and news travels wonderfully fast among the +natives--I shall return to the city."</p> +<p>"Oh, I don't think you need fear anything of that sort, Major! +Besides, this is not on the direct line between the Ghauts and the +city. And even if they find they cannot push on, I should say our +force would be able to secure their retreat. The Mahratta horse +will never be able to break our squares; but of course, in that +case we should have to abandon all our baggage and baggage +animals."</p> +<p>"I agree with you that the Mahrattas would doubtless hang on the +skirts of our force, and follow them down the Bhore Ghaut, and so +would not come anywhere near us; but they might detach flying +parties to burn and plunder, as is their custom. Brave as they are, +the Mahrattas do not fight for the love of fighting, but simply +from the hope of plunder and of enlarging their territories.</p> +<p>"Well, we may hope, in a day or two, to hear that a battle has +been fought, and that a victory has been won. Not that one victory +would settle the matter, for the Mahratta force consists almost +entirely of cavalry and, as we have only a handful, they would, if +beaten, simply ride off and be ready to fight again, another day. +If we had pushed on and occupied Poona, directly we landed--which +should have been easy enough, if the baggage train had been left +behind, for it is but forty miles from Panwell to the Mahratta +capital--the position would have been altogether different. The +Mahrattas would not have had time to collect their forces, and we +should probably have met with no opposition and, once in Poona, +could have held it against the whole Mahratta force. Besides, it is +certain that some of the chiefs, seeing that Rugoba was likely to +be made Peishwa, would have come to the conclusion that it would be +best for them to side with him.</p> +<p>"Of course, the baggage should all have been left at Panwell +and, in that case, the force could have entered Poona three days +after landing, instead of delaying from the 25th of November until +today, the 7th of January; and even now, at their present rate of +advance, they may be another fortnight before they arrive at Poona. +I don't think there has been so disgraceful a business since we +first put foot in India.</p> +<p>"At any rate, I shall send Mary and the child down to Bombay, +tomorrow. It is all very well to have her with me, when everything +is peaceable; but although I do not think there is any actual risk, +it is as well that, in turbulent times like these, with nothing but +a force under such incompetent leading between us and a powerful +and active enemy, she should be safe at Bombay."</p> +<p>Just before daybreak, next morning, there was a sudden shout +from one of the sentries; who had for the first time been posted +round the camp. The warning was followed by a fierce rush, and a +large body of horse and foot charged into the camp. The escort +were, for the most part, killed as they issued from their tents. +The major and his friend were shot down as they sallied out, sword +in hand. The same fate befell Mrs. Lindsay.</p> +<p>Then the Mahrattas proceeded to loot the camp. The ayah had +thrust the child underneath the wall of the tent, at the first +alarm. A Mahratta seized her, and would have cut her down, had she +not recognized him by the light of the lamp which hung from the +tent ridge.</p> +<p>"Why, cousin Sufder," she exclaimed, "do you not know me?"</p> +<p>He loosed his hold, and stood back and gazed at her.</p> +<p>"Why, Soyera," he exclaimed, "is it you? It is more than ten +years since I saw you!</p> +<p>"It is my cousin," he said to some of his companions who were +standing round, "my mother's sister's child."</p> +<p>"Don't be alarmed," he went on, to the woman, "no one will harm +you. I am one of the captains of this party."</p> +<p>"I must speak to you alone, Sufder."</p> +<p>She went outside the tent with him.</p> +<p>"You have nothing to fear," he said. "You shall go back with us +to Jooneer. I have a house there, and you can stay with my wife. +Besides, there are many of your people still alive."</p> +<p>"But that is not all, Sufder. I was ayah to the major and his +wife--whom your people have just killed, and whom I loved +dearly--and in my charge is their child. He is but a few months +old, and I must take him with me."</p> +<p>"It is impossible," Sufder replied. "No white man, woman, or +child would be safe in the Deccan, at present."</p> +<p>"No one would see his face," the woman said. "I would wrap him +up, and will give out that he is my own child. As soon as we get up +the Ghauts I would stain his face and skin, and no one would know +that he was white. If you will not let me do it, tell your men to +cut me down. I should not care to live, if the child were gone as +well as his father and mother. You cannot tell how kind they were +to me. You would not have me ungrateful, would you, Sufder?"</p> +<p>"Well, well," the man said good naturedly, though somewhat +impatiently, "do as you like; but if any harm comes of it, mind it +is not my fault."</p> +<p>Thankful for the permission, Soyera hurried round to the back of +the tent, picked up the child and wrapped it in her robe; and then +when, after firing the place, the Mahrattas retired, she fell in +behind them, and followed them in the toilsome climb up the +mountains, keeping so far behind that none questioned her. Once or +twice Sufder dropped back to speak to her.</p> +<p>"It is a foolish trick of yours," he said, "and I fear that +trouble will come of it."</p> +<p>"I don't see why it should," she replied. "The child will come +to speak Mahratta and, when he is stained, none will guess that he +is English. In time, I may be able to restore him to his own +people."</p> +<p>The other shook his head.</p> +<p>"That is not likely," he said, "for before many weeks, we shall +have driven them into the sea."</p> +<p>"Then he must remain a Mahratta," she said, "until he is able to +make his way to join the English in Madras or Calcutta."</p> +<p>"You are an obstinate woman, and always have been so; else you +would not have left your people to go to be servant among the +whites. However, I will do what I can for you, for the sake of my +mother's sister and of our kinship."</p> +<p>On the way up the hills Soyera stopped, several times, to pick +berries. When they halted she went aside and pounded them, and then +boiled them in some water in a lota--a copper vessel--Sufder lent +her for the purpose, and dyed the child's head and body with it, +producing a colour corresponding to her own.</p> +<p>The party, which was composed of men from several towns and +villages, broke up the next morning.</p> +<p>"Have you money?" Sufder asked her, as she was about to start +alone on her journey.</p> +<p>"Yes; my savings were all lodged for me, by Major Lindsay, with +some merchants at Bombay; but I have twenty rupees sewn up in my +garments."</p> +<p>"As to your savings, Soyera, you are not likely to see them +again, for we shall make a clean sweep of Bombay. However, twenty +rupees will be useful to you, and would keep you for three or four +months, if you needed but, as you are going to my wife, you will +not want them.</p> +<p>"Take this dagger. When you show it to her, she will know that +you come from me; but mind, she is, like most women, given to +gossip; therefore I warn you not to let her into the secret of this +child's birth, for if you did so, half the town would know it in +the course of a day or two.</p> +<p>"Now, I must go back with my men to join a party who are on +their way to fight the English. I should have gone there direct, +but met the others starting on this marauding expedition, which was +so much to the taste of my men that I could not restrain them from +joining. I shall see you at Jooneer, as soon as matters are +finished with the English; then I shall, after staying a few days +there, rejoin Scindia, in whose service I am."</p> +<p>Soyera started on her way. At the villages through which she +passed, she was questioned as to where she came from; and replied +that she had been living down near Bombay but, now that the English +were going to fight the Mahrattas, she was coming home, having lost +her husband a few months before.</p> +<p>As the road to Jooneer diverged widely from that to Poona, she +was asked no questions about the war. All were confident that the +defeat of the English was certain, now that Scindia and Holkar and +the government of the Peishwa had laid aside their mutual +jealousies, and had joined for the purpose of crushing the +whites.</p> +<p>On arriving, after two days' journey, at Jooneer, she went to +the address that Sufder had given her; but was coldly received by +his wife.</p> +<p>"As it is Sufder's order, of course I must take you in," she +said, "but when he returns, I shall tell him that I do not want +another woman and child in the house. Why do you not go to your own +people? As you are Sufder's cousin, you must be the sister of +Ramdass. Why should you not go to him?"</p> +<p>"I will gladly do so, if you will tell me where he lives."</p> +<p>"He has a small farm. You must have passed it, as you came +along. It is about a mile from here."</p> +<p>"I will go to him at once," Soyera said.</p> +<p>"No, no," the woman exclaimed; "that will never do. You must +stop a day or two here. Sufder would be angry, indeed, were he to +find that you did not remain here; and would blame me for it. I +should be willing enough for you to stay a week, or a month; that +is a different thing from becoming an inmate of the house."</p> +<p>"I will wait till tomorrow, for I have made a long two days' +journey from the top of the Ghauts and, as I am not accustomed to +walking, my feet are sore. In the morning I will go and see my +brother. I did not so much as know that he was alive. I feel sure +he will take me in, willingly; for he is but two years older than +myself, and was always kind to me."</p> +<p>Accordingly the next morning she retraced her steps, and had no +difficulty in finding the farm of Ramdass. Choosing the time when +he would be likely to be in for his dinner, Soyera walked up to the +door of the house, which was standing open.</p> +<p>As she stood there, hesitating, Ramdass came out. He was a man +of some forty years of age, with a pleasant and kindly face. He +looked at her enquiringly.</p> +<p>"Do you not know me, Ramdass?" she asked.</p> +<p>"Why, 'tis Soyera!" he exclaimed. "And so you have come back, +after all these years--thirteen, is it not, since you went +away?</p> +<p>"Welcome back, little sister!" and he raised his voice, and +called, "Anundee!"</p> +<p>A young woman, two or three and twenty years of age, came to the +door.</p> +<p>"Wife," he said, "this is my sister Soyera, of whom you have +often heard me speak.</p> +<p>"Soyera, this is my wife. We have been married six years; but +come in, and let us talk things over.</p> +<p>"You have come home for good, I hope," he said. "So you too have +married and, as you come alone with your child, have, I suppose, +had the misfortune to lose your husband?"</p> +<p>"Yes, I was alone in the world, and came hither not knowing +whether you were alive or dead; but feeling sure of a welcome, if I +found you."</p> +<p>"And you were not mistaken," he said heartily.</p> +<p>"Anundee, you will, I am sure, join me in the welcome; and +willingly give my sister and her child a place in our home?"</p> +<p>"Assuredly. It will be pleasant for me, when you are in the +fields, to have some one to talk to, and perhaps to help me about +the house."</p> +<p>Soyera saw that she was speaking sincerely.</p> +<p>"Thank you, Anundee; you may be sure that I shall not be idle. I +have been accustomed to work, and can take much off your hands; and +will look after your two children;" for two boys, three or four +years old, were standing before her, staring at the newcomer.</p> +<p>"That will be pleasant, Soyera; indeed, sometimes they hinder me +much in my work."</p> +<p>"I am accustomed to children, Anundee, as I was for years nurse +to English children, and know their ways."</p> +<p>"Well, now let us to dinner," Ramdass broke in. "I am hungry, +and want to be off again. There is much to do in the fields."</p> +<p>The woman took a pot off the embers of a wood fire, and poured +its contents into a dish. The meal consisted of a species of pulse +boiled with ghee, with peppers and other condiments added.</p> +<p>"And how did you like being among the English, Soyera?"</p> +<p>"I liked it very well," the woman said. "They are very kind and +considerate to nurses and, although they get angry when the +gorrawallah or other men neglect their duty, they do not punish +them as a Mahratta master would do. They are not double faced; when +they say a thing they mean it, and their word can always be +trusted. As a people, no doubt they are anxious to extend their +dominion; but they do not wish to do so for personal gain. They are +not like the princes here, who go to war to gain territory and +revenue. It was reasonable that they should wish to increase their +lands; for they are almost shut up in Bombay, with Salsette and the +other islands occupied by us, who may, any day, be their +enemies."</p> +<p>Her brother laughed.</p> +<p>"It seems to me, Soyera, that you have come to prefer these +English people to your own countrymen."</p> +<p>"I say not that, Ramdass. You asked me how I liked them, and I +have told you. You yourself know how the tax collectors grind down +the people; how Scindia and Holkar and the Peishwa are always +fighting each other. Do you know that, in Bombay, the meanest man +could not be put to death, unless fairly tried; while among the +Mahrattas men are executed on the merest excuse or, if not +executed, are murdered?"</p> +<p>"That is true enough," Ramdass said; "none of the three princes +would hesitate to put to death anyone who stood in his way, and it +seems strange to me that even the Brahmins, who would not take the +life even of a troublesome insect, yet support the men who have +killed scores of other people. But it is no use grumbling; the +thing has always been, and I suppose always will be. It is not only +so in the Deccan, but in the Nizam's dominions, in Mysore and, so +far as I know, in Oude and Delhi. It seems so natural to us that +the powerful should oppress the weak, and that one prince should go +to war with another, that we hardly give the matter a thought; but +though, as you say, the English in Bombay may rule wisely, and +dislike taking life, they are doing now just as our princes +do--they are making war with us."</p> +<p>"That is true but, from what I have heard when the English +sahibs were speaking together, it is everything to them that a +prince favourable to them should rule at Poonah for, were Holkar +and Scindia to become all powerful, and place one of their people +on the seat of the Peishwa, the next step might be that a great +Mahratta force would descend the Ghauts, capture Bombay, and slay +every white man in it."</p> +<p>"But they are a mere handful," Ramdass said. "How can they think +of invading a nation like ours?"</p> +<p>"Because they know, at least they believe, that Scindia, Holkar, +and the Peishwa are all so jealous of each other that they will +never act together. Then you see what they have done round Madras +and Bengal and, few as they are, they have won battles against the +great princes; and lastly, my mistress has told me that, although +there are but few here, there are many at home; and they could, if +they chose, send out twenty soldiers for every one there is +here.</p> +<p>"Besides, it is not these alone who fight. The natives enlist +under them, and aid them in their conquests; and this shows, at +least, that they are well treated, and have confidence in the good +faith of the English."</p> +<p>"It is all very well, Soyera, to talk that way; but I would as +willingly believe that the stars will fall from the sky as that +these Englishmen, who simply live in Bombay because we suffer them +to do so, should ever conquer the Mahrattas, as they have subdued +other portions of India where, as everyone knows, the people are +not warlike, and have always been conquered without difficulty.</p> +<p>"Look at our power! At Delhi the emperor is a puppet in our +hands, and it is the same in all the districts on the plain of the +great river. The Rajpoots fear us, and even the Pindaries would not +dare carry their raids into our country. That a small body of +merchants and soldiers should threaten us seems, to me, altogether +absurd."</p> +<p>"Well, brother, we will not argue about it. Time will show. As a +woman of the Mahrattas, I trust that day will never come; but as +one who knows the English, I have my fears. Of one thing I am sure, +that were they masters here, the cultivators would be vastly better +off than they are at present."</p> +<p>Ramdass laughed.</p> +<p>"What do you think of my sister's opinions, Anundee?"</p> +<p>"I do not know what to think," the young woman said; "but Soyera +has seen much, and is a wise woman, and what she says are no idle +words. To us it seems impossible, when we know that the Mahrattas +can place a hundred thousand horsemen in the field; but I own that, +from what we know of the English, it might be better for people +like us to have such masters."</p> +<p>"And now, Soyera," Ramdass said, when he returned from his work +in the evening, "tell us more about yourself. First, how did you +learn where I was living?"</p> +<p>"I learned it from the wife of our cousin Sufder."</p> +<p>"How did you fall in with him?"</p> +<p>"Well, I must tell you something. I had meant to keep it +entirely to myself, but I know that you and Anundee will keep my +secret."</p> +<p>"Assuredly we will. I am not a man to talk of other people's +affairs and, as to Anundee, you can trust her with your life."</p> +<p>"Well, in the first place, I deceived you; or rather you +deceived yourself, when you said, 'I see that you have been +married;' but the children were here, and so I could not explain. +The infant is not mine. It is the son of my dear master and +mistress, both of whom were killed, three days ago, by bands--of +which Sufder commanded one--who attacked them suddenly, by +night."</p> +<p>"What! Is the child white?" Ramdass asked, in a tone of +alarm.</p> +<p>"It is not white, because I have stained the skin; but it is the +child of English parents. I will tell you how it happened."</p> +<p>And she related the instances of the attack upon the little +camp, the death of her master and mistress, another white officer, +and all their escort; told how she had hidden the child under the +cover of the tent, how Sufder had saved her life, and her +subsequent conversation with him regarding the child.</p> +<p>"Now, what do you intend to do with him, Soyera?"</p> +<p>"I intend to bring him up as my own. I shall keep his skin +stained, and no one can suspect that he is not mine."</p> +<p>"Then you do not think of restoring him to his people?"</p> +<p>"Not until he grows up. He has neither father nor mother, and to +whom could I hand him, now? Moreover if, as you say, our people +intend to drive the English from Bombay, his fate would be certain. +When I am by myself with him, I shall talk to him in English, as +soon as he is old enough to understand that he must not speak in +that language to others; then, when he joins his own people, he +will be able to converse with them. In the ten years I have spent +in English service I have come to speak their language well. Though +I cannot teach him the knowledge of the English, I can do much to +fit him to take his place as an Englishman, when the time +comes."</p> +<p>"It is a risky business," her brother said, "but I do not say +that it cannot be carried out; at any rate, since you have so +decided to keep him, I can see no better plan."</p> +<p>Two days later, Sufder came in.</p> +<p>"So you got here safely, Soyera?"</p> +<p>"Yes, I had no trouble. But I did not expect you back so +soon."</p> +<p>"The matter is all settled, though I think we were wrong to +grant any terms to the English. We had them in our power, and +should have finished the matter, straight off."</p> +<p>Delay and inactivity, the natural consequences of utter +incompetence and of divided councillors, had occurred. Colonel +Egerton, in consequence of sickness, had resigned the command; and +had been succeeded by Lieutenant Colonel Cockburn. On the 9th of +January they were within eighteen miles of Poona, and they had +still three weeks' provisions with them. Two or three skirmishes +had taken place, but without any result; yet Mr. Carnac, without +having suffered any reverse, and now within a day's march of the +capital, proposed that a retreat should be made, at once.</p> +<p>The proposal was combated by Captain Hartley, a gallant young +officer, and Mr. Holmes of the Civil Service. Cockburn, being +called upon for his opinion, said he had no doubt the army could +penetrate to Poona; but that it would be impossible for it to +protect its enormous baggage train. Mr. Carnac, however, persisted +in his opinion, in spite of the prayers of Rugoba and, at eleven +o'clock on the night of the 11th of January, the heavy guns were +thrown into a large pool, a quantity of stores burnt, and the force +began its retreat, in face of enemies estimated differently at from +fifty to a hundred thousand men.</p> +<p>Against such vigilant foes there was but little hope, indeed, +that the movement would be unnoticed and, at two o'clock in the +morning, a party of horse attacked the advance guard. Cockburn sent +forward two companies of Europeans to support them, but the +Mahrattas had succeeded in plundering part of the baggage.</p> +<p>In a very short time the rear was also attacked. This was +covered by some six companies of Sepoys, with two guns, commanded +by Captain Hartley. These received the charge of the enemy's horse +and foot with great steadiness and, several times, took the +offensive and drove their assailants back.</p> +<p>When morning broke, the little force found themselves altogether +surrounded by the whole army of the Mahrattas. Hartley's Sepoys +were now sorely pressed, but still maintained their position, and +were reinforced by five companies of Europeans and two more +companies of Sepoys. With this support, Hartley beat off every +attack. At ten o'clock he received orders from Colonel Cockburn to +retreat, but the officer who carried the message returned, begging +that he would allow Captain Hartley to await a more favourable +opportunity. Cockburn agreed to this, but sent Major Frederick to +take command of the rear, with orders to retire on the main body. +This movement he effected without serious loss, and joined the rest +of the force at the village of Wurgaom.</p> +<p>It was already crowded with camp followers, and the wildest +confusion reigned. The enemy's horse took advantage of this and +charged through the baggage, and the troops were unable to act with +effect, being mixed up with the crowd of fugitives. However, they +soon extricated themselves, drove off the enemy, and placed the +guns in commanding positions round the village. At four o'clock the +enemy retired.</p> +<p>Early the next morning the Mahratta artillery opened fire on the +village. Some of the Sepoy troops now became dispirited; but +Hartley's men stood firm, and the Mahrattas did not venture to +attack. The loss on the previous day was found to amount to three +hundred and fifty-two killed, wounded, or missing; including many +who had deserted during the night. Among the killed and wounded +were fifteen European officers, whose loss was a great misfortune +for, although the Sepoys fight well under their European officers, +they lose heart altogether if not so led.</p> +<p>Mr. Palmer, the secretary of the committee, was now sent to +negotiate with the enemy. The first demand made was the surrender +of Rugoba; which the committee would have agreed to, but Rugoba had +privately arranged to surrender to Scindia. The next demand was +that the committee should enter on a treaty, for the surrender of +the greater part of the territory of the Bombay Government, +together with the revenue of Broach and Surat. These terms were so +hard that even the craven committee, who were entirely responsible +for the disaster, hesitated to accept them.</p> +<p>Cockburn was asked whether a retreat was wholly impracticable, +and he declared that it was so. Captain Hartley protested against +this opinion, and showed how a retreat could be managed. His +opinion was altogether overruled, and Mr. Holmes was sent with +powers to conclude the treaty--which, however, the committee never +intended to observe.</p> +<p>Scindia took the principal part in arranging the details, +superseding the authority of Nana Furnuwees, the Peishwa's +minister. Scindia's favour was purchased by a private promise to +bestow upon him the English share of Broach, besides a sum of +forty-one thousand rupees as presents to his servants.</p> +<p>For their share in this miserable business Mr. Carnac, Colonel +Egerton, and Colonel Cockburn were dismissed from the Company's +service; and Captain Hartley was promoted to the rank of lieutenant +colonel. The Governor of Bombay refused to ratify the treaty, on +the ground that the officials with the expedition had no power +whatever to enter into any arrangement, without the matter being +previously submitted to, and approved by, the Government. +Fortunately, at this moment a force that had been despatched from +Bengal, under Colonel Goddard, to support Rugoba was nearing the +scene of action; and that officer, learning the danger to which +Bombay was exposed, took the responsibility and, marching from +Hoosingabad, avoided a body of twenty-two thousand horse, which had +been despatched from Poona to cut him off, and reached Surat +without encountering any opposition.</p> +<p>This welcome reinforcement materially altered the situation, and +Bombay lay no longer at the mercy of the Mahrattas. There was now +Goddard's force, and the army that had fallen back from Poona and, +what was still more important, Scindia had by his secret convention +deserted the confederacy; and it was morally certain that neither +the Peishwa nor Holkar would send his forces against Bombay, +leaving to Scindia the power of grasping the supreme authority in +the Deccan during their absence.</p> +<p>In 1779 General Goddard, who was now in command at Bombay, +entered into negotiations with Nana Furnuwees. These were carried +on for some months; but were brought to a conclusion by Nana +declaring that the surrender of Salsette, and the person of Rugoba, +who was again a fugitive in Bombay, were preliminaries to any +treaty. Bombay received a reinforcement of a European regiment, a +battalion of Sepoys, and a hundred artillerymen, from Madras; but +before they arrived Goddard's force had captured Dubhoy, and a +treaty had been effected.</p> +<p>The town of Ahmedabad was to be handed over to our ally, Futteh +Sing; but it declined to surrender, and was taken by assault, the +storming party being commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Hartley.</p> +<p>Scindia had as usual changed sides, and was now operating in +conjunction with Nana; and he and Holkar, with twenty thousand +horse, marched to Baroda. Goddard advanced to give battle; but +Scindia, to gain time, opened negotiations.</p> +<p>Goddard, however, was not to be duped. The negotiations were +broken off, and he advanced against the Mahrattas. Their horse, as +usual, charged; but were driven back by the artillery fire, and +routed by a regiment of Bengal cavalry. Scindia, however, encamped +a short distance off but, when Goddard again advanced to the +attack, retired.</p> +<p>Goddard, however, was not to be drawn into pursuit. He captured +some small forts, and sent Colonel Hartley to relieve Kallan, which +was being besieged by the Mahrattas. Hartley surprised their camp, +pursued them for some miles, and killed a great number; while +Lieutenant Welsh, who had been sent forward to relieve Surat--which +was threatened by a large Mahratta force--defeated these, killed +upwards of a hundred, and captured their guns; while one of +Scindia's detachments, on the banks of the Nerbuddah, was routed by +a detachment of Bengal Sepoys under Major Forbes.</p> +<p>On the other side of India, great successes had been gained by a +Bengal force under the command of Captain Popham; who attacked and +routed a body of plundering Mahrattas, captured by assault the +strong fort of Lahar, and not only carried by surprise the fortress +of Gwalior, regarded by the natives as impregnable, but took it +without the loss of a single man.</p> +<p>In December, General Goddard laid siege to Bassein. He and +Hartley, whose force was covering the siege, were attacked on the +11th of that month by twenty thousand cavalry and infantry. These, +however, were defeated after making several desperate charges; and +on the following day another battle took place, in which the +Mahrattas were totally routed, and their general killed, after +which Bassein surrendered.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch2" id="Ch2">Chapter 2</a>: A Strange Bringing +Up.</h2> +<p>The war went on during the following year, but in 1782 peace was +concluded. In 1784, the Mahrattas joined the Nizam and the British +in an alliance, having for its object the overthrow of Mysore; +which state, first under Hyder Ali, and afterwards under his son +Tippoo, was a source of danger to all the allies.</p> +<p>In the meantime Harry Lindsay, who was now called Puntojee, had +been living quietly on the farm of Ramdass; and no suspicion +whatever had been excited in the minds of the neighbours, or of any +of the people of Jooneer, that he was aught but what he seemed--the +son of Soyera. Once a week he was re-stained; and even his +playmates, the two sons of Ramdass, believed that he was, like +themselves, a young Mahratta. They knew that, sometimes, their aunt +talked to the child for hours in a strange language; but she led +them to believe it was the dialect of Bombay, which she thought it +might be useful for him to learn.</p> +<p>The child was shrewd and intelligent, and strictly obeyed +Soyera's instructions never, on any account, to talk in that +language with her except when they were alone; for she said that, +if he did so, some great misfortune would happen to him.</p> +<p>Thus, at six, he was able to speak English and Mahratta with +equal facility. As soon as his hair began to grow, it had also been +dyed; for its colour was fair, and would at once have excited +attention. He was a sturdy boy, and had never known a day's +illness.</p> +<p>Four more years passed, and Soyera then revealed to him the fact +that she was not, as he supposed, his mother, but that he was of +English parents; and related to him the manner in which they had +come by their death, and how she had saved him.</p> +<p>"The language which you are speaking," she said, "is English. I +spoke truly, when I said it was the language in use in Bombay; for +it is the tongue of the white men there. Now you will understand +why I wanted you not to speak in it, to anyone but myself; and why +I have stained your skin, once a week. At present we are at peace +with the English; but there may be war again, at any time, and in +that case were it known that you are white, your life would not be +safe for a moment; or you might be thrown into some dungeon, where +you would perish miserably."</p> +<p>She then explained to him why she had not attempted to take him +down to Bombay, and restore him to his countrymen. She had always +hoped the time would come when she could do so but, until he grew +up to manhood, it was necessary that he should stay with her; for, +being without friends in Bombay he would, as a boy, be unable to +earn his living.</p> +<p>The boy was greatly affected at the news. There were things that +he had never been able to understand; especially why Soyera should +consider it necessary to wash him with dye so often, when neither +his cousins nor the other children of his acquaintance were so +treated--as far as he knew, for as he had been strictly charged +never to speak of the process, which he considered an infliction, +he had never asked questions of others. He had never, therefore, +for a moment suspected that he was not like those around him. He +knew that he was stronger than other boys of his own age; more fond +of exercise, and leader in all their games; but he had accepted +this as a natural accident. The fact that he belonged to the race +that were masters of southern India, and had conquered and slain +the Nabob of Bengal, was a gratification to him but, at present, +the thought that he might some day have to join them, and leave all +those he loved behind, far overpowered this feeling.</p> +<p>"I shall never become English, if you do not go with me," he +said. "You saved my life, and have been a mother to me. Why should +I go away from your side, to people that I know nothing of, whose +ways would be all strange to me?"</p> +<p>"It is right that you should do so, Puntojee--I will not call +you by your proper name, Harry Lindsay, lest it should slip out +before others. Your life should be spent among your own people; +who, I think, will some day rule over all India. They are a great +people, with learning of many things unknown here, from whom I +always received the greatest kindness. They are not, like the +Mahrattas, always quarrelling among themselves; they are not +deceitful, and they are honourable. You should be proud to belong +to them, and I have no doubt some day you will be so; though at +present it is natural that, knowing no place but this, you should +not like the thought of leaving."</p> +<p>Harry Lindsay, whose spirits had hitherto been almost +inexhaustible, and who had never been happy when sitting quiet, was +greatly impressed with what he had heard and, for some time, he +withdrew himself almost entirely from the sports of his friends, +hiding himself in the groves from their importunities, and thinking +over the strange position in which he was placed.</p> +<p>Soyera at last remonstrated with him.</p> +<p>"If I had thought you would take this matter to heart, Puntojee, +I should not have told you about it. I did so because I thought you +could scarcely be stained, much longer, without demanding the +reason for what must have seemed so strange a thing.</p> +<p>"I do not want you to withdraw yourself from your playmates, or +to cease from your games. Your doing so will, if it continues, +excite talk. Your friends will think that a spell has fallen upon +you, and will shun you. I want you to grow up such as your father +was--strong and brave, and skilful in arms--and to do this you must +be alert and active. It may well be that you should not join your +countrymen until you are able to play the part of a man, which will +not be for ten years yet; but you know that my cousin Sufder has +promised that, as soon as you are able to carry arms, he will +procure a post for you under Scindia.</p> +<p>"There you will learn much, and see something of the world +whereas, if you remain here, you would grow up like other +cultivators, and would make but a bad impression among your +countrymen, when you join them. Sufder himself has promised to +teach you the use of arms and, as all say he is very skilful, you +could have no better master.</p> +<p>"At any rate, I wish you to resume your former habits, to +exercise your body in every way, so that you may grow up so strong +and active that, when you join your countrymen, they will feel you +are well worthy of them. They think much of such things, and it is +by their love for exercise and sport that they so harden their +frames that, in battle, our bravest peoples cannot stand against +them."</p> +<p>"But the Mahrattas are strong, mother?"</p> +<p>"Yes, they can stand great fatigues; living, as they do, so +constantly on horseback but, like all the people of India, they are +not fond of exercise, save when at war. That is the difference +between us and the English. These will get up at daybreak, go for +long rides, hunt the wild boar or the tigers in the jungles of the +Concan, or the bears among the Ghauts. Exercise to them is a +pleasure; and we in the service of the English have often wondered +at the way in which they willingly endure fatigues, when they might +pass their time sitting quietly in their verandahs. But I came to +understand that it was to this love of theirs, for outdoor +exercise, that they owed their strength and the firmness of their +courage. None can say that the Mahrattas are not brave but, +although they will charge gallantly, they soon disperse if the day +goes against them.</p> +<p>"So also with the soldiers of Tippoo. They overran Arcot and +threatened Madras; Tanjore and the Carnatic were all in their +hands; and yet the English never lost their firmness and, little by +little, drove Tippoo's troops from the lands they had conquered; +and it may be that, ere long, Tippoo will be a fugitive, and his +dominions divided among those whom he has provoked.</p> +<p>"Is it not wonderful that, while not very many years ago the +Whites were merely a handful, living on sufferance in Calcutta, +Madras, and Bombay, they are now masters of southern India and half +of Bengal; and even venture to engage a great empire like that of +the Mahrattas, stretching from the sea on the west to Delhi, and +holding the mastery over all central India? There must be something +extraordinary about these men. Why, you would scarce believe it, +but I have seen often, and wondered always; when they have an +entertainment, instead of sitting quietly 'and having dancing girls +to posture for their amusement, they dance themselves with their +women--not a mere movement of the body and hands, such as you see +among our dancers, but violent dancing, exhausting themselves till +the perspiration streams from their faces--and this both men and +women regard as amusement; so, Puntojee, if you are to take your +place among your countrymen again, you must accustom yourself to +fatigues, and strengthen your body in every way; or you will be +regarded with contempt as one who, although of their blood, has +grown degenerate and unworthy of them."</p> +<p>"I will do so," the boy said. "You shall not complain of me, +again. Hitherto I have played for amusement, and because I liked to +exercise my limbs, and to show the others that I could run faster +and was stronger than they were; but in future I shall have a +motive in doing so, and will strive to be worthy of my father."</p> +<p>From that time, Harry Lindsay devoted himself to exercises. He +learnt from Sufder, when he visited his native town, and from old +soldiers, when he was away, to use a sword and dagger, to hurl a +light spear accurately, to shoot straight with a musket, that +Sufder had picked up on the field of battle at Karlee, and also +with the pistol. He rose at daybreak, and walked for miles before +coming in to his morning meal; and exercised the muscles of his +arms, not only by the use of the sword, but by holding heavy stones +at arm's length.</p> +<p>Soyera, although still retaining her own religion, had carefully +instructed him in that of the English; with which she had, during +her service, become fully acquainted.</p> +<p>"I am only a servant, an ignorant woman, and it is not for me to +decide which religion is the best, and I have never thought of +giving up that of my people; but the religion of the Christians is +much simpler than ours. They believe in one God, only; and in his +Son who, like Buddha, was a great saint, and went about doing good. +I will tell you all I know of Him, for my mistress frequently spoke +to me of Him; and hoped, I think, that in time I should accept Him, +as she did. When you join your people, it is as necessary that you +should be of their religion, as of their race;" and so, in time, +Harry learned at least the elements of Christianity.</p> +<p>As usual he had been, at the age of six, marked, like Soyera, +with three perpendicular lines on the forehead--the sign of the +worshippers of Vishnu.</p> +<p>"You are twelve years old now, Harry," Soyera said to the boy, +one day. "Now I must do what I have concluded, after a talk with +Ramdass and Sufder, is the best thing for you. We have agreed that +it will be better that you should not join your countrymen, and +claim to be the son of Major Lindsay, until you are a man. I do not +know what they would do with you. They might send you back to +England, but I cannot say what would become of you there; but we +have agreed that, when you do join them, you must be like other +young English gentlemen, and not be looked down upon as one who, +though he has a white skin, is but a Mahratta peasant.</p> +<p>"In the first place, you must learn to speak English."</p> +<p>"But I do speak English!" Harry said, in surprise.</p> +<p>"Yes, such English as I do; but that is not as the white sahibs +speak it. We who have learned it speak the right word, but not in +the right way. I have seen young white ladies, when they first came +out here, and came to the house of your mother, sometimes smile and +scarcely understand what I said to them. It is not like that that +you must talk English--good enough for an ayah, not good enough for +a sahib--so we have decided, Sufder, Ramdass and I, that you must +go down to Bombay, and learn to talk proper English.</p> +<p>"We have thought much how this shall be done, and have settled +that our thinking, here, is no good. I must wait till I get to +Bombay, where I can get advice from people I know."</p> +<p>"Will you stay there with me, Soyera?"</p> +<p>"I cannot say what will be best," she answered, gravely; "I must +wait till I get there. Ramdass will go down with me. It is a good +time for him to go. The harvest work is done, he can be spared for +a month. He would like to go. He has never seen Bombay. We shall go +in the wagon."</p> +<p>The distance from Jooneer to Bombay was but about eighty miles, +and the journey was performed in five days, and Ramdass took down a +light load of maize, whose sale would pay the expenses of their +journey. Soyera rode and slept on the maize, except in two +villages, where she was able to procure a lodging for the night. +Ramdass and Harry walked by the bullocks, and slept at night by the +roadside, wrapped in their blankets.</p> +<p>On arriving at Bombay they put up at a khan, in the native town +and, the next morning, leaving Ramdass and Harry to wander about +and look at the wonders of the city, Soyera went to the shop of a +Parsee merchant, who was in the habit of supplying the canteen of +the troops, contracted for supplies of forage and other matters, +and carried on the business of a native banker. She had often been +to his place with Mrs. Lindsay; and had, from the time that she +entered her service, deposited her savings with him. She had, in +the first place, asked her master to keep them for her; but he had +advised her to go to Jeemajee.</p> +<p>The Parsee was, himself, in his shop. She went up to him.</p> +<p>"You do not remember me, sahib?" she said. "I was the ayah of +Major Lindsay. I was often here with the mem-sahib."</p> +<p>"I remember you, now," he said. "I do not often forget those I +have known. Yes; your master and mistress were killed, at their +little camp on the Concan. Nothing was heard of you, if I remember +rightly. I have some money of yours in my hands. Have you the +receipts?"</p> +<p>"I have them, sahib; but it is not for that that I come to see +you. I wish to ask your advice on a private matter."</p> +<p>The Parsee looked a little surprised.</p> +<p>"Come in here with me," he said, leading the way to his private +room, behind the shop.</p> +<p>"Now, what is it?" he asked, as he closed the door behind +them.</p> +<p>"It was believed, sahib, that Major Lindsay's infant boy was +killed, at that time, like all others in the camp. It was not so. I +saved him. It is about him that I want to speak to you."</p> +<p>The Parsee thought for a moment.</p> +<p>"Yes, there was a child. Its body was not found, and was +supposed to have been eaten by the jackals. Is it alive still?"</p> +<p>"Yes, sahib, I have brought him up as my own. His skin has been +always stained; and none but my brother--with whom I live--his +wife, and one other, know that he is English. I love him as my own +child. I have taught him English, as I speak it; but I want him, in +time, to be an English sahib, and for that he must learn proper +English."</p> +<p>"But why have you not brought him down here?" the Parsee +said.</p> +<p>"Who would have looked after him, and cared for him, sahib, as +I, his nurse, have done? Who could have taken him? What would have +become of him? I am a poor woman, and do not know how these things +would be. I said to myself:</p> +<p>"'It will be better that he should live with me, till he is old +enough to go down as a young man, and say to the Governor:</p> +<p>"'"I am the son of Major Lindsay. I can talk Mahratti like a +native. I can ride and use my sword. I can speak English well. I +can be useful."</p> +<p>"'Then, perhaps for his father's sake, the Governor will +say:</p> +<p>"'"I will make you an officer. If there are troubles in the +Deccan, you will be more useful than those sahibs who do not know +the language."'</p> +<p>"I can do all that for him, but I cannot teach him to speak as +English sahibs speak; and that is why I have come to you. You have +twelve hundred rupees of mine, in your hands; for I laid out +nothing while I was in the sahib's service, and my mistress was +very kind, and often gave me presents. My brother, Ramdass, had +five hundred rupees saved; and this he has given to me, for he, +too, loves the boy. Thus there are seventeen hundred rupees, and +this I would pay for him to be, for two years, with someone where +he would learn to speak English as sahibs do, so that none can say +this white boy is not English.</p> +<p>"Then he will go back, for two or three years, to Jooneer. He +will learn to use his arms, and to ride, and to be a man, until he +is of an age to come down and say:</p> +<p>"'I am the son of Major Lindsay.'"</p> +<p>"But if you were to tell this, at once," the Parsee said, "they +would doubtless send him home, to England, to be educated."</p> +<p>"And what would he do there, sahib? He would have no friends, +none to care for him; and while his Mahratti tongue would be of +great service to him, here, it would be useless to him in his own +country.</p> +<p>"Do not say that my plan cannot be carried out, sahib. For +twelve years I have thought it over. I have taught him all that I +could, so far; and convinced myself that it would be the best. The +boy loves me, and is happy: he would be miserable among strangers, +who would laugh at his English, and would make him unhappy."</p> +<p>Jeemajee sat for some time in thought.</p> +<p>"I am not sure that your plan is not the best," he said, "and +after saving his life, and caring for him, at the risk of your own, +for all these years, you have assuredly a better right than any +other to say what shall be done now. I will think over what you +have asked of me. It is not very easy to find just such a home as +you want, but I should consider the sum you offer is sufficient to +induce many Englishmen living here to take him; but it is not +everyone from whom he would learn English, as you would wish him to +do, or who could teach him the manners of white officers.</p> +<p>"Come to me tomorrow evening, but you must not expect that I +shall be able to answer you then. I must think it over, and make +enquiries."</p> +<p>It was three days, indeed, before anything came of Soyera's +visits to the Parsee trader; then he said:</p> +<p>"I think that I have found out just the place of which you are +in search. I spoke to a friend yesterday, and he at once mentioned +one whom I wonder I had not thought of, at once. Some years ago a +cadet, who came out here with a young wife, died shortly after his +arrival. As he had only been four years in the service, the pension +of his wife was but a small one. She did not go back to England, as +widows generally do. I know not why, except that I once heard two +officers speaking of her. They said that they believed her family +had quarrelled with her, for her marriage, and that she was too +proud to go back again. She had two girls, who must be about the +age of this boy. Her pension was not sufficient for her to live +upon comfortably, and she opened a little school for the children +of officers here.</p> +<p>"There are not many, you know, for they are generally sent home +to England, when they are quite young. But she has always had four +or five, sometimes eight or ten. They come to her every morning, +and go home in the middle of the day, and she sees no more of +them.</p> +<p>"After I had heard this, I went to her. I supply her with many +things, for she gets her books and other things from me. I said to +her:</p> +<p>"'I have a white boy whose father and mother are dead. He is +twelve years old. There are reasons why I cannot tell you who they +were, but I can say that the boy's father was an English officer. +He has been brought up by natives, and speaks English in the way +that natives speak it. Those who have brought him up desire that he +should learn to talk English well, and learn to have good manners, +so that some day, when he goes to England, people should not say of +him:</p> +<p>"'"This is not an English gentleman, or he would not speak like +that."'</p> +<p>"I said that I had interested myself in the matter, and knew +that it was right, and had come to her to ask her if she would take +him into her house, which was very comfortable and well furnished, +and everything as it should be.</p> +<p>"She asked questions. I told her enough to interest her; and +said that, when the time came, it was hoped that he would be able +to obtain employment under the Government--perhaps in the army, as +his father had been. I said that those who brought him up were +ready to make great sacrifices for his sake, but that they could +not pay for him for more than two years; and that, as the boy knew +so much English, they hoped this would be enough. I asked how much, +if she agreed to take him, she would charge. She said that she +would think it over; and would call here, tomorrow, and tell me +whether she would take him.</p> +<p>"She will be here at three. I think you had better come at that +hour. I am sure that she would like to speak to you. I do not see +why you should not say that you had been his ayah, and had saved +his life, and brought him up. Many officers have been killed and, +indeed, I do not see why you should not tell her the whole story. +It will interest her more in the boy. But of course, before you +tell her, you must ask her to promise not to repeat it."</p> +<p>Soyera went on the following day. She found that Jeemajee was +already, with a lady, in his private room. She waited until the +door was opened, and the merchant beckoned her in.</p> +<p>"This is the woman who has brought the child up, Mrs. Sankey," +he said. "As I have told you, she was his ayah, and has behaved +most nobly."</p> +<p>Turning to Soyera, he said:</p> +<p>"Naturally Mrs. Sankey asked why you had not come forward +before. I told her your reasons, and she thinks that, perhaps, you +have acted for the best for him. At any rate, she has consented to +take the boy for two years; and I am to pay her, for you, the sum +that you have named."</p> +<p>In reality, Mrs. Sankey asked a thousand rupees a year; but the +Parsee, with the generosity for which his race is distinguished, +had agreed to pay the extra three hundred rupees himself.</p> +<p>"Before it is quite settled," Mrs. Sankey said, "I should like +to see the boy. As Mr. Jeemajee has told you, I have two daughters +about the same age. I must, therefore, be guided in my decision by +my impression of him."</p> +<p>"I will bring him to see you, in three or four days," Soyera +said. "His stain is already faded a good deal, and I shall be able +to get it off, by that time. I have to get English clothes for +him.</p> +<p>"I am greatly obliged to you for saying that you will take him, +if he pleases you. That I think he will do. I have taught him +manners, as well as I could. He is as anxious as I am to improve +himself; and will, I am sure, give you no more trouble than he can +help."</p> +<p>"I will see that he is properly clothed, Mrs. Sankey," Jeemajee +remarked. "I knew his father, and have a great interest in +him."</p> +<p>Mrs. Sankey chatted for some little time to Soyera; gave her her +card, with her address on Malabar Hill; and then left.</p> +<p>Soyera began to thank the Parsee for his introduction, but he +said:</p> +<p>"It was a little thing to do and, as I knew his father, it was +only right that I should help, as far as I could. Will you bring +me, tomorrow morning, the measurement of the boy's height, size +around his shoulders and waist, the lengths of his arms and legs? +You need trouble yourself no further about it. I shall take that +matter upon myself. Come, three days later, for his clothes.</p> +<p>"Goodbye! I have other matters to see about," and, without +waiting for any thanks from Soyera, he at once went into his shop, +and began to talk to his assistant.</p> +<p>Many were the scrubbings Harry had to undergo, during the next +few days; and his hair and face were nearly restored to their +proper colour when Soyera returned, one evening, with a coolie +carrying a trunk of some size. It contained the whole outfit for a +boy: one dark suit, and four of white nankeen; with a stock of +shirts, underclothing, and shoes. Soyera showed Harry how these +garments, with which he was wholly unacquainted, should be put +on.</p> +<p>"They fit you capitally," she said, when she surveyed him. "And +you look like a little English sahib."</p> +<p>"They feel very tight and uncomfortable," he said.</p> +<p>"They are sure to do so, at first; but you will soon get over +that. Now, Ramdass will take you out for a walk for two or three +hours, so that you can get accustomed to them. I should not like +you to look awkward, when you go with me to Mrs. Sankey's, +tomorrow."</p> +<p>The interview next day was altogether satisfactory. The carriage +and bearing of the natives of India is easier, and more graceful, +than that of Europeans; and the knowledge Harry had possessed, for +some years, that he belonged to a conquering race, the injunctions +of Soyera, his strength and activity, and his unquestioned +leadership among the boys with whom he played, had given something +of confidence to his manner. Mrs. Sankey was greatly taken with +him, and he at once became an inmate of her house.</p> +<p>He remained there for two years, and became so great a favourite +that Mrs. Sankey insisted on his staying with her, without charge, +for three or four months after the time for which she had received +payment for him. He had worked hard and earnestly, and now spoke +English as well and accurately as any English boy of his own age. +He had, after being there a year, made the acquaintance of several +boys of his own age, the sons of officers or officials. They knew +him only as the orphan son of an English gentleman, in Government +employ; and he was often asked to the houses of their parents, and +none suspected that he had been brought up among natives.</p> +<p>At the end of his term, Sufder came down for him. Jeemajee, who +had remained his steady friend, arranged that he should go to his +house, and there resume his native dress and stain. In this garb he +felt even stranger and more uncomfortable than he had done, when he +first put on European clothes; but this was not long in wearing off +and, by the time he reached Jooneer, he was again at home in it. He +took with him, at Mrs. Sankey's suggestion, a number of English +books, by authors she recommended; so that he could, by reading and +learning some of them by heart, retain his knowledge of the +language.</p> +<p>For the next three months he spent his whole time in practising +with sword, pistol, and gun; under the tuition of an old soldier in +Jooneer, who had been a noted swordsman in his time. He was already +far stronger than the sons of Ramdass, although these were now +young men. Anxious to, at once, exercise his muscles and gain in +skill, he now attached himself to a famous shikaree who, seeing the +boy's strength and courage, took him as an assistant when he went +on excursions among the hills. Here Harry learned to dig pits for +the capture of tigers; to smear leaves with a sticky substance, +obtained from a plant resembling mistletoe, so that when a tiger or +bear trod upon them and, finding them sticking to his feet, paused +and rubbed these on his head, until he became blinded and +bewildered with a mass of sticky foliage, a well-placed shot would +stretch him dead.</p> +<a id="PicA" name="PicA"></a> +<center><img src="images/a.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: For a year he worked with the shikaree." /></center> +<p>For a year he worked with the shikaree. Sometimes they hunted +simply for the value of the skins; but more often they were sent +for by villagers, who were suffering from the depredations of +tigers or leopards, and who were willing to pay for having them +killed. Harry Lindsay acquired quite a reputation in Jooneer and +the surrounding country, for the shikaree spoke freely of his +bravery, intelligence, and skill with his arms. His width of +shoulders and the strength of his muscles caused him to be regarded +as a prodigy; and it was generally considered that, when he grew +up, he would become a great fighter, and attain wide renown as a +leader of bands in the service of Holkar, or the Peishwa.</p> +<p>When he was sixteen, Sufder, who had watched his progress with +great approval, said to him:</p> +<p>"You are scarce a man in years yet, Puntojee; but you are +strong, skilful with your weapons, and far more of a man than many +ten years older than yourself. It is time that you should see +something of war. Since the death of Scindia, a few months back; +and the succession of his nephew Doulut, who is about your own age; +things have become even more unsettled than before. Scindia was a +great man and, although at times worsted by his rivals, always +managed to repair his fortunes and to add to his power; but whether +the young Scindia will keep the wide territory that his uncle won +is doubtful. Holkar, although at times he and Scindia united, as +when the English marched against Poona, has been his rival and +enemy.</p> +<p>"The Peishwa has sometimes been in alliance with one of these +great princes, sometimes with the other. His minister, Nana +Furnuwees, is a man of commanding talent. Had it not been for him, +it is probable that Scindia and Holkar would long since have become +altogether independent; but he has always contrived to play one off +against the other and, by securing the services of the secondary +chiefs, such as the Rajah of Nagpore and the Rajah of Kolapoore, to +hold the balance of power; but he is an old man, and at his death +there is no saying how things will go.</p> +<p>"Matters are complicated, too, by the fact that Scindia has now +in his service sixteen battalions of drilled infantry, commanded by +French officers; and these have proved so valuable, in the various +sieges he has undertaken, that Holkar has been obliged to imitate +his example. There are many who think that the introduction of +infantry will, in the end, prove disastrous to the power of the +Mahrattas; whose strength has hitherto lain in their cavalry, which +could perform long journeys, strike a blow and be off again, and so +were more than a match for the infantry of other Indian princes. +But with infantry all this will be altered, for the marches must be +no longer or faster than they can journey. The order of battles, +too, will be changed altogether; and we shall depend more upon +foot, while our horse, until now almost invincible, will become of +secondary importance.</p> +<p>"However, that is not the question, at present. The first thing +to be considered is, to which of the three great leaders you are to +attach yourself. As you know, I was for many years in Scindia's +service; but at his death the position was changed. Scindia knew +that I was active and capable; had he lived, I should soon have +gained much promotion. However, his chief minister took a dislike +to me; and I felt that, now the Maharajah was gone, Doulut would be +easily swayed by the counsels of those around him; and that instead +of promotion I should be more likely to lose my command, and +perhaps be put out of the way. Therefore I left Doulut's service, +and have entered that of the young Peishwa who, at the advice of +Nana Furnuwees, has given me the command of a troop of a hundred +men.</p> +<p>"Years ago I gained Nana's goodwill, by apprising him of the +hostile intentions of the Rajah of Nagpore; when he promised me +that, should I at any time leave Scindia's service, he would give +me as good a position as I held there in that of the Peishwa. The +young prince is but twenty-one, and I will ask Nana to present you +to him as one who, in time, will become a valuable officer; and it +is likely that Mahdoo Rao will receive you well when he hears that, +though so young, you have gained great credit as a slayer of wild +beasts; and that, as he will see for himself, you promise to grow +into a strong man, and a brave soldier.</p> +<p>"Nana Furnuwees is a man who, by his conciliating manner, gains +the confidence of all who come under his influence; and it is +wholly due to him that the authority of the Peishwa has not been +entirely overthrown by Scindia and Holkar. He is a reader of men's +minds, and has always surrounded himself with friends of +discernment and courage; and I think you would be likely, if you +remained in the Peishwa's service, to rise to a very much higher +rank than I should ever do, being myself but a rough soldier with a +heavy hand.</p> +<p>"Holkar, at present, is fast becoming altogether imbecile. He is +worn out both in mind and body, and I should not advise anybody to +join him. Therefore the choice rests between Doulut Rao Scindia and +the Peishwa; as far as I can see, there is an equal chance of your +seeing service with either."</p> +<p>"I can choose without hesitation," Harry said. "Had you still +been in the army of Scindia, I would have joined it, too; but as +you have now entered that of the Peishwa, who is the lawful ruler +of the Mahrattas, though overshadowed by Scindia and Holkar, I +should certainly choose his service.</p> +<p>"In any case, I would rather be with you. You have taught me the +use of arms, and to you I owe it that I was not killed, when an +infant; therefore I would assuredly rather fight under your orders, +than take service with Holkar or Scindia.</p> +<p>"As to their quarrels, I know nothing. Ramdass has often told me +as much as he knew of these matters, but it all seemed to me to be +confusion; and the only thing I could understand was that they were +always intriguing against each other, instead of putting all their +forces in the field, and fighting it out fairly, and so deciding +who was to be the chief lord of the Mahrattas."</p> +<p>"Although but a soldier, Puntojee, I cannot but see that this +constant antagonism, between the three principal leaders of the +Mahrattas, is unfortunate in the last degree. We are wasting the +strength that, if properly employed, might bring all India into +subjection and, when trouble really comes, we shall be a divided +people, instead of acting under one head and with one mind. +However, it is not for us soldiers to meddle with these things; but +to do our duty to the chief under whom we serve.</p> +<p>"Well, if such be your choice, I will present you to Nana +Furnuwees. I am glad that you have chosen that service for, in the +first place, being young, he may take a liking to you, and you may +obtain rapid promotion; and still more, because I should prefer to +have you with me."</p> +<p>Hitherto, Harry had worn only the scanty clothing in use by the +peasantry, and the small cultivators; but Sufder now bought him +clothes such as were worn by youths of a superior class. Soyera had +offered no objection to his departure and, indeed, Sufder had +spoken to her on the subject, before he had broached it to +Harry.</p> +<p>"'Tis hard upon me to give you up," she said to the lad; "but I +have always known that it must be so, and indeed, for the last year +I have seen little of you. The change will be good for you. You +will learn the manner of war, and take an interest in the intrigues +and troubles that are constantly going on, and of which we hear +little.</p> +<p>"When you rejoin your countrymen, a few years hence, I shall go +with you. You need my testimony, to show that you are the son of +Major Lindsay; and I can be useful to you, in managing your +household. But at present it is best that I should stay here. A +young soldier would not care to have his mother looking after him, +and it is for your good that you should go your own way; and +besides, you will have the counsels of Sufder to aid you. I should +be out of place and, for the present, I am happy here with my good +brother and sister-in-law, the latter of whom would miss me sorely. +Moreover, Poona is but two days' ride from here, and you will no +doubt be able sometimes to come over and see us.</p> +<p>"I have done what little I could for you. You are now old enough +to make your own way. The bird that has taught its nestling to fly +does not try to keep it in the nest, when it is once able to take +care of itself."</p> +<p>"I can never be sufficiently grateful, for all that you have +done for me," Harry said earnestly. "You have been more than a +mother to me and, wherever I go, I shall not be happy unless you +are with me, though I see it is best, this time, that I should go +alone; but assuredly, when I join my people, and have a home of my +own, it would not seem like a home to me if you did not share +it."</p> +<p>Two days later, Harry mounted a horse that Ramdass had given +him, and started with Sufder for Poona. On arriving there they rode +to the little camp, half a mile out of the town, where Sufder's +troop was stationed.</p> +<p>"You don't carry your tents with you, when you are on service in +the field?"</p> +<p>"Not when on an expedition where haste is needed; for we should +make but poor progress, if we were hampered by luggage. When on a +distant expedition, we take tents.</p> +<p>"This is a standing camp, and there are a score like it round +the town. They always remain in the same position; sometimes one +troop occupies them, sometimes another. When we go on an +expedition, we leave them; when we come back, if they are still +unoccupied, we again take possession. If they have been allotted to +another troop, a vacant one is found for us.</p> +<p>"Only one regiment of horse and two of foot are in the city, +where they have lines of huts. We differ from the rest of the army, +being always on service; the others are only called out when there +is occasion for them, each under its own chief and, in case of +necessity, the Peishwa can put thirty thousand horsemen in the +field, besides those of the rajahs in alliance with him."</p> +<p>The next morning Sufder, in his best attire, went with Harry +into the city; the latter for the first time carrying a sword, +dagger and pistols in his cummerbund, or sash. Without being +questioned, they entered the chamber were Nana was giving audience +to all who waited upon him on business.</p> +<p>Sufder took his place at the lower end of the chamber, moving +forward as one after another applicant was disposed of until, at +length, his turn arrived. The minister, who knew that he was a +brave soldier, who had enjoyed the confidence of the late Scindia, +acknowledged his deep salutation with a friendly nod.</p> +<p>"What can I do for you, Sufder?"</p> +<p>"I desire nothing, your excellency, save that I may be permitted +to present to you one of my family: the son of a relation of mine +who, although still young, I may venture to recommend to you as one +possessing great courage and intelligence. I have myself given him +lessons in the use of his arms; and he has had other instructors, +and done credit to them. For the past year he has been working with +a famous shikaree, and has killed many tigers that were a scourge +to the villages near the Ghauts, together with many bears and +leopards; and his master reported that his fearlessness was great, +and that as a marksman his skill was equal to his own. He was most +unwilling that he should leave him, but I considered it was time +for him to enter the army; in which, I believe, he will soon +distinguish himself."</p> +<p>"How old is he?" the minister asked.</p> +<p>"He is as yet but sixteen but, as your highness may see, he is +as strong as most men, having devoted himself to exercises of all +sorts, since he was a child."</p> +<p>"He is indeed cast in a strong mould, and his face pleases +me.</p> +<p>"And so, you would enter the service of His Highness, the +Peishwa?"</p> +<p>"That is my desire, your excellency."</p> +<p>"You are young to serve as an officer and, for the present, you +had best remain with Sufder's troop. In the meantime, I will see +what suitable post can be found for you."</p> +<p>With an expression of thanks, Sufder and Harry left the audience +hall.</p> +<p>"It is a good beginning, Puntojee," the soldier said, as they +left the minister's palace. "Nana Furnuwees was evidently pleased +with you, and I think he will give you special employment. At the +same time, serving one master here is not without its danger--Nana +especially, powerful as he is, has enemies as powerful; for he has +always stood in the way of the ambition of Scindia."</p> +<p>That evening an officer brought, from Nana, an order conferring +upon Harry the appointment of an assistant officer in Sufder's +troop, with the usual pay and allowances and, three days later, an +order came for him to attend the audience of the minister. On +arrival, he was told by the officer of the chamber that he was not +to present himself at public audience, but that Nana would speak to +him privately. He was therefore taken to an inner chamber where, an +hour later, Nana joined him.</p> +<p>"I think by your face, Puntojee, that you can be trusted; and I +have decided to place you in the service of His Highness, the +Peishwa. What position you will hold there must depend upon +yourself, and him. I shall simply recommend you as one of whom I +have heard much good. It would be as well for you not to mention +your age; but let him suppose that, as you look, you are about the +same age as himself. He is amiable and kindly, and your position +will be a pleasant one.</p> +<p>"I am anxious to prevent evil advisers from obtaining influence +over him. He is young and unsuspicious, and much harm might thus +come to the state. It is, then, for the general interest that he +should be surrounded by those whom I can trust; so that, if any +plotters are endeavouring to poison his mind, their plans may be +thwarted. I have of course, officers about his person who are +thoroughly trustworthy; but these are much older than himself, and +he chafes somewhat at what he wrongly considers his tutelage. But +indeed, as he is but twenty-one, and wholly unversed in matters of +state, it is needful that the management of affairs should rest in +the hands of those who have long controlled it.</p> +<p>"Scindia would be the first to take advantage of any imprudence. +He is already, by far, the most powerful of the Mahratta princes. +His possessions are of immense extent; he holds the emperor at +Delhi in the palm of his hand; he can put one hundred thousand +horse into the field, and has large numbers of infantry, including +sixteen battalions drilled by French officers, and commanded by de +Boigne; and although Doulut Rao is but twenty, and as yet we know +but little of his disposition, he is of course surrounded by the +advisers of his uncle, and may be expected to pursue the same +policy. His uncle gained great ascendency over the Peishwa, and his +death was a fortunate circumstance. Still, it is certain that the +prince, until his powers are matured, will yield to the advice of +those to whom the conduct of affairs is entrusted.</p> +<p>"Now, I am going to the palace, and have requested a private +audience with Mahdoo Rao, and I will take you with me."</p> +<p>Followed by a train of officers, with whom Harry fell in, the +minister proceeded to the palace. His train remained in the public +hall, and Nana went into the Peishwa's private apartment. In a few +minutes, an official came in and called Puntojee; and Harry at once +followed him to an inner room, where the Peishwa and his minister +were alone. Harry bowed to the ground.</p> +<p>"This, Prince, is the young man of whom I have spoken to you. He +bears an excellent character for his skill in arms, and has killed +many tigers and other beasts. It was but the other day that you +complained that you had no one of your own age to whom you could +talk freely; and I have selected this young officer as one who, I +thought, would be agreeable to you."</p> +<p>"I thank you heartily, Nana. In truth, I sometimes need a +companion; and I think, by his face, that this officer will be an +agreeable one. To what post, think you, had I best appoint +him?"</p> +<p>"As he is a famous shikaree, I should say that it would be +suitable were you to make him director of the chase."</p> +<p>"But I never go hunting."</p> +<p>"That is true; but in time, when your occupations of state +lessen, you might do so," Nana said. "And indeed, even at present, +there is nothing to prevent your hunting sometimes in the royal +preserves, where there must be an abundance of game of all +sorts."</p> +<p>"So let it be, then," the Peishwa said. "In truth, I care not +for the killing of beasts, unless they do harm to the villagers. +But it is right that there should be someone to direct the men who +have charge of the preserves and, as an official, you will have the +right of entry here at all times, and will be frequently about my +person; and I will confer with you about other things, as well as +the chase. You will, of course, have an apartment assigned to +you.</p> +<p>"You will arrange about the emoluments, Nana."</p> +<p>"You had better go to my house, and wait for me there," Nana +said; and Harry, bowing deeply to the prince and his minister, left +the palace.</p> +<p>He did not deceive himself as to the reason for which Nana had +thus placed him in a position in which he was likely to be +frequently in the company of the young prince. He intended him to +act as a spy. This he was firmly determined not to do, in any +matter save in thwarting any designs Scindia might have. That was a +public duty.</p> +<p>By this time, he had learnt much of the events that were +passing. Ramdass and the other ryots of his acquaintance regarded +Nana Furnuwees as the guardian of the country. For many years, it +was his wisdom and firmness alone that had thwarted the designs of +Scindia, whose advent to supreme authority would have been regarded +as a grave misfortune, by all the cultivators of the Deccan. +Scindia's expenses in keeping up so great an army were enormous, +and the exactions of his tax gatherers ground to the dust the +cultivators and peasantry of his own wide dominions; and Harry was +therefore ready to give Nana a faithful support in all public +matters. He knew that the minister had many enemies, even among the +rajahs in the Peishwa's dominion, and in those round it; for they +regarded him, with reason, as a curb upon their private ambitions +and, for years, intrigues had been going on for his overthrow.</p> +<p>On the other hand, Harry was much pleased with Mahdoo Rao, who +was a most amiable and kindly young man. While determined, then, to +do all that he could in support of Nana; he decided that he would, +on no account, give him any report that would be unfavourable to +the Peishwa. His interview with the minister, on the return of the +latter, was a short one.</p> +<p>"Here," the latter said, "is a purse of five hundred rupees, +with which to obtain garments suitable for one in attendance on the +Peishwa. Your emolument will be two hundred rupees a month. I shall +issue orders to the men employed in the forests and preserves to +report to you; and have requested the chamberlain to allot an +apartment to you in the palace, and to tell off two servants to be +in attendance on you.</p> +<p>"You understand that your mission, as far as I am concerned, is +to give me early warning, if any of those favourable to +Scindia--you shall be furnished with a list of their names--are +endeavouring to obtain an undue influence over the prince; who is +of an altogether unsuspicious character, and would be likely to +fall an easy victim to bad counsels."</p> +<p>"You can depend upon my doing so," Harry said. "I have been +taught to regard Scindia as an enemy to the public peace, and shall +use all diligence in carrying out your excellency's orders."</p> +<p>And, leaving the minister, Harry went to Sufder and told him +what had happened.</p> +<p>"In truth, Puntojee, you were born under a lucky star. I never +dreamt that Nana Furnuwees would have thus introduced you to the +Peishwa. Now, lad, you have a fine career opened to you. It will +need caution but, as Scindia's ancestor was but a slipper bearer, +and rose to the highest rank and honour; so it is open to you to +win a great position, if you steer clear of the dangers that attend +all who play a part in public affairs. I foresee that you will +become a favourite with the prince, but remember to put your trust +in Nana. He is, at present, the greatest power in the land, and has +been so for many years but, unlike most who have attained such +authority, he is liked by the people, for he uses his power well, +and for the good of the state.</p> +<p>"You see, even now the young Peishwa is by no means secure on +the musnud. The adherents of Rugoba, who was undoubtedly the lawful +ruler of the Deccan, still live; and may one day raise the flag of +revolt, in favour of his sons Bajee Rao and Chimnajee Appa who, +with Amrud Rao, his adopted son, are all in close custody in the +hill fort of Sewneree, under two of Nana's officers.</p> +<p>"There is a general feeling of pity for these young men, even +among those who regard their imprisonment as necessary--for, were +they free, a civil war would assuredly break out again--and the +feeling is increased by the fact that Bajee Rao is a youth of +extraordinary accomplishments. He is graceful in person, with a +handsome countenance and a charming manner and, although but +nineteen, he is an excellent horseman, skilled in the use of the +bow, and considered to be the finest swordsman in the country. He +is deeply read in all our religious books and, in all the country, +there is no one of his age so learned.</p> +<p>"All these things, however, only add to the necessity for his +being kept in prison. A youth so gifted and, as many people +consider, the lawful heir to the throne, would speedily be joined +by all the enemies of Nana; and might not only drive the minister +into exile, but dethrone Mahdoo Rao. Such being the case, no one +can blame Nana for keeping them in confinement--at any rate, until +Mahdoo Rao has been master for some years, and has proved that he +is able to maintain his position.</p> +<p>"Now, lad, I will go into the town with you, and purchase +dresses fit for an official of the palace."</p> +<p>"I quite see that I have been most fortunate in obtaining such a +position, Sufder; but I own I should have preferred to remain with +you, and learn to do service as a soldier."</p> +<p>"That you may learn later on," Sufder said. "Having the +confidence of the Peishwa, you may soon obtain military rank, as +well as civil and, if war breaks out, may hold a position vastly +better than you could hope to attain to as the mere chief of a +troop."</p> +<p>"It seems very ridiculous, Sufder, that I should be thus put +forward, without any merit of my own; while you, who have fought in +many battles, are still only commander of your troop."</p> +<p>"I have no desire for more," Sufder replied. "I am a soldier, +and can do my duty as ordered, but I have no head for intrigues; +and I consider the risks of a battle are quite sufficient, without +those of being put out of the way for mixing myself up in +plots.</p> +<p>"Again, your rise is not altogether undeserved. You have, by +your exercises, attained the strength of manhood early; and your +experience as a tiger hunter has fitted you for the post for which +you are appointed, just as your diligence in exercise in arms will +be of good service to you, if you come to hold military command. +But you must be circumspect and, above all things, do not forget to +use the dye with which Soyera has furnished you. Hitherto your +white skin has done you no harm but, were it discovered here that +you are English, it would at once be imagined that you were a spy, +and little time would be given you to explain how matters +stand."</p> +<p>"I will certainly be careful as to that and, now that I am to +have a private apartment, I shall be able to apply the dye without +the fear of being interrupted, as might have been the case in +camp."</p> +<p>On the following day, Harry, having obtained clothes suitable to +his position, betook himself to the palace, where one of the +officers of the chamberlain conducted him to his apartment, and +assigned to him two men appointed to his service.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch3" id="Ch3">Chapter 3</a>: A Change In Affairs.</h2> +<p>Harry Lindsay's duties were little more than nominal. The +reports sent in to him, by those in charge of the royal preserves, +could scarcely be considered as satisfactory; as they stated that, +owing to the fact that for years there had been no hunting there, +the tigers had greatly increased in number, and had thinned down +the stags and, indeed, in some cases had so destroyed other game +that they were driven to escape from the enclosures, and to ravage +the villages. But beyond receiving these reports, and riding over +occasionally to the preserves, Harry had little to do save to take +part in any court ceremonies and, when called upon to do so, to +accompany the Peishwa in his walks in the palace garden. He +therefore determined to learn to read and write in Mahratta and, +for two or three hours a day, a man of the weynsh, or mercantile +class, came in to teach him. So careful was Nana Furnuwees, in +preventing Scindia's adherents from approaching the prince, that +Harry had nothing whatever to report on this head.</p> +<p>One day, when Mahdoo Rao, who had taken a great liking to him, +was walking in the garden, chatting familiarly to him of his life +in the country, and his adventures with tigers and other wild +beasts, he said:</p> +<p>"Have you seen my cousin, Bajee Rao?"</p> +<p>"No, Your Highness, I have never seen him."</p> +<p>"You have heard of him, of course, and nothing but good."</p> +<p>"That is so, Prince. It seems that, both in sports and learning, +he is wonderfully well instructed."</p> +<p>"I should like to see him," the prince said. "I admire what I +have heard of him, greatly, and it is hard that he should be shut +up in prison; and yet he is scarcely more a prisoner than I +am."</p> +<p>Harry was struck with dismay.</p> +<p>"But Your Highness is in no way a prisoner!"</p> +<p>"I am not shut up in a fortress," the young prince said, "but I +am no more my own master than Bajee Rao is. Nana Furnuwees treats +me as if I were a child. He is, I know, devoted to me; but that +makes it no more pleasant. I can go where I like, but it is always +with my retinue. I cannot choose my own friends."</p> +<p>"Your Highness will forgive me, if I say that it is for your own +safety, and for the peace of the country that your minister watches +over you so jealously; and doubtless he thinks that, having been +the chief adviser to your family, for so many years, having guarded +it so successfully from those who would have lessened your +authority, for the present it is of the greatest importance that he +should continue to guide the state."</p> +<p>"I am, at least, very glad that he allows me a companion of my +own age, to whom I can talk freely."</p> +<p>"On all subjects, Your Highness, excepting state matters. Nana +presented me because I was ignorant of the court, and knew nothing +whatever of intrigues, and was not likely to take any part in them. +Therefore, Your Highness, I pray you but to speak upon ordinary +matters; be assured I am your devoted servant, but the courtiers +would grow suspicious, were you to talk of state matters with me. +These things speedily become known, and I should fall under Nana's +displeasure."</p> +<p>"Perhaps you are right," the Peishwa admitted, in a tone of +melancholy. "No doubt, whatever passes in this house is known to my +minister; and indeed, it is his duty to make himself so acquainted. +Still, I feel it hard that I should not have one friend to whom I +can speak."</p> +<p>"The time will come, Prince, when you will be able to do so and, +doubtless, there will be at hand those who will dare to have your +confidence."</p> +<p>The prince was silent but, after this, he abstained from any +remarks to Harry concerning the state. He had, indeed, for some +time been in correspondence with Bajee Rao, who had gained the +confidence of one of those appointed to look after him and, though +there was nothing save expressions of friendship on the part of +both princes, Nana was furious when he found out, from his spies, +what was going on.</p> +<p>The news came as a shock to the minister. Nana had been the +greatest enemy of the house of Rugoba; and the discovery of this +correspondence, and the friendship between the two young men, so +threatened his authority that, after ordering that Bajee Rao and +his brothers should be more strictly confined than before, he +visited the Peishwa and upbraided him bitterly for having entered +upon a friendship with the head of a party which had harassed his +family, and had brought innumerable troubles on the state. Then he +sent a message to Harry, bidding him to come, at once.</p> +<p>"How is it, Puntojee," he said sternly, "that you have +altogether failed to justify the faith I put in you, and have +already assisted Mahdoo Rao to enter into relations with my enemy, +Bajee Rao?"</p> +<p>Harry was thunderstruck at this sudden attack.</p> +<p>"My lord, you must have been misinformed. I know nothing of any +such correspondence and, if it really went on, I think the Peishwa +would have taken me into his confidence."</p> +<p>"Do you mean to say that Mahdoo has not spoken to you about his +cousin?"</p> +<p>"No, sir, I do not say so for, some four months ago, he spoke in +terms of admiration for Bajee Rao; but he did not pursue the +subject, and never afterwards alluded to it."</p> +<p>The minister looked at him fixedly.</p> +<p>"I believe you," he said. "You do not look like a double-faced +man, but as one who would tell the truth, whatever were the +consequences. Moreover, I felt that if you had known of Mahdoo +Rao's intentions, and had not reported them to me, you would, on +receiving my message, have endeavoured to make your escape. I have +of course enquired, and found that you spent your afternoon, as +usual, with your scribe; and that you afterwards rode out to +Sufder's camp, and there talked for half an hour, sitting outside +the tent and conversing on ordinary matters; and then you returned +here to the palace. These proceedings go far to assure me that you +were ignorant of the discovery that had been made, that a +correspondence had been going on between Mahdoo and Bajee. Still, I +thought you might have known of the correspondence, though not of +the discovery; but now I am quite convinced that you were +altogether ignorant of what was going on."</p> +<p>The scene with Nana, and the knowledge that he had brought upon +his cousins even stricter confinement than before, acted most +painfully upon the mind of the young Peishwa, already embittered by +the restraint in which he was being held. He now shut himself up in +his room, and absolutely refused to leave it. His absence from the +durbars was put down to illness. Nana paid no great attention to +him, believing that the young prince would speedily recover +himself.</p> +<p>This, however, was not the case, for settled melancholy took +possession of him. On the 22nd of October he appeared at the +Duddera, a high ceremonial, went among his troops and, in the +evening, received his chiefs and the representatives from the great +rajahs but, three days later, he threw himself from a terrace in +front of his palace, broke two of his limbs, and so seriously +injured himself that he died, two days afterwards; having, almost +in his last breath, expressed to Nana his strong desire that Bajee +Rao should succeed him on the musnud.</p> +<p>The consternation of the minister was unbounded. It seemed that, +by this sudden and unexpected blow, the whole of his plans were +overthrown; and that not only his position, but his very life, was +in danger.</p> +<p>He sent for Harry, two hours after the Peishwa's death.</p> +<p>"Answer me frankly," he said. "Can I depend upon you, +absolutely? And have you had no communication of any kind from my +enemies?"</p> +<p>"You can depend upon me, my lord. Everyone knows that you have +saved the state, a score of times; and will, I doubt not, do the +same again."</p> +<p>"I have the will," the minister said, gravely, "but whether I +have the power is another thing. I sent off a messenger to the +general, Purseram Bhow, bidding him gather as many troops as +possible and march hither; and I shall send letters to the Rajah of +Nagpore, and Scindia. Holkar, being in Poona, I have already seen +and, as he has always supported me against Rugoba, he is as anxious +as I am as to the succession.</p> +<p>"I shall now send you with a duplicate letter to Purseram Bhow +for, since the terrible accident to Mahdoo Rao, whom I loved dearly +for his amiable character, it is probable that the adherents of +Bajee Rao have been active; and that my every movement is watched, +and attempts may be made to stop any messengers that I may send +out. Take Sufder's troop with you. If you are stopped, fight your +way through, whatever their force. It is a matter of supreme +importance that this letter should reach the general."</p> +<p>"It shall reach him, my lord," Harry said, as he took it; "in +five minutes I shall be on my way."</p> +<p>Going to his room he changed his attire, mounted his horse, and +rode to Sufder's camp. The men were all ready, as Nana had sent an +order to Sufder to prepare instantly for a journey.</p> +<p>"So it is you, Puntojee!" the captain said, as he rode up; "the +orderly did not tell me whom I was to escort, nor our destination. +In which direction do we ride?"</p> +<p>"I am bearer of a letter to Purseram Bhow."</p> +<p>"Then I know the direction;" and, giving orders to his men, he +rode off at once by the side of Harry.</p> +<p>"This is a terrible business, Puntojee."</p> +<p>"I am greatly grieved, indeed, for no one could have been kinder +to me than Mahdoo Rao."</p> +<p>"Yes, yes," Sufder said; "that is all very well, but the serious +side of the matter is that, just as everything seemed settled, we +may be entering upon another civil war, more terrible than the +last. Of course, I am sorry for the young Peishwa; but I doubt +whether he was in any way fit to rule over the Mahrattas. Kindness +of heart goes for nothing with a people like ours; split up into +many factions, led by many chiefs, and ever ready for war. It needs +a strong, as well as an able man to hold in check all the parties +in the state.</p> +<p>"Scindia was the sort of man to rule us. He was strong in every +way, was troubled with no scruples, would strike down without mercy +any who opposed him. He took great care of his troops, and they +were always ready to follow him. That is the man we want on the +musnud; not a young prince, of whom we can only say that he was +kindly.</p> +<p>"And why did Nana choose you?"</p> +<p>"I am a second string to his bow. He sent off a messenger as +soon as he heard of Mahdoo Rao's accident but, fearing he might be +intercepted on the way, he has chosen me as being a person no one +would be likely to suspect of being his messenger, on so important +a matter."</p> +<p>"It is important, indeed, Puntojee. There is no saying what may +be the result of the Peishwa's death. There is no doubt that +Scindia and Holkar will, for once, be in complete accord with Nana +Furnuwees, and will combine in any plan to keep Rugoba's son from +succeeding; still, there are many of the friends of Rugoba who will +be ready to declare for his son and, moreover, there are the +stories that have been so widely circulated as to Bajee's personal +appearance, and his many accomplishments--these will gain for him a +great number of partisans."</p> +<p>The journey was performed without interruption. At one time, a +body of some fifty horsemen made their appearance on rising ground +near the road, but drew off when they saw how strong was the party +and, after a ride of sixty miles, they arrived at Purseram Bhow's +camp. Harry dismounted in front of the general's tent and, +entering, handed him the letter.</p> +<p>"What is your news?" the latter asked, before opening it.</p> +<p>"There is none, General, beyond what the letter, sent to you +three hours before I left, will have prepared you to hear. I only +bear a copy of that letter, in case the first should not have +reached you."</p> +<p>"It is well that the precaution was taken for, in truth, the +messenger has not arrived."</p> +<p>"It is possible that he may have been murdered on the way, sir; +for we saw a party of fifty horsemen on the road, whose intentions +seemed to be hostile, but as I had Sufder's troop of a hundred men +with me, they drew off."</p> +<p>"But what is the news, then, that is so important that steps are +taken to stop messengers that bear it?"</p> +<p>Harry related what had taken place, the old officer giving many +ejaculations of regret, and horror, at the news of Mahdoo Rao's +death.</p> +<p>"'Tis a terrible misfortune, indeed," he said, "and is like to +throw the whole country into disorder again."</p> +<p>He opened the despatch now, and glanced through it. He called +some of his officers, who were gathered near the tent, and ordered +them to cause the trumpets to be sounded for all the troops to be +in readiness to march, at once; leaving only a small body of +infantry to pack up the tents, and follow at a more leisurely pace +with the baggage.</p> +<p>An hour later two regiments of cavalry started, infantry men +being taken up behind the troopers and, late the next day, they +arrived at Poona. Scindia and the Rajah of Berar had also been sent +for, in haste and, as soon as they arrived, a council was held as +to the choice that should be made of a successor.</p> +<p>All were opposed to the selection of Bajee Rao; for he would +have been brought up by his mother, with the deepest enmity towards +those who had successfully combined against his father. It was +therefore proposed that the widow of Mahdoo Rao should adopt a son, +in whose name the government should be carried on.</p> +<p>It was not until two months had been spent in negotiations that +the matter was finally settled. One of Scindia's ministers, named +Balloba, alone opposed the course decided upon; and Bajee Rao +opened communications with him, and succeeded in winning him over +to his cause. Having done this he addressed Scindia; offering him a +very large addition to his territory, and payment of all his +expenses, if he would assist him to gain his rightful position. As +Balloba had great influence over the young Scindia, the offer was +accepted.</p> +<p>The arrangement was made so secretly that Nana Furnuwees had +received no intimation, whatever, of what was going on, until the +agreement had been concluded. Purseram Bhow was again summoned to +Poona and, with his usual energy, made a march of one hundred and +twenty miles in forty-eight hours.</p> +<p>The position was a difficult one, indeed. At one blow, the plans +that had been so carefully laid by Nana were shattered. Scindia, +who had but a month or two before formed one of the confederacy, +had now gone round to the side of Bajee Rao, who regarded the +minister as his greatest enemy. Holkar was not to be depended upon +and, in Poona, there were many adherents of the son of Rugoba. The +council held by Nana, Purseram, and two or three other great +officers was long and, at times, stormy; but it was finally agreed +that the sole way out of the perilous position, caused by Scindia's +desertion, was to anticipate him and to release Bajee Rao, and +declare him Peishwa.</p> +<p>Purseram started, at once, to the fort where the brothers were +confined. Harry, who was now deeply interested in the course of +events, was one of Nana's officers who accompanied Purseram. On +hearing the general's errand, the officer in command of the fort at +once sent for Bajee, his brother Chimnajee, and Amrud--who was the +adopted son of Rugoba, and who stood on an equal footing with +regard to the succession. Bajee Rao listened calmly to the +proposals made to him in Nana's name, asked several questions, and +demanded guarantees; but was evidently disposed to accept the +proposals, if assured that they were made in good faith.</p> +<p>Amrud strongly urged him to decline the offer; but Bajee, upon +Purseram taking the most solemn oath known to the Hindoos, in proof +of his sincerity, accepted the offer and, with his brother +Chimnajee, rode with Purseram to Poona; Amrud being left behind in +the fort, as Purseram considered that he would continue to exercise +his influence over Bajee in a direction hostile to Nana's +interest.</p> +<p>As soon as the party arrived at the capital, an interview took +place between Bajee and Nana when, in the presence of many of the +great officers, both swore to forget all enmities and injuries, and +Bajee promised to retain Nana at the head of his +administration.</p> +<p>That same evening, the minister sent for Harry.</p> +<p>"Puntojee," he said, "I have a commission for you. I know that +you are loyal to me, and that I can depend upon you. I wish you to +go at once to Scindia's camp, which is now on the bank of the +Godavery, and ascertain how he takes the news. Doubtless Balloba, +his prime minister, will be furious at finding that, instead of +Bajee becoming a mere creature of Scindia's, I have placed him on +the musnud, and retain my place as his chief minister. I can employ +you for this business better than most others, for the greater part +of my officers are personally known to those of Scindia, while you +have scarce been seen by them. I have also a high idea of your +shrewdness; and I have no doubt that you will, in some way, be able +to gain the information that I require--indeed, it will probably be +the public talk of the camp. If you should find an opportunity of +entering into negotiations, with any influential person in +Scindia's court, I authorize you to do so in my name; and to agree +to any reasonable demands that he may make, either for a payment in +money or in estates. Scindia's character is wholly unformed and, +though today he may be guided by Balloba, tomorrow he may lean on +someone else.</p> +<p>"You can go in any guise you think fit, either as a trooper or +as a camp follower. In either case, you had better take Sufder and +twenty men with you; and leave them in concealment within a few +miles of the camp so that, in case of necessity, you can join them; +and his men can act as messengers, and bring your reports to +me."</p> +<p>As it was now a year since Harry had first gone to Poona, and he +had during that time worked diligently, he could now both read and +write the Mahratta language, and was thus able to send in written +reports; instead of being obliged to rely upon oral messages, which +might be misdelivered by those who carried them, or possibly +reported to others instead of to the minister; whereas reading and +writing were known to but few of the Mahrattas, outside the Brahmin +class.</p> +<p>Sufder expressed himself much pleased, when he heard that he was +to accompany Harry.</p> +<p>"I am sick of this life of inactivity," he said. "Why, we have +had no fighting for the past five years; and we shall forget how to +use our arms, unless there is something doing. I would willingly +accompany you into Scindia's camp, but I am far too well known +there to hope to escape observation. However, I will pick out +twenty of my best men so that, if there should be a skirmish, we +shall be able to hold our own. Of course, I shall choose men who +have good horses, for we may have to ride for it."</p> +<p>Harry himself was very well mounted, for Mahdoo Rao had given +him two excellent horses; and as he had, when out with Sufder's +troop, tried them against the best of those of the sowars, he felt +sure that he could trust to them, in case of having to ride for his +life. The trooper who looked after them had become much attached to +him, and he determined to take him with him into Scindia's camp, +one of Sufder's other men looking after the horses.</p> +<p>After a consultation with Sufder, he decided on adopting the +costume of a petty trader or pedlar carrying garments, scarfs, and +other articles used by soldiers. Of these he laid in a store and, +three hours after his interview with Nana, started with his escort; +the trooper leading his spare horse, on which his packs were +fastened, and his own man riding a country pony. The distance to +Scindia's camp was under a hundred miles, and they took three days +in accomplishing it. It was important that the horses should not be +knocked up, as their lives might depend upon their speed.</p> +<p>When within ten miles of their destination, they halted in a +grove near the Moola river. Here Harry changed his clothes, and +assumed those of a small merchant. Then he mounted the pony; a +portion of the packs was fastened behind him, and the rest carried +by his servant.</p> +<p>Scindia's camp lay around Toka, a town on the Godavery at the +foot of a range of hills. On arriving there he went to the field +bazaar, where a large number of booths, occupied by traders and +country peasants, were erected. The former principally sold arms, +saddlery, and garments; the latter, the produce of their own +villages. Choosing an unoccupied piece of ground, Harry erected a +little shelter tent; composed of a dark blanket thrown over a ridge +pole, supported by two others, giving a height of some four feet, +in the centre. The pony was picketed just behind this. In front of +it a portion of the wares was spread out, and Harry began the usual +loud exhortations, to passers by, to inspect them.</p> +<p>Having thus established himself, he left Wasil in charge, +explaining to him the prices that he was to ask for each of the +articles sold, and then started on a tour through the camp. Here +and there pausing to listen to the soldiers, he picked up scraps of +news; and learned that there was a general expectation that the +army would march, in a day or two, towards Poona--it being rumoured +that Scindia and his minister, Balloba, had been outwitted by Nana +Furnuwees; and that Balloba had made no secret of his anger, but +vowed vengeance against the man who had overthrown plans which, it +had been surely believed, would have resulted in Scindia's +obtaining supreme control over the Deccan.</p> +<p>Returning to his little tent, he wrote a letter to Nana, telling +him what he had gathered, and giving approximately the strength of +Scindia's force; adding that, from what he heard, the whole were +animated with the desire to avenge what they considered an insult +to their prince. This note he gave to Wasil, who at once started on +foot to join Sufder; who would forward it, by four troopers, to +Poona.</p> +<p>The next morning he returned and, after purchasing provisions +from the countrymen, and lighting a fire for cooking them, he +assisted Harry at his stall. The latter was standing up, exhibiting +a garment to a soldier, who was haggling with him over the price, +when a party of officers rode by. At their head was one whose dress +showed him to be a person of importance; and whom Harry at once +recognized as Balloba, having often noticed him during the +negotiations at Poona. As his eye fell upon Harry he checked his +horse for a moment, and beckoned to him to come to him.</p> +<p>"Come here, weynsh," he said, using the term generally applied +to the commercial caste.</p> +<a id="PicB" name="PicB"></a> +<center><img src="images/b.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Harry went up to him, and salaamed." /></center> +<p>Harry went up to him, and salaamed.</p> +<p>"How comes it," the minister asked, "that so fine a young fellow +as you are is content to be peddling goods through the country, +when so well fitted by nature for better things? You should be a +soldier, and a good one. For so young a man, I have never seen a +greater promise of strength.</p> +<p>"It seems to me that your face is not unknown to me. Where do +you come from?"</p> +<p>"From Jooneer, your excellency, where my people are cultivators +but, having no liking for that life, I learned the trade of a +shopkeeper, and obtained permission to travel to your camp, and to +try my fortune in disposing of some of my master's goods."</p> +<p>As Jooneer was but some sixty miles from Toka, the explanation +was natural enough and, as the former town lay near to the main +road from Scindia's dominions in Candeish, it afforded an +explanation of Balloba's partial recognition of his face.</p> +<p>"And as a merchant, you can read and write, I suppose?" the +latter went on.</p> +<p>"Yes, your highness, sufficiently well for my business."</p> +<p>"Well, think it over. You can scarcely find your present life +more suitable to your taste than that of a cultivator, and the army +is the proper place for a young fellow with spirit, and with +strength and muscles such as you have. If you like to enlist in my +own bodyguard, and your conduct be good, I will see that you have +such promotion as you deserve."</p> +<p>"Your excellency is kind, indeed," Harry said, humbly. "Before I +accept your kind offer, will you permit me to return to Jooneer to +account for my sales to my employer, and to obtain permission of my +father to accept your offer; which would indeed be greatly more to +my taste than the selling of goods."</p> +<p>"It is well," Balloba said, and then broke off:</p> +<p>"Ah! I know now why I remember your face. 'Tis the lightness of +your eyes, which are of a colour rarely seen; but somehow or other, +it appears to me that it was not at Jooneer, but at Poona, that I +noticed your face."</p> +<p>"I was at Poona, with my master, when your highness was there," +Harry said.</p> +<p>"That accounts for it."</p> +<p>The minister touched his horse's flanks with his heel and rode +on, with a thoughtful look on his face. Harry at once joined +Wasil.</p> +<p>"Quick, Wasil! There is no time to be lost. Throw the saddle on +to the pony, and make your way out of the camp, at once. Pitch all +the other things into the tent, and close it. If you leave them +here, it will seem strange. Balloba has seen me at Poona, and it is +likely enough that, as he thinks it over, he will remember that it +was in a dress altogether different from this. Go at once to +Sufder. If you get there before me, tell him to mount at once, and +ride fast to meet me."</p> +<p>Two minutes later, everything was prepared; and Wasil, mounting +the pony, rode off, while Harry moved away among the tents. In a +quiet spot, behind one of these, he threw off his upper garments +and stood in the ordinary undress of a Hindoo peasant, having +nothing on but a scanty loincloth. He had scarcely accomplished +this when he heard the trampling of horses; and saw, past the tent, +four troopers ride up to the spot he had just left.</p> +<p>"Where is the trader who keeps this tent?" one of them shouted. +"He is a spy, and we have orders to arrest him."</p> +<p>Harry waited to hear no more, but walked in the opposite +direction; taking care to maintain a leisurely stride, and to avoid +all appearance of haste. Then, going down to the road by the side +of which the bazaar was encamped, he mingled with the crowd there. +Presently, one of the troopers dashed up.</p> +<p>"Has anyone seen a man in the dress of a trader?" and he roughly +described the attire of which Harry had rid himself.</p> +<p>There was a general chorus of denial, from those standing round, +and the trooper again galloped on.</p> +<p>Harry continued his walk at a leisurely pace, stopping +occasionally to look at articles exposed for sale, until he reached +the end of the bazaar. Then he made across the country. Trumpets +were blowing now in the camp, and he had no doubt that Balloba had +ordered a thorough search to be made for him. He did not quicken +his pace, however, until well out of sight; but then he broke into +a swinging trot, for he guessed that, when he was not found in the +camp, parties of cavalry would start to scour the country. He had +gone some four miles when, looking behind him, he saw about twenty +horsemen, far back along the road.</p> +<p>The country here was flat and open, with fields irrigated by +canals running from the Moola, and affording no opportunity for +concealment. Hitherto he had been running well within his powers; +but he now quickened his pace, and ran at full speed. He calculated +that Wasil would have at least half an hour's start of him; and +that, as he would urge the pony to the top of his speed, he would +by this time have joined Sufder; and he was sure that the latter +would not lose an instant before starting to meet him. He had +hesitated, for a moment, whether he should break into a quiet walk +and allow the troopers to overtake him, relying upon the alteration +of his costume; but he reflected that Balloba might have foreseen +that he would change his disguise, and have ordered the arrest of a +young man with curiously light eyes.</p> +<p>Harry had always attempted to conceal this feature, as far as +possible, by staining his eyelashes a deep black; but when he +looked up, the colour of his eyes could hardly fail to strike +anyone specially noticing them.</p> +<p>His constant exercise as a boy had given him great swiftness of +foot, and the year passed as a shikaree had added to his endurance +and speed and, divested of clothing as he was, he felt sure that +the horsemen, who were more than a mile in his rear when he first +caught sight of them, would not overtake him for some time. He was +running, as he knew, for life; for he was certain that, if caught, +Balloba would have him at once put to death as a spy. Although +hardy and of great endurance, the Mahratta horses, which were small +in size, were not accustomed to being put to the top of their speed +except for a short charge; and the five miles that they had +galloped already must have, to some extent, fatigued them.</p> +<p>After running at the top of his speed for about a mile, he +looked back. The party was still a long distance in his rear. Again +he pressed forward, but his exertions were telling upon him and, +before he had gone another half mile, the Mahrattas had approached +within little more than half that distance.</p> +<p>Far ahead he thought he could perceive a body of horsemen, but +these were nearly two miles away, and he would be overtaken before +they could reach him; therefore he turned suddenly off, and took to +one of the little banks dividing one irrigated field from another. +As soon as the horsemen reached the spot where he had left the +road, they too turned off; but Harry, who was now husbanding his +strength, saw a sudden confusion among them.</p> +<p>The little bank of earth on which he was running was but a foot +wide, and was softened by the water which soaked in from both +sides. It could bear his weight, well enough; but not that of a +mounted man. Only one or two had attempted to follow it, the others +had plunged into the field. Here their horses at once sank up to +the knees. Some endeavoured to force the animals on, others to +regain the road they had quitted. The two horsemen on the bank were +making better progress, but their horses' hoofs sank deeply in the +soft earth; and their pace, in spite of the exertions of the +riders, was but a slow one.</p> +<p>Harry turned when he came to the end of the field, and followed +another bank at right angles, and was therefore now running in the +right direction. He was more than keeping his lead from the +foremost of his pursuers Some of the others galloped along the +road, parallel to him, but ahead.</p> +<p>The horsemen he had first seen were now within a mile. On they +came, at the top of their speed; and the troopers on the road +halted, not knowing whether this body were friends or foes, while +those on the bank reined in their horses, and rode back to join +their comrades. Harry continued to run till he came to another bank +leading to the road and, following this, he arrived there just as +Sufder galloped up with his party, one of the troopers leading his +horse. They gave a shout of welcome, as he came up.</p> +<p>"I thought it must be you," Sufder said, "from the way you ran, +rather than from your attire. Shall we charge those fellows?"</p> +<p>"I think not," Harry said. "In the first place Scindia has not, +as yet, declared war against Nana and Bajee; in the second, there +may be more men coming on behind; therefore it will be best to +leave them alone though, if they attack us, we shall, of course, +defend ourselves."</p> +<p>"I think that is their intention, Puntojee. See, they have +gathered together! I suppose they daren't go back, and say that you +have escaped."</p> +<p>"Give me either your sword or spear."</p> +<p>The latter was part of the regular equipment of the Mahratta +horsemen. Sufder handed him his sword and, as the pursuers advanced +towards them at a canter which speedily became a gallop, he took +his place by the side of Sufder and, the latter giving the word, +the band dashed forward to meet their opponents.</p> +<p>The combat was a short one. Sufder's followers were all picked +men, and were better mounted than Scindia's troopers. These made +special efforts to get at Harry, but the latter's skill with the +sword enabled him to free himself from his most pressing opponents. +Sufder laid about him stoutly and, his men seconding him well, half +their opponents were speedily struck to the ground; and the rest, +turning their horses, fled at full speed. Sufder's men would have +followed, but he shouted to them to draw rein.</p> +<p>"Enough has been done, and well done," he said. "If Scindia +means war, nothing will be said about this fight; but if he does +not, complaints will doubtless be laid against us, and it is better +that we should be able to say that we fought only in self defence; +and that, when the attack ceased, we allowed them to ride off +unmolested, though we might easily enough have slain the whole of +them."</p> +<p>On arriving at the grove where the troop had halted, Harry at +once resumed his own clothes; for although in his early days he had +been accustomed to be slightly clad, he felt ill at ease riding +almost naked. Here, too, he found Wasil, who had ridden with such +speed that his pony was too much exhausted for him to ride back +with the rest. He received his master with the greatest joy, for he +had feared he would be captured before leaving the camp.</p> +<p>They continued their journey to Jooneer, where they halted for +the night. Sufder went to his house, and Harry rode out to the +farm.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch4" id="Ch4">Chapter 4</a>: A British Resident.</h2> +<p>As Harry drew rein at the farm Soyera ran out, followed by her +brother and Anundee, with cries of joy at his unexpected return. It +was nearly fifteen months since she had last seen him; though he +had, when opportunity offered, sent messages to her assuring her +that he was well, and hoped ere long to be able to come over to see +her.</p> +<p>"I should scarce have known you," she said, "in those fine +clothes of yours. You sent word that you were an officer in the +Peishwa's service; but I hardly thought that you could be so much +changed. You have grown a great deal, and are now much taller than +Ramdass's sons."</p> +<p>The worthy farmer and Anundee were also delighted to see +him.</p> +<p>"How long are you going to stay?" the former asked.</p> +<p>"Only till tomorrow, at daybreak. I have to ride forward, with +all haste, to Poona; for I have been on a mission for Nana +Furnuwees."</p> +<p>"Surely it is not so important that you cannot stay a few hours, +Puntojee?"</p> +<p>"It is of importance. You may have known that Nana has placed +Bajee Rao on the musnud, and he has installed himself as his +minister; thereby defeating the plans of Balloba and Scindia, who +will probably come along here with their whole force, in a day or +two."</p> +<p>Late that evening, when the others had retired to bed, Soyera +and Harry had a long talk together.</p> +<p>"Have you thought, Harry," she asked, after speaking for some +time about his doings and position at court, "of joining your +people again? There is peace between the Peishwa's court and the +English. There is a British Resident at Poona and, as you have now +gained a certain rank there, you could go to him with a much better +face than if you had come direct from here, as a peasant. Then it +would probably have been supposed that you were an impostor. That +you were English, of course could be seen by your skin; but it +might have been thought that I had adopted some English child, and +was now trying to pass it off as the son of an officer."</p> +<p>"I think, mother, that I had best continue, for some time, as I +am. You see I have, at present, nothing in common with the English +except their blood. Were another war to break out between the +Mahrattas and Bombay, I would at once declare myself to the +Resident here, and go down to Bombay but, even then, my position +would be a doubtful one and, unless I were to enlist in their army, +I do not see how I should maintain myself.</p> +<p>"Moreover, you must remember that I have now a deep interest in +matters here. Nana Furnuwees has treated me with much kindness, and +placed his confidence in me. He has many enemies, as I have told +you. Scindia is about to advance against Poona, and it is probable +that he may succeed in driving Nana into exile, or imprisoning him +for life; and establishing Balloba, or some other person devoted to +his interest, as minister, in which case Scindia would be +absolutely supreme. Nothing would persuade me to desert Nana; who +has, for many years, alone withstood the ambition of Scindia's +party. I do not say, for a moment, that my aid would be of the +slightest use to him but, at any rate, he shall see that I am not +ungrateful for his kindness; and will be faithful to him in his +misfortunes, as he has been kind to me, when in power."</p> +<p>"That is right," Soyera said. "The cause of Nana is the cause of +all in this part of the Deccan; for we should be infinitely worse +off, were Scindia to lay hands on us. But there is an alternative, +by which you could at once remain faithful to Nana, and prepare +your way for joining the English, when you considered that the time +for doing so had arrived."</p> +<p>"What is that, Soyera?"</p> +<p>"You might go to the English Resident, and tell him who you are, +and how you have been brought up. Say that, at present, you wish to +remain in the service of Nana; who has been a good friend to you, +and with whom your sympathies, like those of nearly all the +cultivators in the Peishwa's dominions, accord. Say that you hope, +when the time comes, to return to your countrymen; and that, in the +meantime, you will give him any information in your power as to +what is going on, subject only to your friendship for Nana. Thus, +by making yourself useful to the Resident, you may prepare your way +for joining your countrymen and, at the same time, be able to +remain with Nana until either he is victorious over his enemies, or +his cause is really lost."</p> +<p>"The plan is an excellent one," Harry said, "and I will +certainly adopt it. Undoubtedly, the feeling among the English must +be in favour of Bajee Rao and Nana. As Bajee is the son of Rugoba, +he is their natural ally. Moreover, they would object most strongly +to see Scindia become master of the whole Mahratta power; which he +would probably use against them, at the first opportunity. It +would, as you say, greatly facilitate my obtaining a fair position +among the English; and I might also be able to do Nana a service. +Of course, I have seen the English Resident many times, in the +streets of Poona; and more than once, on special occasions, at +Mahdoo Rao's court. As it is his business to know something of all +connected with the palace, it is probable that he may have heard of +me; at any rate, it would be easier to explain to him my position, +than it would be to go down as a stranger to Bombay--where I should +be ignorant as to whom I should first approach, and how to declare +myself--a matter I have very often thought over."</p> +<p>The next morning the troop started at daybreak and, riding fast, +reached Poona by noon. Harry went at once to report what he had +seen to Nana.</p> +<p>"I received your letter yesterday," the minister said, "and the +news was indeed bad. Purseram Bhow has offered to go out to give +battle to Scindia, but my forces would have no chance: not only is +Scindia's army much larger, but he has the infantry regiments +commanded by foreign officers, and against these my infantry could +not prevail. It would be madness to risk fighting, under such +circumstances. The wheel may turn and, ere long, I may be in a +position to thwart the schemes of Scindia and Balloba."</p> +<p>Nana had never been conspicuous for personal courage, though his +moral courage, and his ability to meet any storm were unbounded. He +was now an old man, and dreaded the shock of battle, when the +chances appeared to be so much against him. He could not depend +upon the support of Bajee, who had already shown himself willing to +side with the strongest, and to make terms for himself, without the +slightest regard for those who had befriended him.</p> +<p>"But if your excellency does not think of fighting, what course +will you pursue?"</p> +<p>"I shall leave the country, at once," he said. "If I stop here, +I know that Balloba, who is my personal enemy, will have me put to +death. I only need time to recover from this sudden misfortune, and +it would be madness for me to wait here, and to fall into the power +of my enemies.</p> +<p>"Purseram Bhow is greatly offended, because I will not allow him +to fight; but I, who have for so many years done my best to prevent +civil war in this country--a war which, however it ended, would +break up the Mahratta power--would not bring its horrors upon +Poona. It is against me that Balloba is marching and, if I retire, +bloodshed will be altogether averted.</p> +<p>"Will you accompany me, Puntojee?" he asked almost +wistfully.</p> +<p>"Assuredly I will do so, sir; and I think that I can answer for +Sufder, who has, I know, a great regard for your excellency. As to +myself, I have little hope that I should escape unharmed, if +Balloba arrive here before I leave. He detected me, even in my +disguise in his camp; and I had a narrow escape, for a party of his +cavalry pursued me, and would probably have caught me had not +Sufder, with his band, met me, and defeated them with a loss of +half their number. You may be sure that Balloba will learn who was +in command, and Sufder's life would be no safer than my own.</p> +<p>"May I ask when your excellency is going to leave Poona?"</p> +<p>"Scouts were sent out yesterday, as soon as your letter was read +and, directly Scindia's army gets in motion, I shall receive news. +When I do, I shall leave. The horses will be saddled in readiness, +and I shall be at the edge of the Ghauts by the time Scindia +arrives here. You can tell Sufder to come, at once. He knows the +disposition of the captains of the various troops, and will be able +to tell me who can be depended upon."</p> +<p>Sufder was indeed outside the palace, having told Harry that he +would wait, until he had learned the result of his interview with +Nana. Harry briefly related to him his conversation with the +minister.</p> +<p>"I think he is right," he said. "Purseram Bhow is a stout +fighter, and is as brave as a lion; but Scindia's force would be +double that which he could gather, at such a short notice, and Nana +does right not to risk everything on the chance of a single fight. +He is a wily old fox, and has got safely through dangers which +would have crushed an ordinary man. You will see that, before long, +he will be back again, and reinstated in power.</p> +<p>"At any rate, I will accompany him. After that thrashing we gave +Balloba's horsemen, my head would not be safe here an hour, after +his arrival."</p> +<p>On the road, Harry had informed him of the decision at which he +had arrived, upon Soyera's advice; and Sufder agreed that it would +certainly be a wise step. Accordingly, when the latter entered the +palace, Harry went straight to the British Residency. He sent in +his native name to Mr. Malet, and asked for an interview, and was +at once shown in.</p> +<p>"You wish to speak to me, sir?" the Resident said, in the +Mahratta language. "I think I have seen you at Mahdoo Rao's +court."</p> +<p>"I have seen your excellency there," Harry replied, in the same +language.</p> +<p>Then, seeing that the Resident spoke the language with +difficulty, he went on, in English:</p> +<p>"It is a matter chiefly personal to myself."</p> +<p>The Resident looked at him in surprise, for it was the first +time he had heard a Mahratta speaking English.</p> +<p>"I am the son of Major Lindsay who, with his wife and escort, +was murdered by a party of Mahrattas, seventeen years ago, at the +time when the English army was advancing against Poona. I was saved +by the fidelity of an ayah, who had been in the family for ten +years. A cousin of hers was, fortunately, one of the leaders of the +party who attacked the camp and, with his connivance, she carried +me off and made her way back to her family, near Jooneer. She +stained my skin, as you see, and allowed it to be supposed that she +had married in Bombay, and that I was her own child.</p> +<p>"She has brought me up with the intention of my rejoining my +countrymen, as soon as I became a man; for she did not see how, +until then, I could earn my living among strangers. She taught me +as much as she knew of the language and religion of the English +and, when I was twelve, took me down to Bombay and left me, for +some two years and a half, in the house of Mrs. Sankey, a lady who +taught some of the children of officers there. When I left Bombay I +was able to speak English as well as other English boys of my +age.</p> +<p>"My nurse had, from the earliest time I can remember, encouraged +me in taking part in all sports and games; and when I was but eight +a soldier, a cousin of hers, began to teach me my first exercise in +arms. I continued to work at this until I went down to Bombay and, +on my return, spent all my time, for some months, in riding and +shooting. After this I was, for a year, with a famous shikaree; and +took part in the killing of many tigers, and other wild beasts. +This was fortunate; for when, through this relation of my nurse, I +was introduced to Nana Furnuwees, and by him to Mahdoo Rao, the +latter was pleased to take a fancy for me, and appointed me to the +charge of the game preserves.</p> +<p>"At the present moment I have just returned from a mission, in +disguise, to Scindia's camp. Nana has shown me great kindness. My +intention is to remain with him, until he has passed through his +present difficulties, which are very serious. After that, I hope to +be able to go to Bombay, and to obtain a commission in the +Company's service."</p> +<p>"I remember well the circumstances of the murder of Major +Lindsay, and his wife; for I was in Bombay at the time. It was a +matter of deep regret to us all, for he was greatly liked but, at +the time, everyone was excited over the infamous treaty of Wurgaum. +I remember that when a party was sent out, on our receiving the +news of the attack, the bodies of the major and his wife were +found, as also those of his servants and sowars; but it was +reported that no trace could be discovered of the infant, or of his +ayah. It was thought possible that they had escaped, and hopes were +entertained that the woman might have carried off her charge. I +have no doubt as to the truth of your story.</p> +<p>"Is your nurse still alive?"</p> +<p>"She is, sir, as is also the man who assisted her. His name is +Sufder, and he commands a troop of the Peishwa's cavalry. Both will +testify, at the right time, to the truth of my statement."</p> +<p>"I can the more readily believe it," the Resident said, +"inasmuch as, in spite of your colour, I can perceive a certain +likeness to Major Lindsay, whom I knew intimately."</p> +<p>"My intention, in coming to see you now, sir, was to offer to +furnish any information to you, concerning the movements and plans +of Nana Furnuwees, so far as such information could do him no +harm."</p> +<p>"I heard that there had been discussions between Nana and +Purseram Bhow, the latter wishing to give battle to Scindia; but I +think that Nana is right in refusing to sanction this for, from all +I hear, Scindia's army is very much the stronger."</p> +<p>"It is, sir; and I should say that Purseram's army could hardly +be depended upon to fight, under such circumstances."</p> +<p>"What is Nana going to do?"</p> +<p>"He is going to retire, as soon as Scindia's army is fairly in +motion."</p> +<p>"He is in an awkward position," Mr. Malet said, "but he has +reinstated himself, several times, when it seemed that everything +was lost. I have great respect for his abilities, and he is the +only man who can curb the ambition of Scindia and his ministers. +Scindia's entire supremacy would be most unwelcome to us for, +indeed, it is only owing to the mutual jealousy of the three great +chiefs of the Mahratta nation, that we have gained successes. Were +the whole power in one hand, we should certainly lose Surat, and +probably Bassein and Salsette, and have to fight hard to hold +Bombay.</p> +<p>"I shall be very glad to receive any reports you can supply me +with, for it is next to impossible to obtain anything like +trustworthy information here. We only hear what it is desired that +we should know, and all these late changes have come as a complete +surprise to me; for what news I do obtain is, more often than not, +false. Unfortunately, truth is a virtue almost unknown among the +Mahrattas. They have a perfect genius for intrigue, and consider it +perfectly justifiable to deceive not only enemies, but friends.</p> +<p>"And when do you think of declaring yourself Mr. Lindsay?"</p> +<p>"I shall remain with Nana, so long as there is the slightest +chance of his success; unless, indeed, the course of affairs should +lead to the English intervening in these troubles; then, in case +they declare against Nana, I should feel it my duty to leave him at +once."</p> +<p>"I do not think there is any probability of that. Our policy has +been to support him, as the Peishwa's minister, against either +Scindia or Holkar. I shall, of course, report your appearance to +the authorities at Bombay; and I am sure there will be a +disposition to advance your views, for the sake of your father; and +moreover, your knowledge of the language of the Mahrattas--which +is, of course, perfect, or you could not have maintained your +deception so long--will of itself be a strong recommendation in +your favour."</p> +<p>After thanking Mr. Malet for his kindness, Harry returned to +Sufder's camp, and gave him an account of his interview with the +Resident.</p> +<p>"That is satisfactory, indeed, Puntojee. It shows the wisdom of +the step you took. Now, as to our affairs here, I have mentioned +the names of five captains of troops; all of whom can, I think, be +relied upon. However, I am now going out to see them, and have only +been waiting for your return. Six hundred men is but a small body; +but it is a beginning, and I have no doubt that others will join +Nana, later on. But I am not sufficiently sure of their sentiments +to open the matter to them, and it is essential that no suspicion +of Nana's intention to leave the town should get about. There might +be a riot in the city and, possibly, some of the captains, who have +not received the promotion which they regard as their due, might +try to gain Scindia's favour by arresting him."</p> +<p>On the following day a messenger arrived from Nana, requesting +Sufder to place himself with his troop, and such other captains as +he could rely upon, on the road a mile west of Poona. He himself +would leave the town quietly, with a small body of his friends, and +join them there. Sufder at once sent off five of his men, with +orders to the captains whom he had seen on the previous afternoon +and, within an hour, six hundred men were gathered at the point +indicated. Half an hour later a party of horsemen were seen coming +along, and Furnuwees soon rode up, accompanied by several of his +strongest adherents.</p> +<p>The officers were gathered at the head of their troops. Nana, +drawing rein, said to them:</p> +<p>"Thanks for your fidelity. I shall not forget it; and hope, when +the time comes, to reward it as it deserves."</p> +<p>He motioned to Harry to join him.</p> +<p>"Scindia's army was to march this morning," he said, "and his +horsemen will be here by tomorrow evening, at latest."</p> +<p>They rode to Satara, where Nana had arranged to stop until he +received news, from Purseram Bhow, as to the course of events at +Poona; and two days later a messenger rode in, with news that +Scindia had arrived near Poona, and had had a friendly interview +with Bajee Rao. Balloba had seen Purseram, and had pretended great +friendship for him; but the old soldier was by no means deceived by +his protestations.</p> +<p>"If we had only to do with Scindia," Nana said, "matters could +be easily arranged; but the young rajah is only a puppet in his +minister's hands."</p> +<p>Several days passed, and then another letter came from Purseram. +It said that Balloba had resolved to oppose Bajee Rao, and to have +both a minister and a Peishwa of his own nomination; and that he +proposed to him that Mahdoo Rao's widow should adopt Chimnajee as +her son, that Bajee should be placed in confinement, and that he, +Purseram Bhow, should be his minister. He asked Nana's advice as to +what course he should take. He stated that Balloba had said he was +greatly influenced, in the methods he proposed, by the hope of +rendering them in some degree acceptable to Nana.</p> +<p>As the latter had only placed Bajee Rao on the musnud as a means +of checkmating Scindia, he advised Purseram to accept the offer; +but pointed out the absolute necessity for his retaining Bajee in +his own custody. Purseram omitted to follow this portion of the +advice, and a formal reconciliation took place, by letter, between +Balloba and Nana. The latter was invited to proceed at once to +Poona; but on finding that Purseram had allowed Balloba to retain +Bajee in his hands, he suspected that the whole was a scheme to +entice him into the power of his enemy, and he therefore made +excuses for not going.</p> +<p>Bajee, ignorant of the plot that had been planned, went to +Scindia's camp to remonstrate against a heavy demand for money, on +account of the expenses to which Scindia had been put; and to his +astonishment he was, then and there, made a prisoner. Chimnajee +positively refused to become a party to the usurpation of his +brother's rights; but he was compelled, by threats, to ascend the +musnud. On the day after his installation, Purseram Bhow wrote, +proposing that Nana should come to Poona to meet Balloba, and to +assume the civil administration of the new Peishwa's government; +while the command of the troops, and all military arrangements, +should remain as they stood.</p> +<p>In reply, Nana requested that Purseram should send his son, +Hurry Punt, to settle the preliminaries; but instead of coming as +an envoy, Hurry Punt left Poona with over five thousand chosen +horse. This naturally excited Nana's suspicions, which were +strengthened by a letter from Rao Phurkay, who was in command of +the Peishwa's household troops, warning him to seek safety without +a moment's delay.</p> +<p>Now that he saw that half measures were no longer possible, Nana +ceased to be irresolute and, when his fortunes seemed to all men to +be desperate, commenced a series of successful intrigues that +astonished all India. He had quietly increased his force, during +the weeks of waiting since he had left Poona. He had ample funds, +having carried away with him an immense treasure, accumulated +during his long years of government. There was no time to be lost +and, as soon as he received the letter of warning, he left the town +of Waee and made for the Concan.</p> +<p>As soon as he reached the Ghauts, he set the whole of his force +to block the passes, by rolling great stones down into the roads. +In addition, strong barricades were constructed, and a force of two +hundred men left, at each point, to defend them. The infantry he +had recruited he threw into the fort of Raygurh, and added strongly +to its defences.</p> +<p>Balloba had proposed that Nana should be followed without delay, +and offered some of Scindia's best troops for the purpose; but +Purseram, acting in accordance with the advice of some of Nana's +friends, raised an objection. He had now, however, resolved to +break altogether with the minister, whose timidity at the critical +moment was considered, by him, as a proof that he could never again +be formidable; and he accordingly gave up Nana's estates to +Scindia, and took possession of his houses and property in Poona, +for his own use. After remaining for a few days, waiting events and +sending off many messengers, Nana sent for Harry.</p> +<p>"I have a mission for you," he said. "It is one that requires +daring and great intelligence, and I know no one to whom it could +be better committed than to you. You see that, owing to the turn +events have taken, Bajee Rao and myself are natural allies. We have +both suffered at the hands of Balloba. He is a prisoner in +Scindia's camp; though, as I understand, free to move about in it. +I privately received a hint that Bajee, himself, recognizes this; +but doubtless he believes that I am powerless to help either myself +or him.</p> +<p>"In this he is mistaken. I have been in communication with +Holkar, who is alarmed at the ever-increasing power of Scindia; and +he will throw his whole power into the scale, to aid me. The Rajahs +of Berar and Kolapoore have engaged to aid me, for the same reason; +and the Nizam will sign the treaty that was agreed upon between us, +some time since. Rao Phurkay has engaged to bring the Peishwa's +household troops over, when the signal is given.</p> +<p>"More than that I have, through Ryajee, a patal, who is an enemy +of Balloba, opened negotiations with Scindia himself; offering him +the estates of Purseram Bhow, and the fort of Surrenuggar, with +territory yielding ten lakhs, on condition of his placing Balloba +in confinement, re-establishing Bajee Rao on the musnud, and +returning with his troops to his own territory.</p> +<p>"I have no doubt that, when Bajee Rao hears this, he will be +glad enough to throw himself heartily into the cause. I may tell +you that he is apparently a guest, rather than a prisoner; and that +he has a camp of his own, in the centre of that of Scindia; and +therefore, when you have once made your way into his encampment, +you will have no difficulty in obtaining a private interview with +him. It is necessary that he should have money, and silver would be +too heavy for you to carry; but I will give you bags containing a +thousand gold mohurs, which will enable him to begin the work of +privately raising troops."</p> +<p>"I will undertake the business, sir. The only person I fear, in +the smallest degree, is Balloba himself. I must disguise myself so +that he will not recognize me."</p> +<p>Without delay, Harry mounted his horse, placed the two bags of +money that had been handed to him in the wallets behind his saddle, +exchanged his dress for that of one of Sufder's troopers, and then +started for Poona, which he reached the next day. He did not enter +the town; but put up at a cultivator's, two miles distant from +it.</p> +<p>"I want to hire a cart, with two bullocks," he said to the man. +"Can you furnish one?"</p> +<p>"As I do not know you, I should require some money paid down, as +a guarantee that they will be returned."</p> +<p>"That I can give you; but I shall leave my horse here, and that +is fully worth your waggon and oxen. However, I will leave with you +a hundred rupees. I may not keep your waggon many days."</p> +<p>After it was dark, Harry went to the town and purchased some +paints, and other things, that he required for disguise. Having +used these, he went to the house of the British Resident and, on +stating who he was, he was shown in. Mr. Malet did not recognize, +in the roughly-dressed countryman, the young officer who had called +upon him before.</p> +<p>"I am Harry Lindsay and, being in Poona, called upon you to give +you some information."</p> +<p>"I recognize you by your voice," the Resident said; "but I fear +that there is nothing of importance that you can tell me; now that +Nana Furnuwees is homeless, and Bajee Rao is no longer +Peishwa."</p> +<p>"Nana is not done with, yet, sir."</p> +<p>"Why, he is a fugitive, with a handful of troops under him."</p> +<p>"But he has his brains, sir, which are worth more than an army +and, believe me, if all goes well, it will not be long before he is +back in Poona, as minister to the Peishwa."</p> +<p>"Minister to Chimnajee?"</p> +<p>"No, sir, minister to Bajee Rao."</p> +<p>"I would that it were so," Mr. Malet said, "but since one is a +fugitive and the other a prisoner, I see no chance, whatever, of +such a transformation."</p> +<p>"I will briefly tell you, sir, what is preparing. Bajee, feeling +certain that he will, ere long, be sent to a fortress, has +communicated with Nana, imploring him to aid him."</p> +<p>"If he has turned to Nana for support, he is either mad, or +acting as Balloba's tool."</p> +<p>"On the contrary, sir, I think that his doing so shows that he +recognizes Nana's ability; and feels that, ere long, he may become +a useful ally. Already Nana has been at work. Holkar, who naturally +views with intense jealousy Scindia's entire control of the +territory of the Peishwa, has already agreed to put his whole army +in the field; Rao Phurkay will rebel, with the household troops +and, what is vastly more important, Scindia has embraced Nana's +offer of a large sum of money, and a grant of territory, to arrest +Balloba, and to replace Bajee on the musnud. In addition to this, +he has won over the Rajah of Berar, has incited the Rajah of +Kolapoore to attack the district of Purseram Bhow; and has obtained +the Nizam's approbation of a treaty, that had already been settled +between Nana and the Nizam's general, the basis of which is that +Bajee is to be re-established, with Nana himself as minister and, +on the other hand, the territory formerly seized by the Peishwa to +be restored.</p> +<p>"My mission here is to inform Bajee Rao of the plans that have +been prepared, and to obtain from him a solemn engagement that Nana +shall be reappointed as his minister, on the success of his +plans."</p> +<p>Mr. Malet listened to Harry with increasing astonishment.</p> +<p>"This is important news, indeed," he said; "marvellous, and of +the highest importance to me. Already I have been asked, by the +Council of Bombay, to give my opinion as to whether it is expedient +to render any assistance to Nana Furnuwees. It is, to them, almost +as important as to Nana that Scindia should not obtain supreme +power. I have replied that I could not recommend any such step, for +that Nana's cause seemed altogether lost; and that any aid to him +would be absolutely useless, and would only serve Scindia with a +pretext for declaring war against us. Of course, what you have told +me entirely alters the situation. It will not be necessary for the +Council to assist Nana, but they can give him fair words and, even +if Balloba should win the day, he will have no ground for accusing +us of having aided Nana.</p> +<p>"It is impossible to overlook the value of your communication, +Mr. Lindsay; and I can promise you that you will not find the +Government of Bombay ungrateful, for it will relieve them of the +anxiety which the progress of events here has caused them."</p> +<p>On leaving the Residency, Harry returned to the farm where he +had left his horse and, early next morning, put on his disguise +again, painted lines round his eyes, touched some of the hairs of +his eyebrows with white paint, mixed some white horsehair with the +tuft on the top of his head, and dropped a little juice of a plant +resembling belladonna--used at times, by ladies in the east, to +dilate the pupils of their eyes and make them dark and +brilliant--in his eyes.</p> +<p>Soyera had told him of this herb, when he related to her how +Balloba had detected him by the lightness of his eyes. He was +greatly surprised at the alteration it effected in his appearance, +and felt assured that even Balloba himself would not again +recognize him.</p> +<p>He bought a dozen sacks of grain from the farmer and, placing +these in the bullock cart, started for Scindia's camp. He had, +during the night, buried the gold; for he thought that, until he +knew his ground, and could feel certain of entering Bajee Rao's +camp unquestioned, it would be better that there should be nothing +in the cart, were he searched, to betray him. He carried in his +hand the long staff universally used by bullock drivers and, +passing through Poona, arrived an hour later at the camp, which was +pitched some three miles from the city.</p> +<p>As large numbers of carts, with forage and provisions, arrived +daily in the camp for the use of the troops, no attention whatever +was paid to him and, on enquiring for the encampment of Bajee +Rao--one of whose officers had, he said, purchased the grain, for +his horses and those of his officers and escort--he soon found the +spot, which was on somewhat rising ground in the centre of the +camp. It was much larger than he had expected to find it as, beyond +being prevented from leaving, Bajee had full liberty, and was even +permitted to have some of his friends round him, and two or three +dozen troopers of his household regiment.</p> +<p>In charge of these was a young officer, who was well known to +Harry during the time of Mahdoo Rao. Seeing him standing in front +of a tent, Harry stopped the cart opposite to him and, leaving it, +went up to him.</p> +<p>"Where shall I unload the cart?" he asked.</p> +<p>"I know nothing about it," the officer said. "Who has ordered +it? The supply will be welcome enough, for we are very short of +forage."</p> +<p>Then, changing his tone, Harry said:</p> +<p>"You do not know me, Nujeef. I am your friend, Puntojee."</p> +<p>"Impossible!" the other said, incredulously.</p> +<p>"It is so. I am not here for amusement, as you may guess; but am +on a private mission to Bajee Rao. Will you inform him that I am +here? I dare not say whom I come from, even to you; but can explain +myself fully to him."</p> +<p>"I will let him know, certainly, Puntojee; but there is little +doubt that Balloba has his spies here, and it will be necessary to +arrange that your meeting shall not be noticed. Do you sit down +here by your cart, as if waiting for orders where to unload it. I +will go across to Bajee's tent, and see him."</p> +<p>Nujeef accordingly went over to the rajah's tent, and returned +in a quarter of an hour.</p> +<p>"Bajee will see you," he said. "First unload your grain in the +lines of our cavalry, place some in front of your bullocks, and +leave them there; then cross to the tent next to Bajee's. It is +occupied by one of his officers, who carries the purse and makes +payments. Should you be watched, it would seem that you are only +going there to receive the price of the grain. Bajee himself will +slip out of the rear of his tent, and enter the next in the same +way. The officer is, at present, absent; so that you can talk +without anyone having an idea that you and Bajee are together."</p> +<p>Harry carried out the arrangement and, after leaving his +bullocks, made his way to the spot indicated. He found the young +rajah had gone there.</p> +<p>"And you are Puntojee!" the latter said. "I saw you but a few +times, but Rao Phurkay has often mentioned your name, to me, as +being one who stood high in the confidence of my cousin Mahdoo. +Nujeef tells me that you have a private communication to make to +me; and indeed, I can well believe that. You would not thus +disguise yourself, unless the business was important."</p> +<p>"It is, Your Highness. Nana Furnuwees has received your message. +He reciprocates your expressions of friendship, and has sent me +here to let you know that the time is approaching when your +deliverance from Balloba can be achieved."</p> +<p>He then delivered the message with which he had been entrusted. +Bajee's face became radiant, as he went on.</p> +<p>"This is news, indeed," he said. "That Phurkay was faithful to +me, I knew; but I thought that he was the only friend I had left. +Truly Nana Furnuwees is a great man, and I will gladly give the +undertaking he asks for; that, in the event of his succeeding in +placing me on the musnud, he shall be my minister, with the same +authority and power that he had under Mahdoo."</p> +<p>"I have, at the farmhouse where I am stopping, a thousand gold +mohurs, which Nana has sent to enable you to begin your +preparations; but he urges that you should be extremely careful +for, as you see by what I have told you, he has ample power to +carry out the plan without any assistance from yourself, and it is +most important that nothing shall be done that can arouse the +suspicions of Balloba, until all is ready for the final stroke. I +have not brought it with me, today, as I knew not how vigilant they +might be in camp, and it was possible that my sacks of grain might +be examined. As, however, I passed in without question, I will +bring it when I next come, which will be in two days."</p> +<p>"I suppose there is no objection to my telling Phurkay what is +being done?"</p> +<p>"None at all, Your Highness. He has not yet been informed, +though communications have passed between him and Nana. But, +although the latter was well convinced of his devotion, he thought +it safer that no one should know the extent of the plot, until all +was in readiness."</p> +<p>Two days later, Harry made another journey to the camp, and this +time with the bags of money hidden among the grain, in one of the +sacks. He saw Bajee Rao, as before, and received from him a paper, +with the undertaking required by Nana. The sack containing the +money was put down where Bajee's horses were picketed, and was +there opened by a confidential servant, who carried the bags into +the tent which was close by.</p> +<p>As he was leaving the camp, Harry had reason to congratulate +himself on the precautions that he had taken; for he met Balloba, +riding along with a number of officers. Harry had, with his change +of costume, assumed the appearance of age. He walked by the side of +the bullocks, stooping greatly and leaning on his staff; and the +minister passed without even glancing at him.</p> +<p>Harry, on his return, paid the farmer for the hire of his cart. +The latter was well pleased for, in addition to the money so +earned, he had charged a good price for the two waggon loads of +grain. Harry then put off the peasant's dress, and resumed that of +a trooper, and rode back to Raygurh, where he reported to Nana the +success of his mission.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch5" id="Ch5">Chapter 5</a>: Down To Bombay.</h2> +<p>Harry's stay with Nana was a short one as, in three days, he was +again sent to Poona. This time he was to take up his abode at a +large house, occupied by two of the leaders of Bajee's party; the +rajah having told him that he would request them to entertain him, +if he should again come to Poona. He was the bearer of fifty +thousand rupees, principally in gold, which he was to give to them +for the use of Bajee. He had no message this time for the prince, +personally, Nana having said to him:</p> +<p>"I want you to let me know how matters are going on. The young +man may do something rash and, if Balloba's suspicions are in any +way excited, he may send him to some distant fortress; which would +seriously upset my plans, for I should have to retain Chimnajee in +power, as representative of his brother.</p> +<p>"We know that he was placed on the musnud greatly in opposition +to his wishes; and he certainly hailed, with pleasure, the prospect +of Bajee's release. Still, it would not be the same thing for me. A +minister of the Peishwa can rule without question by the people +but, acting only as minister to a representative of the Peishwa, he +would be far more severely criticised; and it is certain that, to +raise money for paying Scindia the sum that has been agreed upon, +extra taxation must be put on, the odium resulting from which would +fall upon me."</p> +<p>The two officers received Harry cordially. He had personally +known them both and, as Nana's representative, they would have +treated him with much honour, had it not been pointed out to them +that this might be fatal to their plans for, did Balloba hear that +some strange officer was being so treated by them, he would be sure +to set at once about finding out who he was, and what he was doing +there.</p> +<p>"Matters are going on well," they said. "The old general, +Manajee Phurkay, who was one of Rugoba's devoted adherents, is now +staying in Bajee's camp, and is enlisting men for his service."</p> +<p>"Where are they being assembled?"</p> +<p>"In Bajee's camp. He is not interfered with, there."</p> +<p>"It appears to be a very rash proceeding," Harry said. "It is +true that Bajee has apparent liberty, and can have with him in his +camp many of his friends; but a gathering of armed men can scarcely +escape the eye of so keen an observer as Balloba."</p> +<a id="PicC" name="PicC"></a> +<center><img src="images/c.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Harry . . . saw a party of soldiers coming along the road." /> +</center> +<p>A few days later, Harry, being out one evening, saw a party of +soldiers coming along the road from the direction of Scindia's +camp. This was unusual for, in order to prevent plundering, the +orders were stringent that none of Scindia's troops should enter +Poona. He hurried back to the house, and acquainted the two leaders +with what he had seen. They were inclined to laugh at his +apprehension but, when a body of horsemen were seen coming down the +street, they issued orders for the doors to be closed and +barricaded. There were some twenty men in the house, and when the +officer who commanded the detachment summoned them to open the +door, and to deliver the two nobles to him, he was met by a decided +refusal, from the chiefs themselves, from an upper window.</p> +<p>The officer then ordered his men to dismount and break open the +door but, when they attempted to do so, they were met by a fire of +musketry from every window. Many fell; and the officer, seeing that +the house could not be taken, except by a force much larger than +that at his command, rode off at full speed, with the survivors, to +Scindia's camp.</p> +<p>No sooner had they gone than the horses were brought out from +the stables, and the two officers, with ten of their troopers, rode +off at full speed. Harry refused to accompany them, as he wished to +see what had really happened, in order to carry the news to Nana. +He therefore rode out to the farmhouse where he had before stayed, +left his horse there, and returned to Poona.</p> +<p>Here he heard that Rao Phurkay had been seized, and that Bajee +Rao's encampment was surrounded by troops, who suffered none to +enter or leave it. The next morning he went over there and found +that, as the supply of water had been cut off, the garrison had +surrendered; all being allowed to depart, with the exception of +Bajee, over whom a strong guard had been placed.</p> +<p>Before they left, Manajee Phurkay gave them all directions to +gather in the neighbourhood of Waee. They did so, and were joined +at once by the two chiefs. Nana promptly sent them a supply of +money, telling them to take up their position at the Salpee Ghaut; +where they were speedily joined by ten thousand men, and openly +declared for Bajee Rao.</p> +<p>In the meantime Balloba, believing that the whole plot was the +work of Bajee Rao, determined to despatch him, as a prisoner, to a +fortress in the heart of Scindia's dominions. He sent him off with +a strong escort, under the charge of an officer named Sukaram +Ghatgay who, although having command only of a troop of one hundred +horse, belonged to an ancient and honourable family.</p> +<p>Balloba could hardly have made a worse choice. Ghatgay had a +daughter who was reported to be of exceptional beauty, and the +young Scindia had asked her father for her hand. Ghatgay, an +ambitious and enterprising man, had given no decided answer; not +from any real hesitation, for he saw how enormous would be the +advantage, to himself, of such an alliance; but in order to +increase Scindia's ardour by pretended opposition, and so to secure +the best terms possible for himself. The reason he gave would +appear natural to any Mahratta of good blood, as none of these +would have given a daughter of their house to one who, however high +in rank, had ancestors belonging to a low caste.</p> +<p>Upon the way, Bajee, who was aware of Scindia's wishes, and was +most anxious to obtain his goodwill, urged Ghatgay to give him his +daughter in marriage and, after much pretended hesitation, the +latter agreed to do so--on condition that Bajee would authorize him +to promise Scindia a large sum of money, as soon as he again +ascended the musnud; and that he would get the prince to appoint +him his prime minister, which post would be vacant at the overthrow +of Balloba. This being arranged, Bajee Rao pretended that he was +seriously ill; and Ghatgay therefore halted, with his escort, on +the banks of the Paira.</p> +<p>Taking with him his disguise as a countryman, Harry, as soon as +he learned that Ghatgay had started with Bajee, mounted and +followed him; and travelled, at some little distance in rear of the +party, until they halted. Then he went to the house of a +cultivator, left his horse there, and exchanged his dress as +fighting man for that of a countryman.</p> +<p>There was no occasion for him, now, to disguise his age or +darken his eyes and, as before, he hired a cart, bought some grain +for forage, some sacks of rice and other things, and boldly entered +Ghatgay's camp. As the prices he asked were low, Ghatgay purchased +the whole contents of his cart. When this was cleared, Harry left +his cattle and wandered about, saying that he and the animals +needed an hour's rest.</p> +<p>Presently he passed Bajee Rao, who was standing listlessly at +the door of a tent.</p> +<p>"I am Puntojee," Harry said, as he passed. "I followed you with +the horse, that I might help you to escape."</p> +<p>"Stay and talk to me here," the young prince said. "It will seem +that I am only passing my time in asking you questions about the +country."</p> +<p>"I wanted to ascertain the road by which you will travel, after +crossing the river. I have money with me, and will endeavour to +raise a force of forty or fifty men; with which to make a sudden +attack upon your camp, after nightfall. I will bring a good horse +with me. If you will run out when you hear the uproar, I will ride +up with the spare horse. You will leap on to its back, and we can +gallop off."</p> +<p>"You are a brave fellow, Puntojee, and I thank you heartily for +your offer; but, happily, I stand in no need of it. I have gained +Ghatgay over, and he will linger here until we hear that Balloba +has been arrested, and that Nana Furnuwees is approaching Poona. +Believe me, I shall never forget your offer, or the fidelity that +has prompted it; and when I am established as Peishwa you shall, if +it pleases you, have any post at court you may desire."</p> +<p>"I thank you much, Prince; but I am an officer of Nana, and know +that, in acting as I have done, I am acting in his interest, as +well as yours. I am glad that the necessity for making an attack +upon the camp is obviated. I might have had considerable trouble in +raising a sufficient force for such a purpose, for even the most +reckless would hesitate to fall on one of Scindia's officers; and +in the next place, although I doubt not that I should have been +able to carry you off, Ghatgay would, as soon as he had beaten off +the attacking party, have set out in pursuit, and raised the whole +country, and the difficulty of reaching the Western Ghauts would +have been immense.</p> +<p>"I hope to see Your Highness at Poona."</p> +<p>So saying, he strolled carelessly back to the bullock cart, +waited till the animals had finished their feed, and then drove off +again; returned the cart to its owner, and started again for +Poona.</p> +<p>On his arrival there, he went to the Residency and informed Mr. +Malet that Bajee had gained over the officer who was escorting him, +and was ready to come back to Poona, as soon as the blow was +struck.</p> +<p>"It will be struck soon," Mr. Malet said. "All is in readiness. +I sent your report on to the Council, urging that, as it seemed +likely that Bajee Rao would soon be on the musnud, they should +express their readiness to recognize him. I received a despatch +only yesterday, saying that they perfectly agreed with me, and had +already sent off a messenger to Nana stating their willingness to +recognize Bajee as lawful heir to the late Peishwa.</p> +<p>"Things are working well. The Nizam's general has been ordered +to watch Purseram Bhow, who is raising troops for the purpose of +aiding in crushing Bajee's supporters. Holkar and Scindia's troops +also are in readiness to move and, after the fete of the Dussera, +the regular battalions in the Peishwa's service, commanded by Mr. +Boyd, will march to the Neera bridge, and a brigade of Scindia's +regulars will move against Raygurh.</p> +<p>"It is evident that neither Balloba nor Purseram has the +slightest suspicion of what is going on, or they would never have +despatched troops from here. I certainly have felt very uneasy, +since Bajee was carried away; for he is a necessary figure, and +should be here as soon as Nana arrives, otherwise there would be no +recognized head. It would have been hopeless to try to deliver him, +once imprisoned in one of the strong fortresses in Scindia's +dominions; and the latter could have made any terms for himself +that he chose to dictate.</p> +<p>"Your news has relieved me of this anxiety, and I think it +probable that everything will now be managed without bloodshed; and +that we may, for a time, have peace here."</p> +<p>The next morning, Harry rode off and rejoined Nana, who thanked +him warmly for the manner in which he had carried out his mission, +and especially for his offer to attempt to rescue Bajee from his +captors.</p> +<p>"It would have been the greatest misfortune," he said, "had he +been carried far away. I should have been obliged to recognize his +brother Chimnajee; and Scindia, having Bajee in his hands, would +have kept up a constant pressure, and might probably have marched +to Poona to restore him; which he would certainly have succeeded in +doing, for the feeling of the population would have been all in +favour of the lawful heir.</p> +<p>"As a token of my satisfaction, here is an order upon my +treasurer for fifty thousand rupees."</p> +<p>All being ready, Scindia, on the 27th of October, suddenly +arrested Balloba; and sent a body of his troops, with those of the +Nizam's general, for the purpose of seizing Purseram Bhow. The +latter, receiving news of what had happened in good time, and +taking with him Chimnajee, fled to a fortress; but was quickly +pursued, and obliged to surrender. Bajee Rao was brought back to +Beema, eighteen miles from Poona. His brother Amrud, and Rao +Phurkay, were also released.</p> +<p>Nana joined his army at the Salpee Ghaut, and Scindia's +infantry, under Mr. Boyd, marched for the capital; which Nana +refused to enter, however, until he had received a formal +declaration, from Bajee, that he intended no treachery against him. +This pledge was given; and a treaty was, at the same time, entered +into by the Nizam and Scindia, both agreeing to establish Bajee Rao +on the musnud, and reinstate Nana as his prime minister. These +matters being settled, Nana returned to Poona, from which he had +been absent for nearly a year, and resumed the duties of prime +minister.</p> +<p>A fortnight later, Bajee Rao was solemnly invested as Peishwa. +One of his first acts was to send for Harry, to whom he gave a robe +of honour, and thirty thousand rupees in money, in token of his +gratitude for the risk he had run in communicating with him, and +for his daring proposal to rescue him from the hands of his +escort.</p> +<p>On the day after Nana's re-entry into the capital, Harry +received a note from Mr. Malet, asking him to call.</p> +<p>"I expect Colonel Palmer to relieve me of my duties here, in the +course of a day or two. I need scarcely say I shall be glad to be +released from a work which is surrounded with infinite difficulty, +and which constantly upsets all human calculations. Nana is in +power again; but another turn of the wheel may take place, at any +moment, and he may again be an exile, or possibly a prisoner.</p> +<p>"It seems to me that it would be well for you to accompany me to +Bombay. The remembrance of your services will be fresh, and they +cannot but be recognized by the Council. That body is frequently +changed and, in two or three years' time, there will be fresh men, +who will know nothing of what has happened now, and be indisposed +to rake up old reports and letters, or to reward past services; +especially as the whole position here may have altered, half a +dozen times, before that."</p> +<p>"I will gladly do so, sir, and thank you very heartily for your +kindness. I will ride over to Jooneer, tomorrow, and bring my old +nurse down with me; and I have no doubt Sufder will be willing to +accompany us. He has rendered good services to Nana; and the latter +will, I am sure, grant him leave of absence for as long as may be +necessary."</p> +<p>"I think it would certainly be best to take them both down, if +possible. They could make affidavits, in Bombay, that would place +it beyond doubt that you are Major Lindsay's son. It is morally +certain that there are relatives of your father and mother still +living, in England. I do not say that you require any assistance +from them; but when you return home, as everyone does, two or three +times, in the course of his Indian service, it would be pleasant to +find friends there; and it would be well that your position should +be established beyond all question."</p> +<p>"I will gladly go down with you," Soyera said, when Harry laid +the matter before her. "I am happy and contented here, but should +be glad to see Bombay again. It was my home for ten years. I am +very glad you have made up your mind to go, for it is time that you +should take your place among your countrymen; and the +recommendation of the Resident at the court of Poona is as good a +one as you could wish for.</p> +<p>"I should say that you had better give up, at once, staining +your skin. I can see that you have not used the dye for some days, +and it would be as well to recover your proper colour, before Mr. +Malet introduces you to the Council at Bombay."</p> +<p>"I will ride down to the town," Harry said, "and engage a gharry +[a native carriage] to carry you to Poona. When we get there, I +shall learn what route Mr. Malet will take, and how fast he will +travel; and shall then see which will be the best for you--to go +down in a gharry, or to be carried in a dhoolie [a palanquin]."</p> +<p>"But all this will cost money, Harry."</p> +<p>"I am well provided with funds," Harry said, "for the Nana and +Bajee Rao have both made me handsome presents for the services I +rendered them. There is, therefore, no reason why we should not +travel in comfort."</p> +<p>They arrived at Poona two days later; and Harry--having +ascertained that the new Resident would not arrive until the next +day, and that he would probably wish Mr. Malet to defer his +departure for at least two days, in order to give him his +experience of the factions and intrigues there, and of the +character of all those who were likely to influence events--rode to +see Nana, who had not yet returned to Poona.</p> +<p>"I have come, your excellency," he said, "to tell you that it is +my wish to retire from the public service."</p> +<p>The minister looked greatly surprised.</p> +<p>"Why, Puntojee," he said, "this sounds like madness. Young as +you are, you have secured powerful protectors, both in the Peishwa +and myself; and you may hope to reach a high office in the state, +as you grow older.</p> +<p>"I do not know, though," he went on, speaking to himself rather +than to the lad, "that high office is a thing to be desired. It +means being mixed up in intrigues of all kinds, being the object of +jealousy and hatred, and running a terrible risk of ruin at every +change in the government here."</p> +<p>Then he turned again to Harry.</p> +<p>"And what are you thinking of doing?"</p> +<p>"I will speak frankly to your highness. I am not a Mahratta, as +you and everyone else suppose. I am the son of English +parents."</p> +<p>And he then went on to give an account of the killing of his +father and mother, and of how he was saved by Soyera, and brought +up as her son; until such times as he might, with advantage, go +down to Bombay. Nana listened with great interest.</p> +<p>"It is a strange tale," he said, when Harry brought the story to +a conclusion, "and explains things which have, at times, surprised +me. In the first place, the colour of your eyes always struck me as +peculiar. Then your figure is not that of my countrymen. There are +many as tall as you; but they have not your width of shoulders, and +strong build. Lastly, I have wondered how a young Mahratta should +be endowed with so much energy and readiness, be willing to take +heavy responsibilities on his shoulders, and to be so full of +resource.</p> +<p>"Now that you have told me your story, I think you are right to +go down and join your own people. Everything is disturbed, and +nothing is certain from day to day here. I was a fugitive but a +short time ago and, ere long, I may again be an exile.</p> +<p>"Moreover, no one can tell what may happen to him. Your people +are quarrelling with Tippoo, as they quarrelled with his father, +Hyder; and I think that, before long, it is possible they will +overthrow him, and take possession of his territory.</p> +<p>"Were the various powers of India united, this could not be so; +but the English will always find some ready to enter into an +alliance with them, and will so enlarge their dominions. The +Mahrattas may laugh at the idea of their being overthrown, by such +small armies as those the English generals command; but our +constant dissensions, and the mutual jealousy between Holkar, +Scindia, the Peishwa, the Rajah of Berar, and others, will prevent +our ever acting together. It may be that we shall be conquered +piecemeal.</p> +<p>"I have watched, very closely, all that has taken place in +southern India and in Bengal. I have seen a handful of traders +gradually swallowing up the native powers, and it seems to me that +it may well be that, in time, they may become the masters of all +India. Were I to say as much to any of our princes, they would +scoff at my prediction; but it has been my business to learn what +was passing elsewhere, and I have agents at Madras and Calcutta, +and their reports are ever that the power of the English is +increasing. A few years ago, it seemed that the French were going +to carry all before them; but they, like our native princes, have +gone down before the English; who seem, moreover, to get on better +than the French with the natives, and to win their respect and +liking.</p> +<p>"Well, young sir, I shall be sorry to lose you; because while I, +and with good reason, was seldom able to trust, and to give my +absolute confidence to any of those around me, I have always felt +that I could wholly rely on you. During the past year I have seen +much of you, and have freely told my plans to you, as I have done +to no others; and have chosen you for missions that I could not, +with safety, have entrusted to any of my own followers, knowing +that Scindia or Holkar would be ready to pay great sums for these +secrets. None except Bajee, to whom I sent you with particulars, +were aware of the extent of my plans, or that I was in +communication with more than one of the rajahs.</p> +<p>"You have played your part marvellously well, for I should not +have deemed it possible that one of your race could live so long +among us, without exciting any suspicion. While you remain in +Bombay, I hope that you will act as my confidential agent. I do not +ask you to divulge any secrets you may learn, relating to projects +connected with the Deccan; but I should like to be informed as to +the course of affairs, generally. Of course, my dealings with the +Council there must be carried on through the English Resident; but +there is much information respecting the views of the Council with +regard to Tippoo, the Nizam, and Bengal, that will be valuable for +me to know."</p> +<p>"I could not so act, your excellency, without permission from +the Council; but I should imagine that they would not be averse to +such an arrangement, especially as, perhaps, you would give me +private information as to the state of parties, here, such as you +would not care to tell their Resident."</p> +<p>"Certainly I would do so. They change their Residents so +frequently that it would be impossible for new men to really +understand the situation; which you, with your intimate knowledge +of Poona, could readily grasp. Of course the arrangement could only +be temporary, as my own position is so uncertain and, in any case, +my life cannot now be a long one.</p> +<p>"I should propose that your salary, as my private agent, be a +thousand rupees a month."</p> +<p>"I thank you much, sir; and if I stay at Bombay, and obtain the +permission of the Council to correspond with you, I will readily +undertake the part. They can have little objection to the +arrangement, as doubtless you have agents in Bombay, already."</p> +<p>"Certainly I have, but these are natives, and necessarily can +only send me the rumours current in the bazaars, or known generally +to the public; and their news is, for the most part, +worthless."</p> +<p>"I have another favour to request," Harry said; "namely, that +you will give leave of absence to Sufder, in order that he may +accompany me to Bombay. He and my old nurse could, alone, +substantiate my birth and identity; and it would be necessary for +them to give their evidence before some legal authority."</p> +<p>"That I will readily do. Sufder is honest and faithful, and I +can rely upon him, absolutely, for anything in his sphere of duty; +and have, only today, appointed him to the command of two hundred +men; but although he has a hand ready to strike, he has no brain +capable of planning. Had it not been so, I should before this have +raised him to a higher position. When he returns from Bombay, I +will grant him the revenues of a village, of which he shall be the +patal [a mayor]; so that, in his old age, he will be able to live +in comfort."</p> +<p>On leaving the minister, Harry went to Sufder's camp.</p> +<p>"'So you are back again, Puntojee?"</p> +<p>"Yes, and have brought Soyera down with me."</p> +<p>"I have great news to tell you," the soldier went on.</p> +<p>"It will not be news to me, Sufder. I know that your command has +been doubled, and that you will now be the captain of two hundred +men; but I can tell you much more than that. You are to accompany +me down to Bombay, the day after tomorrow, so as to give evidence +about my birth; and furthermore, Nana will, on your return, bestow +upon you the jagheer [revenue] of a village district; so that, as +he says, when you grow too old for service, you will be able to +live comfortably."</p> +<p>"That is good news indeed--better even than that I am to have +the command of two hundred men, for in truth I am beginning to be +weary of service. I am now nearly fifty, and I feel myself growing +stiff. Nothing would please me more than to be the patal of a +village community, of which I hold the jagheer. However, so long as +Nana lives and retains power I shall remain a soldier; but at his +death I shall serve no other master, and shall take to country life +again.</p> +<p>"Does Nana know that you are English?"</p> +<p>"Yes, I have told him my story. I was obliged to give my reasons +for resigning and, as Nana has the support of the Government of +Bombay, there was no risk in my doing so.</p> +<p>"How long will it be before I get quite rid of this colour, +Sufder?"</p> +<p>"That I cannot say. I should think that in a fortnight the +greater part of it will have faded out, but maybe Soyera knows of +something that will remove it more rapidly."</p> +<p>Soyera, when asked, said that she knew of nothing that would +remove the dye at once; but that if he washed his hands and face, +two or three times a day, with a strong lye made from the ashes of +a plant that grows everywhere on the plain, it would help to get +rid of it.</p> +<p>"I will go out, tomorrow morning, and fetch some in."</p> +<p>When she had made the lye, and mixed it with oil, it made a very +strong soap.</p> +<p>"How do you mean to dress, to go down, Harry?"</p> +<p>"I have no choice; but even if I had, I should ride out of here +in my best court suit, and change it for English clothes when we +got down the Ghauts. I may have to come up here again, for aught I +know; and it is better, therefore, that no one should know that I +am English."</p> +<p>Mr. Malet, however, solved the difficulty; for when, in the +evening, Harry went to enquire about the time that they would +start, he said:</p> +<p>"I had been thinking of offering you a suit to ride down in but, +unfortunately, my clothes would be a great deal too small for you. +However, I think that, after all, it is best you should go down as +you are. In the first place, you would not show to advantage in +English clothes, in which you would feel tight and uncomfortable, +at first; and in the second place, I think that it is perhaps as +well that the Council should see you as you are, then they would +the better understand how you have been able to pass as a Mahratta, +all these years.</p> +<p>"I will introduce you, now, to Colonel Palmer. It is important +that he should know you, for possibly you may be sent up here on +some mission or other--for which, having the favour of Nana, you +would be specially fitted."</p> +<p>Accordingly, the next morning they started early. Soyera had +prepared the liquid soap, but as it was decided that he should go +in native dress, Harry thought it as well not to use it, especially +as the dye was gradually wearing off. The party consisted of Mr. +Malet, Sufder, and Harry; with an escort of ten cavalrymen, +belonging to one of the native regiments. The mission clerk had +been transferred to Colonel Palmer, as his knowledge of affairs +would be useful to the newcomer. Soyera was carried in a dhoolie, +and followed close behind the troopers.</p> +<p>That evening they descended the Ghauts into the Concan and +encamped there and, on the following day, rode into Bombay; where +Mr. Malet took them to an hotel, principally used by natives of +rank visiting Bombay.</p> +<p>"You had best stay here, till I send for you," he said, to +Harry. "I shall see some of the Council tonight. No doubt there +will be a formal meeting, tomorrow, to ask my opinion about the +probability of the present state of things continuing at Poona. I +shall, of course, tell them your story; and they will likely +request you to go, at once, to see them; therefore, do not leave +the hotel until you hear from me."</p> +<p>Sufder had not previously visited Bombay, and the next morning +early he went out, with Soyera as his guide, to inspect the +European part of the town. He was much struck with the appearance +of neatness and order in the fort, and the solidity of the +buildings.</p> +<p>"It is a strong place, assuredly," he said to Harry, on his +return. "In the first place, it would be necessary for a force +attacking it to cross over the narrow isthmus, and causeway, +uniting the island with the land; and that would be impossible, in +face of a force provided with artillery guarding it. Then, if they +succeeded in winning that, they would have to make their way +through the native town to get on to the maidan; and this would be +defended by the guns from all the batteries and, in addition to the +artillery on land, it might be swept by guns on board ship. Truly, +those who talked about driving the English into the sea cannot have +known anything of the strength of the position.</p> +<p>"As to carrying it by assault, it could not be done; nor could +the garrison be starved out, since they could always obtain +supplies of all sorts by sea. And yet, except at the causeway, the +place has no natural strength. The Mahrattas acted unwisely, +indeed, when they allowed the English to settle here."</p> +<p>"They could not foresee the future, Sufder. Now, doubtless, they +are sorry; but if in the future the British become masters of +India, the Mahrattas will have no reason to regret having given +them a foothold. Wherever their powers extend, the natives are far +better off than they were under the rule of their own princes. Were +the British masters, there would be no more wars, no more +jealousies, and no more intrigues; the peasants would till their +fields in peace, and the men who now take to soldiering would find +more peaceful modes of earning a living."</p> +<p>"But you do not think, surely, Harry,"--for after leaving Poona, +he had been told to call him so--"that the English can ever become +masters of India? They conquered the Carnatic, but even there they +were not safe from the forays of Hyder Ali. Mysore bars their way +farther north. Then there is the Nizam to be dealt with, and then +Berar and the Mahrattas; then comes Rajputana, and beyond are the +Sikhs, and the fierce chiefs of Scinde. It is true that the English +have beaten the peoples of lower Bengal, but these have always been +looked down upon, and despised as cowardly and effeminate, by the +fighting men of all India.</p> +<p>"Besides, how few are the white soldiers! They say, too, that +the French have promised Tippoo to send a big army, to help to +drive the English into the sea."</p> +<p>"The French have quite work enough, at home," Harry said. "It is +true that they have got into Egypt, but they are shut up there by +our fleets. Moreover, even were they to cross over into Arabia, how +could they march across a dry and almost waterless country, for a +thousand or two of miles? When they arrived in Scinde they would +find all the fighting men of the province, and the Sikhs, opposed +to them; and they would never be able to fight their way down to +Mysore. The thing is absurd."</p> +<p>The conversation was interrupted by the arrival of a messenger, +from the Government House, with a request that Mr. Lindsay should +at once attend there. Harry's horse, which had been saddled in +readiness, was brought round; for it would have seemed strange for +a Mahratta, whose dress showed that he held a good position, to go +on foot. Sufder rode by his side, Soyera following on foot.</p> +<p>Dismounting at the Government House, he threw the reins to one +of the lads, who were waiting in readiness to hold the horses of +officers coming to see the Governor. On Harry mentioning his name, +the native doorkeeper said:</p> +<p>"I have orders for you to be taken, at once, to the Council +chamber, sahib, on your arrival here."</p> +<p>The Governor, with four members of the Council and Mr. Malet, +were seated at a long table. Mr. Malet rose and said:</p> +<p>"This is Mr. Lindsay, gentlemen."</p> +<p>"Truly, sir, it would be difficult to recognize you as a fellow +countryman, in that garb," the Governor said; "though your colour +is somewhat less dark than that of a Mahratta."</p> +<p>"Since I left Poona I have ceased to dye, sir; as to my dress, +this will be the last time I shall wear it, unless I should be +called upon to go to Poona again."</p> +<p>"Your story is a most singular one," the Governor said, "but Mr. +Malet assures us that you are the son of Major Lindsay, and has +been telling us how you escaped the massacre at the camp, and how +your ayah has brought you up."</p> +<p>"She has come down with me, sir. I thought that her testimony +would be necessary; and I have also brought down her cousin, who +was present at the foray in which my father and mother were killed. +My account will be confirmed by their statements."</p> +<p>"You do credit to Mahratta food and training, Mr. Lindsay; but +Mr. Malet has mentioned to me that, at one time, you were employed +as a shikaree, to keep down the tigers which were doing havoc among +the villagers near the top of the Ghauts. He has also informed us +of the very valuable service you rendered, by informing him of Nana +Furnuwees' measures for regaining power, and replacing Bajee Rao on +the musnud--intelligence which saved us a great expenditure of +money in preparing to support him; with the certainty that, by +doing so, we might excite the enmity of Scindia. He tells us, also, +why you continued so long in the Deccan, instead of coming down +here; and I think you acted very wisely.</p> +<p>"We have mentioned your services, in that matter, in our reports +to the Board of Directors; and have said that, partly as a +recognition of this, and partly because you are the son of an +English officer, who was killed in their service, we should at once +give you an appointment, subject to their approval.</p> +<p>"Now, sir, which would you prefer, the civil or military +branch?"</p> +<p>"I should much prefer the military," Harry answered, without +hesitation; "unless indeed, sir, you think my services would be +more useful in the civil."</p> +<p>"If we were at Calcutta or Madras, there would be more scope for +you in the civil service; but as we hold, at present, little +territory beyond this island, there are therefore but few +appointments affording an opportunity for the display of the +intelligence which you certainly possess; but, should circumstances +alter, you might, owing to your knowledge of the country and its +language, be told off for civil work, in which the emoluments are +very much higher than in the military branch of the service.</p> +<p>"You will at once be gazetted to the 3rd Native Cavalry, and do +duty with the regiment, until your services are required elsewhere. +Fresh disturbances may break out at Poona and, in that case, you +might be attached as assistant to Colonel Palmer.</p> +<p>"Do you think you would be known again?"</p> +<p>"I think it would be very unlikely, sir. When my skin has +recovered its proper colour, and I am dressed in uniform, I feel +sure no one would recognize me as having been an officer in the +Peishwa's court."</p> +<p>"Very well, sir. Then you will see your name in the gazette, +tomorrow. You will, within a day or so, report yourself to the +officer commanding the regiment.</p> +<p>"I may say that it would be well if your nurse, and the man who +came down with you, were to draw up statements concerning your +birth, and swear to them at the High Court. These might be valuable +to you, in the future."</p> +<p>After expressing his thanks to the Governor and Council, Harry +went out, and rode back to the hotel with Sufder.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch6" id="Ch6">Chapter 6</a>: In The Company's +Service.</h2> +<p>There was no conversation between Harry and Sufder on the way +back to the hotel; Harry saying that he would tell the news when +Soyera joined them, otherwise he would have to go through it twice. +They rode slowly through the streets, and Soyera arrived a few +minutes after them.</p> +<p>"Now," Harry said, "we will go up to my room and talk the matter +over.</p> +<p>"Mr. Malet has been kind enough to give such a favourable report +of me that I am appointed lieutenant to the 3rd Regiment of Native +Cavalry, and shall be employed as assistant to the resident at +Poona, should there be fresh disturbances there."</p> +<p>"That is good fortune, indeed," Sufder said.</p> +<p>"Wonderfully good fortune! and I owe it all, in the first place +to Soyera, and in the next to yourself. You see, I have gained +greatly by taking your advice, and remaining in the Deccan until +fit for military service. Had she declared who I was when she took +me down to Bombay, before, there is no saying what might have +become of me.</p> +<p>"And now, the first thing to do is for me to go out and order a +uniform. When I return I will draw up, in Mahratti and English, a +full account of the manner in which I was saved, by Soyera and you, +from being murdered; and how I have been brought up."</p> +<p>Harry had learned, at the Governor's, the name and address of an +official at the Judge's Court who would get his statements copied +out, in proper form and writing; and when he had taken them down +from the lips of Sufder and Soyera, he saw this gentleman, who +promised that the documents should be ready by the next day.</p> +<p>Having thus put his business in train, Harry went to call upon +Mrs. Sankey. She did not recognize him at once but, as soon as he +made himself known, she received him most warmly.</p> +<p>"You looked as if you would grow into a big fellow, but I hardly +expected that you would have done it so soon."</p> +<p>"It is more than four years since I left you. I don't think that +I am likely to grow any taller than I am; though of course, I shall +get broader."</p> +<p>He then told her what had happened since he left her, and how he +had just been appointed an officer in a native cavalry +regiment.</p> +<p>"I am very glad you have come now. My daughters have both +married, and I am going to sail for England in a few days. Whether +I shall stay there permanently, or come back, I cannot say but, at +any rate, I shall be away at least two years."</p> +<p>"I should have been very sorry to have missed you, Mrs. Sankey. +I have always looked back, with the greatest pleasure, at the time +I spent here."</p> +<p>"You have kept up your English well," she said.</p> +<p>"I have followed your advice, and hardly ever missed reading +aloud for an hour, so as to keep my tongue accustomed to it; and I +know many of Shakespeare's plays by heart, and could recite a great +many passages from the writings of Dean Swift, Mr. Addison, Mr. +Savage, and others."</p> +<p>His next visit was to Jeemajee, who received him with real +pleasure, when he told him who he was. Harry had not learned--nor +did he ever learn--that the kindly Parsee had contributed a hundred +pounds towards the expenses of his education; but he did know that +he had presented him with his outfit of clothes, and had been the +means of his being placed with Mrs. Sankey; and during the months +he remained at Bombay, he paid frequent visits to the man who had +so befriended him.</p> +<p>The next day he went with Sufder and Soyera, who swore to their +statements before the judge of the High Court.</p> +<p>As soon as his uniform was ready, Harry went to his +regiment--which was encamped on the maidan, between the fort and +the native town--and was introduced to the colonel.</p> +<p>"I have come to report myself, sir," he said to the colonel. "My +name is Lindsay."</p> +<p>"I was expecting you," the colonel said, "for Mr. Malet came in +this morning and told me about you; saying that you would most +likely come either today or tomorrow. I will have a tent pitched +for you, this afternoon; and a soldier told off as your servant. Of +course, at first you will have to go through the somewhat +unpleasant task of learning your drill.</p> +<p>"From what Mr. Malet told me, I think you are not likely to be +much with us as, from your perfect knowledge of Mahratti, and of +the country, you can do better service in a staff appointment than +with the regiment.</p> +<p>"You are much fairer than they had given me to expect."</p> +<p>"I have been hard at work, for the last two days, in getting rid +of the dyes with which I have been coloured, ever since I was an +infant."</p> +<p>"Ah! You are not very noticeably darker, now, than other +officers in the regiment.</p> +<p>"Now, I will hand you over to the adjutant. You will, of course, +mess with us today; and I can then introduce you to your brother +officers."</p> +<p>The adjutant was sent for, and soon entered.</p> +<p>"Mr. Lewis," the colonel said, "this is Mr. Lindsay, who was +gazetted to us two days ago. He will be very useful to us, if we go +up to Poona again--of which there is always a possibility--for he +speaks Mahratti like a native, having lived among the people since +he was an infant. He is the son of Major Lindsay, who was killed +here at the time of the advance on Poona."</p> +<p>"You will be a great acquisition to us," the adjutant said, as +he left the tent with Harry. "Most of us speak a little Mahratti; +but it will be very useful to have one of us who is perfect, in +that way. Of course, you have not got your full kit yet; but you +will want a mess jacket and waistcoat. These I can lend you, till +you get your own made."</p> +<p>"They are ordered already, and I am to get them in a couple of +days. It was so much more important that I should get the undress +uniform, to enable me to begin work, that I did not press the +tailor quite so much as to the other clothes."</p> +<p>"Are you ready to begin work, at once?"</p> +<p>"The sooner the better," Harry replied.</p> +<p>"Then I shall hand you over to the native officer, who has +charge of the drilling of recruits. There is a small yard, behind +the barracks, where Europeans are instructed in the first stages. +To see them doing the goose step would not add to the respect the +soldiers have for their white officers. They are therefore taught +such matters in private so that, when they come out for company +drill, they are not quite at sea."</p> +<p>Half an hour later, Harry was at work under the instructions of +a native officer. By the time he had finished, a tent had been +erected for him; and he was glad to find a bath ready, for it was +much warmer down in Bombay than above the Ghauts, and it had been +hot work drilling. The adjutant had chosen a Mahratta servant, and +the man's surprise, when the newly-joined officer addressed him in +his own language, was great.</p> +<p>As Mr. Malet had told him that, except when on duty, the +officers generally wore civilian clothes, he had purchased several +white suits, consisting of jacket and trousers, as these were kept +in stock by a Parsee tailor; and he put on one of these, with a +white shirt, after he had finished his bath. He had scarcely done +so when a bugle sounded.</p> +<p>"That is the call for tiffin, sahib," Abdool said.</p> +<p>"Do the officers go in uniform?"</p> +<p>"No, sahib, not to this meal."</p> +<p>Just at this moment, the adjutant came in.</p> +<p>"Come along, Lindsay," he said. "I thought I would come round +for you. It is rather trying going into a room full of +strangers."</p> +<p>There were some twelve officers gathered in the mess tent, and +the adjutant introduced Harry to them, singly. They were all +curious to see him, having heard from the colonel--who had summoned +them to the tent, a quarter of an hour before the bugle +sounded--some particulars of his life; and how he had been at once +appointed to be lieutenant, without going through the usual term as +a cadet, as a reward for important services.</p> +<p>Their first impression of him was a favourable one. He was now +nearly six feet in height, with a powerful and well-knit frame. His +face was pleasant and good tempered and, although the features were +still boyish, there was an expression of restraint and +determination that had been acquired from the circumstances in +which he had been placed.</p> +<p>He had seen the barbarous splendour of the entertainments at the +Peishwa's court, but nothing like the well-ordered table now before +him; with its snow-white cloth, its bright silver, and perfect +appointments.</p> +<p>When the meal was over, the colonel said:</p> +<p>"As duty is over for the day, I think it would be most +interesting if Mr. Lindsay would give us an account of his life, +and adventures. As you are all here, it would save him the trouble +of going over his story, again and again; for you are all, I am +sure, like myself, anxious to know how it was that he has been +able, all these years, to pass as a Mahratta among Mahrattas."</p> +<p>There was a general expression of agreement. Cheroots were +lighted, and Harry told his story, with some detail. When he had +finished, the colonel said:</p> +<p>"I am sure we are all obliged to you, Lindsay. You have had a +remarkable experience; and few of us have, in the course of our +lives, gone through anything like the same amount of adventures. To +have been, at your age, a peasant boy, an English school boy, a +shikaree, an officer in the Peishwa's court, a confidential agent +of Nana Furnuwees, and now a British officer, is indeed wonderful. +It speaks volumes for your intelligence and discretion."</p> +<p>"I cannot take the whole credit to myself, sir. I had two good +friends. My nurse, not content with saving my life, taught me +English, instructed me in the ways of our people, and even in their +religion, and continually urged me to exercise myself in every way; +so that when, some day, I left her, I should in bodily strength and +activity not be inferior to others; and, aided by her brother, +expended all her savings, of years, in having me educated here. +Next to her I owe much to Sufder, who first taught me the use of +arms, and then presented me to Nana. Without such an introduction I +must, had I entered the Mahratta service at all, have gone as a +private soldier, instead of obtaining at once a post at court.</p> +<p>"To Mrs. Sankey I owe very much for the kindness she showed me, +and the pains she took with me; and I owe much, too, to Mr. +Jeemajee, the Parsee merchant."</p> +<p>"Yes, you owe much to both of them," the colonel said; "but +their teaching and advice would not have gone for much, had it not +been for your own energy, and for the confidence you inspired in +the Peishwa's minister.</p> +<p>"What are you going to do about your nurse?"</p> +<p>"We have not quite arranged, as yet, sir; but she will, at any +rate, remain here for a time. She loves me as a mother; and I think +that, so long as I am quartered here, she will remain. She has +already found a lodging, at the house of a woman of the same caste +as herself; and tells me that she is sure she will be comfortable +with her. If we move, and all goes on quietly in the Deccan, she +will return to her brother's, where she is thoroughly at home and +happy."</p> +<p>"And Sufder?"</p> +<p>"He will return, in the course of a week or so. He is greatly +interested in what he sees here, especially in the shipping, never +having seen the sea before. I think that, probably, he will remain +for two or three years with his troop of two hundred men; and will +then settle in the village, of which and the surrounding country he +has received the jagheer. This, although not large, will suffice +for him to live in comfort. It is but a few miles from Jooneer, and +he will therefore be able to be near his friends, and pay frequent +visits to his cousin Ramdass."</p> +<p>In a short time Harry became a general favourite, and made the +acquaintance of the officers of all the regiments in the garrison; +for his romantic story speedily circulated and, before he had been +a fortnight in the city, he had received invitations to dine at all +their messes.</p> +<p>After the exciting life he had led, for two years, he felt, on +being released from drill, that life in a garrison town was dull +and monotonous. The simple habits, in which he had been brought up, +did not help him to enjoy heavy meals at regimental mess. +Occasionally he and two or three other officers crossed to the +mainland, and had some shooting in the wild district of the Concan. +But he was pleased when he received an order, from the Governor, to +call upon him.</p> +<p>"Colonel Palmer," he said, "has written, requesting me to send +him an assistant; as matters do not seem to be going on well at +Poona. He suggested that you, from your acquaintance with the +people and their intrigues, should be selected for the post but, +even had he not done so, I should have chosen you, as being better +fitted for it than any other officer here.</p> +<p>"Your instructions are simple. You will watch, and endeavour to +penetrate the schemes of the various factions, and assist Colonel +Palmer generally."</p> +<p>"Am I to go up in my uniform, sir; or to wear a disguise, +similar to that in which I came down here?"</p> +<p>"That is a matter over which I have been thinking. I have come +to the conclusion that you will be more likely to obtain +intelligence in native garb. All parties look with jealousy upon +us, and would be chary of giving any information to an officer of +the Residency; and therefore, if you have no objection, we think +that it will be an advantage to you to assume native dress. Of +course, you could not go in the attire that you came down in for, +although you would not be recognized in uniform, you would, if +dressed as before.</p> +<p>"I would rather leave that matter entirely to you, and also the +manner in which you can proceed. You must also decide, for +yourself, whether to renew your connection with Nana Furnuwees. It +appears to me that he is the only honest man in the Deccan, and the +only man who takes the patriotic view that there should be peace +and rest throughout the country. He is, however, no more willing +than others that we should, in any way, interfere in the affairs of +the Deccan."</p> +<p>"That certainly is so, sir; but I know that it is his most +earnest desire to possess the friendship of the authorities of +Bombay. He has frequently told me that he is a great admirer of the +English, of their methods of government, and of the +straightforwardness and sincerity with which they conduct their +business. But he is afraid of them. He sees that, where they once +make an advance, they never retire; and is convinced that, if they +obtained a footing above the Ghauts, there would be no turning them +out, and that their influence would be supreme."</p> +<p>"Very well, Mr. Lindsay; you showed such discretion and +judgment, during your residence at Poona, that I am well content to +leave the matter in your hands. The appointment as assistant to +Colonel Palmer will carry with it a civil allowance of three +hundred rupees a month. Of course, all necessary expenses will be +paid and, should you find it expedient to use a certain amount of +bribery, to obtain the news we require in other quarters besides +that of the minister, you will refer the matter to the +Resident.</p> +<p>"You will, of course, give your reports to Colonel Palmer, and +will be under his orders, generally. He will be requested to +further your special mission in every way in his power."</p> +<p>"When shall I start, sir?"</p> +<p>"As soon as you like, Mr. Lindsay."</p> +<p>"I shall be ready, sir, as soon as the clothes are made for me. +I must have one or two disguises, of various kinds, to use as most +desirable. Some of these I can, no doubt, buy ready made--perhaps +all of them. If so, I will start at daylight, tomorrow."</p> +<p>"Very well, Mr. Lindsay. I shall be sending up a despatch to +Colonel Palmer, and it will be left at your tent, this +evening."</p> +<p>On leaving the Government House, Harry went to see Soyera. +Scarcely a day had passed, since he came to Bombay, without his +paying her a visit.</p> +<p>"I am off again to Poona," he said. "I do not know how long I +shall be away. It must depend upon what is going on up there. Of +course, I should be glad to have you with me; but that would hamper +my movements. I shall, naturally, see Sufder as soon as I get +there."</p> +<p>"But what are you going for? Will you travel as an officer?"</p> +<p>"No, I shall be in disguise. It seems that things are unsettled; +and I am, if possible, to find out the intentions of the various +leaders, and communicate them privately to our Resident. I shall +have to take to dyeing my skin again, which is a nuisance, but it +cannot be helped. I shall take with me three or four different +disguises, and get you to do the shopping for me. I wish to have +them by this evening, as I shall start in the morning, early.</p> +<p>"I shall get leave to take my soldier servant, Abdool, with me. +He is a sharp fellow, and may be useful. I shall have to buy a pony +for him."</p> +<p>"What sort of disguises do you want?"</p> +<p>"One is that of a native soldier."</p> +<p>"That is easy enough, as it differs but little from the ordinary +Mahratta's dress."</p> +<p>"One would certainly be the attire of a trader, in good +circumstances. I can't think, at present, of any other."</p> +<p>"I should say the dress of a Brahmin might be useful," Soyera +suggested.</p> +<p>"Yes, that would give me an entry, unquestioned, to Nana, or to +any other person of importance."</p> +<p>By nightfall, Soyera had bought the three disguises, and +obtained from a native dyer a supply of stain sufficient for a long +time; and Harry had purchased two useful ponies, for himself and +his servant.</p> +<p>At mess, that evening, the colonel said:</p> +<p>"So you are going to leave us, for a time, Mr. Lindsay. I have +received a letter, from the Governor, requesting me to put you in +orders, tomorrow, as seconded from the regiment for civil +employment. I won't ask you where you are going. That is no +business of ours. But I am sure I can say, in the name of my +officers as well as myself, that we shall all miss you, very +much."</p> +<p>A murmur of acquiescence passed round the table and, seeing that +Harry, in thanking the colonel, made no allusion to what he was +going to do, they followed the example of their superior officer, +and abstained from asking any questions.</p> +<p>"I should like to take my man, Abdool, with me, Colonel," Harry +said, later on. "He is a sharp fellow, and I might find him very +useful."</p> +<p>"By all means. I will tell the adjutant that I have allowed him +to go with you."</p> +<p>"I am not going in uniform, nor are you to do so," Harry said to +Abdool, when he returned to his tent. "I am going in Mahratta +dress, and I shall take a lodging in the town, and pass as a +native. I know, Abdool, that you are a sharp fellow, and feel +certain that I can depend upon you."</p> +<p>"You can certainly depend upon me, sahib. You have been a kind +master, and I would do anything for you."</p> +<p>"What part of the country do you come from, Abdool?"</p> +<p>"From Rajapoor, in the Concan, sahib. I had no fancy for working +in the fields, so I left and took service with the Company. I have +never regretted it. I have been a great deal better off than if I +had enlisted in the army of one of the great chiefs. The pay is +higher, and we are very much better treated."</p> +<p>"Well, Abdool, when this business which I am now starting on is +over, I shall recommend you for promotion and, in any case, will +make you a present of three months' pay."</p> +<p>The next morning they started at daybreak. When a few miles out +of town, they took off their uniforms; and Harry put on the dress +of a trader. There was no occasion for any disguise for Abdool who, +like all the native troops, was accustomed, after drill was over +for the day, to put on native garments. The uniforms were then +folded up, and stowed in the wallets behind the saddles.</p> +<p>They had brought with them a good supply of grain for their +horses, and provisions for themselves; so that they might not have +to stop at any village. They rode at a steady pace, and mounted the +Ghauts by eleven o'clock. Then they waited three hours, to feed and +rest the animals and, just as the sun was setting, entered Poona, +having accomplished a journey of fifty miles. Knowing the place so +well, Harry rode to a quiet street near the bazaar and, seeing an +old man at one of the doors, asked him if he knew of anyone who +could afford accommodation for him and his servant.</p> +<p>"I can do that, myself," the man said. "I am alone in the house. +Two merchants who have been staying here left me, yesterday; and I +can let you have all the house, except one room for myself."</p> +<p>"You have no stables, I suppose?"</p> +<p>"No, sahib, but there is an outhouse which would hold the two +horses."</p> +<a id="PicD" name="PicD"></a> +<center><img src="images/d.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: There was a little haggling over the terms." /></center> +<p>There was a little haggling over the terms; for it would have +been altogether contrary, to Indian usages, to have agreed to any +price without demur. Finally the matter was arranged, at a price +halfway between that which the man demanded, and that offered by +Harry and, in a short time, they were settled in the two rooms of +the second floor. Harry then went out and bought two thick quilted +cushions, used as mattresses, and two native blankets.</p> +<p>They had still provisions enough for the evening. The furniture +was scanty, consisting of a raised bed place, or divan; two tables, +raised about a foot from the ground; brass basins, and large +earthenware jars of water. Harry, however, was too well accustomed +to it to consider such accommodation insufficient.</p> +<p>"Tomorrow," he said, "I will get a carpet for sitting upon, and +you will have to get copper vessels, for cooking."</p> +<p>Abdool presently went out, and returned with two large bundles +of forage for the horses. Soon afterwards they lay down, feeling +stiff and tired from their unaccustomed exertions.</p> +<p>The next morning Harry went to the Residency. He had again +painted caste marks on his face, which completely changed his +appearance. Telling the guard that he had come from Bombay, and had +a message for Colonel Palmer, he was shown in.</p> +<p>"You bring a message for me?" the colonel said, shortly; for he +was, at the time, writing a despatch.</p> +<p>"Yes, sir," Harry answered, in Mahratti. "I have come to be your +assistant."</p> +<p>"Then you are Mr. Lindsay!" the Resident exclaimed, dropping his +pen and rising to his feet. "I received a despatch, yesterday, +saying that you were coming. Of course, I remember you now, having +seen you on the day I came up here; but your dress is altogether +different, and the expression of your face seems so changed."</p> +<p>"That is the result of my having adopted different caste marks, +larger than they were before, with lines that almost cover my +forehead."</p> +<p>"I did not expect you to come in disguise."</p> +<p>"The Governor thought, Colonel, that I might be of greater +service, in finding out what was passing in the town, and in going +elsewhere, were I to come up as a native. To an officer of the +Residency, all parties would keep their lips sealed."</p> +<p>"I thoroughly agree with you," the Resident said. "Your disguise +differs so much, from your former appearance, that I do not think +any of your acquaintances, of those days, would be likely to +recognize you."</p> +<p>"At present I am supposed to be a trader; but I have with me the +dress of a peasant, or small cultivator, which I used when I went +into Scindia's camp. I have also the dress of a Brahmin--one of the +better class--which I thought, if necessary, would enable me to +enter the house of Nana, or other leaders, without exciting +surprise. I also have my uniform with me.</p> +<p>"I am staying, at present, in the street that faces the market, +at the house of a man named Naroo. I myself am Bhaskur. I have a +soldier servant with me, on whom I can confidently rely; and I will +send him, with a chit, when I have any news to give you, and you +can send me word at what hour I had better call.</p> +<p>"Now, Colonel, I am at your orders and, if you will indicate to +me the nature of the news which you wish to gain, or the person +whom you want watched, I will do the best I can. At present, I know +nothing of any changes that have taken place, since I left +here."</p> +<p>"The only event that is publicly known is that, while the +Peishwa has carried out his engagement with Scindia and with the +Rajah of Berar, he refused to ratify any treaty with the Nizam; and +the consequence is that the latter's general quitted Poona, without +taking leave of Bajee Rao, and returned in great indignation to +Hyderabad. This matter might have been smoothed over, if Scindia +had intervened, or if the Peishwa had made suitable advances to the +Nizam; but he has not done so. There is no doubt that he thoroughly +dislikes Nana Furnuwees and, instead of being grateful to him for +having placed him on the throne, he would gladly weaken his power. +At any rate, it was Nana who formed the confederacy; and I know +that his greatest wish is to keep it intact, and to secure peace to +the country.</p> +<p>"Moreover, matters have been further complicated by the death of +Holkar. He left two sons behind him, Khassee and Mulhar. +Unfortunately, Khassee is next door to an imbecile; while Mulhar +was a bold and able prince. The brothers quarrelled: two half +brothers took the part of Mulhar, who left his brother's camp, with +a small body of troops, and took up his abode at a village just +outside the city--and was, I believe, favoured by Nana, whose +interest naturally was to have an active and able prince, as ruler +of Holkar's dominions. Scindia--who was, I suspect, delighted at +this quarrel in Holkar's camp--supported Khassee, and sent a body +of troops to arrest Mulhar, who, refusing to surrender, maintained +a desperate defence, until he was killed. Jeswunt went to Nagpore +and Wittoojee fled to Kolapoore, but they were almost the only +adherents of Mulhar who effected their escape.</p> +<p>"So matters stand, at present. The fact that the imbecile +Khassee owes his elevation to Scindia will, naturally, give the +latter a predominating influence over him. Thus, you see, the +confederacy has gone completely to pieces. The Nizam is estranged; +the Rajah of Berar has gone home to Nagpore; Holkar's power is, for +the time, subservient to Scindia; and Nana Furnuwees is, therefore, +deprived of all those who aided to bring him back to power.</p> +<p>"You are well known to Nana, are you not?"</p> +<p>"Yes, Colonel, he was kind enough to place a good deal of +confidence in me."</p> +<p>"Then I think you cannot do better than see him, to begin with, +and gather his views on the matter. I myself have heard nothing +from him, for some time. He knows that the Company are well +disposed towards him; but he also knows that they can give him no +assistance, in a sudden crisis."</p> +<p>"But surely, Colonel, Bajee Rao, who owes everything to him, +will not desert him?"</p> +<p>"My opinion of the Peishwa is that he is a man without a spark +of good feeling; that he has neither conscience nor gratitude, and +would betray his own brother, if he thought that he would obtain +any advantage by so doing. He is a born schemer, and his sole idea +of politics is to play off one faction against another. I would +rather take the word of a man of the lowest class, than the oath of +Bajee Rao."</p> +<p>"I am sorry to hear it, sir. He seemed to me to be a fine +fellow, with many accomplishments. His handsome face and figure, +and winning manner--"</p> +<p>"His manner is part of his stock in trade," the colonel said, +angrily. "He is a born actor; and can deceive, for a time, even +those who are perfectly aware of his unscrupulous character.</p> +<p>"Remember one thing, Mr. Lindsay: that if you are in any +difficulty, or if a tumult breaks out in the city, you had best +make your way here, at once. A trooper of my escort was thrown from +his horse, and killed, the other day; and if you attire yourself in +his uniform, you will pass for one of them. Whatever happens, they +are not likely to be touched. Both parties wish to stand well with +me and, even were it found out that you are an Englishman, you +would be safely sheltered here; for I should claim you as my +assistant, and an officer in our army, and declare truthfully that +you had only assumed this guise in order to ascertain, for me, the +feelings of the populace."</p> +<p>"Thank you, sir. I will certainly come here, as soon as any +serious trouble begins."</p> +<p>That evening, after rubbing off the caste marks and assuming +those of a Brahmin, and putting on the dress suitable for +it--padding it largely, to give him the appearance of a stout and +bulky man--he went to Nana's house.</p> +<p>"Will you tell the minister," he said to the doorkeeper, "that +Kawerseen, a Brahmin of the Kshittree caste, desires to speak to +him?"</p> +<p>The man gave the message to one of the attendants who, in two or +three minutes, returned and asked Harry to follow him. The minister +was alone.</p> +<p>"What have you to say to me, holy man?" he enquired; and then, +looking more fixedly at his visitor, he exclaimed:</p> +<p>"Why, it is Puntojee!"</p> +<p>"You are right, Nana. I am sent here to ascertain, if possible, +what is going on, and how things are likely to tend. But first, I +must tell you that I am now here as Colonel Palmer's +assistant."</p> +<p>"I will take you entirely into my confidence," Nana said. "Until +you told me that you were an Englishman, when you took leave of me +two years ago, I could not quite understand why it was that I felt +I could confide in you, more than in the older men around me. I +esteem the English highly, and especially admire them for their +honesty and truthfulness. You at once impressed me as one +possessing such qualities and, now that I know you are English, I +can understand the feeling that you inspired.</p> +<p>"I am glad you have come. No doubt your Government are well +informed, as to the state of affairs here. I feel the power +slipping from my hands, without seeing any way by which I can +recover my lost ground. Scindia is solely under the domination of +Ghatgay, whose daughter he will shortly marry. I have, of course, +made it my business to enquire as to the antecedents of this man. I +find that he has the reputation of being a brutal ruffian, +remarkable alike for his greed and his cruelty--a worse adviser +Scindia could not have. Holkar was but a poor reed to lean upon, +for he was as weak in mind, as in body. But at any rate, he was a +true friend of mine and, now that he has been succeeded by one even +more imbecile than himself--and who is but a puppet in the hands of +Scindia, to whose troops he owes his accession--his power and his +dominions are practically Scindia's.</p> +<p>"There can be no doubt, whatever, that Bajee Rao is acting +secretly with Scindia; that is to say, he is pretending so to act, +for he is a master of duplicity and, even where his own interests +are concerned, seems to be unable to carry out, honestly, any +agreement that he has made.</p> +<p>"I am an old man, Mr. Lindsay, and can no longer struggle as I +did, two years ago, against fate; nor indeed do I see any means of +contending against such powerful enemies. The Rajah of Berar, +although well disposed towards me, could not venture, alone, to +support me against the united power of Scindia and Holkar, backed +by that of the Peishwa.</p> +<p>"There is but one direction in which I could seek for +help--namely, from the Government of Bombay--but even this, were it +given, would scarcely avail much against the power of my enemies. +And even were I sure that it could do so, I would not call it in. +My aim, through life, has been to uphold the power of the Peishwa, +and to lessen that of Scindia and Holkar and, by playing one +against the other, to avert the horrors of civil war. Were I to +call in the aid of the English, I should be acting in contradiction +to the principles that I have ever held.</p> +<p>"The arrival of a force of English, here, would at once unite +the whole of the Mahrattas against them, as it did when last they +ascended the Ghauts; and believing as I do in their great valour +and discipline, which has been amply shown by the conduct of +Scindia's infantry, which are mainly officered by Europeans, it is +beyond belief that they can withstand the whole power of the +Mahratta empire. But granting that they might do so, what would be +the result? I should see my country shaken to the centre, the +capital in the hands of strangers, and to what end? Simply that I, +an old and worn-out man should, for a very few years, remain in +power here. It would be necessary for those who placed me there to +remain as my guardians, and I should be a mere cypher in their +hands. Nothing, therefore, would persuade me to seek English aid to +retain me in power."</p> +<p>"But the English would doubtless act in alliance with the Nizam, +and probably with the Rajahs of Berar and Kolapoore."</p> +<p>"Possibly they might do so, but what would be the result? Each +of these leaders would, in return for his aid, bargain for +increased territory, at the expense of the Peishwa; and I, who +believe that I am trusted by the great mass of the people here, +should become an object of execration at having brought the +invaders into our country.</p> +<p>"No, Mr. Lindsay; my enemies can, and I believe will, capture me +and throw me into prison. They will scarcely take my life, for to +do so would excite a storm of indignation; but I always carry +poison about with me and, if they applied torture as a preliminary +to death, I have the power of releasing myself from their +hands.</p> +<p>"Are you established at the Residency?"</p> +<p>"No, sir; I am living in disguises, of which I have several, in +the town. In that way, I can better discover what is going on than +if I were in uniform, as assistant to Colonel Palmer. Should there +be a tumult in the city, or if I find that my disguise has been +detected, I can make for the Residency; and either put on my +uniform and declare my true character, or attire myself as one of +the Resident's escort."</p> +<p>"Come here as often as you can," Nana said. "I shall always be +glad to see you. It is a relief to speak to one of whose friendship +I feel secure. As a Brahmin, you can pass in and out without +suspicion; and I will always tell you how matters stand."</p> +<p>"I have not yet spoken, Nana, of my work as your agent in +Bombay. I have sent you reports, from time to time; but there was +nothing in them that could be of any value to you. At present, the +attentions of the authorities of Bombay, Madras, and Calcutta are +centred upon the probability of war with Mysore. Tippoo has +continually broken the conditions under which he made peace with +us, six years ago; and it is known that he is preparing for war. He +has received with honour many Frenchmen, and is in communication +with the French Government; and believes that he will be supported +by an army, under General Bonaparte and, as it is certain that, +when the war breaks out again, it will need the fighting strength +of the three towns to make head against the army of Mysore, as far +as I have been able to learn they have given but little attention +to the state of affairs in the Deccan. I have therefore been able +to furnish you with no useful information, beyond telling you that +the sympathies of the Governor and Council are wholly with you, and +that they consider that the fact of your being in power here +secures them from any trouble with the Mahrattas.</p> +<p>"Therefore, sir, I have put aside the allowance you have given +me, considering that I have in no way earned it; and have written +this order upon the bankers with whom I have placed it, authorizing +them to pay the money to anyone you may depute to receive it;" and +he handed the letter to the Nana.</p> +<p>The latter took it and, without opening it, tore it up.</p> +<p>"Your offer does you honour, Mr. Lindsay, but it is impossible +for me to accept it. Your information has not been without +advantages. I have foreseen that the Nizam would probably enter +into an alliance with your people; and that the very large increase +that he has made in his battalions, under foreign officers, was +intended to make his alliance more valuable. I, however, have not +deemed it necessary to imitate his example, and that of Scindia, by +raising a similar force. Your communications, therefore, have been +of real value, and have saved a large outlay here; but even had it +not been so, there can be no question of your returning your pay. +You undertook certain work, and you have to the best of your powers +carried it out; and it is not because you consider that the +information you sent me is not sufficiently valuable that you have, +in any way, failed to carry out your part of the contract.</p> +<p>"I consider it of very great value. In the first place because, +as I have said, it relieved me from anxiety as to the Nizam's +intentions of increasing his army; and in the second place, it +eased my mind by showing that neither Scindia nor Holkar was +intriguing with Bombay, which knowledge is worth a crore of rupees +to me.</p> +<p>"It is the first time, sir, since I have taken part in politics, +that anyone has offered to return money he has received on the +ground that he had not sufficiently earned it; or indeed, upon any +other ground, whatever. Your doing so has confirmed my opinion of +the honesty of your people, and I would that such a feeling were +common among my countrymen, here. No negotiations can be carried +on, no alliance can be formed, without a demand for a large sum of +money, or for an addition of territory. All our petty wars are +waged, not on a question of principle, but entirely from greed.</p> +<p>"Let us say no more about it. I am, as of course you have heard, +a very wealthy man; and have so distributed my money among the +shroffs of all India that, whatever may happen here, I shall lose +comparatively little; and I am glad to know that some very small +portion of it goes to one whom I regard as a genuine friend, and +who does not draw a tenth part of what many of those around me +accept, without any consideration given for it."</p> +<p>"Thank you, sir, but--at any rate while I am stationed here, as +Assistant Resident--I cannot continue to receive pay from you. I +should regard it as a disgraceful action, and absolutely +incompatible with my duty."</p> +<p>"Well, so far I will humour you, Mr. Lindsay; though from what I +hear, in the Carnatic and Bengal the British officers, civil and +military, do not hesitate to accept large sums from native +princes."</p> +<p>Harry was well aware that this was so, and that many British +officials had amassed considerable fortunes, by gifts from native +sources. He only replied:</p> +<p>"That is a matter for their own consciences, sir. They may be +rewards for services rendered, just as I did not hesitate to accept +the sum that you so generously bestowed upon me. It is not for me +to judge other men, but I cannot but think that the custom of +officials accepting presents is a bad one."</p> +<p>"Where can I find you," Nana said, changing the subject, "if I +should need to communicate with you, before you call again?"</p> +<p>Harry gave his address.</p> +<p>"Your messenger must enquire for Bhaskur, a trader from +Ahmedabad, who is lodging there."</p> +<p>He chatted for some time longer with Nana, and then took his +leave and returned to his lodging.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch7" id="Ch7">Chapter 7</a>: An Act Of Treachery.</h2> +<p>Some months passed quietly. Scindia more openly assumed supreme +power, imprisoned several leading men, and transferred their +jagheers to his own relations. Colonel Palmer had gone down to +Bombay on leave, his place being filled temporarily by Mr. +Uhtoff.</p> +<p>Bajee was, as usual, playing a deep game. He desired to become +independent both of Scindia and Nana Furnuwees. The former, he +believed, must sooner or later return to his own dominions, and he +desired his aid to get rid of Nana; therefore it was against the +latter that his intrigues were, at present, directed. The minister +was still an object of affection to his people; who believed, as +before, in his goodness of character, and who put down every act of +oppression as being the work of Scindia.</p> +<p>Harry saw Nana frequently. There being no change in the +position, there was little talk of politics; and the minister +generally turned the conversation upon England, its power +relatively to that of France, the extent of its resources, the +modes of life among the population, and its methods of +government.</p> +<p>"It all differs widely from ours," Nana said, after one of these +conversations, "and in most respects is better. The changes there +are made not by force, but by the will of the representatives of +the people, in their assembly. A minister defeated there retires at +once, and his chief opponent succeeds him. The army has no +determining voice in the conduct of affairs, but is wholly under +the orders of the minister who may happen to be in power. All this +seems strange to us but, undoubtedly, the system is far better for +the population. There is no bloodshed, no burning of villages, no +plundering, no confiscation of estates. It is a change in the +personnel of the government, but no change in the general course of +affairs.</p> +<p>"It is strange that your soldiers fight so well when, as you +tell me, they never carry arms until they enter the army; while +ours are trained from childhood in the use of weapons. And your +enemies, the French, is it the same with them?"</p> +<p>"It is the same, Nana, so far as their civil life is concerned; +for none carry weapons or are trained in their use. There is one +wide point of difference. The French have to go as soldiers when +they reach a certain age, however much they may dislike it; while +with us there is no compulsion, whatever, and men enlist in the +army just as they might take up any other trade. There is, however, +a body called the militia. This, like the army, consists of +volunteers; but is not liable for service abroad, and only goes out +for a short period of training, annually. However, by law, should +the supply of volunteers fall short, battalions can be kept at +their full strength by men chosen by ballot from the population. +But this is practically a dead letter, and I am told that the +ballot is never resorted to; though doubtless it would be, in the +case of a national emergency."</p> +<p>"Ah! It is pleasant to be a minister in your country, with no +fear of plots, of treachery, or assassination. Were I a younger +man, I should like to visit England and stay there for a time so +that, on my return, I could model some of our institutions upon +yours.</p> +<p>"But no; I fear that that would be too much for the most +powerful minister to effect. The people are wedded to their old +customs, and would not change them for others, however much these +might be for their benefit. An order that none, save those in the +army, should carry arms would unite the whole people against those +who issued it."</p> +<p>It was on the last day of 1797 that Nana Furnuwees made a formal +visit to Scindia, in return for one the latter had paid him, a few +days before. Michel Filoze, a Neapolitan who commanded eight +battalions in Scindia's army, had given his word of honour as a +guarantee for the minister's safe return to his home. The European +officers in the service of the Indian princes bore a high +character, not only for their fidelity to those they served, but +also for their honour in all their dealings and, though Nana would +not have confided in an oath sworn by Scindia, he accepted that of +Filoze without hesitation.</p> +<p>On his arrival near Scindia's camp the traitor seized him and, +with his battalions, attacked his retinue, amounting to about a +thousand persons, among whom were many of his principal adherents. +Some of these were killed, all of them stripped of their robes and +ornaments. Parties of soldiers were immediately sent, by Ghatgay, +to plunder the house of Nana and those of all his adherents.</p> +<p>Harry was in his room when he heard a sudden outburst of firing +and, a minute or two later, Abdool ran in.</p> +<p>"Scindia's men are in the town, sahib! They are attacking the +houses of Nana's adherents. These are defending themselves as best +they can. There is a general panic, for it is believed that the +whole town will be looted."</p> +<p>"Get your things together, Abdool. I will change my dress for +that of a native soldier, and we will make for the Residency."</p> +<p>"Shall we ride, sahib?"</p> +<p>"No, we will leave the horses here. If we were to go on +horseback, we might be taken for Nana's adherents trying to make +their escape, and be shot down without any further question.</p> +<p>"I felt misgivings when I saw Nana going out; but it would have +come to the same thing, in the end, for if Scindia's whole army, +villainous as is the treachery, had advanced against the town, Nana +could have gathered no force to oppose them."</p> +<p>Three or four minutes later they started, Abdool carrying a +bundle containing Harry's disguises. They made their way through +lanes, where the people were all standing at their doors, talking +excitedly. Continuous firing was heard in the direction of the +better quarters, mingled with shouts and cries. No one questioned +them, all being too anxious as to their own safety to think of +anything else.</p> +<p>The Residency was half a mile from the town. There Mr. Uhtoff +was standing at his door, and the men of his escort were all under +arms. Harry had been in frequent communication with him, from the +time that he had taken Colonel Palmer's place. The Resident did +not, for the moment, recognize him in his new disguise but, when he +did so, he asked anxiously what was going on in the town.</p> +<p>"A strong body of Scindia's troops are there, attacking Nana's +adherents. I fear that the minister himself is a prisoner in their +camp."</p> +<p>"That is bad news, indeed. Nana told me, yesterday, that he +intended to visit Scindia, and had received a guarantee for his +safe return, from Filoze. I advised him not to go; but he said that +he could confide, implicitly, in the honour of a European officer. +I told him that the various European nations differed widely from +each other; and that, although I would accept the word of honour of +a British officer in Scindia's service, I would not take that of a +Neapolitan. However, he said, and said truly, that it was incumbent +on him to return Scindia's visit; and that if he did not do so it +would be treated as a slight and insult, and would serve as a +pretext for open war against him; and that, as he could but muster +three or four thousand men, the city must yield without +resistance.</p> +<p>"I believe that this is the work of Bajee Rao, and of +Ghatgay--two scoundrels, of whom I prefer Ghatgay who, although a +ruffian, is at least a fearless one, while Bajee Rao is a monster +of deceit. I know that there have, of late, been several interviews +between him and Ghatgay; and I have not the least doubt that the +whole affair has been arranged between them with the hope, on +Bajee's part, of getting rid of Nana; and on Ghatgay's, of removing +a sturdy opponent of his future son-in-law, and of acquiring a +large quantity of loot by the plunder of Nana's adherents.</p> +<p>"You did well to come here for, if the work of plunder is once +begun, there is no saying how far it will spread. I shall ride, at +once, to see the Peishwa, and request an explanation of what has +occurred. There is that trooper's dress still lying ready for you, +if you would like to put it on. There is a spare horse in my +stable."</p> +<p>"Thank you, sir; I should like it very much;" and, rapidly +changing his dress, he was ready by the time the horses were +brought round.</p> +<p>He then took his place among the troopers of the escort, and +rode to Bajee Rao's country palace, which was some three miles from +the town.</p> +<p>After seeing everything in train, the Peishwa had left Scindia's +camp before Nana's arrival there; and had summoned a dozen of the +latter's adherents, under the pretence that he desired to see them +on a matter of business. Wholly unsuspicious of treachery, they +rode out at once; and each, on his arrival, was seized and thrown +into a place of confinement.</p> +<p>The Resident learned this from a retainer of one of these +nobles. He had made his escape when his master was seized, and was +riding to carry the news to the British official; whose influence, +he thought, might suffice to save the captives' lives.</p> +<p>On arriving at the palace four of the troopers were ordered to +dismount--Harry being one of those selected--and, on demanding to +see the Peishwa the Resident was, after some little delay, ushered +into the audience chamber, where Bajee Rao was seated, with several +of his officers standing behind him. He received Mr. Uhtoff with a +show of great courtesy.</p> +<p>The latter, however, stood stiffly, and said:</p> +<p>"I have come, Your Highness, to request an explanation of what +is going on. The city of Poona is being treated like a town taken +by siege. The houses of a number of persons of distinction are +being attacked by Scindia's soldiery. Fighting is going on in the +streets, and the whole of the inhabitants are in a state of wild +alarm.</p> +<p>"But this is not all. Nana Furnuwees has, owing to his reliance +upon a solemn guarantee given for his safe return, been seized when +making a ceremonial visit to Scindia."</p> +<p>"You must surely be misinformed," the Peishwa said. "You will +readily believe that I am in perfect ignorance of such a +proceeding."</p> +<p>"I might believe it, Prince," Mr. Uhtoff said, coldly, "had I +not been aware that you and your officers have decoyed a number of +Nana's friends to this palace and, on their arrival, had them +suddenly arrested."</p> +<p>Bajee Rao, practised dissimulator as he was, flushed at this +unexpected accusation.</p> +<p>"I learned, sir," he said, after a pause, "that there was a plot +against my person, by Nana Furnuwees and his adherents; and I have +therefore taken what I considered the necessary step of placing +these in temporary confinement."</p> +<p>"It is a little strange, Your Highness, that the man who placed +you on the musnud should be conspiring to turn you from it. +However, what has been done has been done; and I cannot hope that +any words of mine will avail to persuade you to undo an act which +will be considered, throughout India, as one of the grossest +treachery and ingratitude. My duty is a simple one: namely, merely +to report to my Government the circumstances of the case."</p> +<p>The officers behind the Peishwa fingered the hilts of their +swords, and the four troopers involuntarily made a step forward, to +support the Resident. Bajee, however, made a sign to those behind +him to remain quiet; and the Resident, turning abruptly, and +without salutation to the Peishwa, left the hall, followed by his +men.</p> +<p>They mounted as soon as they had left the palace, and rode back +to the Residency; Mr. Uhtoff keeping his place at their head, and +speaking no word until he dismounted, when he asked Harry to +accompany him to his room.</p> +<p>"This is a bad business, indeed, Mr. Lindsay. I cannot say that +I am surprised because, having studied Bajee Rao's character, I +have for some time been expecting that he would strike a blow at +Nana. Still, I acknowledge that it has come suddenly, and the whole +position of affairs has changed. Bajee has freed himself from Nana; +but he has only riveted Scindia's yoke more firmly on his +shoulders. Like most intriguers, he has overreached himself. He has +kept one object in view, and been blind to all else.</p> +<p>"His course should have been to support Nana against Scindia, +and thus to keep the balance of power in his own hands. He has only +succeeded in ridding himself of the one man who had the good of his +country at heart, and who was the only obstacle to Scindia's +ambition. The fool has ruined both himself and his country.</p> +<p>"I think, Mr. Lindsay, that the best plan will be for you to +mount at once, and ride down to Bombay. Your presence here, just +now, can be of no special utility; and it is most desirable that +the Government should have a full statement of the matter laid +before them, by one who has been present, and who has made himself +fully acquainted with the whole politics of the Deccan.</p> +<p>"It is better that you should not go into the town again. I will +send in for your horses, as soon as the tumult has subsided. We +have several spare animals here, and you and your servant can take +two of them. I will write to the Governor a report of my interview +with Bajee, and say that I have sent you down to give him all the +details of what has taken place; which will save the time that it +would take me to write a long report, and will be far more +convenient, inasmuch as you can answer any point that he is +desirous of ascertaining. I do not think that you can do better +than go in the disguise that you now have on; for a soldier to be +galloping fast is a common sight, but people would be astonished at +seeing either a Brahmin or a trader riding at full speed. I will +give orders for the horses to be saddled at once and, in the +meantime, you had best take a meal. You will have no chance of +getting one on the road, and I have no doubt that dinner is ready +for serving. I will tell the butler to give some food to your man, +at once."</p> +<p>Twenty minutes later, Harry and Abdool were on their way. +Skirting round Poona, they heard the rattle of musketry still being +maintained; and indeed, the fighting in the streets of the city +continued for twenty-four hours. By two in the morning, they halted +at the top of the Ghauts; partly to give the horses a rest, and +partly because it would have been very dangerous to attempt to make +the descent in the dark.</p> +<p>At daybreak they continued their journey, arriving at Bombay six +hours later. They rode straight for the Government House, where +Harry dismounted and, throwing the reins of his horse to Abdool, +told the attendant to inform the Governor that a messenger, from +the Resident at Poona, desired to see him. He was at once shown +in.</p> +<p>"Why, it is Mr. Lindsay!" the Governor said, "though I should +scarce know you, in your paint and disguise. The matter on which +you come must be something urgent, or Mr. Uhtoff would not have +sent you down with it."</p> +<p>Harry handed over the despatch of which he was bearer and, as +the Governor ran his eye over it, his face became more and more +grave, as he gathered the news.</p> +<p>"This is serious, indeed," he said, "most serious. Now be +pleased to sit down, Mr. Lindsay, and furnish me with all the +particulars of the affair."</p> +<p>When Harry had finished, the Governor said:</p> +<p>"I imagine that you can have eaten nothing today, Mr. Lindsay. I +am about to take tiffin, and bid you do so with me. I shall at once +send to members of the Council and, by the time we have finished +our meal, they will no doubt be here."</p> +<p>"I shall be very glad to do so, sir, if you will allow me to go +into the dressing room, and put on my uniform. I should hardly like +to sit down to table in my present dress."</p> +<p>"Do so by all means, if you wish it; but you must remember that +your colour will not agree well with your dress."</p> +<p>"I will remove these caste marks, sir, and then I shall look +only as if I were somewhat severely tanned."</p> +<p>In ten minutes a servant knocked at the door, and said that +luncheon was ready. Harry was already dressed in his uniform, and +had removed the marks on his forehead; the dye, however, was as +dark as ever. He had, on leaving the Governor's room, sent a +servant down to fetch his wallet, and to tell Abdool that he was to +take the horses to the barracks.</p> +<p>The meal was an informal one. The Governor asked many questions, +and was pleased at the knowledge that Harry showed of all the +principal persons in Poona, and their character and ability.</p> +<p>"At the present moment," he said, "the information that you have +given me cannot be utilized; but it would be most valuable, were we +to get mixed up in the confusion of parties at Poona. I gather that +you consider Nana Furnuwees to be a great man."</p> +<p>"My opinion is not worth much, on that point, sir. I think that +he has, over and over again, shown great courage in extricating +himself from difficulties which appeared to be overwhelming. I +believe him to be a sincere patriot, and that he only desires to be +at the head of the administration of affairs that he may prevent +civil war from breaking out, and to thwart the ambition of the +great princes. His tastes are simple, his house is furnished +plainly, he cares nothing for the pleasures of the table; but he is +honest and, I believe, absolutely truthful--qualities which +certainly are possessed by very few men in the Deccan.</p> +<p>"I grant that he is not disposed to enter into any alliance with +the British. He has frequently told me that he admires them greatly +for their straightforwardness and truthfulness, as well as for +their bravery and their methods of government, both in the great +towns and in the districts in which they are masters; but he fears +that, were they to send an army to Poona on his behalf, or on that +of any of the other parties, it might end by their acquiring +control over the affairs of the country, and make them arbitrators +in all disputes."</p> +<p>"No doubt he is right, there," the Governor said, with a smile. +"However, at present we are certainly not likely to interfere in +the quarrels and intrigues beyond the Ghauts; nor do I see why we +should be brought into collision with the Mahrattas--at any rate, +until they have ceased to quarrel among themselves, and unite under +one master. In that case, they might make another effort to turn us +out.</p> +<p>"And now we will go into the room where the Council must be, by +this time, assembled."</p> +<p>This proved to be the case, and the Governor read to them the +note that he had received from Mr. Uhtoff; and then requested Harry +to repeat the details, as fully as he had already done. There was a +consensus of opinion as to the importance of the news.</p> +<p>"Come round again tomorrow morning, Mr. Lindsay," the Governor +said; "by that time I shall have fully thought the matter out."</p> +<p>"So you have been masquerading as a native again, Mr. Lindsay?" +the colonel said, when Harry called upon him.</p> +<p>"I can hardly consider it masquerading, as I merely resumed the +dress I wore for many years; and I certainly speak Mahratti vastly +better than I speak English for, although I improved a good deal +while I was here, I am conscious that, though my grammar may be +correct, my pronunciation differs a good deal from that of my +comrades."</p> +<p>"You speak English wonderfully well, considering that you +learned it from the natives," the colonel said. "At first, you +spoke as a native that had learned English; but a casual observer +would not, now, detect any accent that would lead him to suppose +that you had not been brought up in England.</p> +<p>"You will, of course, be at mess this evening?"</p> +<p>"I think it would be better that I should not do so, sir. In the +first place, I should have innumerable questions to answer; and in +the second, which is more important, anything that I said might be +heard by mess waiters. It is quite possible that some of these are +in the pay of Scindia, or Holkar, who keep themselves well informed +of all that goes on here; and were it known that an English officer +had come down in disguise, it would greatly increase the danger +when I return there."</p> +<p>"I have no doubt that you are right, Mr. Lindsay. Is there +anything new at Poona?"</p> +<p>"Yes, Colonel; and as it will be generally known in two or three +days, there can be no harm in my telling you. Scindia has made Nana +Furnuwees a prisoner, by an act of the grossest treachery. He has +killed almost all his principal adherents and, when I got away, his +troops were engaged in looting the town."</p> +<p>"That is grave news," the colonel said. "So long as Nana was in +power, it was certain that Scindia could not venture to take his +army, out of his own country for the purpose of attacking us; but +now that Nana is overthrown, and Scindia will be minister to the +Peishwa, we may expect troubles."</p> +<p>"Not at present. Scindia's army has, for months, been without +pay. He has no means of settling with them and, until he does so, +they certainly will not move."</p> +<p>"I do not think that would detain him long, Mr. Lindsay. He has +only to march them into other territories, with permission to +plunder, and they would be quite satisfied. He certainly can have +no liking for the Rajahs of Berar or Kolapoore, for both of them +assisted Nana to regain his power; and an attack upon them would, +at once, satisfy vengeance and put his troops in a good +temper."</p> +<p>"But there is no doubt that the Peishwa will find it much more +irksome to be under Scindia's control than that of Nana. And were +Scindia to march away, he would at once organize an army, and buy +Holkar's aid, to render himself independent of Scindia."</p> +<p>"They are treacherous beggars, these Mahrattas," the colonel +said. "They are absolutely faithless, and would sell their fathers +if they could make anything by the transaction.</p> +<p>"Then you do not know yet whether you are to return?"</p> +<p>"No; I shall see the Governor again, tomorrow morning; and shall +then receive orders."</p> +<p>"I will have some dinner sent over to your quarters, from the +mess. Do not have too much light in the room, or your colour may be +noticed by the servant. I will let the officers know that you have +returned. No doubt many of them will come in for a chat with you. +As no one can overhear you, I do not think that any harm can be +done by it."</p> +<p>"I think not, Colonel."</p> +<p>"I will tell them," the colonel went on, "that you are on secret +service; that you will tell them as much as you can safely do, but +they must abstain from pressing you with questions. We all know +that you have been acting as assistant to Mr. Uhtoff, because it +was mentioned in orders that you had been detailed for that duty; +but they know no more than that, and will doubtless be surprised at +your colour. But you can very well say that, as you had an +important message to carry down, you thought it best to disguise +yourself."</p> +<p>"That will do excellently, Colonel; and I shall be very glad to +have a talk with my friends again."</p> +<p>After leaving the colonel, Harry went to his own room; where he +found Soyera, who had been fetched by Abdool.</p> +<p>"I am sorry to say that I am going away, almost directly, +mother," he said; "but it cannot be helped."</p> +<p>"I do not expect you always to stay here, Harry. Now that you +are in the Company's service, you must, of course, do what you are +ordered. I am glad, indeed, to find that, although you have been +with them only a year, you are chosen for a post in which you can +gain credit, and attract the attention of the authorities +here."</p> +<p>"It is all thanks to the pains that you took to prepare me for +such work.</p> +<p>"I don't expect to be away so long, this time. And indeed, now +that Nana Furnuwees is a prisoner, it does not seem to me that +there can be anything special to do, until some change takes place +in the situation, and Scindia either openly assumes supreme power, +or marches away with his army."</p> +<p>That evening, Harry's room was crowded with visitors. The news +of the treacherous arrest of Nana Furnuwees excited the liveliest +interest; and was received with very much regret, as Nana was +considered the only honest man of all the ministers of the native +princes, and to be friendly disposed towards the British; and all +saw that his fall might be followed by an important change in the +attitude of the Mahrattas.</p> +<p>Two days later, Harry returned to Poona. The next eighteen +months passed without any very prominent incidents. In order to +furnish Scindia with money to pay his troops, and to be in a +position to march away, Bajee Rao agreed that Ghatgay should, as +Scindia's minister, raise contributions in Poona. Accordingly, a +rule of the direst brutality and cruelty took place. The +respectable inhabitants--the merchants, traders, and men of good +family--were driven from their houses, tortured often to death, +scourged, and blown away from the mouths of cannon. No person was +safe from his persecution, and the poorest were forced to deliver +up all their little savings. The rich were stripped of everything, +and atrocities of all kinds were committed upon the hapless +population.</p> +<p>Bajee Rao countenanced these things, and was now included in the +hatred felt for Ghatgay and Scindia. Troubles occurred between the +Peishwa and the Rajah of Satara, who refused to deliver up an agent +of Nana whom he had, at Bajee's request, seized. As Scindia's +troops refused to move, Purseram Bhow was released from captivity +and, raising an army, captured the city of Satara, and compelled +the fort to surrender; but when ordered by Bajee Rao to disband the +force that he had collected, he excused himself from doing so, on +the plea that he had no money to pay them, or to carry out the +promises that he had given them.</p> +<p>Scindia himself was not without troubles. In addition to the +mutiny of his troops, the three widows of his father who, instead +of receiving the treatment proper to their rank, had been neglected +and were living in poverty, sought an interview with him; and were +seized by Ghatgay, flogged, and barbarously treated. Their cause +was taken up by the Brahmins, who had held the principal offices +under Scindia's father; and it was at last settled that they should +take up their residence at Burrampoor, with a suitable +establishment. Their escort, however, had received private orders +to carry them to the fortress of Ahmednuggur.</p> +<p>The news of this treachery spread, soon after they had left the +camp; and an officer in the interest of the Brahmins started, with +a troop of horse which he commanded, dispersed the escort, and +rescued the ladies. These he carried to the camp of Amrud Rao, +Bajee Rao's foster brother; who instantly afforded them protection +and, sallying out, attacked and defeated a party of their pursuers, +led by Ghatgay himself.</p> +<p>Five battalions of infantry were then sent by Scindia, but Amrud +attacked them boldly, and compelled them to retreat. Negotiations +were then opened, and Amrud, believing Scindia's promises, moved +his camp to the neighbourhood of Poona. But, during a Mahommedan +festival, he and his troops were suddenly attacked by a few +brigades of infantry; which dispersed them, slew great numbers, and +pillaged their camp.</p> +<p>Holkar now joined Amrud Rao, who had escaped from the massacre. +The Peishwa negotiated an alliance with the Nizam. Scindia sent +envoys to Tippoo, to ask for his assistance. Bajee Rao did the +same, and it looked as if a desperate war was about to break +out.</p> +<p>All this time, Harry had been living quietly in the Residency, +performing his duties as assistant to Colonel Palmer, who had again +taken charge there. There was no occasion for him to resume his +disguises. The atrocities committed by Ghatgay, in Poona, were +apparent to all; and at present there seemed no possible +combination that could check the power of Scindia.</p> +<p>Colonel Palmer, however, had several interviews with Bajee Rao, +and entreated him to put a stop to the doings of Ghatgay; but the +latter declared that he was powerless to interfere, and treated +with contempt the warnings, of the colonel, that he was uniting the +whole population in hatred of him.</p> +<p>The rebellion under Amrud, and the adhesion of Holkar to it, +seemed to afford some hope that an end would come to the terrible +state of things prevailing; and Colonel Palmer became convinced +that Scindia was really anxious to return to his own dominions, +where his troops, so long deprived of their natural leaders, were +in a state of insubordination. If the Nana were but released from +his prison at Ahmednuggur, something might be done, he said. He +might be able to supply sufficient money to enable Scindia to +leave; and the alarm Nana's liberation would give, to Bajee, would +compel him to change his conduct, lest Nana should join Amrud and, +with the assent of the whole population, place him on the +musnud.</p> +<p>"Nana is the only man who can restore peace to this unhappy +country," he said to Harry, "but I see no chance of Scindia +releasing a prisoner whom he could always use to terrify Bajee, +should the latter dare to defy his authority."</p> +<p>Harry thought the matter over that night and, at last, +determined to make an attempt to bring about his old friend's +release. In the morning he said to the Resident:</p> +<p>"I have been thinking over what you said last night, Colonel, +and with your permission I am resolved to make an attempt to bring +about Nana's release."</p> +<p>"But how on earth do you mean to proceed, Mr. Lindsay?"</p> +<p>"My plans are not quite made up yet, sir. In the first place, I +shall ask you to give me three weeks' leave so that, if I fail, you +can make it evident that you are not responsible for my +undertaking. In the next place, I shall endeavour to see Nana in +his prison, and ascertain from him whether he can pay a +considerable sum to Scindia for his release. If I find that he is +in a position to do so, I shall then--always, of course, in +disguise--endeavour to have a private interview with Scindia, and +to convince him that it is in every way to his interest to allow +Nana to ransom himself. He is, of course, perfectly well aware +that, in spite of Bajee's assurances of friendship, he is at heart +bitterly opposed to him; and that the return of Nana, with the +powers he before possessed, would neutralize the Peishwa's +power."</p> +<p>"It would be an excellent thing, if that could be done," the +colonel said; "but it appears to me to be an absolute +impossibility."</p> +<p>"I would rather not tell you how I intend to act, sir; so that, +in case of failure, you can disavow all knowledge of my +proceedings."</p> +<p>"Well, since you are willing to undertake the risk, and +unquestionably the Bombay Government would see, with great +pleasure, Nana's return to power, I will throw no obstacle in your +way. You had better, to begin with, write me a formal request for a +month's leave to go down to Bombay. Is there anything else that I +can do, to aid your project?"</p> +<p>"Nothing, whatever; and I am much obliged to you for acceding to +my request. If for no other reason than that my success should have +the effect of releasing the inhabitants of Poona, from the horrible +tyranny to which they are exposed, I shall be willing to risk a +great deal to gain it.</p> +<p>"I shall not leave for a day or two, as I wish to think over all +the details of my plan, before I set about carrying it out."</p> +<p>Going into the city, Harry went to the spot where the +proclamations of Scindia were always affixed. These were of various +kinds; such as forbidding anyone carrying arms to be in the streets +after nightfall; and that every inhabitant should furnish an +account of his income, in order that taxation should be carefully +distributed. To these Scindia's seal was affixed.</p> +<p>One such order had been placed there that morning. A sentry +marched up and down in front of it, lest any insult should be +offered to the paper. Satisfied that this would suit his purpose, +he called Abdool to him, and explained what he wanted.</p> +<p>"It will not be till this evening, for I want, before that step +is taken, to collect a party of ten horsemen to ride with me to +Ahmednuggur and back. By this time you know a great many people in +the town and, if I were to pay them well, you should have no +difficulty in getting that number."</p> +<p>"I could do that in half an hour, sahib. There are a great +number of the disbanded soldiers of the Peishwa's army who are +without employment, and who would willingly undertake anything that +would bring them in a little money."</p> +<p>"Well, you can arrange with them, today. They must not attract +attention by going out together, but must meet at the village of +Wittulwarree."</p> +<p>The next morning, Harry went to the shop of a trader who was, he +knew, formerly employed by Nana, and purchased from him a suit such +as would be worn by an officer in Scindia's service. Then he wrote +out a document in Mahratti, giving an order to the governor of +Ahmednuggur to permit the bearer, Musawood Khan, to have a private +interview with Nana Furnuwees. This done, he told the resident that +he intended to leave that night.</p> +<p>Colonel Palmer asked no questions, but only said:</p> +<p>"Be careful, Mr. Lindsay, be careful; it is a desperate +enterprise that you are undertaking, and I should be sorry, indeed, +if so promising an officer should be lost to our service."</p> +<p>"I will be careful, I assure you. I have no wish to throw away +my life."</p> +<p>When evening came on, he went to his room, stained his skin from +head to foot, put on the caste marks, then dressed himself in the +clothes that he had that morning purchased and, at nine o'clock, +left the house quietly with Abdool. At that hour Poona would be +quiet, for the terror was so great that few people ventured into +the street after nightfall.</p> +<p>When they approached the house on which the proclamation was +fixed, they separated. Harry went quietly to the corner of the +street, a few yards from the spot where the soldier was marching up +and down, and listened intently, peeping out from behind the wall +whenever the sentry was walking in the other direction. Presently +he heard a smothered sound, and the dull thud of a falling +body.</p> +<p>He ran out. Abdool had crawled up to the other end of the +sentry's beat, and taken his place in a doorway. The sentry came up +to within a couple of yards of him, and then turned. Abdool sprang +out and, with a bound, leapt upon the sentry's back and, with one +hand, grasped his musket.</p> +<p>Taken wholly by surprise, the sentry fell forward on his face, +Abdool still clinging to him. He pressed his knife against the +soldier's neck and said that, at the slightest cry, he would drive +it home. Half stunned by the fall, the soldier lay without +moving.</p> +<a id="PicE" name="PicE"></a> +<center><img src="images/e.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Harry ran up to the proclamation and tore it down." /> +</center> +<p>Without the loss of a moment, Harry ran up to the proclamation +and tore it down, and then darted off again. Abdool, springing to +his feet, brought the butt end of the soldier's musket down on his +head; and then, satisfied that a minute or two must elapse before +the man would be recovered sufficiently to give the alarm, he too +ran off, and joined Harry at the point where they had +separated.</p> +<p>"That was well managed, Abdool. Now we will walk quietly until +we are outside the town as, if we met some of Scindia's men, they +would question were we hurrying."</p> +<p>In a few minutes they were outside the city; and then, running +at a brisk pace, they reached the Residency. They were challenged +by the sentry but, on Harry giving his name, he was of course +allowed to pass.</p> +<p>He went quietly into his room and lighted a candle. Putting his +knife in the flame he heated it, and then carefully cut the seal +from the paper on which it was fixed, placed it on the order that +he had written and, again heating his knife, passed it along under +the paper, until the under part of the seal was sufficiently warmed +to adhere to it. He placed the order in an inner pocket, put a +brace of pistols into his sash, and buckled on a native sword that +he had bought that morning; then he went out again, and found that +Abdool had the horses in readiness, with two native saddles, with +embroidered housings such as was used by native officers; which he +had, by Harry's orders, purchased that morning in the bazaar.</p> +<p>They at once mounted, and started at a gallop for +Wittulwarree.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch8" id="Ch8">Chapter 8</a>: Nana's Release.</h2> +<p>At the entrance to the village Harry found the ten troopers, +whom Abdool had engaged, standing by their horses. He gave the +order for them to march and, at a brisk canter, they started for +Ahmednuggur. It was a ride of some forty miles and, when they +approached the town, they halted until the sun rose and the gates +of the city were opened.</p> +<p>They then rode in. The men were left at a khan, Abdool remaining +with them. They had been told, if questioned, to say that their +leader, Musawood Khan, was an officer high in the service of +Scindia.</p> +<p>Harry took two of the troopers with him, and rode to the +governor's house. Dismounting, and leaving the horse in their +charge, he told one of the attendants to inform the governor that +he was the bearer of an order from Scindia, and was at once shown +up.</p> +<p>The governor received him with all honour, glanced at the order +that Harry presented to him, placed the seal against his forehead +in token of submission; and then, after a few words as to affairs +at Poona, called an officer and ordered him to accompany Musawood +Khan to Nana Furnuwees' apartment. This was a large room, at an +angle of the fortress, with a balcony outside affording a view of +the country round it; for the governor, knowing how rapidly and +often the position changed, and having no orders save to maintain a +careful watch over the prisoner, had endeavoured to ingratiate +himself with him, by lodging him comfortably and treating him +well.</p> +<p>The officer opened the door and, when Harry had entered, locked +it behind him. Nana Furnuwees was seated at the window, enjoying +the fresh morning air. He looked listlessly round, and then rose +suddenly to his feet, as he recognized his visitor.</p> +<p>"What wonder is this," he said, "that you should be here, Mr. +Lindsay, except as a prisoner?"</p> +<p>"I am here as one of Scindia's officers," Harry replied, with a +smile, "although he himself is not aware of it, in hopes of +obtaining your freedom."</p> +<p>"That is too good even to hope for," Nana said, sadly.</p> +<p>"In the first place, sir, are you aware of the state of things +in Poona?"</p> +<p>"I have heard nothing since I came here," Nana said. "They make +me comfortable, as you see but, except for the daily visit from the +governor, I have no visitors; and from him I learn nothing, as he +has strict orders, from Scindia, not to give me any information of +what happens outside these walls; fearing, no doubt, that I might +take advantage of any change, to endeavour to open communication +with one or other of the leaders.</p> +<p>"Before you tell me anything else, please explain how you +managed to enter here."</p> +<p>"That was easy enough, sir. I simply wrote out an order, to the +governor, to permit me to have a private interview with you. I tore +down one of Scindia's proclamations, and transferred his seal from +it to the order that I had written; dressed myself, as you see, as +one of his officers; got together ten mounted men, to ride as my +escort, and here I am."</p> +<p>"You will be a great man, some day," Nana said, looking at the +tall, powerful figure of his visitor, with its soldierly +carriage.</p> +<p>"Now, tell me about affairs. I shall then understand better why +you have run this risk."</p> +<p>Harry gave him a sketch of everything that had happened, since +his confinement.</p> +<p>"You see, sir," he said, as he concluded, "how the situation has +changed. Amrud is nominally acting with his brother's approval, but +there is no question that Bajee fears him. Amrud is in alliance +with Holkar. Purseram Bhow is at liberty, at the head of an army, +and a nominal conciliation has taken place between him and Bajee. +The latter has incurred the detestation and hatred of the people of +Poona and, most important of all, Scindia is really anxious to get +back home, but is unable to do so owing to his inability to pay his +troops and, willing as Bajee might be to furnish the money to get +rid of him, he is without resources, owing to the fact that the +taxation wrung from the people has all gone into the pockets of +Scindia, Ghatgay, and his other favourites.</p> +<p>"The question is, sir, whether you would be willing to purchase +your liberty, at a heavy price. I think that, if you could pay +sufficient to enable Scindia to satisfy his soldiers, he might be +induced to release you."</p> +<p>"How much do you think he would want?"</p> +<p>"Of that I can have no idea, sir. Of course, he would at first +ask a great deal more than he would afterwards accept."</p> +<p>"Yes, I should be ready to pay," Nana said, after considering +for a minute. "As a prisoner here, my money is of no use to me, nor +ever would be; but I could pay a large sum, and still be +wealthy."</p> +<p>"That is what I wanted to know, sir."</p> +<p>"But why do you run this risk?" Nana asked.</p> +<p>"For several reasons, sir. In the first place, because you have +honoured me with your friendship; in the second, because I would +fain save the people of Poona from the horrible barbarity with +which they are now treated; and lastly, because the Government of +Bombay would, I am sure, be glad to hear of your reinstatement, as +the only means of restoring peace and tranquillity to the +Deccan."</p> +<p>"How will you open this matter to Scindia?"</p> +<p>"I have not fully thought that out, sir; but I have no doubt +that I shall, in some way, be able to manage it, and intend to act +upon his fears as well as upon his avarice."</p> +<p>"But you say that Ghatgay is all powerful, and he would never +permit an interview to take place between a stranger and +Scindia."</p> +<p>"From what I hear, sir, Scindia is becoming jealous of Ghatgay's +power, and disgusted both by his imperious manner and by his +atrocities in Poona--against which he has several times protested, +but in vain. If I am to obtain an audience with Scindia, it must be +a secret one."</p> +<p>"But there will surely be great danger in such a step?"</p> +<p>"Doubtless it will not be without danger," Harry said, "but that +I must risk. I have not yet determined upon my plan, as it would +have been useless to think of that, until I had seen you but, as +that has been managed so easily, I fancy that I shall have no great +difficulty in getting at him. Once I do so, I feel certain that I +shall be able to convince him that his best policy is to free you, +and place you in your old position as the Peishwa's minister as, in +that case, you would be a check upon Bajee Rao, and would be able +to prevent him from entering into alliances hostile to +Scindia."</p> +<p>"Well, Mr. Lindsay, you have given me such proofs, both of your +intelligence and courage, that I feel sure that, if anyone can +carry this through, you will be able to do so; and I need hardly +say how deeply grateful I shall be, to you, for rescuing me from an +imprisonment which seemed likely to terminate only with my +life."</p> +<p>"And now I had better go, sir," Harry said. "It is as well that +our conference should not be too long a one."</p> +<p>"Well, goodbye, Mr. Lindsay! Even if nothing comes of all this, +it will be pleasant for me to know that, at least, I have one +faithful friend who was true to me, in my deepest adversity."</p> +<p>Harry went to the door, and knocked. It was immediately opened +by the officer who had conducted him there, and who had taken up +his post a short distance from the door. He led Harry back to the +governor, who pressed him to stay with him; but he replied that his +orders were to return to Poona, instantly.</p> +<p>After this interview, he went direct to the tavern where the +soldiers had put up, ate a hasty meal, and then mounted and rode +out of the town. When ten miles away, he halted in a grove for some +hours, and then rode on to Poona. Arrived within a mile of the +town, he paid each of the men the amount promised, and told them to +re-enter the town separately. Then he secured a room for himself in +a small khan, just outside the city and, sitting there alone, +worked out the plan of obtaining an interview with Scindia.</p> +<p>He then told Abdool to go quietly to the Residency, and to bring +out the Brahmin's dress he had before worn. In the morning, Abdool +went out to Scindia's camp with a letter which, when Scindia came +out of his marquee, he handed to him. There was nothing unusual in +this, for petitions were frequently presented in this way to rulers +in India.</p> +<p>As he did so, he said in a low voice, "It is private and +important, Your Highness;" and instead of handing it to one of his +officers, Scindia went back to his tent to read it.</p> +<p>It stated that the writer, Kawerseen, an unworthy member of the +Kshittree Brahmins, prayed for a private interview with His +Highness, on matters of the most urgent import. Scindia thought for +a moment and then, tearing up the piece of paper, went out and, as +he passed Abdool, who was waiting at the entrance, said:</p> +<p>"Tell your master to be here at half-past ten, tonight. The +sentry will have orders to admit him."</p> +<p>Abdool returned at once to Harry, and delivered his message.</p> +<p>"That is good," the latter said.</p> +<p>"You will take me with you, sahib?"</p> +<p>"Certainly, Abdool, if you are willing to go. There is some +danger in it and, should Scindia give the alarm, you may be of +great assistance, by cutting down the sentry before he can run in. +Take your pistols and tulwar, and bring another sword for me. If I +can once get out of the tent we shall be fairly safe for, in the +darkness and confusion which will arise, we shall be able to make +off quietly. We will ride there, and fasten our horses in that +grove that lies about a quarter of a mile from the camp."</p> +<p>At half-past nine they started, and reached Scindia's tent at +the time appointed. Harry's belief that he would succeed was +largely founded on the knowledge that Scindia was a weak young man, +who had never been engaged in warfare, and was wanting in physical +courage. An attendant was at the door, and led him to the prince's +private tent, which stood in the middle of an encampment composed +of large tents; for the purpose of receptions and entertainments, +for the abodes of the ladies of the zenana, and for the officers in +whom Scindia reposed most confidence. The retinue of servants, +attendants, and minor officials were lodged in tents fifty yards +behind the royal encampment.</p> +<p>Scindia was sitting on a divan. Two lamps hung from the ceiling. +He himself was smoking.</p> +<p>"You have something of importance to say to me?" he said, as +Harry entered, and bowed deeply.</p> +<p>"I have, Your Highness. You are doubtless well aware that the +Kshittree Brahmins, who formerly held the principal offices under +your father, are greatly offended by the elevation of Ghatgay; and +still more so by his atrocious deeds in the town of Poona. There +has been a private meeting, and twelve of them, myself among the +number, have sworn by the feet of Brahma to take your life, either +by poison, dagger, or musket ball."</p> +<p>"And you have the insolence to avow that you took such an +oath!"</p> +<p>He sprang to his feet, and would have touched the bell on the +table but, in an instant, Harry sprung forward with a loaded +pistol, pointed at Scindia's head.</p> +<p>"Stop, sir, I beg of you; for assuredly, if you raise a voice or +touch a bell, that moment will be your last."</p> +<p>Scindia sank down into his seat again. He had not the least +doubt that the man before him would execute his threat.</p> +<p>"Your Highness," he said, "I have not come here for the purpose +of assassinating you. I was first on the list, but obtained from +the others permission to endeavour to put an end to the present +state of things, before carrying out our vow. We know that, in +spite of the enormous sums that Ghatgay has raised in Poona, you +yourself have not been enriched; and that you have been unable to +persuade your troops to march, owing to your want of money to pay +up their arrears. We have thought the matter over, and can see but +one way by which you can obtain the necessary funds."</p> +<p>"And that is?" Scindia asked.</p> +<p>"That is, Your Highness, to liberate Nana Furnuwees--setting his +liberty, of course, at a high price. In this way you will not only +be able to move your army, but you will cripple the power of the +Peishwa--who would, if possible, overthrow you, now you have done +his work and freed him from Nana.</p> +<p>"You are well aware, Prince, that Nana Furnuwees always +exercised his authority on the side of peace, and there is no fear +that he will permit Bajee Rao to engage in war against you. He is +an old man, and useless to you as a prisoner. If you exacted a +heavy sum from him it would, in all ways, aid your views."</p> +<p>"But how do you know that Nana could raise such a sum as would +satisfy the troops?"</p> +<p>"We have assured ourselves on that score, and I know that it +matters not how much Nana Furnuwees will have to give. What I would +suggest is that you shall seize Ghatgay, and rid yourself of his +domination. He cannot but be as odious to you as he is to Bajee +Rao, and to the people."</p> +<p>Scindia sat for some time, in silence.</p> +<p>"Do I understand," he said, "that if I carry out these +suggestions, your comrades will be satisfied?"</p> +<p>"That I swear solemnly. I do not threaten Your Highness, for my +visit today is one of conciliation. You might, as soon as I leave +this tent, order me to be arrested. In that case I should use this +pistol against myself, and you would seek in vain for the names of +my eleven brethren; but your life would be forfeited--whether in +the midst of your guards or in your tent, whether you ride or walk. +You would be watched, and your servants would be bribed, and your +food poisoned. If the first man fails, he will blow out his brains, +and so will they all; but be assured that the vow will be kept and +that, whether by night or by day, you will never be safe."</p> +<p>"You are a bold man to speak so," Scindia said.</p> +<p>"I speak so, Your Highness, because I am perfectly ready to die +for the good of the country, and to secure for it peace and +contentment."</p> +<p>Scindia rose, and took two or three turns up and down the tent; +Harry keeping his pistol in his hand, in readiness to fire should +he attempt to slip away. At last, Scindia stopped before him.</p> +<p>"I agree to your conditions," he said, "and the more readily +because I shall, as you say, at once free myself from difficulties, +and avenge myself on Bajee Rao; who is, I know, in spite of his +professions of friendship, constantly plotting against me. Tomorrow +at daybreak an officer shall ride, with a troop of cavalry, and +shall bring Nana here."</p> +<p>"You have chosen wisely, Prince. It is, believe me, your only +way of escaping from your present difficulties. I know that, +already, your soldiery are becoming mutinous at being thus kept, +for months, away from their country, and receiving no pay. That +feeling will grow rapidly, unless their demands are conceded. As to +Ghatgay, the soldiers hold him in abhorrence, and his arrest and +downfall would cause the most lively satisfaction among them. Your +men are soldiers and not assassins, and the tortures and executions +that daily take place fill them with horror; so that your order for +his arrest will be executed with joy.</p> +<p>"Now, Your Highness, I will leave you. I believe that you will +keep your promise, as indeed it is to your interest to do so; in +which case you will never hear of myself, or my eleven +companions."</p> +<p>"Do not fear," Scindia said, "tomorrow my messenger shall +certainly start for Ahmednuggur."</p> +<p>Harry, bowing deeply, turned, passed through the curtain, and +made his way out of the tent. Abdool, who was squatting near the +entrance, at once rose and followed him.</p> +<p>"Is all well, sahib?"</p> +<p>"I think so. I have so frightened Scindia that I have little +doubt he will carry out the promise he has given me. I will tell +you about it, when we get back."</p> +<p>They passed through the sleeping camp, and mounted their horses +in the grove, and rode to the Residency. Colonel Palmer was still +up, engaged in writing a report for the Government. It was a dark +night, and the sentry on duty, knowing Harry's voice, let him pass +without question, not even observing the change in his attire.</p> +<p>"What! Back again, Mr. Lindsay?" the colonel exclaimed, in +surprise, when Harry entered. "I thought that it would be a month +before you returned--that is, if you ever returned at all, and of +this I had but little hope. As I expected, you have, of course, +found it impossible to carry out your design."</p> +<p>"On the contrary, sir, I have been, I hope, perfectly +successful. I have seen Nana Furnuwees, and ascertained that he is +ready to pay a large sum to obtain his freedom, and his former +position as the Peishwa's minister. I have seen Scindia. Tomorrow a +troop of horse will start, to fetch Nana to his camp; and Ghatgay +will be arrested as soon as possible, after he arrives."</p> +<p>"How in the name of fortune have you managed all these things?" +the colonel asked.</p> +<p>"I will tell you, sir, now that I am back here. I shall tomorrow +reassume my uniform, and there is no danger of my being recognized, +or of trouble arising from what I have done."</p> +<p>He then related the various steps he had taken, and his +conversations with Nana and Scindia.</p> +<p>"Upon my word, Mr. Lindsay, I do not know whether to admire most +your daring, in bearding Scindia in the heart of his camp; or the +intelligence with which you have carried out what seemed, to me, an +absolutely impossible undertaking.</p> +<p>"Light your cheroot. I need not trouble about this report that I +was engaged on, when you entered, but will put it by until the day +after tomorrow, when we shall see whether Nana is brought to +Scindia's camp.</p> +<p>"You speak Hindustani as well as Mahratti, do you not?"</p> +<p>"Not so well, sir; but as you know I have, during the six months +that I was at Bombay, and since I have been here, used most of my +spare time working up Hindustani, with a moonshee."</p> +<p>"I am glad to hear it, for I received a letter from the +Governor, this morning, saying that Lord Mornington has requested +him to send an officer, thoroughly acquainted with Mahratti and +with some knowledge of the people; and that he has selected you for +the service, as being by far better fitted than anyone he knows for +the appointment. A knowledge of Hindustani will, of course, be very +useful to you; but Mahratti is the principal thing, as he is +intending to open negotiations with the Mahrattas, as well as with +the Nizam, to induce them to join in concerted action against +Tippoo.</p> +<p>"He says that no vessel will be sailing for Calcutta for less +than a month, so you can stay here for a few days, and see how your +scheme works out. It will be a great step for you, and ensure you +rapid promotion."</p> +<p>"I am indeed obliged to the Governor for selecting me," Harry +said, "and will do my best to justify his confidence."</p> +<p>Two days later, Nana Furnuwees was brought to Scindia's +camp--news which caused Bajee Rao intense consternation. He at once +sent off, to open negotiations with the Nizam for common action, +offering a considerable amount of territory for his assistance.</p> +<p>Colonel Palmer rode over the next morning to Scindia's camp, and +found that Scindia had demanded three millions of rupees as the +price of Nana's release, and appointment as minister to the +Peishwa. Nana had protested his absolute inability to raise +anything like that sum, but had offered five hundred thousand +rupees.</p> +<p>"I can quite believe that he could not pay the sum Scindia +demands," the colonel said, on his return; "and when Scindia sees +that he would rather return to prison than attempt impossibilities, +he will come down in his demands, and Nana will go up in his offer. +It is a mere question of bargaining."</p> +<p>When Scindia heard of the step that Bajee Rao had taken, he was +greatly alarmed; for he could hardly hope to withstand the Nizam's +army, and that which Bajee himself could raise; and he therefore +materially lowered his demands, and finally accepted Nana's offer +of nine hundred thousand rupees. This arrangement being made, he +permitted Nana to leave the camp in order to raise the money; +receiving his solemn oath that, if he failed to do so, he would +return and render himself a prisoner again.</p> +<p>However, in a few days Nana sent in the money. Scindia fulfilled +the other part of his promise, and insisted upon the Peishwa's +receiving Nana as his minister. A few days later he had Ghatgay +arrested, by the sons of two of his European officers.</p> +<p>Scindia was, indeed, most anxious to be off. He did not know +that the Nizam had refused Bajee Rao's offer. He had received news +of widespread disaffection among his troops at home, and felt that +he could not rely upon those with him. As soon, therefore, as he +received the money from Nana, he partially paid the arrears due to +the soldiers. The sum, however, was altogether insufficient to +satisfy the troops and, as Nana Furnuwees found that Bajee was +still intriguing with Scindia for his overthrow, and that no rest +could be hoped for until the latter's army marched away, he +advanced Scindia fifteen lakhs of rupees from his own private +funds. The latter was then able to satisfy his troops.</p> +<p>Scindia accepted the money, but still remained in the +neighbourhood of Poona.</p> +<p>These matters were not concluded until months after Harry left +for Bombay. On arriving there he called upon the Governor, to +report the release of Nana Furnuwees.</p> +<p>"I received Colonel Palmer's last report, four days ago. He has +given me full details of the manner in which you, on your own +initiative, brought about Nana's release, and the approaching +departure of Scindia; and I of course brought them before the +Council, and they quite agreed with me as to the remarkable daring +and ability with which you had carried out what Colonel Palmer +believed to be an impossible scheme.</p> +<p>"I have pleasure in handing you your commission of captain, and +only regret that we cannot break the rules of the service, by +nominating you major. Tomorrow your name will be removed from the +list of officers of the 3rd Regiment, and you will be appointed to +the staff. You will have a week before you, to obtain the proper +uniform. I shall not require you to perform any duties, and you +will therefore have your time to yourself, till you sail. I shall, +of course, forward my reasons for sending you to Lord Mornington, +and shall give an account of the services that you have rendered; +which will doubtless excite as much admiration in Calcutta as in +Bombay.</p> +<p>"I shall be glad if you will dine with me, the day after +tomorrow, when I shall ask the members of the Council to meet +you."</p> +<p>On leaving the Governor, Harry at once went to the shop of the +Parsee merchant from whom he had obtained his regimentals, and +ordered the various uniforms required for the staff. He then went +to Soyera and, to his great satisfaction, found Sufder there. The +latter's troop was one of those which had been disbanded when, on +the arrival of Scindia, Bajee Rao deemed it necessary to reduce his +force; and Sufder, after staying for some time at Jooneer, had now +come down to see his cousin.</p> +<p>"I am glad, indeed, to find you here, Sufder; in the first +place, because it is always a pleasure to meet a good friend; and +in the second, because you can take Soyera back with you, and place +her with Ramdass."</p> +<p>"But why should I leave here, Harry?"</p> +<p>"Because, mother, I am to start for Madras in three weeks; and +may be, for aught I know, away for a year or more. Of course you +can remain here if you prefer it, but it seems to me that the other +would be the better plan."</p> +<p>"I should certainly prefer to go with Sufder to my home," Soyera +said. "I have numbers of acquaintances here, but no real friends; +and Ramdass and Anundee will, I know, joyfully receive me."</p> +<p>"At any rate, you shall be no burden to them, Soyera. I will +give you a thousand rupees, with which you can pay your share of +the expenses of the house or land; and I will give you a similar +sum to hand to Ramdass, as a token of my gratitude for his +protection and kindness. This will enable him to add to his +holding, and to the comforts of his house. I would willingly give +much more, but it might cause suspicion and enquiry, were he to +extend his holding largely; and the authorities of Jooneer might +demand from him how he became possessed of such means. As I told +you, I have received much money in presents, and could afford to +give you very much more, if it were of any advantage to you.</p> +<p>"I shall give a thousand rupees also to you, Sufder. They will +be useful to you, when you settle down on the revenues of your +district; and enable you to cut a good figure among the people when +you arrive there."</p> +<p>The day before he was to sail, a Hindu entered Harry's apartment +and, bowing deeply, handed him a letter. It was from Nana.</p> +<p>"My good English friend,</p> +<p>"I send the enclosed bill, upon my agent, as a small token of +acknowledgment for the inestimable service you have rendered me. +During my long life I have had many friends; but these, in +supporting me, acted in their own interest. You alone have shown me +absolutely disinterested friendship. I have always been opposed to +your people interfering in the affairs of the Deccan; but I see now +that nothing save their intervention can save the country from +absolute ruin, owing to the constant struggles for supremacy among +the great rajahs; and I see that it were far better we should enjoy +peace and protection, under a foreign power, than be exposed to +ruin and misery at the hands of warring factions.</p> +<p>"I grieve that I have not seen you again. Colonel Palmer tells +me that you are about to start for either Calcutta or Madras, to +join the army that is about to act against Tippoo. It is unlikely +that I shall ever see you again; but I shall never forget that, had +it not been for you, I should have ended my life a prisoner at +Ahmednuggur.</p> +<p>"Nana."</p> +<p>The bill enclosed was an order for a hundred thousand rupees, +upon Nana's agent in Bombay.</p> +<p>When Harry went to say goodbye to the Governor, the latter +said:</p> +<p>"It is likely that you will see your old regiment before long, +Captain Lindsay. This morning a ship arrived, with orders from Lord +Mornington for us to send as many troops as could possibly be +spared, to ascend the southern Ghauts and join him near +Seringapatam. Lord Mornington is now at Madras, making arrangements +for an advance; when his brother, Colonel Wellesley, will move +forward with the Nizam's troops. There is still a doubt what part +the Mahrattas will take--probably they will hold aloof, altogether, +until they see how matters go. We know that Tippoo has sent +thirteen lakhs of rupees to Bajee Rao, and that the latter and +Scindia are in constant communication with him. However, at present +we shall take no notice of these proceedings; but allow the Peishwa +to believe that we are deceived by the constant assurances that he +gives us of his friendship, although he has declined to enter into +a treaty with us, similar to that which the Nizam has made.</p> +<p>"It is enough to have one formidable foe on our hands at a time, +and our experience of Bajee assures us that he will not commit +himself, by openly declaring for Tippoo, until he sees how matters +are going."</p> +<p>The winds were unfavourable, and it was not until six weeks +after leaving Bombay that Harry arrived at Madras. It was now +November, 1798 and, on landing, he learned that General Harris was +in command of the army that was assembling at Vellore, and that the +Governor General had returned to Calcutta. He therefore at once +went back to the ship, which next day sailed for that town.</p> +<p>On arriving there he presented himself at the Government House +and, on sending in his name, was in a short time shown in to Lord +Mornington's private room.</p> +<p>"I am glad that you have come, Captain Lindsay," the latter +said. "I wish that you had been here sooner."</p> +<p>"I came by the first ship, sir, after the Governor of Bombay +received your letter but, owing to contrary winds, we have been +nearly two months on the voyage. I landed for an hour at Madras +and, hearing that you had returned here, I hesitated whether to +come to you for orders, or to join General Harris at Vellore; but I +thought it better to come on, and so again embarked on the ship, +which has only just anchored."</p> +<p>"You were quite right, sir, for it was an agent rather than a +soldier that I required. I own that I thought the Governor would +have sent an older man."</p> +<p>"I am the bearer of this letter from him. I believe that in it +he gives his reasons for the honour he did me, in selecting me for +the post."</p> +<p>"I will look through it, presently," Lord Mornington said; "and +if you will dine with me here, I shall then have read it, and shall +be able to decide where you can be employed to the best +advantage."</p> +<p>The dinner was a quiet one, only the officers of the Governor +General's suite being present. The Governor received Harry with +much more cordiality than he had evinced at their first interview, +and introduced him to his officers, with the expression that +Captain Lindsay had done very valuable service in the Deccan. +Little allusion was made to business, until the other officers had +left, when Lord Mornington said:</p> +<p>"I have read the Governor of Bombay's letter, and am convinced +that he could have made no better choice than he has done. He +speaks of you in the highest terms, and has given me a slight +sketch of your story, and a fuller one of the manner in which you +obtained the release of Nana Furnuwees. I learn that Nana has +always been considered our friend; although we have not been able +to give him the support that we could wish, as this would have +entailed war with the Mahrattas, which Bombay is in no position to +undertake. Nevertheless, his release will doubtless, to some +extent, counterbalance the duplicity of the Peishwa who, while +lavish in his promises to us, is receiving money from Tippoo; and +will undoubtedly, unless restrained by Nana, openly espouse his +cause, should he gain any successes over us. You showed such +intelligence in the matter that he says I can place every +confidence in you.</p> +<p>"Although the Nizam has been obliged to dismiss the French +troops in his service, and to send a portion of his army to act in +connection with our own against Mysore, he is in no way to be +trusted; being as slippery as the rest of these Indian princes and, +like the Mahrattas, would assuredly join Tippoo if he saw his way +to doing so. This is so certain that nothing would be gained by +sending another agent to Hyderabad. I therefore propose to open +communications with the Rajah of Berar.</p> +<p>"None of my officers is able to talk Mahratti; though many of +them are, of course, familiar with the southern dialects. The rajah +is already practically at war with the Mahrattas as, for a long +time, his troops have been ravaging the territory of Purseram Bhow; +which he was invited to do by the Peishwa, when Purseram took sides +against him. He is doubtless in some apprehension of an attack by +the Mahrattas and, upon our promising to guarantee his dominions, +and to give him support if attacked, he may be willing to venture +into an alliance with us; and his doing so would, alike, help us in +keeping the Nizam to his engagements, and deter the Mahrattas from +moving.</p> +<p>"This is the mission that I intend to confide to you. I believe +that it could not be in better hands. If you will call, tomorrow +afternoon, your written instructions and powers to act for me, and +to enter into engagements in my name, will be ready for you; and I +should wish you to start the next morning. You will have an escort +of twenty troopers. These Indian princes have little respect for +persons who travel unattended.</p> +<p>"You will understand that the instructions recite the maximum +that you are authorized to offer to the rajah. If he will be +satisfied with less you will, of course, grant as little as you +can; if he demands more, you must refer the matter to me. At any +rate, so long as you are negotiating, he will take no active steps +against us; though I have learned that Bajee Rao has already been +at work, trying to persuade him to join himself and Tippoo against +us. Were such a treaty concluded, we could no longer hope to retain +the Nizam; and indeed, should find it difficult to contend against +so powerful a confederacy. At any rate, if the rajah will not join +us, you must endeavour at least to secure his neutrality.</p> +<p>"The day after tomorrow you will start. I will have a route map +prepared for you. The distance to Nagpore is about eight hundred +miles, and you will get there in four weeks, travelling thirty +miles a day. I have given orders, today, for one of the Company's +ships of war to take you and your escort to the mouth of the +Ganjam; and express messengers have already started, with orders to +the commandant to provide waggons to carry your tent, equipage and +stores. You should, if the winds are favourable, reach there in +four or five days' time."</p> +<p>"The carts will delay us, sir, and without them we might make +forty miles a day, after we have landed; for the horses of this +country have great endurance."</p> +<p>"A few days will make no great difference. There are no towns of +any importance on the road to Nagpore, and you would have to put up +at wretched khans, and would be considered as worthy of little +consideration; whereas I wish you to travel in a style suitable for +my agent, and to impress the native mind with your importance.</p> +<p>"Have you horses?"</p> +<p>"I have but one, sir, and a pony for my servant."</p> +<p>"You must purchase another, and a good one, with showy +equipments. You will, of course, charge that and all other +expenses, and your appointment will be a thousand rupees a month. I +have no doubt the rajah will lodge you handsomely. Should he not do +so, you had best encamp outside the town. Do not put up with any +inferior lodging."</p> +<p>"Very well, sir; I shall endeavour to carry out your orders, to +the letter."</p> +<p>Harry was fortunate in being able to purchase an excellent horse +and, in the afternoon, received his letters of instruction. On the +following day he embarked in a twelve-gun sloop, with twenty +troopers under the command of a native officer. The wind was +favourable and, in four days, they arrived at the mouth of the +Ganjam.</p> +<p>A large native barge came out to meet them. The horses and the +stores which Harry had purchased, together with some boxes with +presents for the rajah, were transferred to her; and two of the +ship's boats took the barge in tow to the shore. The commandant of +the small garrison there informed Harry that the bullock carts had +already gone on to a village, thirty miles away; and that he would +find all in readiness for him, on his arrival.</p> +<p>Without waiting an hour he started with his escort and, half a +mile from the village, found the camp already pitched. It consisted +of one large and handsome tent, such as those used by high +officials, and two smaller ones for the escort. He had engaged at +Calcutta a good cook, and this man at once began to light fires, +and prepare a meal from the stores Harry had brought with him.</p> +<p>The tent was handsomely furnished. A large carpet covered the +ground. There was a bed, four large chairs, and a table; while +between the outer and inner walls of the tent was a bath. As soon +as they halted, one of the troopers rode into the village and +purchased fowls, rice, ghee, and condiments for the use of the +escort, who were all Mahommedans.</p> +<p>Harry found, to his satisfaction, that another set of waggons +had started that morning for the next halting place; and that he +would find everything ready for him there. This was a great +satisfaction, for he had feared that the work of taking down and +packing the tents would delay his start in the morning, and that at +the end of the day's ride he would have to wait some hours before +the tents came up; whereas by the system of double carriage, he +would not be delayed.</p> +<p>The head man told him that his party would start in the morning, +as soon as the cart could be packed; that fresh bullocks would be +hired at the village where he would halt, and would travel all +night, so as to be in readiness for him when he had accomplished +another stage; and that this process would be continued until they +reached Nagpore.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch9" id="Ch9">Chapter 9</a>: A Popular Tumult.</h2> +<p>The journey was performed without incident. Harry enjoyed it +much, for this luxurious method of travelling was quite new to him +and, three weeks after leaving the coast, they arrived at Nagpore. +On the previous day the native officer had been sent on, +beforehand, to inform the rajah of the arrival of a high officer of +the Governor General's; and had taken on a letter from Lord +Mornington, accrediting Harry to act in his name. Accordingly, when +the party arrived within a mile of the town, they were met by two +officers of the rajah; who welcomed him in his name, and said that +a residence had been prepared for his use and that of the escort. +They were surprised at Harry's perfect knowledge of their language +for, hitherto, British agents who had come to Nagpore had had but +very slight acquaintance with it, and had had to carry on their +conversation by means of an interpreter.</p> +<p>The town was large and straggling and composed, for the most +part, of native huts built of mud. There were, however, a few brick +houses, the property of flourishing traders. The palace was a large +square edifice, without any architectural adornments. Trees grew +everywhere in the streets and, in the distance, the town had the +appearance of a forest.</p> +<p>Harry was conducted to one of the largest brick houses in the +town. A host of sweepers had been at work, carpets were laid down, +and furniture placed in the principal rooms. He had no doubt that +it had been requisitioned from its owner by the rajah for him, and +the furniture supplied from the palace. The principal rooms were on +the upper floor, and there was ample accommodation for the escort +below.</p> +<p>Harry requested the officers to ascertain when the rajah would +be ready to receive a visit from him, and they returned with word +that he would receive him, in private audience, at eight o'clock +that evening. Accordingly at that hour, followed by four of his +troopers, he rode to the palace. A guard of honour was drawn up at +the entrance, and saluted as he passed in. The entrance hall and +staircase were lined by attendants, and all bowed profoundly as he +passed. He was conducted to a large audience chamber, where the +rajah, attended by his principal officers, was seated.</p> +<p>The conversation was of the usual ceremonial kind, the prince +expressing his satisfaction that the Governor General should have +sent one of his officers to confer with him, and assuring Harry of +his goodwill and friendship towards the English; while Harry, on +his part, expressed the strong desire of Lord Mornington that the +relations between him and the rajah should be continued unbroken, +and that nothing should ever occur to disturb their amity. The +presents sent by the Governor General were then brought in and +displayed, and appeared to give much satisfaction to the chief.</p> +<p>After the durbar was over, the latter told Harry that he would +receive him, privately, at ten o'clock next morning. On arriving at +that time, he was shown into the prince's private apartment, and +there explained to him the Governor General's desire that he should +join the confederacy between the Nizam and the English.</p> +<p>"I have no quarrel with Tippoo," the rajah said. "At present, +none can say how the affair will end. All say that the Peishwa has +agreed to assist Tippoo. He is a match, and more, for the Nizam; +while we know not whether the English company, or Tippoo, is the +strongest. Should I remain neutral, the Peishwa and Tippoo might +eat me up."</p> +<p>"That is true, Rajah; but you must remember that, in the last +war, the English showed that they were much stronger than Tippoo; +and he was glad to make peace with them, by giving up nearly half +his territories. We are much stronger now. Ships arrive each day +with more and more troops and, believe me, Tippoo will assuredly be +unable to stand against the English power, even if he were backed +up by the whole strength of Poona.</p> +<p>"Of course, we know that messages have been sent to you by +Tippoo, and that he has promised you a large slice of the Nizam's +dominions, if you will invade them, and so prevent him from aiding +the English."</p> +<p>Harry saw, by the change in the prince's countenance, that he +was surprised to find that his negotiations with Tippoo were known +to the English Government. He replied, however:</p> +<p>"It is true that Tippoo has sent to me, but I have given him no +answer. The matter is too important to be settled in a hurry. +Certainly, Tippoo's offers were very advantageous."</p> +<p>"I can understand that they were tempting, Rajah; yet they +entailed a war against the English and the Nizam, when they had +finished with Tippoo. Instead of gaining territory, you would find +that much of yours would be lost.</p> +<p>"But undoubtedly, were you to join us, the Governor General +would show that he was not unthankful for the service, and your +assistance would be handsomely recompensed."</p> +<p>"What does the Governor General offer?"</p> +<p>"He is desirous of knowing what your own views are, Rajah; and +he will assuredly meet them, if possible."</p> +<p>"I have not thought of it, yet," the prince said. "I must talk +the matter over with my councillors. We are good friends with the +Peishwa, also with the Nizam, and with Tippoo. We know that the +English are a great people; but we have had nothing to do with +them, save that complimentary messages have been exchanged. +Therefore it is not a matter upon which one can come to any hasty +decision."</p> +<p>"The Governor General would wish you to think the matter over +well, before deciding, Rajah; and indeed, there is no occasion for +undue haste, seeing that the English army is still lying near +Madras, and is not yet ready to advance. Therefore I will leave the +matter for the present; believing that, in your wisdom, you will be +able to see how matters are likely to go; and whether the English +Company, or Tippoo, are likely to be your best friends."</p> +<p>It was nearly a fortnight before Harry heard again from the +rajah. The latter had returned his visit, and sent over presents of +sweetmeats and food to his guests. At the end of that time he came +in, one evening, with only two attendants.</p> +<p>"I have come to speak to you on this matter, privately," he +said. "My ministers are altogether divided in opinion. Some say we +should fight against Tippoo, who is a cruel and implacable foe, and +who has slaughtered all the Hindus in his territory who refused to +embrace his religion. Others say it is better to be friends with +him, for it seems that these white men intend to eat up all India. +Already they have taken the Carnatic and Bengal, now they want to +take Mysore. What will they take next?</p> +<p>"For myself, I wish well to the English. Though there are few of +them, they are brave and strong; but my council know of the offer +that Tippoo has made us and, unless I can show them that the +English are also ready to give us material advantages, I shall not +be able to persuade my chiefs that our interest must lie in an +alliance with them."</p> +<p>"That is so, Rajah, and if you will inform me what are your +expectations, I will see how far they tally with those which the +Governor General has authorized me to offer."</p> +<p>"I am not greedy," the prince said. "I wish only to have what is +fair and just. I think that our aid is worth two crores of rupees +(200,000 pounds) and that the Company should put me in possession +of the lands of Purseram Bhow, together with the land that lies +between us and Malwan, including the territories of the Rajah of +Bhopal."</p> +<p>"Your demand," Harry said gravely, "is so far beyond what I was +authorized to offer you, that I fear it is altogether useless for +me to submit it to the Governor General. He would, I am sure, +consider that, in naming such terms, you had resolved to make +acceptance impossible."</p> +<p>"That is by no means my intention," the Rajah said. "Nothing +could be further from my thoughts; and in order to secure an +alliance that, I believe, would be advantageous, I might be able to +make some slight concession."</p> +<p>"I will send off a messenger, then, submitting your offer and +asking for instructions, and requesting that I may be allowed to +meet you, by further concessions on my part; but I fear that, +strained as the English treasury is by the preparations for the war +against Tippoo, it would be impossible for the Company to pay the +sum you name; nor do I think that they would be disposed to +guarantee you the territory of Bhopal, seeing that we have no +quarrel with the rajah of that country.</p> +<p>"No doubt, they might be willing to grant you a portion of the +territories of Mysore, lying on the other side of the Godavery, +which would be as valuable as Bhopal."</p> +<p>As the rajah, himself, was still uncertain as to which side it +would be most advantageous to take; and as he thought that the +campaign against Tippoo would last for many months; he offered no +objection to Harry's proposal. The latter sent off two troopers, +the next day, with a letter to Lord Mornington saying that as the +rajah's demands were, he knew, altogether out of the question, he +had sent them to him simply to gain time; hoping that, before the +answer arrived, the army would have gained such successes over +Tippoo as would induce the prince to greatly modify his terms. The +troopers were charged not to use undue haste, but to travel +quietly, at a rate not exceeding twenty miles a day.</p> +<p>Two months passed. The rajah was in no hurry, for the two +parties among his councillors were so evenly divided that he was by +no means sure that, even if he wished it, he could put his army in +motion, in support of either the English or Tippoo; and in the next +place, he believed that the latter would win, and was reluctant in +the extreme to take any step that would draw down upon him the +vengeance of the Lord of Mysore. He occasionally saw Harry and, +although he expressed his anxiety for the return of the messengers, +Harry could see that this feeling was only feigned, and that at +heart he was not sorry that he was not yet called upon to +decide.</p> +<p>At the end of a month, Harry had received a letter from the +Governor General, brought by a messenger in the disguise of a +peasant. It only said:</p> +<p>"March 6th, 1799.</p> +<p>"The army has left Vellore. On the 11th the Nizam's contingent +also marched, as has that from Bombay. By the 1st of this month all +should have reached the plateau--the Bombay army at Sedaseer, +forty-five miles west of Seringapatam; and the main army about +eighty miles east of that town. By the end of the month, both +should be before Tippoo's capital. Siege will probably occupy a +month.</p> +<p>"Even if Berar decides against us, its army cannot arrive in +time to aid Tippoo. Therefore, if you can extend the negotiations +for a month after you receive this, your mission will have been +fulfilled."</p> +<p>This messenger had, of course, been sent off before the arrival +of the troopers in Calcutta and, if Lord Mornington's calculations +were correct, Seringapatam would be invested before they could +return. Three days later, indeed, a report reached Nagpore that +Tippoo had fallen upon the advance guard of the Bombay army, and +had been repulsed; and on the 27th he had attacked General Harris, +and had again been defeated; and that on the 28th the main army had +forded the Cauvery, and had marched to Sosilly.</p> +<p>This news caused great excitement in the town, although +Seringapatam was generally supposed to be impregnable and, as the +English had failed to take it during the last war, it was believed +that, after another futile siege, they would be forced to fall back +again from want of food, as they did upon the previous +occasion.</p> +<p>The rajah, like the majority, believed that Seringapatam could +defy any assault; and that, surrounded as the British army would be +by the Mysore cavalry, they would very speedily be forced to +retire; and that, although Tippoo might have yielded to the wishes +of his general, and attempted to check the advance, it could have +been with only a portion of his army.</p> +<p>Including the contingent furnished by the Nizam, the Bombay army +amounted to forty-three thousand men. Tippoo was credited with +having at least twice that force, and his uniform successes against +his neighbours had created a belief that he was invincible. The +rajah, therefore, was well content to let matters rest, until more +decisive news reached him.</p> +<p>It was on the 7th of April that the messengers returned, with a +letter:</p> +<p>"We no longer want active assistance from Berar. The army is +within striking distance of Seringapatam, and a few thousand native +horse, one way or another, will make but little difference. You +have done very well in gaining two months, by referring the matter +to me. The rajah's demands are, of course, ridiculous. He is +evidently playing a double part and, if we were defeated tomorrow, +would join Tippoo and attack the Nizam. You can still, however, +offer him five lakhs of rupees; but do not guarantee him any +additional territory.</p> +<p>"The Peishwa is acting in precisely the same way. The army that +was to come to our assistance has not yet moved; and he, like +Berar, is simply awaiting events at Seringapatam."</p> +<p>The rajah came in that evening.</p> +<p>"I hear that your messengers have returned, sir."</p> +<p>"Yes; I am sorry to say that the Governor General considers your +demands are altogether excessive. The treasury is almost empty and, +were he to guarantee you an extension of your dominions, it would +bring on a war with the Peishwa and the Rajah of Bhopal; but he is +willing to pay five lakhs of rupees, to cover the maintenance of +your troops while in the field."</p> +<p>The rajah flushed with anger.</p> +<p>"It is altogether insufficient," he said.</p> +<p>"I do not say that is the final offer, Rajah; that is the offer +I am authorized to make, in the first place. Possibly, if you are +willing to make concessions of a reasonable kind, I may be able to +meet you--and you must remember that the friendship of the Company +is of no slight advantage, and would assuredly be of infinite value +to you, were your territory invaded by Scindia and the Peishwa. +These may, at any moment, make up their differences. Purseram Bhow +may again become the commander of the Peishwa's army and, after the +manner in which your troops have, for the last two or three years, +raided his jagheer, he would be your bitterest enemy."</p> +<p>Harry saw that this consideration made a powerful impression +upon the rajah, and the latter said:</p> +<p>"I must think these matters over. The sum that you offer is +altogether insufficient, and cannot be entertained for a moment. +However, there is time for reflection."</p> +<p>During the next four weeks, Harry saw the rajah occasionally; +but the latter made no attempt to talk business. He was evidently +undecided, in his mind, as to the best course he should take. He +feared Tippoo more than he feared the English, and he still +believed that the latter would assuredly fail in capturing +Seringapatam. Tippoo's offers, too, had been considerably higher +than those of Calcutta, as he had promised him a large slice of the +Nizam's dominions for his assistance. He had therefore determined +to reject the English offer, and to march into the Nizam's country, +as soon as he heard that the besieging army had fallen back.</p> +<p>Harry's suspicions that this was the case were, to a certain +extent, confirmed by the fact that bodies of armed men began to +arrive, in considerable numbers. He felt that his own position was +beginning to be precarious, and the native officer commanding his +escort brought in almost hourly reports of what was passing in the +city. The population was a mixed one, and nearly divided between +Hindus and Mahommedans. The latter naturally sympathized altogether +with Tippoo, while the former were in favour of taking no part on +either side.</p> +<p>So matters continued until the 10th of May, when a horseman rode +into the town, with the news that Seringapatam had been captured by +the British, and that Tippoo himself was killed. A feeling akin to +stupefaction was excited by the news; and it seemed, at first, that +it must be false, for it was incredible that Tippoo, with so strong +an army, should have been unable to defend the fortress that, as +was believed, could withstand any attack, however formidable, for +four months.</p> +<a id="PicF" name="PicF"></a> +<center><img src="images/f.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: As he rode through the streets he saw . . . how fierce a feeling of resentment had been excited by the news." /> +</center> +<p>The rajah sent at once, to ask Harry to visit him. As he rode +through the streets he saw, by the scowling faces of the Mahommedan +soldiers, how fierce a feeling of resentment had been excited by +the news that the native officer had brought in, a few minutes +before. The rajah was deeply agitated.</p> +<p>"Have you heard the news, sahib?"</p> +<p>"I have, Rajah."</p> +<p>"And do you think it possible?"</p> +<p>"Perfectly; indeed, I have been expecting it for some days, but +I supposed the English general needed time to bring in provisions +from the country round, to form his plans, and construct his +batteries."</p> +<p>"To me it is astounding!" the rajah said, walking up and down +the room.</p> +<p>"Of course," Harry said, "the proposal that I made to you cannot +now be carried out; and I do not feel myself justified, under the +changed position of things, in continuing the negotiations."</p> +<p>"I always intended to help the English," the rajah went on.</p> +<p>"No doubt, Rajah. I have noticed, for some time, that you have +been gathering a large force here; but you have given me no +indication for what purpose it was intended."</p> +<p>"It was intended, of course, for service with the English," the +rajah said, "and it would have been set in motion, as soon as the +negotiations were completed."</p> +<p>"At any rate, Rajah, in spite of the temptations offered you by +Tippoo, you have remained neutral. This will be considered in your +favour, and I can assure you that there will be no breach in the +friendship between yourself and the English; matters will merely +remain as they were, before this war commenced."</p> +<p>"Except that the Nizam will become more powerful than before," +the rajah said.</p> +<p>"That will no doubt be so, for he will certainly take a +considerable share of Tippoo's dominions. But that need not trouble +you. I know the desire of the Governor General has always been for +peace. He was driven into this war, by the failure of Tippoo to +carry out his undertaking to release all European prisoners in his +hands, and also by the great preparations he was making to regain +territory that he had lost. But it cannot be to the interest of the +Company that the Nizam should use his increased power to be a +scourge to his neighbours; and I can promise you that any wanton +aggression, on his part, will be regarded with displeasure, and +probably lead to their interference in your behalf.</p> +<p>"Now, Rajah, I must remind you that I am here as your guest, and +I rely upon you to protect me. As I came through the streets, the +attitude of the Mahommedan soldiers was very threatening; and I +should not be surprised if they attempted to attack the house. I +need not say that any outrage upon the escort of a British agent +would be tremendously avenged; and that you would be more easily +forgiven, had you taken the part of Tippoo, than if you allow me +and my escort to be massacred."</p> +<p>"I will take immediate steps for your safety and, should any +attempt be made, I shall come with my household guards to your +assistance. A squadron of them shall ride back with you, now, to +prevent any insult being offered to you in the streets."</p> +<p>"I will relieve you of my presence, tonight," Harry said. "I do +not wish to be an object of strife between you and your people, and +will therefore take my farewell of you, at once. I shall have +pleasure in informing the Governor General of the steps that you +have taken to provide for my safety."</p> +<p>"And give him the assurance that my disposition is wholly +friendly, and that I rely on nothing so much as to secure his +friendship, and to remain on the most amicable terms with him."</p> +<p>Harry had no doubt that the assurance was given in earnest. The +fall of Seringapatam, and the death of Tippoo, had been a terrible +shock to the rajah; and even the fact that he had missed his +opportunity of allying himself with the English, was as nothing to +the thought of what would have happened had he declared for +Tippoo.</p> +<p>The rajah at once gave orders for a squadron of his horse to +mount, and continued his conversation with Harry until they were +ready in the courtyard. Then, bidding adieu to the prince, the +latter mounted, and was escorted through the streets by the cavalry +guard.</p> +<p>But although their presence prevented any attack being made on +him, the lower class groaned and yelled, and he had no doubt that, +had it not been for his escort, he would have been murdered on his +way back.</p> +<p>Directly he arrived he called the troopers to arms, and told +them to barricade the gates, and to be ready to take post at the +windows, in case of assault. Looking out, he saw that the rajah's +men had taken up their position in front of the house.</p> +<p>A great crowd soon began to gather there. Most of the men were +evidently soldiers, and had arms in their hands. Loud shouts were +raised, and it was not long before a musket was discharged, quickly +followed by others. The native officer in charge of the guard +ordered the soldiers to seize those who fired but, as his men +pressed their horses forward, the crowd closed in upon them, +breaking their ranks and rendering them powerless.</p> +<p>While this had been going on, the men of Harry's escort were +hard at work in getting up the paving stones of the yard, and +piling them against the gate. The lower windows were all barred +and, as there was no entrance except by the front gate, it was felt +that they could hold the house for some time.</p> +<p>As soon as the guard were swept away, a portion of the crowd +attacked the gate with showers of stones, while a heavy musketry +fire was opened at every window. So heavy was this that Harry would +not allow the troopers to show themselves there, but posted them +behind the barricades of stone against the gates so that, when +these yielded, they might be able to open fire whilst showing only +their heads over the top line of stones.</p> +<p>Harry regretted, now, that he had not, when he returned from the +rajah, at once ordered his men to mount and cut their way through +the mob. A few at least might have escaped though, doubtless, they +would have been pursued by the irregular cavalry. As it was he felt +that, although they might sell their lives dearly, they must be +destroyed to a man, unless the rajah sent assistance to them. That +he would endeavour to do so he felt sure, for the massacre of a +British envoy, and his escort, was certain to bring the English +troops to Nagpore, sooner or later; and no assurances that the +rajah had done all in his power to save them would be accepted as +sufficient.</p> +<p>The house stood in a garden, which extended some distance behind +it; and it was here that the horses were picketed. The front gate +was a very strong one, and was certain to resist all attacks, for +some time.</p> +<p>Harry called off half his men, and set them to work at the wall +at the end of the garden, which was only constructed of dry mud; +directing them to make a hole large enough for a horse to pass +through. At this side all was quiet, the people in the native +houses there having gone round to the front, to watch what was +doing. Harry stood there for a few minutes, watching the men at +work, and saw with satisfaction their heavy tulwars rapidly cutting +through the soft wall. He told them that, when they had finished, +four of them were to remain to guard the hole, in case any might +try to force their way in; and the rest were to return, to aid +their comrades at the gate.</p> +<p>He had no great fear that the attempt would be made to enter in +that direction, for the windows in the back of the house were, like +those in front, large; and anyone attempting to climb the walls and +enter the garden would be liable to be shot down from the windows, +as they could not be covered, as were those on the other side, by a +fire kept up from the houses outside. The entrance into the garden +from the house was made by a small door, at the bottom of a +staircase leading from what had been the zenana, for the gardens +were always considered the special domain of the ladies. There was +another small door for the servants' offices, used by the men who, +early in the morning, went in to keep the garden in order.</p> +<p>When Harry rejoined the party in front, he found that the gates +were yielding. The lower portion had been almost chopped away; but +here the wall of stones prevented an entrance, and the men with +their axes could scarcely reach to touch the upper half. Presently, +however, the hinges of the upper end of one of the half doors +yielded to the weight. A great shout arose from the mob; and the +musketry, hitherto directed against the windows, was now +concentrated on the opening.</p> +<p>But it was no longer one sided. The troopers, glad that the time +for inaction had passed, returned the fire with vigour. They had +shifted the upper line of stones, so that there was room between +each for a musket barrel and, lying in shelter, they were enabled +to take deliberate aim at their assailants. At every shot a man +dropped, and the crowd opened speedily, and cleared away from the +line of fire.</p> +<p>There was a pause of some minutes, and then a strong party of +soldiers rushed forward, and began to try to pull down the barrier; +a number of others opening fire over their heads, so as to prevent +the defenders from standing up to fire down into them. It was +evident that, ere long, a slope would be formed outside by which an +assault could be made.</p> +<p>That his men would for some time repel any attack, Harry thought +certain; but sooner or later it would succeed, and there would then +be no time to retire. He therefore sent a man back, to see if the +hole in the wall was large enough; and he returned directly, saying +that the men there had just concluded their work, and that six of +them were coming back.</p> +<p>Harry now gave orders, to the native officer who was standing +beside him, to order these men to lead the horses through the +opening. When he had been gone a minute or two, he sent all the +men, except four, to follow the example of their comrades; while +those left with him redoubled their fire, so that their assailants +should not know that any of the defenders had been withdrawn.</p> +<p>It was not long before a trooper ran back, with the word that +all the horses had been taken through. The news came just in time, +for so much of the barricade had been pulled down that it could now +be climbed. Harry therefore gave the word and, with the last of the +defenders, went off at a run.</p> +<p>The troop was gathered in the deserted lane at the bottom of the +garden and, on Harry's arrival, the men sprung into the saddles and +galloped off. The rattle of musketry was now very heavy, but it +suddenly stopped and, a moment later, shouts and yells told that +the breach had been carried, and the yard found to be deserted.</p> +<p>"They will search the house, first," Harry said to the native +officer, "and they will be cautious about it, as they will think +that at any moment they may come upon us, and will be sure that +they would meet with a desperate resistance. I expect that it will +be ten minutes before they discover how we have slipped through +their hands."</p> +<p>They made a long detour, and then approached the palace from the +other side; Harry having determined to place himself under the +protection of the rajah, for he did not think it possible that they +could escape by hard riding, as they might be pursued by the whole +of the cavalry. Just as they were approaching it, they heard a +fresh outbreak of firing, the musketry being mingled with the crack +of field guns.</p> +<p>"The rajah has gone out to our rescue," Harry said. "He would +have been too late, if we had stopped there; however, we can rely +upon him now."</p> +<p>Five minutes later, they rode into the courtyard of the palace. +It was almost deserted, but one of the officials came out and, +bowing deeply to Harry, said:</p> +<p>"The rajah himself has gone out, with the household troops and a +battery of artillery, to put down the tumult. He is furious that +his guests should have been attacked."</p> +<p>The firing presently ceased and, a quarter of an hour later, the +rajah rode in. A messenger had been despatched, at once, to inform +him that the British officer, with his escort, had arrived at the +palace. Harry and his men had dismounted, and were still standing +by their horses.</p> +<p>The rajah sprang from his saddle as he rode up.</p> +<p>"The gods be thanked that I see you safely here, my friend!" he +said. "When I arrived at your house, I feared that all was over, +for these rebels had gained possession. You must not blame me for +not arriving sooner. When the firing was heard, I feared that the +rabble of the town, aided perhaps by many of my soldiers, were +attacking you; although, until the officer who commanded the guard +I had placed there returned, I did not dream how serious the +business was. Then I got my soldiers together; but this occupied +some time, as many of them were in the town. However, as soon as a +squadron of horse was collected, and a couple of hundred infantry, +together with four guns of a battery, I headed them myself and, on +arriving, opened fire upon the mob; who speedily scattered, some +fifty or sixty of them being killed.</p> +<p>"Then I entered the house, expecting to find only your dead +bodies, but there were no signs of strife. I questioned some +prisoners we had taken inside; and these said that, just before I +came up, a hole had been discovered in the garden wall, and it was +believed that you had all escaped through that. I was about to +ride, with all speed, to prevent any pursuit being taken up; when a +messenger arrived with the welcome news that you had just entered +the palace."</p> +<p>"I thank you heartily, Rajah, for having so promptly come to my +aid; though assuredly you would have arrived too late to save us, +had we not, as soon as the fighting began, set to work to prepare a +means of escape. Once we got out, we were sure that you would +protect us, and therefore rode here and awaited your return."</p> +<p>"'Tis well, indeed, that you thought of that plan, sahib; for I +would not, for half my dominions, that a hair of your head should +have been hurt, while you were here as my guest."</p> +<p>"It has all ended fortunately, Rajah; and now, what would you +recommend me to do?"</p> +<p>"You had best stay here, until nightfall. I will ride, now, to +the camps of my men, to reproach them for their conduct; and to ask +if they want to bring the army that has just captured Seringapatam +down upon us. When it is dark, I will myself accompany you, with my +household cavalry, until you are miles away.</p> +<p>"I pray you to report to the Governor General how grieved I am +that evil-disposed persons should have raised a riot, with the +intention of killing you; and assure him that I did all in my power +to save you, and shall, if they can be discovered, punish those +concerned in the matter."</p> +<p>"I shall assuredly report very favourably of your conduct, +Rajah--which will, I have no doubt, be warmly appreciated--and +shall let the Governor General know that, from the time of my +arrival here, I always have been treated with the greatest courtesy +and attention by you."</p> +<p>Leaving the infantry and artillery, with their guns, in front of +the palace, lest any attack should be made upon it; the rajah rode +off with his cavalry and returned, two hours later, with the news +that all was quiet, and that the troops had returned to their +duty.</p> +<p>As soon as it was dark, the party started. The rajah rode at the +head of his cavalry; Harry, at his request, taking his place with +his own escort in the centre of it, so that his presence among them +should not be suspected.</p> +<p>"It is as well," the rajah said, "that the news that you have +left should not be known till tomorrow morning; for although the +troops would, I have no doubt, be obedient to my orders, in a town +like this there are many budmashes; who might, if they knew that +you had started, ride in pursuit, with the intention of attacking +you after I had left you."</p> +<p>Once out of the town they proceeded at a rapid pace, which they +maintained until twenty miles away from Nagpore. The rajah then +returned, with the main body of his cavalry; ordering a native +officer and thirty men to escort Harry, until he arrived at the +frontier.</p> +<p>There was, however, little occasion for this addition to Harry's +force. The news of the fall of Seringapatam had spread like +wildfire, and at each village through which they passed, and at +those in which they halted for the night, the inhabitants saluted +Harry with the deepest respect; and would willingly have supplied +him and his escort with provisions, without payment, had he not +insisted upon their receiving fair value for them.</p> +<p>At the frontier the rajah's troop turned back, and Harry +continued his journey, reaching Calcutta early in June.</p> +<p>When he arrived there, he was well received by the Governor +General, who told him that he had rendered a great service, by so +delaying the negotiations that the Rajah of Berar had remained +neutral during the war with Tippoo; and that he would probably soon +require his services again.</p> +<p>A descendant of the Rajah of Mysore, whose government Hyder Ali +had usurped, was released from captivity and raised to the musnud. +Nearly half the revenue of the country was assigned to him. A large +sum was set aside for the maintenance of the families of Hyder and +Tippoo, and the remaining territory was divided between the Company +and the Nizam.</p> +<p>A portion was set aside as the share of the Peishwa, although he +had not fulfilled his engagement in any way; but it was to be given +only on the condition that he signed a treaty of alliance with the +English, similar to that entered into by the Nizam. The Peishwa, +however, would not consent to do this; and the territory set aside +for him was, consequently, divided between the Company and the +Nizam.</p> +<p>Civil war was raging in the Deccan. The widows of Mahdoo Rao had +been joined by a large force, and were plundering Scindia's +villages; while Jeswunt Holkar was also ravaging the country. +Scindia found that it was necessary to appoint Balloba, who had +been for some years in captivity, to the post of his chief minister +and, through him, a treaty was made with the widows of Mahdoo, and +the trouble in that direction ceased.</p> +<p>The Rajah of Kolapoore was at war with the Peishwa; and the +troops of Purseram Bhow, and those of Rastia, were both defeated. +Scindia and the Peishwa now sent an army of thirty thousand horse +and six thousand infantry against Kolapoore; but Purseram, who was +in command, was defeated and fell, mortally wounded. Another army +joined the defeated force, and invested Kolapoore.</p> +<p>On the 13th of March, 1800, Nana Furnuwees died; and affairs in +the Mahratta country, that had been to some extent kept in order by +his wisdom and moderation, now became worse than ever. A dispute at +once took place between the Peishwa and Scindia, each being +desirous of obtaining the treasures Nana was supposed to possess. +Scindia seized his jagheer. Ghatgay was released, and obtained his +former influence over Scindia; who seized Balloba and threw him +into prison, where he died.</p> +<p>The Peishwa, on his part, was determined to destroy all the +friends of Nana and, inviting most of the principal men to the +palace, he seized and sent them all, prisoners, to hill forts. He +now, with Scindia, determined to destroy the family and adherents +of Purseram Bhow. Appa Sahib, Purseram's son, had succeeded him in +the command of the army besieging Kolapoore and, receiving +intelligence of the conspiracy against him, raised the siege and +retired to the Carnatic, and Scindia plundered the whole of +Purseram's villages.</p> +<p>A fierce chief in Dhoondia invaded the newly-acquired +territories of the British, and Major General Wellesley was sent +against him, and totally routed his party.</p> +<p>Jeswunt Holkar was now becoming extremely dangerous; and Scindia +was at last obliged to march away, with his army, to defend his own +dominions. He left behind him five battalions of regular infantry, +and ten thousand horse and, before he set out, compelled the +Peishwa to give him gold to the amount of forty-seven lakhs of +rupees.</p> +<p>On his way through Malwan, he sent seven of his regular +battalions to protect his capital. One column, under Captain +Mackintyre, was intercepted on the way, and all killed or made +prisoners. Holkar then fell upon the other party, which he also +overpowered and defeated. He next attacked Scindia's artillery on +the march; but Major Brownrigg, an officer in the latter's service, +with four battalions, repulsed his assailants.</p> +<p>The Peishwa, while this was going on, was mercilessly murdering +or imprisoning those whom he considered his enemies; and ordered +Wittoojee Holkar, the brother of Jeswunt, to be trampled to death +by an elephant.</p> +<p>Scindia having sent for Ghatgay to rejoin him, Jeswunt advanced +to meet him, and was signally defeated. He speedily gathered a +fresh force, and wasted not only Scindia's country but that of the +Peishwa; and finally a great battle was fought, near Poona, in +which Holkar, thanks to his fourteen regular battalions, officered +by Englishmen, won a complete victory over the Peishwa's force and +that left behind by Scindia. The Peishwa was forced to fly, and +take refuge at Bassein, where he entered into negotiations for +British support.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch10" id="Ch10">Chapter 10</a>: A Mission By Sea.</h2> +<p>A Fortnight after Harry's return, he was again sent for by Lord +Mornington.</p> +<p>"Captain Lindsay, I am about to employ you on a mission of a +somewhat delicate character. There have been many complaints that +ships trading among the islands have been attacked and, in some +cases, captured and the crews massacred, by Malays. We recently +received a communication from a native chief, or rajah, who owns +the southern point of the Malay Peninsula. He says that the Dutch, +in Java, greatly interfere with his trade; as all vessels trading +in the East are bound to touch at Batavia, on their way to Europe, +and consequently very few of them visit the Peninsula, as to do so +would greatly lengthen their voyage to Batavia. He asks that we +should make a settlement at the end of the Peninsula, so that our +ships may trade with him; and would be willing to place us in +possession of an island, two or three miles from the extreme +southern portion of his dominions.</p> +<p>"There can be no doubt that the position would be an extremely +valuable one; lying, as it does, on our trade route to the East. +But it is also certain that a settlement of that kind would be +viewed with extreme jealousy by the Dutch; whose possessions, in +Java and other islands, render them practically masters of the +whole Malay Archipelago.</p> +<p>"Certainly, at present, our hands are much too full here to +permit of our engaging in any enterprise of this kind but, at the +same time, it is desirable that we should obtain some reliable +information as to the situation there, the power of this rajah, and +the advantages that the island offers in the way of ports, the +salubrity of its climate, and other similar particulars. Its +possession would certainly be desirable, not only as a centre for +future trade with Bankok and the East, but as a port from which our +vessels of war might suppress the piracy that prevails all along +the Malay coast, and in the neighbouring island of Sumatra. Such +information may be extremely useful in the future, and when our +power in this country is consolidated.</p> +<p>"But this is not the sole object of your mission. You will +proceed, either before or after your visit to this rajah, as we +will determine, to Batavia; bearing a despatch from me to the Dutch +governor, narrating a number of acts of piracy that have taken +place among the islands, and requesting that, as they are the +paramount power in that district, they will take steps, both for +their own sake and ours, to suppress piracy; and offering, on our +part, that two or three of our ships of war shall, if they think it +desirable, aid them in the punishment of the Malays. You will be +accompanied by an interpreter.</p> +<p>"There are several Malay traders established here; and some of +them, no doubt, speak Hindustani fluently. I will have enquiries +made among them, and will also procure you a Dutch interpreter.</p> +<p>"I do not propose that you shall go in a trading vessel to Java. +The appearance of such a vessel, off Batavia, would be resented by +the Dutch. Of course, traders do go from here down to the islands, +but only to those not under Dutch power. They used generally to +trade, on their way down, with Burma and Siam; but the Burmese have +shown such hostility to us that it is no longer safe to enter their +rivers, and they have wrested the maritime provinces of Siam, on +this side of the Peninsula, from that power; so that trade there +is, for the present, at an end. I shall therefore send you down in +one of our small sloops. A larger vessel might irritate the Dutch, +and a small one would be sufficient to furnish you with an escort +to this Rajah of Johore--not only for protection, but because the +native potentates have no respect for persons who do not arrive +with some sort of appearance of state.</p> +<p>"You will, of course, go as high commissioner, with full powers +to represent me. I do not anticipate that you will be able to +conclude any formal treaty with the Rajah of Johore. He will, of +course, ask for an equivalent, either in money or in protection +against some neighbouring rajah. We have no money to spare at +present, and certainly no troops. Your commission therefore will be +to acknowledge his communication, to assure him of our friendship, +to ascertain the suitability of the island that he offers, and to +tell him that, at present, being so fully occupied with wars here, +we are scarcely in a position to extend our responsibility; but +that, when matters are more settled, we shall be prepared to enter +into a treaty with him, to open a trade with his dominions, to pay +a fair sum for the possession of the island, if suitable, and to +enter into a treaty of alliance with him.</p> +<p>"Of the value of such a settlement there can be no doubt, +whatever; for we may take it that, before very long, some of the +Chinese ports will be open to European traders."</p> +<p>A week later, Harry embarked on a brig mounting eight guns, and +usually employed in police work along the coast. He was accompanied +by a Dutch interpreter, a Malay trader, Abdool, and four troopers +of the Governor General's bodyguard, in the handsome uniform worn +by that corps. The lieutenant in command of the brig received +Harry, with the usual ceremony, as a Government commissioner. He +himself was at the gangway to meet him, and twelve of the sailors, +with drawn cutlasses, saluted as Harry stepped on to the deck.</p> +<p>The lieutenant, a young man of about four or five and twenty, +looked surprised when he found that the official, whom he was to +carry down to Java, was apparently younger than himself.</p> +<p>"I suppose, Captain Fairclough," Harry said with a smile, +when they entered the cabin, "that you expected to see a +middle-aged man."</p> +<p>"Hardly that, Captain Lindsay. I heard that you were a young +officer, who had rendered distinguished services on the Bombay +side, and had just returned from an important mission in the +Deccan; but I own that I had not at all expected to see an officer +younger than myself."</p> +<p>"I can quite understand that. I have been exceptionally +fortunate, owing to the fact that I speak Mahratti as well as +English. Well, I hope that after your reception we have done with +ceremony; and that you will forget that I am, at present, a civil +official with the temporary rank of commissioner, and regard and +treat me as you might any young officer who had been given a +passage in your brig. I have led a pretty rough life, and hate +anything like ceremony. We may be some weeks on board together, and +should have a pleasant time of it, especially as the whole country +is new to me."</p> +<p>"And to me also," the lieutenant said. "I generally cruise from +the mouth of the Hooghly to Chittagong; and a dreary coast it is, +with its low muddy shores and scores of creeks and streams. In the +sunderbunds there is little to look after, the people are quiet and +very scattered; but farther east they are piratically inclined, and +prey upon the native traders, and we occasionally catch them at it, +and give them a lesson.</p> +<p>"Well, I shall be very glad to adopt your suggestion, and to +drop all ceremony. I have not often had to carry civil officials in +this craft, she is too small for any such dignified people; but +when I was in the Tigris, we often carried civil and military +officials from Madras, and some of them were unmitigated +nuisances--not the military men, but the civilians. The absurd airs +they gave themselves, as if heaven and earth belonged to them, were +sickening; and they seemed to regard us as dust under their feet. +Whenever we heard that we were to take a member of the Council from +Calcutta to Madras, or the other way, it was regarded as an +infliction of a serious kind."</p> +<p>"Well, I propose to begin with that, when we are down here +together, we drop titles; you call me Lindsay, and I will call you +Fairclough."</p> +<p>"With all my heart," the other said.</p> +<p>"What officers have you?"</p> +<p>"A junior lieutenant, and two midshipmen. The lieutenant, when I +am alone, always messes with me. We are not so strict, among our +small craft in the Company's service, as they are in the royal +navy; and I think, myself, that it would be ridiculous for me to +dine here by myself; Mr. Hardy, by himself; and the two midshipmen +in a separate mess of their own. That of course they do, for they +would not enjoy their meals with Hardy and myself."</p> +<p>"I quite agree with you."</p> +<p>"This is your stateroom."</p> +<p>"But it is your private cabin, Fairclough, is it not?"</p> +<p>"Well, yes; but I am accustomed to turn out, whenever there are +passengers."</p> +<p>"Well, at any rate, I shall feel very much disgusted if you do +so for me. I should be most uncomfortable, so I must insist on you +having your things moved back here. When I tell you that, for +sixteen years, I lived in the house of a small Mahratta cultivator, +you may well imagine that I can make myself perfectly comfortable, +anywhere."</p> +<p>"It will be quite contrary to the rules of our service," the +other began, hesitatingly.</p> +<p>"I can't help that," Harry replied. "There are no rules without +exceptions, and mine is an altogether peculiar case. You will +really oblige me, very much, if you will have the change made.</p> +<p>"I see that you are surprised at what I told you about myself; +it is too long a story to tell you now, but I will, after dinner +today, repeat to you and Hardy some of my experiences; which you +will see have been curious, and account for my having the rank of +captain, and being employed in a responsible position, at my +age.</p> +<p>"I suppose you will soon be getting up anchor?"</p> +<p>"Yes; the tide will be favourable now, and everything is ready +for a start."</p> +<p>A few minutes later, the clank of the capstan was heard and, +going on deck, Harry found Lieutenant Hardy preparing to sail. As +soon as the vessel was under way he came aft, and was introduced to +Harry.</p> +<p>The latter had enquired, of the chief of the Governor's staff, +what was customary on these occasions, and whether he was to take +on board a stock of provisions.</p> +<p>"Not at all," was the reply; "Government makes an allowance for +messing and wine. Sometimes an official will take a dozen or so of +champagne with him, as the allowance, though liberal, would +scarcely cover this; but it is quite sufficient to enable a captain +to keep a good table, and provide port and sherry."</p> +<p>Harry, seeing that the voyage might be much longer than usual, +had sent on board four dozen of champagne; some of which he thought +might be useful at the table, if the Rajah of Johore came on board +with a number of his chiefs, or if the ship was visited by Dutch +officials.</p> +<p>The Dutch interpreter was to mess with the petty officers. The +Malay preferred to prepare his victuals for himself.</p> +<p>The wind was light, and the brig drifted quietly down the river +and, when evening came on, anchored as, on account of the sandbanks +and the lightness of the wind, Fairclough had thought it +unadvisable to continue his voyage at night. As soon as the sails +had been taken in, the two officers went down to the cabin, where +dinner was ready for them.</p> +<p>It was a pleasant one, for the two naval men were in high +spirits over this change from their ordinary routine, and the +prospect of sailing on a strange voyage. Abdool, as usual, had +placed himself behind his master's chair, but Harry said:</p> +<p>"I sha'n't want you to wait on me during the voyage, Abdool; the +captain's steward will do that."</p> +<p>After the meal was over, cheroots lighted, and a decanter of +port placed on the table, Fairclough asked Harry for the story he +had promised him; and the latter accordingly gave them a sketch of +his life and adventures.</p> +<p>"I no longer wonder, Lindsay, at your having attained the rank +of captain so young. That old nurse of yours must have been a +trump, indeed; but certainly it is wonderful that you should have +lived, first as a peasant and then at the Peishwa's court, so long +without anyone having had a suspicion that you were an Englishman. +Fancy your meddling in politics, being regarded as a friend of the +Peishwa and this minister of his, and being the means of getting +the latter out of prison, and so perhaps averting a war between the +Mahrattas and Bombay! That was a ticklish business, too, at +Nagpore; and you were lucky in coming so well out of it.</p> +<p>"But after all, I think the most wonderful part is that a boy of +sixteen should have been a shikaree, and killed no end of tigers, +leopards, and bears and, after that, have risen so soon to the rank +of captain in the Company's service. Why, you have seen and done +more than most men double your age!"</p> +<p>"Yes, I have had great luck, and it is all owing to my old nurse +having taken such pains; first to enable me to pass as a Mahratta, +and in the next place to teach me the English language and English +ways.</p> +<p>"Well, the story has been an unconscionably long one. I think I +will go on deck and smoke a last cheroot, and then turn in."</p> +<p>"If you were a new hand from England, I should say that you had +better smoke it here," Fairclough said; "for the mists from the +water and swamps are apt to give fresh hands a touch of fever."</p> +<p>The time passed pleasantly, as they made direct for the mouth of +the straits between the Malay Peninsula and Sumatra. There was a +light but steady breeze and, on the morning of the eighth day after +sailing, Harry, on going on deck, saw land on the port side. As the +lieutenant, on the evening before, said that they should next day +sight the Great Andaman, he was not surprised.</p> +<p>On looking at the chart, he said to Fairclough:</p> +<p>"I should have thought that it would have been shorter to go on +the other side of the islands."</p> +<p>"It would have been rather shorter; but there are four or five +islands to the north of the Andaman, and another very small one +halfway between it and Negrais, so I preferred going outside. When +we get south of the Little Andaman Island, we shall pass between it +and the Nicobar Islands. I fancy that they, and perhaps the +Andamans, once formed a part of Sumatra. They are scattered almost +in a line from its northern point. The land has probably sunk; and +these islands were, no doubt, the summits of mountains forming part +of the chain that runs through Sumatra.</p> +<p>"Once through the passage south of Little Andaman, we shall sail +due east for a day or two; and then lay her course nearly +southeast, which will take us right up the straits between Sumatra +and the Malay Peninsula."</p> +<p>"Are there any islands scattered about there?"</p> +<p>"There is one nasty little group, called the Arroa Islands, +nearly in mid-channel. I shall take care to pass them in daylight. +Farther down there are several largish islands near the Sumatra +coast but, as the passage is some sixty miles wide, there is little +fear of our running foul of them."</p> +<p>"Have the Dutch any settlements at Sumatra?"</p> +<p>"Two or three. Palembang is the principal. It is on a river that +runs down into the Banca Straits. I believe that they have trading +stations at Jambi and Siak."</p> +<p>A fortnight later the brig anchored off the coast of Singapore. +During the voyage, Harry had had many conversations with the +Malayan interpreter. The latter told him that the chief who had +written might not be in a position to carry out his offer. Not only +were the small Malay states frequently engaged in wars with each +other, but there were constant internal insurrections and +struggles, the various petty chiefs frequently endeavouring to set +up as independent powers. At the present time the tumangong, or +chief justice, had obtained possession of the island of Singapore, +and the adjacent district of the mainland; while other chiefs had +also thrown off their allegiance to the Rajah of Johore, who +himself had usurped the power from the former reigning family.</p> +<p>"If," he said, "you want only to obtain a place for trade, the +tumangong is no doubt the person from whom you must obtain it; but +if you wanted the whole island, you would have to treat not only +with him but with the rajah as, in case the latter should defeat +and overthrow the tumangong, he certainly would not recognize the +cession of the island to you."</p> +<p>"Is there a good port?"</p> +<p>"No; but it is not needed. They do not have hurricanes, here, as +they do in the Bay of Bengal and in the China Seas, and indeed +among the islands; so vessels can anchor off the coast, in safety, +at all times of the year."</p> +<p>"What is the island like?"</p> +<p>"It is covered with forest and jungle," the Malay replied. +"There are but few inhabitants, a hundred and fifty or so. Most of +these are my people, but there are a few Chinese and Bugis. The +Malays are not cultivators. They live by piracy, attacking small +native vessels passing through the narrow passages between +Singapore and the mainland. The Chinese cultivate patches of +land."</p> +<p>"Is it fertile?"</p> +<p>"Very. Rain falls there more than half the days in the year. If +the Chinese had it, they would make a garden of it. It is better, +even, than the land on that part of Sumatra where they produce +spices and grains of all sorts. The Malay Peninsula would be very +wealthy, were it not split up into several kingdoms, that are +always at war with each other.</p> +<p>"Singapore was a great place, once. Seven hundred years ago it +was the capital of the whole Malay kingdom; but it was taken, a +hundred years afterwards, by the King of Java, and Malacca then +became the Malay capital."</p> +<p>"The affair does not seem very promising," Harry said, after +repeating to Fairclough what he had heard from the Malay. "From my +experience of the Indian princes, there is very little trust to be +placed in any agreement made with them. They keep it just as long +as it suits them, and then break it; without the slightest sense of +having done anything dishonourable. It seems to me that the +position here is very much like that in the Deccan. Scindia, +Holkar, and the Rajahs of Berar and Kolapoore are practically +independent of the Peishwa, who maintains only a semblance of +authority. From what the interpreter tells me, there seems to be +only a puppet rajah who, today, possesses no authority whatever; +but who, tomorrow, may excite a quarrel among the other chiefs, and +again become their master.</p> +<p>"I think that, in the first place, I shall have to see this +semi-independent chief, whose possessions Singapore forms part of; +and afterwards the Rajah of Johore, his nominal master.</p> +<p>"The latter may view the matter in one of two ways. In the first +place, he may consider the island of no importance, whatever; +seeing that, even were he again its master, no revenue could be +obtained from the handful of people living there; and would +therefore be glad to ratify the cession to us, for a small sum. On +the other hand, he may consider that the elevation of the island, +into the position of a great European trading port, would add +greatly to the power and importance of the tumangong, and might +enable him to make himself master of the whole of Johore."</p> +<p>"It seems a complicated business, certainly," the sailor +replied. "You see, though this rebel chap, having written to +Calcutta, may be trusted to receive you hospitably; there is no +saying what the rajah may think of it."</p> +<p>"Nor is it clear how I am to get at the rajah," Harry remarked. +"The tumangong would, no doubt, object to my going beyond what he +considers as his territory; as it might seem that, did he let me do +so, he would be recognizing the power of the rajah to interfere in +his business. However, it is certain that I must carry home a clear +report on the situation; and to do that I must, at any rate, +attempt to see the rajah.</p> +<p>"Of course we must endeavour to learn, from the Malays on the +island, whether Johore still holds any territory running down to +the sea, or whether the coast chiefs have also revolted against +him. In the first case, I will send up a native, to say that I have +a mission from the Governor General of India to visit his court; +but if he is cut off from the sea, I must endeavour to make my way +through, somehow. It would never do to return with only half a +story. I do not suppose the Governor General is at all aware of the +state of things here, or that the chief who communicated with him +is not the acknowledged Rajah of Johore.</p> +<p>"There can be no doubt that the possession of this island would +be of great value to us, as it would become a centre of trade, not +only with the East, but with all the islands round; except, of +course, those belonging to Holland. Therefore, the first essential +point is to ascertain whether the old rajah is likely to regain his +former authority; and whether, if so, he will recognize, and on +what terms, the cession of the island to us."</p> +<p>"Well, I am glad, Lindsay, that it is your business and not +mine; for it seems a very difficult affair, and a somewhat +dangerous one."</p> +<p>Three weeks after leaving Calcutta the brig reached the island +and, at Harry's request, sailed round it, taking soundings very +frequently, in order to obtain knowledge of the depth of the water +and the nature of the sea bottom. Finally they anchored in the +straits between it and the mainland. This varied, in width, from +two miles to a quarter of a mile; and the depth of water, at the +eastern extremity of the straits, was found to be insufficient for +vessels of a large tonnage, though navigable for ordinary native +craft.</p> +<p>The island itself was some twenty-five miles long and fifteen +miles wide; being, as Fairclough calculated, about a third larger +than the Isle of Wight. No high hills were seen; but the whole +island was undulating, and everywhere covered with forest and +jungle.</p> +<p>Several small Malay canoes had put off to them with fruit; and +as, from what the interpreter had told them of the smallness of the +population, there was clearly no chance of any attack being made on +the brig, they were allowed to come alongside. The supply of fruit +was very welcome, and the interpreter learned something from the +natives as to the state of things on the mainland.</p> +<p>As to this, however, they appeared to take but little interest. +They admitted that the tumangong was their lord but, as they were +too poor for him to levy any contributions from them, his +mastership was merely a nominal one, and they did not trouble +themselves about him. If he should at any time send an officer and +troops, to exact tribute money, they would simply retire into the +interior, where they could defy pursuit. They had heard reports +that there were wars on the mainland but, beyond the fact that the +rajah possessed very little authority, they were unable to give any +information. They had vaguely heard that some of the chiefs +supported the family of the former rajah.</p> +<p>On the day after their anchoring, a large canoe put off from the +mainland. In the stern sat two men, whose gay dresses showed them +to be minor chiefs or officials. Harry, who had throughout the +voyage worn only civilian costume of white drill, now put on his +full uniform; as did the sowars of his escort. The ladder was +lowered for the accommodation of the visitors; and these, on +reaching the deck, were received by Fairclough, his officers, and a +guard of honour. The Malay interpreter stood by the captain's +side.</p> +<p>"Why do you come here?" was their first question.</p> +<p>"We bring a high officer of the Governor General at Calcutta, to +confer with the lord of Singapore," Fairclough answered, through +the interpreter.</p> +<p>"Our lord thought that it might be so," one of the officials +said, "and therefore sent us off to enquire."</p> +<p>Fairclough led the Malays to the quarterdeck, where Harry was +standing, with his four troopers as a bodyguard behind him.</p> +<p>"This is the official whom the Governor General has sent to +you."</p> +<p>The Malays, struck with Harry's uniform, and still more with +that of his guard--all of which were new to them, and impressed +them deeply--salaamed profoundly to him.</p> +<p>"I have arrived," Harry said, "as the agent of our great +governor; and in answer to a request of your lord, the tumangong, +that he should send an officer of rank here, to treat with +him."</p> +<p>"Seeing this vessel of war," the Malay said, when Harry's speech +had been translated to him, "our lord hoped that it might be so; +and directed us, should this prove correct, to inform you that he +will himself come off to see you, in three days' time. He has heard +of the might of your lord in India, that he has conquered great +kingdoms, that the rule is a wise one, and that the people are well +contented. We love not the Dutch, who are hard masters, and make +the people labour for them; and he desires to be on terms of +friendship with the power which, as he understands, has taken their +strong places in India, so that they have no longer any importance +there."</p> +<p>"He has done wisely," Harry said, "and I shall be glad to see +your lord, and to tell him what is in the mind of our +governor."</p> +<p>The envoys were then invited to the cabin, where they were +offered refreshments. They ate sparingly, but greatly appreciated +the champagne; and asked, through the interpreter, if they could be +instructed how to make this liquor; and were much disappointed on +learning it could only be made from the juice of the grape, that +grew in a certain land in Europe, and could not be manufactured +elsewhere, though other wines which were equally good could be +made--that as the fruits grown in a hot country like theirs could +not be grown in Europe, where the climate was much colder, so the +grape could not flourish in their hot country.</p> +<p>Three days later the tumangong came off, in a canoe gaily +decorated by flags, attended by several smaller craft. As he set +foot on the deck, a salute was fired. He appeared much disturbed +when the first gun went off; but the interpreter explained to him +that it was a mark of honour, always granted to native princes of +importance. Seeing that no harm was done by the fire, the Malay +approached Harry, whose escort had been rendered more imposing by a +line of blue jackets, with musket and cutlass, drawn up behind +them.</p> +<p>Harry advanced to meet him, and friendly greetings were +exchanged. He then invited him down into the cabin, where he was +accompanied by one of his chief officers. Harry, the captain, and +the interpreter went down with them. The Malay commenced the +conversation.</p> +<p>"I hope that you bring a favourable answer to my letter?"</p> +<p>"The Governor bids me say that he willingly accepts your offer +of friendship, and would readily establish a trading station on the +island of Singapore; but that, being now engaged in a serious war +in India, it is not in his power, at present, to engage in an +alliance that might involve him in war here, since he might be +unable to fulfil his obligations. With us, obligations under a +treaty are regarded as sacred, and to be upheld at all sacrifices. +Later on, when affairs are more settled in India, he will gladly +form an alliance with you.</p> +<p>"Here is a despatch, in your language, stating his reasons more +fully but, in order to show his friendship, he has sent me down in +this ship of war to explain matters to you, and to assure you that +he appreciates your offer, and will later on accept it; but that he +cannot enter into such a treaty now as, being engaged in war, he +might not be able to protect you from all enemies, should you call +upon him to do so. I am the bearer of several presents from him, +which he has sent as a proof of his friendship towards you."</p> +<p>He touched a bell and, at the signal, some sailors brought in +the presents; consisting of a handsome double-barrelled gun, a +brace of pistols, some embroidered robes, and some bales of English +cloth and other manufactures; also a dinner service of pottery, an +ormulu clock, and other articles. The rajah, whose face had at +first expressed disappointment, was evidently much pleased with +these presents and, after perusing the letter, expressed himself as +well contented with its terms.</p> +<p>"I value them all the more," he said, "because they are a proof +that the English do not make treaties, unless able to fulfil the +conditions. This is far better than accepting treaties, and then +withdrawing from them. You can assure the great lord of Calcutta, +although I regret much that he cannot at present form an alliance +with me, that I shall be ready to renew the negotiations with him, +whenever he notifies me that he can do so."</p> +<p>The champagne was then produced. The tumangong had evidently +heard, from his officers, how delicious was the strange drink, +which bubbled as if it was boiling and was yet quite cold. Two +bottles were put upon the table; and the Malays, after tasting it +cautiously at first, consumed the greater portion--the two officers +only sipping theirs occasionally, and filling up their glasses, so +as to keep the others in countenance. Accustomed to more fiery +beverages, obtained from traders in the Dutch possessions, the +Malays were in no way affected by their potations; although these +evidently impressed them with the superiority of the English over +their Dutch rivals, for the tumangong remarked:</p> +<p>"Truly the English must be a great people, to make such liquors. +The Dutch sell us fiery drinks, but their flavour is not to be +compared with these. I hope that your lord, when he again sends a +ship down to me, will forward me some of this drink."</p> +<p>"I have, fortunately, a case of it with me," Harry said. "It +contains two dozen bottles. I will give orders for it to be placed +in your boat."</p> +<p>He could see, by the Malay's face, that he was greatly +gratified, and he added:</p> +<p>"I have no doubt, Tumangong, that when I inform the Governor +General that you were pleased with this drink, he will order some +of it to be sent down, when there is an opportunity; so that the +friendship between you and him can be maintained, until the time +comes when he can arrange with you for the concession of a trading +station on the island of Singapore."</p> +<p>"The offer shall be always open to him; there is no occasion for +haste."</p> +<p>The conversation continued for some time longer, and then the +Malay and his officers took their places in their canoe and rowed +off, under a salute similar to that which had greeted their +arrival.</p> +<p>"That is quite satisfactory," Harry said to the commander.</p> +<p>"Yes; there is no doubt that he thought more of your present of +champagne, than of the gifts sent him by the Governor; and your +promise to let him have a consignment, occasionally, will keep him +in good temper.</p> +<p>"Now, what is your next move?"</p> +<p>"I think it would be best to finish with the Dutch, first. If +there were any delay in the other matter, they might get news, from +Malacca or some of their trading stations in Sumatra, that the ship +has been here and, in that case, they would guess that we are +thinking of establishing a trading station, and might send and make +their own terms with the tumangong. There can be no doubt that, if +we open a free port here, it will do great damage to them, and +divert a large portion of the eastern trade here; being so much +more handy for all the country craft trading with Siam and China, +besides having the advantage of avoiding the heavy dues demanded by +the Dutch."</p> +<p>"No doubt that will be the best way," Fairclough said. "We will +get up anchor, tomorrow morning."</p> +<p>In the course of the afternoon a large canoe came off, loaded +with presents of fresh meat, fruit, and vegetable; sent by the +tumangong, together with some handsomely-mounted krises for Harry +and the officers of the ship.</p> +<p>They continued their voyage, without incident, to Batavia. +Arriving there, they dropped anchor and saluted the Dutch flag. The +salute was returned from the shore; and, shortly afterwards a large +boat, flying the flag of Holland and carrying several persons, +rowed out to them.</p> +<p>It was apparent, at once, when they ascended to the deck, that +the visit of the British ship of war was not a welcome one. The +jealousy of the Dutch of any attempt, on our part, to obtain a +footing among the islands was intense; and the opinion on shore, on +seeing the brig, would be that she had come to announce that +possession had been taken of some unoccupied island. Their manner, +therefore, was cold when Harry informed them, through his Dutch +interpreter, that he was the bearer of a despatch to the Dutch +Governor from the Governor General.</p> +<p>"I may say that it refers," he said, "to the numerous outrages, +committed by the Malays, upon vessels owned by British subjects +trading among the islands; and that he suggests that the Dutch +authorities should join in an attempt to punish these marauders, +from whom they suffer equally with the British."</p> +<p>"The Governor will receive you, at three o'clock this afternoon. +You will, of course, wish to deliver your despatch personally to +him and, as we shall acquaint him with its import, he will no doubt +be prepared to give you an answer, forthwith."</p> +<p>Without further words, the officials returned to their +boats.</p> +<p>"They are a surly set of beggars," Fairclough said, as they +rowed off. "I don't think there is much chance of cooperation in +that quarter. Indeed, I am by no means sure that, at heart, they do +not approve of these Malay attacks. At present, they monopolize the +trade in spice. The native craft from all the islands bring their +productions here; and there can be no doubt that the piracies of +the Malays act as a great deterrent, both to the native traders, +and our own from Calcutta and Madras."</p> +<p>"I think that, very likely, that is so," Harry agreed. "I do not +think that the Governor had any belief that they would cooperate in +the matter, and really only invited them to do so because it would +explain the presence of a ship of war in these waters; so I shall +be in no way concerned, if this part of my business turns out a +failure."</p> +<p>At the appointed time, the captain's gig was lowered, and Harry +and Fairclough took their places in it. Another boat carried the +Dutch interpreter and the four troopers. They were received, on +landing, by an official and a guard of honour; and were conducted +to the Governor's residence. Another guard of honour was drawn up +at the entrance. They were shown into a large room, where the +Governor was seated, surrounded by the members of his council.</p> +<p>He rose and advanced a few paces, shook hands with the two +officers, and begged them to be seated, on two chairs next to him. +Harry handed the despatch to him.</p> +<p>"It is very short, sir," he said, "and perhaps, as you are aware +of its import, you will just glance through it."</p> +<p>The Governor did so and, afterwards, handed it to one of the +members of the council, and it was passed from hand to hand.</p> +<p>"I am quite in accord," the Governor said, "with Lord +Mornington, that the attacks of the Malays which we, as well as +yourselves, suffer from are deplorable; and it is greatly to be +wished that they could be suppressed. But I think that Lord +Mornington could hardly have been informed as to the great number +of islands inhabited by the Malays, and the great naval force that +would be required to overawe and punish these freebooters; who are +so bold that they do not hesitate to attack our traders, even when +large ships, and carrying guns for their protection. Nothing short +of a great fleet of cruisers would suffice.</p> +<p>"In the next place, did we undertake any operations on a large +scale against the Malays throughout the islands, they would unite +against us; and might, in revenge, assail many of our ports, and do +us enormous damage. Even if your fleet performed half the work, it +is we, only, who would be the sufferers. Certainly we have not +sufficient vessels of war to attempt such an operation and, even +were the Governor General of India to send down as many vessels as +we have at our disposal, the force would be altogether inadequate +for such extensive operations. These islands are counted by +hundreds and, on the approach of ships of war, the people would +desert their villages by the seashore and take to the +interior--where it would, in most cases, be impossible to follow +them--and all the damage we could inflict would be to burn their +villages, which could be rebuilt after the ships had sailed away. +To exterminate piracy would be the work, not of months, but of many +years. However, I shall consult my council, and will draft a reply +to the despatch, tomorrow.</p> +<p>"You have had a pleasant voyage down, I hope?"</p> +<p>"Very much so," Harry replied. "We have had fine weather, and +light breezes."</p> +<p>The conversation was continued for a few minutes, and then the +little party returned to their boats.</p> +<p>"There is not much doubt what the reply will be," Fairclough +said.</p> +<p>"No; and on the whole, I don't see that the Governor is to be +blamed; though of course, he has not given us the principal reason, +which is his objection to our flag being seen flying beside the +Dutch among the islands. Still, there is a good deal in what he +says."</p> +<p>"I think so, too. You see, they are going to send their answer +tomorrow, which may be taken as a proof that they are anxious to +get rid of us, as soon as possible."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch11" id="Ch11">Chapter 11</a>: A Prisoner.</h2> +<p>The next day the Governor himself came off to the brig, and was +received with the usual honours.</p> +<p>"The council are quite of my opinion," he said to Harry, "as to +the extreme difficulty and cost that an effort to put down piracy +among the islands would involve. Our ships on the station would not +be at all sufficient for such work and, at any rate, it is a step +that we should not venture to engage in, without the assent of the +home government. We shall, of course, write home fully upon the +matter, and shall leave the final decision to them; at the same +time expressing our own views, and giving some idea as to the force +that would have to be employed, the expenditure involved, and the +time required for the operation.</p> +<p>"This letter contains a reply, as far as we can give it, to the +Governor General's proposals."</p> +<p>"His lordship will, I am sure, be sorry to hear your views, sir; +but I imagine that he will not hesitate to undertake the work of +punishing, at least, the people of some of the islands where +outrages have taken place, as soon as affairs are sufficiently +settled in India for him to dispense, for a time, with the services +of some of the Company's ships of war."</p> +<p>As Harry expected, the face of the Dutch Governor showed that +this statement, when translated, was evidently most unpalatable to +him. After a moment's hesitation, however, he said:</p> +<p>"If Lord Mornington waits until everything is quiet in India, it +will probably be a very long time before he will be able to carry +out the operation you speak of."</p> +<p>"That may be, sir. I do not know whether you have heard that +Seringapatam has been captured, and that Tippoo, himself, fell in +its defence?"</p> +<p>A look of amazement, and even of consternation, on the part of +the Dutch officials showed that the news was as unwelcome as it was +unexpected. The loss of their hold in India, by the wonderful +spread of the British power, was an extremely sore point with them. +Nothing would have pleased them better than to have heard that the +power of the latter had been shattered.</p> +<p>"It is certainly news to us," the Governor said, shortly. "But +there are still other powers in India, that are likely to give at +least as much trouble as Mysore has done."</p> +<p>"I quite admit that," Harry said, "but have no doubt that we +shall be able to deal with them, as satisfactorily as we have done +with Tippoo; and possibly as quickly."</p> +<p>"That remains to be seen," the Governor said.</p> +<p>"Quite so, sir. I have a considerable knowledge of India, and of +its native armies; and I doubt whether any of them are as good +fighters as Tippoo's men were."</p> +<p>"Was Mysore taken by storm, or by famine?"</p> +<p>"By storm, after our batteries had opened fire, for a few +days."</p> +<a id="PicG" name="PicG"></a> +<center><img src="images/g.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: 'Well, sir, I will now return to shore,' the Governor said." /> +</center> +<p>"Well, sir, I will now return to shore," the Governor said, +abruptly. "You will please to give the assurances of my high esteem +to Lord Mornington."</p> +<p>Harry bowed and, without another word, the Dutch officials +descended the accommodation ladder, and returned to shore. When +they were out of hearing, Fairclough burst into a hearty laugh.</p> +<p>"That was a severe broadside you poured into him, Lindsay. I +could see that they were absolutely flabbergasted, when you told +them about Mysore. Their manner, before that, had been almost +insolent. But you cut their comb finely."</p> +<p>"I knew that it would be a heavy blow for them. Of course, they +view with intense disgust the spread of our power in India. Not +only has it destroyed their dream of empire there but, in case of +war with them, their islands here will be absolutely at our mercy. +If we are strong enough to win kingdom after kingdom in India, +there should be no difficulty in turning out the small bodies of +troops they have, in their various possessions."</p> +<p>"Yes, I see that; and the time may come very shortly, for the +French are likely to lay hands on Holland, before long and, as soon +as they do so, we shall be ready to pop down upon them, here. The +days of Van Tromp are long passed, and the Dutch navy has become +absolutely insignificant.</p> +<p>"Well, I am glad that this is over. The sooner we are off, the +better."</p> +<p>Half an hour after the Dutch Governor had left, orders were +given to get up the anchor and loosen the sails, and the brig was +shortly on her way north.</p> +<p>"Now, what is your next move?" Fairclough asked, as the bustle +of getting under way subsided.</p> +<p>"The Malay tells me that there is a small town on the east +coast, and that this would be the most handy for landing, as from +there to Johore's town is not more than some twenty miles. Whether +the road is open, he cannot say. The news he learned, from the +tumangong's people, was that there was a great deal of fighting +going on between Johore and some of the petty rajahs. What the +position is, at the present, moment he could not discover.</p> +<p>"I should propose that we drop anchor off the place; and that, +if we find the natives well disposed, the interpreter should make +an arrangement, with a couple of natives, to carry up a letter from +me to the rajah, saying that I have come on a matter of business +from the Governor of India; and asking if he is willing to receive +me, and to guarantee my safety. If he says no, there is an end to +it. If he says yes, I shall start as soon as the answer comes."</p> +<p>"Would you take some blue jackets with you?"</p> +<p>"No. If we were attacked by a force of Malays, we should +probably be annihilated even if I took half your ship's company. +Therefore, the smaller the escort I travel with, the better. I +shall, of course, take the Malay, my man Abdool, and the four men +of the escort. That is quite enough, if we get up without trouble; +whereas if there is trouble, the fewer the better."</p> +<p>"Well, I hope no harm will come of it, Lindsay. Of course, if +you consider it your duty to go, go you must."</p> +<p>"Yes, I think it my duty. I consider the cession of this island +to be of extreme importance. If we only obtain it from the +tumangong, some day the Rajah of Johore might get the upper hand, +and repudiate the treaty made without his approval and, narrow as +the strait is, he might cross with forty or fifty canoes, make his +way through the woods, and annihilate the settlement at one +blow."</p> +<p>"No doubt that is so," the other agreed. "Well, if you get +detained you will, of course, try and make your way down to the +coast. I will remain at anchor off the town for a month, after you +start. If there is no news of you, then, I shall conclude that it +is hopeless to wait longer, and shall sail for Calcutta with your +despatches. As I was present at both your interviews, I shall be +able to report, from my own knowledge, as to the disposition shown +both by the tumangong and the Dutch."</p> +<p>Ten days later, they cast anchor off the village. Some canoes +soon came off to them with fruit and other products and, shortly +afterwards, a war canoe came out with the chief man of the town. At +first he was very reticent; but a bottle of champagne opened his +lips, and he and the interpreter conversed for some time +together.</p> +<p>"What does he say?" Harry asked, when there was a pause in the +conversation.</p> +<p>"He says, sir, that the country is very unsettled, and that it +is unsafe to travel. The town acknowledges the rajah as its master, +and the territory through which the road runs is nominally his; but +it is infested by bands owing allegiance to a neighbouring rajah, +who is at war with him."</p> +<p>"Have you asked him if it is possible to send a messenger +through?"</p> +<p>"He said that there are plenty of men who would venture to go +through, if well paid. He thinks that two men would be better than +ten, for they could hide themselves more easily in the forest."</p> +<p>"Well, ask him what he would send two messengers through +for."</p> +<p>The Malay answered that he could not say, until he had spoken to +some of them; but he thought that for ten dollars they would be +willing to undertake it.</p> +<p>"Tell him that I would pay that, and will give them as much more +if, on their return, they will guide me and my party to the +residence of the rajah."</p> +<p>The Malay shook his head.</p> +<p>"They would want more for that," he said. "Two natives could +pass without much danger for, if they were caught, they could say +that they belonged to one of the other bands, but had lost their +party. It would be quite different if they were to have Europeans +with them.</p> +<p>"How many would go?"</p> +<p>"Seven of us, altogether."</p> +<p>"I will see about it," the chief said; "but if I succeed, you +will give me three bottles of that drink."</p> +<p>"I have very little of it," Harry said, "but I will agree to +give him the three bottles, if he finds messengers to take up my +letters; and arranges with them, or others, to guide us up."</p> +<p>The Malay nodded, when the answer was translated to him; drank +half a tumbler of ship's rum, with great satisfaction; and then +went off.</p> +<p>"This is going to be a more dangerous business than our +expedition to Nagpore," Harry said to Abdool, when he told him what +the Malay had said about the dangers, and the state of affairs on +shore.</p> +<p>"My lord will manage it, somehow," Abdool said; "he was born +under a fortunate star, and will assuredly do what is best."</p> +<p>"I shall do what I hope is best, Abdool; but one cannot answer +how it will turn out. One thing is certain: that if we fall into +the hands of the Malays, we shall meet with little mercy."</p> +<p>"We should have had no mercy, if we had fallen into the hands of +the people of Nagpore, master," Abdool said.</p> +<p>"That is true enough, Abdool; and I don't think we should have +been much better off, if Scindia had laid hands on us after we had +bearded him in his tent. I cannot say that this expedition is one +that I should have chosen, were I not convinced that it is my duty. +However, we must hope that all will go well with us, as it has done +before."</p> +<p>The next day the Malay came off again.</p> +<p>"I have arranged with two men," he said, "to take your message, +for ten dollars; but if they go back with you, they will require +twenty, because the rajah might detain them."</p> +<p>"That I will pay," Harry said.</p> +<p>"But supposing you should not come back," the Malay said, "they +might lose their reward. Will you pay them in advance?"</p> +<p>"No. I will leave the money in Captain Fairclough's hands, and +whether I return or not he will, before he leaves, pay it to the +men themselves, if they come back, or to their families."</p> +<p>"That is a fair proposal," the Malay said. "When do you wish the +messengers to start?"</p> +<p>"The letter will be ready for them, in an hour's time. I will +come on shore with it, see the men, and give it to them, with +instructions. Will they travel by night, or day?"</p> +<p>"They will start at daybreak," the chief said. "The road is but +a track, and could not be followed at night; for a forest extends +almost the whole distance, and they would find it too dark to keep +to the road. I told them that it would be safer to travel at night, +but they said it could not be done. They would not be likely to be +surprised in the day, as they would travel noiselessly, and would +be sure to hear any movement of a party of men coming along the +road, and could hide in the forest until they had passed. Moreover, +our people do not like travelling in the dark. Evil creatures are +about, and even the bravest fear them."</p> +<p>"Very well, chief; then I will come ashore in an hour, and give +them this letter."</p> +<p>As soon as they had left, Harry went down to the interpreter, +and gave him the exact purport of the message to the rajah; leaving +it to him to put it in the usual form in which communications were +addressed to persons in authority, but saying that it was necessary +that he should impress him with his importance, as the commissioner +of the great Governor of India. When this was transcribed, on some +parchment which had been brought for the purpose, Harry went ashore +with Lieutenant Hardy and a strong party of seamen for, although +the local chief had apparently been most friendly, the treacherous +nature of the Malays was well known, and Fairclough thought it as +well to order them to take their cutlasses with them, and each man +to carry a brace of pistols hidden beneath his jacket.</p> +<p>A number of natives assembled on the shore as the boat +approached, but they seemed to be attracted by curiosity, only. +Just as the boat touched the beach, the chief came down to meet +them, attended by a dozen armed followers. He invited Harry to +follow him to his own house, where the two messengers were awaiting +him. They were both men in the prime of life--strong, +active-looking fellows. Harry, through his interpreter, explained +exactly what he wished done.</p> +<p>"If you carry out your mission well, and quickly," he said, "I +shall make you a present, in addition to what has been agreed upon. +You will notice the rajah's manner, when he reads the letter; and +tell me, when you return, whether he appeared to be pleased or not, +whether he hesitates as to giving me a guarantee, and whether, in +your opinion, he means to observe it. I shall rely much upon your +report."</p> +<p>Three days passed, and then a boat brought the messengers off to +the ship.</p> +<p>"So you have made your journey safely?" Harry said, through the +interpreter.</p> +<p>"We met with no trouble by the way. This is the answer that the +rajah has sent."</p> +<p>The letter was a satisfactory one. The rajah expressed +willingness to receive the officer whom the English lord had sent +to him, and to guarantee his safety while at his town; but said +that, owing to the troubled state of the country, he could not +guarantee his safety on the road, but would send down an escort of +twenty men to guard him on his way up, and the same on his return +to the coast.</p> +<p>"And now," Harry said, when the interpreter had read the +document, "tell me what passed."</p> +<p>"When we said that we were messengers from an English lord, on +board a ship with great guns, we were taken to the rajah's house. +He took the letter from us, and read it. Then he asked some of +those with him what they thought of the matter. They answered that +they could see no harm in it, and perhaps you might bring presents. +He then asked us how many would come up with you; and we told him +four soldiers, as escort, and an interpreter. He nodded, and then +talked in a low voice to those around him, and told us to come +again, that afternoon, when a letter would be given us to take to +you."</p> +<p>"Do you think that he means treachery?" Harry asked.</p> +<p>"That we cannot say, my lord. We have talked as we came down. It +seems to us that he could have nothing to gain by hindering you; +but that perhaps he might detain you, in order to obtain a ransom +for you from the lord of India."</p> +<p>Harry had already enquired, from the chief of the town, as to +the character of the rajah.</p> +<p>"He is feared, but not liked," the chief said. "He knows that +there are those who would prefer that the old family should reign +again, and he has put many to death whom he has suspected as being +favourable to this. This is the reason why the tumangong, and other +chiefs, have revolted against him. The loss of so much territory +has not improved him and, in his fits of passion, he spares +none."</p> +<p>"What has become of the family of the former rajah?" Harry +asked.</p> +<p>"His wife and child are prisoners in the palace," he said. +"Their friends are surprised that their lives should have been +spared; but the rajah is crafty, and it is thought that he holds +them so that he could, if his position became desperate, place the +young prince on the throne and declare for him; in which case some, +who are now his enemies, might come over to his side. I am told +that, except that they are kept prisoners, the late rajah's wife +and boy are well treated."</p> +<p>The account was not satisfactory, but it did not shake Harry's +determination. Questioning the Malays further, he found that they +had heard, at Johore, rumours that one of the chiefs on the border +of Pahang was collecting a large force, with the intention of +attacking the rajah; that the people of Johore were erecting strong +palisades round the town; and that the fighting men of the villages +round had all been called in for its defence.</p> +<p>"When is this escort to come down?" he asked.</p> +<p>"They started at the same time as we did, my lord, and will be +here by this evening."</p> +<p>"Very well. In that case I will land, tomorrow morning at +daybreak, and start at once; so that we shall reach Johore +tomorrow. Will you hire four men, to act as carriers for us?"</p> +<p>At the time appointed, Harry went on shore with the Malay, +Abdool, and four troopers. They had put on full uniform, and Harry +had brought with him, to shore, an assortment of presents similar +to those he had given to the tumangong. The two messengers and the +four natives, as carriers, were awaiting him and, as he went up the +beach, he was joined by twenty Malays with an officer of the rajah, +who saluted him profoundly. The chief of the village was also +there, and accompanied the party until beyond its boundary.</p> +<p>After passing a few plantations, they entered a dense forest. +The road was a mere footway, apparently but little used. The ground +ascended rapidly and, when they had gone a short distance, some of +the Malay soldiers went scouting ahead; the rest following in +absolute silence, stopping frequently to listen.</p> +<p>"It is quite evident, Abdool," Harry said, in a whisper, "that +what they said at the village is true, and these people from Johore +consider the journey to be a very dangerous one. They are evidently +expecting a surprise; and I am afraid that, if we are attacked, we +shall not be able to place much reliance on them."</p> +<p>Abdool shook his head.</p> +<p>"What are we to do, sahib, if we are attacked?"</p> +<p>"It depends on what these Malays do. If they make a good fight +for it, we will fight, too; if not, and we see that resistance is +useless, we will remain quiet. It would be of no use for six men to +fight fifty, on such ground as this. They would creep up and hurl +their spears at us and, though we might kill some of them, they +would very soon overpower us.</p> +<p>"Drop back, and tell the four troopers that on no account are +they to fire, unless I give them the order."</p> +<p>Presently the Malays came to a stop, and the officer hurried +back to Harry.</p> +<p>"We have heard the sound of footsteps in the wood, and one of my +men says he saw a man running among the trees."</p> +<p>"It may have been some wild beast," Harry said. "There are +plenty of them in the wood, I hear, and your man may have been +mistaken in thinking that he saw a human figure. And even if it was +so, it might be some villager who, on hearing us, has left the +path, thinking us to be enemies."</p> +<p>"It may be that," the officer said, when the words were +translated to him. "But it is more likely that he was posted there +to watch the path, and that he has gone to tell his band that a +party is approaching."</p> +<p>"Even if it were so," Harry said, "the band may be only a small +one."</p> +<p>The officer moved forward, and joined his men. Half an hour +later, without the slightest warning, a shower of spears flew from +among the trees; followed immediately afterwards by a rush of dark +figures. Several of the Malay escort were at once cut down. The +rest fled, at full speed.</p> +<p>Harry saw that resistance would be hopeless, and would only +ensure their destruction. He therefore called to his followers to +remain quiet. The four bearers, however, threw down their burdens, +and fled at full speed down the path, just as a number of Malays +poured out on either side.</p> +<p>They were evidently struck with the appearance of Harry and his +followers; but were about to rush upon them, when a chief ran +forward and shouted, to them, to abstain from attacking the +strangers. Then he walked up to Harry, who was evidently the chief +of the party.</p> +<p>"Who are you, white man?" he asked, "and where are you +going?"</p> +<p>The interpreter replied that they were going on a visit of +ceremony to the Rajah of Johore.</p> +<p>"We are his enemies," the chief said, "and now you must come +with us."</p> +<p>"This lord--" the interpreter began, but the chief waved his +hand for him to be silent.</p> +<p>He waited for a quarter of an hour, by which time he was joined +by that portion of his followers which had pursued the Malays. Many +of them carried human heads in their hands and, by the number of +these, Harry saw that very few of his native escort could have +escaped. The chief ordered his men to pick up the packages that had +been thrown down by the bearers, and then turned off into the +forest.</p> +<p>After a quarter of an hour's walk, they arrived at the spot +where a still-smoking fire showed that the band had halted. No +pause was made, however, and the party kept on their way and, in +two hours' time, reached the foot of a high range of mountains that +had been visible from the coast. The climb was a severe one but, in +another hour, they came out upon a flat plateau. Here, in a small +village, a considerable body of men were gathered; who hailed the +arrival of their comrades, with their ghastly triumphs of victory, +with loud shouts.</p> +<p>The chief of the band led his captives to a hut, somewhat +superior in appearance to the others, in front of which stood a man +whose bright attire and ornaments showed him to be a chief of +importance.</p> +<p>"Who is this white man," he asked, "and these soldiers who are +with him?"</p> +<p>The officer repeated the description that he had received from +the interpreter, whom he pointed out.</p> +<p>"Why was this white man going to Johore?" he asked.</p> +<p>"He was sent by the white lord of India, my lord."</p> +<p>"Ask him why he was sent?"</p> +<p>"I was sent to Johore to ask the rajah if he would grant a +trading station to the English."</p> +<p>"We want no English on our coast," the chief said. "There are +the Dutch, at Malacca--some day we will turn them out.</p> +<p>"So he was bringing presents to Johore, was he?"</p> +<p>"Yes, my lord; these are the parcels," and he beckoned up the +men who carried them.</p> +<p>These approached, and humbly laid them at the rajah's feet.</p> +<p>"I have to report, my lord, that there were twenty of Johore's +men with him. These we killed."</p> +<p>"Did the white man and his soldiers aid them?"</p> +<p>"No, my lord. They stood quiet, and offered no resistance, +therefore I brought them to you."</p> +<p>"You did well. You are sure that none of the Johore men escaped, +to carry off the news that we were here?"</p> +<p>"Quite certain. We have the heads of twenty men, and their +officer."</p> +<p>"Good! I will examine these things. Put the white man and this +Malay into a hut, and the four soldiers into another.</p> +<p>"Who is this other man, who is dressed differently?"</p> +<p>"He is the white officer's servant," the interpreter said.</p> +<p>"Well, he can go with his master, then."</p> +<p>The four troopers were led off in one direction, and Harry and +the others in another. It was a hut roughly constructed of bamboos, +thatched with broad leaves, while the entrance had no door. The +interpreter did not carry arms; those of Harry and Abdool had been +removed.</p> +<p>"Things have turned out badly, Abdool," Harry said.</p> +<p>"Very badly, sahib. I do not like the look of that rajah."</p> +<p>"Nor do I, Abdool. I am convinced that he means mischief, and we +must get away as soon as we can.</p> +<p>"Have you got your knife with you? So have I. We must make a way +out of the back of this hut."</p> +<p>A group of half a dozen Malays had taken their seats on the +ground, at a distance of some fifteen yards from the entrance; but +had posted no sentries. Behind it, as they were taken in, Harry +noticed that there was a patch of grain, and beyond that rose the +forest.</p> +<p>"These knives are no good against bamboo, sahib."</p> +<p>"No, I know that; but we might cut these rattans which bind them +together. In the first place, dig down with your knife, and see if +the bamboos are sound underneath. They may have rotted there.</p> +<p>"You and I will stand at the entrance," he went on to the +interpreter, "then they cannot see in."</p> +<p>"Bamboos are quite sound, sahib."</p> +<p>"Then we must try another way. First cut the rattans--but not in +a line with the entrance, a few feet on one side."</p> +<p>The wood was extremely tough, and it was half an hour before +Abdool could cut through them, and free three or four of the bamboo +poles. While he was doing this, Harry and the interpreter stood +talking together, apparently watching the movements of the +Malays.</p> +<p>"We are going to try and escape," Harry said. "Will you go with +us, or remain here? They will certainly kill us, if they overtake +us; there is just a chance that they will not kill us, if we +stay."</p> +<p>"They will kill us," the man said, confidently. "It may not be +today, because the rajah will be looking over his presents, and +will be in a good temper; but tomorrow they will come in and kris +us. Assuredly I will go with you."</p> +<p>When Abdool announced that he had cut through the rattans, Harry +joined him, telling the interpreter to wait at the entrance till he +called him.</p> +<p>"What next, master?" Abdool asked.</p> +<p>"The next thing will be to pull up the bamboos. If you have cut +all their lashings, this ought not to be very difficult; but it +will make it easier if we cut the ground away, as deep as we can, +on this side of them."</p> +<p>Kneeling down, they set to work with their knives and, after +half an hour's work, they had laid bare the bottoms of four of the +bamboos, which were sunk two feet into the ground.</p> +<p>"Now, Abdool, we ought to get them up easily enough."</p> +<p>With their united strength they pulled up a bamboo, replaced it +in its position and, one by one, got the other three up, put them +in again, and lightly filled in the earth.</p> +<p>"Now we can go, at a minute's notice," Harry said. "At any rate, +we had better wait till it is dark."</p> +<p>The sun had just set, when they saw the rajah come out of his +hut. He gave an order, and the four troopers were brought out, and +placed in a line. Four natives took their places behind them, kris +in hand.</p> +<p>"They are going to murder them!" Harry exclaimed, in horror.</p> +<p>"Now, Abdool, there is not a moment to be lost; it will be our +turn, next."</p> +<p>Their guards had all risen to their feet, watching what was +going on. Three of the bamboos were plucked up in a moment. This +afforded an opening sufficiently large for them to pass through +and, keeping the hut between them and the guard, they made their +way through the plantation, and dashed into the forest. They heard +yells of satisfaction in the village, and Harry had no doubt that +the four troopers had been murdered.</p> +<p>They ran at full speed through the forest and, ten minutes +later, heard loud shouts of dismay; and had no doubt that a party +had been sent to take them out to execution, and had discovered +their escape. It was already almost dark, under the thick shade of +the trees; but for half an hour they ran on, the Malay in advance, +for he could see any obstacles better than they could, the habits +and training of his youth having given him experience in such +work.</p> +<p>For a time they had heard loud shouts behind them. These had +been useful, in enabling them to keep a straight course. The Malay +now turned, and struck off at right angles to the line that they +had been pursuing.</p> +<p>"We must keep on, for a time," he said. "When they do not +overtake us, they will scatter through the forest in all +directions."</p> +<p>For hours they toiled on, sometimes at an easy walk, sometimes +breaking into a run. At last the Malay admitted that, for the time, +they were safe; and they threw themselves down upon the ground.</p> +<p>"Tomorrow," he said, "they will take up the search in earnest, +and will track our footsteps. We had better take to a tree, now. It +will not be safe to stay here."</p> +<p>The others cordially agreed as, for some time, they had heard +the roars of wild beasts, which abounded in these forests; and +Harry and Abdool had run with their open knives in their hands, +prepared for a sudden attack.</p> +<p>"The others will have gone back to the village, long ago," the +Malay said, when they had made themselves as comfortable as they +could, in the forks of the tree, "except the men who were guarding +us. They will not dare venture into the village, for they would +fear the rajah's anger, even more than death from a tiger. They +will be first in the search, tomorrow morning.</p> +<p>"Which way do you wish to go, my lord?"</p> +<p>"I have been thinking it over, as we came. I think that our best +plan will be to go on to Johore. Doubtless the road down the coast +will be watched. How far from Johore do you think we are?"</p> +<p>"Not very far," the Malay said. "We have been going in that +direction, ever since we first turned--not very straight, perhaps, +but certainly in that direction. I think that we cannot be more +than five or six miles from the town. It lies between the hills we +crossed, and the higher ones beyond. We have been descending a +little, all the time."</p> +<p>"I am afraid that Johore will not be very pleased to see us +arriving empty handed, and to learn that the escort he sent us have +all been killed. Still, the news that we bring him, that his +enemies are not far off, will be useful to him; and we will offer +to aid him in the defence of his town, if he is attacked. At any +rate, it is a satisfaction to know that we have not very far to go, +and have got so good a start of the fellows behind us that they are +not likely to overtake us, before we get there."</p> +<p>More than once, during the night, they heard angry growling at +the foot of the tree. Towards morning there was a scraping +sound.</p> +<p>"That is a leopard, sahib," the Malay said, in alarm; "he is +climbing the tree to get at us."</p> +<p>Abdool was sitting immediately below Harry, and the latter +called to him to come up beside him.</p> +<p>"Mount as high as you can, my lord," the Malay said. "The trunk +is not so rough, when you get higher; and the beast will find it +harder to climb."</p> +<p>"We shall do better, here," Harry said. "These two arms, nearly +opposite to each other, are just the thing for us.</p> +<p>"You go out to the end of one, Abdool, and I will go out to the +end of the other. We will climb out as far as we can, and then he +will have to follow us very slowly, whichever way he chooses. If he +goes for you, I will follow him. If he comes my way, you follow +him. When the bough gets thin he won't be able to turn round, and +the one behind can give him a sudden stab, which will make him +leave go his hold."</p> +<p>By the time he had finished speaking, they were each far out on +their respective branches, and the leopard was close to the fork. +It paused a moment, looked at the two men and, after a moment's +hesitation, began to crawl out towards Abdool. Harry at once made +his way back to the trunk, and then followed the animal.</p> +<p>Abdool had gone out as far as he dared and, holding on tightly, +swayed the end of the branch up and down. The leopard, as it +approached him, was evidently disconcerted; and clung to the bough, +which was scarcely six inches in diameter at the point it had +reached. It snarled angrily, as it became conscious that it was +being followed.</p> +<p>Harry, feeling convinced that it could not turn, came fearlessly +up to it, and then struck his knife into its loin. As the blade was +but some four inches long, he had no hope of striking a vital +point.</p> +<p>The leopard uttered a roar, and tried to turn and strike at him +with one of its forepaws; but the blade again penetrated to its +full depth, this time on the other side and, with a start, it lost +its footing, clung for a moment to the branch with its forepaws, +and strove to regain its hold; but Harry brought his knife down, +again and again, on one of its paws.</p> +<p>Abdool, crawling in, quickly struck it under the shoulder and, a +moment later, it released its hold and fell heavily through the +foliage to the ground. For a time it was heard roaring, and then +the sound came only at intervals, and at an increasing +distance.</p> +<p>"That was a good business, Abdool," Harry said, as they returned +to their former post, where the Malay rejoined them.</p> +<p>"It was well done, indeed, sahib. When I heard the beast +climbing the tree, it seemed to me that, as we had no weapons +except these little knives, he would surely make an end of one of +us."</p> +<p>The interpreter did not understand Mahratti, in which Abdool and +Harry always conversed; but he said in Hindustani:</p> +<p>"I have seen fights with leopards, my lord, but even with +krises, two of my people would hesitate to attack one--they fear +them more than tigers--but little did I think that two men, with +small knives, could save their lives from one. My blood turned to +water, as I saw the beast climbing out on that bough, and you going +out after it."</p> +<p>"I have done a good deal of tiger and leopard hunting, in my +time," Harry said, "and know that a leopard cannot spring from a +bough, unless it is a fairly stout one--stout enough for it to +stand with all its paws upon it.</p> +<p>"Well, the day is beginning to break. In half an hour's time the +sun will be up, and the wild beasts will have all retired to their +lairs. I hope we shall see no more of them. It is all very well to +fight under such advantages; but on foot, were a tiger hiding near +a path, he would be sure to have one of us as we went along. Our +knives would not do more than tickle him."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch12" id="Ch12">Chapter 12</a>: The Defence Of +Johore.</h2> +<p>Half an hour later, the little party were on their way. They +were stiff, at first, from passing the night in a sitting attitude; +but it was not long before they were able to break into a trot. +This they kept up for an hour then, to their great satisfaction, +the forest abruptly ceased, and they saw, at a distance of about a +mile and a half, the little town of Johore, lying in cultivated +fields that extended to the edge of the forest.</p> +<p>They broke into a walk, for a short distance; and then continued +at their former pace, for they could not tell how close their +pursuers might be behind them. It was not long before they saw men +at work in the fields. The interpreter shouted to them that a party +of the enemy were not far behind and, throwing down their tools, +they also made for the town, spreading the alarm as they went. +Fresh and fleet footed, they arrived some minutes before Harry's +party and, as these entered the place, they found the whole +population in the street, the men armed with spears and krises.</p> +<p>Asking the way, they soon reached the rajah's palace, which +consisted of a central house, round which a number of huts were +built; the whole surrounded by a stone wall, some eight feet high. +The rajah, when they arrived, was questioning some of his people as +to the cause of this sudden alarm. He was greatly surprised at the +sight of Harry, in his full uniform, attended only by one soldier +and a native.</p> +<p>"How comes it that you arrive like this?" he asked, angrily.</p> +<p>"Explain what has happened," Harry said, to the interpreter.</p> +<p>The rajah's brow darkened, as he heard how the escort he had +sent down had been slain, to a man, on the previous day. But his +excitement increased, when told that a strong force of his enemy +was gathered within a few miles of the town; and that an assault +might be immediately expected.</p> +<p>"Will you tell the rajah that I am used to warfare, and shall be +glad to assist him, to the best of my power, in the defence of his +town?"</p> +<p>"How many men were there?" the rajah asked.</p> +<p>"I should think there were a couple of thousand," Harry replied. +"Some of them had matchlocks, but the greater part of them only +spear and kris."</p> +<p>"And we have not more than five hundred," the rajah said. "We +cannot hope to resist them. What think you?"</p> +<p>"I will at once go round the town, and see," Harry said. "It may +be that, being accustomed to war, I can suggest some means of so +strengthening the defences that we may hold them against the +enemy."</p> +<p>The rajah, having heard many tales of the fighting powers of the +whites, said:</p> +<p>"I will go with you. I would defend the place if I could for, if +Johore were lost, I should be but a fugitive. All within it would +be killed, and I should have to beg an asylum from those over whom +I was once master."</p> +<p>Calling a party of his men to follow him, the rajah accompanied +Harry to the edge of the town. It was already surrounded by a +palisade; but this was of no great strength, and its circumference +was fully a mile and a half.</p> +<p>"Tell the rajah that we could make a first defence, here, but +his fighting men are not numerous enough to hold so large a circuit +against four times their number. I should suggest that the whole +population should be set to work to build another palisade, much +nearer to the palace. All the women and children should be sent +inside this, all the provisions in the town be taken into the +palace enclosure, and a large supply of water stored there.</p> +<p>"As soon as the new palisade is finished, all who can be spared +from its defence should set to work to throw up a bank of earth +against the wall; and upon this the fighting men can take their +places, and should be able to defend the palace against any +assault."</p> +<p>The rajah listened attentively to the interpreter.</p> +<p>"The English officer's words are good," he said, "but we have no +timber for the palisades that he speaks of."</p> +<p>"Tell the rajah," Harry said, when this was interpreted to him, +"that there is plenty of wood and bamboos in the huts that stand +outside the line of the new palisade; and that if we pull these +down, we can use the materials. Moreover, in any case it would be +well to level these houses for, if the enemy fired them, it would +be almost certain to fire the houses inside the palisade."</p> +<p>The rajah's face brightened. The tone of assurance in which +Harry spoke reassured him, and he said to the interpreter:</p> +<p>"Tell the officer that my people shall do just as he tells them, +if he will point out where the defence must be erected."</p> +<p>Harry was not long in fixing upon the line for the +entrenchments. It was some two hundred yards in diameter and, at +the rajah's orders, the whole of the men and women of the town set +to work, to pull down the huts standing within fifty or sixty yards +of this. This was the work of a couple of hours, and the materials +were carried up to the line. The stronger timbers were first +planted, in holes dug for them; and the intervals between these +were filled with bamboo poles. On the inside face other bamboos +were lashed, with rattans across them. As fast as these were used, +more houses were pulled down, until the defence was completed, the +crossbars being some nine inches apart.</p> +<p>This work performed, the men, women and children brought up what +provisions they had, and their most precious belongings. These were +carried inside the wall of the palace. It was two o'clock before +the work was finished, and there was then a rest for half an +hour.</p> +<p>Then all were set to work to dig a trench, three feet deep with +perpendicular sides, at a distance of two feet from the palisade. A +large store of bamboos that had been too slender for use in the +palisade were sharpened, and cut into lengths of two feet; and +these were planted, thickly, in the bottom of the trench. Others, +five feet long, were sharpened and then thrust through the +interstices between the upright bamboos; the ends being fixed +firmly in the ground inside, while the sharpened points projected +like a row of bayonets, at a height of some two feet above the edge +of the ditch.</p> +<p>It was nightfall before the work was finished. The rajah had, +himself, been all the time upon the spot; and was delighted when he +saw how formidable was the obstacle that had been raised. One small +entrance, alone, had been left; and through this all the women and +children now passed, and lay down in the space between the new +palisade and the wall of the palace.</p> +<p>The men were ordered to take post behind the stockade, and a +number of boys were sent out, to act as scouts and give notice if +an enemy approached. The rajah, however, was of opinion that, as +the enemy would know that the alarm would have been given by the +fugitives, on their arrival, and that the inhabitants would be on +their guard, they would not attack till daylight.</p> +<p>Harry had, at his invitation, gone up at midnight to his house, +and partaken of food; which was also sent out to Abdool and the +interpreter. The rajah would have continued the work all through +the night, had not Harry dissuaded him; saying that, after six +hours' sleep, everyone would work better.</p> +<p>At one o'clock a horn was sounded and, with the exception of a +few men left at the outer palisade, all set to work again. The men +were employed in digging a trench, a foot in depth, inside the +inner palisade; throwing up the earth in front of them, so as to +lie protected from arrows and spears, until it was time for them to +rise to their feet to repel an actual assault. The women and +children filled baskets with the earth thrown from the outer +trench, on the previous day, and carried it inside the wall where, +by five o'clock, a bank two feet high had been raised; and on this +a platform of bamboos, three feet high and eighteen inches wide was +erected.</p> +<p>The work had scarcely been finished when a horn was sounded, +outside the town; and the boys came running in, while the men ran +down to the outer palisade. As day broke, great numbers of dark +figures were seen, making their way through the fields on three +sides of the town.</p> +<p>"The band we saw must have been joined by another. There are +certainly more than two thousand men there. They will undoubtedly +carry the outer palisade. Many of our men will be killed, and many +others will be unable to join us here. I think that it will be much +better to rely on this defence, alone."</p> +<p>Having now great confidence in Harry's judgment, the rajah at +once ordered a horn to be sounded and, in a short time, the whole +of the men were assembled in their stronghold; and the entrance +closed by bamboos, for which holes had been already dug, close +together. Then short lengths were lashed across them, and they were +further strengthened by a bank of earth piled against them.</p> +<p>Before this was quite finished, yells of triumph were heard as +the enemy, finding the palisade unguarded, poured in; expecting to +find that the inhabitants had fled at the news of their approach. +They paused, however, in surprise, at seeing another line of +defence outside the palace. Quickly the numbers increased, until a +thick line of dark figures was gathered at the edge of the cleared +space.</p> +<p>Inside the defence, all was quiet. Not a man showed himself. +Doubtful whether the town had not been entirely evacuated, the +Malays paused for some little time, while some of the chiefs +gathered together in consultation. Then a few of the men advanced, +with the evident intention of examining the defences.</p> +<p>They were allowed to approach within ten yards of the ditch, +when a shower of arrows flew from the openings in the palisade; and +two, only, of the Malays fled back to their companions. The fall of +the others provoked wild yells of anger. A horn sounded, and the +assailants rushed upon them from all sides. When within a few yards +of the ditch they hurled their spears, and shot a cloud of arrows. +A large proportion were stopped by the bamboos, but such as passed +through flew harmlessly over the heads of the defenders; who +replied with a far more deadly shower of arrows.</p> +<p>Leaping over those who had fallen, the enemy dashed forward. +Those in front endeavoured to check their course, on arriving at +the edge of the ditch; but they were forced in by the pressure of +those behind, and the long spears of the defenders gleamed out +through the openings of the bamboos, inflicting terrible +damage.</p> +<p>In vain the assailants endeavoured to climb out of the ditch. +The bayonet-like line of bamboos checked them; and the arrows of +the concealed defenders told, with terrible effect, on the +struggling mass. At last, at many points, the ditch was literally +filled with dead; and the assailants were enabled to leap upon the +line of bamboos which had so long checked their passage.</p> +<p>The advantage was but slight. The slippery poles were some six +inches apart and, slanting as they did, afforded so poor a foothold +that the Malays were forced to stand between them, on the narrow +ledge between the palisading and the ditch. Here they thrust their +spears between the palisade; but these were wrenched from their +hands, and scores fell from the blows of kris, spear, and arrow; +until at last their leaders and chiefs, seeing how terrible was the +slaughter, and how impossible it was to climb the bamboo fence, +called their men off; and they fell back, pursued by exulting cries +from the women, who were standing on the platform behind the wall +of the palace, watching the conflict, and by the yells of the +defenders of the stockade.</p> +<p>Of these but few had fallen, while some five hundred of the +assailants had perished. The rajah was almost beside himself with +joy, at this crushing defeat of his enemy.</p> +<p>"I do not suppose it is over yet, Rajah," Harry said, through +his interpreter. "There are still some five times our number, and +they will surely not retire without endeavouring to avenge their +defeat. But I hardly think they will attack the stockade again. +Possibly they will try fire, next time; and it will be harder to +fight that than to keep men at bay."</p> +<p>The rajah looked serious.</p> +<p>"Yes," he said, "they cannot return to their homes, and say that +they have left five hundred dead behind them. What do you +advise?"</p> +<p>"They will hardly attack again today, Rajah; therefore I shall +have time to think it over. But at present, it seems to me that our +only course is to shoot down as many of those who bring up +firebrands as possible. We have still a number of long bamboos +left, and with these we might thrust away any burning faggots that +might be cast against the palisade."</p> +<p>The rajah nodded.</p> +<p>"That might be done," he said, "and with success, no doubt."</p> +<p>"With success at many points, Rajah; but if they succeed, at +only one point, in establishing a big fire against the stockade; we +must retire within the wall. They cannot burn us out there, except +at the gate; and against that we must pile up earth and stones. But +I should certainly recommend that the roofs of all the buildings +inside should be taken off unless, indeed, you have sufficient +hides to cover them. Still, we need not do that until we are driven +inside the wall. It takes but a short time to take off the broad +leaves with which the roofs are covered."</p> +<p>During the fight, Harry had taken no active part in the +conflict. He had divided the circle into three, and had taken +charge of one division, Abdool taking another, and the rajah a +third. They had each encouraged the men under them, and had gone +where the pressure of the attack was most severe.</p> +<p>On leaving the rajah, Harry joined Abdool.</p> +<p>"They will try again, Abdool; but I don't think they will try to +carry the stockade by assault again."</p> +<p>"They will try fire, sahib."</p> +<p>"That is just what I am afraid of. The archers will shoot down a +good many of them, but in such numbers as they are, this will make +little difference; and we must calculate that, at at least a dozen +spots, they will place blazing faggots against the palisade."</p> +<p>Abdool nodded.</p> +<p>"I have been telling the rajah," Harry went on, "that the men +must provide themselves with long bamboos, which they can thrust +through the openings in the stockade, and push the faggots away. +But even if we do so, we must calculate upon the enemy succeeding, +in some places, in setting the palisades on fire."</p> +<p>"That would be very serious; but of course we should go in +behind the wall."</p> +<p>"I do not want to do that, as long as we can possibly stay here. +I think that, when night comes, we ought to make a sortie."</p> +<p>"But are we not too few, sahib?"</p> +<p>"Too few to defeat them, Abdool, but not too few to beat them +up. You see, the wind always blows, in the evening, up from the +sea. I noticed it last night. It was quite strong. What I should +propose would be to pull up enough bamboos for four men to go out, +together, on the side facing the wind. Two hundred men should first +sally out; remaining, as they do so, close to the ditch. When all +are ready, they should crawl across the cleared ground and then, at +a signal, attack the enemy who, taken by surprise, would be sure to +give way, at first.</p> +<p>"As they attack, fifty men with torches should rush out and +follow them, and set fire to as many huts as they can. As soon as +they had done their work, all should run back, when the signal is +given.</p> +<p>"There will be two advantages: in the first place, the sudden +attack will disconcert the enemy, and render them less willing to +expose their lives, by storming a place so desperately held; in the +second place, the wind will carry the flame over the whole town, +and I hope the burning fragrants will carry the flames over all the +fields where the crops are dry; thus causing them much more +difficulty in obtaining dry wood for faggots, and they will be +exposed to our arrows, much longer, before they throw them against +the stockade."</p> +<p>"It would be excellent, sahib; but do you think the men would +go?"</p> +<p>"Just at the present moment, they would do anything; they are +half wild with excitement and triumph."</p> +<p>Harry presently went with the interpreter to the rajah's +house.</p> +<p>"I have a plan to propose to you," he said, "that will render it +much more difficult for the enemy to set fire to the stockade;" and +he then explained his scheme.</p> +<p>The rajah's eyes glistened with excitement.</p> +<p>"Nothing could be better," he said; "and there is but one fear, +and that is, that the enemy will follow us so hotly, that they will +enter through the breach before we can close it."</p> +<p>"I have thought of that," Harry said, "and the order must be +that, when the signal is given, the men must throw down their +torches; and then each man must run, not for the hole in the +stockade, but to the nearest point, and keep along outside the +ditch, and enter by it. In that way the point at which they entered +would not be known and, moreover, they would be able to enter more +rapidly, and with much less confusion, than if they all arrived +together in a crowd. A party would, of course, be left at the +breach when they sally out and, the moment the last man entered, +would replace and lash the bamboos in their position.</p> +<p>"If, however, we are hotly pursued, you and I, with your own +guards, should remain outside, and keep them at bay until all the +bamboos but one are replaced. This will leave an opening sufficient +for one man, and we must fall back fighting. They certainly would +not venture to follow us through so narrow a passage."</p> +<p>Two hundred and fifty of the men were brought inside the wall, +and the rajah explained to them the duty upon which they would be +employed. He told off fifty of them as torch bearers; explained to +all, carefully, the plan Harry had devised; gave strict orders that +no sound, whatever, must be made until they reached the houses and, +at Harry's request, impressed upon them the absolute necessity for +not allowing their ardour to carry them too far; but that torches +must be thrown down, and everyone run back, as soon as the horn +sounded.</p> +<p>There was no doubt that the order was a satisfactory one. The +men raised their krises and spears, and shouted with joy. In their +present mood, nothing could please them more than the thought of an +attack upon their assailants.</p> +<p>All remained quiet, on both sides, until darkness fell; then the +crash of falling huts showed that the enemy intended to use fire, +and were about to begin the work of making faggots.</p> +<p>"They will attack an hour before daybreak," the rajah said; "or +may, perhaps, wait till the sun is up for, in the daylight, those +who carried the torches would not be so conspicuous, but would +advance in the midst of their whole force."</p> +<p>"At what time are they likely to sleep?"</p> +<p>"Many will sleep early," he said, "in readiness for the fight. +Others will sit up and talk, all night; but those who intend to +sleep will probably do so, in a couple of hours."</p> +<p>"Do you think that they are likely to place guards?"</p> +<p>"No; they will not dream that we should have the boldness to +attack them."</p> +<p>"Let us give them three hours," Harry said, "the sea wind will +be blowing strongly, then."</p> +<p>The greater portion of the men who were to remain behind were to +be stationed on the side on which the sortie was to be made, so as +to cover the retreat of the others, by showers of arrows. The +rajah's principal officer was placed in command here. His orders +were that, if the enemy came on too strongly, he was to issue out +with a hundred men, and aid the party to beat back their +assailants. However, Harry did not think it likely that this would +be the case. The Malays would be scattered all over the town--some, +perhaps, even beyond the outer palisades--and before they could +assemble in force, the party ought to be safe within the palisade +again.</p> +<p>Just before ten, the two hundred men who were to make the attack +sallied out. They were led by the rajah, while Harry was to lead +the firing party. He chose this part, because he would not be able +to crawl across the open space as noiselessly as the Malays could +do.</p> +<p>During the day, a number of hides had been hung on the +palisades, so that the enemy should not notice that a gathering of +men, with torches, was assembled there; and in order that the light +might not be conspicuous at this spot, fires had been lighted at +other points, in order to give the impression that the defenders +were holding themselves in readiness to repel another attack. The +bamboos had been removed, ten minutes before the party issued out. +So noiseless was their tread that Harry, though close to the +entrance, could not hear it; and when he looked out, as soon as the +last man had passed, he could neither see nor hear anything. The +men had all thrown themselves on the ground, as soon as they had +passed out, and were crawling forward without a sound being +audible.</p> +<p>Harry and Abdool had both armed themselves with a kris and +spear. Behind them were the torch bearers, arranged four +abreast.</p> +<p>It seemed an age before the sound of a horn rose in the air. +Instantly they dashed through the opening, followed by the men and, +at full speed, crossed the cleared ground. Already the sound of +shouts, violent yells, and the clashing of blades showed that the +rajah's men were at work.</p> +<p>Scattering as they reached the houses, the torch bearers ran +from hut to hut; pausing for a few seconds, at each, till the flame +had gained a fair hold. In less than a minute, sixty or seventy +houses were in flames. Harry had the man with the horn with him +and, as soon as he saw that the work was fairly done, he ordered +the signal to be blown. The torches were thrown down, and their +bearers ran back at full speed and, half a minute later, the +rajah's men poured out from the town. There was no pursuit, and the +whole band re-entered the stockade before, with yells of fury, +numbers of the enemy ran forward.</p> +<p>As soon as they did so, arrows began to fly fast from the +stockade and, knowing that they could effect nothing, without means +of breaking through, the Malays retired as rapidly as they had +advanced.</p> +<p>Short as was the interval that had elapsed since the first +signal was given, the town was, at the point where the attack was +made, a sheet of flame, which was spreading rapidly on either hand. +The hubbub among the enemy was tremendous. Upwards of a hundred had +been killed, by the rajah's party--for the most part before they +could offer any resistance--and not more than five or six of their +assailants had received severe wounds.</p> +<p>Loud rose the shouts of exultation from the defenders, as the +fire spread with ever-increasing rapidity; flakes of fire, driven +by a strong wind, started the flames in a score of places, far +ahead of the main conflagration and, in half an hour, only red +embers and flickering timbers showed where Johore had stood. +Beyond, however, there were sheets of flame, where the crops had +been dry and ready for cutting; and the garrison felt that their +assailants would have to go a long distance, to gather materials +for endeavouring to burn them out.</p> +<p>While the position had been surrounded by a zone of fire, the +rajah had, at Harry's suggestion, sent the whole of the men and +women to cast earth over the dead; piled, at four or five points, +so thickly in the ditch.</p> +<p>"If the matter is delayed another day," he said, "the air will +be so poisoned that it will be well-nigh impossible to exist +here."</p> +<p>The rajah admitted this; but urged that his men would want to +cut off the heads of their fallen enemies, this being the general +custom among the Malays.</p> +<p>"It may be so, Rajah, but it could not be carried out, here, +without great danger. Our own lives depend upon getting them +quickly buried. We have no such custom of cutting off heads, in our +country, but that is no affair of mine. But the bodies now lie in +what is, in fact, a grave; and a few hours' labour would be the +means of saving the town from a pestilence, later on.</p> +<p>"When the enemy depart, I should advise you to build a great +mound of earth over the trench. It will be a record of your grand +defence and, by placing a strong stockade along the top, you would +strengthen your position greatly. I should recommend you, in that +case, to clear the space within it, as far as the wall, of all +houses; and to build the town entirely outside it."</p> +<p>There was great dissatisfaction, among the natives, at being +prevented from taking what seemed to them their natural trophies. +But when the rajah informed them that the order was given in +consequence of the white officer's advice, they set about the work +readily and, before morning, the dead were all hidden from sight by +a deep layer of earth.</p> +<p>The next day passed without incident. At nightfall a sharp +lookout was kept, not only on the palisade but from the top of the +rajah's house. It was thought that the enemy, of whom considerable +numbers had been seen going into the forest, would bring up the +faggots as closely as possible, before lighting them. Still, it +would be necessary to carry brands for that purpose and, now that +the ground was cleared of huts, some at least of these brands could +be seen, even if carefully hidden.</p> +<p>With the exception of the guards, all slept during the day; as +it was necessary that they should be vigilant at night, for the +enemy might, on this occasion, approach at an earlier hour, hoping +to find the garrison unprepared. Harry and Abdool paced round and +round on the platform of the wall but, although a few fires burned +among the fields, no glimmer of light could be seen where the town +had stood.</p> +<p>"I wish I knew what they were up to, Abdool," Harry said, about +midnight. "I don't like this silence."</p> +<p>"Perhaps they have gone away, sahib."</p> +<p>"No, I can hardly think that. I believe we shall have another +attack, before morning. They may bring ladders with them, for +climbing the palisade; they may try fire; but I am convinced that +they will do something.</p> +<p>"The position is not so strong as it was. If we had had more +bamboos, I should have set our men to dig another ditch, and defend +it like the first; but they are all used up, now. I wish we had +some rockets; so that we could send up one, from time to time, and +see what they are doing."</p> +<p>Another hour passed, and some of the Malays declared that they +could hear a sound as of many men moving. Harry listened in vain, +but he knew that the Malays' senses were much keener than his +own.</p> +<p>He went at once to the rajah. The chief had been up till +midnight, and then retired; leaving orders that he was to be +called, directly an alarm of any sort was given. He was seated with +two or three of his councillors, talking, when Harry, with the +interpreter, entered.</p> +<p>"Your people say they hear sounds, Rajah. I can hear nothing, +myself, but I know their hearing is keener than mine. I am uneasy, +for even they cannot see the faintest glow that would tell that a +fire is being brought up. In my opinion, we had better leave only +two hundred men at the palisade, and bring the rest in here. We can +lead them out, at once, if any point is hotly attacked; and it +would prevent confusion, if the stockade were suddenly forced. The +enemy may be bringing up hundreds of ladders and, in the darkness, +may get up close before they are noticed."</p> +<p>"Do as you think best," the rajah said and, at once, went out +and sent officers to bring in three hundred of the men; and also, +at Harry's suggestion, to tell the others that, when the rajah's +horn sounded, all were to leave the stockade and make at once for +the entrance through the wall.</p> +<p>Another half hour passed. Even Harry was conscious, now, that +there was a low dull sound in the air.</p> +<p>"I cannot think what they are doing," the rajah, who was now +standing on the wall, close to the gate, said to Harry. "However +numerous they may be, they should have moved as noiselessly as we +did, when we went out to attack them."</p> +<p>"I don't think that it will be long before we know, now, +Rajah."</p> +<p>He had scarcely spoken, when there was a loud shout from the +palisade in front of them. It was on this side that the men had +been posted so thickly, as it was of all things necessary to defend +this to the last, in order to enable those at other points to make +their way to the gate. The shout of alarm was followed, almost +instantly, by the sound of a horn and, immediately, a tremendous +yell resounded on all sides.</p> +<p>It was answered by the shouts of the garrison and, a moment +later, a score of balls composed of matting, dipped in oil or +resinous gum, were thrown flaming over the palisades. These had +been prepared the previous day, and the men charged with throwing +them had each an earthenware pot, containing glowing charcoal, +beside them. Their light showed groups of men, twenty or thirty +strong, advancing within twenty yards of the palisade.</p> +<p>"They are carrying trees, to batter down the stockade, Rajah!" +said Harry.</p> +<p>Behind the carrying parties was a dense crowd of Malays, who +rushed forward as soon as the fireballs fell, hurling their spears +and shooting their arrows, to which the defenders replied +vigorously.</p> +<p>"The stockade will not stand a moment against those trees," he +continued. "'Tis best to call the men in, at once."</p> +<p>The rajah ordered the native beside him to sound his horn and, +in two or three minutes, the men poured in at the entrance. As soon +as the last had come in, the bamboos were put in the holes prepared +for them, with some rattans twined between them. Scores of men then +set to work, bringing up the earth and stones that had been piled +close at hand.</p> +<p>In the meantime, the three hundred men on the walls kept up a +shower of arrows on the enemy. The battering rams, which consisted +of trees stripped of their branches, and some forty feet long and +ten inches thick, did their work and, by the time the entrance was +secure, the Malays poured in with exultant shouts.</p> +<p>A large supply of the fireballs had been placed on the platforms +and, as these were lighted and thrown down, the assailants were +exposed to a deadly shower of arrows as they rushed forward. At +this moment the rajah's servant brought up four double-barrelled +guns.</p> +<p>"They are loaded," the chief said, as he handed one of these to +Harry.</p> +<p>"How long is it since they were fired?" the latter asked.</p> +<p>"It is three months since I last went out shooting," the rajah +replied.</p> +<p>Harry at once proceeded to draw the charges.</p> +<p>"I should advise you to do the same, Rajah. A gun that has not +been fired for three months is not likely to carry straight, and is +more dangerous to its owner than to an enemy."</p> +<p>The rajah called up two of his men, and one of these at once +drew the charges of the guns, and reloaded them from the powder +horn and bag of bullets the servants had brought.</p> +<p>The enemy did not press their attack, but retired behind the +palisades and, from this shelter, began to shoot their arrows fast, +while a few matchlock men also replied.</p> +<p>"It would be as well, Rajah, to order all your men to sit down. +There is no use in their exposing themselves to the arrows, and +they are only wasting their own. We must wait, now, to see what +their next move will be. Fire will be of no use to them, now; and +the wall will take some battering before it gives way and, brave as +the men may be, they could not work the battering rams under the +shower of spears and arrows that would be poured upon them.</p> +<p>"I should send the greater part of your men down to get off the +roofs of the huts. Those up here must place a man or two on watch, +at each side, and throw a fireball occasionally."</p> +<p>In a few moments the enemy ceased shooting their arrows, for the +light of the fireballs showed them that the garrison was in +shelter.</p> +<p>"There is no occasion for you to stay here, any longer, Rajah. I +will look after matters until morning, and will send to you, as +soon as there is any stir outside."</p> +<p>In half an hour, the huts were stripped of their most +combustible material. This was heaped up under the platforms, where +it would be safe from falling arrows. The women drew pots of water +from the well, and a hundred men were then left in the courtyard, +with orders to pull up or stamp out any flaming arrows that might +fall. But as the time went on, it was evident that the assailants +had not thought of providing themselves with the materials +requisite, and the greater part of the garrison lay down quietly +and slept.</p> +<p>Harry had waited until he saw the work in the courtyard +completed; and then, with the interpreter, entered the rajah's +house. The room he generally used was empty. Some lamps were +burning there, and he laid himself down on a divan, while the Malay +curled himself up on the floor.</p> +<p>Harry had slept but a short time when he was awakened by a light +touch on his shoulder and, springing up, saw a woman, with a boy +some six years old, standing beside him. The woman placed her +finger on her lips, imploringly. Harry at once roused the +interpreter. Through him, the woman explained that she was the +widow of the late rajah, and that her son was the lawful heir to +the throne.</p> +<p>"I have come to you, brave white lord," she said, "to ask you if +your people will grant us protection."</p> +<p>"That would be impossible," Harry replied; "my people are busy +with their own wars in India and, even were they not so occupied, +they could not interfere in a domestic quarrel between the Malay +chiefs."</p> +<p>"Why are you fighting here, then?"</p> +<p>"I am fighting in my own quarrel. I was attacked, and my +followers killed, by the rajah now assailing this place. I, myself, +should have been murdered, had I not made my escape; and should +certainly be killed by him, if he were victorious.</p> +<p>"I think it likely that, before very long, there may be an +English trading station at Singapore and, if you and your son were +to go there, you would certainly be well received. I shall, of +course, relate your story, which I have already heard, on my return +to Calcutta; and on my explaining that your son is entitled to the +throne of Johore, it may be that some sum would be granted for your +maintenance; for it may well be that, in time, the throne may again +become vacant, and that the people, tired of these constant wars, +will unite to accept your son as rajah. I may tell you that I am +sure the tumangong will grant us a trading station, and possibly +the whole island; but as he is not the Rajah of Johore, although at +present independent of him, we should like to have his assent to +the cession. It is for this purpose I have come here although, up +to the present time, I have not said anything about it to the +rajah, as we have both been much too busy to talk of such +matters.</p> +<p>"It may be years before the English come to Singapore; but my +report will certainly be noted and, assuredly, an asylum would be +granted you, and you would be kindly received. I can say no more +than that."</p> +<p>"Thanks, my lord, I could have hoped for no more. Forgive me for +having thus disturbed you but, as all in the house save ourselves +are asleep, I thought that it was an opportunity that would not +occur again. I will teach my son that the English are his friends +and, should aught happen to me, and should he ever become rajah +here, he will act as their friend, also."</p> +<p>When this had been interpreted to Harry, she and the boy left +the room, as noiselessly as they had entered. Harry was well +pleased with the interview. Probably the present man would, when +the result of this struggle became known, regain much of the power +he had lost. Assuredly, as long as he remained rajah, he would now +be ready to grant anything asked for and, as Singapore was +virtually lost to him, his assent would be given without +hesitation. If, on the other hand, he were dethroned, or died, it +was likely that this boy would in time become rajah and, in view of +this possibility, doubtless the Governor would order that if, at +any time, he and his mother arrived at Singapore, they should be +well received.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch13" id="Ch13">Chapter 13</a>: The Break Up Of The +Monsoon.</h2> +<p>The night and early morning passed quietly. The chatter of many +voices showed that a portion, at any rate, of the assailants were +beyond the stockade; but it was not until nine o'clock that +numerous parties were seen coming from the forest.</p> +<p>"I suppose they have been making ladders all night," Harry said +to Abdool, who was with him on the wall; from which, owing to the +fact that the house stood on a rising knoll of ground, which +commanded a good view over the stockade, the assailants could be +seen.</p> +<p>"Well, I have no doubt we shall be able to beat them off. We +have as many men as we want for the circuit of the walls and, while +we shall be partly sheltered, they will have to advance in the +open."</p> +<p>The Malays had, indeed, been busy since daybreak in +manufacturing arrows from thin reeds and bamboos, used in the +construction of the huts demolished on the previous evening; +tipping them with chips of stone and winging them with feathers, of +which plenty were found in the houses and scattered about the yard. +All felt that this would be the decisive attack; and that the +enemy, after one more repulse, would draw off. That the repulse +would be given, all felt confident. Already the slaughter of their +assailants had been very great, while very few of their own number +had fallen.</p> +<p>An hour later, large parties of the enemy advanced to the +stockade. This they did unmolested, as the distance was too great +for anything like certainty of aim. The rajah again took his place +by Harry's side. Presently, at the sound of a horn, a great flight +of arrows rose high in the air from behind the stockade.</p> +<p>"They are fire arrows!" the rajah exclaimed. "I will send a +hundred men down, to help the women to extinguish them;" and he +himself descended, an officer following, with the men.</p> +<p>The women were all seated close to the platforms and, as the +arrows came raining down, they ran out; being joined by the rajah +and his men. Had the leafy roofs remained in their place, the whole +would have been in a blaze in two or three minutes. As it was, the +vast proportion of the arrows stuck in the earth, and burnt +themselves out; while the few that fell among the debris that had +not been cleared away were extinguished, immediately. For two or +three minutes the showers of arrows continued; and then ceased as, +to the surprise of the assailants, there were no indications of the +palace being on fire.</p> +<p>Then the signal was given for the attack and, exasperated by the +failure of the plan they had relied upon as being certain to cause +a panic, the Malays, with loud shouts, rushed forward. A large +number of them carried ladders and, in spite of the many who fell +under the arrows of the defenders, the ladders were soon planted +against the walls; and the Malays swarmed up on all sides.</p> +<p>A desperate struggle took place. Some of the ladders were high +enough to project above the wall. These, with the men upon them, +were thrown back. On others the Malays, as they climbed up, were +met by the spears of the defenders or, as their heads rose above +the walls, with the deadly kris. Their leaders moved about among +the throng below, urging the men forward; and Harry, seeing that +things were going on well, all round, took the guns from the hands +of the soldier who attended him, and directed his aim against +these.</p> +<p>Three fell to his first shots. As the soldier handed them to +him, reloaded, his eye caught a group of chiefs, behind whom stood +what was evidently a picked body of men. In the midst of the group +was the rajah to whom Harry had recently been a prisoner. With a +feeling of deep satisfaction, that his hand should avenge the +murder of his four troopers, Harry levelled his gun between two of +the defenders of the wall, took a steady aim, and fired.</p> +<a id="PicH" name="PicH"></a> +<center><img src="images/h.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Without a cry, the rajah fell back, shot through the head." /> +</center> +<p>As the chief was but some twenty-five yards away, there was +little fear of his missing and, without a cry, the rajah fell back, +shot through the head. A yell of consternation rose from those +around him. Two more shots then rang out, and two more chiefs +fell.</p> +<p>The others shouted to their men, and a furious rush forward was +made. Harry snatched up a spear, lying by the side of a native who +had fallen; shouted to the rajah's guard of twenty men--who were in +the yard below, as a reserve in case the enemy gained a footing at +any point of the wall--to come up, and then joined in the +fight.</p> +<p>The assailants fought with such fury that, for a time, the issue +was doubtful. Several times, three or four succeeded in throwing +themselves over the wall; but only to be cut down, before they +could be joined by others. At last the Malays drew off, amid the +exultant shouts of the defenders.</p> +<p>In a short time, the attack became more feeble at all points. +The news of the death of their leader had doubtless spread, and its +effect was aided by several other chiefs falling under Harry's fire +and, ere long, not one of their followers remained inside the +palisade. Half an hour later, the lookout from the top of the +rajah's house shouted that the whole of the assailants were +retiring, in a body, towards the forest.</p> +<p>Excited by their victory, the rajah's troops would have sallied +out in pursuit; but Harry dissuaded him from permitting it.</p> +<p>"They must have lost, altogether, over a thousand of their men; +but they are still vastly more numerous than your people, and +nothing would suit them better than that you should follow them, +and give them a chance of avenging the loss they have +suffered."</p> +<p>"But the rajah will come again. He will never remain quiet, +under the disgrace."</p> +<p>"He will trouble you no more," Harry said. "I shot him myself, +and six or seven of his principal chiefs."</p> +<p>"You are indeed my friend!" the rajah exclaimed, earnestly, when +the words were translated to him. "Then there is a hope that I may +have peace. The death of the rajah, and of so many of the chiefs +that have joined him, will lead to quarrels and disputes; and the +confederacy formed against me will break up and, while fighting +among themselves, they will not think of attacking, again, a place +that has proved so fatal to them."</p> +<p>The rajah had some difficulty in allaying the enthusiasm of his +men; but he repeated what Harry had said to him, and added that, +since it was entirely due to their white guest that they had +repulsed the attack, there could be no doubt that his advice must +now be attended to, since he had shown himself a master in war.</p> +<p>"Be content," he said. "Wherever our language is spoken, the +Malays will tell the story of how three thousand men were defeated +by five hundred; and it will be said that the men of Johore +surpassed, in bravery, everything that has been told of the deeds +of their fathers. There is no fear of the enemy returning here. The +rajah and many of his chiefs have fallen, by the hand of our white +friend. Henceforth, for many years, you will be able to rest in +peace.</p> +<p>"In a month you will have rebuilt the houses, and sown again the +fields that have been burnt. After that, we shall have leisure, and +a treble stockade shall be built, stronger and firmer than that +into which they forced an entry. Your first task must be to carry +the bodies of our enemies far out beyond the town, where their +skeletons will act as a warning as to what welcome Johore gives to +its foes. A present of money will be given to each man, this +afternoon, to help him to rebuild his house, and make good the +damages that he has suffered."</p> +<p>The interpreter had rapidly translated the speech to Harry as it +went on and, as the rajah ended, and the applause that greeted him +subsided, Harry said a few words to the interpreter, which he +repeated to the rajah. The latter held up his hand, to show that he +had more to say.</p> +<p>"My white friend warns me that, for a day or two, we must not +leave the town. It may be that the enemy have halted near the edge +of the forest, in the hope of taking us unawares. This, however, +can only be for a day or two, at most; for I have no doubt that the +provisions they brought with them are, by now, exhausted and, if +they stop in the forest, they will perish from hunger; therefore +let no one go beyond the town, for two days. A watch shall be kept +on the roof of my house and, if any of the enemy make their +appearance in the forest, a horn will summon all to retire within +the walls."</p> +<p>There was feasting that night at the rajah's house. All his +officers and men of importance were present. Sacks of rice and +other grain were distributed among the soldiers and women; some +buffaloes that had been driven inside the wall to serve as food, +should the siege prove a long one, were also killed and cut up; and +very large jars, containing the fermented juice of the pineapple, +and other fruits, were served out.</p> +<p>During the day the breaches in the palisades had all been +repaired and, at night, the whole population were told to remain +within its shelter, while numerous guards were posted by the rajah. +While the meal at the rajah's was going on, a party of native +musicians played and sang, the Malays being very fond of music.</p> +<p>Harry sat at the rajah's right hand, and was the subject of +unbounded praise and admiration among the company. Speaker after +speaker rose and addressed him and, afterwards, the interpreter +said a few words to them in his name, thanking them for the +goodwill they had shown, and praising them highly, not only for +their bravery, but especially for the manner in which they had +carried out the orders given to them. The proceedings did not +terminate until a very late hour, and Harry was heartily glad when +at last he could retire to rest.</p> +<p>In the morning, the rajah said to him:</p> +<p>"Now, my friend, you have not told me why you have come here. We +have been so busy that we have not spoken on other subjects, save +the war. The message you sent up to me was that you came from the +great white lord of Calcutta, and desired to see me. You may be +sure that whatever you desire of me shall be granted for, were it +not for your coming, I should now be a hunted fugitive, and my +people slain."</p> +<p>"It is not much that I desire, Rajah. The tumangong is willing +to grant to us a trading station, on the island of Singapore and, +possibly, we may acquire from him the whole island; but we are +aware that he is not the rightful lord of the island, and it may be +that, in time, you may recover possession of all Johore. Thus, +then, I come to you to ask you if you are willing to consent to +this privilege being granted to us; which assuredly will benefit +your kingdom by providing a market, close to you, at which you can +barter your produce for goods that you require, with us or with +native traders from the east. At present, we are not in a position +to plant this trading station in Singapore, being engaged in +serious wars in India; and it may be a considerable time before +things have so settled down that we can do so. I have, therefore, +only to ask your assent to our arrangement with the tumangong, +whenever it can be carried out; and we shall certainly be willing +to recognize your authority, by a gift of money."</p> +<p>"I willingly consent," the rajah said; "it is, indeed, but a +small thing. So long as I live, I shall be ready to enter into any +treaty with you; and doubtless my successor, whoever he may be, +knowing what you have done for us and our state, will also +agree."</p> +<p>[It was not, indeed, until the year 1819 that the British took +possession of the island, paying sixty thousand dollars to the +tumangong. Shortly after they had settled there the young prince, +who had escaped from Johore, came down there. He was awarded a +pension and, at the death of the rajah, was placed on the throne by +the British, to the general satisfaction of the inhabitants.]</p> +<p>The next day, a number of men came in from villages scattered +among the hills, who had not heard of the approach of the enemy +until too late to enter the town, and take part in its defence. By +this time, scouts had penetrated far into the forest, and brought +back news that, although there were many dead there, there were no +signs of the enemy. The work, therefore, of rebuilding the town was +commenced; every available man of the garrison, and those who had +come in, being engaged in cutting wood and bringing it in.</p> +<p>In the course of the next day or two several chiefs, whose +attitude had before been threatening, came or sent members of their +families to congratulate the rajah upon the defeat that he had +inflicted upon his enemies, and to assure him of their loyalty to +his rule.</p> +<p>Harry had stayed on, at the earnest request of the rajah; but he +now declared that he must return to the coast. The rajah's approval +of the cession of a trading port, and of the island itself, was +written both in the Malay and the English languages, and signed by +the chief. Copies were also made and signed, by Harry, to be kept +in the palace, in order that on any future occasion they could be +consulted.</p> +<p>A great number of presents, of krises and other articles of +Malayan manufacture, were offered to Harry; but he excused himself +from accepting them, saying that, in the first place, it was not +customary for commissioners of the Governor to accept presents; and +in the second that, being constantly employed on service, he had no +place where these could be deposited, during his long absences.</p> +<p>On the third morning after the retreat of the enemy Harry +started, with his two companions, for the coast; attended by an +escort of twenty men of the rajah's own guard, commanded by a high +officer. There was now no fear of molestation, but the escort was +sent as a mark of honour. Starting early, they reached the coast +town in the afternoon.</p> +<p>They were received with great joy by the inhabitants, who had +been in a state of abject terror. A runner, who was the bearer of a +message to the rajah from the headman, had left on the morning +after Harry's party had started; and had returned with the news +that he had found the headless bodies of all the escort, but had +seen no traces of the white man nor his followers, who had +doubtless all been carried off by the enemy. The news caused +terrible consternation, as it was thought that the town might be +attacked, at any moment. Those of the inhabitants who possessed +canoes, took to them and paddled away down the coast. The others +fled to the mountains.</p> +<p>Finding, however, from scouts who had been left, that four days +had passed without the appearance of the enemy, most of them had +returned, on the evening before Harry arrived there. On hearing, +from his escort, of the defeat of the invaders and their enormous +loss, the most lively joy was manifested; and Harry was treated +with almost reverential respect, the men of the escort agreeing +that it was solely due to him that the victory had been gained. He +made, however, but a very short stay in the village; and the +headman at once ordered the largest canoe to be prepared. This was +decorated with flowers and flags and manned by twenty rowers who, +as soon as Harry and his two companions took their seats in it, +rowed off to the brig.</p> +<p>"Welcome back, Lindsay!" Fairclough shouted, as the canoe +approached; "we could hardly believe our eyes, when we saw you come +down to the canoe. We have been in a terrible fright about you. The +natives brought off news that the escort that had been sent down to +take you to Johore were, every one, killed; and that, as there were +no signs of any of your party, it was certain that you had been +carried off. We sent a boat ashore, every morning, armed to the +teeth; but they reported that the place was almost entirely +deserted, and the two or three men left there said that no news, +whatever, had been received of you."</p> +<p>By this time, Harry had gained the deck.</p> +<p>"Where is your escort?" Fairclough asked.</p> +<p>"I am sorry to say that they were all murdered. However, my +story is a long one and, although the rajah sent down some food +with the escort he gave me, I am desperately thirsty, and will tell +you all that happened when I have wetted my whistle."</p> +<p>Fairclough told Hardy to come with them below, and Harry's story +was told in full, over sundry cups of tea, which Harry preferred to +stronger beverages.</p> +<p>"That was an adventure, indeed," Fairclough said, when Harry had +brought his story to an end. "I would have given anything to have +been with you in that siege. I own I should not have cared about +being a prisoner in that fellow's camp, especially as you were +disarmed, and could not even make a fight for it. That affair with +the leopard would have been more to my taste; though, if I had been +in your place, with nothing but your knife and Abdool's, I doubt +whether I should have come out of it as well as you did; but the +other business was splendid, and those Malays of the rajah's must +have fought well, indeed, to beat off a force six times their own +strength."</p> +<p>"The great point is that I have obtained his ratification of the +tumangong's grant, whenever it may be made."</p> +<p>"That is satisfactory, of course; but it would not have, to my +mind, anything like the importance of your series of adventures, +which will be something to think over all your life. I wish I had +been there, with my crew, to have backed you up; though I am afraid +that most of them would have shared the fate of your Malay escort, +in that sudden attack in the forest."</p> +<p>"Yes; with all their pluck, they could scarcely have repulsed +such a sudden onslaught though, certainly, the killing would not +all have been on one side. I am glad, indeed, that Abdool also came +safely out of it; as I should have missed him, fearfully.</p> +<p>"The interpreter showed himself a good man, and I hope that Lord +Mornington will, when I report his conduct, make him a handsome +present. If he had not got away with me, it is hardly likely I +should ever have found my way to Johore and, if I had done so, I +could not have explained to the rajah that he was going to be +attacked, or have got him to erect the stockade that was the main +cause of our success. In fact, he would probably, in his anger at +the slaughter of his escort, have ordered me to be executed on the +spot. As it was, he did not take either that, or the loss of his +presents, greatly to heart."</p> +<p>"You saved his kingdom for him, there is no doubt. It is not +likely that he would ever have ventured to defend himself, had it +not been for the confidence that he felt in you, and in the steps +you took."</p> +<p>"No; he told me, himself, that he would have taken flight at +once and, in that case, his kingdom would have been lost; and he +himself, sooner or later, hunted down."</p> +<p>"And now, I suppose we can start as soon as we like?"</p> +<p>"Certainly; the sooner the better. I shall be very glad to be +back again, for there is no saying what is going on there. +Assuredly, the friendship of the Mahrattas cannot be relied upon. I +know that we are not likely to make any fresh move, except in self +defence, until Mysore is completely pacified, and a firm government +established. Still, there is never any saying what will happen. +Having been in the thick of the Mahratta business, all along, I +should not like to be out of it, now."</p> +<p>"Well, we will get up anchor at daybreak, tomorrow."</p> +<p>All on board were glad, when the news that they were to sail for +Calcutta, the next morning, was circulated through the ship. To the +crew, the voyage had been a monotonous one; the weather having been +uniformly fine, since they started; and they had had no adventures, +such as they had hoped for, with hostile natives.</p> +<p>Nothing was talked of that night, between decks, but Harry's +story; which had been told by Lieutenant Hardy to the midshipmen, +who had retailed it to the petty officers, and it had rapidly +spread. Abdool and the interpreter were made as much of as was +possible, considering that neither could understand English; and +deep were the expressions of regret that none of the sailors had +taken part in so tough a fight.</p> +<p>By the time the sun was up, next morning, the vessel was under +weigh and, with light breezes, sailed round Singapore, and then +headed northwest. The winds, as before, were light and, as the +northeast monsoon was still blowing, the rate of progress was +slow.</p> +<p>"I wish we could have got into the Hooghly," Fairclough said, as +he walked impatiently up and down the quarterdeck, "before the +monsoon broke; but I don't see much chance of it. It generally +changes about the middle of April, and we are well on in the first +week, now. At the rate at which we are sailing, we shall take at +least three weeks before we get there. You see, we are only just +clear of the northern point of Sumatra; and it is already a month +since we got up anchor."</p> +<p>"But we shall have the wind almost behind us, Fairclough."</p> +<p>"Yes, when it has settled down. It is the change that I do not +like. Of course, sometimes we have only a few days of moderately +rough weather; but occasionally there is a hurricane at the break +up, and a hurricane in the bay of Bengal is no joke. I shall not +mind, much, if we get fairly past the Andamans; for from there to +the mouth of the Hooghly it is open water, and I should be under no +uneasiness as to the brig battling her way through it; but to be +caught in a hurricane, with these patches of islands and rocks in +the neighbourhood would, to say the least, be awkward."</p> +<p>"Are there any ports among the islands? I recollect hearing an +officer say that there was a settlement made there, some years +ago."</p> +<p>"That was so. In 1791 an establishment was started in the +southern part of the island and, two years later, it was moved to a +harbour on the northwest side of the bay. It was called Port +Cornwallis; but was abandoned in 1796, being found terribly +unhealthy. It was a pity, for it afforded good shelter when the +northeast monsoon was blowing, and partially so from the southwest +monsoon. No doubt it could have been made more healthy, if the +country round had been well cleared; but it was not found to be of +sufficient utility to warrant a large outlay, and the natives are +so bitterly unfriendly that it would require a garrison of two or +three hundred men to overawe them. We should have been always +losing life--not from open attacks, perhaps, but from their habit +of crawling up, and shooting men down with their arrows."</p> +<p>A week later, they were some seventy or eighty miles to the west +of the Andaman group. Directly the brig weathered the northernmost +point of Sumatra, the course had been laid more to the west, so as +to avoid the dangerous inside passage. When Harry went on deck, in +the morning, he found that the wind had dropped altogether.</p> +<p>"There is an end of the monsoon," Fairclough said. "I am just +going to shorten sail. There is no saying which way the wind will +come. The glass is falling fast but, of course, that is only to be +expected. I think, if you are wise, after breakfast you will take +off that drill suit, and get into something better calculated to +stand rough weather; for that we are sure to have, and any amount +of rain. That is always the case, at the changes of the +monsoon.</p> +<p>"You see, it is a sort of battle between the two winds; the +southwesterly will gain, in the end, but the other will die hard; +and it is this struggle that causes the circular storms which, when +they are serious, are called hurricanes, though at ordinary times +they are simply called the break up of the monsoon, which generally +causes bad weather all over the Indian Ocean."</p> +<p>Towards evening, low banks of cloud were seen to the south, and +the sky looked dim and misty in the opposite direction.</p> +<p>"They are mustering their forces, you see, Lindsay; and the +glass has fallen so far that I fancy the fight will be a hot one. +At any rate, we will make all snug for the night."</p> +<p>Sail after sail was taken in, until only a storm jib, a small +fore stay-sail, and a close-reefed main top-sail were left +standing. The bank of cloud to the south had risen considerably +and, when darkness closed in, the upper edge was lit up by the +almost incessant flicker of lightning. The upper spars were sent +down on deck and then, there being nothing more to be done, the +crew, who had all donned rough-weather clothes, awaited the +outburst.</p> +<p>That it would be more than ordinarily severe there could be no +doubt, and the men, clustered in little groups by the bulwarks, +talked in low tones as they watched the slowly-approaching storm +from the south; with occasional glances northwards, where indeed no +clouds could be seen, but the sky was frequently lit up by the +reflections of lightning below the horizon.</p> +<p>"What do you think of it?" Harry asked the interpreter.</p> +<p>"I do not like it," the Malay replied. "I think that there will +be a great hurricane. I have seen many changes of the monsoon, but +never one that looked so threatening as this."</p> +<p>"It does look bad," Harry said, "though, as I have never been at +sea before, at the change of the monsoon, I am no judge at all; but +it certainly looks as if we were in for a bad gale. At any rate, we +shall be safer, here, than we were in that hut in the +mountains."</p> +<p>The Malay made no reply, for some time. Then he said:</p> +<p>"Yes, sahib, but there was something to do, there. Directly we +got in, you began to prepare for an escape. It was not certain that +we should succeed. They might have come in and killed us, before +you were ready but, as we were busy, we had not much time to think +of the danger.</p> +<p>"Here we can do nothing."</p> +<p>"No. But, as you see, everything has already been done. You and +I have not been working, but the sailors have been busy in taking +off sail, and getting down all the upper spars. We are ready for +the worst, now; just as we were when we had opened the passage for +our escape, and we felt fairly confident--although we might meet +with many dangers, we had a good chance of getting safely +away."</p> +<p>"There are the danger signals, Lindsay," the captain said, as a +pale light suddenly shone out above.</p> +<p>Looking up, Harry saw a ball of fire on the main-mast head. +Presently, this seemed to roll down the mast, till it reached the +top-sail yard; then it broke into two, and these rolled out until +they remained stationary, one at each end of the yard. Harry had +never seen this phenomenon before.</p> +<p>"What is it?" he asked Fairclough, in an awed voice.</p> +<p>"They are often seen, before the outburst of a severe tempest. +Of course, they look like balls of phosphorus; but in reality they +are electric, and are a sign that the whole atmosphere is charged +with electricity. Sailors have all sorts of superstitions about +them but, of course, excepting that they are signs of the condition +of the air, they are perfectly harmless."</p> +<p>He raised his voice.</p> +<p>"Don't stand near the foot of the masts, lads; keep well away +from them. There is nothing to be afraid of, in those lights; but +if we happened to be struck by lightning and it ran down the mast, +some of you might be knocked over.</p> +<p>"I don't know why," he continued, to Harry, "the first flash of +lightning at the beginning of a storm is always the most dangerous. +I can't account for it, in any way, but there is no question as to +the fact. I always feel relieved when the first clap of thunder is +over; for I know, then, that we are comparatively safe from danger, +in that way."</p> +<p>Gradually the stars disappeared.</p> +<p>"Mr. Hardy," the captain said to the lieutenant, who was +standing near, "will you go down to my cabin, and see how the glass +stands?"</p> +<p>Harry did not hear the answer, when Hardy returned, but +Fairclough said to him:</p> +<p>"It has gone down another quarter of an inch since I looked at +it, half an hour ago; and it was as low, then, as I have ever seen +it.</p> +<p>"Mr. Hardy, you had better send the men aloft, and furl the main +top-sail, altogether; and run down the fore stay-sail. We can get +it up again, as soon as the first burst is over. Put four men at +the wheel."</p> +<p>There was still no breath of wind stirring. The stay sail was +run down, but the men hung back from ascending the shrouds of the +main mast.</p> +<p>"They are afraid of those lights," Fairclough said, "but I do +not think there is the slightest danger from them."</p> +<p>"I will go up, myself, sir," Hardy said; and he ran up the +starboard shrouds while, at the same moment, one of the midshipmen +led the way on the port side. The sailors at once followed their +officers.</p> +<p>The latter had nearly reached the yard, when the two balls of +fire began to roll along it, joined in the centre, and then slowly +ascended the topmast. The fireballs paused there for half a minute, +and then vanished.</p> +<p>"Now, Eden," the lieutenant said, "let us get the work done, at +once, before that fellow makes his appearance again."</p> +<p>The men followed them out on the yard, and worked in desperate +haste, with occasional glances up at the mast head. In a couple of +minutes the sail was firmly secured in its gaskets, and all made +their way below.</p> +<p>"Thank goodness, here it comes, at last," Fairclough said; "the +suspense is more trying than the gale itself."</p> +<p>A low murmur was heard, and a faint pale light was soon visible +to the south.</p> +<p>"Get ready to hold on, all!" he shouted to the men.</p> +<p>The sound momentarily increased in volume, and the distant light +brightened until a long line of white foam was clearly discernible. +It approached with extraordinary speed. There was a sudden puff of +air. It lasted but a few seconds, and then died away.</p> +<p>"Hold on!" the captain again shouted.</p> +<p>Half a minute later, with a tremendous roar, the wind struck the +brig. Knowing which way it would come, Fairclough had, half an hour +before, lowered a boat and brought the vessel's head round, so that +it pointed north. The boat had then been hoisted up.</p> +<p>In the interval of waiting, the ship's head had slightly drifted +round, again, and the wind struck her on the quarter. So great was +the pressure that she heeled far over, burying her bows so deeply +that it seemed as if she were going to dive, head foremost. The +water swept over the bulwarks in torrents, and extended almost up +to the foot of the foremast. Then, very slowly, as she gathered +way, the bow lifted and, in a minute, she was scudding fast before +the gale; gathering speed, every moment, from the pressure of the +wind upon her masts and hull, and from the fragment of sail shown +forward. At present there were no waves, the surface of the water +seeming pressed almost flat by the weight of the wind.</p> +<p>Then there was a deafening crash, and a blaze of light. The +fore-top mast was riven in fragments, but none of these fell on the +deck, the wind carrying them far ahead.</p> +<p>"You had better make your way forward, Mr. Hardy," Fairclough +shouted, into the lieutenant's ear, "and see if anyone is +hurt."</p> +<p>Fortunately the precaution which had been taken, of ordering the +men away from the mast, had prevented any loss of life; but several +of the men were temporarily blinded. Three or four had been struck +to the deck, by the passage of the electric fluid close to them; +but these presently regained their feet. Hardy returned, and +reported to the captain.</p> +<p>"You had better send the carpenter down, to see that there is no +fire below."</p> +<p>In a minute the man ran up, with the news that he believed the +foot of the mast was on fire. Mr. Hardy went to a group of men.</p> +<p>"Get some buckets, my lads," he said quietly, "and make your way +down to the hold. I will go with you. As was to be expected, the +lightning has fired the foot of the mast; but there is no cause for +alarm. As we have discovered it so soon, we shall not be long in +getting it under."</p> +<p>The men at once filled the fire buckets and, led by Mr. Hardy, +went below. As soon as the hatchway leading to the hold was lifted, +a volume of smoke poured up.</p> +<p>"Wait a minute, till it has cleared off a little," the +lieutenant said; and then, to the midshipman who had accompanied +him:</p> +<p>"Go to the captain, and tell him that there is more smoke than I +like, and ask him to come below. Tell him I think the pumps had +better be rigged, and the hose passed down."</p> +<p>Fairclough, who was accompanied by Harry, joined him just as he +was about to descend the ladder.</p> +<p>"I will go down with you, Mr. Hardy," he said.</p> +<p>"Mr. Eden, will you go up and send down all hands, except those +at the wheel? Set a strong gang to rig the pumps, and pass the hose +down."</p> +<p>He and the lieutenant then made their way along the hold. The +smoke was very thick, and it was only by stooping low that they +could get along. They could see, however, a glow of light +ahead.</p> +<p>"We can do nothing with this," the captain said, "beyond trying +to keep it from spreading, until we have shifted all these stores. +The gang with buckets had better come down, empty them on the pile, +and then set to work to clear the stuff away, as quickly as +possible."</p> +<p>The men, who came along gradually and with difficulty, began to +remove the barrels, coils of rope, and spare sails stowed there. +Several of them were overpowered by the smoke, and had to be +carried up again; and others came down and took their places.</p> +<p>In three or four minutes the hose was passed down, and the clank +of the pumps could be heard. Mr. Hardy took the nozzle and while +the men, now a strong party, worked at the stores, directed a +stream of water upon the flames.</p> +<p>For a time, the efforts seemed to make no impression, and the +steam added to the difficulty of working. Another gang of men were +set to work, forward of the mast and, after half an hour's labour, +the stores were so far removed that the hose could be brought to +play upon the burning mass at the foot of the mast.</p> +<p>The lieutenant had been relieved by Harry, and he by the two +midshipmen, in succession. Changes were frequent and, in another +quarter of an hour, it was evident that the flames were well under +control. The men engaged below relieved those at the pumps and, in +an hour from the first outbreak, all danger was over, though +pumping was kept up for some time longer.</p> +<p>The captain made frequent visits to the deck. The vessel was +still running before the wind, and the sea had got up. The motion +of the ship was becoming more and more violent but, as there was +nothing to be done, the men below were not disturbed at their work, +and this was continued until smoke no longer ascended.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch14" id="Ch14">Chapter 14</a>: The Great +Andaman.</h2> +<p>Leaving a party below, to clear away the burnt barrels and +debris, and to extinguish any fire that might still smoulder among +them, the rest returned on deck. Terrible as was the storm, it was +a relief, to all, to cling to the rail and breathe the fresh air, +after the stifling atmosphere of the hold.</p> +<p>The scene, however, was a terrible one. Lightning was flashing +overhead incessantly, although the thunder was only occasionally +heard, above the howl of the storm. The sea was broken and +irregular, leaping in masses over the bulwarks, and sweeping the +decks. The force of the wind continually tore the heads off the +waves, and carried the spray along in blinding showers.</p> +<p>"We are very near the eye of the hurricane," Captain Fairclough +shouted, in Lindsay's ear. "The men at the wheel tell me she has +been twice round the compass, already; but this broken sea would, +alone, tell that. We must get a little sail on the main mast, and +try to edge out of it."</p> +<p>A small stay sail was got out and hoisted, and the helm was put +down a little. Though still running at but a slight angle before +the wind, the pressure was now sufficient to lay her down to her +gunwale. The crew gathered under shelter of the weather bulwark, +holding on by belaying pins and stanchions.</p> +<p>Night had now set in, but it made little difference; for the +darkness had, before, been intense, save for the white crests of +the tossing waves. Sheets of foam blew across the deck and, +sometimes, a heavy fall of water toppled down on the crew. A +pannikin of hot soup had been served out to the men, and this would +be the last hot refreshment they would obtain, before the gale +broke; for the hatchways were all battened down, and it was +impossible to keep the fire alight.</p> +<p>"The best thing you can do is to turn in, Lindsay," Fairclough +said, after the former had finished his soup--a task of no slight +difficulty, under the circumstances. "You can do no good by +remaining up."</p> +<p>"How long is it likely to last?"</p> +<p>"Probably for two or three days, possibly longer."</p> +<p>"I will take your advice," Harry said. "I shall be glad to get +these wet clothes off."</p> +<p>For a time, he was sorry that he had lain down, for the motion +was so violent that he could, with difficulty, keep himself in his +berth. Being, however, completely worn out by the buffeting of the +gale, the efforts required to hold on, the excitement of the fire +and storm, it was not long before he dropped off to sleep; and he +did not wake up until a ray of dim light showed that the morning +was breaking. The motion of the ship was unabated and after, with +great difficulty, getting into his clothes, he went up on deck.</p> +<p>Except that the clouds were somewhat more broken, there was no +change. Dark masses of vapour flew overhead, torn and ragged. The +wild tumble of waves rose and fell, without order or regularity. +Forward, the bulwark on both bows had been carried away, and the +deck was swept clear of every movable object.</p> +<p>One watch was below, the men of the other were for the most part +gathered aft, and lashed to belaying pins. Fairclough was standing +near the wheel. With some difficulty, Harry made his way to +him.</p> +<p>"Not much change since last night," he said. "I feel quite +ashamed of myself, for having been sleeping in my berth while you +have all been exposed to this gale."</p> +<p>"There has not been much to do," the commander said. "In fact, +there is nothing to be done, except to keep her as much as we dare +from running straight before the wind. We have not had much success +that way for, as you see, the tumble of water shows that we are +still but a short distance from the centre of the gale. I sent the +starboard watch below at four bells and, in a few minutes, we shall +be relieved. Hardy wanted to stay with me, but I would not have +it.</p> +<p>"The cook has managed, somehow, to boil some water, and served a +pannikin of coffee to all hands, just before the watch turned in; +and he has sent word that he will have some more ready, by the time +they come up again."</p> +<p>He looked at his watch, and called out, "four bells."</p> +<p>One of the men made his way to the bell, with alacrity. The +watch below did not come up, for a few minutes, as they waited to +drink their coffee. As soon as they appeared, the men on deck went +below.</p> +<p>"All the better for your sleep, Mr. Hardy?" Fairclough asked, as +the other joined him.</p> +<p>"Very much better, sir. I think the cook ought to have a medal. +The cup of coffee before we turned in, and that we have just drunk, +have made new men of us."</p> +<p>"You will call me, instantly, if there is any change, Mr. +Hardy.</p> +<p>"Mr. Eden, you had better come with us. The coffee will be +ready, in my cabin."</p> +<p>There was no possibility of sitting at the table. But, sitting +down on the floor to leeward, and holding a mug in one hand and a +biscuit in the other, they managed, with some difficulty, to +dispose of the meal. Then Fairclough, putting on some dry clothes, +threw himself on his bunk. The midshipman retired to his own cabin, +and Harry went on deck.</p> +<p>"How are we heading, Mr. Hardy?" he shouted, when he joined the +lieutenant.</p> +<p>"At the present moment, we are running nearly due east but, as +we have been round the compass, several times, since the gale +struck us, there is no means of saying, with anything like +certainty, where our position is. But I was talking it over with +the captain, before I went down, and we both agreed that, as the +centre of the hurricane is undoubtedly moving to the northeast, we +must have gone a good many miles in that direction.</p> +<p>"Of course, there is no means of determining how far till we can +get a glimpse of the sun; but there is no doubt that, if the gale +continues, we shall soon be in a very perilous position, for we +must be driving towards the Andamans. We may have the luck to pass +north of them, or to go between them.</p> +<p>"We tried, last night, to get up a little more sail; but she +would not stand it, and we were obliged to take it off again. So we +can do nothing but hope for the best."</p> +<p>Two hours later, Fairclough came out again.</p> +<p>"I am afraid that you have not been to sleep," Harry said.</p> +<p>"No. I am all the better for the rest, but sleep was out of the +question.</p> +<p>"How is she heading now, Mr. Hardy?"</p> +<p>"Northeast, sir."</p> +<p>Fairclough took his telescope from the rack in the companion +and, slinging it over his shoulder, mounted the ratlines to the +top.</p> +<p>"Have you made out anything?" he asked the sailor stationed +there.</p> +<p>"I have thought, once or twice, sir, that I saw land ahead; but +I could not say for certain. It is so thick that it is only when +the clouds open a bit that one has a chance."</p> +<p>Although he had taken his glass with him, Fairclough did not +attempt to use it, at present; but stood gazing fixedly ahead. A +quarter of an hour later there was a sudden rift in the clouds, and +a low shore was visible, some five or six miles ahead; and a dark +mass, much farther off, rising into the cloud. Fairclough instantly +unslung the telescope, and adjusted it. A minute afterwards the +clouds closed in again and, telling the man to keep a sharp +lookout, he descended to the deck.</p> +<p>"We must set the main top-sail on her again, close reefed, of +course. We are running straight for land and, unless I am much +mistaken, it is the great Andaman. There is a lofty hill, some +distance back from the shore. I only caught a glimpse of its lower +part, but none of the small islands have any hill to speak of. The +shore is about six miles off and, as the peak lies about the centre +of the island, and as this is a hundred and forty miles long, we +are some seventy miles from the northern point.</p> +<p>"You know what that means. However, we must do all that we can, +to keep her off."</p> +<p>"Ay, ay, sir," Hardy said, turning without another word, and +then gave orders to the men to set the top sail.</p> +<p>This was done, and the ship's course was laid parallel to the +shore. The wind was now nearly northwest, and she lay down until +the water was several planks up her deck. The crew were all lashed +to windward, clustering where they would be most out of danger, +should the mast go.</p> +<p>Fairclough stood for a minute, looking at the shivering mast, +and the shrouds stretched like iron bars.</p> +<p>"We must get the guns overboard, Mr. Hardy; she will never stand +this," and indeed the waves, striking her broadside, were falling +in a cascade over her.</p> +<p>Calling four of the men, Hardy made his way down into the lee +scuppers, where the water was nearly up to their waists; opened the +portholes and slacked the lashings, when the four guns disappeared +overboard. It required much greater pains to get down the guns from +the port side, as tackle had to be attached to each, so that they +could be lowered carefully, one by one, across the deck; but all +worked heartily, and these also were launched overboard.</p> +<p>"That has eased her, a bit," Fairclough said, when Hardy +rejoined him. "They helped to pin her down, and I could almost feel +the difference, as each gun went overboard."</p> +<p>"I am afraid that it will make no difference, in the long run," +Hardy said. "She must be making a great deal of leeway, and I +should say that she will be on shore in a couple of hours, at the +latest. Still, we may have time to look out for a soft spot."</p> +<p>"We should not have much chance, in that case, Hardy; my only +hope is in another shift of wind."</p> +<p>"But it will go round more to the north, sir, and then we +sha'n't be able to lie our course, at all. It has gone round a +point, since we got up the top sail."</p> +<p>"Quite so; and I doubt whether it will go round soon enough to +save us. If it should go round a little more to the north, we must +try and get her on the other tack; but I am afraid, in such a sea, +she will not go about. Of course, our great aim is to reach Port +Cornwallis; or, if we cannot get as far as that, I have just been +having a look at the chart, and I see there are three narrow +straits. How much water there is in them, I do not know. They are +most vaguely marked on the chart. One of them is but thirty miles +north of our present position and, if we find that we cannot make +the northern point, I shall try to get in there. I am not sure +that, in any case, it would not be the best plan; for if there is +only water enough to run a mile or so up this passage, we shall +ground in comparatively still water; whereas, as the wind has been +blowing from every quarter, it is almost certain that there will be +a tremendous sea in the open port."</p> +<p>Fairclough placed himself at the wheel, and told the two +midshipmen to go round, and tell the crew that there was an inlet +ahead, but the depth of the water was uncertain. When they +approached it, all hands would come aft, so as to avoid being +crushed by the falling masts. A dozen of the men were to take +hatchets, and cut away the wreckage if the mast fell, leaving only +a couple of the shrouds uncut. When this was done, directly the +vessel began to break up, those who could not swim were to make +their way by these shrouds to the floating mast. Those who could +swim could make, at once, for the shore.</p> +<p>"When all have left the ship but Mr. Hardy and myself, we will +cut the shrouds; and the masts will probably ground, ere long."</p> +<p>While before the sailors had, for the most part, been gazing at +the coast, on which they had little doubt that their bodies would +soon be cast up; they became lively and active, as soon as they +received the order. It seemed that, after all, there was a chance +for them.</p> +<p>Four hours passed. The wind had now so far headed them that the +brig could no longer keep her course parallel with the shore. Twice +they had endeavoured to put her about, but each time failed; and +she was now making so much leeway that the coast was less than +three miles away. A tremendous sea was breaking upon it. One of the +midshipmen had, for the past hour, been in the foretop with a +glass; and the captain himself now went up, and took his place +beside him. He saw at once that, accustomed as he was to use his +telescope in rough weather, it would be useless here; for the +motion was so great that it was only by following the midshipman's +example, and lashing himself to the mast, that he could retain a +footing.</p> +<p>"You are sure that you have seen no break in the surf, Mr. +Eden?"</p> +<p>"Quite sure, sir."</p> +<p>"We ought not to be far from it, now, if it is rightly marked on +the chart."</p> +<p>Another hour passed, and they were within a mile and a half of +the shore.</p> +<p>"I think that I can see a break, over there, sir," and the +midshipman pointed to a spot a mile along the coast.</p> +<p>"Pray God that it may be so," Fairclough said, "for it is our +only chance."</p> +<p>Two or three minutes later, he said:</p> +<p>"You are right, there is certainly a break there. There is a +line of surf, but it does not run up the shore, as it does +everywhere else."</p> +<p>He at once descended to the deck.</p> +<p>"Thank God!" he said, as he joined Mr. Hardy and Harry who, on +seeing him coming down, had made their way to the shrouds, "there +is a break in the surf. It is not a complete break, but there is +certainly an inlet of some sort. And though it looks as if there +were a bar, there may be plenty of water for us for, with such a +sea as this, it would break in three fathoms of water and, as we +don't draw more than two, we may get over it. At any rate, it is +our only hope."</p> +<p>"It gives us a chance, if we strike," the lieutenant said, "for +it will be comparatively calm water, inside the bar. Those who can +swim should have no difficulty in getting ashore. The others might +do so, on wreckage. Her masts are sure to come out of her, if she +strikes heavily."</p> +<p>"I shall be obliged if you will go up to the foretop, Hardy, and +con the brig in; but mind you, come down before we get to the white +water. You may as well send Mr. Eden down."</p> +<p>Mr. Hardy was not long before he came down again and, at the +captain's suggestion, both he and Harry went below, and armed +themselves with pistols. As soon as they came up again, they took +their places by Fairclough. The seamen had all gathered aft. The +boatswain had cut the lashings holding the spars--that had been +sent down from aloft--in their place by the bulwarks. The boats had +all been torn from their davits, or smashed; with the exception of +the largest cutter, which lay bottom upwards in the middle of the +ship, securely lashed to the deck.</p> +<p>"Now, men," the captain said, raising his voice almost to a +shout, so that all might hear him, "you have behaved as well as men +could do, during this storm; and I have no doubt that you will +continue to do so, to the end. Remember that no one is to leave the +ship, till I give the order. If you are cool and calm, there is +good ground for hope that all may be saved.</p> +<p>"If the mast falls, you who have hatchets run forward at once, +and stand in readiness to cut the lanyards; but don't strike until +I give the order."</p> +<p>They were now fast approaching the line of surf.</p> +<p>"Let everyone take hold of something," Mr. Fairclough shouted. +"If we strike, we are sure to be pooped."</p> +<p>Another minute, and she was close to the breaking waves. +Everyone held his breath as, impelled by a great breaker, she +dashed into the surf with the swiftness of an arrow. There was a +shock, followed by a grating noise, and then the brig slowly came +to a standstill.</p> +<p>"Hold on, hold on for your lives!" the captain shouted, as a +wave even larger than the last came towering up behind them, in an +almost perpendicular wall. It struck the vessel with tremendous +force, and swept waist deep along the deck; while the vessel, +herself, surged forward. There was another shock, but this time +much slighter and, as the next wave carried them on, there was a +general cheer from the sailors.</p> +<p>"She has floated, she is through it, hurrah!"</p> +<p>She was, indeed, over the bar.</p> +<p>"There are men in the water," Fairclough shouted. "Get ready to +cast ropes to them."</p> +<p>Four men, who had been swept overboard by the rush of water, +were rescued; two others were found dead on the deck, having been +dashed against the stanchions, or other obstacles.</p> +<p>The brig continued her course, four or five hundred yards +farther then, as the banks of the inlet closed in, Fairclough gave +orders for the anchors to be let go. Everything had been prepared +for this order, and the anchors at once dropped and, as soon as +fifty fathoms of chain had been run out, the brig swung round head +to wind.</p> +<p>"Muster the men, and see if any are missing."</p> +<p>This was done, and only one, besides three found dead, did not +answer to his name. The general opinion was that he had struck +against something, as he was swept overboard, and had been killed +or disabled; for all who had been seen in the water had been +rescued.</p> +<p>"Serve out an allowance of grog, all round, Mr. Eden," +Fairclough said, "and tell the cook to get his fire alight, as soon +as possible. We shall all be glad of a good meal.</p> +<p>"Well, thank God, everything has ended far better than we could +have hoped for!"</p> +<p>Two hours later the crew, having got into dry clothes, were +sitting down, enjoying a plentiful allowance of pea soup and salt +junk; while the officers were partaking of similar fare, in the +cabin. None who saw them there would have dreamt of the long +struggle they had been through, and that the ship was well nigh a +wreck. It was now late in the afternoon, and Fairclough gave orders +that all might turn in, as soon as they liked; except that an +anchor watch, of four men, must maintain a sharp lookout, for the +natives of the island were bitterly hostile to the whites.</p> +<p>"I don't think there is any real danger," he said to Harry, "or +that they will attempt to take the ship. Their habit is, I have +heard, to lie in hiding, and to shoot their arrows at any stranger +who may land."</p> +<p>They sat chatting, for an hour, after the meal was concluded. +Then the conversation flagged, and Fairclough said, presently:</p> +<p>"I think that we may as well follow the men's example, and turn +in. I can hardly keep my eyes open."</p> +<p>The gale was still blowing strongly, in the morning, though its +force had somewhat abated. But inside the bar there was but a +slight swell, and the brig rode easily at her anchors; for the wind +was now several points west of north, and they were consequently +protected by the land.</p> +<p>The work of repairing damages began at once for, owing to the +length of the voyage, the stores of provisions and water were +beginning to run very short. Two or three buffaloes had been +bought, at the village where Harry had landed but, with the +exception of some fruit, and the meat sent off by the tumangong, no +other fresh food had been obtained, since they sailed from +Calcutta. The boat was turned over and launched; and the work of +making a new fore-top mast, and overhauling the rigging, proceeded +with.</p> +<p>During the day, several of the natives were observed at the edge +of the forest by Harry who, having no special work to do, had been +asked by Fairclough to keep his eye on the shore, and to ascertain +whether they were being watched; as he intended, when the repairs +were finished, to see if any spring of fresh water existed in the +neighbourhood. He therefore kept a telescope directed on the shore +and, soon after daybreak, made out two little men at the edge of +the trees.</p> +<p>The natives of the Andaman Islands are among the lowest types of +humanity known. Their stature does not exceed five feet and, with +their slender limbs and large heads, their appearance is almost +that of a deformed people. They use no clothing whatever, +plastering their bodies with clay, or mud, to protect the skin from +the sun's rays. Animals are scarce on the islands, and the people +live chiefly on fish. They carry bows and arrows, and heavy spears; +to which, in most cases, are added shields. They inhabit +roughly-made arbours, and seldom remain long at any spot; moving +about in small communities, according to the abundance or scarcity +of food. They use no cooking utensils, and simply prepare their +food by placing it on burning embers.</p> +<p>The men first made out soon disappeared but, later on, Harry +could see that there were many of them inside the line of +forest.</p> +<p>"It is a nuisance," the captain said, when he told him the +result of his examination of the shore. "I suppose, in a day or +two, we shall have hundreds of them down here. I don't think they +will try to interfere with us, as long as we are at work; but they +will certainly oppose us, if we attempt to enter the forest, and +will effectually prevent our wandering about in search of water. We +could only go in a strong body and, even then, might lose a good +many lives from their arrows.</p> +<p>"Of course, we should be able to beat them off; but I should be +sorry to have to kill a lot of the poor little beggars. One can +hardly blame them for their hostility. Naturally, they want to have +the place to themselves, and are just as averse to our landing as +our forefathers were to Julius Caesar and his Romans.</p> +<p>"Of course they would be, if they only knew it, very much better +off by being civil. We have numbers of things that would be +invaluable to them. For instance, I would willingly give them a +dozen cooking pots, and as many frying pans, if they would let us +obtain water peaceably. I suppose that, at some time or other, +Malays landed here, and carried off a number of heads; or they may +have been shot down by some reckless ruffians of traders, and have +so come to view all strangers as deadly enemies. However, so far as +I have heard, there is no chance of their being friendly; and +native traders say that, of vessels that have been wrecked on the +coast, none of the crew ever escaped.</p> +<p>"By the way, I believe that fish are extremely plentiful here. +We have a good supply of fishing lines on board, for we generally +fish when we are at anchor."</p> +<p>"If you will let me have them, tomorrow," Harry said, "Abdool +and I will look after that. I hate having nothing to do and, +certainly, fish would be a very agreeable change, after such a long +spell of salt meat."</p> +<p>"You shall have them, the first thing in the morning."</p> +<p>Accordingly, the next day the lines were got out; and the Malay +interpreter, who knew a great deal more of fishing than did Harry +or Abdool, took the matter in hand. The hooks were baited with +pieces of meat, or shreds of white or scarlet bunting. The fish bit +eagerly, and all three were kept actively employed in drawing them +up, and rebaiting the hooks. They were of all sizes, from a quarter +of a pound to four or five pounds and, by dinner time, there were +enough to furnish an ample meal for all on board.</p> +<p>"I will keep three or four of the men at work, this afternoon," +Fairclough said, "and we will have night lines down. We can salt +down those we do not eat and, at any rate, we shall not be drawing +much on our stores."</p> +<p>By evening the new fore-top mast was in its place. As the +heaviest part of the work was now done, orders were given for a +boat's crew to start, in the morning, to cruise along the coast and +see if any stream ran into it. Mr. Eden was to be in command. The +crew were to be well armed, but were not to attempt to effect a +landing.</p> +<p>The sea had now calmed down, and the southwest monsoon was +blowing steadily.</p> +<p>"You had better go south. The land is much higher there, and +there is more likelihood of there being streams. I think you will +be able to lie your course or, at any rate, make a long leg and a +short one. You are to go, as nearly as you can tell, twenty miles. +If you do not meet with a stream by that time, turn back. You will +have the wind free, then, and can be back here well before sunset. +Of course, if you find fresh water, you will at once return.</p> +<p>"Would you like to go with the boat, Mr. Lindsay?"</p> +<p>"Very much. My hands are so sore, from hauling in the lines, +that I am afraid I shall not be able to help in the fishing, +tomorrow."</p> +<p>The party started early. It consisted of ten men, the coxswain, +the midshipmen, and Harry. The surf was no longer breaking on the +bar outside. There was a bright sea, with white-crested waves and, +before starting, the captain ordered a reef to be put in the +sails.</p> +<p>"She could carry full sail, well enough," he said to Harry, "but +there is no occasion for haste; and it is always best to be on the +safe side, especially when a middy is in command. Besides, it is +just as well to keep dry jackets."</p> +<p>A keg of water and a supply of food, sufficient for two days, +were placed on board.</p> +<p>"I expect you will be back by three o'clock in the afternoon, +Mr. Eden; but it is always well to provide against any +accident."</p> +<p>With the sheets hauled tight aft, the cutter was just able to +lie her course, outside the line of breakers. In a little over an +hour there was a break in the shore, and a stream of some forty +feet wide fell into the sea; and a general cheer broke from the +sailors, who had been put on allowance for the past week.</p> +<p>"Put her about, coxswain," the midshipman said; "we need go no +farther."</p> +<p>"Can't we land, and have a bathe, sir?" the coxswain asked.</p> +<p>"Certainly not. That is the very thing that we mus'n't do. For +anything we know, there may be natives about; and some of us might +get stuck full of their arrows before we could get out of range. +This will be good news, and there will be no longer any need for +your being kept on short allowance of water."</p> +<p>At ten o'clock the boat re-entered the inlet, and lowered sail +by the side of the brig.</p> +<p>"You have been successful, I suppose, by your coming back so +soon, Mr. Eden?" the captain said, when they were within easy +hail.</p> +<p>"Yes, sir. There is a small stream, about seven miles from +here."</p> +<p>"That is very satisfactory. Now you can come on board. There is +plenty of work for all hands."</p> +<p>Everyone, indeed, was busy in repairing damages. The carpenters +were engaged upon the bulwarks and the stern, which had been much +damaged by the wave that had lifted them over the bar. As there +were not sufficient planks on board for this work, canvas was +utilized for filling up the gaps in the bulwarks; and this, after +being nailed to temporary stanchions, was coated with pitch. All +hands worked cheerfully. The change of diet already benefited them, +and the news that there was plenty of fresh water near enabled the +remaining supply to be freely used--a matter of no slight +consequence, to men working in the broiling sun.</p> +<p>Two days later the work was finished and, on the following +morning, the anchors were weighed and the sails shaken out; and the +brig left the inlet that had saved them from destruction and, after +sailing out to sea a couple of miles, came about and laid her +course for the mouth of the stream.</p> +<p>The fishing had been continued, without intermission. Watches +had again been set, and the work of attending to the lines was very +welcome, as helping to pass away the four hours of darkness. By the +time they left the inlet, a sufficient quantity had been salted +down to last the ship's company for a week, without recourse to the +salt-meat casks.</p> +<p>The carpenter, with three or four assistants, had patched up the +second cutter--the boat that had been least injured. The others had +been broken up for firewood, some of the pieces being reserved for +the repairs of the cutter.</p> +<p>As soon as the brig reached the mouth of the stream she was +anchored, two hundred yards off the shore. The water barrels had +already been got up on deck, and some of these were lowered into +the first cutter, of which Mr. Hardy took the command. It was not +deemed advisable to employ the second boat in bringing water on +board as, if heavily laden, the water would force its way in +through the hastily-executed repairs. The captain, then, +accompanied by Harry and an armed crew, took his place in her; and +went ahead of the larger boat into the stream.</p> +<p>It was found to be but three or four feet deep, with a slow +current and, for some little distance up, was too brackish to be +used. It was not until they entered the line of forest that it was +found fresh enough. The men in the first cutter proceeded to fill +their casks, while those in the other boat laid in their oars and, +musket in hand, watched the forest. In a few minutes the work was +done, and the first cutter rowed straight for the brig; while the +second cutter followed her, for some distance beyond the trees, and +there waited for her return.</p> +<p>"So far, so good," Fairclough said; "but I am afraid that we +shall be disturbed, before we have made another trip. No doubt, +some of the natives followed the cutter along the shore, yesterday. +I don't suppose they recognized what your object was, as you did +not enter the stream; but when they saw the brig going the same way +this morning, I have no doubt that they set off in this direction. +However, with one more boat load we can manage, well enough, until +we reach the Hooghly for, with this wind, we shall make a quick +run."</p> +<p>In a quarter of an hour the cutter was seen returning and, when +it approached them, Fairclough again took the lead. All appeared +still in the forest, and the men had just begun to refill the +casks, when a shower of arrows fell among the boats.</p> +<p>"Let half your men go on with their work, Mr. Hardy, and the +others stand to their arms."</p> +<p>Not a single foe was visible, but the arrows still flew fast +from among the trees.</p> +<p>"Open fire!" Fairclough said. "Fire anywhere among the bushes. I +don't suppose that we shall hit them, but it may frighten them. +They can't know much about firearms."</p> +<p>From both boats a scattering fire of musketry at once opened, +the men loading and firing as quickly as they could. The effect was +immediate. Arrows still fell, but only occasionally; and evidently +shot at random, for but few of them came near the boats.</p> +<p>The men in the first cutter were working energetically, dipping +breakers into the water and emptying them into the large casks. In +three or four minutes these were filled, and Hardy hailed the +captain.</p> +<p>"We are full up, now, sir, both casks and breakers."</p> +<p>"Then retire at once, Mr. Hardy. We will follow you."</p> +<p>As they issued from under the trees, the arrows again fell +fast.</p> +<p>"Don't fire," the captain said; "perhaps they may issue out, and +then we will give them a lesson--that it is better not to interfere +with men who are doing them no harm."</p> +<p>This proved to be the case. No one had been hit by the fire from +the boats and, now that the shooting had ceased, the natives, with +shouts of triumph, ran out from the forest. There were some +hundreds of them.</p> +<p>The captain hailed the boat in front.</p> +<p>"Stop rowing, Mr. Hardy, and open fire on them.</p> +<p>"Now, lads," he went on, to his own crew, "fire steadily, and +don't throw away a shot."</p> +<a id="PicI" name="PicI"></a> +<center><img src="images/i.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: The rattle of musketry broke out again." /></center> +<p>As the rattle of musketry broke out again from both boats, many +of the natives dropped. The others stopped, at once. A shower of +arrows was discharged; and then, as the fire was kept up, they fled +back into the woods; and the men, again taking to their oars, rowed +out without further molestation to the brig. None of the crew had +been killed, but four were wounded by the arrows.</p> +<p>"I hope they are not poisoned," Fairclough said, in a low voice, +to Harry. "I don't know whether they use poison, on these islands; +but we must hope not. However, we will not frighten them by even +hinting at the possibility of such a thing."</p> +<p>Happily, however, no evil symptoms resulted. The wounds were, +for the most part slight and, the next day, all were able to return +to their duty. The fair weather now set in and, ten days later, the +brig dropped anchor in the river, opposite Calcutta.</p> +<p>Harry at once went ashore, and handed to the Governor a full +report of what had taken place.</p> +<p>"I have not time to read this rather bulky report of yours, at +present, Captain Lindsay," the latter said, with a smile. "Please +give me the pith of it, as shortly as possible."</p> +<p>"The island, sir, is well adapted for a trading station; and +would, I should think, when the forests are partly cleared away, be +a healthy one. I have interviewed the tumangong, who has signed a +document agreeing, at any time in the future that it may be +desired, to cede either a trading station or the whole island to +us. He was greatly pleased with the presents that you sent; and is, +I believe, thoroughly in earnest in his desire for a trading +station to be established so close to him. The Rajah of Johore has +ratified this agreement, and has given his cordial consent for the +cession of the island to us.</p> +<p>"It seems that he, himself, is an usurper. The rightful heir is +a boy of seven or eight years old, and I think it is possible that, +either at the present man's death, or possibly even before that, he +may ascend the throne. At present, he and his mother are in the +hands of the reigning rajah; but I have promised her that, if we +take possession of Singapore, she and her son can find an asylum +there, and a small pension for her maintenance; and she, on her +part, has promised that she will bring up her son to regard us as +his best friends; and that he, if he ascends the throne, shall also +ratify the treaty, and will become our warm ally.</p> +<p>"As to the Dutch, the reply of their Governor is with the +report, but certainly it is an unfavourable one; and no +cooperation, in the work of repressing piracy, can be expected from +them."</p> +<p>"I did not expect it, Captain Lindsay; and indeed, as I told you +at the time, only sent you to Batavia in order to account for the +presence of one of our ships of war in those waters.</p> +<p>"Well, sir, your mission has been, in all respects, most +satisfactory. I shall read your report, and give it full +consideration, at my leisure. For the present you will remain here, +available for any office, military or civil; but at present, at any +rate, you will retain your civil employment.</p> +<p>"I will not ask you to dine with me, today, as it is hardly +likely that I shall have time to read your report, this afternoon; +but I shall be glad if you will do so, tomorrow, and you can then +answer any questions that may suggest themselves to me."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch15" id="Ch15">Chapter 15</a>: Assaye.</h2> +<p>While the Deccan had been torn by civil war, the Government of +Bombay had extended their territory. The Nabob of Surat, who had +been under their protection, had died; and they had taken the +government of the province into their own hands. A civil war having +broken out, at Baroda, they had supported one of the rival princes; +and had, after a good deal of fighting, placed their candidate on +the throne--various districts being assigned to them, in return for +their assistance.</p> +<p>Holkar, on hearing of Bajee's arrival at Bassein, placed his +brother Amrud on the musnud, and commenced a series of atrocities, +in Poona, equal to that which it had suffered at the hands of +Ghatgay; respectable inhabitants being robbed and ill treated, many +tortured, and some killed, in order to wring from them the +treasures that they were supposed to have concealed.</p> +<p>During the months that followed his return to Calcutta, Harry +remained attached to the staff of the Marquis of Wellesley--for to +this title Lord Mornington had succeeded, during his absence, on +the death of his father--and was sent on various missions; among +others accompanying the Governor General's brother, the Honorable +Henry Wellesley, to the court of Oude. He could now speak +Hindustani, as well as Mahratti; and was very useful in acting as +an interpreter, and in aiding to carry on the negotiations.</p> +<p>In February, 1803, he was sent by the Governor General to join +the force that Major General Wellesley was preparing, in Mysore, to +aid Bajee Rao to recover his throne. The treaty that the latter had +concluded with the Government, on his arrival at Bassein, was a +most advantageous one to the English. In return for their +assistance, he agreed that a force of infantry, with guns and +European artillerymen, should be stationed within his territories; +their maintenance being paid by handing over to the Company a large +amount of territory. The two parties were to support each other in +case of war, and the Peishwa bound himself not to make aggressions +against other states, nor to negotiate with them without the +Governor's consent. The Peishwa agreed, also, to abandon the +Mahratta claims on Surat, and other districts that had been +occupied by the English.</p> +<p>On arriving at General Wellesley's camp, Harry reported himself +to that officer for service.</p> +<p>"I am very glad to have you with me, Captain Lindsay. I have +frequently heard my brother speak of your services, and your +perfect knowledge of Mahratti, and your acquaintance with its +people will be of great value to me.</p> +<p>"You know the Peishwa well. Do you think that he will be +faithful to the engagement that he has made with us?"</p> +<p>"Certainly not, sir. He has been intriguing, ever since he +ascended the musnud. His duplicity is only equalled by his +treachery and, as soon as he is restored, in Poona, he will again +begin his intrigues with Scindia and the other Mahratta +chiefs."</p> +<p>"That is the opinion that I have formed of him, from what I have +heard," the general said. "However, the terms of the treaty will +render him practically our servant; for we shall maintain a body of +troops near Poona, which will effectually prevent any scheme of his +from succeeding.</p> +<p>"What course Holkar will take, we cannot say; but the other +Mahratta chiefs have all entered into a confederacy against us, and +we shall have the forces of Scindia, of the Rajah of Bhopal, the +Rajah of Berar, and the Rajah of Kolapoore to deal with."</p> +<p>The partition of Mysore had, indeed, done much to unite the +Mahrattas together. The ever-increasing power of the British was a +serious source of alarm for, in addition to Mysore, Lord Wellesley +had, without a shadow of justification, obtained the control of Oude.</p> +<p>"I am sorry, sir, that the Rajah of Berar has declared against +us. I was nearly three months with him; and should, after the news +of the capture of Seringapatam, have fallen a victim to the fury of +the Mohammedans in the city, had he not taken me under his +protection. But at the same time, I have no doubt in my mind that +he was ready to join whichever side was victorious."</p> +<p>"You have, then, no good opinion of the Mahrattas, Captain +Lindsay?"</p> +<p>"I have met but one honest man among them. Nana Furnuwees was +not only an extraordinary man, but devoted his talents wholly to +the good of the state. His word could always be relied upon. His +life was simple, and his habits frugal. I honoured and esteemed +him, greatly."</p> +<p>"Yes, it was owing to you, as my brother told me, that he was +released from prison. I was greatly struck with the story, when I +heard it; because it showed how much can be accomplished, even by +the youngest officer who is active, and enterprising, and ready to +act on his own initiative. I saw a copy of Mr. Uhtoff's report of +the affair.</p> +<p>"Well, you will be attached to my staff, with no particular +duties, at present; but doubtless we shall find plenty for you to +do, when we once cross the frontier into the Mahratta country."</p> +<p>Harry found that, in addition to the eight thousand infantry and +seventeen hundred cavalry, under the command of General Wellesley, +the Nizam's force of eight thousand regular troops and fifteen +thousand irregulars were advancing towards the frontier, the whole +commanded by Colonel Stephenson. On the 25th of March these forces +advanced, and were joined by numerous small Mahratta chiefs in the +Peishwa's interest. General Wellesley's army advanced straight on +Poona, which was evacuated at once by Holkar's force and, as it was +stated that he intended to burn the town, before he retired, the +general hastened forward with his cavalry and, on the 20th of +April, took possession of the place. Colonel Stephenson, whose +cooperation was no longer required, moved north towards the +Godavery, to protect the country against the irruptions of +Holkar.</p> +<p>Four weeks later Bajee Rao arrived from the coast, and resumed +his seat on the musnud amid great rejoicings by the inhabitants; +who had suffered terribly, both at the hands of Ghatgay and +Holkar.</p> +<p>Scindia, having recovered from the effects of his defeat by +Holkar, had returned, crossed the Nerbudda, and encamped on the +Nizam's frontier. He was busy preparing for war, in conjunction +with the Rajah of Berar; and had even made overtures, to Holkar, to +join in opposing the English. Bajee Rao himself, as was afterwards +discovered, was also in friendly communication with Scindia.</p> +<p>The Resident at Scindia's court was ordered to leave it, unless +that prince retired from his position on the Nizam's frontier. +Scindia, when summoned, sent a defiant reply and, as it was now +evident that war was impending, General Wellesley was invested with +full powers; and Lord Lake, who commanded the army of Hindustan, +was ordered to advance to attack the formidable force of French +infantry, under Perron, and take possession of Delhi, Agra, and +other places held by the Mahrattas. Another attempt was made to +persuade Scindia to retire; but evasive answers were returned, and +it was not until the 3rd of August that the Resident quitted +Scindia, and Wellesley prepared to attack Ahmednuggur.</p> +<p>The possession of this place was of great importance, because it +was situated close to the Nizam's frontier, and afforded great +facilities for future operations. The town was surrounded by a +wall, flanked by towers; and was defended by a number of Arabs, and +a battalion of Scindia's regular infantry. These offered a vigorous +resistance for, after a breach had been made in the walls, and the +troops had entered, they retired; fighting from house to house, and +keeping up a heavy fire. However, by nightfall they were driven +inside their fort.</p> +<p>A battery of four guns was erected, within four hundred yards of +it; and these opened with such effect that the governor +surrendered, on being allowed to depart with the garrison and their +private property.</p> +<p>On the 24th, General Wellesley crossed the Godavery; Colonel +Stephenson moving in the direction of Aurungabad. Scindia and the +Rajah of Berar were now within forty miles of him; but they +suddenly turned off, as if intending to make a dash for Hyderabad, +where the Nizam had expired, three weeks before.</p> +<p>Wellesley followed close after them, and they then turned and +took up a position to the north of Julnapoor, a town lying east of +Aurungabad. On the 2nd of September, Julnapoor was captured by +Colonel Stephenson; who afterwards made a night attack upon +Scindia's camp, inflicting considerable loss.</p> +<p>On the 21st the whole Mahratta army, with sixteen battalions of +regular infantry, were encamped twenty-two miles north of Julnapoor +and, the next day, the army marched against them by two routes; +Colonel Stephenson taking the western road, and General Wellesley +the eastern.</p> +<p>The next afternoon, when about to halt, General Wellesley +learned that the Mahrattas were encamped about six miles from him, +on the banks of the Kaitna. He determined to attack them at once, +without waiting for Colonel Stephenson; for in another day they +would, in all probability, send off their infantry, and begin to +carry on a desultory warfare with their horse.</p> +<a id="Map1" name="Map1"></a> +<center><img src="images/1.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Plan of the Battle of Assaye." /></center> +<p>The general rode on, with his staff and an escort of cavalry, +and obtained a view of the Mahratta host from rising ground. They +were in the fork formed by the junction of the Kaitna with the +Juah. Their right consisted wholly of cavalry, and was protected by +the high and rocky bank of the stream; which was, at one or two +points, impassable for guns. Their left, consisting of the infantry +and artillery, was posted in the village of Assaye, which lay near +the fork of the river.</p> +<p>The general determined, at once, to attack at this point. The +force under his command consisted of four battalions of Sepoys, and +the 74th and 78th Regiments; with the 19th Dragoons, and three +regiments of native cavalry--in all, four thousand five hundred +men. Opposed to them were ten thousand five hundred disciplined +troops, taught and commanded by European officers; Scindia's +irregulars, and the infantry of the Rajah of Berar; with a +well-appointed train of artillery, of over a hundred guns, and some +forty thousand cavalry.</p> +<p>From the position in which the British force arrived they had to +march, for some distance, parallel with the river; and exposed to a +terrible artillery fire, which created such havoc, especially among +the bullocks drawing the guns, that the cavalry could not move +forward. The infantry therefore proceeded alone, crossed the Kaitna +by a ford; and then, swinging round, advanced against the village. +While they were crossing the river, the Mahratta cavalry were +brought up from their former position, and took post behind +Assaye.</p> +<p>The steadiness with which the little force advanced to the +attack, against so immense an army, had already had the effect of +shaking the Mahrattas. It seemed to them that their opponents must +be conscious that they were invincible. Pouring in a volley, the +first British line charged with the bayonet. The Mahratta infantry +at once wavered, and then gave way; and fell back on their second +line, posted near the Juah.</p> +<p>As the 74th Regiment passed through the village, a body of +Mahratta horse charged them; but they were met by the British +cavalry, who drove them, with great slaughter, into the river. The +second Mahratta line gave way, with scarcely any resistance; and +the British cavalry, pressing hotly after them, cut them up +terribly. The infantry followed, as quickly as possible.</p> +<p>But suddenly there was a roar of guns, behind them; and the +flying Mahrattas at once rallied, and faced their pursuers. As they +advanced, the force had captured the Mahrattas' guns; but numbers +of the artillerymen had thrown themselves down, lying as if dead. +As soon as they saw that the British line was still pressing +forward in pursuit, the artillerymen leapt to their feet and, +turning the guns, opened fire.</p> +<p>The general at once put himself at the head of the 71st Regiment +and the native cavalry and, after a desperate conflict, in which +the general had his horse shot under him, succeeded in recapturing +the guns. In the meantime, Colonel Maxwell with the cavalry had, +again and again, charged the fugitives who had rallied; and +succeeded in completely breaking them up, but was himself +killed.</p> +<p>The battle had lasted three hours. One thousand five hundred and +sixty-six of the British force were killed, or wounded, being +rather more than a third of the troops engaged. The enemy left +twelve hundred dead on the field of battle, and the country through +which they retreated was covered with their wounded. The camp, with +a number of bullocks, and a large quantity of military stores and +ninety-eight cannon, fell into the hands of the victors.</p> +<p>Scindia, in great alarm, sent an ambassador to the British camp +and, after various conferences, a truce was agreed upon between him +and the general; the conditions being that Scindia should not +approach within forty miles of his frontier, and that the British +should not enter his dominions.</p> +<p>On the day after the battle of Assaye, the general sent for +Harry.</p> +<p>"Captain Lindsay, I have a mission which you can carry out +better than any of my other officers. I wish you to make your way +across the country, to inform General Lake of the victory we have +won; and to point out that, at present, Scindia is paralysed, and +will be unable to send troops to aid his force in the northwest +for, should he do so, I shall at once enter his territory.</p> +<p>"Do not run the risk of returning, but tell Lord Lake that my +orders are that you shall remain with him. I do not think that we +shall have much fighting here though, no doubt, later on, Holkar +and the Rajah of Berar will reform their armies and try conclusions +with us again; while, on the other side, there is likely to be +heavy fighting. You must, of course, travel in disguise, but you +are already accustomed to that."</p> +<p>"I will willingly undertake the mission, sir."</p> +<p>"Would you like to take anyone with you?"</p> +<p>"I should be glad if you will give me four troopers, from one of +your native cavalry regiments. I shall, of course, ride as a petty +chief, but I might be interrupted in small villages, were I alone +with only my servant; whereas, if I had four followers, it would +appear natural to them, as even the pettiest leader is always +accompanied by a party, however small, of horsemen."</p> +<p>"Certainly. I will give orders to the colonel of the 1st Cavalry +to choose four well-mounted men, who can speak Mahratti. There are +many such in his regiment."</p> +<p>There was no difficulty about disguises, for a large quantity of +native clothing had been found in the camp. Harry chose a dress +suitable for a native in command of some fifty or sixty men; and +the four troopers attired themselves in the garments of native +soldiers, which indeed differed in no way from those worn by the +peasantry. Harry had packed his uniform in his native saddlebag; +and also his cocked hat, after taking out the stiffening so that it +would lie flat; and had exchanged his own saddle for that of one of +Holkar's horsemen. He advised the men to do the same so that, when +they joined Lord Lake, they would be able at once to appear in +uniform. There was an abundance of native swords and spears lying +where the Mahratta force had been defeated.</p> +<p>Abdool had at once been sent into the village, and had there +succeeded in buying some brown dye, used in colouring the clothes; +and with this Harry stained his face and hands and, two hours after +receiving the order, rode out from camp, followed by Abdool and the +four troopers.</p> +<p>He considered that there was but little danger in the journey +as, for the greater portion of the distance, he would ride through +the dominions of the young Nizam. He would, however, have to pass +through the territory of the Rajah of Berar; beyond this, he would +enter the country in which the British were already supreme. While +in the Nizam's dominions, he experienced no difficulties; the news +of the victory of Assaye had already spread, and the inhabitants +were relieved of the fears they had been entertaining of a great +raid, by Holkar. The passage, therefore, of a petty chief with four +followers was regarded with indifference; and indeed, he was +generally supposed to be one of the Nizam's irregular cavalry, on +his way with some message to Hyderabad.</p> +<p>Still less attention was paid to him in the villages of Berar. +Many bodies of the rajah's troops had already passed through, on +their way to Nagpore, and they were naturally taken to be some of +the fugitives.</p> +<p>They travelled as rapidly as possible. The horses were all +inured to long journeys, and they had made from fifty to sixty +miles a day. They halted at a village, twenty miles east of +Nagpore. Nothing unusual had happened, and Harry had just lain down +to sleep, when there was a sound as of people gathering in front of +his hut.</p> +<p>He was about to rise, to see what was going on; when the door +was opened, and a number of armed villagers at once poured into the +room, and he was seized before he had time to leap to his feet. He +made no attempt at resistance but, believing that some mistake had +been committed, he angrily demanded the reason of this assault.</p> +<p>He was dragged out into the street. As this happened he heard +pistol shots and, a moment later, the four troopers rode up.</p> +<p>One of them had remained at the door of the hut, while the +others had lain down. Seeing a number of people moving about, he +had roused his companions. They had got out of the window at the +back of the hut. Here their horses had been picketed and, mounting +at once, they rode out, just as a body of men made a rush at the +door of their hut. By the use of their pistols and swords they had +broken through these and, seeing the crowd in front of the hut that +Harry had occupied, they charged without hesitation.</p> +<p>The villagers, unprepared for such an attack, fell back; losing +their hold of Harry, and Abdool, whom they had also captured. The +latter darted away and, in a few seconds, returned leading the two +horses.</p> +<p>"Shall we set the houses alight, before we start, sahib?" one of +the troopers asked.</p> +<p>"No; they may rally in a minute or two, and the sooner we are +out of it, the better."</p> +<p>He turned and started at once and, as he did so, a dropping fire +from matchlocks and guns was opened upon them. The villagers' arms +were, however, wholly untrustworthy, and the powder bad. One of the +troopers was hit in the arm but, with that exception, they rode out +unharmed.</p> +<p>"What does it all mean, Abdool?" Harry asked as, after riding +fast for a quarter of a mile, they broke into a slower pace. "Of +course, they must in some way have recognized me, for I heard some +of them saying, 'Death to the English infidel!'"</p> +<p>"It was through me that they recognized you, sahib," Abdool +said. "They seized me before they entered your hut, and tied a +bandage round my mouth, to prevent my giving any alarm. As they +took me out into the road, one of them said:</p> +<p>"'Son of Sheitan, I knew you directly I saw you. You were with +that English officer, in Nagpore. Then, when I looked at the head +of your party I saw that, though he had changed his dress, and +stained his face to the colour of ours, it was the same man who +came as an envoy to our rajah, and whose house we attacked.</p> +<p>"'We shall hear what the rajah says to him when we take him to +Nagpore.'"</p> +<p>"I understand now, Abdool. I have thought of my own disguise, +and that of the troopers; but as you always, except when riding +behind me, dress in your native clothes, it seemed to me a matter +of course that you would pass without difficulty; and it never +occurred to me that you must, during our three months' stay at +Nagpore, have become known by sight to most of the people there. It +is a bad blunder, and it will be a lesson to me, in future."</p> +<p>Then he turned, and spoke to the troopers.</p> +<p>"You have done well, indeed, tonight," he said, "and I owe it to +you that I have escaped, if not death, an imprisonment of months. +If I had been taken to Nagpore, and handed over to the rajah, he +would doubtless have imprisoned me; but would not have ventured to +take my life, for he would have known that the part that he had +taken against us would be more readily forgiven, than the murder of +a British officer. But I do not think I should have reached the +palace. Furious as the people must be at their crushing defeat at +Assaye, they would have torn me to pieces, the moment they heard +from my captors that I was an Englishman; therefore I feel that you +have saved my life.</p> +<p>"How was it that you were not also surprised?"</p> +<p>When he heard how the alarm had been given, and how they had at +once mounted and ridden out, just as a party were about to enter +the hut, he said:</p> +<p>"It was well done, and shows that you are quick fellows, as well +as brave. I shall report your conduct when we join the army, and +shall myself give you a batta of six months' pay.</p> +<p>"Now, we will ride on for a few miles, and then leave the road +and take shelter, till morning, in a wood. The horses have had five +hours' rest at the village, and there will be time for them to have +as much more, before we mount again.</p> +<p>"It is lucky that you bought some grain for them, this evening, +instead of waiting till the morning, so they can have a good feed +before starting."</p> +<p>Henceforth they avoided the villages as much as possible, and +passed unquestioned until they reached the Hustoo river which, at +this point, formed the eastern boundary of Berar. They swam the +horses across and, after stopping for a few hours at Dundava, rode +on; and continued their journey due north, and crossed the Sone +river at Maunpoor, having accomplished a journey of nearly a +thousand miles in twenty days.</p> +<p>On arriving there Harry found that General Lake had left, six +weeks before, and had encamped at Secundara where, on the 26th of +August, despatches had been received from the Governor General, +authorizing active operations against Scindia and his allies; and +two days later the force halted on the Mahratta frontier, within +sight of the mosque at Coel, where Perron was encamped.</p> +<p>Perron, a French officer in Scindia's service, commanded no less +than forty-three thousand men, and four hundred and sixty-four +guns. About half of these were with Scindia in the Deccan, and the +force encamped at Coel numbered about twenty thousand.</p> +<p>Perron, an active and ambitious man, had assumed an almost +independent position. A large grant of territory had been given him +by Scindia, and in this he ruled with absolute authority and, had +it not been for the interposition of the British, it is probable +that he would, ere long, have assumed the position of an +independent prince. Indeed, his army of partially disciplined men +was more than a match for the whole force of Scindia.</p> +<p>At a short distance from Coel was the fortress of Alighur, which +was considered to be almost impregnable. It was defended by a +triple line of walls and fortifications, so that an enemy entering +it would have to advance by a devious route from one gate to +another, exposed all the time to a terrible artillery fire. It was +almost surrounded by a swamp, and the only approach was along a +narrow strip of firm ground, leading to the gate.</p> +<p>Early on the morning of the 29th, the British troops advanced to +attack Perron's force; but it at once drew off, although the +infantry were supported by twenty thousand horse. Believing that +Alighur was impregnable, Perron left a strong force there under one +of his officers, named Pedron, and marched with his army towards +Agra.</p> +<p>On the 4th of September a storming party, commanded by Colonel +Monson, left the British camp; and was accompanied by two +batteries, each consisting of four eighteen-pounders. A portion of +the defenders was posted on the strip of dry ground, outside the +gate, where a battery with three guns had been mounted. Before +daybreak, Colonel Monson moved forward, with two companies of the +76th Regiment. The enemy took the alarm before he reached their +battery, and fled towards the gate, without waiting to discharge +their guns.</p> +<p>Monson pressed after them, in the hope of being able to enter +before the gate was shut; but he was too late. The entrance was +raked by the guns on the walls, which opened with a destructive +fire of grape. Ladders were applied to the walls, but these were +manned by so strong a body of pikemen that it was found impossible +to gain a footing. So bold were the defenders that, as the soldiers +fell back, they ran down the ladders and pursued them hotly; but +were soon beaten off.</p> +<p>A six pounder was brought up to burst open the gate, but its +fire did but little damage; and a twelve pounder was then employed. +The gates yielded, and the storming party rushed in. But during the +twenty minutes that had elapsed, between the guns opening fire and +the time at which the gate yielded, the troops had been exposed to +a terrible fire, both of grape and musketry. Colonel Monson was +wounded, and the loss was heavy.</p> +<p>The second gate was forced with comparatively little difficulty, +although a terrible fire of artillery and musketry was kept up, +from the walls on either side of the road, and from the bastion +commanding it. The assailants pressed so hotly, upon the defenders +of the second gate, that they gained the third before the enemy had +time to close it.</p> +<p>But another and stronger gate had still to be passed, and here a +desperate stand was made. The troops were obliged to take shelter, +close to the wall, until the twelve pounder was brought up. It was +of little avail, for the artillerymen were shot down as soon as +they endeavoured to work it. At length, two or three officers +gathered a party, and made a rush at the wicket gate. Half a dozen +muskets were discharged, together, at the lock; and the gate at +once gave way.</p> +<p>The whole party rushed forward into the interior of the +fortress, gained the ramparts, and opened fire on the enemy, who in +vain attempted to drive out the force gathered near the gate; and +Pedron, finding further resistance impossible, surrendered.</p> +<p>The loss of the victors, in killed and wounded, amounted to two +hundred and twenty-three; while that of the garrison, in killed +alone, exceeded two thousand. An enormous quantity of military +stores was found here, the French having made it their chief depot. +The number of guns captured was two hundred and eighty-one.</p> +<p>On the 7th of September, the army marched for Delhi. On the way, +General Lake received a letter from Monsieur Perron, saying that he +had quitted the service of Scindia, and requesting a free passage +to Lucknow. The easy capture of a fortress that he and his +engineers had rendered, as they believed, impregnable, and the loss +of all his military stores, sufficed to show him that he could not +hope to withstand the progress of the British; and that it was +better for him to resign, at once, than to continue a hopeless +struggle, especially as the loss of Alighur would excite the fury +of Scindia, and possibly lead to his arrest and execution. He had, +indeed, received information that he had already lost Scindia's +confidence; and that intrigues were being carried on, with some of +his officers, to deprive him of his jagheer and command.</p> +<p>His request was therefore granted and, escorted by a party of +his own bodyguard, and by some British dragoons, he proceeded to +Lucknow and, afterwards, settled in the neighbourhood of +Chandernagore.</p> +<p>The capture of Alighur had indeed made a tremendous impression +upon the native mind and, as the army advanced, several fortresses +that might have made a long defence were abandoned.</p> +<p>On the 11th, General Lake's army encamped within six miles of +Delhi; but the tents were but just pitched when intelligence was +received that a large force of the enemy was in position, two miles +distant. It consisted of sixteen battalions of regular infantry, +six thousand cavalry, and a large train of artillery; commanded by +Monsieur Bourquieu, Perron's second in command.</p> +<p>General Lake at once, with the whole of his cavalry, +reconnoitred the position that the enemy had taken up. It was two +miles from the camp, and consisted of a low hill, covered by broken +ground on each flank. Seeing that the enemy could only be attacked +in front, General Lake ordered the infantry and artillery to come +up.</p> +<p>While waiting for their arrival, the cavalry suffered some loss +from the enemy's artillery fire. The general, seeing that it was +doubtful whether an attack on so strong a position would be +successful, determined to attempt to draw the enemy from it. The +cavalry advanced a short distance and then, as the fire upon them +redoubled, they were ordered to fall back. Their line had hidden +the approach of the infantry from the enemy; and the latter, +believing that the cavalry were retreating, left their +entrenchments and started in pursuit, with shouts of victory. The +cavalry opened right and left, and the enemy found themselves face +to face with a steady line of infantry; who at once advanced, the +general himself leading them, at the head of the 76th Regiment.</p> +<p>A tremendous fire was opened upon them by the Mahratta guns but, +when within a hundred paces of the enemy, the whole line fired a +volley, and then charged with the bayonet. The enemy did not stand +for a moment but, seized by a panic, fled in all directions, +pursued by the cavalry and the horse artillery battery. These +followed them as far as the banks of the Jumna, and great numbers +of the enemy lost their lives in endeavouring to cross the +river.</p> +<p>The British loss, in killed and wounded, was nearly six hundred +men; while that of the enemy was estimated at two thousand. +Sixty-eight pieces of cannon, two waggons laden with treasure, and +thirty-seven with ammunition fell into the hands of the victors +who, on the 14th, crossed the Jumna, and took possession of the +city without opposition; being welcomed enthusiastically by the +population, who had long groaned under the terrible oppression of +their Mahratta masters.</p> +<p>Two days later, General Lake paid a visit to the unfortunate +emperor, who was now eighty-three years old. He had been blinded by +his brutal conquerors, and lived in a state of misery, and poverty, +greater than that of any of the tillers of the fields of the wide +empire over which he had once ruled. He lived for another three +years, and was succeeded by his son, Mirza Akbar.</p> +<p>Leaving a force at Delhi, General Lake marched southward, as the +strong town of Agra was still in the possession of Scindia's +troops. He arrived before the city on the 4th of October and, in +three days, had cut off their communication with the surrounding +country; his cavalry being assisted by five thousand horse, sent by +the Rajah of Bhurtpoor, who had, as soon as he heard of the fall of +Alighur, hastened to enter into an alliance with the British.</p> +<p>The garrison was strong, and seven battalions of Scindia's +regular infantry were encamped on the glacis, and held possession +of the town. The garrison, however, refused to admit them into the +fort; as they had determined to share, among themselves, the large +amount of treasure deposited there.</p> +<p>Inside the fort great confusion prevailed. The troops had been +commanded by English officers, in Scindia's service, and these had +been imprisoned as soon as the war broke out. No answer was, +therefore, made to the summons to surrender.</p> +<p>On the morning of the 10th, Scindia's infantry were attacked. +They fought stoutly, but were finally defeated, and their +twenty-six brass guns captured. Two days later, two thousand five +hundred of them, who had retired when defeated, and taken shelter +under the guns of the fort, came over in a body and took service +with the British.</p> +<p>Siege operations were at once commenced and, on the 17th, a +battery of eight eighteen-pounders opened fire, with such effect +that a breach was almost effected; when the garrison released the +British officers, and sent them to the camp to offer to surrender. +They were allowed to do so, and to leave the fort with their +clothes, but without arms. Six thousand then marched out under +these conditions.</p> +<p>One hundred and sixty-four pieces of cannon, with a vast +quantity of ammunition and stores, were found in the fort; together +with twenty-two lakhs of rupees, which were divided among the +captors.</p> +<p>On the 20th, Harry, with his little party, joined the army. He +and his troopers had, at Benares, resumed their uniform. He at once +waited on General Lake, and handed him the despatch in which +General Wellesley had described the victory at Assaye.</p> +<p>"This is great news, indeed, sir," the general said, "but I +cannot understand how you have brought it here so speedily."</p> +<p>"I rode in disguise through Berar, sir, and of course the +troopers were also disguised. Except that I was attacked in one +village--where I was recognized by a peasant who had seen me, when +I was staying as the Governor General's envoy at Nagpore, before +the capture of Seringapatam--I got through without difficulty."</p> +<p>"Yes; I heard from the Marquis of Wellesley that the rajah had +been kept from declaring against us, by a young officer of great +ability, whom he had sent to Nagpore for the purpose, and who +narrowly escaped assassination there when the news of the fall of +Seringapatam was received. I think he said that you had a perfect +knowledge of Mahratti, and also of Hindustani; and that he had sent +you to accompany his brother, General Wellesley.</p> +<p>"Well, the news of Assaye is welcome, indeed, and Scindia will +be very chary of weakening his army in the Deccan by sending +reinforcements in this direction.</p> +<p>"I see, sir, that General Wellesley has begged me to temporarily +place you on my staff as, in the present troubled state of the +country, it would be dangerous to endeavour to make your way back +to him. Of course, I will gladly do so, for your knowledge of the +languages will be very useful to me, for none of my staff can speak +either of them well."</p> +<p>General Lake sent for the head of his staff, introduced Harry to +him, and informed him of the news that he had brought; and then +ordered a general salute to be fired, by all the available guns in +the fort and artillery batteries. It was not long before the roar +of cannon began, telling the army that a splendid victory had been +won in the west; and a short time later notices were affixed to the +gates of the forts, and other public places, relating how General +Wellesley, with but four thousand five hundred men, had routed the +army of Holkar and the Rajah of Berar--amounting in all to over +fifty thousand, of whom ten thousand five hundred were disciplined +troops, commanded by Frenchmen. The news excited the utmost +enthusiasm among the troops, as the disproportion of numbers was +far greater than it had been at the battle of Delhi.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch16" id="Ch16">Chapter 16</a>: A Disastrous +Retreat.</h2> +<p>A few days later, the news was received that seven of Scindia's +regular battalions had just arrived, from the Deccan, under the +command of a French officer; and had been joined by five others, +the whole amounting to nine thousand well-trained infantry, with +five thousand cavalry and seventy-five guns. As it was understood +that they were intending the recapture of Delhi, General Lake +marched against them on the 27th of October and, pressing forward +with all speed, came up with them on the morning of the 1st of +November. They at once retreated; and General Lake, whose infantry +was still some distance in the rear, determined to attack them, at +once. As they retired, the enemy cut the bank of a large tank and +flooded the ground, thereby impeding the advance of the cavalry, +and giving time to Scindia's men to take up a strong position +between the villages of Laswaree and Mohaulpore.</p> +<a id="Map2" name="Map2"></a> +<center><img src="images/2.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Plan of the Battle of Laswaree." /></center> +<p>Their right was protected by a deep ravine; their rear by a +rivulet; their front was lined with their seventy-five guns, +chained together so as to protect the artillerymen from a charge of +horse. The ground in front of them was covered with deep grass, +which partially concealed their disposition.</p> +<p>The three brigades of cavalry charged boldly up, but were +received with a terrible fire, and fell back with much loss and, +seeing the impossibility of carrying the enemy's position without +infantry, General Lake deferred making another attack until they +came up. As soon as these and the artillery reached the spot, he +prepared for an assault.</p> +<p>The Mahrattas had, in the meantime, changed their position; and +drawn up one line in front and one in rear of the village of +Mohaulpore. The French officer who had been in command of their +army had, two days before, left their camp and ridden to meet +General Lake's army; and had there surrendered, and a Mahratta +officer had succeeded him in command. Shaken by the repeated +successes of the British, he now offered to surrender his guns. An +hour was given him to do so but, as no movement was made at the end +of that time, orders were given for the advance.</p> +<p>The infantry consisted of the 76th Regiment and six battalions +of Sepoys. One of the three brigades of cavalry was directed to +support them; another was sent to the right to watch the enemy, and +to take advantage of any confusion that might appear among them; +the third brigade formed the reserve. The four batteries of +artillery were to support the attack. General Lake's plan was to +turn the enemy's right flank, and he moved off his infantry along +the bank of a rivulet which ran round near the right angle of the +enemy's new position. The high grass, for a time, concealed the +movement but, as soon as the Mahrattas perceived it they threw back +their right flank, and opened a tremendous fire upon the +village.</p> +<p>The British artillery now opened, but the enemy's cannon were +far superior in number, and were well served; and the ranks of the +76th, who were in front of the advance, were terribly thinned. The +general was with them and, as soon as a battalion and a half of +Sepoys had come up, led them against the enemy's position.</p> +<p>The latter now opened with canister and, the ground being of a +broken character, the formation of the assailants' line was to some +extent disordered and the Mahratta cavalry charged. They were +repulsed by heavy volleys from the infantry, but they rallied and, +being reinforced, were about to resume the attack, when the general +ordered the 29th Dragoons to charge. They burst through both lines +of the enemy's infantry, wheeled round and charged the cavalry, and +drove them from the field; and then turning again, fell on the rear +of the second line, which was now hotly engaged with the British +infantry who, following the Dragoons at the double, had rushed +forward on the guns, captured them, and driven the first line back +on the second.</p> +<p>The rest of the British infantry had now come up; but Perron's +regular infantry, who were all drawn from hill districts, and had +been victorious in many a fight, resisted to the last. Two thousand +were surrounded and made prisoners, but the rest all fought until +they fell.</p> +<p>The victory of Laswaree cost the British eight hundred and +twenty-four men, killed and wounded; but it completed the overthrow +of the whole of the regiments trained by Perron and de Boigne, and +laid the tract of country watered by the Jumna under the power of +the British.</p> +<p>Harry, who had accompanied the general, having carried the order +to the Dragoons to charge, rode with them and came unhurt out of +the desperate fight.</p> +<p>A few days later the army quitted Laswaree and moved towards +Agra, resting for a fortnight at Besawur. The great successes +gained by both the British armies had had their effect, and a +number of rajahs came in to make a treaty of alliance. General +Lake's force, after a short rest, then marched southward, and took +up a position at Biana.</p> +<p>While these events had been going on, a detachment from the army +had entered Bundelcund. This had been under the control of the +Peishwa but, by an agreement made with him in August, it was ceded +to the Company; he receiving, in exchange, grants in the southern +Mahratta country, and near Surat. He sent orders to this effect to +his officers.</p> +<p>Shamsheer, a descendant of the first Peishwa, refused to obey +him; and the British force entered Bundelcund and, being joined by +a powerful chief--with eight thousand irregular infantry, four +thousand horse, and three regular battalions of infantry, commanded +by a European officer--captured several strongholds. Shamsheer then +treated for peace but, after having delayed the advance for two +months, finally broke off negotiations, suddenly; and the British +at once laid siege to Calpee, which capitulated on the 4th of +December. Finding himself unable to resist the farther advance of +the British, Shamsheer then surrendered.</p> +<p>In October, Ambajee Inglia, who had acted as Scindia's +representative and held, under him, extensive territories, had +offered to renounce his dependence on Scindia, and become a +tributary of the British. Negotiations were, as usual, spun out to +a great length; but a treaty was concluded with him, on the 16th of +December, by which he agreed to surrender Gwalior and the lands to +the north of it, and to remain as an independent sovereign of the +other territories in his possession.</p> +<p>A corps, under Colonel White, was sent to take possession of the +fortress. The commandant refused to recognize the arrangement but, +upon batteries being erected, a breach was soon effected, and the +garrison surrendered.</p> +<p>The news came that Scindia had broken his treaty, and had been +defeated with great slaughter by General Wellesley, who afterwards +besieged the strong fortress of Gawilghur. Guns were brought up, +with great difficulty, over thirty miles of mountains and ravines. +They opened fire on the 13th of December and, as soon as a breach +was practicable, the place was carried by storm, and a large +quantity of guns and ammunition fell into the hands of the +British.</p> +<p>The Rajah of Berar, terrified at the defeat of Scindia, now sent +to ask for peace, and ceded the district of Cuttack; thereby +placing the whole of the maritime provinces, between Madras and +Calcutta, in the hands of the British. Scindia, finding himself +forsaken by his ally, also made peace, surrendering a considerable +portion of his territories.</p> +<p>1804 opened quietly, but peace was not long maintained. Holkar +had, after his expulsion from Poona, made peace with Scindia and, +when hostilities commenced, had waited to see the result before +committing himself. At first he viewed with satisfaction the +misfortunes that had befallen Scindia and the Rajah of Berar but, +when he saw that they were threatened with annihilation, he +prepared to aid them. He had, however, delayed too long and, when +Scindia and the Rajah of Berar had been obliged to crave for peace, +he kept his army on the frontier of the Rajah of Jaipore, now a +British ally.</p> +<p>General Lake addressed a letter to him, saying that the British +Government were willing to leave him unmolested; but requiring, as +a pledge of his good intentions, that he should withdraw into his +own territory. Holkar sent back a long list of demands, which were +impossible to satisfy; and also addressed a letter to General--now +Sir Arthur--Wellesley, threatening to overrun the whole country, +unless some of the districts in the Deccan were ceded to him and, +after sending off this letter, he began raiding the territory of +Jaipore. Colonel Murray was therefore sent to aid the rajah, and to +march in the direction of Holkar's capital; while Lord Lake marched +westward, until he neared Jaipore.</p> +<p>On the 15th of May a detachment captured the strong fort of +Rampoora, the sole fortress which Holkar possessed north of the +Chumbul river; and Holkar immediately fell back. The heat being now +intense, the general left Colonel Monson, with five battalions of +Sepoys and three thousand irregular horse, sent by Rajpoot allies, +and returned to Agra, losing numbers of his men on the march, by +sunstroke.</p> +<p>Harry had been left with Colonel Monson. The latter, intending +to cooperate with Colonel Murray, entered Holkar's territory and, +on the way, captured a strong hill fort. He afterwards advanced +fifty miles beyond the range of mountains that formed the +frontier.</p> +<p>On the 7th of July he heard that Holkar was advancing, with his +whole army, to meet him. Monson's force was much weakened by the +absence of two detachments, one of which had garrisoned the hill +fort that had been captured, and another had gone to fetch a supply +of grain. Almost at the same time he heard a report that Colonel +Murray intended to fall back.</p> +<p>After consulting with Harry, who, as one of Lord Lake's staff, +was considered as his special representative, it was agreed that it +would be madness, with so small a force, to give battle to Holkar +and, at four in the morning on the following day, Monson sent off +his baggage and stores; and remained, with his troops drawn up in +order of battle, until nine o'clock; leaving the irregular cavalry, +under Lieutenant Lucan, to follow in half an hour, and bring him +intelligence of Holkar's movements.</p> +<p>Monson marched twelve miles when a trooper of the irregular +cavalry overtook him, with the news that they had been completely +defeated by Holkar's army, and that Lucan had been made prisoner. +The retreat was continued, and the force reached the pass across +the mountains on the evening of the following day, and took up a +position there. Holkar's cavalry appeared next morning and, on the +11th, Holkar himself arrived and sent in a demand for the surrender +of the cannon and muskets. This was refused, and Holkar, dividing +his horse into three bodies, charged the detachment vigorously in +front and both flanks; but the defenders again and again repulsed +the attack. Holkar then drew off about four miles, and was joined +by the artillery and infantry.</p> +<p>"What is your opinion, Captain Lindsay?" Colonel Monson +said.</p> +<p>"If we had a regiment of British infantry with us, sir, I should +say that we might attack them, with success; but with only four +battalions of Sepoys, it seems to me that a retreat would be the +better choice of two evils. We shall undoubtedly suffer heavily. +The rain is pouring down unceasingly, and I doubt whether we shall +be able to get the guns along; but we ought to be able to march as +fast as Holkar's infantry and, as to his cavalry, we can certainly +beat them off."</p> +<p>Two long marches were made. The enemy's cavalry swarmed round +them, but dared not attack; and the force arrived safely at Kotah, +where they expected to find food and shelter. The rajah, however, +closed the gates and refused to admit them; and the force pressed +on towards a ford on the Chumbul. The distance was only seven miles +but, from the incessant rain and the state of the road, a whole day +was spent in accomplishing it.</p> +<p>The ford was impassable, but during the night it subsided a +little, and they were able to cross. A day's halt was necessary, in +order to procure some grain; and on the 15th, when the march was +continued, the guns sank so deep in the mud that they could not be +extricated, and they were therefore spiked and abandoned.</p> +<p>Two days later the force reached another river, but it was so +swollen that it was unfordable. The artillerymen were sent across, +on elephants; but ten days were spent in carrying the rest of the +troops over, partly on elephants and partly on rafts. Terrible +privation was suffered, and many men were drowned in crossing; +while the wives and children of the Sepoys who, by some gross +mismanagement, were left to the last, were slaughtered by the enemy +under the eyes of their husbands and fathers.</p> +<p>On the 29th the corps reached Rampoora; where a reinforcement of +two battalions of Sepoys, six guns, and a body of cavalry, together +with a supply of grain forwarded by Lord Lake from Agra, awaited +them. Notwithstanding this reinforcement, Colonel Monson considered +it his duty to continue his retreat and, on the 22nd of August, +reached the Banass, which was also in flood. Some boats, however, +were found, and a portion of the troops were carried across.</p> +<p>Early the next morning Holkar's cavalry appeared, and encamped +at a distance of four miles. The next day the river was fordable, +and most of the baggage and four battalions crossed. The enemy's +cavalry also crossed in great numbers, both to the right and left +of the British position.</p> +<p>Their artillery and infantry arrived in the afternoon, and +opened fire on the battalions still left on the bank. Harry was +with these. Seeing that they were being decimated by the guns, he +called upon the Sepoys to charge. This they did with great spirit, +drove back the enemy, and captured some of the guns; but the +Mahrattas soon rallied and, led by Holkar himself, charged in such +overwhelming numbers that the handful of troops was nearly +annihilated. Harry, seeing that all was lost, cut his way through +the enemy's horse and succeeded in crossing the river.</p> +<a id="PicJ" name="PicJ"></a> +<center><img src="images/j.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Harry succeeded in crossing the river." /></center> +<p>Colonel Monson continued his retreat, and reached Kooshalpur on +the night of the 25th. He found that the native officer in command +there had declared for Holkar; but that the fort, which contained +the elephants and baggage, still held out. That evening Monson +learnt that some of his Sepoy officers were in communication with +Holkar; and two companies, and a large portion of the native +cavalry deserted.</p> +<p>The whole of the enemy's cavalry now encamped round the +detachment. At seven in the evening Colonel Monson continued his +march, forming his troops into an oblong, which the enemy in vain +attempted to break. On the night of the 27th, after halting for a +few hours, he moved again, at one in the morning; but had no sooner +cleared the broken ground than the enemy's cavalry made a desperate +charge. This was repulsed with great coolness, the Sepoys reserving +their fire till the enemy were within bayonet reach.</p> +<p>At sunset the troops, worn out by fatigue and hunger, arrived at +the Biana pass; but the enemy brought up their guns, and the +retreat was continued. The confusion in the ranks, which had been +increasing all day, now extended; and the troops broke and fled to +Agra, pursued by straggling parties of the enemy for the greater +portion of the distance.</p> +<p>In consequence of this disastrous affair, it was decided that +Lord Lake should immediately take the field; although the wet +weather still continued, and a large tract of country was under +water. Four weeks after the arrival of Monson, with his fugitives, +the army marched out of their cantonment, and encamped on the right +bank of the river.</p> +<p>The situation was critical. Holkar's army numbered ninety-two +thousand men, of whom sixty-six thousand were cavalry, and he had +with him ninety-two cannon. He had advanced to Muttra, which had +been abandoned at his approach.</p> +<p>Lord Lake sent for Harry.</p> +<p>"I have another dangerous mission for you, Captain Lindsay. I +consider it more than possible that Holkar will make an attempt to +recapture Delhi. Colonel Ochterlony, in command there, must be +warned of the probability of an attack. He may be in ignorance of +what is passing here. You will bear this despatch, urging on him to +do all that he can to place the town in a state of defence, and to +summon to his assistance as many irregulars as possible from the +neighbouring chiefs. The distance is a hundred and twenty miles. I +leave it to you whether to go in uniform, or in disguise."</p> +<p>"I think, sir, that I had better disguise myself as, doubtless, +Holkar's cavalry are spread all over the country intent on +plundering and, should I fall in with them, I ought to have no +difficulty in passing myself off as one of themselves. I will leave +my uniform here, to be brought on with the baggage. They might take +it into their heads to search my saddlebags."</p> +<p>"I think that would be the wisest plan," the general said. "You +will, of course, remain at Delhi till reinforcements arrive there. +The despatches will be ready for you, in an hour's time."</p> +<p>There was no difficulty in obtaining dye at Agra, and Harry +stained himself from head to foot, put on the disguise in which he +had ridden with the news of Assaye and, after receiving the +despatch, started at once. The direct road lay through Muttra but, +as Holkar's main body was at this town, he rode to the northeast as +far as Secundara. There was no occasion for any great haste, for it +was certain that some little time must elapse before Holkar could +march from Muttra; and he accordingly stopped for the night at +Coringunga, having ridden about fifty miles. He speedily secured a +room, and Abdool at once set to, to prepare a meal. While it was +being cooked, there was a sound of a body of horse entering the +village.</p> +<p>"It is unfortunate that we have stopped here, Abdool," he said. +"We are sure to be questioned."</p> +<p>Ten minutes later the door opened, and an officer of Holkar's +irregular horse entered.</p> +<p>"I hear that you have just arrived," he said.</p> +<p>"Yes; I rode in but half an hour ago."</p> +<p>"Where are you going?"</p> +<p>"To Sambol. There seems no chance of fighting, at present; and I +therefore left the army to pay a visit, for a day or two, to some +friends. My man has just prepared a meal. Will you share it with +me?"</p> +<p>"I will, with pleasure," the officer said, "for I have ridden +from Muttra, and may have to wait an hour before my supper is ready +for me. What may be your name?"</p> +<p>"Puntojee. And yours?"</p> +<p>"Wisnas."</p> +<p>The officer unbuckled his sword, and seated himself on the +ground, the room being entirely unfurnished.</p> +<p>"Were you in that affair, when we chased the English dogs from +beyond the mountains to Agra?"</p> +<p>"Yes, I was in it; and never wish to campaign in such weather +again. I was wet through for three weeks; and hardly feel that I +have got dry, yet."</p> +<p>"They are brave fellows, those Sepoys in the English +service."</p> +<p>"They are, indeed," Harry agreed. "It seemed that we must +destroy them; and yet they withstood our attacks, weary and +exhausted as they must have been. The worst of it was that, after +all our exertions, there was no booty to be obtained."</p> +<p>"Yes, that was bad. One doesn't feel so disposed to risk one's +life, when there is nothing to be gained. We did not even succeed +in capturing their treasure chest. If we could have brought our +infantry up, we should have destroyed them; but they had to march +at the same rate as the guns; and in such weather they could get +along but slowly, for it often required the bullocks of four guns +to drag one through those quagmires.</p> +<p>"That was where the English had the advantage over us. The road +was, no doubt, bad enough for them; it was infinitely worse for us, +after they had cut it up in passing.</p> +<p>"It was a mistake when Scindia began to form regiments of +infantry, and Holkar and the Peishwa imitated him. Before that, we +had India at our mercy. What power could withstand a hundred +thousand horsemen, here today, there tomorrow? Then, we had it in +our power to waste all the country, and to starve out the +fortresses from Cuttack to the north. Our territory extended from +the great mountains on the east, to the sea in the west.</p> +<p>"Now we can only move at the pace of footmen; and while, +formerly, no infantry would venture to withstand our charge; now, +as you see, a handful of Sepoys set us at defiance, repulsed our +charges, and gained Agra simply because our guns and infantry could +not arrive to help us."</p> +<p>"There can be no doubt that you are right," Harry agreed; "but I +cannot blame Scindia and Holkar for forming regiments of infantry, +trained by foreign officers. They had seen how the regiments so +raised, by the English, had won great victories in the Carnatic and +Bengal; and they did not think at that time that, ere long, they +might become formidable to the Mahrattas. Scindia and Holkar raised +their regiments, not to fight against the strangers, but against +each other. It was their mutual hostility that so diminished the +strength of the Mahrattas. When dogs fight dogs, the wild boar +ravages the land."</p> +<p>"It is true enough," the other said. "As a nation we might have +ruled Asia but, divided among ourselves, wasting our forces against +each other, we have allowed the stranger to wrest province after +province from us.</p> +<p>"Now, I will go out and see that the men have all got quarters, +and that the people of the village are feeding them, as they +should. In truth, we have been having a bad time, lately."</p> +<p>"Yes, indeed; I thought myself lucky, sometimes, to get a +handful of grain after twenty hours in the saddle.</p> +<p>"It cannot be helped, comrade. We must drive the strangers back +towards Allahabad; recover Benares, Agra, and Delhi; and then we +shall be able to rest in peace, for a time, before we settle +accounts with Scindia, and the others who have made a disgraceful +peace with the English. We shall never have peace in the Deccan +till we sack and destroy Bombay, and force the last Englishman to +take to his ships."</p> +<p>Harry started with Abdool before daybreak the next morning and, +riding all day, reached Delhi late in the evening. Putting up the +horses, he proceeded to the house occupied by Colonel Ochterlony, +the Resident.</p> +<p>"Will you tell the colonel," he said, "that I am an officer with +despatches from General Lake?"</p> +<p>He was at once shown in. Colonel Burns, the commander of the +garrison, was with the Resident. Neither was surprised that the +messenger should be a native, for they knew the difficulties a +British officer would encounter in travelling from Agra.</p> +<p>"I have ridden with a despatch for you, Colonel, from General +Lake. I am Captain Lindsay, and have the honour of serving on the +general's staff."</p> +<p>"I am glad to see you, sir," Ochterlony said, kindly. "Your name +is pretty well known, to all of us, as that of an officer who has +successfully carried out several dangerous enterprises; and this +cannot have been one of the most dangerous of them, for indeed, in +that disguise I do not think that anyone would entertain the +slightest suspicion that you are not what you appear to be.</p> +<p>"I am told you speak Mahratta perfectly."</p> +<p>"I was brought up among the Mahrattas, sir. I have got through +easily, and only once came upon a body of Holkar's cavalry."</p> +<p>"You have just arrived, Captain Lindsay?"</p> +<p>"Yes, not ten minutes ago."</p> +<p>The colonel rang the bell, and directed a servant who came in to +bring in wine and refreshments. He then opened the despatches +which, after reading, he passed across to Colonel Burns.</p> +<p>"Of course, we have heard reports of the disaster to Monson's +force. Was it as serious as they say?"</p> +<p>"It was very serious, sir. I was with them, and they suffered +terribly. They lost their guns and baggage, and at least a third of +their infantry."</p> +<p>"It is unfortunate, very unfortunate, Captain Lindsay. We have +had so many victories, of late, that the natives must have almost +concluded that we were invincible; but this check will encourage +them, and will doubtless bring many waverers over to their +side."</p> +<p>"I don't think that it was, in any way, Colonel Monson's fault. +His column was to join that of Colonel Murray--who, however, +doubtless learning the great strength Holkar had with him, fell +back--and with only five battalions of Sepoys, and a dozen guns, it +was practically impossible that Monson could, single handed, resist +the attack of ninety thousand men. If he had had with him a couple +of British battalions, and a regiment or two of our cavalry, he +might have held the passes but, alone, it did not seem to me +possible that he could do so; especially when the enemy's cavalry +could have crossed the hills at other points, and taken them in the +rear. Even if he had resisted all attacks, he must have been +starved out.</p> +<p>"As being, in a sort of way, representative of General Lake, +Colonel Monson was good enough to ask my opinion; and I quite +agreed with him that the best plan was to fall back. We believed, +of course, that we should find shelter at Kotah, but two days' +march in the rear and, had not the rajah declared for Holkar, and +shut his gates, all would have been well; for we beat off all +attacks, on our way there. It was his treachery, and that of the +commandant of Kooshalpur, that caused the disaster."</p> +<p>"Holkar is at Muttra, and Lake is about to march against +him?"</p> +<p>"Yes, sir. If Holkar gives battle there he will, no doubt, be +defeated but, as this despatch will have informed you, General Lake +feared much that, as he advances, Holkar will content himself with +harassing him on the march with a cloud of horsemen while, with the +main body of his army, he marches rapidly north, to endeavour to +recapture Delhi and obtain possession of the Emperor's person. It +is to warn you of that danger that I have ridden here."</p> +<p>"The danger is, no doubt, serious," the Resident said; "and the +town is certainly in no position for defence. The walls are in a +most dilapidated condition, and would crumble after a few hours' +cannonade. Colonel Burns's force is wholly inadequate to defend a +city of some ten miles in circumference. The irregular troops +cannot be relied upon, in case of need. However, we must do what we +can and, as we may be sure that General Lake will hasten on with +all speed, we shall not have to hold out for many days.</p> +<p>"Now, Captain Lindsay, as you say that you only left Agra +yesterday morning, and have ridden some eighty miles, today, I am +sure you have need of rest. The general has told me to employ you +on any duty that I may think requisite; therefore, if you will come +here at eight o'clock tomorrow morning, I shall be glad, indeed, of +your services. Where did you leave your horses?"</p> +<p>"I left them at a khan, a few minutes' walk from here."</p> +<p>"Then if you will go down, and tell your man to bring them up, +they can be put up in the stables here. I have already ordered a +room to be prepared for you. My servants will give your man some +food."</p> +<p>The next morning Harry, after taking the early breakfast a +servant brought to his room, went down to Colonel Ochterlony's +office.</p> +<p>"I have not brought my uniform with me, Colonel," he said, "for +I might have been searched."</p> +<p>"That does not matter. Two of my escort shall ride with you, +which will be sufficient to show that you represent me. Here is a +list of the zemindars within fifteen miles of the city. You will, +today, visit as many of them as possible, and request them to ride +in to see me, tomorrow morning. I have directed that you are to +have one of my horses for, after the work yours has just had, it +will need two or three days' rest.</p> +<p>"Say nothing about the possibility of Holkar's coming here. They +might hang back, if you did so. I would rather meet them as a body, +and open the matter to them, myself. You will be able to see, by +their manner, if any of them have thought of the possibility of the +city being besieged. If they have, some of them will possibly +excuse themselves coming; though I think that the great majority +will come, for they must know well enough that, if Holkar took the +city, his troops would ravage the country, as they have done all +the villages through which they have passed; and that, therefore, +it is to their interest to aid in its defence.</p> +<p>"I am going now to see the Emperor, and to obtain from him an +order for all the able-bodied men of the city to set to work, under +my orders and those of Colonel Burns, to repair the fortifications +at the points where an enemy would naturally attack them.</p> +<p>"In any case, where you see that those you call upon make +excuses for not coming in, you have my full authority for telling +them that all who do not do so will be regarded as our enemies, and +will be severely punished, and their estates forfeited. No excuse, +whatever, will be accepted unless, on your arrival, you find that a +man is seriously ill; in which case you will order that his son, or +some near relation, be sent to represent him."</p> +<p>For the next three days, Harry spent his whole time on horseback +and, although it was evident to him that several of those he +visited were averse to going into Delhi, none of them ventured to +incur the displeasure of the English Resident by an absolute +refusal. Each morning, therefore, Colonel Ochterlony received those +Harry had visited on the previous day. He told them, frankly, that +it was possible that Holkar might appear before the walls; but +assured them that he had no doubt of being able to resist all +attacks, until General Lake arrived, which he would be sure to do +in a few days.</p> +<p>In the meantime, great numbers of men laboured at the walls. The +battlements had in some cases fallen, and the gaps were filled up +with sandbags. The moat, which had been neglected for many years, +was cleared out; and the side made steeper, so that an attacking +party would have to use ladders, both for descending into it and +climbing out. The bastions were repaired, as far as could be done; +and the houses in the lane that ran round, inside the wall, were +all loopholed for musketry.</p> +<p>Many of the irregular cavalry had deserted; but the Sepoys stood +firm, knowing how terrible were the cruelties perpetrated, by +Holkar, on all who fell into his hands. Their number was small; but +they were, to some extent, strengthened by the levies brought in by +the zemindars.</p> +<p>There was no time to be lost for, on the 2nd of September, +General Lake had approached to within a mile of Muttra; which had +already been abandoned by Holkar, whose horsemen made their +appearance before Delhi on the 7th. The irregular cavalry and those +of the zemindars were ordered to attack them but, as soon as they +left the town, they dispersed and rode away.</p> +<p>The next day the enemy's infantry and artillery came up, and a +heavy fire was immediately opened on the southeast angle of the +city wall. In twenty-four hours the whole of the parapet was +demolished, and some partial breaches made in the wall itself. The +Sepoys, encouraged by the presence and efforts of Ochterlony and +Burns, stood their ground with great courage and, at nightfall, +laboured incessantly at repairing the breaches, and in making a new +parapet with sandbags.</p> +<p>Towards morning they formed up; passed out through one of the +breaches, led by their officers; made a rush at the battery that +had been doing so much damage, bayoneted or drove off the enemy +stationed there, and spiked the guns.</p> +<p>In the meantime, some guns had been playing against the southern +walls. Here they were able to approach, through gardens and the +ruins of a village, until near the defences and, establishing a +powerful battery, opened fire, and soon made a breach in the walls +between the Turkoman and Ajmere gates.</p> +<p>Unable to hinder them the Sepoys, aided by a portion of the +population, worked from the morning of the 10th until that of the +12th to form an inner defence. The houses near the breach were +pulled down, and the materials used for forming strong barricades +at the mouths of the streets leading from it. The houses themselves +were loopholed, and everything was prepared for a desperate +defence. During that day the guns continued to enlarge the breach; +and the Sepoys, who had laboured almost incessantly for four nights +and days, were able to lie down for some hours.</p> +<p>That night passed quietly. Holkar had probably heard, from +adherents in the town, of the retrenchment that had been formed; +and Colonel Ochterlony believed that the absence of any movement +towards the breach was a sign that he was making preparations for a +sudden attack at some other point. Sentries were placed along the +walls facing the encampment of his army and, just before dawn, the +discharge of a musket, at the Lahore gate, showed that it was +against it that the enemy's attack was directed.</p> +<p>The Sepoys had been bivouacked in an open space, in the centre +of the city, and they at once proceeded to the point threatened. In +the dim early morning light, a great mass of men could be made out +approaching and, at the same moment, fifty guns opened fire on the +gate, to cover their advance. The cannon on the bastion by the gate +replied, directing their fire on the infantry column. These, +however, pushed forward with loud shouts. Many of them carried +ladders and, although suffering heavily from the musketry +fire--opened as soon as they came within easy range--they placed +the ladders against the wall, and strove to climb them. The face of +the wall was flanked by the bastion and, from this, an incessant +fire of musketry was maintained by a strong force of Sepoys; while +others repulsed, with the bayonet, the efforts of their assailants +to gain a footing, and hurled backwards many of the ladders. +Holkar's men, who had expected to effect a surprise, and carry the +wall before its defenders could arrive there, soon lost heart and +in a short time fled, leaving most of their ladders behind +them.</p> +<p>The little garrison remained under arms all that day and the +next night, expecting another assault. But, on the morning of the +15th, Holkar and his army were seen marching away in the distance +and, on the 18th, Lord Lake arrived.</p> +<p>Harry had not taken part in the defence of Delhi. He had, on the +day before Holkar's army arrived before the city, ridden out to +Sekerah, some five-and-twenty miles away. It was some distance +beyond any point he had hitherto reached; but the petty rajah, who +held a wide jagheer, could put five hundred men in the field. A +small British force had been stationed there; but it had been +recalled, at once, when Harry brought the news of the probable +approach of Holkar. The rajah then promised to send three hundred +of his troops, to aid in the defence of the city; but none had +arrived, and Harry's mission was to urge him to send them off, +instantly.</p> +<p>The rajah had, however, heard that Holkar's force was within a +day's march of the capital and, entertaining no doubt that he would +carry the feeble defences without difficulty, had resolved to throw +in his lot with him. Harry was now riding in uniform, having +obtained the loan of a jacket, trousers, and cap from one of the +British officers of the garrison. The rajah received him in his +palace; and Harry saw at once, by the scowling faces of the men who +gathered round him, that he had only waited for the news that +Holkar's army was near Delhi before throwing off the mask of +friendship.</p> +<p>"I have come over, Rajah," he said, "to tell you that Colonel +Ochterlony requests that you will send every available fighting man +to Delhi, at once. He prays you to despatch as many as you can +possibly gather together."</p> +<p>The rajah replied coldly:</p> +<p>"Why should I do so? By tomorrow night Holkar, with his great +army, will have captured the town. Why should I send my men there +to die, fighting for strangers? I take no orders from them. I have +received the Emperor's, it is true; but he is old and infirm, and +is a prisoner in your hands."</p> +<p>"I deny that he is a prisoner, Rajah. He is treated with all +honour, and is in a very different position from that which he +occupied when he was imprisoned by the Mahrattas."</p> +<p>"The Mahrattas are a great people," the rajah answered, angrily. +"Has not Holkar driven a force of the infidels into Agra? And soon, +when he has captured Delhi, he will defeat the rest of them, and +carry his arms to Benares."</p> +<p>"In that case," Harry said quietly, "it is a pity that he did +not first crush the English army, and then march to Benares, and +finish with Delhi at his leisure. Instead of so doing he has +avoided a battle, and is retiring north with his army."</p> +<p>"It is not true!" the rajah shouted. "He wishes first to gain +possession of the capital, to liberate the Emperor and, after that, +he will soon make an end of your people."</p> +<p>He made a sign to those standing round him, who immediately +threw themselves upon Harry. The latter offered no resistance, +seeing that it would only lead to his being killed, on the +spot.</p> +<p>He was at once dragged out from the audience chamber to the +courtyard beyond. He saw the bodies of the two native troopers who +had accompanied him. Abdool, who had also been with him, was +missing and, knowing how watchful and active he was, he hoped that +he might have mounted and ridden off, before he could be +attacked.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch17" id="Ch17">Chapter 17</a>: An Escape.</h2> +<p>Harry's arms were at once bound. He was placed on a horse and, +escorted by ten natives, was taken out of the town and, after a +ride of three hours, arrived at the foot of a strong hill fort, +perched on a lofty rock. Here the party dismounted. Halfway up the +hill they passed through a gate in the lower wall; and then mounted +to the fort, where the officer in command received them and, on +reading an order from the rajah, conducted the prisoner into a room +at the summit of the highest tower. His arms were then unbound, and +the governor and soldiers left the room, locking and barring the +door behind them.</p> +<p>On the way, Harry had thought over his position. It did not seem +to him desperate, if only Holkar failed to capture Delhi; and even +if he did so, there was still some hope. He had no doubt that the +rajah was waiting to see how matters went. If Holkar captured the +city, he would probably send him in to him as a pledge of his +goodwill; but he might still hesitate, until he saw the issue of +the battle that was likely to be fought outside the walls, when the +English army arrived there. He had hitherto affected friendship +with the English; and had offered no objection, whatever, to the +small force being stationed near his town. But, doubtless, the news +of the disaster to Colonel Monson's force had shaken him; and +convinced him that the English were not invincible, and that +Holkar's immense army would inflict a decisive defeat upon them, in +which case those who had shown any friendly feeling towards the +English would be made to suffer for it--by devastation of their +lands, and the loss of their jagheer, if not of their lives. Harry +felt, therefore, that the success of the attack on Delhi would +probably be as disastrous, to himself, as to all the defenders of +the city.</p> +<p>His first impulse was to look out from the loopholes of the +tower. On the one side, as he had noticed, the rock fell sheer away +from the foot of the wall, to a depth of two or three hundred feet. +On the other side he looked down into a courtyard, sixty feet below +him. This was surrounded by high and very strong walls, bristling +with cannon; and with strong circular bastions at each corner.</p> +<p>Immediately below him was the flat roof of the house occupied by +the rajah, when staying at the fort; and round the yard were low +buildings, doubtless containing provisions and munitions of war; +and some of them allotted to the picked corps who did duty there, +the huts for the rest of the garrison being lower down the hill, +near the second wall.</p> +<p>In one corner of the room was a door. On trying it, he found it +to be unfastened and, opening it, he walked out. There was a flight +of narrow stone steps, in what was evidently a projecting turret. +Ascending these, he found himself on a flat roof, on the top of the +tower. He spent half an hour here, examining carefully the features +of the ground and the defences of the fort. The place, though +strong, did not approach, in this respect, many of the hill forts +that he had seen in the Deccan; and he concluded that a British +force of moderate strength could easily effect its capture though, +if stoutly held, it could defy native attack.</p> +<p>He then returned to the room below. Half an hour later, some +armed natives entered. One of them carried a large bundle of straw, +which he threw down in one corner; another bore a dish of rice, and +a third a skin of water. They had evidently been told not to +address him for, as soon as they had placed their burdens on the +ground, they retired without any remark.</p> +<p>"This is bad," Harry said to himself, when they had left. "I +would just as lief sleep on straw as on a bed but, if I had had +some blankets, I might have made myself a rope; though I don't +think it would have reached the roof of the house below, much less +to the courtyard, so that idea must be given up. I have heard of +fellows working their way through the floors of their cells; but +they have taken away my knife, and there is not a scrap of +furniture from which I could get some iron to manufacture a tool. +There is no concealing a knife, when they bring my food; for it is +sure to be as it is today--rice, or some other grain, boiled, and +not even a spoon to eat it with.</p> +<p>"The door seems the only possible way though, at present, I +cannot see where the possibility comes in. It is of solid wood, and +strong enough to cage a tiger. Still, if I am to get out, I fancy +that it must be through the door."</p> +<p>A closer examination of it did not increase his hopes. Even when +he pushed his hardest against it, it did not yield in the slightest +degree. He sat down on the straw, and turned over every possible +idea in his mind. No scheme of getting out of the difficulty +presented itself.</p> +<p>"The only chance that I can see is that, instead of four fellows +coming up with the man who brings my food, there may be only two. +Taking them by surprise, and snatching a weapon from them, I might +manage three of them; but I could not even hope to silence five, +before they gave the alarm.</p> +<p>"I hope that Abdool got away safely. I think that if he did, he +was likely, when he had once shaken off pursuit, to come back and +try to find out what had become of me. His face could not have been +particularly noticed, for I expect the troopers were attacked as +soon as I entered that scoundrel's house; and if he took off his +uniform, and went in in native dress, there would be little chance +of his being recognized. When he finds out where I have been taken, +he will no doubt go back to Delhi, and report; but with Holkar +within two miles, they have too much on their hands to think of +sending to demand my release. If Holkar fails to take the place, +and retires as Lake approaches, there will no doubt be a hot +pursuit; and certainly they could not send two or three hundred men +here. Less than that would be of no good, whatever. The rajah has +committed himself, by the murder of my troopers and, as he cannot +hope for forgiveness, he would either fly to Oude, or else move in +here with his force, with which he would think himself safe from +anything short of an army.</p> +<p>"It is certain that, with such important work on hand, no men +can be spared for a rescue expedition. No, there is not a shadow of +chance, unless Holkar is defeated."</p> +<p>Having settled this matter in his mind, and decided that no +amount of thinking would enable him to see a way of escaping; Harry +dismissed the subject from his thoughts, ate his rice, and lay down +as soon as it became dark, having had but little rest for the past +week.</p> +<p>Two days passed. As he was sitting on the platform over his +cell, he heard a distant boom, and knew that Holkar was besieging +Delhi. The next day, to his satisfaction, the sound of cannonading +was again distinct.</p> +<p>"At any rate," he said to himself, "Holkar has not carried the +place by a sudden rush. There is a regularity about the fire that +shows that it is deliberate. No doubt they are breaching one of the +walls."</p> +<p>Going to the other side of the platform, he saw that a good many +of the rajah's followers were standing on the wall, listening to +the firing. The wall itself was some thirty-five feet below the +spot where he was standing; neither loophole of his cell commanded +a view of it, so that a prisoner could hold no conversation with +the guard below.</p> +<p>Presently another man came up on to the walls, and approached +the group there. He was, like the others, dressed in a small white +turban, a short jacket made of unbleached hemp; underneath which +was a loose tunic, bound at the waist with a sash, and coming down +to the knees. He carried a spear and matchlock, and across his +shoulder a small shield was slung. The others did not turn round +and, when a few yards from them, he looked up at Harry; and the +latter saw, to his delight, that he was Abdool.</p> +<p>Harry dared not make any gesture that might be noticed; but he +nodded his head slightly, and walked to the other side of the +platform, where he remained for a short time, and then returned. +Abdool looked again in his direction; but continued to talk with +the others as to the attack upon the town, and agreed with them +that Holkar would make short work of its defenders.</p> +<p>Presently the whole party descended to the courtyard, together. +Some of them went down to the lower wall, to talk to their comrades +there; but whether Abdool accompanied them, or was still in the +fort, Harry could not make out. He did not, indeed, remain long on +the platform but, after looking towards Delhi for some little time, +he went down to his room.</p> +<p>It was evident that Abdool had enlisted in the rajah's service; +and had, no doubt, been engaged by the governor of the fort. The +rajah would be uneasy in his mind, and would assuredly take on any +men that presented themselves; in order to strengthen himself, if +Holkar failed to take the town; and also to gain the latter's +approbation, by joining him with as large a force as possible. +Probably Abdool had only enlisted on the previous day; and would, +of course, need time to acquaint himself with the fortifications, +the position of the guards, and the manner in which he could best +communicate with him.</p> +<p>Harry's meals were brought up twice a day, at seven o'clock in +the morning and at nightfall. Hitherto he had been quiet and +patient, as there was nothing to be done but to await the course of +events. Now that he knew Abdool was there, and would certainly +endeavour to open communications with him, it was difficult for him +to keep quiet; and he passed hours in pacing round and round his +room. Occasionally he went up to the roof, but he could see no +signs of Abdool; and therefore remained but a short time on the +lookout as, were he to keep on watching the courtyard, it might +attract notice, and the idea might occur to someone that he was +expecting some signal to be made to him.</p> +<p>Three days passed without a sign; and then, when the guard came +in with his ration, Harry saw that Abdool was one of the number. As +he glanced at him, Abdool, who was standing a little way behind the +others, shook his head, and retired with them. Harry felt a +momentary disappointment; but saw at once that nothing could be +attempted in broad daylight; and that it was at night, only, that +there was a possibility of success. He thought that Abdool had only +come up in order to see the nature of the fastenings of the doors, +and the general position.</p> +<p>He was not with the party who came up in the evening but, in the +centre of his rice, Harry found a small piece of paper rolled into +a ball. There was not, however, light enough to enable him to read +it; but he lay awake half the night and, at the first gleam of +daylight, went up on to the platform and, seating himself so that +he was not visible from below, waited till he could see to read the +letter. It was, of course, in Mahratti; and so badly written that +he had difficulty in deciphering it. He finally, however, made it +out.</p> +<p>"Tomorrow evening, when I come up, we will attack the others, if +all goes well; if not, will try the next evening."</p> +<p>So intent was he, in deciphering the writing, that he had hardly +noticed the outburst of heavy firing in the distance. He had feared +the enemy had captured Delhi on the previous day, as he had heard +no firing; but now the roar of cannon was very heavy, and he had no +doubt that Holkar was trying to take the town by assault.</p> +<p>In less than half an hour the sound ceased, suddenly.</p> +<p>"They have either taken the town, or been beaten off +decisively," he said to himself.</p> +<p>In the afternoon he saw a party of horsemen approaching, +followed by some palanquins.</p> +<p>"That looks hopeful," he said to himself. "A messenger has +probably brought the rajah news that the assault has failed, and he +is bringing his zenana here for safety, until he hears the issue of +the battle, which will probably take place in a day or two. I +wonder whether this will upset Abdool's plans!"</p> +<p>The rajah's return was greeted by the discharge of matchlocks. +Presently, however, this was succeeded by cries of rage and a +clamour of voices.</p> +<p>"Holkar has been thrashed. Now it is a toss up whether the rajah +will, in his anger, send up and have me brought down and executed. +I think the chances are in my favour. The fellow is evidently +crafty, or he would not have persuaded Ochterlony that he was +friendly towards us; and I think he will hold me as a sort of +hostage so that, if Holkar is defeated, he may make favourable +terms for himself by offering to surrender me."</p> +<p>It was not until an hour later that Harry heard a party +ascending the stairs. When the door opened, he saw that two of the +men carried torches. Abdool, who was in the rear, closed the door +behind him, and then said, "Now sahib!" and struck down the man in +front of him with his tulwar.</p> +<p>Harry had risen to his feet, as he heard the men coming; and had +braced himself up for a spring, when Abdool gave the word. With a +blow straight from the shoulder, he struck the man carrying the +dish senseless to the floor; tore the sword from his sash; warded +off a hasty blow delivered by one torch bearer, who was too much +astonished at the sudden attack to act with decision, and cut him +down; while, at the same moment, Abdool almost severed the neck of +the other.</p> +<p>"Thanks, Abdool," Harry said, grasping his follower's hand, "you +have saved my life!"</p> +<p>"Not yet, sahib. Our work has but begun. There are other dangers +to be met. However, the arrival of the rajah has been fortunate. +The news he has brought has--but first, let me finish the man you +knocked down."</p> +<p>"There is no occasion for that. Tear his sash into strips, and +bind his hands and feet; and gag him with his own turban.</p> +<p>"Now, what is our next step?"</p> +<p>"I have a rope round my body, sahib, to lower ourselves on to +the ramparts. I am wearing an extra suit of clothes, so that you +can get up as one of the garrison. I think we have plenty of time, +for it is not likely that these men will be missed. Everyone is too +excited by the news, that Holkar has failed to take Delhi, to +notice whether we return or not."</p> +<p>He took off the outer garment that he had brought with him, +while Harry removed his uniform and attired himself in it and, +placing the turban of one of the soldiers on his head, possessed +himself of a shield, spear, and dagger, and then said:</p> +<p>"What next, Abdool?"</p> +<p>"We will put out these torches, sahib,"--these were still +burning on the floor--"the light might be noticed from below, and +they might wonder why we stayed here so long."</p> +<p>"Are there any guards on the walls?"</p> +<p>"No, sahib; they have them on the lower wall, but not here."</p> +<p>The torches were extinguished, and then they went up to the +platform above. They fastened one end of the rope to the +battlement, having first tied knots at short intervals.</p> +<p>"I will go down first on to the wall, sahib; and if by chance +any man may have come up from below, which is not likely, I can +hide," and he at once commenced to lower himself down.</p> +<p>In two or three minutes, Abdool was joined by Harry. The +courtyard was dark, save that a few torches burned here and there. +A great babble of talking was going on, and the windows of the +rajah's house were lighted up.</p> +<p>"What are your plans, Abdool? I see that we shall be able to get +through the gates, here, without fear of discovery. Is the gate +through the other wall shut?"</p> +<p>"Yes, sahib, it is always closed at sunset. Except where the +road comes up to the gate, there is only one place where the rock +projects at the foot of the wall, and there is a possibility of +climbing down. That was where I had intended we should cross the +wall. The height is but twenty feet, there, and I have another rope +of that length. There are no sentries placed, except over the +gate.</p> +<p>"It is quite possible that, even there, there is none tonight. +There is no order among these fellows, as there is among the +Company's troops and, as there is no enemy near, they think that +such a watch is unnecessary; and if any have been sent there, they +are pretty sure to have gone to the huts, to talk over the news +from Delhi. The matter should be easy enough.</p> +<p>"We may as well start at once. These fellows will quieten down +presently, and will then be more likely to hear any noise we may +make."</p> +<p>Looking about, they went down by the stairs leading to the +courtyard and walked carelessly across. Taking care to avoid +mingling with the excited groups and, at the same time, keeping as +far from the torches burning in the courtyard as possible, they +passed through the gate--which was standing open without a +guard--and followed the zigzag road, with towers placed at its +corners, each mounting two guns so as to sweep the approach.</p> +<p>There were two high walls on either hand, loopholed for +musketry; and Abdool said that there was a platform, wide enough +for two men to pass, along the whole length of it. The road +terminated in a heavy gate, some forty yards above that through the +outer wall. A bastion covered it so that, were the lower gate +carried, an enemy would not be able to bring guns to bear against +it. This gate stood open and, passing through it and behind the +bastion, they came at once upon the low, stone-built huts where the +majority of the garrison lived, in time of peace.</p> +<p>Several torches were burning here, and round each of these were +groups of men, talking excitedly. Leaving Harry behind one of the +huts, Abdool strolled up for a few minutes, to listen to the +conversation, and then rejoined his master.</p> +<p>"What are they saying, Abdool?"</p> +<p>"They are saying, sir, that it was wrong of Holkar to attack the +city, before he had defeated the English. It has cost many lives. +But when the English are defeated he will be able, without doubt, +to capture the city; which probably would open its gates to him, +seeing that no assistance could come to them."</p> +<p>"No one doubts, then, that Holkar will defeat us?"</p> +<p>"Not in the least," Abdool replied. "They say that he has two +hundred cannon. These will mow down the English. Then the cavalry +will charge, and there will be an end of the matter."</p> +<p>"They seem to have forgotten all about Laswaree," Harry said. +"But we had better be going. Where is the way up to the wall?"</p> +<p>"Close by, sahib."</p> +<p>They ascended the steps. As far as could be seen the wall was +entirely deserted, and they made their way cautiously until close +to the gate. Harry then stopped, and Abdool went on with noiseless +tread. He soon returned.</p> +<p>"It is as I thought: no sentries are yet posted."</p> +<p>"But that tower over the gate, Abdool, is a great deal too high +for us to descend by that rope that you have got."</p> +<p>"Yes, sahib. We go out by an entrance on to a bastion, flanking +the gate. The rope will be long enough there or, at any rate, there +will be but a very short drop."</p> +<p>They entered the tower through the door communicating with the +wall. Abdool led the way.</p> +<p>"Keep close to me, sahib. I went down here this morning, and can +find my way in the dark. I did not think that there was much chance +of our coming this way, but it was better to find out all about +it."</p> +<p>Moving slowly and cautiously, they came to a flight of steps. +They descended some twenty feet, and found themselves at an open +portal, leading on to the flanking bastion. The rope was soon +fixed.</p> +<p>"I will go first, sahib, and will let you know how far you will +have to drop; for the wall looks, to me, higher than it was at the +point where I intended to descend."</p> +<a id="PicK" name="PicK"></a> +<center><img src="images/k.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Abdool at once slipped down." /></center> +<p>It was tied round the neck of a gun, and Abdool at once slipped +down. There was a pause, then a slight dull sound, and the rope +hung loose.</p> +<p>"The knot at the end is ten feet from the ground," Abdool said, +in a low tone.</p> +<p>"That is near enough," Harry replied, and then he swung himself +over.</p> +<p>When he came to the last knot, he lowered himself to the full +length of his arms and let go. The fall was not much more than a +yard; and Abdool stood close by, ready to catch him, should he miss +his foothold on alighting.</p> +<p>They at once started, at a rapid pace, down the hill. They had +nearly reached the plain when the deep note of a horn was +heard.</p> +<p>"That is the alarm!" Harry exclaimed. "They have found out that +I have gone."</p> +<p>"They will soon be after us, but there is no fear of their +catching us," Abdool said, as they broke into a trot. "No one will +know, at first, what has happened. Everyone will run to his post; +then they will have to search the fort, and all the ground between +it and the lower wall. All that will take time. It may be an hour +before horsemen start.</p> +<p>"I did not think that they would miss you till tomorrow +morning."</p> +<p>"I suppose the rajah sent up for me, to amuse himself by +threatening me. He would hardly venture to do more, until he is +sure that Holkar has defeated us. However, as you say, there is +very little chance of their catching us."</p> +<p>As soon as they were down on the plain, Harry went on:</p> +<p>"We had better strike north, for an hour or two. They are sure +to ride across the plain in the direction of Delhi, thinking we +shall make straight for the city."</p> +<p>"That will be best, sahib."</p> +<p>Fortunately the rain had ceased, and the sky was cloudless, so +that they were able to direct their course by the stars. For two +hours they kept due north, and then turned west. It was a long +journey from the point where they turned. Harry calculated that it +would be nearly fifty miles. The fort was some fifteen miles +northeast of Sekerah, and they were now farther away from Delhi +than they had been when they started. He felt the advantage of the +light native dress, and the sandals that Abdool had given him +instead of his boots.</p> +<p>When they came across cultivated ground they walked; but a great +portion of the country was a sandy waste; with the ruins of +villages and temples that had, in the palmy days of the empire, +stood there. Across this they went at a trot, for the sand was +generally compact enough to sustain their weight.</p> +<p>"We shall hardly get there before day breaks, sahib," Abdool +remarked.</p> +<p>"No; but that is of little consequence. Probably, by this time, +Holkar will have marched away--either to give battle or, what is +more likely, to recruit; and for many miles round Delhi the country +will be rejoicing, at having been spared the ruin that would have +befallen it, had he taken the city. So I have no fear that we shall +be hindered on the way; for though they may wonder at my +appearance--for the dye has now almost worn off, and anyone can see +that I am a white--they will be all the more willing to render us +any assistance.</p> +<p>"There is no fear of the rajah's horsemen keeping up the +pursuit, beyond halfway between Sekerah and the city; for they must +know that all the zemindars and people round it are in our favour, +and that they might be attacked, when beyond the limits of the +rajah's jagheer."</p> +<p>When morning broke they could see, in the distance, the minarets +of Delhi.</p> +<p>"They must be ten miles away, Abdool, and I will enter the next +house we come to. I fancy, from our position, we must be close to +the residence of the zemindar who, at once, brought in a force of +fifty men to aid in the defence of the town. There we are sure of +hospitable treatment and, indeed, I sorely need rest and food. I +have eaten nothing since yesterday morning and, counting the +distance we made to the north after leaving the fort, we must have +walked nearly fifty miles."</p> +<p>Half a mile farther they saw a house, and made straight for +it.</p> +<p>"Is Shuja Khan within?" Harry asked an armed retainer standing +at the entrance.</p> +<p>The soldier recognized Harry--having seen him when he called +upon his master--and replied:</p> +<p>"He returned last night, my lord."</p> +<p>"Will you tell him that Captain Lindsay, who was treacherously +captured by the Rajah of Sekerah, has just escaped, and is on his +way to the city; and that he asks for his hospitality?"</p> +<p>"Enter, my lord," the man said, salaaming deeply. "Our master +will, I am sure, gladly receive you."</p> +<p>He showed Harry into a large room where, a few minutes later, +the zemindar joined him.</p> +<p>"Peace be with you, sahib! I am rejoiced to see you in safety; +for I heard, at Delhi, that you had not returned, and there were +fears that ill had befallen you and your escort."</p> +<p>"My escort were killed, and I myself carried a prisoner to the +rajah's hill fort; and I have owed my escape to the faithfulness of +my servant, who got away when the others were massacred and, +disguising himself, got into the fort and contrived my escape."</p> +<p>"All honour be to him!" the zemindar said. "Then you have walked +all night?"</p> +<p>"Yes; we went ten miles to the north first, knowing that we +should be pursued; for we heard the alarm given, just after we +started. We have walked fifty miles and, when I say that I have +eaten nothing since yesterday morning, you may be sure that we are +sorely in need of refreshment."</p> +<p>"It shall be got ready, at once, sahib; and, while it is being +prepared, you can take a bath and a change of garments."</p> +<p>"I need the bath almost as much as I need a feed," Harry +laughed. "I have just been looking into the glass, and I see that I +am well-nigh as dark as when I came to you, nine or ten days +ago."</p> +<p>His host led him to a room containing a bath, which was soon +filled by the servants, one of whom brought in a handsome suit of +the zemindar's clothes. It was more than half an hour before he +went down again. As soon as he entered the room, a servant brought +in a meal; consisting of slices of meat on a skewer, and a pillau +of chicken.</p> +<p>The zemindar sat by while he ate his meal, and Harry gave him a +short account of the manner in which he had effected his escape. +The former, in turn, related the events of the siege; adding that +spies had brought in the news, late in the afternoon, that Holkar +would march away in the morning, as he had heard that the English +army was but two days distant.</p> +<p>"Was he going to meet the English, or to retire towards +Malwar?"</p> +<p>"That I cannot say, sahib, for the spies could not tell us. +Doubtless he and his army are much dispirited, at their failure to +take the city. But the general opinion of the townspeople was that +he would give battle, be victorious, and would return and continue +the siege."</p> +<p>"I have no fear of his being victorious. He knows, in the +battles of Assaye and Poona, how Scindia was utterly routed; and +how, at Laswaree and Delhi, the Mahrattas were scattered; and I do +not think that he will venture upon giving battle. But if he does, +I have no fear, whatever, of the result. It was more than his whole +army could do to break up Monson's force, although composed +entirely of native infantry, until it was near Agra. This time +there will be British infantry and cavalry, and the Mahrattas will +never stand against their charge."</p> +<p>Harry had already enquired about Abdool, and found that he had +also had a meal, and was now asleep.</p> +<p>"Now, sahib," Shuja said, "it were best that you should rest, +for a time. There will be nought doing in Delhi today and, after +the heat of the day is over, we can supply you with horses and an +escort."</p> +<p>Harry accepted the invitation, for he was stiff and sore from +his exertions. The man showed him to a room that had been prepared +for him, and he was soon fast asleep. He did not awake until the +sun was getting low. He at once went downstairs.</p> +<p>"The horses are ready," the zemindar said, "but I pray you to +take a meal, before mounting. It is ready, and will be served +directly."</p> +<p>Harry, who had been too tired to do justice to his food in the +morning, was by no means sorry to take another meal. As he rose to +go, he thanked the zemindar most heartily for his kindness.</p> +<p>"It is an honour that you have bestowed upon me," the zemindar +said, courteously. "You and your brave countrymen are fighting to +free us from the oppression of the Mahrattas, and any one of your +race would meet with a hearty welcome here."</p> +<p>The horses were now brought round. The one intended for Harry +was a very handsome animal, richly caparisoned.</p> +<p>"It is a fine horse, indeed," he said, as he was about to +mount.</p> +<p>"The horse is yours, sahib," Shuja Khan said. "He is of good +breed, and will carry you far and fast. I shall esteem it a great +honour that you should ride him.</p> +<p>"Do not thank me, I pray you. 'Tis but a little thing to do, for +one of our brave defenders; of whose deeds one of your officers was +telling me, when he was deploring your loss."</p> +<p>"I thank you most heartily, Khan; and, after the manner in which +you have given it, I cannot refuse so handsome a present. I shall +be proud to ride such an animal; and you may be sure that, as I do +so, I shall often think of him who presented it to me; and shall +assuredly mention, to Colonel Ochterlony, the very great kindness +with which you have received me."</p> +<p>As he rode off, followed by an escort of four of the zemindar's +retainers, he saw with satisfaction that Abdool was also attired in +clean white garments.</p> +<p>"You have done well, I hope, Abdool?"</p> +<p>"I have been well treated, indeed, sahib, and the zemindar's +head man told me that I was to consider the horse on which I ride +my own. He will carry me well, for he is a stout and serviceable +animal. I was wondering what we should do for horses; for there are +but few in the city, as most of those owning them sent them away, +with their valuables, on hearing of Holkar's approach."</p> +<p>"The zemindar is a generous man, indeed. He has, as you heard, +presented me with the horse that I am riding. It is certainly a +splendid animal and, though my own was a good one, this is far +better. In fact, I have seen no handsomer horse, anywhere.</p> +<p>"I wish you had as good a one, Abdool, and then we need not fear +being overtaken, though half the Mahratta army were in +pursuit."</p> +<p>They entered the city by the northern gate, and saw nothing of +the enemy, who were encamped on the other side of the city. Harry +was most warmly received by Colonel Ochterlony.</p> +<p>"I have been in much anxiety about you," he said. "That you had +been detained was certain; but I hoped that that petty rajah would +not have ventured to harm you, for he would be sure that, sooner or +later, we should have a heavy reckoning with him."</p> +<p>"I fancy, sir, that he was waiting for news from here. He was +convinced that Holkar would take the city, and defeat Lord Lake. +Had he done so, I have no doubt that he would either have sent me +prisoner to him, or would have despatched me and forwarded only my +head. As I felt certain that things would not turn out as he +stated, I had no great fear for my life; but I thought that I might +have been kept a prisoner for a very long time, for Lord Lake would +have his hands full in other directions."</p> +<p>"Then he released you on the news that Holkar had failed to +capture the city?"</p> +<p>"No, sir; I got away owing to the fidelity of my orderly who, +after riding off himself, when the two troopers with me were +attacked and killed, entered a hill fort where I was confined, took +service there, and contrived my escape. I shall hand in a report +with the details, for your perusal, when things have quietened down +a bit. My man has rendered me other valuable services, and I should +be greatly pleased if, in consideration of the fidelity and daring +that he has shown, you would think fit to recommend him for +promotion as a native officer. He belongs to the 3rd Bombay +Cavalry."</p> +<p>"I should certainly have pleasure in doing so, Captain Lindsay. +I shall, of course, be drawing up a list of the zemindars and +others who have rendered service, and recommending them for reward +to the Government. If you will give me the particulars as to the +man's name and services I will include him in the list. He has been +with you some time, has he not?"</p> +<p>"Yes, sir, for upwards of six years. He accompanied me from +Calcutta to Nagpore, when I went on a mission to the rajah, whom it +was desirable to keep neutral until the war in Mysore was brought +to an end. He was at Assaye, and journeyed in disguise across the +country with me, to carry the news of that victory to General Lake. +He took part with me in the cavalry charge at Laswaree, and in the +retreat of Colonel Monson's column."</p> +<p>"That is quite good enough," Colonel Ochterlony said. "But I +should think that it would be the shortest and best way for you to +recommend him direct to Lord Lake, who would be able to put him in +orders at once. At the same time, I will send to Calcutta a +recommendation that some special reward should be granted to him. +There will be a large number of forfeitures of the estates of those +who have sided with Scindia and Holkar. I make no doubt that, on my +strong recommendation, he will obtain a grant of the revenue of a +village or two. Such a grant would do good by showing that +instances of fidelity, even in the case of a private soldier, do +not go unnoticed or unrewarded. We expect the general's arrival +here in a couple of days."</p> +<p>"I shall be very glad, sir, if only because my uniform is coming +on with his baggage. At present, with my white face and this showy +native dress, I feel that I am stared at by everyone I meet. The +uniform that Captain Ewart lent me I had to leave behind, when I +made my escape."</p> +<p>"It will not inconvenience him, poor fellow," the colonel said, +"for he was almost cut in two, by a cannon shot, as the enemy +advanced to the last assault."</p> +<p>When the general arrived within three miles of the city, Harry +rode out to his camp and, having first obtained his uniform, went +in to report himself.</p> +<p>"So you got through safely, Captain Lindsay? I supposed that you +had, when the news reached us that Delhi was defending itself +stoutly for, had they not had some days warning, they could hardly +have held out for an hour."</p> +<p>"This is Colonel Burns's report of the military operations of +the siege, sir; and this is a letter from the Resident; and this is +my own report, of my doings since I left you at Agra."</p> +<p>"Thank you, Captain Lindsay. I shall have a communication to +send to Colonel Ochterlony this afternoon, and should be obliged if +you will carry it for me."</p> +<p>Harry bowed and left; and then joined the officers of the staff, +who were just sitting down to lunch, and were all glad to see him +again.</p> +<p>"So you managed to get through Holkar's lines, Lindsay?"</p> +<p>"Oh, yes! I met with no difficulty, and only fell in once with +any of his troops. I spent an evening with their officer, and after +that rode through without interruption. There was really no danger, +and I do not think Holkar, himself, could have suspected me of +being a British officer."</p> +<p>"And now, about the siege. You may imagine that we were all very +anxious about it; for though, of course, we should soon have +retaken the place, there would have been a general plunder and +massacre by that brute Holkar."</p> +<p>"You must wait for particulars until you get there," Harry said, +"for I know nothing about it whatever, except what I have +heard."</p> +<p>"And how is that?"</p> +<p>"I was, at the time, a prisoner in the hands of the petty Rajah +of Sekerah. He promised to send in three hundred men. The day +before Holkar arrived, I was sent to urge him to despatch them +instantly to aid in the defence. He was evidently impressed with +the idea that Holkar was going to retake the place without any +difficulty, and would afterwards annihilate our army; so, thinking +that was the winning side, he arrested me, and sent me off to a +hill fort, fifteen miles away, and murdered my two troopers."</p> +<p>"And how did you get away?"</p> +<p>Harry gave an account of the manner in which Abdool had managed +his escape.</p> +<p>"Such a fellow as that is a jewel."</p> +<p>"He is indeed, Major; and I would not part with him for any +money. He came round with me from Bombay to Calcutta, six years +ago, and has ridden with me ever since. He fought most gallantly, +in the Malay Peninsula and at many other places. In my report, to +the general, of my last adventure I have mentioned his services +with me in my various journeys, and have strongly recommended his +promotion."</p> +<p>"He well deserves it," the major said. "He has, like you, +carried his life in his hand for, if he had been detected, +undoubtedly he would have shared your fate."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch18" id="Ch18">Chapter 18</a>: An Awkward +Position.</h2> +<p>Three hours later, Harry was sent for by the general.</p> +<p>"I have read your report, Captain Lindsay, and thoroughly concur +with you that the very meritorious conduct of the soldier of the +3rd Bombay Cavalry, who has so long been attached to your service, +should be rewarded. I cannot, of course, promote him in his own +regiment. He will therefore appear in orders, tomorrow, as +appointed havildar in the 5th Bengal Cavalry, which is at present +under my command; with a statement that, having now completed ten +years' service in the Bombay army, and having for six years of it +been serving chiefly in this presidency, and having distinguished +himself by his fidelity and courage, he has now been specially +singled out for this promotion; and will be henceforth in charge of +an escort of twenty men, of his new regiment, attached to the +general's staff.</p> +<p>"As to yourself, sir, I have, in a despatch that will be sent +off this evening, strongly recommended you to the Governor General +for promotion to the rank of major. You were, I see by our army +list, promoted to the rank of captain, seven years ago, before +being sent to Calcutta; and, considering the distinguished and +dangerous services that you have rendered, I wonder that you have +not received another step. That is, however, accounted for by the +fact that you have now, for some time, been away from Calcutta with +General Wellesley and myself. I am sure that my recommendation will +at once be complied with."</p> +<p>"I am very grateful for your kindness, sir."</p> +<p>"You owe it to your own merits, and not to any kindness on my +part," Lord Lake said. "You have an altogether exceptional record +and, even in the comparatively short time that you have been with +me, have performed most valuable services. Colonel Monson reports +most highly of your conduct during his retreat; and the mission +that you undertook, at my request, to Colonel Ochterlony was a most +dangerous one and, in itself, sufficient to ensure your promotion. +There are many zealous officers in the service; but few, indeed, so +qualified, by their acquaintance with the native languages, as to +undertake the missions with which you have been entrusted, and have +so successfully carried out."</p> +<p>Harry took the despatches and at once mounted his horse; which +Abdool had brought round, as soon as his master was summoned to the +general's tent. After he had left the camp, he called Abdool up to +his side. The latter was still in his native dress.</p> +<p>"Abdool, I shall have to look out for another cook and body +servant; unless, indeed, I have another trooper told off to +me."</p> +<p>Abdool looked at Harry in astonishment.</p> +<p>"How is that, my lord? Are you dissatisfied with me?"</p> +<p>Harry laughed.</p> +<p>"Not in any way, Abdool; upon the contrary. But your name will +appear in orders, tomorrow, as promoted to the rank of havildar, in +the 5th Bengal Cavalry, as a recognition of your faithful +services.</p> +<p>"It is a great honour," Abdool said, "especially as I have not +served as a soubahdar; but I would far rather stay with you. You +have been a father to me, and I pray you to let me remain as I +am."</p> +<p>"You are to remain with me, Abdool. If you had had to leave me I +should, myself, have told the general that I was sure you would +rather not do so; and that, when you left me, I should myself show +my gratitude for your good services; but of his own accord he has +arranged this. You are not to join your new regiment, but are to +command twenty sowars of the 5th, which are to be attached to those +of the general's staff, for escort duty. In this way you will still +be with me, but as a native officer instead of a servant; and +should I be sent on any special duty you will, I am sure, be able +to go with me, as before."</p> +<p>Abdool's face brightened.</p> +<p>"That would be well, indeed, sahib. It will truly be a great +honour to be an officer and, if I ever return to my native village +in the Deccan, I shall be regarded with great respect, and the +faces of my father and mother will be made white at the honour I +have won. Still, I fear that I shall not be as much with you as I +have been, before."</p> +<p>"Nearly as much, Abdool. I expect that Lord Lake, knowing how +much I am indebted to you, will permit me to take you with me, when +engaged on any detached service; and you and your troopers will +form part of his escort, at all times. Besides, it is likely that, +as matters stand, I shall not be sent away on any special duty for +some time to come. You will, I know, be glad to hear that the +general has recommended me for promotion, also; and that I shall +shortly be a major."</p> +<p>"That pleases me more than my own promotion, sahib. I thought +that you would have had it long ago, after that business at +Nagpore."</p> +<p>"I had only been a captain then a few months, and was very young +for that rank. It would have been unfair to others if I had been +promoted then. I am still very young to be a major."</p> +<p>"It is not years, but what you have done," Abdool said. "Did you +not obtain the release of Nana Furnuwees, and so change the state +of affairs, altogether, at Poona?"</p> +<p>"Well, it was for that I got the rank of captain and, since +then, though I have made a few journeys that would have been +perilous, had I not been able to speak Mahratti like a native, I +have had no opportunities of specially distinguishing myself.</p> +<p>"As soon as we get to Delhi, you had better order yourself a +uniform. You know the dress worn by the native officers of the 5th; +and you must hurry the tailor on, for you may be sure that the army +will not remain long at Delhi; but will set off to meet Holkar as +soon as provisions are collected, for there is no saying how far we +may have to march before we meet him. I do not think that he will +be in any hurry to give battle."</p> +<p>On the 18th of October, the army arrived before Delhi. Holkar's +cavalry were still in the neighbourhood; but news came that the +infantry, with a considerable number of his guns and a few thousand +horsemen, had left him. On the 29th he crossed the Jumna, below +Panniput, to attack a detachment of one battalion of Sepoys and +some matchlock men who were, under Colonel Burns, returning to the +station at Saharunpoor--from which he had hastened, when a report +reached him that Holkar meditated an attack on Delhi. He was +overtaken by Holkar at Shamlee.</p> +<p>The inhabitants of the place joined Holkar, but Burns formed his +camp into a square, and repulsed all attacks; until General Lake, +with six regiments of cavalry, the horse artillery, and a brigade +of infantry, arrived to his relief on the 3rd of November; when +Holkar at once retired, and marched south into the district known +as the Doab, where his horsemen plundered and burnt every village +near his line of route. General Lake followed at once.</p> +<p>He had, before leaving Delhi, sent the rest of the British +infantry, with two regiments of cavalry, under General Fraser, to +attack Holkar's infantry and artillery; which had retired into the +dominions of the Rajah of Bhurtpoor who, although he had been the +first to enter into alliance with the British, after the capture of +Agra, had now declared against them. They had taken up a position +near the rajah's fortress of Deeg, which was believed to be +impregnable.</p> +<p>Their position was a very strong one. An extensive morass and a +deep tank covered their front. On their left was a fortified +village; and on their right the fort of Deeg, which was supported +by several lines of batteries.</p> +<p>Harry had been directed to accompany General Fraser, and was to +take with him Abdool's little troop, to serve as escort and furnish +messengers. Abdool--now in his new uniform--rode at its head, +behind General Fraser's staff, as he reconnoitred the enemy's +position; and felt no small pride in his changed position, +especially as the British officers of the staff, all of whom had +heard of the manner in which he had brought about Harry's escape, +took special notice of him; and on the march one or other had often +dropped behind to have a talk with him.</p> +<p>The next morning the British troops moved forward to the attack, +in two lines. The 76th Regiment rushed impetuously against the +fortified village, and drove its defenders out at the point of the +bayonet. A tremendous fire was at once opened by the batteries +behind it but, without for a moment hesitating, the 76th charged +them, and were speedily in the thick of their enemies. The 1st +Bengal European regiment, which followed, seeing them almost +surrounded, ran down to their assistance; and were followed by the +Sepoys; and Holkar's infantry, unable to resist the assault, fled +to shelter of their next line of guns.</p> +<p>General Fraser himself led the attack upon these. They were also +carried; but the general fell, mortally wounded. Colonel Monson, +who now succeeded to the command, reformed the troops--who were in +some disorder, owing to the impetuosity of their charge--and led +them forward again. Battery after battery was captured. Numbers of +Holkar's men tried to cross the morass, but sank in the mud and +lost their lives. The rest took refuge under the walls of Deeg, +whose guns at once opened fire upon their pursuers.</p> +<p>While the tide pressed forward, unchecked, the Mahratta horse +had ridden down in the rear of the British; and had taken +possession of the first line of batteries, and had turned their +guns upon their late captors. The consequences would have been +serious, had not Captain Norford gathered together twenty-eight men +of the 76th Regiment, and led them against the Mahratta horse. +These, staggered by the daring with which this handful of men +advanced against them, fired a hasty volley and fled. Captain +Norford was killed, but the men took possession of the guns; which +the Mahrattas, thinking that the day was altogether lost, did not +attempt to recapture.</p> +<p>As the fortress of Deeg was far too strong to be attacked by any +force unprovided with siege guns, the British drew back, until +beyond the range of its cannon; carrying off all the guns captured +in the batteries, eighty-seven in number. The total amount of +artillery employed against our troops was no less than one hundred +and sixty guns. Our loss was naturally heavy, amounting to over six +hundred and forty killed and wounded; while that of the enemy was +estimated at two thousand killed, or smothered in the morass.</p> +<p>The force encamped beyond the reach of the guns of Deeg, +awaiting orders from General Lake. The battle was scarcely over +when Colonel Monson rode up to Harry, and said:</p> +<p>"It is of great importance that General Lake should receive the +news of our victory, as soon as possible. There is no one so well +fitted to carry it as you are. There will be no occasion for +disguise, this time; for Holkar's depredations must have excited +the whole population against him. At the same time, you had better +take your havildar and his troopers with you. It will command +respect and, if you should come across any small body of Holkar's +marauders, I am sure that you will give a good account of +them."</p> +<p>"Can you give me any indication as to where General Lake is +likely to be, at present, sir?"</p> +<p>"He marched from Shamsheer to Mahomedabad and, as he probably +took the road through Sekerah, he no doubt settled accounts with +that rascally rajah. I understood, from him, that he suspected +Holkar would make for Sherdanah; as the Begum of that place has +five battalions of drilled troops, and forty guns, which would be a +welcome reinforcement. After that he will, of course, be guided by +Holkar's movements.</p> +<p>"The reports of the peasantry lead me to believe that the enemy +are advancing in the direction of Furukabad. I should say that you +had best cross the Jumna at Muttra, and ride to Alighur. In that +way you will not be likely to meet Holkar's force; which must, at +present, be beyond the Ganges."</p> +<p>Half an hour later, Harry started with his escort. He crossed +the Jumna at Muttra, and there learned that Holkar had, the night +before, arrived within twelve miles of the town; and was, as usual, +destroying everything before him. Harry continued his course to +Cod, within a mile or two of Alighur, which he reached late in the +evening.</p> +<p>The capture of the fort, believed to be impregnable, had had the +effect of producing so profound a respect for the British arms that +Harry, on his arrival, was received by the principal men of the +town; and a large house was placed at his disposal, for himself and +his escort. Supplies were at once furnished and, when a meal had +been eaten and the horses attended to, the troops lay down for the +night.</p> +<p>Harry had been informed that a horseman had brought in news that +the British army had arrived at Bareilly. He started at daybreak +and, late the next evening, after a ride of over one hundred miles, +rode into Lord Lake's camp.</p> +<p>"What news do you bring?" the general asked, as he alighted from +his horse.</p> +<p>"I have to report, sir, that on the 13th the force under General +Fraser attacked the enemy, who were very strongly posted within +gunshot of the fortress of Deeg. After hard fighting he completely +defeated them, captured eighty-seven of their guns, and drove them +from under the guns of Deeg, which at once opened fire on us. The +enemy's loss was estimated at two thousand. Ours was not known, +when I left the camp; but it was roughly estimated at over six +hundred in killed and wounded. Among the former, I regret to say, +was General Fraser, who was mortally wounded by a cannon shot, +while leading on his men."</p> +<p>"I am sorry to hear of his loss," General Lake said, "while the +rest of your news is satisfactory, indeed. Reports had reached me +that the Rajah of Bhurtpoor had joined Holkar but, after coming +into Agra and begging that we would accept him as an ally, I had +difficulty in believing that he would have turned against us; +especially as he must have known that, if Holkar was defeated, he +would have to bear the whole brunt of our anger--which he could not +hope to escape, as his territory lies within two or three days' +march of Agra."</p> +<p>The general called his staff, and told them of the brilliant +victory that had been won at Deeg. The news spread rapidly through +the camp, and was greeted with enthusiastic cheers by the troops. +In the meantime Lord Lake had entered his tent, and obtained full +particulars of the battle.</p> +<p>"I was close to General Fraser when he was struck, sir," Harry +concluded. "He and his escort were with the cavalry, when it +charged the second line of their batteries. Five of the escort were +killed; and I may say that the others, led by their havildar, were +among the first in at the guns."</p> +<p>"I have just received news," the general said, "that Holkar +crossed this morning, at Surajepoor; and was believed to be on his +way to Furukabad. He is evidently on the march to Deeg and, if he +joins his troops there, they may attack Colonel Monson's force. +Therefore I intend to leave the tents and infantry to follow; and +shall start at daybreak, with the cavalry and horse artillery; and +hope to overtake him, especially as he has lately moved fast, and +will probably rest a day or two at Furukabad."</p> +<p>The next day the cavalry marched upwards of forty miles and, on +the following morning, continued their journey. They had +fifty-eight miles now before them. With occasional halts they +marched all day, crossed the Ganges at Surajepoor, and pushed on +until within a mile of Holkar's camp. Believing the British to be +many miles away, no precautions had been taken against surprise; +and the first intimation of an enemy being near at hand was the +opening of fire, at daybreak, by Lord Lake's artillery into their +camp--the guns being posted so as to permit the British cavalry to +attack, without coming across the line of fire.</p> +<p>Round after round of grape was poured into the camp; and then +the guns ceased firing, as the six regiments of cavalry dashed in +among the panic-stricken enemy. Scarcely any resistance was +attempted and, in a few minutes, the ground was strewn with dead. +Holkar had mounted and ridden off, with a portion of his cavalry, +before our men entered the camp; and did not draw rein until he +reached Caline, eighteen miles distant. His troops fled in all +directions, hotly pursued by the cavalry, for twelve miles; great +numbers being overtaken and cut down. The cavalry halted from sheer +fatigue, having performed the almost unparalleled march of seventy +miles since their last halting place; an exploit rendered all the +more wonderful by the fact that they had made a march of three +hundred and fifty miles in the preceding fortnight.</p> +<p>Their loss, in the action, was only two killed and twenty +wounded. Holkar's loss was estimated at three thousand killed on +the field; and half of his cavalry, which was previously sixty +thousand strong, were now but scattered fugitives.</p> +<p>That day three royal salutes were fired, for as many victories; +namely, that at Furukabad, that at Deeg, and the capture of +Shaddone--the last of Holkar's fortresses in the south--by Colonel +Wallis. As was expected, Holkar and his cavalry, as soon as they +recovered from their panic, rode to Deeg and joined the remains of +the infantry and artillery there.</p> +<p>General Lake remained a day or two, to rest the troops after +their exertions. The brigade of infantry that, had been left behind +when the cavalry started on their last march, had been ordered to +move rapidly down to Agra; and to escort thence the heavy guns that +would be required for the siege of Deeg and, on the 1st of +December, General Lake joined the force near that fortress. The +battering train arrived from Agra on the 12th, and the trenches +were opened on the following day.</p> +<p>In point of territory, the country ruled over by the Rajah of +Bhurtpoor was a comparatively small one. It was inhabited by a +people called Jats, who differed in many respects from the +communities round them. They were hardy, industrious, and brave; +and had, at one time, taken a prominent share in the wars of that +part of India, and had been masters of Agra. They had lost the +city, however, in 1774; and with it a considerable portion of their +territory. Under the present rajah, however, they had regained some +of their lost ground and, on his entering into an alliance with the +British, he had received a considerable increase of territory.</p> +<p>In these circumstances the defection was wholly unexpected. The +rajah had a standing army of six thousand men; and could, on an +emergency, place fifty thousand in the field. Nevertheless, seeing +how other very much more powerful native princes had been unable to +withstand the British arms, his conduct was not only ungrateful and +treacherous, but wholly unaccountable.</p> +<p>It was necessary for the army to move forward to Deeg with great +circumspection. Holkar's cavalry constantly hovered round them, and +they had to protect an enormous train conveying the siege +appliances and provisions for the force. In view of the +comparatively small equipage now deemed sufficient, in native wars +in India, the size of that which accompanied Lord Lake's army, on +this occasion, appears prodigious. The followers were estimated at +not less than sixty thousand. Besides elephants and camels, a +hundred thousand bullocks were employed on preparations for an +advance into the town.</p> +<p>But, during the night, Holkar and the garrison of Deeg retired, +and made for Bhurtpoor. On the morning of the 25th, therefore, the +British took unopposed possession of Deeg; capturing, there and in +the batteries outside, a hundred guns. A week later, General Lake +moved forward to Bhurtpoor. Holkar, as before, had not entered the +town; but had formed a camp a few miles distant. Here he was able +to maintain himself, for the Rajah of Bhurtpoor had called to his +assistance a great marauding leader, Ameer Khan, who was raiding in +Bundelcund; and also a leader named Bapeejee Scindia; and these, +with the rajah's cavalry and that of Holkar, formed so powerful a +force that the British cavalry were fully occupied in keeping them +at a distance from camp, and in protecting the convoy.</p> +<p>On the day of the arrival of the army before Bhurtpoor, +Harry--who had now been gazetted to the rank of major--was sent to +Agra, thirty-four miles distant, with orders respecting a convoy +that was about to be sent off from there. He was accompanied by +Abdool and ten troopers. At that time Ameer Khan had not appeared +upon the scene, and it was not considered that there was any danger +of the communications with Agra being interfered with.</p> +<p>Harry reached the city in the afternoon, and waited there until +four o'clock next day; seeing that the preparations for the convoy, +which was a very large one, were completed. It started at that +hour, and was to get as far as possible by nightfall; so that it +would be able to reach the camp by the following evening. After +seeing it in motion, Harry started with his escort for the ride +back. He was some ten miles away from the convoy when night fell. +Bhurtpoor, like Deeg, stood on a plain, surrounded by swamps and +morasses; the situation having been chosen from the difficulties +these offered to the advance of an enemy.</p> +<p>After proceeding for five miles farther, Abdool, who was riding +with Harry, said:</p> +<p>"I do not know, sahib, but it seems to me, by the sound of the +horses' hoofs, that we have left the track."</p> +<p>Harry called a halt; and Abdool dismounted, and found that his +suspicion was correct, and that they had certainly left the +road.</p> +<p>"This is awkward," Harry said, "for we do not know how long it +is since we left it, or whether it is to the right hand or +left."</p> +<p>The night was indeed a very dark one, a mist almost covered the +sky, and it was only occasionally that a star could be seen.</p> +<p>"We must go carefully, or we shall fall in one of these +morasses."</p> +<p>Two troopers were sent off, one to the right, the other to the +left. One of them, when he had gone about a quarter of a mile, was +heard to shout that he was fast in the morass. Abdool and four of +the men rode to his assistance, and presently returned with him, +having with the greatest difficulty extricated his horse. Nothing +had been heard of the other trooper. Again and again Harry shouted, +but no reply came back. They waited half an hour, and then +concluded that either the man, on his return, had missed his way +altogether; or that he had fallen into a swamp, when they were too +far off to hear his voice, and had perished there.</p> +<p>Harry again gave the word for them to move on, this time at a +walk. Abdool preceded them on foot. Presently he said:</p> +<p>"The ground is getting softer, sahib. I think that we are +approaching a swamp."</p> +<p>"We had better all dismount," Harry said, setting the +example.</p> +<p>"Now, let each move in different directions, going very +cautiously, and calling out if he comes upon soft ground."</p> +<p>He himself, with two of the troopers, remained with the horses. +One after another, the men came upon swampy ground; one only +continued to find it firm.</p> +<p>"I suppose that that is the way we came into it, Abdool," Harry +said, as the others returned to the horses. "We must follow him, +and will do it on foot. This is getting serious."</p> +<p>For a quarter of a mile, they kept on ground that was +comparatively firm. Then the man ahead of them gave a sudden shout. +He had fallen, waist deep, into a little stream. He was soon hauled +out.</p> +<p>"There is nothing to be done, Abdool, but to halt till morning. +Let us go back, till we can find a piece of ground dry enough to +lie down upon."</p> +<p>They had made, however, little progress when their feet began to +sink up to the ankles.</p> +<p>"It is no use, Abdool. We have evidently lost our bearings, +altogether. We must stay where we are till morning, or we shall get +helplessly bogged."</p> +<p>The hours passed slowly and painfully. From time to time, the +men endeavoured to find firmer ground, but always without success; +and it was with the deepest satisfaction that, at last, they saw +the sky begin to lighten. Half an hour later, they were able to +form an idea of their position.</p> +<p>They were far in what appeared to be a wide morass. There were +pools of water in some places, and it seemed almost miraculous that +they should have succeeded in so far entering the swamp where, even +by daylight, there scarcely seemed a yard of firm ground. Abdool +again went ahead and, step by step, the little troop followed; +frequently having to turn back again, on finding the line that they +were pursuing impassable.</p> +<p>They were still a hundred yards from what appeared to be solid +ground when they heard loud shouts and, looking round, saw some +fifty horsemen skirting the edge of the morass. When they reached +the point opposite to the little party, they dismounted and opened +fire. One of the troopers fell dead, and several of the horses were +hit.</p> +<p>"There is nothing for it but to surrender, Abdool," Harry said, +as some of the troopers returned the fire.</p> +<p>The enemy rode off for a hundred yards; and then, leaving the +horses in charge of a few of their number, they returned to the +edge of the morass, threw themselves down in the long coarse grass, +and again opened fire. Two more of the troopers fell, at the first +discharge. Harry drew out his handkerchief, and waved it.</p> +<a id="PicL" name="PicL"></a> +<center><img src="images/l.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Harry drew out his handkerchief, and waved it." /></center> +<p>"We will not surrender, if they are Holkar's men," he said to +Abdool. "We should only be tortured, and then put to death. If they +are Bhurtpoor's men, we may have fair treatment."</p> +<p>Therefore, as soon as the enemy had stopped firing he +shouted:</p> +<p>"Whose soldiers are you?"</p> +<p>"The Rajah of Bhurtpoor's," was shouted back.</p> +<p>"We will surrender, if you will swear to take us to Bhurtpoor +and hand us over to the rajah. If you will not do so, we will +defend ourselves to the last."</p> +<p>A native officer stood up.</p> +<p>"Assuredly we will take you to the rajah. I swear it on my +faith."</p> +<p>"Very well then, send a man to guide us out of this place."</p> +<p>An order was given. One of the men went back and mounted his +horse, and rode along by the edge of the morass for nearly half a +mile. The others, more slowly, followed him.</p> +<p>"It is clear that this place in front of us is absolutely +impassable," Harry said, "or they would never all move away."</p> +<p>"It is lucky that you have not got your favourite horse today, +sir," Abdool said--for Harry had bought, from one of the cavalry, a +horse that had been captured from the Mahrattas, as one was +insufficient for the work he had to do.</p> +<p>"I should be very glad, indeed, Abdool, if I thought that I was +likely to return to camp soon. But in such peril as this, it is but +a small satisfaction to know that he is safe."</p> +<p>"What do you think of our chances, sahib?"</p> +<p>"I don't think the Rajah of Bhurtpoor will harm us. He must feel +that his situation is almost desperate, and it would put him beyond +the reach of pardon, if he were to massacre his prisoners."</p> +<p>The Jat had now dismounted, and could be seen making his way +towards them on foot; sometimes coming straight, but more often +making long bends and turns. It was evident, by the absence of any +hesitation in his movements, that he was well acquainted with the +morass.</p> +<p>"If that is the only way to us," Harry said, "it is marvellous, +indeed, that we made our way so far."</p> +<p>"I think, sahib, that it was the instinct of the horses. I felt +mine pull at the rein, as I was leading him, sometimes to the right +and sometimes to the left; and I always let him have his way, +knowing that horses can see and smell better than we can and, as we +were all in single file, you followed without noticing the +turns."</p> +<p>In ten minutes the man arrived. He spoke to Harry, but his +language differed widely from either Mahratti or that spoken by the +people of Bengal. However, he signed to the troopers to lay down +their arms and, when they had done so, started to rejoin the +others; and, leading the horses, the party followed. The path was +fairly firm, and Harry had no doubt that it was used by fowlers, in +search of the game with which, at certain seasons of the year, the +lakes and morasses abounded.</p> +<p>When they arrived at the edge of the swamp, where the others +were awaiting them, Harry handed his sword to their leader. He and +his party then mounted and, surrounded by the Jats, rode to +Bhurtpoor. Their entrance was greeted with loud shouts and +acclamations by the populace. Making their way straight through the +town, which covered a large extent of ground, they reached the +palace, a noble building built upon a rock that rose abruptly from +the plain. Ascending the steep path leading to the gate, the party +entered the courtyard. Here the captives remained in charge of the +horsemen, while the leader went in to report to the rajah.</p> +<a id="PicM" name="PicM"></a> +<center><img src="images/m.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: View of the Rajah's Palace, Bhurtpoor." /></center> +<p>Presently he came out, with four of the rajah's guard, and these +led Harry and Abdool into the audience chamber. The rajah, with a +number of personal attendants, entered and took his seat.</p> +<p>"You are an officer in the English army. What is your rank?" the +rajah said in Mahratti.</p> +<p>"I am a major."</p> +<p>"Of what regiment?"</p> +<p>"I am on the personal staff of the general."</p> +<p>"And this man?"</p> +<p>"He is a native officer, at present commanding a portion of the +general's escort."</p> +<p>"How was it that you were alone, last night?"</p> +<p>"I had ridden to Agra, the day before; and was too late, in +starting back, to gain the camp before it was dark. I lost my way +and, finding that we were in the heart of the morass, we were +obliged to wait till morning."</p> +<p>"It is well that you did not try to get out. Had you done so, +none of you would be here now.</p> +<p>"You speak Mahratti like a native."</p> +<p>"I was some years at Poona and, as a child, had a Mahratta woman +as a nurse, and learnt it from her."</p> +<p>The rajah was silent for a minute or two, then he asked:</p> +<p>"Does your general think that he is going to capture my +town?"</p> +<p>"I do not know, but he is going to try."</p> +<p>"He will not succeed," the rajah said, positively. "We gave up +Deeg, because we did not want a large force shut up there. Our +walls are strong but, were they levelled to the ground, we would +still defend the place to the last."</p> +<p>"I am aware that your people are brave, Rajah. They fought well, +indeed; and if Holkar's troops had fought as stoutly, the result +might have been different."</p> +<p>The rajah again sat in thought for some time, then he said:</p> +<p>"I do not wish to treat you harshly. I can honour brave men, +even when they are enemies. You will have an apartment assigned to +you here, and be treated as my guest; only, do not venture to leave +the palace--at least, unless you leave it with me. There are many +who have lost friends at Deeg, many who may lose their lives before +your army retires, and I could not answer for your safety. Would +you like this native officer to be with you?"</p> +<p>"I should esteem it a great favour, Rajah. He has been with me +for several years, and I regard him as a friend. Thank you, also, +for your courtesy to me."</p> +<p>"You will give your promise not to try to escape?"</p> +<p>As Harry believed that, in the course of a short time, the +British would be masters of the town, he assented without +hesitation.</p> +<p>The rajah looked pleased.</p> +<p>"You need be under no uneasiness as to your troopers. They will, +of course, be in confinement but, beyond that, they shall have no +reason to complain of their treatment."</p> +<p>The rajah said a few words to one of his attendants, who at once +motioned to Harry and Abdool to follow him. Harry bowed to the +rajah and, with Abdool, followed the attendant. He was taken to a +commodious chamber. The walls and divans were of white marble; and +the floor was paved with the same material, but in two colours. The +framework of the window was elaborately carved, and it was evident +that the room was, at ordinary times, used as a guest chamber.</p> +<p>The attendant left them, for a few minutes.</p> +<p>"This is better than I had even hoped for, Abdool. There can be +no doubt that the rajah, though he put a good face on it, is +desperately anxious; and behaves to us in this way, in hopes that +he may finally obtain better terms than he otherwise would do, by +his good treatment of us."</p> +<p>"He looks honest and straightforward, sahib. 'Tis strange that +he should have behaved so treacherously, just after the Company had +granted him an increase of territory."</p> +<p>"We must make some allowances for him. No doubt, like all the +Indian princes we have had to do with, he is ready to join the +strongest side. He heard that Holkar was coming down with an +immense army, and believed that we should not be able to withstand +him. In that case he, as our ally, would share in our misfortunes. +His territories would be ravaged; and he himself killed or taken +back, as a prisoner, to the Deccan. He was probably hesitating, +when the news came of Monson's disastrous retreat. This doubtless +confirmed his opinion of Holkar's invincibility; and he determined, +as the only way of saving himself, to declare for him."</p> +<p>The attendant now entered, with four men bearing cushions for +the divans and carpets for the floor, large ewers and basins, with +soft, embroidered towels, and a pile of rugs for beds. After he had +retired, Harry went to the window and looked out. Below was the +courtyard, and the room was on the first story.</p> +<p>"Well, if we are to be prisoners, Abdool, we could hardly wish +to be better suited. A fortnight's rest will do us no harm, for we +have been riding hard almost ever since we left Agra with Monson's +force."</p> +<p>"It is well, sahib, that you were with us when we were captured. +Had we been alone, we should have had no mercy. It is because the +rajah regards you as such a valuable prisoner that we have been +spared.</p> +<p>"If you had not given your promise, I think we might have made +our escape."</p> +<p>"We might have done so, Abdool; but if I had not given my +promise, you may be sure that we should not have been lodged so +comfortably."</p> +<a name="Ch19" id="Ch19">Chapter 19</a>: Bhurtpoor. +<p>Half an hour later the attendant entered with two servants, +carrying a large tray with a variety of dishes. After they had +eaten the meal, Harry proposed that they should go up to the top of +one of the central towers of the palace, to obtain a general view +of the country.</p> +<p>"It would be better to do that than to venture down into the +courtyard, at present, Abdool. The sight of our uniforms might give +offence, as it would not be understood that we have the rajah's +permission to move about the palace. We must wait till the man +comes in with the tray. It is possible that he may understand +enough Mahratti to make out what we want, and will show us the way +up.</p> +<p>"It would never do for us to try to ascend alone. We might +accidentally open the door of the rajah's zenana, and then I doubt +if even his desire to hold me as a hostage would suffice to save +our lives."</p> +<p>The attendant understood enough of Mahratti to make out their +request, and offered at once to accompany them. They ascended +numerous staircases until, at last, they reached the flat roof of +the palace; above which rose three round towers, surmounted by +domes. The highest of these had a gallery running round it, a few +feet below the dome.</p> +<p>The attendant led the way to this and, on reaching the gallery, +they found that it commanded a very wide view over the flat +country. The town itself covered a considerable space, the walls +being eight miles in circumference. At the eastern end the fort, a +square and solid edifice, was built on ground somewhat higher than +the town. It had bastions and flanking towers and, as had been +learned from prisoners taken at Deeg, it had a moat much wider and +deeper than that which ran round the town walls. It was built +within these, one side of the square looking across the country, +while the other three were inside. Although the houses were for the +most part scattered, the town had a picturesque appearance, from +the number of trees growing within it.</p> +<p>Towards the northeast the fort of Deeg could be clearly seen +and, to the southwest, the mosques and fort of Agra were faintly +visible in the clear air. At a distance of a mile and a half from +the city was the British camp, with its white tents; and an +irregular black mass marked the low shelters of the camp followers +and the enormous concourse of draught animals.</p> +<p>It certainly seemed a hazardous enterprise for so small a number +of troops to attack such a large and populous town, strongly +fortified, and held by a brave people. Harry remarked on this to +Abdool, but the latter said, confidently:</p> +<p>"They cannot stand against the English, sahib. General Lake has +always been victorious."</p> +<p>"He has so, Abdool, and that is one of the reasons why I do not +feel so certain of his success as I did. He has never yet +undertaken a siege, and his impetuosity and confidence in his +troops may lead him to make an attack with insufficient numbers, +and before it is really practicable. I do not think that this town +is to be taken by storm, and I doubt whether Lord Lake will be +content to wait for regular siege operations, before he tries an +assault.</p> +<p>"Look over there, towards Agra. If I am not mistaken, there is a +large body of cavalry out there. They are certainly not our men, +they are too much mixed up for that. Possibly the rajah may have +obtained the aid of a band of Pindarees, or of some other irregular +troops; at any rate, it will give trouble to the convoy we left +yesterday."</p> +<p>He looked at the camp again.</p> +<p>"There is a stir in the valley, and it looks as if they had +heard of that force out there, and are about to start to attack +it."</p> +<p>Three regiments of cavalry set out. As they were getting ready, +two horsemen could be seen to ride off, at a gallop, from a group +of trees half a mile from the camp. As soon as they approached the +mass of horsemen in the distance, they turned and rode off at full +speed.</p> +<p>"They have evidently no idea of fighting, today, whoever they +are. We may as well go down again, Abdool. This is a grand lookout; +and we shall, at any rate, get a general idea of the direction in +which the attack will be made."</p> +<p>Two days later they were able, from their lookout, to see that +bodies of men came and went between the camp and a group of trees, +halfway between it and the town.</p> +<p>"I expect that they are establishing a battery among those +trees," Harry said, "and it will not be long before the affair +begins."</p> +<p>The next morning, six eighteen-pounders opened fire from the +wood and, in the afternoon, another battery of eight mortars began +throwing shells into the town. The guns on the walls answered, and +a brisk fire was kept up, for the next ten days. During this time +several breaches had been effected in the wall, near the southeast +angle, but the defenders had fixed strong wooden stockades in the +debris every night, so that no attack could be made. In order to +prevent this being done with the last-made breach, it was +determined to assault at once.</p> +<p>The two prisoners had not had the lookout gallery to themselves. +Some of the rajah's officers were constantly there, and any +movement of troops was at once reported by them. The rajah himself +had, twice or thrice, come up for a short time to watch the +operations; and had, on each occasion, talked for some minutes with +Harry.</p> +<p>"Your people will be mad, if they try to attack us through that +small hole in the wall," he said, on the afternoon of the 14th. +"Were they to level a quarter of a mile of the wall, they might +have some chance, though I doubt whether they would ever get a +footing at the top; but with all my soldiers ready to defend that +small opening, and with thirty or forty guns to fire at your people +as they advance, it is as ridiculous as if ten men should attempt +to take this palace. What do you think?"</p> +<p>"I cannot say, Rajah. From here I am unable to see what is +taking place at the walls, nor how wide is the breach you speak of, +nor how deep the ditch beyond; therefore I can give no +opinion."</p> +<p>"The English are brave fighters," the rajah said. "They have +taken places in a few hours that seemed impregnable, but they +cannot perform impossibilities. Our walls are defended by forty +thousand men and--although in the open field I do not say that you +might not defeat us, seeing how your troops are disciplined, while +with us each man fights for himself--when it is a question of +holding a wall or defending a breach, I can trust my soldiers. We +are twice as numerous. We have heavier guns, and more of them, than +you have and, as I told you, the English will never get into +Bhurtpoor."</p> +<p>At seven o'clock in the evening, a deep and almost continuous +roar of guns broke out.</p> +<p>"The assault has begun!" Harry exclaimed. "We shall not see +much, but we may get some idea as to how things are going from the +lookout."</p> +<p>It was too dark for the movements of troops to be seen, but the +quick flashes of the guns on either side, and a play of flickering +fire along the top of the wall showed that the storming party was +approaching. The attack was made in three parties: one advanced +against a battery which the defenders had established outside the +walls, at a spot where its fire would take in flank any force +advancing against the point towards which the fire of the English +guns had been directed; another was to attempt a gateway near the +breach; while the central column, consisting of five hundred +Europeans and a battalion of Sepoys, was to attack the breach +itself.</p> +<p>For a time the roar of firing was incessant. The alarm had been +given as soon as the British columns advanced from the wood. +Notwithstanding this, the right column advanced straight against +the battery, captured it, and spiked the guns. The left column, as +it approached the gate, came upon a deep cut filled with water and, +having no means of crossing this, they moved to the support of the +force attacking the breach. This had been greatly delayed. The +ground to be crossed was swampy, with many pools and, in the +darkness, numbers lost their way, and the force arrived at the +point of attack in great confusion.</p> +<p>A small party of twenty-three men only--of the 22nd Regiment, +under Lieutenant Manser--who formed the forlorn hope, crossed the +ditch, breast high in water, and mounted the breach. In the +confusion that reigned among the troops, some of the officers had +lost their way, and there was no one to assume the command or to +give orders; and Lieutenant Manser, finding that he was +unsupported, and could not with a handful of men attempt to attack +either of the bastions, from which a terrible fire was being +maintained, made the men sit down and shelter themselves as well as +they could, in the debris of the breach; while he himself recrossed +the ditch to summon up the support. In this he failed. All order +was lost, and the men who formed the forlorn hope were at last +called back, and the whole force retired, suffering heavily from +the terrible fire to which they were exposed. Eighty-five were +killed and three hundred and seventy-one wounded.</p> +<p>A more deplorable and ill-managed assault was never made by +British troops. As Harry had thought possible, Lord Lake had +treated the capture of Bhurtpoor as if it had been but a little +hill fort. He had made no attempt to carry out regular siege +operations but, trusting to the valour of his troops, had sent them +across a considerable distance of plain swept by the enemy's fire, +to assault a breach defended by some of the bravest tribesmen of +India; and had not even issued commands which would have ensured +order and cohesion in the attack.</p> +<p>The lesson that had been taught was not sufficiently taken to +heart. Some more batteries were placed in position and, on the +16th, opened a heavy fire against the wall on the left of the +former breach, which had been repaired during the two nights +following its successful defence. So heavy was the fire from the +new batteries that another breach was made in the course of a few +hours. The Jats stockaded it during the night, but the timbers were +soon knocked to fragments and, for five days, a continuous +cannonade was maintained and a large breach formed.</p> +<p>It was necessary to find out how wide the ditch was, and three +native cavalry and three British troopers, all dressed as natives, +suddenly dashed out of the camp. At a short distance behind them a +number of Sepoys ran out, as if in pursuit, discharging their +muskets as they did so. Just as the six horsemen arrived at the +ditch, two of the troopers' chargers were made to fall. The native +havildar shouted to the soldiers on the wall to save them from the +accursed feringhees, and show them the nearest entrance to the +city. The soldiers pointed to a gate near the breach and, as soon +as the men had again mounted, the havildar rode with them along the +ditch, and made the necessary observations.</p> +<p>Then they put spurs to their horses, and rode off--the Jats, on +seeing that they had been deceived, opening upon them with +musketry. Their excitement and fury, however, disturbed their aim, +and the six horsemen rode into camp unhurt, and reported that the +ditch was not very wide, and that it did not seem to be very +deep.</p> +<p>Portable bridges were at once constructed. These were to be +carried by picked men, who were instructed in the best method of +pushing them over the ditch. To prevent the recurrence of the +confusion that had been, before, caused by the assault in the dark, +it was determined that it should be made in daylight and, on the +following afternoon, the storming party moved forward. It consisted +of four hundred and twenty men from the European regiments, +supported by the rest of those troops, and three battalions of +native infantry. Colonel Macrae was in command. The whole of the +batteries opened fire, to cover the movement and keep down that of +the besieged.</p> +<p>On arriving at the ditch, it was found that the portable bridges +could not be thrown across as, during the night, the garrison had +dammed up the moat below the breach and turned a quantity of water +into it, thus doubling both its width and depth. A few gallant +fellows jumped in, swam across, and climbed the breach; but there +were few capable of performing this feat, encumbered by their +muskets and ammunition; and Colonel Macrae, seeing the +impossibility of succeeding, called them back, and retired under a +tremendous fire from the bastions and walls.</p> +<p>This assault was even more disastrous than the last, for the +loss in killed and wounded amounted to nearly six hundred. Harry +was deeply disappointed at these reverses, which the rajah himself, +with great glee, reported to him with full details.</p> +<p>There had been other fighting: two British convoys on their way +from Agra had been attacked by the horsemen of Ameer Khan, Holkar, +and the rajah. The first might have been successful, for the twelve +hundred bullocks were escorted by only fourteen hundred men; and +these, although they might have defended themselves successfully, +were unable to keep the convoy together. The animals, excited by +the firing, were rushing off in all directions when, fortunately, a +body of our cavalry which had been sent out to meet the convoy +arrived, and drove off the enemy with a loss of six hundred +men.</p> +<p>The next morning a general movement could be seen in the British +camp. The rajah, who was immediately informed of it, came up to the +lookout.</p> +<p>"The English general has given it up as hopeless," he said. +"They are about to march away."</p> +<p>"It looks like it, Rajah," Harry admitted, "but I should hardly +fancy that Lord Lake will take such a step. He has tried to take +the town by a sudden assault, and I think that he will not retreat +until he has attempted to do so by a regular siege operation."</p> +<p>An hour later the whole of the tents had been pulled down and, +presently, both the troops and the huge body of followers and +cattle were in motion.</p> +<p>"They are not going to Agra," the rajah said, after watching +them for some time; "they must be going to march to the north."</p> +<p>Two hours later, the great procession had arrived at the north +of the town. There they halted, and their long lines of tents began +to rise.</p> +<p>"They are going to try another point," the rajah exclaimed. +"Truly they are brave men, but they will be repulsed, as they were +before."</p> +<p>"I fancy they will begin in another way, Rajah, and will make +regular approaches, so that they will not have to pass across the +open ground swept by your guns."</p> +<p>This indeed turned out to be the case. The trenches were at once +opened and, ere long, two batteries were established at a distance +of four hundred yards from the wall. Two days later another, still +nearer, opened fire and, by the 20th of February, the trenches had +been pressed forward to the edge of the ditch; and a mine sunk, +with the intention of blowing up the counterscarp, and so partially +filling the ditch. The troops intended for the assault took their +places in the trenches at an early hour, so as to be ready to +attack as soon as the repairs made by the garrison in the breach +during the night could be destroyed by the batteries.</p> +<p>The Jats, however, had been rendered so confident by their +previous successes that, during the night, they made a sally, crept +into the advanced trench--from which the workmen had been +withdrawn--and started to demolish the mine and carry off the +tools. As the storming party moved down through the trenches the +Jats--who had made the first sally--joined by a considerable number +from the town, rushed forward and attacked them; and inflicted +considerable loss before they were repulsed. A portion of them, +however, still held the advanced trench; and when the 75th and +76th, who were at the head of the column, were ordered to dislodge +them, they hesitated.</p> +<p>The repulse of the former attacks had had its effect, and the +troops, believing that the enemy would have filled the mine with +powder, and would explode it as they advanced, refused to move. The +remaining men of the flank companies of the 22nd stepped forward +but, as they were too few to attack so considerable a number of the +enemy, the 12th and 15th Sepoy Regiments were called to the front, +and these advanced gallantly.</p> +<p>The enemy were driven from the trench at the point of the +bayonet. The ditch, however, had again been flooded, and was found +to be impassable; but there was a bastion to the right that had +been damaged by the breaching guns, and the troops at once made for +this. A few men of the 12th managed to climb up, and planted the +flag of their regiment on it but, as only one could mount at a +time, and the Jats were swarming down upon them, they were +recalled; and the force again drew off, having lost, in killed and +wounded, nearly nine hundred men. Notwithstanding the terrible +losses that had been suffered, General Lake persevered in his +intention to carry the place at the point of the bayonet; and on +the following day the batteries opened their fire on the bastion +that had been nearly carried by the 12th Native Infantry.</p> +<p>The position had become serious. The cavalry had, a fortnight or +three weeks before, defeated those of the rajah and his allies with +heavy loss, and brought in a convoy; and Ameer Khan, who had only +joined the Rajah of Bhurtpoor in the hope of plunder, had deserted +his ally and ridden off, with his following and a large body of +Pindarees, with the intention of devastating and plundering the +district of Rohilcund. Three regiments of British cavalry, under +General Smith; and as many of native horse, with artillery, +followed on his track and, after a pursuit of three weeks, at last +came up with him, annihilated his infantry and captured his guns. +His cavalry, however, for the most part escaped, as the horses of +the pursuers were completely worn out.</p> +<p>They returned to the British camp, after more than a month's +absence, from a chase extending over seven hundred miles.</p> +<p>Their absence had greatly increased the difficulties in the +British camp. Without their protection, the danger to which convoys +were exposed was great. Provisions were running short in camp, the +ammunition was almost exhausted, and numbers of the guns were +rendered unserviceable. These circumstances afforded the only +excuse that can be made for a fresh attack upon Bhurtpoor.</p> +<p>It was even more disastrous than those which had preceded it. +The 75th and 76th Regiments, deeply ashamed of their conduct on the +preceding occasion, volunteered to a man; and they, with the other +European regiments and five regiments of Sepoys, under the command +of Colonel Monson, moved out to the attack at three in the +afternoon. Nothing could exceed the courage which they displayed, +and their conduct rivalled that of the storming party at the siege +of Badajos; but they were fighting against impossibilities. The +bastion could not be climbed. Some of the soldiers drove their +bayonets into the wall, one above another, and attempted to climb +up by these steps; but were knocked down by logs of wood, large +shot, and other missiles. Others attempted to get in by the shot +holes that had been made, here and there; but as only one man could +enter at a time, they were killed before a footing could be +obtained. All this time a terrible fire was maintained by the enemy +against our men, showers of grape and musketry swept their lines, +pots filled with gunpowder and other combustibles exploded among +them, bales of cotton dipped in oil fell flaming in their +midst.</p> +<p>For two hours the hopeless conflict was maintained. Then the +order was given to retire, and the men fell back; having lost, in +killed and wounded, nine hundred and eighty-seven of their +comrades. Thus the four assaults had cost the army three thousand +two hundred and three of its best soldiers. The force was still +further weakened by a large number of deaths from dysentery and +fever, the result of the miasma rising from the marshes.</p> +<p>The camp was now shifted to drier ground, to the northeast of +the town, the movement being harassed by the enemy's horse. The +rajah, who had been jubilant over his success, looked grave when +the new encampment was fixed.</p> +<p>"They have not done with me, yet," he said to Harry. "Why do +they not go, now they see that they cannot take the place?"</p> +<p>"Because were they to do so, Rajah, half India would be in arms +against them in a fortnight. Never before, since we set foot in +India, have such defeats been inflicted upon us; and Lord Lake +cannot march away and so own himself entirely beaten. Never before +has an English general out here so blundered.</p> +<p>"Still, although unable to take Bhurtpoor, General Lake knows +well enough that he can easily repulse all attacks on his camp. He +knows, too, that the greatest efforts will be made to send up +reinforcements. Bombay, Madras, and Calcutta will all send every +available man and, ere long, his losses will be much more than +counterbalanced by the forces that will join him. We have, during +our history, suffered several disasters; but never one that has not +been redeemed and revenged."</p> +<p>"Holkar was here, this morning," the rajah said, after a long +silence. "He came to congratulate me on our victory. After he had +done so, he asked that you and your troopers should be handed over +to him. I need scarcely say that I refused. You were captured by my +men and, though I am in alliance with Holkar, I do not owe him any +fealty. It is I who have aided him, while he has given but little +assistance to me; and would, I am sure, ride away and leave me to +my fate, if he knew where to go to. But his country, his capital, +and his forts are all in the hands of the English; and he stays +near here because it is, at present, the safest place for him."</p> +<p>On the 23rd of March, the British cavalry returned. For a month +no attempt had been made to renew the siege, but the camp still +remained as a threat against Bhurtpoor, and the time had not been +lost. Convoys, escorted by strong parties of infantry, had come out +from Agra. Supplies of all kinds, battering guns and ammunition, +arrived almost daily. The armourers worked at the old guns, and +made them again fit for service; and everything showed that, when +the attack was renewed, it would be much more formidable than +before.</p> +<p>The cavalry were given a few days' rest after their arrival but, +before daybreak on the 29th, they moved out in hopes of surprising +Holkar. He had, however, scouts well posted far out; and he +effected his retreat with the loss, only, of some of his baggage +animals. He retired some miles to the southwest, and again pitched +his camp.</p> +<p>On the 2nd of April the cavalry, with the horse artillery, again +moved out at midnight and, this time, came upon the enemy +undiscovered; and before they had time to mount their horses, the +cavalry charged them in front and on both flanks, while the +artillery swept the camp with grape. Great numbers were slain, both +in Holkar's camp and in the pursuit, which was continued for eight +miles. The whole of the camp equipage, the greater portion of the +guns, and the bazaars were captured and, during the next day or +two, large bodies of Holkar's troops, considering his case +hopeless, deserted him. When in his flight he crossed the Jumna, he +had but eight thousand horse, five thousand infantry, and thirty +guns; the remains of the great army with which he had crossed the +river, confident of victory, the year before.</p> +<p>On the following day Lord Lake, who had received considerable +reinforcements, again moved his camp to the southeast of the city, +and prepared to resume active operations against it. The rajah had, +for some time, been in a despondent state and, the next morning, he +came alone to Harry's room.</p> +<p>"I want to have a talk with you," he said; and Abdool, seeing +that the conversation was to be a private one, at once left the +room.</p> +<p>"My friend," he said, "I have, for some time, felt that my cause +was becoming hopeless. I have never supposed that, after failing +four times, and each with heavy loss, your people would continue +the siege. But I see now that I was wrong. We might repulse another +attack, and another; but of what use would it be? Your people would +only become stronger, after each defeat.</p> +<p>"I see now that I have acted as one bereft of sense. I had no +quarrel with the Company. They added to my territory, they had +promised to defend me against all attacks but, when I heard that +Holkar was approaching with so vast an army, I thought that surely +he would recapture Delhi, and drive you out of Agra, and perhaps +down to Calcutta; or that, after taking Agra, he would turn against +me. And so, foolish man that I was, I joined him.</p> +<p>"And now I would fain make peace, and I pray you to go to your +general, and ask what terms he will grant. They may be hard, but I +am in no position to stand out. Ameer Khan has been chased and +routed, Holkar is little better than a fugitive, and owns only his +horse and saddle. There is no one to whom I can look for aid. I put +myself in the English general's hands."</p> +<p>"I will willingly go, Rajah. No doubt it has been supposed, for +weeks, that I and my escort have perished. And when the general +hears of the kind treatment that we have received--a treatment so +different from that we should have met with, had we fallen into the +hands of Holkar--it will, I feel certain, have an effect on the +terms that he will lay down."</p> +<p>Harry had, each day, paid a visit to the troopers, who were +confined in a large airy room opening into the courtyard. They had +been well fed, and had been permitted to go out into the open air, +for several hours a day, and to mingle freely with the Jat +soldiers. Half an hour after his interview with the rajah Harry +went down there. To his surprise, he found Abdool and the troopers +all mounted, as well as a party of the rajah's own guard.</p> +<p>Before leaving, the rajah had returned his sword to him. As he +rode through the streets, followed by his own troopers and with the +rajah's guard riding ahead, the people looked on with curiosity, +but evinced no animosity against him. Successful as had been the +defence, the fact that the British had received great convoys and +reinforcements had caused a feeling of apprehension as to the final +result. Food, too, was becoming very scarce for, although small +quantities were brought in by the side opposite to that occupied by +the camp, this was altogether insufficient for the needs of a large +population, swollen by the fighting men of the whole country.</p> +<p>Even these supplies had ceased, since the return of the British +cavalry and the rout of Holkar, and the fighting men were losing +heart. Their losses had been small, in comparison with those of the +besiegers; but the defeat of Holkar impressed all with the fear +that the British must, in the end, triumph. They had already done +more than any who had tried to stem the tide of the British power. +They had repulsed them four times, and their defence would be the +subject of admiration for all the native peoples of India. +Therefore, when it was known that the captured English officer was +leaving the town, with his troopers, the idea that the end was near +caused general satisfaction.</p> +<p>Harry left the town by the gate nearest to the British +encampment. The rajah's guard still accompanied him, but halted +halfway between the walls and the camp; and there dismounted, the +officer in command telling Harry that his orders were to wait until +his return. Numbers of the soldiers had gathered at the edge of the +camp, on seeing the party riding towards it; and when the guard +fell back, and Harry with his troop approached, and it was seen +that it was a British officer with an escort of native cavalry, a +loud cheer broke out.</p> +<p>Most of the soldiers knew Harry by sight, and all had heard of +his being missing with his escort and, as the time had passed +without any news of him arriving, it was supposed that all had been +killed by the horsemen of Ameer Khan or Holkar. Many of the men of +the 5th Native Cavalry were in the crowd, and these shouted +welcomes to their comrades; while several English officers ran up +and shook Harry by the hand.</p> +<p>"I have been a prisoner in Bhurtpoor," he said, in answer to the +questions. "I have been extremely well treated, but I cannot tell +you more now. I am here on a mission to the general."</p> +<p>Curious to ascertain the cause of the cheering, General Lake +appeared at the entrance of his tent, just as Harry rode up.</p> +<p>"Why, Major Lindsay," he exclaimed, "where did you spring from? +We had all given you up as dead, long ago!"</p> +<p>"I have been in Bhurtpoor, sir, and am now here in the character +of the rajah's ambassador."</p> +<p>"That is good news. But come in and tell me, first, about +yourself."</p> +<p>Harry briefly related how they had lost their way in a morass, +and had been attacked in the morning; and that, finding it +impossible to make a way out, he had surrendered. He spoke in the +warmest terms of the rajah's treatment of him and his +followers.</p> +<p>"We were treated as guests, rather than prisoners, sir; and +lived in a handsome room, got excellent food, and had the run of +the palace. Scarce a day passed on which I did not have a talk with +the rajah, himself."</p> +<p>"It is an exceptional case, indeed," the general said. "Had you +fallen into Holkar's hands, or into those of Ameer Khan, very +different treatment would have awaited you. And now, what has the +rajah to say for himself?"</p> +<p>"His plea is, sir, that he believed Holkar's army would +assuredly sweep us away; and that, in that case, he would have been +attacked by him for having formed an alliance with us."</p> +<p>"His position was certainly an awkward one," the general said. +"And now, what does he propose?"</p> +<p>"He does not propose anything, sir. He places himself in your +hands. He admits his faults; and is, as he may well be, heartily +sorry for them. He believes that he might still defend his town for +some time but, his allies having been thrashed, he sees that, in +the end, he must be overpowered. He asks that you will formulate +your demands."</p> +<p>"Your news is very welcome, Major Lindsay; for indeed, I am as +anxious to be off as the rajah can be to see me go. Scindia is +giving trouble again, and has written a letter couched in such +arrogant terms that it is virtually a declaration of war. I could +not leave here until the town was captured; for it would have +seemed to all India that we had been defeated, and would have been +a terrible blow to our prestige. Therefore, at all costs, I must +have taken the place. It will, however, be another fortnight before +we shall be ready to recommence the siege.</p> +<p>"I do not wish to be hard on the rajah, and I know that the +authorities at Calcutta view the case in the light that he has put +it, and are willing to believe that his turning against us was not +an act of deliberate treachery, but a fear of Holkar.</p> +<p>"His treatment of you and your escort is, in itself, much in his +favour. Of course in this, as in similar cases, we could deprive +him of his dominions, and send him a prisoner to a fortress; but +the Governor General is most anxious that this business should be +concluded. It has already cost us more men than we lost in the +overthrow of Tippoo's power. He has given me authority to negotiate +a peace, if the rajah offers to surrender. He has named the terms, +approximately; and the rajah's treatment of you will certainly +induce me to minimize the demands, as far as possible, especially +as it is most important that the force shall be available +elsewhere.</p> +<p>"Of course, the grant of territory made to him will be +rescinded. In the second place, we must, until all the terms of the +treaty are fulfilled, retain the fortress of Deeg, which we shall +garrison strongly. The rajah must pay twenty lakhs of rupees +towards our expenses. We shall not demand this at once, but three +lakhs must immediately be paid. One of his sons must be given up to +us, as a hostage for the fulfilment of the treaty. The rajah must +also bind himself not to enter into any communication with any +princes, or chiefs, at war with us.</p> +<p>"I think that you will allow that those are not hard +conditions."</p> +<p>"Certainly not, sir; and I have no doubt that the rajah will +agree to them, without hesitation."</p> +<p>"I will have a draft of the treaty drawn up, in half an hour," +General Lake said. "Of course, you will carry it back to the +rajah?"</p> +<p>"Certainly, sir. Fifty men of his bodyguard are waiting for me, +halfway between the camp and the town."</p> +<p>Harry left the tent, and found the officers of the staff and +many others waiting to welcome him back.</p> +<p>"They will all want to hear what you have to tell, Major," the +head of the staff said. "You had best go into the mess tent, and +hold a durbar."</p> +<p>The tent was soon filled with the officers, with the exception +of the chief of the staff, who had been sent for by the +general.</p> +<p>"In the first place, Lindsay," one of the officers said, "we +take it that you have come on a mission from the rajah. Does he +mean to surrender?"</p> +<p>"He is willing to surrender, if the terms are not too +onerous."</p> +<p>The announcement was received with a loud cheer. There was not +one present but believed that the next assault would be successful, +but the cost of the previous attacks had been so great that it was +believed the city would not be taken, unless with great slaughter. +The unhealthiness of the country had told upon their spirits, even +more than the repulses; and the news that they would soon be able +to march away created the deepest satisfaction.</p> +<p>"And now, for your own adventures, Lindsay."</p> +<p>"My adventures began and ended in a swamp. It was four o'clock +before the convoy left Agra, and I then rode on fast till it was +night, when I was still five or six miles from the camp. It was +pitch dark, and we lost our way and, presently, found ourselves in +a deep swamp, and could discover no way of getting out of it."</p> +<p>Then he told them of the attack; how they had been obliged to +surrender and had been guided out of the morass.</p> +<p>"When we reached the rajah's palace, all our troubles were +ended. A handsome chamber was placed at my disposal, and the +havildar of my escort was allowed to be with me. I was treated +rather as an honoured guest than as a prisoner. I lived on the fat +of the land, and was permitted to wander about the palace, and +spent most of my time in the gallery round the highest tower, where +I could see all that was going on. The rajah himself was most kind +to me, and enquired daily if my wants were supplied to my +satisfaction. He would often come up to the gallery and chat with +me, sometimes for an hour. The troopers, also, were all well +treated."</p> +<p>"You have received a great deal of misplaced commiseration," one +of the officers said. "We have all thought of you as having been +tortured to death, either by Holkar or Ameer Khan; and now we find +you have been better housed and better fed than we have.</p> +<p>"And you are going back again, I suppose, with the chief's +answer?"</p> +<p>"Yes; I must not tell you the conditions, but I think I can say +it is certain that the rajah will not hesitate a moment in +accepting them."</p> +<p>"Well, he deserves to be let off leniently, if only for his +treatment of you and your men. It is a contrast, indeed, to what +has generally happened to officers who have fallen into the hands +of any of these native princes."</p> +<p>There was a general talk until an aide-de-camp came in, and +asked Harry to accompany him to the general's tent.</p> +<p>"There is the draft of the treaty," the latter said. "I hope +that there will be no delay in returning a prompt answer. I want +either yes or no. These Indian princes are adepts in the art of +prolonging a negotiation. If you see that he has any disposition to +do so, say at once that I have told you that the terms I offer are +final, and must be accepted or rejected."</p> +<p>"Very well, sir. I hope to return with the answer tomorrow, +early."</p> +<p>And, followed by his escort, Harry rode for the city. The +rajah's guard mounted, as soon as they saw him coming, and escorted +him to the palace. The street leading to it was now thronged with +people, and it was evident to Harry that, among the great majority, +there was a feeling of hope that he was the bearer of acceptable +terms; for among the poorer class the pressure of want was already +severe.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch20" id="Ch20">Chapter 20</a>: Home.</h2> +<p>Harry, on arriving at the palace, at once went to the rajah's +room.</p> +<p>"Well, sahib, what terms does your general offer me?"</p> +<p>"Terms which I think, sir, you will have no hesitation in +accepting. Here is a draft of the treaty that he proposes."</p> +<p>The rajah glanced at the document, which was written in English +and in Mahratti, for none of the general's staff understood the Jat +language. Harry saw, at once, that the terms were far less onerous +than the rajah had expected; for his face brightened, and the air +of despondency that it had for some days expressed passed away.</p> +<p>"It is better than I had looked for," he said. "As a rule, the +English have not been merciful to those they have subdued. That the +territory they gave me would be taken away was a matter of course. +The sum to be paid is heavy but, as they have given me time, I can +manage to collect it without much difficulty. This is all that is +demanded; and that they should hold Deeg and my son as a hostage, +until the money is paid, is fair and just."</p> +<p>"I thought that the conditions would meet with your acceptance, +Rajah; and I may say that your kindly treatment of myself and my +escort has gone some way in mitigating the terms that would +otherwise have been demanded. But the general said that you must +understand that he can make no further diminution of his demands; +and that tomorrow he expects an answer, yes or no."</p> +<p>"I reply yes, at once, Major Lindsay. A load has been lifted +from my mind. I shall still have my liberty, my capital, and my +people; and am grateful, indeed, for the clemency that has been +shown me. I had relied somewhat upon your good offices; but had +small hopes that, after what has taken place, I should be offered +such terms."</p> +<p>The rajah at once sent for his sons--of whom Harry had seen but +little, for they were always on the walls, encouraging the troops +and seeing that the breaches were repaired, as soon as made. The +rajah read to them the draft of the treaty. They too were visibly +relieved; for they had talked the matter over with their father, on +the evening before, and had agreed that, probably, he and his +family would be kept as prisoners in a fortress, that the +fortifications of the town would be destroyed, and some nominee of +the British Government created rajah.</p> +<p>"The general has not said which of my sons is to be +hostage?"</p> +<p>"No, Rajah, he left that to you. I may say that he took the same +view of your position as that which you, yourself, explained to me; +namely, that you joined Holkar simply from the apprehension that, +if the English were defeated by him, he would next turn his arms +against you."</p> +<p>"Which of you will go?" the rajah asked his sons.</p> +<p>All expressed their willingness.</p> +<p>"Then I will choose my third son," he said to Harry; "the others +will be more useful here."</p> +<p>Harry rode out, early in the morning, with the news that the +rajah accepted the terms offered to him. In an hour the treaty was +written out formally, the general affixing his signature. Harry +returned to the city, this time accompanied by a general officer, +and both signed their names as witnesses to the rajah's signature. +Some bullock carts, with chests containing the three lakhs of +rupees, were already in the courtyard; and with these and the +rajah's third son, Harry returned to camp.</p> +<p>The army afterwards started to meet Scindia, who had advanced +with his army, with the intention of joining Holkar and assisting +the Rajah of Bhurtpoor. He had, for some time, been almost openly +hostile; had sent his relation, Bapeejee Scindia, with a strong +body of horse, to act in concert with the cavalry of Ameer Khan and +Holkar; and had sent letters to the Government which amounted to a +declaration of war. But when Holkar reached his camp a fugitive, +and he heard that Bhurtpoor had surrendered, he at once fell back; +and endeavoured to make excuses for his conduct, alleging that +Bapeejee Scindia has acted entirely without orders, and that he had +himself advanced only with the intention of mediating between the +Rajah of Bhurtpoor and the English.</p> +<p>No one was deceived by his assurances, but it was thought +politic to pretend to believe them. The Marquis of Wellesley's term +of office had expired, and a successor had come out, with orders to +carry out a policy differing widely from that which he had +followed. The latter had enormously extended the area of the +British possessions in India, the British troops had won a +marvellous series of victories; but this had been effected at an +immense cost and, so far, the revenue drawn from the conquered +provinces barely sufficed to pay the expenses of occupation and +management.</p> +<p>The treaties, too, that had been entered into with various +rajahs and chiefs might, at any moment, plunge the Government into +war in support of our allies and, accordingly, Lord Cornwallis was +again sent out, to carry out the policy of maintaining friendly +relations with the native powers, and of abstaining from +interference in their quarrels with each other. Indeed, a breathing +time was urgently needed. The rapid progress of the British arms +had aroused a feeling of distrust and hostility among all the +native princes; and it was necessary to carry out a strong but +peaceful administration in the conquered provinces, to give +confidence to their populations, to appoint civil officers of all +sorts; and so to divide the troops that, while they ceased to +threaten any of the native powers, they should maintain order in +the new dependencies not yet reconciled to the change of masters, +or capable of appreciating the benefits arising from orderly +rule.</p> +<p>Accordingly, Scindia's excuses were accepted. A considerable +portion of the dominions that had been wrested from him were +restored; and even Holkar, whose atrocious cruelties to all the +British soldiers and officers who fell into his hands should have +placed him beyond the pale of pardon, was again invested with most +of his former possessions--with the object, no doubt, of +counterbalancing Scindia's power as, had Holkar been driven to take +refuge in the north, as a fugitive, Scindia would have become +paramount among the Mahrattas.</p> +<p>One of the last acts of the Marquis of Wellesley was to offer +Harry a high civil appointment, in one of the new provinces; but he +declined it, upon the ground that he was about to apply for leave +to go to England. He had, indeed, already formed the idea of +quitting the service altogether. The presents he had received from +Bajee Rao, on his first arrival at Poona, and on being invested as +Peishwa; and the still larger one that Nana Furnuwees had given +him; had been, for the most part, invested in the purchase of land +at Bombay. In the eight years that has elapsed, the town had +greatly increased in size; and the land had been gradually sold, at +four or five times the sum that it had cost, and the proceeds sent +to England. Harry was, therefore, a rich man.</p> +<p>He had been constantly engaged in service for nearly nine years +and, as he had never been settled long enough to have an +establishment of his own, his military pay had much more than +sufficed for his wants; and the large increase which he had +obtained, when engaged in civil or special duty, had been entirely +laid by. There was, then, no further occasion whatever for him to +remain in the service. At any rate, he determined to obtain a three +years' leave; and before the end of that time, he could finally +make up his mind on the subject.</p> +<p>A month, therefore, after the siege of Bhurtpoor was concluded, +Harry had an interview with Lord Lake, and requested three years' +leave to go to England.</p> +<p>"You have well earned it, Major Lindsay. Your services have been +very great and, if the war was likely to continue, I should have +asked you to reconsider your request; but as, from what I hear, a +complete change of policy has been determined upon, and it has been +decided that there shall be no further extension of our territory, +there is likely--at any rate for a time--to be a period of peace. +The board of directors desire to consolidate the territory that we +have gained, and wish to abstain from all embarrassing alliances, +or from any meddling in the affairs of the native princes.</p> +<p>"You, who have been so long at Poona, and understand the shifty +nature of Scindia, Holkar, and indeed of all the native princes, +must know well that these orders are much more easily given than +carried out. If our restraining hand is removed, we shall have +Scindia, and Holkar, the Peishwa, the Rajahs of Berar, Kolapoore, +and Bhurtpoor at each other's throats again. They will treat our +declarations, that we desire peace, only as a proof of weakness; +and may, at any moment, lay aside their private quarrels to unite +against us; and, unlikely as it may seem at present, my conviction +is that there will never be permanent peace in India until we are +masters from Cape Comorin to the borders of Afghanistan. It may be +another half century, and will certainly only be after hard +fighting; but I believe that, until all India acknowledges our +rule, there will not be anything like permanent peace within its +borders."</p> +<p>"I am afraid that that is so, sir. The only really sincere and +honest man that I have met, bent upon serving his country, was Nana +Furnuwees and, in consequence, he was equally hated by the Peishwa, +Scindia, and Holkar. I was certainly extremely well treated by the +Rajah of Bhurtpoor; but this was, no doubt, largely due to the fact +that he thought that, if matters went against him, his courtesy to +me would tell in his favour, while ill treatment or murder would +have put him beyond the pale of forgiveness."</p> +<p>"Your application comes at a fortunate moment, for I am sending +a regiment of Bombay cavalry back to their presidency, and it will +be well that you should travel with it through Jaipore and Ajmeer +to Surat, and so on to Bombay, which will save you a long +journey--unless, indeed, you wish to travel by way of the +Ganges."</p> +<p>"I would much rather go to Bombay, sir. I wish to visit the good +people who brought me up. I will ask you to allow Havildar Abdool +to go with me. I don't know whether he will wish to take his +discharge, but I should think he would do so and, as he belongs +properly to the Bombay army, and is indeed a Mahratta, I am sure +that he would prefer to settle there."</p> +<p>"I will certainly do that, and will see that the services he has +rendered are mentioned in his discharge; and I will, myself, write +to the Government of Bombay, saying that I had intended to grant +him a small holding, as a reward for his fidelity; and asking that +this may be bestowed upon him, either in the Concan, or in some of +the territory that we have become possessed of above the +Ghauts."</p> +<p>Abdool was greatly moved, when Harry told him that he had +applied for and obtained leave.</p> +<p>"You will take me with you, master, I hope?"</p> +<p>"I think, Abdool, that you would do better to remain in your own +country. You would feel very strange in England, among people none +of whom speak your language. You would also feel the cold, +greatly."</p> +<p>"I would rather go with you, sahib. Were I to go back to my +native village, I should find myself among strangers, for I have +now been nearly fifteen years away; and what should I do without +employment?"</p> +<p>"Well, we will think it over, Abdool. Lord Lake kindly offered +to write a letter in your favour to the Government of Bombay, +asking them to give you the charge of a village district, which +would keep you in comfort."</p> +<p>"I should not be comfortable if I were not with you, sahib."</p> +<p>"Well, Abdool, we are going with the Bombay regiment which +starts tomorrow, and shall travel through Central India to Surat. +There I shall leave them in the Concan, and cross the Ghauts to +Jooneer, and pay a visit to Soyera, Ramdass, and Sufder, and see +them all comfortably settled; and then go down to Bombay. So we +shall both have plenty of time to think it over."</p> +<p>Accordingly the next morning Harry, after saying goodbye to all +his friends, started. The journey to Surat was nearly seven hundred +miles, and was accomplished without incident. On their arrival at +Jowaur, they ascended the Ghaut to Trimbuck, and then rode to +Jooneer, and another half hour took them to the farm.</p> +<p>Harry was received with delight by its occupants. It was six +years since he had parted from his old nurse at Bombay, and he had +greatly changed since then. He was now a tall and powerfully-built +man.</p> +<p>"And so you are already a major, as was your dear father!" she +said, after the first greetings were over. "It seems to me but a +short time since you were an infant in my arms. But what brings you +here?"</p> +<p>"There is going to be a general peace for some time, Soyera; and +I have had enough of fighting, and am on my way home to England, +where I hope to learn something about my father's and mother's +families. I have three years' leave, and as I am as rich as I could +desire to be, possibly I may return here no more."</p> +<p>"I shall grieve, Harry; but it is natural for you to do so, and +I shall feel happy in the thought that you have become all your +parents could have wished, and that I have been the means, in some +way, of bringing this about."</p> +<p>"In all ways, Soyera. I owe not only my life, but all that I am, +to you. Had you been without friends, I would have taken you to +England. But happily you are among your own people, and have now +been living with your good brother and his wife for four-and-twenty +years; and I can leave you, knowing that you are perfectly +comfortable and happy.</p> +<p>"Have you any desire to better your condition, Ramdass? I owe +you, too, so much that it would greatly please me to be able, in +some way, to show that I am grateful for the shelter you gave me +for so many years."</p> +<p>"There is nothing," Ramdass said. "I have all that I can desire. +Had I more, I should have greater cares. Those who are rich here +are not the best off, for it is they who are squeezed when our +lords have need of money. My sons will divide my land when I die, +and my daughter is already married and provided for. Had I a larger +farm, I should need more hands and have more cares. The bounty +which you before gave me has gratified my utmost desires."</p> +<p>A messenger had already been sent off to Sufder, who rode in the +next day. He, too, was well and comfortable, and was viewed as a +man of importance by the villagers.</p> +<p>Harry remained there four days longer, then bade farewell to +those who had proved themselves his true friends, and rode down to +Bombay. On the road he had a long talk with Abdool, who remained +fixed in his determination to accompany him to England, if he would +take him.</p> +<p>"Very well, Abdool, so it shall be. But if, at any time, you +have a longing to come back to your own country, I will pay your +passage, and give you enough to make you comfortable for life."</p> +<p>Harry remained but a few days in Bombay, wound up his affairs +with his agents there and, being fortunate in finding a vessel that +was on the point of sailing, took passage in her for England. The +voyage was an uneventful one. They experienced bad weather off the +Cape but, with that exception, carried all canvas till they entered +the Channel. Here they encountered another gale, but arrived safely +in the Thames, four months after leaving Calcutta.</p> +<p>It was now January, 1806, and after going with Abdool to an +hotel, Harry's first step was to procure warm clothing for himself +and his follower. The weather was exceedingly cold, and although +Abdool had, as he considered, wrapped himself up in an +extraordinary way, he was unable to keep warm, except when sitting +in front of a huge fire.</p> +<p>"Is it always like this, sahib?" he asked, in a tone of great +anxiety.</p> +<p>"Oh no, Abdool, only for perhaps two months out of the twelve. +You will find it pleasant enough in summer and, after two or three +winters, will get accustomed to the cold. You had better not think +of going out, till you get your clothes. I will have a tailor in to +measure you. I should say that it would be more convenient for you +to take to European clothes. You will not find them uncomfortable, +as you have for so many years been accustomed to uniform. They are +much more convenient for getting about in, and you will not be +stared at in the streets; as you would be if you went about in +native costume. However, you can wear your own turban, if you +like."</p> +<p>Abdool willingly consented to this proposal. A tailor was +consulted, and suggested loosely-cut trousers and a short jacket, +similar to that now worn by the French zouaves, and differing but +little from that of the Indian cavalry. In this, with the addition +of a long and warmly-lined cloak, Abdool professed his readiness to +encounter any degree of cold.</p> +<p>As soon as his own clothes had arrived, Harry went to Leadenhall +Street and, sending in his card, was shown into a large room, where +two or three of the governors of the Company were seated, +considering the reports that had been brought from India in the +ship in which Harry had arrived.</p> +<p>"Your name is familiar to us, Major Lindsay," the gentleman at +the head of the table said cordially. "You have been mentioned in +numerous despatches, and always in terms of the highest +commendation. First, by the Governor of Bombay; then by the Marquis +of Wellesley, for the manner in which you secured the neutrality of +Berar, during the Mysore war; then again, if I remember rightly, +for obtaining concessions for our occupation of the island of +Singapore, when we are in a position to undertake it. He also sent +us your report of that business, by which it appeared that you had +some extremely perilous adventures, entailed by your zeal to obtain +the Rajah of Johore's consent to the cession. Sir Arthur Wellesley +mentioned your name in his despatch after Assaye, and Lord Lake's +despatches make numerous mention of your service with him. +Altogether, I do not think that any officer has received such warm +and general commendation as you have done."</p> +<p>"Thank you, sir. I have always done my best, and been +exceptionally fortunate in being engaged in services that gave me +an opportunity of, in some degree, distinguishing myself."</p> +<p>"Pray sit down, Major. My colleagues and myself will be glad to +know a little more about you. When the Governor of Bombay informed +us that he most strongly recommended you for a commission, he +mentioned that you were a son of Major Lindsay who, with his wife, +was killed in the Concan, at the time of that most unfortunate and +ill-managed expedition to Poona. We had never heard of your +existence before. Had it been brought before our notice we should, +of course, have assigned a pension for your bringing up and +education."</p> +<p>Harry, at his request, gave a very brief outline of the manner +in which he had been saved by his nurse, who had taught him +English, and prepared him for entering the service when he came of +age.</p> +<p>"I have returned to England," he said, "partly to find out, if +possible, any of my relatives who may exist on my father's or +mother's side."</p> +<p>"I have no doubt that we shall be able to put you in the way of +doing so. Doubtless, at the time of your father's and mother's +death, we notified the fact--at any rate to your father's +family--and received communications from them. We will cause a +search to be made. Where are you staying?"</p> +<p>Harry gave the name of the hotel.</p> +<p>"We will send you word there, as soon as the records have been +searched. At any rate, it is certain that the birthplace of your +father and the residence of his father will be found, at the time +he obtained his appointment as cadet. I have no doubt that the +letter communicating his death was directed to that address."</p> +<p>The next day a messenger brought a note to Harry's hotel:</p> +<p>"Dear Major Lindsay:</p> +<p>"We find that your grandfather was a landowner in Norfolk. His +address was Parley House, Merdford. The letter sent to him with the +account of your father's death was answered by a son of his; who +stated that his father had died, two months before, and enquired if +any news had been obtained of an infant who, they had learned, had +been born some months before the murder of its parents. We replied +that the report to us had stated, 'body of infant not found.' We, +at his request, wrote to Bombay on the subject.</p> +<p>"The answer was as before that, although the body of the child +was not found with those of its father and mother, no doubt +whatever was entertained that it had been killed. It was some days +after the catastrophe happened before any report of it reached the +authorities, when a party of cavalry were at once sent out. Many of +the bodies had been mutilated, and some almost devoured by jackals. +No doubts were entertained that the infant had been altogether +devoured."</p> +<p>"The remains were all buried at the spot where they were found; +and a stone was erected, some months afterwards, by the officers of +his regiment; recording the deaths of Major Lindsay, his wife and +child, at that spot."</p> +<p>Two days later Harry took his place with Abdool on the north +coach and, after spending a day at Norwich, drove in a post chaise +to Merdford. Here he heard that Parley House was two miles distant +and, without alighting, drove on there. It was a fine house, +standing in a well-wooded park. On a footman answering the bell, +Harry handed him his card, "Major H. Lindsay."</p> +<p>He was shown into a library and, a minute later, a gentleman +entered. He was about sixty years of age, of the best type of +English squire; tall, inclined to be portly, with genial face and +hearty voice.</p> +<p>"We are of the same name, I see, Major Lindsay."</p> +<p>"We are, sir; and, strange as it may appear to you, of the same +blood."</p> +<p>"Indeed!" he said, shaking hands with his visitor. "What is the +relationship? It must be a distant one, for I was not aware that I +had any connection of your rank in the army.</p> +<p>"By the way, now that I think of it, I have seen, in the reports +of our campaigns in India, the name of a Captain Lindsay frequently +mentioned."</p> +<p>"I am the man, sir."</p> +<p>"I am glad to know that one who has so distinguished himself is +a relation of mine, however distant."</p> +<p>"It is not so very distant, sir. In point of fact, I am your +nephew."</p> +<p>The squire looked at him in bewilderment.</p> +<p>"My nephew!" he repeated.</p> +<p>"Yes, Mr. Lindsay. I am the son of your brother, also Major +Lindsay, of the Bombay Army. I returned from India but ten days +ago; and learned for the first time, from the governors of the +Company, the family to which my father belonged. Had it been +otherwise, I should have written to you, years ago, to inform you +that I was the infant who was supposed to have perished, when its +father and mother were killed."</p> +<p>Harry thought that the colour paled a little in his uncle's +face.</p> +<p>"You have, of course, proofs of your identity?" the latter said, +gravely.</p> +<p>"Certainly. I have the evidence of the Indian nurse who saved my +life, and brought me up; that of a cousin of hers, who was an +officer of the band that attacked my father; and that of her +brother, with whom I resided from the time she brought me +there--three days after the death of my parents--until I was twelve +years old, when she placed me with a lady in Bombay, for two years +and a half, to be taught to speak English perfectly. After that, I +was some three years in the service of the Peishwa.</p> +<p>"These depositions were, by the order of the Governor of Bombay, +sworn to by them before the chief justice there. My identity was +fully recognized by the Governor of Bombay, who at once recommended +me for a commission, in consequence of some service that I had +rendered to the Government; and the recommendation was accepted by +the court at home, and my commission dated from the time of my +appointment by the Governor."</p> +<p>"I see a likeness in you to my brother who, when I last saw him, +was about your age. I do not say that you are exactly like him, but +your expression and voice both recall him to me. As a matter of +form, of course, I should like to see these depositions. I am +curious to know the details of your adventures.</p> +<p>"But that will keep. I will at once introduce you to my wife and +daughter. Like your father, I was unfortunate in my children. I +know that you had several brothers and sisters born before you, all +of whom died in their infancy. I did not marry until some years +later than he did. I had two boys, who were both drowned when out +in a fishing boat at Yarmouth. My daughter was the youngest."</p> +<p>He rose from his seat and led the way to the drawing room, where +a lady some fifteen years younger than himself was seated at work, +with a girl of nineteen or twenty.</p> +<p>"My dear," he said, "I have a surprise for you. This gentleman, +Major Lindsay, who has distinguished himself greatly in India, is +our nephew. He claims, and I may say at once that I see no reasons +whatever to doubt it, that he is the child of my brother Harry who, +as you may remember, was, with his wife, killed in India a few +months after we were married. My enquiries resulted in leaving, as +it seemed, no room for doubt that the infant had perished with his +parents, and that its body had been devoured by wild beasts.</p> +<p>"But it now appears that he was saved by his nurse, who happened +to have a relation who was an officer in the party that attacked +Harry's camp. She took him to the house of a brother, and there he +was brought up; and he afterwards went down to Bombay, where he +satisfied the Governor as to his identity, and received a +commission. I have not heard further particulars yet, but Major +Lindsay--</p> +<p>"I suppose I shall come to call you Harry, in time, nephew--</p> +<p>"Will tell us all about it, himself. I am sure that you will +join with me in welcoming Harry's boy heartily, and in my +satisfaction that he has proved himself well worthy of his race."</p> +<p>Harry was a little surprised at detecting a tone of warning, in +the manner in which the last words were spoken; and at the +agitation with which Mrs. Lindsay had listened to her husband. This +disappeared, however, as she held out her hand to him.</p> +<p>"I welcome you back to England, nephew. Yours is indeed a +strange story. I know that my husband was greatly attached to your +father."</p> +<p>"Yes, I loved him dearly," Mr. Lindsay said, "and can see a +resemblance to him in his son. He is taller and more strongly built +than Harry was. I do not say that the features are very like, but +there is something in the expression of his face, and tone of his +voice, that recalls him to me strongly.</p> +<p>"This is my daughter Mary. We called her so after your mother. +It was a fancy of mine, for I knew her well before she married your +father. The two families were on terms of great friendship, and for +her sake, as well as for my brother's, I gave her the name."</p> +<p>"I am glad to meet you, cousin," the girl said, holding out her +hand frankly to him. "It is, of course, a great surprise to us, and +I can hardly realize yet that you are really my cousin."</p> +<p>"Now, Harry," his uncle said briskly, "I will give orders to +have your things taken out of the post chaise, and carried up to +your room. We shall be having lunch directly and, after that, you +shall tell us your story at full length."</p> +<p>Ten minutes later they sat down to lunch. When Harry rejoined +the others, he fancied he saw traces of tears in the eyes of Mrs. +Lindsay and her daughter; and he thought that perhaps they had been +thinking that, if their own boys had lived, they also would be +young men now.</p> +<p>After the meal was over, the squire said:</p> +<p>"Now, wife, we will all adjourn to the library. It is the most +comfortable room in the house, and the cosiest--just the place for +listening to a long story. I have told William to get two more +armchairs there, so that we can sit round the fire--which is quite +the proper thing to do when a story has to be told."</p> +<p>The light had faded out of the sky, and the curtains were drawn; +but the squire would not have candles lighted, saying that the +blaze of the fire was the proper thing to listen by. Harry related +fully the manner in which he had been brought up and trained, by +his nurse, for the time when he could present himself at Bombay; +and also his adventures in the Deccan, which had paved the way for +his obtaining a commission. He told the rest more briefly, though +he was obliged, in answer to the questions of the others, to go +somewhat further into his personal adventures.</p> +<p>"It is a wonderful story," the squire said, when he at last +finished. "There are many things that you have cut very short; and +which you must, some other time, tell us fully. Your poor father +would have reason to be proud of you, indeed, had he lived to see +you now. He thought that he was wonderfully fortunate, in obtaining +a majority at the age of thirty-five; but you have got it ten years +younger.</p> +<p>"Well, we have not spared you, for we have kept you talking over +four hours."</p> +<p>Dinner passed off quickly, and when wine had been placed on the +table, and the servants retired, Mr. Lindsay said:</p> +<p>"You will understand, Harry, that although absolutely certain +that you are my nephew, I do not resign, and offer you my seat at +the head of the table, until the documents that you have brought +are formally examined."</p> +<p>"What do you mean, uncle?" Harry asked, in surprise.</p> +<p>"I mean, of course, that as your father's son, this estate is +yours, and not mine."</p> +<p>Harry rose to his feet.</p> +<p>"I don't understand you, uncle. I never dreamt for a moment--" +and he stopped.</p> +<p>"That your father was my eldest brother. Yes, he was a year +older than myself; and at his father's death would, of course, have +succeeded to the estate. But he died before him; and you, as his +son, will of course succeed."</p> +<p>"But I could not dream of such a thing, uncle. Do you think that +I have come down here with the idea of turning you and my aunt and +cousin out, and taking your place? If I had known it, I should not +have come down at all. It would be monstrous if, after you have +been master here for twenty-five years, I should come down to claim +the estate from you."</p> +<p>"I am glad to hear you say so, Harry," his uncle said, gravely. +"Naturally, it did not occur to us that you were ignorant that your +father was the eldest son. We thought, from your manner, that you +would be willing to arrange everything on amicable terms; for of +course, legally, you are entitled to all the back rents, which I +honestly say I could not pay. Your aunt's little fortune, and my +portion as younger brother, will be amply sufficient to keep us +three comfortably; but as to paying the arrears, it would be +impossible."</p> +<p>"My dear uncle, the whole thing is impossible. I have returned +home with an ample amount of money to live in luxury. I did not +think it necessary to mention, in my story, that Nana Furnuwees +presented me with a considerable sum of money; and Bajee Rao did +the same. This I invested in land close to Bombay, which is now +covered with houses, and fetched five times the price I gave for +it. In addition to this, I have been in civil employment for the +past six years and, as I have always been on the move, I have never +had the expense of an establishment, and have thus saved some five +thousand pounds.</p> +<p>"Therefore I am master of something over ninety thousand pounds; +and can, if I do not return to India--which I have, I may say, +already made up my mind not to do, buy an estate. I have had very +much more than my share of adventures, and have marvellously +escaped. If I return, my luck might change.</p> +<p>"At any rate, I have had enough of it. I have made a very +handsome fortune and, even putting everything else aside, would +rather know that I owed all I possessed to my own good luck and +exertions, than to an accident of birth."</p> +<p>"But that cannot be, lad."</p> +<p>"Well, uncle," Harry said obstinately, "if you choose to see +things in that light, all I can say is, that I shall at once throw +up my leave and return to India; and if you choose to leave this +house and estate, it may go to wreck and ruin for anything I +care."</p> +<p>"Well, well, my boy, we won't say anything more about it, now, +but will leave it to the lawyers to settle."</p> +<p>"I shall certainly employ no lawyers in the matter, uncle. By +all means, obtain your solicitor's opinion as to whether the proofs +I have put in your hands are sufficient to establish, beyond all +fear of doubt, the fact that I am the son of Major Harry Lindsay. +It matters not whether my father was your elder brother or not, to +anyone except ourselves. I am perfectly satisfied with having +proved, to the satisfaction of all in India, that I am the son of a +brave officer. My object in coming to England was not to see +whether I was entitled to money, but simply to find friends among +the families of my father and mother; and if it were to end in my +turning you, my aunt, and cousin out of the place you have believed +to be your own, for so many years, my visit here would be a dismal +failure, and I should bitterly regret having set foot in +England.</p> +<p>"Please do not let us say anything more about it. The matter, so +far as I am concerned, is concluded; and nothing that can possibly +be said will shake my determination, in any way."</p> +<p>In order to break the silence, for Mrs. Lindsay and Mary were +both wiping their eyes, Harry went on:</p> +<p>"Now that we have finished this question, uncle, I will tell you +how I got the ratification of the treaty, that will some day be +made for our occupation of Singapore, from the Rajah of Johore. As +far as the excitement went, it certainly was the most stirring +business that I was ever employed in;" and he at once launched into +the narrative of his capture, the escape, the adventure with the +tiger, and the defence of Johore.</p> +<p>"It seems to me, Harry," his uncle said, when he had finished, +"that you not only have as many lives as a cat, but as a whole +posse of cats. I cannot but think that it was a wild business, +altogether; and that, having got the assent of the gentleman with +the very hard name, there was no occasion to bother about the +rajah, who seemed to have no authority whatever."</p> +<p>"But he might have got it, you see, uncle. It may be ten years +or more before a governor general will be able to attend to the +business, and it was as well to get it settled, once for all."</p> +<p>"What did the rajah present you with for saving his +capital?"</p> +<p>"He offered me a number of weapons and things but, as I had no +place to put them in, I could not be bothered with them. I do not +think that cash was at all a strong point with him, and I don't +suppose he had a thousand dollars in his treasury. I was a little +surprised that he did not offer me half a dozen young ladies as +wives; but had he done so, I should have resisted the temptation, +as they would have been even more trouble than the weapons."</p> +<p>"You never fell in love with any of the Indian beauties, cousin +Harry?"</p> +<p>"I have never seen any to fall in love with. The ladies of the +upper class in India, whether Hindus or Mussulmans, always go +closely veiled; and as to the English ladies, in the first place +they were nearly all married, and in the second place I went as +little into society as I could help, being on the Governor +General's staff, and nearly always away on duty. Certainly I never +saw anyone who caused my pulse to beat faster; which I believe, +from what I have read, is one of the many symptoms of being in +love."</p> +<p>Harry then enquired about his mother's relations.</p> +<p>"I, unfortunately, can tell you nothing about them. She was an +only daughter when she married your father. Both her parents died, +years ago. They only had a lease of the place they lived in, and I +really cannot tell you anything whatever about them. There was a +son, who would, I suppose, succeed to any property his father left; +but he was a ne'er-do-well, and was seldom at home, and I have +never seen or heard of him, since."</p> +<p>"Well, I am quite content with the relations that I have found, +and shall not trouble myself to seek further."</p> +<p>Four days passed. At the end of that time, Mr. Lindsay received +a letter from his lawyer and, after breakfast, asked Harry to go +into the library with him.</p> +<p>"About that business that we were talking about, I have today +received an answer to my letter. My lawyer is of opinion, from what +I told him of these papers, that your case is a strong one; and +that though, if I chose, I might give you a great deal of trouble, +he thinks that in the long run you would succeed. As I don't want +to give you trouble; and as I am, myself, as completely convinced +that you are my brother Harry's son as that I am his brother, the +matter may now be considered as finally settled."</p> +<p>"Quite so, uncle. I don't want to hear anything more about it. +If you choose to be obstinate, and turn out, I can only say that I +shall be sorry that the old house, where my father and you were +both born, should go to wreck and ruin. At any rate, let the matter +rest, for the present. Possibly it may yet be arranged to the +satisfaction of all parties."</p> +<p>"It will certainly not be arranged to my satisfaction," the +squire grumbled, "unless you become master here."</p> +<p>"We will talk it over, in six months' time."</p> +<p>He related the conversation to his wife who, to his surprise, +looked pleased.</p> +<p>"Nothing could be better," she said; "it would be an excellent +plan."</p> +<p>"What on earth do you mean, Louisa?"</p> +<p>"You are as blind as an owl, Peter. There can be only one +meaning in what he has said, only one arrangement that could be +satisfactory to all parties."</p> +<p>"And what is that, my dear?" the squire said, a little +testily.</p> +<p>"I mean, of course, that he should marry Mary."</p> +<p>The squire sat down suddenly, in his surprise.</p> +<p>"Such an idea never entered my head," he said. "But why should +you think of it? Why, the young fellow has only been here four or +five days!"</p> +<p>"That is quite long enough for him to see that Mary is a +charming girl," Mrs. Lindsay said. "He has seen very little of +ladies; and he is, no doubt, struck with the idea that she is an +extremely nice girl. I don't say that he is in love with her, yet; +but quite enough, perhaps, to foresee that, ere long, he will feel +more ardent than he does at present; and that it is the only +arrangement possible, since we are determined to turn out for +him.</p> +<p>"Now mind, Peter, you do not throw out the slightest hint, +either to him or to her, that such a solution has ever occurred to +us. It might spoil everything. It would make Mary shy with him, and +might cause him to be awkward. You give your consent to remain +here, for six months. By that time the question will have solved +itself. If I am wrong, no harm will have been done. If I am right, +the arrangement will be, as he says, a satisfactory one to us +all."</p> +<p>"I was always against cousins marrying," Mr. Lindsay said, +doubtfully.</p> +<p>"Don't be absurd, Peter. I don't say that, in some cases, there +is not a good deal to be said against it; but where both the man +and the woman are healthy, and come of healthy families, no union +can be more likely to be happy."</p> +<p>"But I think I have heard you speak--"</p> +<p>"Never mind what you have heard me speak, sir; circumstances +alter cases, and this case is altogether an exceptional one.</p> +<p>"We certainly could not wish for a finer young fellow as Mary's +husband. He is a desirable partner, in every respect. He is himself +well off and, although I quite agree with you that, whatever it +costs, we must give the dear old place up, I grant that it would be +very pleasant to avoid so terrible a wrench.</p> +<p>"The one thing I don't like is that man of his. He moves about +so noiselessly that it is like having a ghost in the room."</p> +<p>"It is you who are absurd, now, Louisa," the squire said. "The +man has, over and over again, proved himself to be a most faithful +friend to him. I own that it is a little trying to see him standing +behind Harry's chair, without moving, except when his master wants +something; but after all, that is less fidgety than having footmen +dodging about you.</p> +<p>"Well, Louisa, I will take particular heed of what you have +said, and will be mum as a mouse, until we see how the cat +jumps."</p> +<p>Mrs. Lindsay's prevision turned out correct. Harry remained a +week longer at Parley House. Then he heard that an estate was for +sale, two miles away, and drove over quietly to inspect it. Ten +days later he wrote from London, and said that he had bought the +place.</p> +<p>"He is the most obstinate fellow that I ever knew!" Mr. Lindsay +exclaimed, as he read the letter.</p> +<p>"What is it, dear?"</p> +<p>"He has bought Hungerford's place, and never gave me the +slightest hint of his intentions."</p> +<p>"Well, I think it will be very nice to have him so near us," +Mrs. Lindsay said, decidedly.</p> +<p>"Oh, of course, and it will be so handy for--"</p> +<p>"Peter, will you take another cup of tea?" his wife said, +sharply; and Mr. Lindsay knew that he had nearly put his foot in +it.</p> +<p>A week later Harry came down again--to see, as he said, what +required to be done to the house; and he needed no persuasion to +stay at Parley Hall. To decide upon matters, he needed a great deal +of advice, both from Mrs. Lindsay and Mary; and then, having put +the house into the hands of the builders and decorators, he went up +to town again. However, he frequently ran down to see how things +were getting on and, before the alterations were all finished, Mary +had consented to become its mistress.</p> +<p>Abdool preferred to remain as his master's body servant, as +before. He had even, before leaving India, picked up a certain +amount of English; and had improved considerably his knowledge of +the language during the long voyage. Mary, fortunately, had not +shared in her mother's feelings about him but, on learning that he +had, several times, saved Harry's life, had taken to him greatly. +He never returned to his native land.</p> +<p>And although Harry and his wife talked, sometimes, of making the +voyage to India, they were never enabled to accomplish it for, as +children grew up around them, Mary was no longer free to travel. +Abdool's devotion was now divided between his master and mistress +and the little ones, who were never tired of listening to his +stories of their father's adventures.</p> +<p>Mr. and Mrs. Lindsay lived to an advanced age, and died within a +few weeks of each other. Harry then moved to Parley Hall, and sold +the estate he had bought; as the management of one estate, and his +duties as county magistrate, occupied as much time as he cared to +give. The only complaint made against him, by his neighbours, was +that he did not care for field sports. But, as he said, he had seen +enough bloodshed to last him his lifetime; and would neither shed +the blood of bird nor beast, though he had no quarrel with those +who liked that sort of thing.</p> +<p>He kept up a regular correspondence, to the end of her life, +with his old nurse; and his interest in his Indian friends never +abated. He was an old man when the Indian mutiny broke out, and two +of his grandsons took their share in the long siege of Delhi, and +served with both the forces which, under Sir Colin Campbell, fought +their way into Lucknow, and finally broke the neck of the Sepoy +mutiny.</p> + +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE POINT OF THE BAYONET***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 20729-h.txt or 20729-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/7/2/20729">http://www.gutenberg.org/2/0/7/2/20729</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/20729-h/images/1.jpg b/20729-h/images/1.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b8ecfdd --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/1.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/2.jpg b/20729-h/images/2.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..89edf65 --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/2.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/a.jpg b/20729-h/images/a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2478552 --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/a.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/b.jpg b/20729-h/images/b.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d787007 --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/b.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/c.jpg b/20729-h/images/c.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c2d2e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/c.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/d.jpg b/20729-h/images/d.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f5ec42e --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/d.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/e.jpg b/20729-h/images/e.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b5a39b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/e.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/f.jpg b/20729-h/images/f.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e1f2143 --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/f.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/g.jpg b/20729-h/images/g.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d661a3d --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/g.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/h.jpg b/20729-h/images/h.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..18f3a57 --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/h.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/i.jpg b/20729-h/images/i.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..fe608c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/i.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/j.jpg b/20729-h/images/j.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..41ba26d --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/j.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/k.jpg b/20729-h/images/k.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a2aeed2 --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/k.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/l.jpg b/20729-h/images/l.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3fb7b0f --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/l.jpg diff --git a/20729-h/images/m.jpg b/20729-h/images/m.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..057a05c --- /dev/null +++ b/20729-h/images/m.jpg diff --git a/20729.txt b/20729.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..81fc19f --- /dev/null +++ b/20729.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15543 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, At the Point of the Bayonet, by G. A. Henty, +Illustrated by Wal Page + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: At the Point of the Bayonet + A Tale of the Mahratta War + + +Author: G. A. Henty + + + +Release Date: March 3, 2007 [eBook #20729] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII) + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE POINT OF THE BAYONET*** + + +E-text prepared by Martin Robb + + + +Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this + file which includes the original illustrations. + See 20729-h.htm or 20729-h.zip: + (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/7/2/20729/20729-h/20729-h.htm) + or + (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/7/2/20729/20729-h.zip) + + + + + +AT THE POINT OF THE BAYONET: + +A Tale of the Mahratta War + +by + +G. A. HENTY. + +Illustrated by Wal Paget. + +1901 + + + + + + + +Contents + + Preface. + Chapter 1: A Faithful Nurse. + Chapter 2: A Strange Bringing Up. + Chapter 3: A Change In Affairs. + Chapter 4: A British Resident. + Chapter 5: Down To Bombay. + Chapter 6: In The Company's Service. + Chapter 7: An Act Of Treachery. + Chapter 8: Nana's Release. + Chapter 9: A Popular Tumult. + Chapter 10: A Mission By Sea. + Chapter 11: A Prisoner. + Chapter 12: The Defence Of Johore. + Chapter 13: The Break Up Of The Monsoon. + Chapter 14: The Great Andaman. + Chapter 15: Assaye. + Chapter 16: A Disastrous Retreat. + Chapter 17: An Escape. + Chapter 18: An Awkward Position. + Chapter 19: Bhurtpoor. + Chapter 20: Home. + + + +Illustrations + + For a year he worked with the shikaree. + Harry went up to him and salaamed. + Harry . . . saw a party of soldiers coming along the road. + There was a little haggling over the terms. + Harry ran up to the proclamation and tore it down. + As he rode through the streets he saw . . . how fierce a + feeling of resentment had been excited by the news. + 'Well, sir, I will now return to shore,' the governor said. + Without a cry the rajah fell back, shot through the head. + The rattle of musketry broke out again. + Plan of the Battle of Assaye. + Plan of the Battle of Laswaree. + Harry succeeded in crossing the river. + Abdool at once slipped down. + Harry drew out his handkerchief, and waved it. + View of the Rajah's Palace, Bhurtpoor. + + + +Preface. + + +The story of the war in which the power of the great Mahratta +confederacy was broken is one of the most stirring pages of the +campaigns which, begun by Clive, ended in the firm establishment of +our great empire in the Indian Peninsula. When the struggle began, +the Mahrattas were masters of no small portion of India; their +territory comprising the whole country between Bombay and Delhi, +and stretching down from Rajputana to Allahabad; while in the south +they were lords of the district of Cuttack, thereby separating +Madras from Calcutta. The jealousies of the great Mahratta leaders, +Holkar and Scindia, who were constantly at war with each other, or +with the Peishwa at Poona, greatly facilitated our operations; and +enabled us, although at the cost of much blood, to free a large +portion of India from a race that was a scourge--faithless, +intriguing and crafty; cruel, and reckless of life. The Mahrattas, +conquering race as they were, yet failed in the one virtue of +courage. They could sweep the land with hordes of wild horsemen, +could harry peaceful districts and tyrannize over the towns they +conquered; but they were unable to make an effective stand against +British bayonets and British sabres. They were a race of +freebooters; and even the most sentimental humanitarian can feel no +regret at the overthrow of a power that possessed no single claim +to our admiration, and weighed like an incubus upon the peoples it +oppressed. The history of the Mahrattas, as written by Grant Duff, +whose account I have, throughout, followed, is one long record of +perfidy, murder, and crime of all sorts. + + + +Chapter 1: A Faithful Nurse. + + +On a swell of ground, in the wild country extending from Bombay to +the foot of the Ghauts, stood a small camp. In the centre was a +large pavilion; the residence, for the time, of Major Lindsay, an +officer whose charge was to keep the peace in the district. It was +no easy matter. The inhabitants, wild and lawless, lived in small +villages scattered about the rough country, for the most part +covered with forest, and subject to depredations by the robber +bands who had their strongholds among the hills. Major Lindsay had +with him a party of twenty troopers, not for defence--there was +little fear of attack by the natives of the Concan--but to add to +his authority, to aid in the collection of the small tax paid by +each community, and to deter the mountain robbers from descending +on to the plain. He generally spent the cool season in going his +rounds while, during the hot weather, his headquarters were at +Bombay. + +He had with him his wife and infant child. The child was some three +months old, and was looked after by an ayah, who had been in Major +Lindsay's service ten years; for three elder children had been born +to him--all, however, dying from the effects of the climate before +reaching the age of five. The ayah had nursed each, in succession, +and had become greatly attached to the family, especially to her +youngest charge. She had come to speak English well; but with the +child she always talked in her native tongue, as the major saw the +advantage it would prove to the boy, when he grew up, to be able to +speak fluently one, at least, of the native languages. + +The nurse was a Mahratta. She had been in the service of the +British Resident at Poona and, when he was recalled, had entered +that of Major Lindsay, at that time a captain who acted as +secretary to the Resident. + +A young officer from Bombay had just ridden out, to spend a day or +two with the major, and was sitting with him at the entrance to the +tent. + +"The news from the army," he said, "is most unsatisfactory. As you +know, to the astonishment of everyone Colonel Egerton was appointed +to the command, in spite of the fact that he was so infirm as to be +altogether unfit for active service; and Mostyn, our late Resident +at Poona, and Carnac accompanied him as deputies of the Council." + +"That is altogether a bad arrangement," the major said. "It has +always been a great disadvantage for a general to be accompanied by +civilians, with power to thwart his combinations. Against Mostyn's +appointment no one could raise any objection as, having been for +some years at Poona, he understands the Mahrattas, and indeed is +much liked by them, so that in any negotiations he would have far +more chance of success than a stranger; but Carnac is hot headed +and obstinate, with a very high idea of his own importance, and it +is certain that there will be difficulties between him and +Egerton." + +"I am sorry to say, Major, that these anticipations were very +speedily verified. As you know, the advance party landed at Aptee, +on November 23rd, and seized the roads over the gorge; and on the +25th the main body disembarked at Panwell. No sooner had they got +there than there was a quarrel between Egerton and Carnac. Most +unfortunately Mostyn, who would have acted as mediator, was taken +ill on the very day after landing, and was obliged to return to +Bombay; and I hear there is hardly any chance of his recovery. The +army did not reach the top of the Ghauts till the 23rd of +December--instead of, at the latest, three days after landing--and +actually spent eleven days before it arrived at Karlee, only eight +miles in advance of the Bhore Ghauts. Of course this encouraged the +enemy, and gave plenty of time for them to assemble and make all +their arrangements and, when we last heard, they were harassing our +march. For the past two days no news has arrived, and there seems +to be little doubt that the Mahrattas have closed in round their +rear, and cut off all communications." + +"It is monstrous that they should march so slowly. The whole thing +has been a hideous blunder, and the idea of encumbering a force of +four thousand men with something like thirty thousand camp +followers, and with a train of no less than nineteen thousand +bullocks, to say nothing of other draught animals, is the most +preposterous thing I ever heard of. In fact, the whole thing has +been grossly mismanaged. + +"I don't say that the conduct of the Mahrattas has not for some +time been doubtful, if not threatening. It is well known that the +Governor General and the Council at Calcutta have most strongly +disapproved of the whole conduct of the Council at Bombay. Indeed, +no explanation has ever been given as to why they took up the cause +of Rugoba, the scoundrel who grasped the crown; and who was privy +to, if he did not instigate, the murder of his nephew, the young +Peishwa. + +"He was not unopposed, for Nana Furnuwees and Hurry Punt, two of +the leading Mahratta ministers, formed a regency under Gunga Bye, +the widow of the murdered Peishwa. While matters were undecided, +the Bombay Council opened communications with Rugoba, who they +thought was likely to be successful; and promised to assist him, if +he would advance a considerable sum of money, and cede to the +Company Salsette, the small islands contiguous to Bombay and +Bassein, which had been captured from the Portuguese by the +Mahrattas--an altogether inexcusable arrangement, as the Mahrattas +were at peace with us, and Rugoba was not in a position to hand the +islands over. That matter, however, was settled by sending an +expedition, which captured Salsette and Tannah in 1775, four years +ago. Since then Rugoba has become a fugitive and, without a shadow +of reason, is making war against the whole force of the Mahratta +confederacy; who, although divided amongst themselves and +frequently engaged in the struggles for supremacy, have united +against us--for they say that Scindia, Holkar, and Hurry Punt are +in command of their army. To send four thousand men, of whom less +than six hundred are Europeans, against the whole Mahratta power is +a desperate step. + +"I know we have fought and won against greater odds, many times in +the history of India; but our forces have always been well led, +marched with the smallest amount of baggage possible, and made up +for inferiority in numbers by speed, activity, and dash. Here, on +the contrary, we have a force hampered to an unheard-of degree by +baggage and camp followers; with an invalid at its head, controlled +by two civilians; and moving at a rate which, in itself, testifies +to divided councils and utter incompetency on the part of its +commander. It is almost impossible even to hope for success, under +such conditions." + +"The lookout is certainly bad," the younger officer agreed. +"However, before now the fighting powers of the British soldier +have made up for the blunders of his commanders; and we may hope +that this will be the case, now." + +"If a disaster happen," the major said, "we shall have the +Mahrattas down at the gates of Bombay; and as soon as I hear a +rumour of it--and news travels wonderfully fast among the +natives--I shall return to the city." + +"Oh, I don't think you need fear anything of that sort, Major! +Besides, this is not on the direct line between the Ghauts and the +city. And even if they find they cannot push on, I should say our +force would be able to secure their retreat. The Mahratta horse +will never be able to break our squares; but of course, in that +case we should have to abandon all our baggage and baggage +animals." + +"I agree with you that the Mahrattas would doubtless hang on the +skirts of our force, and follow them down the Bhore Ghaut, and so +would not come anywhere near us; but they might detach flying +parties to burn and plunder, as is their custom. Brave as they are, +the Mahrattas do not fight for the love of fighting, but simply +from the hope of plunder and of enlarging their territories. + +"Well, we may hope, in a day or two, to hear that a battle has been +fought, and that a victory has been won. Not that one victory would +settle the matter, for the Mahratta force consists almost entirely +of cavalry and, as we have only a handful, they would, if beaten, +simply ride off and be ready to fight again, another day. If we had +pushed on and occupied Poona, directly we landed--which should have +been easy enough, if the baggage train had been left behind, for it +is but forty miles from Panwell to the Mahratta capital--the +position would have been altogether different. The Mahrattas would +not have had time to collect their forces, and we should probably +have met with no opposition and, once in Poona, could have held it +against the whole Mahratta force. Besides, it is certain that some +of the chiefs, seeing that Rugoba was likely to be made Peishwa, +would have come to the conclusion that it would be best for them to +side with him. + +"Of course, the baggage should all have been left at Panwell and, +in that case, the force could have entered Poona three days after +landing, instead of delaying from the 25th of November until today, +the 7th of January; and even now, at their present rate of advance, +they may be another fortnight before they arrive at Poona. I don't +think there has been so disgraceful a business since we first put +foot in India. + +"At any rate, I shall send Mary and the child down to Bombay, +tomorrow. It is all very well to have her with me, when everything +is peaceable; but although I do not think there is any actual risk, +it is as well that, in turbulent times like these, with nothing but +a force under such incompetent leading between us and a powerful +and active enemy, she should be safe at Bombay." + +Just before daybreak, next morning, there was a sudden shout from +one of the sentries; who had for the first time been posted round +the camp. The warning was followed by a fierce rush, and a large +body of horse and foot charged into the camp. The escort were, for +the most part, killed as they issued from their tents. The major +and his friend were shot down as they sallied out, sword in hand. +The same fate befell Mrs. Lindsay. + +Then the Mahrattas proceeded to loot the camp. The ayah had thrust +the child underneath the wall of the tent, at the first alarm. A +Mahratta seized her, and would have cut her down, had she not +recognized him by the light of the lamp which hung from the tent +ridge. + +"Why, cousin Sufder," she exclaimed, "do you not know me?" + +He loosed his hold, and stood back and gazed at her. + +"Why, Soyera," he exclaimed, "is it you? It is more than ten years +since I saw you! + +"It is my cousin," he said to some of his companions who were +standing round, "my mother's sister's child." + +"Don't be alarmed," he went on, to the woman, "no one will harm +you. I am one of the captains of this party." + +"I must speak to you alone, Sufder." + +She went outside the tent with him. + +"You have nothing to fear," he said. "You shall go back with us to +Jooneer. I have a house there, and you can stay with my wife. +Besides, there are many of your people still alive." + +"But that is not all, Sufder. I was ayah to the major and his +wife--whom your people have just killed, and whom I loved +dearly--and in my charge is their child. He is but a few months +old, and I must take him with me." + +"It is impossible," Sufder replied. "No white man, woman, or child +would be safe in the Deccan, at present." + +"No one would see his face," the woman said. "I would wrap him up, +and will give out that he is my own child. As soon as we get up the +Ghauts I would stain his face and skin, and no one would know that +he was white. If you will not let me do it, tell your men to cut me +down. I should not care to live, if the child were gone as well as +his father and mother. You cannot tell how kind they were to me. +You would not have me ungrateful, would you, Sufder?" + +"Well, well," the man said good naturedly, though somewhat +impatiently, "do as you like; but if any harm comes of it, mind it +is not my fault." + +Thankful for the permission, Soyera hurried round to the back of +the tent, picked up the child and wrapped it in her robe; and then +when, after firing the place, the Mahrattas retired, she fell in +behind them, and followed them in the toilsome climb up the +mountains, keeping so far behind that none questioned her. Once or +twice Sufder dropped back to speak to her. + +"It is a foolish trick of yours," he said, "and I fear that trouble +will come of it." + +"I don't see why it should," she replied. "The child will come to +speak Mahratta and, when he is stained, none will guess that he is +English. In time, I may be able to restore him to his own people." + +The other shook his head. + +"That is not likely," he said, "for before many weeks, we shall +have driven them into the sea." + +"Then he must remain a Mahratta," she said, "until he is able to +make his way to join the English in Madras or Calcutta." + +"You are an obstinate woman, and always have been so; else you +would not have left your people to go to be servant among the +whites. However, I will do what I can for you, for the sake of my +mother's sister and of our kinship." + +On the way up the hills Soyera stopped, several times, to pick +berries. When they halted she went aside and pounded them, and then +boiled them in some water in a lota--a copper vessel--Sufder lent +her for the purpose, and dyed the child's head and body with it, +producing a colour corresponding to her own. + +The party, which was composed of men from several towns and +villages, broke up the next morning. + +"Have you money?" Sufder asked her, as she was about to start alone +on her journey. + +"Yes; my savings were all lodged for me, by Major Lindsay, with +some merchants at Bombay; but I have twenty rupees sewn up in my +garments." + +"As to your savings, Soyera, you are not likely to see them again, +for we shall make a clean sweep of Bombay. However, twenty rupees +will be useful to you, and would keep you for three or four months, +if you needed but, as you are going to my wife, you will not want +them. + +"Take this dagger. When you show it to her, she will know that you +come from me; but mind, she is, like most women, given to gossip; +therefore I warn you not to let her into the secret of this child's +birth, for if you did so, half the town would know it in the course +of a day or two. + +"Now, I must go back with my men to join a party who are on their +way to fight the English. I should have gone there direct, but met +the others starting on this marauding expedition, which was so much +to the taste of my men that I could not restrain them from joining. +I shall see you at Jooneer, as soon as matters are finished with +the English; then I shall, after staying a few days there, rejoin +Scindia, in whose service I am." + +Soyera started on her way. At the villages through which she +passed, she was questioned as to where she came from; and replied +that she had been living down near Bombay but, now that the English +were going to fight the Mahrattas, she was coming home, having lost +her husband a few months before. + +As the road to Jooneer diverged widely from that to Poona, she was +asked no questions about the war. All were confident that the +defeat of the English was certain, now that Scindia and Holkar and +the government of the Peishwa had laid aside their mutual +jealousies, and had joined for the purpose of crushing the whites. + +On arriving, after two days' journey, at Jooneer, she went to the +address that Sufder had given her; but was coldly received by his +wife. + +"As it is Sufder's order, of course I must take you in," she said, +"but when he returns, I shall tell him that I do not want another +woman and child in the house. Why do you not go to your own people? +As you are Sufder's cousin, you must be the sister of Ramdass. Why +should you not go to him?" + +"I will gladly do so, if you will tell me where he lives." + +"He has a small farm. You must have passed it, as you came along. +It is about a mile from here." + +"I will go to him at once," Soyera said. + +"No, no," the woman exclaimed; "that will never do. You must stop a +day or two here. Sufder would be angry, indeed, were he to find +that you did not remain here; and would blame me for it. I should +be willing enough for you to stay a week, or a month; that is a +different thing from becoming an inmate of the house." + +"I will wait till tomorrow, for I have made a long two days' +journey from the top of the Ghauts and, as I am not accustomed to +walking, my feet are sore. In the morning I will go and see my +brother. I did not so much as know that he was alive. I feel sure +he will take me in, willingly; for he is but two years older than +myself, and was always kind to me." + +Accordingly the next morning she retraced her steps, and had no +difficulty in finding the farm of Ramdass. Choosing the time when +he would be likely to be in for his dinner, Soyera walked up to the +door of the house, which was standing open. + +As she stood there, hesitating, Ramdass came out. He was a man of +some forty years of age, with a pleasant and kindly face. He looked +at her enquiringly. + +"Do you not know me, Ramdass?" she asked. + +"Why, 'tis Soyera!" he exclaimed. "And so you have come back, after +all these years--thirteen, is it not, since you went away? + +"Welcome back, little sister!" and he raised his voice, and called, +"Anundee!" + +A young woman, two or three and twenty years of age, came to the +door. + +"Wife," he said, "this is my sister Soyera, of whom you have often +heard me speak. + +"Soyera, this is my wife. We have been married six years; but come +in, and let us talk things over. + +"You have come home for good, I hope," he said. "So you too have +married and, as you come alone with your child, have, I suppose, +had the misfortune to lose your husband?" + +"Yes, I was alone in the world, and came hither not knowing whether +you were alive or dead; but feeling sure of a welcome, if I found +you." + +"And you were not mistaken," he said heartily. + +"Anundee, you will, I am sure, join me in the welcome; and +willingly give my sister and her child a place in our home?" + +"Assuredly. It will be pleasant for me, when you are in the fields, +to have some one to talk to, and perhaps to help me about the +house." + +Soyera saw that she was speaking sincerely. + +"Thank you, Anundee; you may be sure that I shall not be idle. I +have been accustomed to work, and can take much off your hands; and +will look after your two children;" for two boys, three or four +years old, were standing before her, staring at the newcomer. + +"That will be pleasant, Soyera; indeed, sometimes they hinder me +much in my work." + +"I am accustomed to children, Anundee, as I was for years nurse to +English children, and know their ways." + +"Well, now let us to dinner," Ramdass broke in. "I am hungry, and +want to be off again. There is much to do in the fields." + +The woman took a pot off the embers of a wood fire, and poured its +contents into a dish. The meal consisted of a species of pulse +boiled with ghee, with peppers and other condiments added. + +"And how did you like being among the English, Soyera?" + +"I liked it very well," the woman said. "They are very kind and +considerate to nurses and, although they get angry when the +gorrawallah or other men neglect their duty, they do not punish +them as a Mahratta master would do. They are not double faced; when +they say a thing they mean it, and their word can always be +trusted. As a people, no doubt they are anxious to extend their +dominion; but they do not wish to do so for personal gain. They are +not like the princes here, who go to war to gain territory and +revenue. It was reasonable that they should wish to increase their +lands; for they are almost shut up in Bombay, with Salsette and the +other islands occupied by us, who may, any day, be their enemies." + +Her brother laughed. + +"It seems to me, Soyera, that you have come to prefer these English +people to your own countrymen." + +"I say not that, Ramdass. You asked me how I liked them, and I have +told you. You yourself know how the tax collectors grind down the +people; how Scindia and Holkar and the Peishwa are always fighting +each other. Do you know that, in Bombay, the meanest man could not +be put to death, unless fairly tried; while among the Mahrattas men +are executed on the merest excuse or, if not executed, are +murdered?" + +"That is true enough," Ramdass said; "none of the three princes +would hesitate to put to death anyone who stood in his way, and it +seems strange to me that even the Brahmins, who would not take the +life even of a troublesome insect, yet support the men who have +killed scores of other people. But it is no use grumbling; the +thing has always been, and I suppose always will be. It is not only +so in the Deccan, but in the Nizam's dominions, in Mysore and, so +far as I know, in Oude and Delhi. It seems so natural to us that +the powerful should oppress the weak, and that one prince should go +to war with another, that we hardly give the matter a thought; but +though, as you say, the English in Bombay may rule wisely, and +dislike taking life, they are doing now just as our princes +do--they are making war with us." + +"That is true but, from what I have heard when the English sahibs +were speaking together, it is everything to them that a prince +favourable to them should rule at Poonah for, were Holkar and +Scindia to become all powerful, and place one of their people on +the seat of the Peishwa, the next step might be that a great +Mahratta force would descend the Ghauts, capture Bombay, and slay +every white man in it." + +"But they are a mere handful," Ramdass said. "How can they think of +invading a nation like ours?" + +"Because they know, at least they believe, that Scindia, Holkar, +and the Peishwa are all so jealous of each other that they will +never act together. Then you see what they have done round Madras +and Bengal and, few as they are, they have won battles against the +great princes; and lastly, my mistress has told me that, although +there are but few here, there are many at home; and they could, if +they chose, send out twenty soldiers for every one there is here. + +"Besides, it is not these alone who fight. The natives enlist under +them, and aid them in their conquests; and this shows, at least, +that they are well treated, and have confidence in the good faith +of the English." + +"It is all very well, Soyera, to talk that way; but I would as +willingly believe that the stars will fall from the sky as that +these Englishmen, who simply live in Bombay because we suffer them +to do so, should ever conquer the Mahrattas, as they have subdued +other portions of India where, as everyone knows, the people are +not warlike, and have always been conquered without difficulty. + +"Look at our power! At Delhi the emperor is a puppet in our hands, +and it is the same in all the districts on the plain of the great +river. The Rajpoots fear us, and even the Pindaries would not dare +carry their raids into our country. That a small body of merchants +and soldiers should threaten us seems, to me, altogether absurd." + +"Well, brother, we will not argue about it. Time will show. As a +woman of the Mahrattas, I trust that day will never come; but as +one who knows the English, I have my fears. Of one thing I am sure, +that were they masters here, the cultivators would be vastly better +off than they are at present." + +Ramdass laughed. + +"What do you think of my sister's opinions, Anundee?" + +"I do not know what to think," the young woman said; "but Soyera +has seen much, and is a wise woman, and what she says are no idle +words. To us it seems impossible, when we know that the Mahrattas +can place a hundred thousand horsemen in the field; but I own that, +from what we know of the English, it might be better for people +like us to have such masters." + +"And now, Soyera," Ramdass said, when he returned from his work in +the evening, "tell us more about yourself. First, how did you learn +where I was living?" + +"I learned it from the wife of our cousin Sufder." + +"How did you fall in with him?" + +"Well, I must tell you something. I had meant to keep it entirely +to myself, but I know that you and Anundee will keep my secret." + +"Assuredly we will. I am not a man to talk of other people's +affairs and, as to Anundee, you can trust her with your life." + +"Well, in the first place, I deceived you; or rather you deceived +yourself, when you said, 'I see that you have been married;' but +the children were here, and so I could not explain. The infant is +not mine. It is the son of my dear master and mistress, both of +whom were killed, three days ago, by bands--of which Sufder +commanded one--who attacked them suddenly, by night." + +"What! Is the child white?" Ramdass asked, in a tone of alarm. + +"It is not white, because I have stained the skin; but it is the +child of English parents. I will tell you how it happened." + +And she related the instances of the attack upon the little camp, +the death of her master and mistress, another white officer, and +all their escort; told how she had hidden the child under the cover +of the tent, how Sufder had saved her life, and her subsequent +conversation with him regarding the child. + +"Now, what do you intend to do with him, Soyera?" + +"I intend to bring him up as my own. I shall keep his skin stained, +and no one can suspect that he is not mine." + +"Then you do not think of restoring him to his people?" + +"Not until he grows up. He has neither father nor mother, and to +whom could I hand him, now? Moreover if, as you say, our people +intend to drive the English from Bombay, his fate would be certain. +When I am by myself with him, I shall talk to him in English, as +soon as he is old enough to understand that he must not speak in +that language to others; then, when he joins his own people, he +will be able to converse with them. In the ten years I have spent +in English service I have come to speak their language well. Though +I cannot teach him the knowledge of the English, I can do much to +fit him to take his place as an Englishman, when the time comes." + +"It is a risky business," her brother said, "but I do not say that +it cannot be carried out; at any rate, since you have so decided to +keep him, I can see no better plan." + +Two days later, Sufder came in. + +"So you got here safely, Soyera?" + +"Yes, I had no trouble. But I did not expect you back so soon." + +"The matter is all settled, though I think we were wrong to grant +any terms to the English. We had them in our power, and should have +finished the matter, straight off." + +Delay and inactivity, the natural consequences of utter +incompetence and of divided councillors, had occurred. Colonel +Egerton, in consequence of sickness, had resigned the command; and +had been succeeded by Lieutenant Colonel Cockburn. On the 9th of +January they were within eighteen miles of Poona, and they had +still three weeks' provisions with them. Two or three skirmishes +had taken place, but without any result; yet Mr. Carnac, without +having suffered any reverse, and now within a day's march of the +capital, proposed that a retreat should be made, at once. + +The proposal was combated by Captain Hartley, a gallant young +officer, and Mr. Holmes of the Civil Service. Cockburn, being +called upon for his opinion, said he had no doubt the army could +penetrate to Poona; but that it would be impossible for it to +protect its enormous baggage train. Mr. Carnac, however, persisted +in his opinion, in spite of the prayers of Rugoba and, at eleven +o'clock on the night of the 11th of January, the heavy guns were +thrown into a large pool, a quantity of stores burnt, and the force +began its retreat, in face of enemies estimated differently at from +fifty to a hundred thousand men. + +Against such vigilant foes there was but little hope, indeed, that +the movement would be unnoticed and, at two o'clock in the morning, +a party of horse attacked the advance guard. Cockburn sent forward +two companies of Europeans to support them, but the Mahrattas had +succeeded in plundering part of the baggage. + +In a very short time the rear was also attacked. This was covered +by some six companies of Sepoys, with two guns, commanded by +Captain Hartley. These received the charge of the enemy's horse and +foot with great steadiness and, several times, took the offensive +and drove their assailants back. + +When morning broke, the little force found themselves altogether +surrounded by the whole army of the Mahrattas. Hartley's Sepoys +were now sorely pressed, but still maintained their position, and +were reinforced by five companies of Europeans and two more +companies of Sepoys. With this support, Hartley beat off every +attack. At ten o'clock he received orders from Colonel Cockburn to +retreat, but the officer who carried the message returned, begging +that he would allow Captain Hartley to await a more favourable +opportunity. Cockburn agreed to this, but sent Major Frederick to +take command of the rear, with orders to retire on the main body. +This movement he effected without serious loss, and joined the rest +of the force at the village of Wurgaom. + +It was already crowded with camp followers, and the wildest +confusion reigned. The enemy's horse took advantage of this and +charged through the baggage, and the troops were unable to act with +effect, being mixed up with the crowd of fugitives. However, they +soon extricated themselves, drove off the enemy, and placed the +guns in commanding positions round the village. At four o'clock the +enemy retired. + +Early the next morning the Mahratta artillery opened fire on the +village. Some of the Sepoy troops now became dispirited; but +Hartley's men stood firm, and the Mahrattas did not venture to +attack. The loss on the previous day was found to amount to three +hundred and fifty-two killed, wounded, or missing; including many +who had deserted during the night. Among the killed and wounded +were fifteen European officers, whose loss was a great misfortune +for, although the Sepoys fight well under their European officers, +they lose heart altogether if not so led. + +Mr. Palmer, the secretary of the committee, was now sent to +negotiate with the enemy. The first demand made was the surrender +of Rugoba; which the committee would have agreed to, but Rugoba had +privately arranged to surrender to Scindia. The next demand was +that the committee should enter on a treaty, for the surrender of +the greater part of the territory of the Bombay Government, +together with the revenue of Broach and Surat. These terms were so +hard that even the craven committee, who were entirely responsible +for the disaster, hesitated to accept them. + +Cockburn was asked whether a retreat was wholly impracticable, and +he declared that it was so. Captain Hartley protested against this +opinion, and showed how a retreat could be managed. His opinion was +altogether overruled, and Mr. Holmes was sent with powers to +conclude the treaty--which, however, the committee never intended +to observe. + +Scindia took the principal part in arranging the details, +superseding the authority of Nana Furnuwees, the Peishwa's +minister. Scindia's favour was purchased by a private promise to +bestow upon him the English share of Broach, besides a sum of +forty-one thousand rupees as presents to his servants. + +For their share in this miserable business Mr. Carnac, Colonel +Egerton, and Colonel Cockburn were dismissed from the Company's +service; and Captain Hartley was promoted to the rank of lieutenant +colonel. The Governor of Bombay refused to ratify the treaty, on +the ground that the officials with the expedition had no power +whatever to enter into any arrangement, without the matter being +previously submitted to, and approved by, the Government. +Fortunately, at this moment a force that had been despatched from +Bengal, under Colonel Goddard, to support Rugoba was nearing the +scene of action; and that officer, learning the danger to which +Bombay was exposed, took the responsibility and, marching from +Hoosingabad, avoided a body of twenty-two thousand horse, which had +been despatched from Poona to cut him off, and reached Surat +without encountering any opposition. + +This welcome reinforcement materially altered the situation, and +Bombay lay no longer at the mercy of the Mahrattas. There was now +Goddard's force, and the army that had fallen back from Poona and, +what was still more important, Scindia had by his secret convention +deserted the confederacy; and it was morally certain that neither +the Peishwa nor Holkar would send his forces against Bombay, +leaving to Scindia the power of grasping the supreme authority in +the Deccan during their absence. + +In 1779 General Goddard, who was now in command at Bombay, entered +into negotiations with Nana Furnuwees. These were carried on for +some months; but were brought to a conclusion by Nana declaring +that the surrender of Salsette, and the person of Rugoba, who was +again a fugitive in Bombay, were preliminaries to any treaty. +Bombay received a reinforcement of a European regiment, a battalion +of Sepoys, and a hundred artillerymen, from Madras; but before they +arrived Goddard's force had captured Dubhoy, and a treaty had been +effected. + +The town of Ahmedabad was to be handed over to our ally, Futteh +Sing; but it declined to surrender, and was taken by assault, the +storming party being commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Hartley. + +Scindia had as usual changed sides, and was now operating in +conjunction with Nana; and he and Holkar, with twenty thousand +horse, marched to Baroda. Goddard advanced to give battle; but +Scindia, to gain time, opened negotiations. + +Goddard, however, was not to be duped. The negotiations were broken +off, and he advanced against the Mahrattas. Their horse, as usual, +charged; but were driven back by the artillery fire, and routed by +a regiment of Bengal cavalry. Scindia, however, encamped a short +distance off but, when Goddard again advanced to the attack, +retired. + +Goddard, however, was not to be drawn into pursuit. He captured +some small forts, and sent Colonel Hartley to relieve Kallan, which +was being besieged by the Mahrattas. Hartley surprised their camp, +pursued them for some miles, and killed a great number; while +Lieutenant Welsh, who had been sent forward to relieve Surat--which +was threatened by a large Mahratta force--defeated these, killed +upwards of a hundred, and captured their guns; while one of +Scindia's detachments, on the banks of the Nerbuddah, was routed by +a detachment of Bengal Sepoys under Major Forbes. + +On the other side of India, great successes had been gained by a +Bengal force under the command of Captain Popham; who attacked and +routed a body of plundering Mahrattas, captured by assault the +strong fort of Lahar, and not only carried by surprise the fortress +of Gwalior, regarded by the natives as impregnable, but took it +without the loss of a single man. + +In December, General Goddard laid siege to Bassein. He and Hartley, +whose force was covering the siege, were attacked on the 11th of +that month by twenty thousand cavalry and infantry. These, however, +were defeated after making several desperate charges; and on the +following day another battle took place, in which the Mahrattas +were totally routed, and their general killed, after which Bassein +surrendered. + + + +Chapter 2: A Strange Bringing Up. + + +The war went on during the following year, but in 1782 peace was +concluded. In 1784, the Mahrattas joined the Nizam and the British +in an alliance, having for its object the overthrow of Mysore; +which state, first under Hyder Ali, and afterwards under his son +Tippoo, was a source of danger to all the allies. + +In the meantime Harry Lindsay, who was now called Puntojee, had +been living quietly on the farm of Ramdass; and no suspicion +whatever had been excited in the minds of the neighbours, or of any +of the people of Jooneer, that he was aught but what he seemed--the +son of Soyera. Once a week he was re-stained; and even his +playmates, the two sons of Ramdass, believed that he was, like +themselves, a young Mahratta. They knew that, sometimes, their aunt +talked to the child for hours in a strange language; but she led +them to believe it was the dialect of Bombay, which she thought it +might be useful for him to learn. + +The child was shrewd and intelligent, and strictly obeyed Soyera's +instructions never, on any account, to talk in that language with +her except when they were alone; for she said that, if he did so, +some great misfortune would happen to him. + +Thus, at six, he was able to speak English and Mahratta with equal +facility. As soon as his hair began to grow, it had also been dyed; +for its colour was fair, and would at once have excited attention. +He was a sturdy boy, and had never known a day's illness. + +Four more years passed, and Soyera then revealed to him the fact +that she was not, as he supposed, his mother, but that he was of +English parents; and related to him the manner in which they had +come by their death, and how she had saved him. + +"The language which you are speaking," she said, "is English. I +spoke truly, when I said it was the language in use in Bombay; for +it is the tongue of the white men there. Now you will understand +why I wanted you not to speak in it, to anyone but myself; and why +I have stained your skin, once a week. At present we are at peace +with the English; but there may be war again, at any time, and in +that case were it known that you are white, your life would not be +safe for a moment; or you might be thrown into some dungeon, where +you would perish miserably." + +She then explained to him why she had not attempted to take him +down to Bombay, and restore him to his countrymen. She had always +hoped the time would come when she could do so but, until he grew +up to manhood, it was necessary that he should stay with her; for, +being without friends in Bombay he would, as a boy, be unable to +earn his living. + +The boy was greatly affected at the news. There were things that he +had never been able to understand; especially why Soyera should +consider it necessary to wash him with dye so often, when neither +his cousins nor the other children of his acquaintance were so +treated--as far as he knew, for as he had been strictly charged +never to speak of the process, which he considered an infliction, +he had never asked questions of others. He had never, therefore, +for a moment suspected that he was not like those around him. He +knew that he was stronger than other boys of his own age; more fond +of exercise, and leader in all their games; but he had accepted +this as a natural accident. The fact that he belonged to the race +that were masters of southern India, and had conquered and slain +the Nabob of Bengal, was a gratification to him but, at present, +the thought that he might some day have to join them, and leave all +those he loved behind, far overpowered this feeling. + +"I shall never become English, if you do not go with me," he said. +"You saved my life, and have been a mother to me. Why should I go +away from your side, to people that I know nothing of, whose ways +would be all strange to me?" + +"It is right that you should do so, Puntojee--I will not call you +by your proper name, Harry Lindsay, lest it should slip out before +others. Your life should be spent among your own people; who, I +think, will some day rule over all India. They are a great people, +with learning of many things unknown here, from whom I always +received the greatest kindness. They are not, like the Mahrattas, +always quarrelling among themselves; they are not deceitful, and +they are honourable. You should be proud to belong to them, and I +have no doubt some day you will be so; though at present it is +natural that, knowing no place but this, you should not like the +thought of leaving." + +Harry Lindsay, whose spirits had hitherto been almost +inexhaustible, and who had never been happy when sitting quiet, was +greatly impressed with what he had heard and, for some time, he +withdrew himself almost entirely from the sports of his friends, +hiding himself in the groves from their importunities, and thinking +over the strange position in which he was placed. + +Soyera at last remonstrated with him. + +"If I had thought you would take this matter to heart, Puntojee, I +should not have told you about it. I did so because I thought you +could scarcely be stained, much longer, without demanding the +reason for what must have seemed so strange a thing. + +"I do not want you to withdraw yourself from your playmates, or to +cease from your games. Your doing so will, if it continues, excite +talk. Your friends will think that a spell has fallen upon you, and +will shun you. I want you to grow up such as your father +was--strong and brave, and skilful in arms--and to do this you must +be alert and active. It may well be that you should not join your +countrymen until you are able to play the part of a man, which will +not be for ten years yet; but you know that my cousin Sufder has +promised that, as soon as you are able to carry arms, he will +procure a post for you under Scindia. + +"There you will learn much, and see something of the world whereas, +if you remain here, you would grow up like other cultivators, and +would make but a bad impression among your countrymen, when you +join them. Sufder himself has promised to teach you the use of arms +and, as all say he is very skilful, you could have no better +master. + +"At any rate, I wish you to resume your former habits, to exercise +your body in every way, so that you may grow up so strong and +active that, when you join your countrymen, they will feel you are +well worthy of them. They think much of such things, and it is by +their love for exercise and sport that they so harden their frames +that, in battle, our bravest peoples cannot stand against them." + +"But the Mahrattas are strong, mother?" + +"Yes, they can stand great fatigues; living, as they do, so +constantly on horseback but, like all the people of India, they are +not fond of exercise, save when at war. That is the difference +between us and the English. These will get up at daybreak, go for +long rides, hunt the wild boar or the tigers in the jungles of the +Concan, or the bears among the Ghauts. Exercise to them is a +pleasure; and we in the service of the English have often wondered +at the way in which they willingly endure fatigues, when they might +pass their time sitting quietly in their verandahs. But I came to +understand that it was to this love of theirs, for outdoor +exercise, that they owed their strength and the firmness of their +courage. None can say that the Mahrattas are not brave but, +although they will charge gallantly, they soon disperse if the day +goes against them. + +"So also with the soldiers of Tippoo. They overran Arcot and +threatened Madras; Tanjore and the Carnatic were all in their +hands; and yet the English never lost their firmness and, little by +little, drove Tippoo's troops from the lands they had conquered; +and it may be that, ere long, Tippoo will be a fugitive, and his +dominions divided among those whom he has provoked. + +"Is it not wonderful that, while not very many years ago the Whites +were merely a handful, living on sufferance in Calcutta, Madras, +and Bombay, they are now masters of southern India and half of +Bengal; and even venture to engage a great empire like that of the +Mahrattas, stretching from the sea on the west to Delhi, and +holding the mastery over all central India? There must be something +extraordinary about these men. Why, you would scarce believe it, +but I have seen often, and wondered always; when they have an +entertainment, instead of sitting quietly 'and having dancing girls +to posture for their amusement, they dance themselves with their +women--not a mere movement of the body and hands, such as you see +among our dancers, but violent dancing, exhausting themselves till +the perspiration streams from their faces--and this both men and +women regard as amusement; so, Puntojee, if you are to take your +place among your countrymen again, you must accustom yourself to +fatigues, and strengthen your body in every way; or you will be +regarded with contempt as one who, although of their blood, has +grown degenerate and unworthy of them." + +"I will do so," the boy said. "You shall not complain of me, again. +Hitherto I have played for amusement, and because I liked to +exercise my limbs, and to show the others that I could run faster +and was stronger than they were; but in future I shall have a +motive in doing so, and will strive to be worthy of my father." + +From that time, Harry Lindsay devoted himself to exercises. He +learnt from Sufder, when he visited his native town, and from old +soldiers, when he was away, to use a sword and dagger, to hurl a +light spear accurately, to shoot straight with a musket, that +Sufder had picked up on the field of battle at Karlee, and also +with the pistol. He rose at daybreak, and walked for miles before +coming in to his morning meal; and exercised the muscles of his +arms, not only by the use of the sword, but by holding heavy stones +at arm's length. + +Soyera, although still retaining her own religion, had carefully +instructed him in that of the English; with which she had, during +her service, become fully acquainted. + +"I am only a servant, an ignorant woman, and it is not for me to +decide which religion is the best, and I have never thought of +giving up that of my people; but the religion of the Christians is +much simpler than ours. They believe in one God, only; and in his +Son who, like Buddha, was a great saint, and went about doing good. +I will tell you all I know of Him, for my mistress frequently spoke +to me of Him; and hoped, I think, that in time I should accept Him, +as she did. When you join your people, it is as necessary that you +should be of their religion, as of their race;" and so, in time, +Harry learned at least the elements of Christianity. + +As usual he had been, at the age of six, marked, like Soyera, with +three perpendicular lines on the forehead--the sign of the +worshippers of Vishnu. + +"You are twelve years old now, Harry," Soyera said to the boy, one +day. "Now I must do what I have concluded, after a talk with +Ramdass and Sufder, is the best thing for you. We have agreed that +it will be better that you should not join your countrymen, and +claim to be the son of Major Lindsay, until you are a man. I do not +know what they would do with you. They might send you back to +England, but I cannot say what would become of you there; but we +have agreed that, when you do join them, you must be like other +young English gentlemen, and not be looked down upon as one who, +though he has a white skin, is but a Mahratta peasant. + +"In the first place, you must learn to speak English." + +"But I do speak English!" Harry said, in surprise. + +"Yes, such English as I do; but that is not as the white sahibs +speak it. We who have learned it speak the right word, but not in +the right way. I have seen young white ladies, when they first came +out here, and came to the house of your mother, sometimes smile and +scarcely understand what I said to them. It is not like that that +you must talk English--good enough for an ayah, not good enough for +a sahib--so we have decided, Sufder, Ramdass and I, that you must +go down to Bombay, and learn to talk proper English. + +"We have thought much how this shall be done, and have settled that +our thinking, here, is no good. I must wait till I get to Bombay, +where I can get advice from people I know." + +"Will you stay there with me, Soyera?" + +"I cannot say what will be best," she answered, gravely; "I must +wait till I get there. Ramdass will go down with me. It is a good +time for him to go. The harvest work is done, he can be spared for +a month. He would like to go. He has never seen Bombay. We shall go +in the wagon." + +The distance from Jooneer to Bombay was but about eighty miles, and +the journey was performed in five days, and Ramdass took down a +light load of maize, whose sale would pay the expenses of their +journey. Soyera rode and slept on the maize, except in two +villages, where she was able to procure a lodging for the night. +Ramdass and Harry walked by the bullocks, and slept at night by the +roadside, wrapped in their blankets. + +On arriving at Bombay they put up at a khan, in the native town +and, the next morning, leaving Ramdass and Harry to wander about +and look at the wonders of the city, Soyera went to the shop of a +Parsee merchant, who was in the habit of supplying the canteen of +the troops, contracted for supplies of forage and other matters, +and carried on the business of a native banker. She had often been +to his place with Mrs. Lindsay; and had, from the time that she +entered her service, deposited her savings with him. She had, in +the first place, asked her master to keep them for her; but he had +advised her to go to Jeemajee. + +The Parsee was, himself, in his shop. She went up to him. + +"You do not remember me, sahib?" she said. "I was the ayah of Major +Lindsay. I was often here with the mem-sahib." + +"I remember you, now," he said. "I do not often forget those I have +known. Yes; your master and mistress were killed, at their little +camp on the Concan. Nothing was heard of you, if I remember +rightly. I have some money of yours in my hands. Have you the +receipts?" + +"I have them, sahib; but it is not for that that I come to see you. +I wish to ask your advice on a private matter." + +The Parsee looked a little surprised. + +"Come in here with me," he said, leading the way to his private +room, behind the shop. + +"Now, what is it?" he asked, as he closed the door behind them. + +"It was believed, sahib, that Major Lindsay's infant boy was +killed, at that time, like all others in the camp. It was not so. I +saved him. It is about him that I want to speak to you." + +The Parsee thought for a moment. + +"Yes, there was a child. Its body was not found, and was supposed +to have been eaten by the jackals. Is it alive still?" + +"Yes, sahib, I have brought him up as my own. His skin has been +always stained; and none but my brother--with whom I live--his +wife, and one other, know that he is English. I love him as my own +child. I have taught him English, as I speak it; but I want him, in +time, to be an English sahib, and for that he must learn proper +English." + +"But why have you not brought him down here?" the Parsee said. + +"Who would have looked after him, and cared for him, sahib, as I, +his nurse, have done? Who could have taken him? What would have +become of him? I am a poor woman, and do not know how these things +would be. I said to myself: + +"'It will be better that he should live with me, till he is old +enough to go down as a young man, and say to the Governor: + +"'"I am the son of Major Lindsay. I can talk Mahratti like a +native. I can ride and use my sword. I can speak English well. I +can be useful." + +"'Then, perhaps for his father's sake, the Governor will say: + +"'"I will make you an officer. If there are troubles in the Deccan, +you will be more useful than those sahibs who do not know the +language."' + +"I can do all that for him, but I cannot teach him to speak as +English sahibs speak; and that is why I have come to you. You have +twelve hundred rupees of mine, in your hands; for I laid out +nothing while I was in the sahib's service, and my mistress was +very kind, and often gave me presents. My brother, Ramdass, had +five hundred rupees saved; and this he has given to me, for he, +too, loves the boy. Thus there are seventeen hundred rupees, and +this I would pay for him to be, for two years, with someone where +he would learn to speak English as sahibs do, so that none can say +this white boy is not English. + +"Then he will go back, for two or three years, to Jooneer. He will +learn to use his arms, and to ride, and to be a man, until he is of +an age to come down and say: + +"'I am the son of Major Lindsay.'" + +"But if you were to tell this, at once," the Parsee said, "they +would doubtless send him home, to England, to be educated." + +"And what would he do there, sahib? He would have no friends, none +to care for him; and while his Mahratti tongue would be of great +service to him, here, it would be useless to him in his own +country. + +"Do not say that my plan cannot be carried out, sahib. For twelve +years I have thought it over. I have taught him all that I could, +so far; and convinced myself that it would be the best. The boy +loves me, and is happy: he would be miserable among strangers, who +would laugh at his English, and would make him unhappy." + +Jeemajee sat for some time in thought. + +"I am not sure that your plan is not the best," he said, "and after +saving his life, and caring for him, at the risk of your own, for +all these years, you have assuredly a better right than any other +to say what shall be done now. I will think over what you have +asked of me. It is not very easy to find just such a home as you +want, but I should consider the sum you offer is sufficient to +induce many Englishmen living here to take him; but it is not +everyone from whom he would learn English, as you would wish him to +do, or who could teach him the manners of white officers. + +"Come to me tomorrow evening, but you must not expect that I shall +be able to answer you then. I must think it over, and make +enquiries." + +It was three days, indeed, before anything came of Soyera's visits +to the Parsee trader; then he said: + +"I think that I have found out just the place of which you are in +search. I spoke to a friend yesterday, and he at once mentioned one +whom I wonder I had not thought of, at once. Some years ago a +cadet, who came out here with a young wife, died shortly after his +arrival. As he had only been four years in the service, the pension +of his wife was but a small one. She did not go back to England, as +widows generally do. I know not why, except that I once heard two +officers speaking of her. They said that they believed her family +had quarrelled with her, for her marriage, and that she was too +proud to go back again. She had two girls, who must be about the +age of this boy. Her pension was not sufficient for her to live +upon comfortably, and she opened a little school for the children +of officers here. + +"There are not many, you know, for they are generally sent home to +England, when they are quite young. But she has always had four or +five, sometimes eight or ten. They come to her every morning, and +go home in the middle of the day, and she sees no more of them. + +"After I had heard this, I went to her. I supply her with many +things, for she gets her books and other things from me. I said to +her: + +"'I have a white boy whose father and mother are dead. He is twelve +years old. There are reasons why I cannot tell you who they were, +but I can say that the boy's father was an English officer. He has +been brought up by natives, and speaks English in the way that +natives speak it. Those who have brought him up desire that he +should learn to talk English well, and learn to have good manners, +so that some day, when he goes to England, people should not say of +him: + +"'"This is not an English gentleman, or he would not speak like +that."' + +"I said that I had interested myself in the matter, and knew that +it was right, and had come to her to ask her if she would take him +into her house, which was very comfortable and well furnished, and +everything as it should be. + +"She asked questions. I told her enough to interest her; and said +that, when the time came, it was hoped that he would be able to +obtain employment under the Government--perhaps in the army, as his +father had been. I said that those who brought him up were ready to +make great sacrifices for his sake, but that they could not pay for +him for more than two years; and that, as the boy knew so much +English, they hoped this would be enough. I asked how much, if she +agreed to take him, she would charge. She said that she would think +it over; and would call here, tomorrow, and tell me whether she +would take him. + +"She will be here at three. I think you had better come at that +hour. I am sure that she would like to speak to you. I do not see +why you should not say that you had been his ayah, and had saved +his life, and brought him up. Many officers have been killed and, +indeed, I do not see why you should not tell her the whole story. +It will interest her more in the boy. But of course, before you +tell her, you must ask her to promise not to repeat it." + +Soyera went on the following day. She found that Jeemajee was +already, with a lady, in his private room. She waited until the +door was opened, and the merchant beckoned her in. + +"This is the woman who has brought the child up, Mrs. Sankey," he +said. "As I have told you, she was his ayah, and has behaved most +nobly." + +Turning to Soyera, he said: + +"Naturally Mrs. Sankey asked why you had not come forward before. I +told her your reasons, and she thinks that, perhaps, you have acted +for the best for him. At any rate, she has consented to take the +boy for two years; and I am to pay her, for you, the sum that you +have named." + +In reality, Mrs. Sankey asked a thousand rupees a year; but the +Parsee, with the generosity for which his race is distinguished, +had agreed to pay the extra three hundred rupees himself. + +"Before it is quite settled," Mrs. Sankey said, "I should like to +see the boy. As Mr. Jeemajee has told you, I have two daughters +about the same age. I must, therefore, be guided in my decision by +my impression of him." + +"I will bring him to see you, in three or four days," Soyera said. +"His stain is already faded a good deal, and I shall be able to get +it off, by that time. I have to get English clothes for him. + +"I am greatly obliged to you for saying that you will take him, if +he pleases you. That I think he will do. I have taught him manners, +as well as I could. He is as anxious as I am to improve himself; +and will, I am sure, give you no more trouble than he can help." + +"I will see that he is properly clothed, Mrs. Sankey," Jeemajee +remarked. "I knew his father, and have a great interest in him." + +Mrs. Sankey chatted for some little time to Soyera; gave her her +card, with her address on Malabar Hill; and then left. + +Soyera began to thank the Parsee for his introduction, but he said: + +"It was a little thing to do and, as I knew his father, it was only +right that I should help, as far as I could. Will you bring me, +tomorrow morning, the measurement of the boy's height, size around +his shoulders and waist, the lengths of his arms and legs? You need +trouble yourself no further about it. I shall take that matter upon +myself. Come, three days later, for his clothes. + +"Goodbye! I have other matters to see about," and, without waiting +for any thanks from Soyera, he at once went into his shop, and +began to talk to his assistant. + +Many were the scrubbings Harry had to undergo, during the next few +days; and his hair and face were nearly restored to their proper +colour when Soyera returned, one evening, with a coolie carrying a +trunk of some size. It contained the whole outfit for a boy: one +dark suit, and four of white nankeen; with a stock of shirts, +underclothing, and shoes. Soyera showed Harry how these garments, +with which he was wholly unacquainted, should be put on. + +"They fit you capitally," she said, when she surveyed him. "And you +look like a little English sahib." + +"They feel very tight and uncomfortable," he said. + +"They are sure to do so, at first; but you will soon get over that. +Now, Ramdass will take you out for a walk for two or three hours, +so that you can get accustomed to them. I should not like you to +look awkward, when you go with me to Mrs. Sankey's, tomorrow." + +The interview next day was altogether satisfactory. The carriage +and bearing of the natives of India is easier, and more graceful, +than that of Europeans; and the knowledge Harry had possessed, for +some years, that he belonged to a conquering race, the injunctions +of Soyera, his strength and activity, and his unquestioned +leadership among the boys with whom he played, had given something +of confidence to his manner. Mrs. Sankey was greatly taken with +him, and he at once became an inmate of her house. + +He remained there for two years, and became so great a favourite +that Mrs. Sankey insisted on his staying with her, without charge, +for three or four months after the time for which she had received +payment for him. He had worked hard and earnestly, and now spoke +English as well and accurately as any English boy of his own age. +He had, after being there a year, made the acquaintance of several +boys of his own age, the sons of officers or officials. They knew +him only as the orphan son of an English gentleman, in Government +employ; and he was often asked to the houses of their parents, and +none suspected that he had been brought up among natives. + +At the end of his term, Sufder came down for him. Jeemajee, who had +remained his steady friend, arranged that he should go to his +house, and there resume his native dress and stain. In this garb he +felt even stranger and more uncomfortable than he had done, when he +first put on European clothes; but this was not long in wearing off +and, by the time he reached Jooneer, he was again at home in it. He +took with him, at Mrs. Sankey's suggestion, a number of English +books, by authors she recommended; so that he could, by reading and +learning some of them by heart, retain his knowledge of the +language. + +For the next three months he spent his whole time in practising +with sword, pistol, and gun; under the tuition of an old soldier in +Jooneer, who had been a noted swordsman in his time. He was already +far stronger than the sons of Ramdass, although these were now +young men. Anxious to, at once, exercise his muscles and gain in +skill, he now attached himself to a famous shikaree who, seeing the +boy's strength and courage, took him as an assistant when he went +on excursions among the hills. Here Harry learned to dig pits for +the capture of tigers; to smear leaves with a sticky substance, +obtained from a plant resembling mistletoe, so that when a tiger or +bear trod upon them and, finding them sticking to his feet, paused +and rubbed these on his head, until he became blinded and +bewildered with a mass of sticky foliage, a well-placed shot would +stretch him dead. + +[Illustration: For a year he worked with the shikaree.] + +For a year he worked with the shikaree. Sometimes they hunted +simply for the value of the skins; but more often they were sent +for by villagers, who were suffering from the depredations of +tigers or leopards, and who were willing to pay for having them +killed. Harry Lindsay acquired quite a reputation in Jooneer and +the surrounding country, for the shikaree spoke freely of his +bravery, intelligence, and skill with his arms. His width of +shoulders and the strength of his muscles caused him to be regarded +as a prodigy; and it was generally considered that, when he grew +up, he would become a great fighter, and attain wide renown as a +leader of bands in the service of Holkar, or the Peishwa. + +When he was sixteen, Sufder, who had watched his progress with +great approval, said to him: + +"You are scarce a man in years yet, Puntojee; but you are strong, +skilful with your weapons, and far more of a man than many ten +years older than yourself. It is time that you should see something +of war. Since the death of Scindia, a few months back; and the +succession of his nephew Doulut, who is about your own age; things +have become even more unsettled than before. Scindia was a great +man and, although at times worsted by his rivals, always managed to +repair his fortunes and to add to his power; but whether the young +Scindia will keep the wide territory that his uncle won is +doubtful. Holkar, although at times he and Scindia united, as when +the English marched against Poona, has been his rival and enemy. + +"The Peishwa has sometimes been in alliance with one of these great +princes, sometimes with the other. His minister, Nana Furnuwees, is +a man of commanding talent. Had it not been for him, it is probable +that Scindia and Holkar would long since have become altogether +independent; but he has always contrived to play one off against +the other and, by securing the services of the secondary chiefs, +such as the Rajah of Nagpore and the Rajah of Kolapoore, to hold +the balance of power; but he is an old man, and at his death there +is no saying how things will go. + +"Matters are complicated, too, by the fact that Scindia has now in +his service sixteen battalions of drilled infantry, commanded by +French officers; and these have proved so valuable, in the various +sieges he has undertaken, that Holkar has been obliged to imitate +his example. There are many who think that the introduction of +infantry will, in the end, prove disastrous to the power of the +Mahrattas; whose strength has hitherto lain in their cavalry, which +could perform long journeys, strike a blow and be off again, and so +were more than a match for the infantry of other Indian princes. +But with infantry all this will be altered, for the marches must be +no longer or faster than they can journey. The order of battles, +too, will be changed altogether; and we shall depend more upon +foot, while our horse, until now almost invincible, will become of +secondary importance. + +"However, that is not the question, at present. The first thing to +be considered is, to which of the three great leaders you are to +attach yourself. As you know, I was for many years in Scindia's +service; but at his death the position was changed. Scindia knew +that I was active and capable; had he lived, I should soon have +gained much promotion. However, his chief minister took a dislike +to me; and I felt that, now the Maharajah was gone, Doulut would be +easily swayed by the counsels of those around him; and that instead +of promotion I should be more likely to lose my command, and +perhaps be put out of the way. Therefore I left Doulut's service, +and have entered that of the young Peishwa who, at the advice of +Nana Furnuwees, has given me the command of a troop of a hundred +men. + +"Years ago I gained Nana's goodwill, by apprising him of the +hostile intentions of the Rajah of Nagpore; when he promised me +that, should I at any time leave Scindia's service, he would give +me as good a position as I held there in that of the Peishwa. The +young prince is but twenty-one, and I will ask Nana to present you +to him as one who, in time, will become a valuable officer; and it +is likely that Mahdoo Rao will receive you well when he hears that, +though so young, you have gained great credit as a slayer of wild +beasts; and that, as he will see for himself, you promise to grow +into a strong man, and a brave soldier. + +"Nana Furnuwees is a man who, by his conciliating manner, gains the +confidence of all who come under his influence; and it is wholly +due to him that the authority of the Peishwa has not been entirely +overthrown by Scindia and Holkar. He is a reader of men's minds, +and has always surrounded himself with friends of discernment and +courage; and I think you would be likely, if you remained in the +Peishwa's service, to rise to a very much higher rank than I should +ever do, being myself but a rough soldier with a heavy hand. + +"Holkar, at present, is fast becoming altogether imbecile. He is +worn out both in mind and body, and I should not advise anybody to +join him. Therefore the choice rests between Doulut Rao Scindia and +the Peishwa; as far as I can see, there is an equal chance of your +seeing service with either." + +"I can choose without hesitation," Harry said. "Had you still been +in the army of Scindia, I would have joined it, too; but as you +have now entered that of the Peishwa, who is the lawful ruler of +the Mahrattas, though overshadowed by Scindia and Holkar, I should +certainly choose his service. + +"In any case, I would rather be with you. You have taught me the +use of arms, and to you I owe it that I was not killed, when an +infant; therefore I would assuredly rather fight under your orders, +than take service with Holkar or Scindia. + +"As to their quarrels, I know nothing. Ramdass has often told me as +much as he knew of these matters, but it all seemed to me to be +confusion; and the only thing I could understand was that they were +always intriguing against each other, instead of putting all their +forces in the field, and fighting it out fairly, and so deciding +who was to be the chief lord of the Mahrattas." + +"Although but a soldier, Puntojee, I cannot but see that this +constant antagonism, between the three principal leaders of the +Mahrattas, is unfortunate in the last degree. We are wasting the +strength that, if properly employed, might bring all India into +subjection and, when trouble really comes, we shall be a divided +people, instead of acting under one head and with one mind. +However, it is not for us soldiers to meddle with these things; but +to do our duty to the chief under whom we serve. + +"Well, if such be your choice, I will present you to Nana +Furnuwees. I am glad that you have chosen that service for, in the +first place, being young, he may take a liking to you, and you may +obtain rapid promotion; and still more, because I should prefer to +have you with me." + +Hitherto, Harry had worn only the scanty clothing in use by the +peasantry, and the small cultivators; but Sufder now bought him +clothes such as were worn by youths of a superior class. Soyera had +offered no objection to his departure and, indeed, Sufder had +spoken to her on the subject, before he had broached it to Harry. + +"'Tis hard upon me to give you up," she said to the lad; "but I +have always known that it must be so, and indeed, for the last year +I have seen little of you. The change will be good for you. You +will learn the manner of war, and take an interest in the intrigues +and troubles that are constantly going on, and of which we hear +little. + +"When you rejoin your countrymen, a few years hence, I shall go +with you. You need my testimony, to show that you are the son of +Major Lindsay; and I can be useful to you, in managing your +household. But at present it is best that I should stay here. A +young soldier would not care to have his mother looking after him, +and it is for your good that you should go your own way; and +besides, you will have the counsels of Sufder to aid you. I should +be out of place and, for the present, I am happy here with my good +brother and sister-in-law, the latter of whom would miss me sorely. +Moreover, Poona is but two days' ride from here, and you will no +doubt be able sometimes to come over and see us. + +"I have done what little I could for you. You are now old enough to +make your own way. The bird that has taught its nestling to fly +does not try to keep it in the nest, when it is once able to take +care of itself." + +"I can never be sufficiently grateful, for all that you have done +for me," Harry said earnestly. "You have been more than a mother to +me and, wherever I go, I shall not be happy unless you are with me, +though I see it is best, this time, that I should go alone; but +assuredly, when I join my people, and have a home of my own, it +would not seem like a home to me if you did not share it." + +Two days later, Harry mounted a horse that Ramdass had given him, +and started with Sufder for Poona. On arriving there they rode to +the little camp, half a mile out of the town, where Sufder's troop +was stationed. + +"You don't carry your tents with you, when you are on service in +the field?" + +"Not when on an expedition where haste is needed; for we should +make but poor progress, if we were hampered by luggage. When on a +distant expedition, we take tents. + +"This is a standing camp, and there are a score like it round the +town. They always remain in the same position; sometimes one troop +occupies them, sometimes another. When we go on an expedition, we +leave them; when we come back, if they are still unoccupied, we +again take possession. If they have been allotted to another troop, +a vacant one is found for us. + +"Only one regiment of horse and two of foot are in the city, where +they have lines of huts. We differ from the rest of the army, being +always on service; the others are only called out when there is +occasion for them, each under its own chief and, in case of +necessity, the Peishwa can put thirty thousand horsemen in the +field, besides those of the rajahs in alliance with him." + +The next morning Sufder, in his best attire, went with Harry into +the city; the latter for the first time carrying a sword, dagger +and pistols in his cummerbund, or sash. Without being questioned, +they entered the chamber were Nana was giving audience to all who +waited upon him on business. + +Sufder took his place at the lower end of the chamber, moving +forward as one after another applicant was disposed of until, at +length, his turn arrived. The minister, who knew that he was a +brave soldier, who had enjoyed the confidence of the late Scindia, +acknowledged his deep salutation with a friendly nod. + +"What can I do for you, Sufder?" + +"I desire nothing, your excellency, save that I may be permitted to +present to you one of my family: the son of a relation of mine who, +although still young, I may venture to recommend to you as one +possessing great courage and intelligence. I have myself given him +lessons in the use of his arms; and he has had other instructors, +and done credit to them. For the past year he has been working with +a famous shikaree, and has killed many tigers that were a scourge +to the villages near the Ghauts, together with many bears and +leopards; and his master reported that his fearlessness was great, +and that as a marksman his skill was equal to his own. He was most +unwilling that he should leave him, but I considered it was time +for him to enter the army; in which, I believe, he will soon +distinguish himself." + +"How old is he?" the minister asked. + +"He is as yet but sixteen but, as your highness may see, he is as +strong as most men, having devoted himself to exercises of all +sorts, since he was a child." + +"He is indeed cast in a strong mould, and his face pleases me. + +"And so, you would enter the service of His Highness, the Peishwa?" + +"That is my desire, your excellency." + +"You are young to serve as an officer and, for the present, you had +best remain with Sufder's troop. In the meantime, I will see what +suitable post can be found for you." + +With an expression of thanks, Sufder and Harry left the audience +hall. + +"It is a good beginning, Puntojee," the soldier said, as they left +the minister's palace. "Nana Furnuwees was evidently pleased with +you, and I think he will give you special employment. At the same +time, serving one master here is not without its danger--Nana +especially, powerful as he is, has enemies as powerful; for he has +always stood in the way of the ambition of Scindia." + +That evening an officer brought, from Nana, an order conferring +upon Harry the appointment of an assistant officer in Sufder's +troop, with the usual pay and allowances and, three days later, an +order came for him to attend the audience of the minister. On +arrival, he was told by the officer of the chamber that he was not +to present himself at public audience, but that Nana would speak to +him privately. He was therefore taken to an inner chamber where, an +hour later, Nana joined him. + +"I think by your face, Puntojee, that you can be trusted; and I +have decided to place you in the service of His Highness, the +Peishwa. What position you will hold there must depend upon +yourself, and him. I shall simply recommend you as one of whom I +have heard much good. It would be as well for you not to mention +your age; but let him suppose that, as you look, you are about the +same age as himself. He is amiable and kindly, and your position +will be a pleasant one. + +"I am anxious to prevent evil advisers from obtaining influence +over him. He is young and unsuspicious, and much harm might thus +come to the state. It is, then, for the general interest that he +should be surrounded by those whom I can trust; so that, if any +plotters are endeavouring to poison his mind, their plans may be +thwarted. I have of course, officers about his person who are +thoroughly trustworthy; but these are much older than himself, and +he chafes somewhat at what he wrongly considers his tutelage. But +indeed, as he is but twenty-one, and wholly unversed in matters of +state, it is needful that the management of affairs should rest in +the hands of those who have long controlled it. + +"Scindia would be the first to take advantage of any imprudence. He +is already, by far, the most powerful of the Mahratta princes. His +possessions are of immense extent; he holds the emperor at Delhi in +the palm of his hand; he can put one hundred thousand horse into +the field, and has large numbers of infantry, including sixteen +battalions drilled by French officers, and commanded by de Boigne; +and although Doulut Rao is but twenty, and as yet we know but +little of his disposition, he is of course surrounded by the +advisers of his uncle, and may be expected to pursue the same +policy. His uncle gained great ascendency over the Peishwa, and his +death was a fortunate circumstance. Still, it is certain that the +prince, until his powers are matured, will yield to the advice of +those to whom the conduct of affairs is entrusted. + +"Now, I am going to the palace, and have requested a private +audience with Mahdoo Rao, and I will take you with me." + +Followed by a train of officers, with whom Harry fell in, the +minister proceeded to the palace. His train remained in the public +hall, and Nana went into the Peishwa's private apartment. In a few +minutes, an official came in and called Puntojee; and Harry at once +followed him to an inner room, where the Peishwa and his minister +were alone. Harry bowed to the ground. + +"This, Prince, is the young man of whom I have spoken to you. He +bears an excellent character for his skill in arms, and has killed +many tigers and other beasts. It was but the other day that you +complained that you had no one of your own age to whom you could +talk freely; and I have selected this young officer as one who, I +thought, would be agreeable to you." + +"I thank you heartily, Nana. In truth, I sometimes need a +companion; and I think, by his face, that this officer will be an +agreeable one. To what post, think you, had I best appoint him?" + +"As he is a famous shikaree, I should say that it would be suitable +were you to make him director of the chase." + +"But I never go hunting." + +"That is true; but in time, when your occupations of state lessen, +you might do so," Nana said. "And indeed, even at present, there is +nothing to prevent your hunting sometimes in the royal preserves, +where there must be an abundance of game of all sorts." + +"So let it be, then," the Peishwa said. "In truth, I care not for +the killing of beasts, unless they do harm to the villagers. But it +is right that there should be someone to direct the men who have +charge of the preserves and, as an official, you will have the +right of entry here at all times, and will be frequently about my +person; and I will confer with you about other things, as well as +the chase. You will, of course, have an apartment assigned to you. + +"You will arrange about the emoluments, Nana." + +"You had better go to my house, and wait for me there," Nana said; +and Harry, bowing deeply to the prince and his minister, left the +palace. + +He did not deceive himself as to the reason for which Nana had thus +placed him in a position in which he was likely to be frequently in +the company of the young prince. He intended him to act as a spy. +This he was firmly determined not to do, in any matter save in +thwarting any designs Scindia might have. That was a public duty. + +By this time, he had learnt much of the events that were passing. +Ramdass and the other ryots of his acquaintance regarded Nana +Furnuwees as the guardian of the country. For many years, it was +his wisdom and firmness alone that had thwarted the designs of +Scindia, whose advent to supreme authority would have been regarded +as a grave misfortune, by all the cultivators of the Deccan. +Scindia's expenses in keeping up so great an army were enormous, +and the exactions of his tax gatherers ground to the dust the +cultivators and peasantry of his own wide dominions; and Harry was +therefore ready to give Nana a faithful support in all public +matters. He knew that the minister had many enemies, even among the +rajahs in the Peishwa's dominion, and in those round it; for they +regarded him, with reason, as a curb upon their private ambitions +and, for years, intrigues had been going on for his overthrow. + +On the other hand, Harry was much pleased with Mahdoo Rao, who was +a most amiable and kindly young man. While determined, then, to do +all that he could in support of Nana; he decided that he would, on +no account, give him any report that would be unfavourable to the +Peishwa. His interview with the minister, on the return of the +latter, was a short one. + +"Here," the latter said, "is a purse of five hundred rupees, with +which to obtain garments suitable for one in attendance on the +Peishwa. Your emolument will be two hundred rupees a month. I shall +issue orders to the men employed in the forests and preserves to +report to you; and have requested the chamberlain to allot an +apartment to you in the palace, and to tell off two servants to be +in attendance on you. + +"You understand that your mission, as far as I am concerned, is to +give me early warning, if any of those favourable to Scindia--you +shall be furnished with a list of their names--are endeavouring to +obtain an undue influence over the prince; who is of an altogether +unsuspicious character, and would be likely to fall an easy victim +to bad counsels." + +"You can depend upon my doing so," Harry said. "I have been taught +to regard Scindia as an enemy to the public peace, and shall use +all diligence in carrying out your excellency's orders." + +And, leaving the minister, Harry went to Sufder and told him what +had happened. + +"In truth, Puntojee, you were born under a lucky star. I never +dreamt that Nana Furnuwees would have thus introduced you to the +Peishwa. Now, lad, you have a fine career opened to you. It will +need caution but, as Scindia's ancestor was but a slipper bearer, +and rose to the highest rank and honour; so it is open to you to +win a great position, if you steer clear of the dangers that attend +all who play a part in public affairs. I foresee that you will +become a favourite with the prince, but remember to put your trust +in Nana. He is, at present, the greatest power in the land, and has +been so for many years but, unlike most who have attained such +authority, he is liked by the people, for he uses his power well, +and for the good of the state. + +"You see, even now the young Peishwa is by no means secure on the +musnud. The adherents of Rugoba, who was undoubtedly the lawful +ruler of the Deccan, still live; and may one day raise the flag of +revolt, in favour of his sons Bajee Rao and Chimnajee Appa who, +with Amrud Rao, his adopted son, are all in close custody in the +hill fort of Sewneree, under two of Nana's officers. + +"There is a general feeling of pity for these young men, even among +those who regard their imprisonment as necessary--for, were they +free, a civil war would assuredly break out again--and the feeling +is increased by the fact that Bajee Rao is a youth of extraordinary +accomplishments. He is graceful in person, with a handsome +countenance and a charming manner and, although but nineteen, he is +an excellent horseman, skilled in the use of the bow, and +considered to be the finest swordsman in the country. He is deeply +read in all our religious books and, in all the country, there is +no one of his age so learned. + +"All these things, however, only add to the necessity for his being +kept in prison. A youth so gifted and, as many people consider, the +lawful heir to the throne, would speedily be joined by all the +enemies of Nana; and might not only drive the minister into exile, +but dethrone Mahdoo Rao. Such being the case, no one can blame Nana +for keeping them in confinement--at any rate, until Mahdoo Rao has +been master for some years, and has proved that he is able to +maintain his position. + +"Now, lad, I will go into the town with you, and purchase dresses +fit for an official of the palace." + +"I quite see that I have been most fortunate in obtaining such a +position, Sufder; but I own I should have preferred to remain with +you, and learn to do service as a soldier." + +"That you may learn later on," Sufder said. "Having the confidence +of the Peishwa, you may soon obtain military rank, as well as civil +and, if war breaks out, may hold a position vastly better than you +could hope to attain to as the mere chief of a troop." + +"It seems very ridiculous, Sufder, that I should be thus put +forward, without any merit of my own; while you, who have fought in +many battles, are still only commander of your troop." + +"I have no desire for more," Sufder replied. "I am a soldier, and +can do my duty as ordered, but I have no head for intrigues; and I +consider the risks of a battle are quite sufficient, without those +of being put out of the way for mixing myself up in plots. + +"Again, your rise is not altogether undeserved. You have, by your +exercises, attained the strength of manhood early; and your +experience as a tiger hunter has fitted you for the post for which +you are appointed, just as your diligence in exercise in arms will +be of good service to you, if you come to hold military command. +But you must be circumspect and, above all things, do not forget to +use the dye with which Soyera has furnished you. Hitherto your +white skin has done you no harm but, were it discovered here that +you are English, it would at once be imagined that you were a spy, +and little time would be given you to explain how matters stand." + +"I will certainly be careful as to that and, now that I am to have +a private apartment, I shall be able to apply the dye without the +fear of being interrupted, as might have been the case in camp." + +On the following day, Harry, having obtained clothes suitable to +his position, betook himself to the palace, where one of the +officers of the chamberlain conducted him to his apartment, and +assigned to him two men appointed to his service. + + + +Chapter 3: A Change In Affairs. + + +Harry Lindsay's duties were little more than nominal. The reports +sent in to him, by those in charge of the royal preserves, could +scarcely be considered as satisfactory; as they stated that, owing +to the fact that for years there had been no hunting there, the +tigers had greatly increased in number, and had thinned down the +stags and, indeed, in some cases had so destroyed other game that +they were driven to escape from the enclosures, and to ravage the +villages. But beyond receiving these reports, and riding over +occasionally to the preserves, Harry had little to do save to take +part in any court ceremonies and, when called upon to do so, to +accompany the Peishwa in his walks in the palace garden. He +therefore determined to learn to read and write in Mahratta and, +for two or three hours a day, a man of the weynsh, or mercantile +class, came in to teach him. So careful was Nana Furnuwees, in +preventing Scindia's adherents from approaching the prince, that +Harry had nothing whatever to report on this head. + +One day, when Mahdoo Rao, who had taken a great liking to him, was +walking in the garden, chatting familiarly to him of his life in +the country, and his adventures with tigers and other wild beasts, +he said: + +"Have you seen my cousin, Bajee Rao?" + +"No, Your Highness, I have never seen him." + +"You have heard of him, of course, and nothing but good." + +"That is so, Prince. It seems that, both in sports and learning, he +is wonderfully well instructed." + +"I should like to see him," the prince said. "I admire what I have +heard of him, greatly, and it is hard that he should be shut up in +prison; and yet he is scarcely more a prisoner than I am." + +Harry was struck with dismay. + +"But Your Highness is in no way a prisoner!" + +"I am not shut up in a fortress," the young prince said, "but I am +no more my own master than Bajee Rao is. Nana Furnuwees treats me +as if I were a child. He is, I know, devoted to me; but that makes +it no more pleasant. I can go where I like, but it is always with +my retinue. I cannot choose my own friends." + +"Your Highness will forgive me, if I say that it is for your own +safety, and for the peace of the country that your minister watches +over you so jealously; and doubtless he thinks that, having been +the chief adviser to your family, for so many years, having guarded +it so successfully from those who would have lessened your +authority, for the present it is of the greatest importance that he +should continue to guide the state." + +"I am, at least, very glad that he allows me a companion of my own +age, to whom I can talk freely." + +"On all subjects, Your Highness, excepting state matters. Nana +presented me because I was ignorant of the court, and knew nothing +whatever of intrigues, and was not likely to take any part in them. +Therefore, Your Highness, I pray you but to speak upon ordinary +matters; be assured I am your devoted servant, but the courtiers +would grow suspicious, were you to talk of state matters with me. +These things speedily become known, and I should fall under Nana's +displeasure." + +"Perhaps you are right," the Peishwa admitted, in a tone of +melancholy. "No doubt, whatever passes in this house is known to my +minister; and indeed, it is his duty to make himself so acquainted. +Still, I feel it hard that I should not have one friend to whom I +can speak." + +"The time will come, Prince, when you will be able to do so and, +doubtless, there will be at hand those who will dare to have your +confidence." + +The prince was silent but, after this, he abstained from any +remarks to Harry concerning the state. He had, indeed, for some +time been in correspondence with Bajee Rao, who had gained the +confidence of one of those appointed to look after him and, though +there was nothing save expressions of friendship on the part of +both princes, Nana was furious when he found out, from his spies, +what was going on. + +The news came as a shock to the minister. Nana had been the +greatest enemy of the house of Rugoba; and the discovery of this +correspondence, and the friendship between the two young men, so +threatened his authority that, after ordering that Bajee Rao and +his brothers should be more strictly confined than before, he +visited the Peishwa and upbraided him bitterly for having entered +upon a friendship with the head of a party which had harassed his +family, and had brought innumerable troubles on the state. Then he +sent a message to Harry, bidding him to come, at once. + +"How is it, Puntojee," he said sternly, "that you have altogether +failed to justify the faith I put in you, and have already assisted +Mahdoo Rao to enter into relations with my enemy, Bajee Rao?" + +Harry was thunderstruck at this sudden attack. + +"My lord, you must have been misinformed. I know nothing of any +such correspondence and, if it really went on, I think the Peishwa +would have taken me into his confidence." + +"Do you mean to say that Mahdoo has not spoken to you about his +cousin?" + +"No, sir, I do not say so for, some four months ago, he spoke in +terms of admiration for Bajee Rao; but he did not pursue the +subject, and never afterwards alluded to it." + +The minister looked at him fixedly. + +"I believe you," he said. "You do not look like a double-faced man, +but as one who would tell the truth, whatever were the consequences. +Moreover, I felt that if you had known of Mahdoo Rao's intentions, +and had not reported them to me, you would, on receiving my message, +have endeavoured to make your escape. I have of course enquired, and +found that you spent your afternoon, as usual, with your scribe; and +that you afterwards rode out to Sufder's camp, and there talked for +half an hour, sitting outside the tent and conversing on ordinary +matters; and then you returned here to the palace. These proceedings +go far to assure me that you were ignorant of the discovery that had +been made, that a correspondence had been going on between Mahdoo and +Bajee. Still, I thought you might have known of the correspondence, +though not of the discovery; but now I am quite convinced that you +were altogether ignorant of what was going on." + +The scene with Nana, and the knowledge that he had brought upon his +cousins even stricter confinement than before, acted most painfully +upon the mind of the young Peishwa, already embittered by the +restraint in which he was being held. He now shut himself up in his +room, and absolutely refused to leave it. His absence from the +durbars was put down to illness. Nana paid no great attention to +him, believing that the young prince would speedily recover +himself. + +This, however, was not the case, for settled melancholy took +possession of him. On the 22nd of October he appeared at the +Duddera, a high ceremonial, went among his troops and, in the +evening, received his chiefs and the representatives from the great +rajahs but, three days later, he threw himself from a terrace in +front of his palace, broke two of his limbs, and so seriously +injured himself that he died, two days afterwards; having, almost +in his last breath, expressed to Nana his strong desire that Bajee +Rao should succeed him on the musnud. + +The consternation of the minister was unbounded. It seemed that, by +this sudden and unexpected blow, the whole of his plans were +overthrown; and that not only his position, but his very life, was +in danger. + +He sent for Harry, two hours after the Peishwa's death. + +"Answer me frankly," he said. "Can I depend upon you, absolutely? +And have you had no communication of any kind from my enemies?" + +"You can depend upon me, my lord. Everyone knows that you have +saved the state, a score of times; and will, I doubt not, do the +same again." + +"I have the will," the minister said, gravely, "but whether I have +the power is another thing. I sent off a messenger to the general, +Purseram Bhow, bidding him gather as many troops as possible and +march hither; and I shall send letters to the Rajah of Nagpore, and +Scindia. Holkar, being in Poona, I have already seen and, as he has +always supported me against Rugoba, he is as anxious as I am as to +the succession. + +"I shall now send you with a duplicate letter to Purseram Bhow for, +since the terrible accident to Mahdoo Rao, whom I loved dearly for +his amiable character, it is probable that the adherents of Bajee +Rao have been active; and that my every movement is watched, and +attempts may be made to stop any messengers that I may send out. +Take Sufder's troop with you. If you are stopped, fight your way +through, whatever their force. It is a matter of supreme importance +that this letter should reach the general." + +"It shall reach him, my lord," Harry said, as he took it; "in five +minutes I shall be on my way." + +Going to his room he changed his attire, mounted his horse, and +rode to Sufder's camp. The men were all ready, as Nana had sent an +order to Sufder to prepare instantly for a journey. + +"So it is you, Puntojee!" the captain said, as he rode up; "the +orderly did not tell me whom I was to escort, nor our destination. +In which direction do we ride?" + +"I am bearer of a letter to Purseram Bhow." + +"Then I know the direction;" and, giving orders to his men, he rode +off at once by the side of Harry. + +"This is a terrible business, Puntojee." + +"I am greatly grieved, indeed, for no one could have been kinder to +me than Mahdoo Rao." + +"Yes, yes," Sufder said; "that is all very well, but the serious +side of the matter is that, just as everything seemed settled, we +may be entering upon another civil war, more terrible than the +last. Of course, I am sorry for the young Peishwa; but I doubt +whether he was in any way fit to rule over the Mahrattas. Kindness +of heart goes for nothing with a people like ours; split up into +many factions, led by many chiefs, and ever ready for war. It needs +a strong, as well as an able man to hold in check all the parties +in the state. + +"Scindia was the sort of man to rule us. He was strong in every +way, was troubled with no scruples, would strike down without mercy +any who opposed him. He took great care of his troops, and they +were always ready to follow him. That is the man we want on the +musnud; not a young prince, of whom we can only say that he was +kindly. + +"And why did Nana choose you?" + +"I am a second string to his bow. He sent off a messenger as soon +as he heard of Mahdoo Rao's accident but, fearing he might be +intercepted on the way, he has chosen me as being a person no one +would be likely to suspect of being his messenger, on so important +a matter." + +"It is important, indeed, Puntojee. There is no saying what may be +the result of the Peishwa's death. There is no doubt that Scindia +and Holkar will, for once, be in complete accord with Nana +Furnuwees, and will combine in any plan to keep Rugoba's son from +succeeding; still, there are many of the friends of Rugoba who will +be ready to declare for his son and, moreover, there are the +stories that have been so widely circulated as to Bajee's personal +appearance, and his many accomplishments--these will gain for him a +great number of partisans." + +The journey was performed without interruption. At one time, a body +of some fifty horsemen made their appearance on rising ground near +the road, but drew off when they saw how strong was the party and, +after a ride of sixty miles, they arrived at Purseram Bhow's camp. +Harry dismounted in front of the general's tent and, entering, +handed him the letter. + +"What is your news?" the latter asked, before opening it. + +"There is none, General, beyond what the letter, sent to you three +hours before I left, will have prepared you to hear. I only bear a +copy of that letter, in case the first should not have reached +you." + +"It is well that the precaution was taken for, in truth, the +messenger has not arrived." + +"It is possible that he may have been murdered on the way, sir; for +we saw a party of fifty horsemen on the road, whose intentions +seemed to be hostile, but as I had Sufder's troop of a hundred men +with me, they drew off." + +"But what is the news, then, that is so important that steps are +taken to stop messengers that bear it?" + +Harry related what had taken place, the old officer giving many +ejaculations of regret, and horror, at the news of Mahdoo Rao's +death. + +"'Tis a terrible misfortune, indeed," he said, "and is like to +throw the whole country into disorder again." + +He opened the despatch now, and glanced through it. He called some +of his officers, who were gathered near the tent, and ordered them +to cause the trumpets to be sounded for all the troops to be in +readiness to march, at once; leaving only a small body of infantry +to pack up the tents, and follow at a more leisurely pace with the +baggage. + +An hour later two regiments of cavalry started, infantry men being +taken up behind the troopers and, late the next day, they arrived +at Poona. Scindia and the Rajah of Berar had also been sent for, in +haste and, as soon as they arrived, a council was held as to the +choice that should be made of a successor. + +All were opposed to the selection of Bajee Rao; for he would have +been brought up by his mother, with the deepest enmity towards +those who had successfully combined against his father. It was +therefore proposed that the widow of Mahdoo Rao should adopt a son, +in whose name the government should be carried on. + +It was not until two months had been spent in negotiations that the +matter was finally settled. One of Scindia's ministers, named +Balloba, alone opposed the course decided upon; and Bajee Rao +opened communications with him, and succeeded in winning him over +to his cause. Having done this he addressed Scindia; offering him a +very large addition to his territory, and payment of all his +expenses, if he would assist him to gain his rightful position. As +Balloba had great influence over the young Scindia, the offer was +accepted. + +The arrangement was made so secretly that Nana Furnuwees had +received no intimation, whatever, of what was going on, until the +agreement had been concluded. Purseram Bhow was again summoned to +Poona and, with his usual energy, made a march of one hundred and +twenty miles in forty-eight hours. + +The position was a difficult one, indeed. At one blow, the plans +that had been so carefully laid by Nana were shattered. Scindia, +who had but a month or two before formed one of the confederacy, +had now gone round to the side of Bajee Rao, who regarded the +minister as his greatest enemy. Holkar was not to be depended upon +and, in Poona, there were many adherents of the son of Rugoba. The +council held by Nana, Purseram, and two or three other great +officers was long and, at times, stormy; but it was finally agreed +that the sole way out of the perilous position, caused by Scindia's +desertion, was to anticipate him and to release Bajee Rao, and +declare him Peishwa. + +Purseram started, at once, to the fort where the brothers were +confined. Harry, who was now deeply interested in the course of +events, was one of Nana's officers who accompanied Purseram. On +hearing the general's errand, the officer in command of the fort at +once sent for Bajee, his brother Chimnajee, and Amrud--who was the +adopted son of Rugoba, and who stood on an equal footing with +regard to the succession. Bajee Rao listened calmly to the +proposals made to him in Nana's name, asked several questions, and +demanded guarantees; but was evidently disposed to accept the +proposals, if assured that they were made in good faith. + +Amrud strongly urged him to decline the offer; but Bajee, upon +Purseram taking the most solemn oath known to the Hindoos, in proof +of his sincerity, accepted the offer and, with his brother +Chimnajee, rode with Purseram to Poona; Amrud being left behind in +the fort, as Purseram considered that he would continue to exercise +his influence over Bajee in a direction hostile to Nana's interest. + +As soon as the party arrived at the capital, an interview took +place between Bajee and Nana when, in the presence of many of the +great officers, both swore to forget all enmities and injuries, and +Bajee promised to retain Nana at the head of his administration. + +That same evening, the minister sent for Harry. + +"Puntojee," he said, "I have a commission for you. I know that you +are loyal to me, and that I can depend upon you. I wish you to go +at once to Scindia's camp, which is now on the bank of the +Godavery, and ascertain how he takes the news. Doubtless Balloba, +his prime minister, will be furious at finding that, instead of +Bajee becoming a mere creature of Scindia's, I have placed him on +the musnud, and retain my place as his chief minister. I can employ +you for this business better than most others, for the greater part +of my officers are personally known to those of Scindia, while you +have scarce been seen by them. I have also a high idea of your +shrewdness; and I have no doubt that you will, in some way, be able +to gain the information that I require--indeed, it will probably be +the public talk of the camp. If you should find an opportunity of +entering into negotiations, with any influential person in +Scindia's court, I authorize you to do so in my name; and to agree +to any reasonable demands that he may make, either for a payment in +money or in estates. Scindia's character is wholly unformed and, +though today he may be guided by Balloba, tomorrow he may lean on +someone else. + +"You can go in any guise you think fit, either as a trooper or as a +camp follower. In either case, you had better take Sufder and +twenty men with you; and leave them in concealment within a few +miles of the camp so that, in case of necessity, you can join them; +and his men can act as messengers, and bring your reports to me." + +As it was now a year since Harry had first gone to Poona, and he +had during that time worked diligently, he could now both read and +write the Mahratta language, and was thus able to send in written +reports; instead of being obliged to rely upon oral messages, which +might be misdelivered by those who carried them, or possibly +reported to others instead of to the minister; whereas reading and +writing were known to but few of the Mahrattas, outside the Brahmin +class. + +Sufder expressed himself much pleased, when he heard that he was to +accompany Harry. + +"I am sick of this life of inactivity," he said. "Why, we have had +no fighting for the past five years; and we shall forget how to use +our arms, unless there is something doing. I would willingly +accompany you into Scindia's camp, but I am far too well known +there to hope to escape observation. However, I will pick out +twenty of my best men so that, if there should be a skirmish, we +shall be able to hold our own. Of course, I shall choose men who +have good horses, for we may have to ride for it." + +Harry himself was very well mounted, for Mahdoo Rao had given him +two excellent horses; and as he had, when out with Sufder's troop, +tried them against the best of those of the sowars, he felt sure +that he could trust to them, in case of having to ride for his +life. The trooper who looked after them had become much attached to +him, and he determined to take him with him into Scindia's camp, +one of Sufder's other men looking after the horses. + +After a consultation with Sufder, he decided on adopting the +costume of a petty trader or pedlar carrying garments, scarfs, and +other articles used by soldiers. Of these he laid in a store and, +three hours after his interview with Nana, started with his escort; +the trooper leading his spare horse, on which his packs were +fastened, and his own man riding a country pony. The distance to +Scindia's camp was under a hundred miles, and they took three days +in accomplishing it. It was important that the horses should not be +knocked up, as their lives might depend upon their speed. + +When within ten miles of their destination, they halted in a grove +near the Moola river. Here Harry changed his clothes, and assumed +those of a small merchant. Then he mounted the pony; a portion of +the packs was fastened behind him, and the rest carried by his +servant. + +Scindia's camp lay around Toka, a town on the Godavery at the foot +of a range of hills. On arriving there he went to the field bazaar, +where a large number of booths, occupied by traders and country +peasants, were erected. The former principally sold arms, saddlery, +and garments; the latter, the produce of their own villages. +Choosing an unoccupied piece of ground, Harry erected a little +shelter tent; composed of a dark blanket thrown over a ridge pole, +supported by two others, giving a height of some four feet, in the +centre. The pony was picketed just behind this. In front of it a +portion of the wares was spread out, and Harry began the usual loud +exhortations, to passers by, to inspect them. + +Having thus established himself, he left Wasil in charge, +explaining to him the prices that he was to ask for each of the +articles sold, and then started on a tour through the camp. Here +and there pausing to listen to the soldiers, he picked up scraps of +news; and learned that there was a general expectation that the +army would march, in a day or two, towards Poona--it being rumoured +that Scindia and his minister, Balloba, had been outwitted by Nana +Furnuwees; and that Balloba had made no secret of his anger, but +vowed vengeance against the man who had overthrown plans which, it +had been surely believed, would have resulted in Scindia's +obtaining supreme control over the Deccan. + +Returning to his little tent, he wrote a letter to Nana, telling +him what he had gathered, and giving approximately the strength of +Scindia's force; adding that, from what he heard, the whole were +animated with the desire to avenge what they considered an insult +to their prince. This note he gave to Wasil, who at once started on +foot to join Sufder; who would forward it, by four troopers, to +Poona. + +The next morning he returned and, after purchasing provisions from +the countrymen, and lighting a fire for cooking them, he assisted +Harry at his stall. The latter was standing up, exhibiting a +garment to a soldier, who was haggling with him over the price, +when a party of officers rode by. At their head was one whose dress +showed him to be a person of importance; and whom Harry at once +recognized as Balloba, having often noticed him during the +negotiations at Poona. As his eye fell upon Harry he checked his +horse for a moment, and beckoned to him to come to him. + +"Come here, weynsh," he said, using the term generally applied to +the commercial caste. + +[Illustration: Harry went up to him, and salaamed.] + +Harry went up to him, and salaamed. + +"How comes it," the minister asked, "that so fine a young fellow as +you are is content to be peddling goods through the country, when +so well fitted by nature for better things? You should be a +soldier, and a good one. For so young a man, I have never seen a +greater promise of strength. + +"It seems to me that your face is not unknown to me. Where do you +come from?" + +"From Jooneer, your excellency, where my people are cultivators +but, having no liking for that life, I learned the trade of a +shopkeeper, and obtained permission to travel to your camp, and to +try my fortune in disposing of some of my master's goods." + +As Jooneer was but some sixty miles from Toka, the explanation was +natural enough and, as the former town lay near to the main road +from Scindia's dominions in Candeish, it afforded an explanation of +Balloba's partial recognition of his face. + +"And as a merchant, you can read and write, I suppose?" the latter +went on. + +"Yes, your highness, sufficiently well for my business." + +"Well, think it over. You can scarcely find your present life more +suitable to your taste than that of a cultivator, and the army is +the proper place for a young fellow with spirit, and with strength +and muscles such as you have. If you like to enlist in my own +bodyguard, and your conduct be good, I will see that you have such +promotion as you deserve." + +"Your excellency is kind, indeed," Harry said, humbly. "Before I +accept your kind offer, will you permit me to return to Jooneer to +account for my sales to my employer, and to obtain permission of my +father to accept your offer; which would indeed be greatly more to +my taste than the selling of goods." + +"It is well," Balloba said, and then broke off: + +"Ah! I know now why I remember your face. 'Tis the lightness of +your eyes, which are of a colour rarely seen; but somehow or other, +it appears to me that it was not at Jooneer, but at Poona, that I +noticed your face." + +"I was at Poona, with my master, when your highness was there," +Harry said. + +"That accounts for it." + +The minister touched his horse's flanks with his heel and rode on, +with a thoughtful look on his face. Harry at once joined Wasil. + +"Quick, Wasil! There is no time to be lost. Throw the saddle on to +the pony, and make your way out of the camp, at once. Pitch all the +other things into the tent, and close it. If you leave them here, +it will seem strange. Balloba has seen me at Poona, and it is +likely enough that, as he thinks it over, he will remember that it +was in a dress altogether different from this. Go at once to +Sufder. If you get there before me, tell him to mount at once, and +ride fast to meet me." + +Two minutes later, everything was prepared; and Wasil, mounting the +pony, rode off, while Harry moved away among the tents. In a quiet +spot, behind one of these, he threw off his upper garments and +stood in the ordinary undress of a Hindoo peasant, having nothing +on but a scanty loincloth. He had scarcely accomplished this when +he heard the trampling of horses; and saw, past the tent, four +troopers ride up to the spot he had just left. + +"Where is the trader who keeps this tent?" one of them shouted. "He +is a spy, and we have orders to arrest him." + +Harry waited to hear no more, but walked in the opposite direction; +taking care to maintain a leisurely stride, and to avoid all +appearance of haste. Then, going down to the road by the side of +which the bazaar was encamped, he mingled with the crowd there. +Presently, one of the troopers dashed up. + +"Has anyone seen a man in the dress of a trader?" and he roughly +described the attire of which Harry had rid himself. + +There was a general chorus of denial, from those standing round, +and the trooper again galloped on. + +Harry continued his walk at a leisurely pace, stopping occasionally +to look at articles exposed for sale, until he reached the end of +the bazaar. Then he made across the country. Trumpets were blowing +now in the camp, and he had no doubt that Balloba had ordered a +thorough search to be made for him. He did not quicken his pace, +however, until well out of sight; but then he broke into a swinging +trot, for he guessed that, when he was not found in the camp, +parties of cavalry would start to scour the country. He had gone +some four miles when, looking behind him, he saw about twenty +horsemen, far back along the road. + +The country here was flat and open, with fields irrigated by canals +running from the Moola, and affording no opportunity for +concealment. Hitherto he had been running well within his powers; +but he now quickened his pace, and ran at full speed. He calculated +that Wasil would have at least half an hour's start of him; and +that, as he would urge the pony to the top of his speed, he would +by this time have joined Sufder; and he was sure that the latter +would not lose an instant before starting to meet him. He had +hesitated, for a moment, whether he should break into a quiet walk +and allow the troopers to overtake him, relying upon the alteration +of his costume; but he reflected that Balloba might have foreseen +that he would change his disguise, and have ordered the arrest of a +young man with curiously light eyes. + +Harry had always attempted to conceal this feature, as far as +possible, by staining his eyelashes a deep black; but when he +looked up, the colour of his eyes could hardly fail to strike +anyone specially noticing them. + +His constant exercise as a boy had given him great swiftness of +foot, and the year passed as a shikaree had added to his endurance +and speed and, divested of clothing as he was, he felt sure that +the horsemen, who were more than a mile in his rear when he first +caught sight of them, would not overtake him for some time. He was +running, as he knew, for life; for he was certain that, if caught, +Balloba would have him at once put to death as a spy. Although +hardy and of great endurance, the Mahratta horses, which were small +in size, were not accustomed to being put to the top of their speed +except for a short charge; and the five miles that they had +galloped already must have, to some extent, fatigued them. + +After running at the top of his speed for about a mile, he looked +back. The party was still a long distance in his rear. Again he +pressed forward, but his exertions were telling upon him and, +before he had gone another half mile, the Mahrattas had approached +within little more than half that distance. + +Far ahead he thought he could perceive a body of horsemen, but +these were nearly two miles away, and he would be overtaken before +they could reach him; therefore he turned suddenly off, and took to +one of the little banks dividing one irrigated field from another. +As soon as the horsemen reached the spot where he had left the +road, they too turned off; but Harry, who was now husbanding his +strength, saw a sudden confusion among them. + +The little bank of earth on which he was running was but a foot +wide, and was softened by the water which soaked in from both +sides. It could bear his weight, well enough; but not that of a +mounted man. Only one or two had attempted to follow it, the others +had plunged into the field. Here their horses at once sank up to +the knees. Some endeavoured to force the animals on, others to +regain the road they had quitted. The two horsemen on the bank were +making better progress, but their horses' hoofs sank deeply in the +soft earth; and their pace, in spite of the exertions of the +riders, was but a slow one. + +Harry turned when he came to the end of the field, and followed +another bank at right angles, and was therefore now running in the +right direction. He was more than keeping his lead from the +foremost of his pursuers Some of the others galloped along the +road, parallel to him, but ahead. + +The horsemen he had first seen were now within a mile. On they +came, at the top of their speed; and the troopers on the road +halted, not knowing whether this body were friends or foes, while +those on the bank reined in their horses, and rode back to join +their comrades. Harry continued to run till he came to another bank +leading to the road and, following this, he arrived there just as +Sufder galloped up with his party, one of the troopers leading his +horse. They gave a shout of welcome, as he came up. + +"I thought it must be you," Sufder said, "from the way you ran, +rather than from your attire. Shall we charge those fellows?" + +"I think not," Harry said. "In the first place Scindia has not, as +yet, declared war against Nana and Bajee; in the second, there may +be more men coming on behind; therefore it will be best to leave +them alone though, if they attack us, we shall, of course, defend +ourselves." + +"I think that is their intention, Puntojee. See, they have gathered +together! I suppose they daren't go back, and say that you have +escaped." + +"Give me either your sword or spear." + +The latter was part of the regular equipment of the Mahratta +horsemen. Sufder handed him his sword and, as the pursuers advanced +towards them at a canter which speedily became a gallop, he took +his place by the side of Sufder and, the latter giving the word, +the band dashed forward to meet their opponents. + +The combat was a short one. Sufder's followers were all picked men, +and were better mounted than Scindia's troopers. These made special +efforts to get at Harry, but the latter's skill with the sword +enabled him to free himself from his most pressing opponents. +Sufder laid about him stoutly and, his men seconding him well, half +their opponents were speedily struck to the ground; and the rest, +turning their horses, fled at full speed. Sufder's men would have +followed, but he shouted to them to draw rein. + +"Enough has been done, and well done," he said. "If Scindia means +war, nothing will be said about this fight; but if he does not, +complaints will doubtless be laid against us, and it is better that +we should be able to say that we fought only in self defence; and +that, when the attack ceased, we allowed them to ride off +unmolested, though we might easily enough have slain the whole of +them." + +On arriving at the grove where the troop had halted, Harry at once +resumed his own clothes; for although in his early days he had been +accustomed to be slightly clad, he felt ill at ease riding almost +naked. Here, too, he found Wasil, who had ridden with such speed +that his pony was too much exhausted for him to ride back with the +rest. He received his master with the greatest joy, for he had +feared he would be captured before leaving the camp. + +They continued their journey to Jooneer, where they halted for the +night. Sufder went to his house, and Harry rode out to the farm. + + + +Chapter 4: A British Resident. + + +As Harry drew rein at the farm Soyera ran out, followed by her +brother and Anundee, with cries of joy at his unexpected return. It +was nearly fifteen months since she had last seen him; though he +had, when opportunity offered, sent messages to her assuring her +that he was well, and hoped ere long to be able to come over to see +her. + +"I should scarce have known you," she said, "in those fine clothes +of yours. You sent word that you were an officer in the Peishwa's +service; but I hardly thought that you could be so much changed. +You have grown a great deal, and are now much taller than Ramdass's +sons." + +The worthy farmer and Anundee were also delighted to see him. + +"How long are you going to stay?" the former asked. + +"Only till tomorrow, at daybreak. I have to ride forward, with all +haste, to Poona; for I have been on a mission for Nana Furnuwees." + +"Surely it is not so important that you cannot stay a few hours, +Puntojee?" + +"It is of importance. You may have known that Nana has placed Bajee +Rao on the musnud, and he has installed himself as his minister; +thereby defeating the plans of Balloba and Scindia, who will +probably come along here with their whole force, in a day or two." + +Late that evening, when the others had retired to bed, Soyera and +Harry had a long talk together. + +"Have you thought, Harry," she asked, after speaking for some time +about his doings and position at court, "of joining your people +again? There is peace between the Peishwa's court and the English. +There is a British Resident at Poona and, as you have now gained a +certain rank there, you could go to him with a much better face +than if you had come direct from here, as a peasant. Then it would +probably have been supposed that you were an impostor. That you +were English, of course could be seen by your skin; but it might +have been thought that I had adopted some English child, and was +now trying to pass it off as the son of an officer." + +"I think, mother, that I had best continue, for some time, as I am. +You see I have, at present, nothing in common with the English +except their blood. Were another war to break out between the +Mahrattas and Bombay, I would at once declare myself to the +Resident here, and go down to Bombay but, even then, my position +would be a doubtful one and, unless I were to enlist in their army, +I do not see how I should maintain myself. + +"Moreover, you must remember that I have now a deep interest in +matters here. Nana Furnuwees has treated me with much kindness, and +placed his confidence in me. He has many enemies, as I have told +you. Scindia is about to advance against Poona, and it is probable +that he may succeed in driving Nana into exile, or imprisoning him +for life; and establishing Balloba, or some other person devoted to +his interest, as minister, in which case Scindia would be +absolutely supreme. Nothing would persuade me to desert Nana; who +has, for many years, alone withstood the ambition of Scindia's +party. I do not say, for a moment, that my aid would be of the +slightest use to him but, at any rate, he shall see that I am not +ungrateful for his kindness; and will be faithful to him in his +misfortunes, as he has been kind to me, when in power." + +"That is right," Soyera said. "The cause of Nana is the cause of +all in this part of the Deccan; for we should be infinitely worse +off, were Scindia to lay hands on us. But there is an alternative, +by which you could at once remain faithful to Nana, and prepare +your way for joining the English, when you considered that the time +for doing so had arrived." + +"What is that, Soyera?" + +"You might go to the English Resident, and tell him who you are, +and how you have been brought up. Say that, at present, you wish to +remain in the service of Nana; who has been a good friend to you, +and with whom your sympathies, like those of nearly all the +cultivators in the Peishwa's dominions, accord. Say that you hope, +when the time comes, to return to your countrymen; and that, in the +meantime, you will give him any information in your power as to +what is going on, subject only to your friendship for Nana. Thus, +by making yourself useful to the Resident, you may prepare your way +for joining your countrymen and, at the same time, be able to +remain with Nana until either he is victorious over his enemies, or +his cause is really lost." + +"The plan is an excellent one," Harry said, "and I will certainly +adopt it. Undoubtedly, the feeling among the English must be in +favour of Bajee Rao and Nana. As Bajee is the son of Rugoba, he is +their natural ally. Moreover, they would object most strongly to +see Scindia become master of the whole Mahratta power; which he +would probably use against them, at the first opportunity. It +would, as you say, greatly facilitate my obtaining a fair position +among the English; and I might also be able to do Nana a service. +Of course, I have seen the English Resident many times, in the +streets of Poona; and more than once, on special occasions, at +Mahdoo Rao's court. As it is his business to know something of all +connected with the palace, it is probable that he may have heard of +me; at any rate, it would be easier to explain to him my position, +than it would be to go down as a stranger to Bombay--where I should +be ignorant as to whom I should first approach, and how to declare +myself--a matter I have very often thought over." + +The next morning the troop started at daybreak and, riding fast, +reached Poona by noon. Harry went at once to report what he had +seen to Nana. + +"I received your letter yesterday," the minister said, "and the +news was indeed bad. Purseram Bhow has offered to go out to give +battle to Scindia, but my forces would have no chance: not only is +Scindia's army much larger, but he has the infantry regiments +commanded by foreign officers, and against these my infantry could +not prevail. It would be madness to risk fighting, under such +circumstances. The wheel may turn and, ere long, I may be in a +position to thwart the schemes of Scindia and Balloba." + +Nana had never been conspicuous for personal courage, though his +moral courage, and his ability to meet any storm were unbounded. He +was now an old man, and dreaded the shock of battle, when the +chances appeared to be so much against him. He could not depend +upon the support of Bajee, who had already shown himself willing to +side with the strongest, and to make terms for himself, without the +slightest regard for those who had befriended him. + +"But if your excellency does not think of fighting, what course +will you pursue?" + +"I shall leave the country, at once," he said. "If I stop here, I +know that Balloba, who is my personal enemy, will have me put to +death. I only need time to recover from this sudden misfortune, and +it would be madness for me to wait here, and to fall into the power +of my enemies. + +"Purseram Bhow is greatly offended, because I will not allow him to +fight; but I, who have for so many years done my best to prevent +civil war in this country--a war which, however it ended, would +break up the Mahratta power--would not bring its horrors upon +Poona. It is against me that Balloba is marching and, if I retire, +bloodshed will be altogether averted. + +"Will you accompany me, Puntojee?" he asked almost wistfully. + +"Assuredly I will do so, sir; and I think that I can answer for +Sufder, who has, I know, a great regard for your excellency. As to +myself, I have little hope that I should escape unharmed, if +Balloba arrive here before I leave. He detected me, even in my +disguise in his camp; and I had a narrow escape, for a party of his +cavalry pursued me, and would probably have caught me had not +Sufder, with his band, met me, and defeated them with a loss of +half their number. You may be sure that Balloba will learn who was +in command, and Sufder's life would be no safer than my own. + +"May I ask when your excellency is going to leave Poona?" + +"Scouts were sent out yesterday, as soon as your letter was read +and, directly Scindia's army gets in motion, I shall receive news. +When I do, I shall leave. The horses will be saddled in readiness, +and I shall be at the edge of the Ghauts by the time Scindia +arrives here. You can tell Sufder to come, at once. He knows the +disposition of the captains of the various troops, and will be able +to tell me who can be depended upon." + +Sufder was indeed outside the palace, having told Harry that he +would wait, until he had learned the result of his interview with +Nana. Harry briefly related to him his conversation with the +minister. + +"I think he is right," he said. "Purseram Bhow is a stout fighter, +and is as brave as a lion; but Scindia's force would be double that +which he could gather, at such a short notice, and Nana does right +not to risk everything on the chance of a single fight. He is a +wily old fox, and has got safely through dangers which would have +crushed an ordinary man. You will see that, before long, he will be +back again, and reinstated in power. + +"At any rate, I will accompany him. After that thrashing we gave +Balloba's horsemen, my head would not be safe here an hour, after +his arrival." + +On the road, Harry had informed him of the decision at which he had +arrived, upon Soyera's advice; and Sufder agreed that it would +certainly be a wise step. Accordingly, when the latter entered the +palace, Harry went straight to the British Residency. He sent in +his native name to Mr. Malet, and asked for an interview, and was +at once shown in. + +"You wish to speak to me, sir?" the Resident said, in the Mahratta +language. "I think I have seen you at Mahdoo Rao's court." + +"I have seen your excellency there," Harry replied, in the same +language. + +Then, seeing that the Resident spoke the language with difficulty, +he went on, in English: + +"It is a matter chiefly personal to myself." + +The Resident looked at him in surprise, for it was the first time +he had heard a Mahratta speaking English. + +"I am the son of Major Lindsay who, with his wife and escort, was +murdered by a party of Mahrattas, seventeen years ago, at the time +when the English army was advancing against Poona. I was saved by +the fidelity of an ayah, who had been in the family for ten years. +A cousin of hers was, fortunately, one of the leaders of the party +who attacked the camp and, with his connivance, she carried me off +and made her way back to her family, near Jooneer. She stained my +skin, as you see, and allowed it to be supposed that she had +married in Bombay, and that I was her own child. + +"She has brought me up with the intention of my rejoining my +countrymen, as soon as I became a man; for she did not see how, +until then, I could earn my living among strangers. She taught me +as much as she knew of the language and religion of the English +and, when I was twelve, took me down to Bombay and left me, for +some two years and a half, in the house of Mrs. Sankey, a lady who +taught some of the children of officers there. When I left Bombay I +was able to speak English as well as other English boys of my age. + +"My nurse had, from the earliest time I can remember, encouraged me +in taking part in all sports and games; and when I was but eight a +soldier, a cousin of hers, began to teach me my first exercise in +arms. I continued to work at this until I went down to Bombay and, +on my return, spent all my time, for some months, in riding and +shooting. After this I was, for a year, with a famous shikaree; and +took part in the killing of many tigers, and other wild beasts. +This was fortunate; for when, through this relation of my nurse, I +was introduced to Nana Furnuwees, and by him to Mahdoo Rao, the +latter was pleased to take a fancy for me, and appointed me to the +charge of the game preserves. + +"At the present moment I have just returned from a mission, in +disguise, to Scindia's camp. Nana has shown me great kindness. My +intention is to remain with him, until he has passed through his +present difficulties, which are very serious. After that, I hope to +be able to go to Bombay, and to obtain a commission in the +Company's service." + +"I remember well the circumstances of the murder of Major Lindsay, +and his wife; for I was in Bombay at the time. It was a matter of +deep regret to us all, for he was greatly liked but, at the time, +everyone was excited over the infamous treaty of Wurgaum. I +remember that when a party was sent out, on our receiving the news +of the attack, the bodies of the major and his wife were found, as +also those of his servants and sowars; but it was reported that no +trace could be discovered of the infant, or of his ayah. It was +thought possible that they had escaped, and hopes were entertained +that the woman might have carried off her charge. I have no doubt +as to the truth of your story. + +"Is your nurse still alive?" + +"She is, sir, as is also the man who assisted her. His name is +Sufder, and he commands a troop of the Peishwa's cavalry. Both will +testify, at the right time, to the truth of my statement." + +"I can the more readily believe it," the Resident said, "inasmuch +as, in spite of your colour, I can perceive a certain likeness to +Major Lindsay, whom I knew intimately." + +"My intention, in coming to see you now, sir, was to offer to +furnish any information to you, concerning the movements and plans +of Nana Furnuwees, so far as such information could do him no +harm." + +"I heard that there had been discussions between Nana and Purseram +Bhow, the latter wishing to give battle to Scindia; but I think +that Nana is right in refusing to sanction this for, from all I +hear, Scindia's army is very much the stronger." + +"It is, sir; and I should say that Purseram's army could hardly be +depended upon to fight, under such circumstances." + +"What is Nana going to do?" + +"He is going to retire, as soon as Scindia's army is fairly in +motion." + +"He is in an awkward position," Mr. Malet said, "but he has +reinstated himself, several times, when it seemed that everything +was lost. I have great respect for his abilities, and he is the +only man who can curb the ambition of Scindia and his ministers. +Scindia's entire supremacy would be most unwelcome to us for, +indeed, it is only owing to the mutual jealousy of the three great +chiefs of the Mahratta nation, that we have gained successes. Were +the whole power in one hand, we should certainly lose Surat, and +probably Bassein and Salsette, and have to fight hard to hold +Bombay. + +"I shall be very glad to receive any reports you can supply me +with, for it is next to impossible to obtain anything like +trustworthy information here. We only hear what it is desired that +we should know, and all these late changes have come as a complete +surprise to me; for what news I do obtain is, more often than not, +false. Unfortunately, truth is a virtue almost unknown among the +Mahrattas. They have a perfect genius for intrigue, and consider it +perfectly justifiable to deceive not only enemies, but friends. + +"And when do you think of declaring yourself Mr. Lindsay?" + +"I shall remain with Nana, so long as there is the slightest chance +of his success; unless, indeed, the course of affairs should lead +to the English intervening in these troubles; then, in case they +declare against Nana, I should feel it my duty to leave him at +once." + +"I do not think there is any probability of that. Our policy has +been to support him, as the Peishwa's minister, against either +Scindia or Holkar. I shall, of course, report your appearance to +the authorities at Bombay; and I am sure there will be a +disposition to advance your views, for the sake of your father; and +moreover, your knowledge of the language of the Mahrattas--which +is, of course, perfect, or you could not have maintained your +deception so long--will of itself be a strong recommendation in +your favour." + +After thanking Mr. Malet for his kindness, Harry returned to +Sufder's camp, and gave him an account of his interview with the +Resident. + +"That is satisfactory, indeed, Puntojee. It shows the wisdom of the +step you took. Now, as to our affairs here, I have mentioned the +names of five captains of troops; all of whom can, I think, be +relied upon. However, I am now going out to see them, and have only +been waiting for your return. Six hundred men is but a small body; +but it is a beginning, and I have no doubt that others will join +Nana, later on. But I am not sufficiently sure of their sentiments +to open the matter to them, and it is essential that no suspicion +of Nana's intention to leave the town should get about. There might +be a riot in the city and, possibly, some of the captains, who have +not received the promotion which they regard as their due, might +try to gain Scindia's favour by arresting him." + +On the following day a messenger arrived from Nana, requesting +Sufder to place himself with his troop, and such other captains as +he could rely upon, on the road a mile west of Poona. He himself +would leave the town quietly, with a small body of his friends, and +join them there. Sufder at once sent off five of his men, with +orders to the captains whom he had seen on the previous afternoon +and, within an hour, six hundred men were gathered at the point +indicated. Half an hour later a party of horsemen were seen coming +along, and Furnuwees soon rode up, accompanied by several of his +strongest adherents. + +The officers were gathered at the head of their troops. Nana, +drawing rein, said to them: + +"Thanks for your fidelity. I shall not forget it; and hope, when +the time comes, to reward it as it deserves." + +He motioned to Harry to join him. + +"Scindia's army was to march this morning," he said, "and his +horsemen will be here by tomorrow evening, at latest." + +They rode to Satara, where Nana had arranged to stop until he +received news, from Purseram Bhow, as to the course of events at +Poona; and two days later a messenger rode in, with news that +Scindia had arrived near Poona, and had had a friendly interview +with Bajee Rao. Balloba had seen Purseram, and had pretended great +friendship for him; but the old soldier was by no means deceived by +his protestations. + +"If we had only to do with Scindia," Nana said, "matters could be +easily arranged; but the young rajah is only a puppet in his +minister's hands." + +Several days passed, and then another letter came from Purseram. It +said that Balloba had resolved to oppose Bajee Rao, and to have +both a minister and a Peishwa of his own nomination; and that he +proposed to him that Mahdoo Rao's widow should adopt Chimnajee as +her son, that Bajee should be placed in confinement, and that he, +Purseram Bhow, should be his minister. He asked Nana's advice as to +what course he should take. He stated that Balloba had said he was +greatly influenced, in the methods he proposed, by the hope of +rendering them in some degree acceptable to Nana. + +As the latter had only placed Bajee Rao on the musnud as a means of +checkmating Scindia, he advised Purseram to accept the offer; but +pointed out the absolute necessity for his retaining Bajee in his +own custody. Purseram omitted to follow this portion of the advice, +and a formal reconciliation took place, by letter, between Balloba +and Nana. The latter was invited to proceed at once to Poona; but +on finding that Purseram had allowed Balloba to retain Bajee in his +hands, he suspected that the whole was a scheme to entice him into +the power of his enemy, and he therefore made excuses for not +going. + +Bajee, ignorant of the plot that had been planned, went to +Scindia's camp to remonstrate against a heavy demand for money, on +account of the expenses to which Scindia had been put; and to his +astonishment he was, then and there, made a prisoner. Chimnajee +positively refused to become a party to the usurpation of his +brother's rights; but he was compelled, by threats, to ascend the +musnud. On the day after his installation, Purseram Bhow wrote, +proposing that Nana should come to Poona to meet Balloba, and to +assume the civil administration of the new Peishwa's government; +while the command of the troops, and all military arrangements, +should remain as they stood. + +In reply, Nana requested that Purseram should send his son, Hurry +Punt, to settle the preliminaries; but instead of coming as an +envoy, Hurry Punt left Poona with over five thousand chosen horse. +This naturally excited Nana's suspicions, which were strengthened +by a letter from Rao Phurkay, who was in command of the Peishwa's +household troops, warning him to seek safety without a moment's +delay. + +Now that he saw that half measures were no longer possible, Nana +ceased to be irresolute and, when his fortunes seemed to all men to +be desperate, commenced a series of successful intrigues that +astonished all India. He had quietly increased his force, during +the weeks of waiting since he had left Poona. He had ample funds, +having carried away with him an immense treasure, accumulated +during his long years of government. There was no time to be lost +and, as soon as he received the letter of warning, he left the town +of Waee and made for the Concan. + +As soon as he reached the Ghauts, he set the whole of his force to +block the passes, by rolling great stones down into the roads. In +addition, strong barricades were constructed, and a force of two +hundred men left, at each point, to defend them. The infantry he +had recruited he threw into the fort of Raygurh, and added strongly +to its defences. + +Balloba had proposed that Nana should be followed without delay, +and offered some of Scindia's best troops for the purpose; but +Purseram, acting in accordance with the advice of some of Nana's +friends, raised an objection. He had now, however, resolved to +break altogether with the minister, whose timidity at the critical +moment was considered, by him, as a proof that he could never again +be formidable; and he accordingly gave up Nana's estates to +Scindia, and took possession of his houses and property in Poona, +for his own use. After remaining for a few days, waiting events and +sending off many messengers, Nana sent for Harry. + +"I have a mission for you," he said. "It is one that requires +daring and great intelligence, and I know no one to whom it could +be better committed than to you. You see that, owing to the turn +events have taken, Bajee Rao and myself are natural allies. We have +both suffered at the hands of Balloba. He is a prisoner in +Scindia's camp; though, as I understand, free to move about in it. +I privately received a hint that Bajee, himself, recognizes this; +but doubtless he believes that I am powerless to help either myself +or him. + +"In this he is mistaken. I have been in communication with Holkar, +who is alarmed at the ever-increasing power of Scindia; and he will +throw his whole power into the scale, to aid me. The Rajahs of +Berar and Kolapoore have engaged to aid me, for the same reason; +and the Nizam will sign the treaty that was agreed upon between us, +some time since. Rao Phurkay has engaged to bring the Peishwa's +household troops over, when the signal is given. + +"More than that I have, through Ryajee, a patal, who is an enemy of +Balloba, opened negotiations with Scindia himself; offering him the +estates of Purseram Bhow, and the fort of Surrenuggar, with +territory yielding ten lakhs, on condition of his placing Balloba +in confinement, re-establishing Bajee Rao on the musnud, and +returning with his troops to his own territory. + +"I have no doubt that, when Bajee Rao hears this, he will be glad +enough to throw himself heartily into the cause. I may tell you +that he is apparently a guest, rather than a prisoner; and that he +has a camp of his own, in the centre of that of Scindia; and +therefore, when you have once made your way into his encampment, +you will have no difficulty in obtaining a private interview with +him. It is necessary that he should have money, and silver would be +too heavy for you to carry; but I will give you bags containing a +thousand gold mohurs, which will enable him to begin the work of +privately raising troops." + +"I will undertake the business, sir. The only person I fear, in the +smallest degree, is Balloba himself. I must disguise myself so that +he will not recognize me." + +Without delay, Harry mounted his horse, placed the two bags of +money that had been handed to him in the wallets behind his saddle, +exchanged his dress for that of one of Sufder's troopers, and then +started for Poona, which he reached the next day. He did not enter +the town; but put up at a cultivator's, two miles distant from it. + +"I want to hire a cart, with two bullocks," he said to the man. +"Can you furnish one?" + +"As I do not know you, I should require some money paid down, as a +guarantee that they will be returned." + +"That I can give you; but I shall leave my horse here, and that is +fully worth your waggon and oxen. However, I will leave with you a +hundred rupees. I may not keep your waggon many days." + +After it was dark, Harry went to the town and purchased some +paints, and other things, that he required for disguise. Having +used these, he went to the house of the British Resident and, on +stating who he was, he was shown in. Mr. Malet did not recognize, +in the roughly-dressed countryman, the young officer who had called +upon him before. + +"I am Harry Lindsay and, being in Poona, called upon you to give +you some information." + +"I recognize you by your voice," the Resident said; "but I fear +that there is nothing of importance that you can tell me; now that +Nana Furnuwees is homeless, and Bajee Rao is no longer Peishwa." + +"Nana is not done with, yet, sir." + +"Why, he is a fugitive, with a handful of troops under him." + +"But he has his brains, sir, which are worth more than an army and, +believe me, if all goes well, it will not be long before he is back +in Poona, as minister to the Peishwa." + +"Minister to Chimnajee?" + +"No, sir, minister to Bajee Rao." + +"I would that it were so," Mr. Malet said, "but since one is a +fugitive and the other a prisoner, I see no chance, whatever, of +such a transformation." + +"I will briefly tell you, sir, what is preparing. Bajee, feeling +certain that he will, ere long, be sent to a fortress, has +communicated with Nana, imploring him to aid him." + +"If he has turned to Nana for support, he is either mad, or acting +as Balloba's tool." + +"On the contrary, sir, I think that his doing so shows that he +recognizes Nana's ability; and feels that, ere long, he may become +a useful ally. Already Nana has been at work. Holkar, who naturally +views with intense jealousy Scindia's entire control of the +territory of the Peishwa, has already agreed to put his whole army +in the field; Rao Phurkay will rebel, with the household troops +and, what is vastly more important, Scindia has embraced Nana's +offer of a large sum of money, and a grant of territory, to arrest +Balloba, and to replace Bajee on the musnud. In addition to this, +he has won over the Rajah of Berar, has incited the Rajah of +Kolapoore to attack the district of Purseram Bhow; and has obtained +the Nizam's approbation of a treaty, that had already been settled +between Nana and the Nizam's general, the basis of which is that +Bajee is to be re-established, with Nana himself as minister and, +on the other hand, the territory formerly seized by the Peishwa to +be restored. + +"My mission here is to inform Bajee Rao of the plans that have been +prepared, and to obtain from him a solemn engagement that Nana +shall be reappointed as his minister, on the success of his plans." + +Mr. Malet listened to Harry with increasing astonishment. + +"This is important news, indeed," he said; "marvellous, and of the +highest importance to me. Already I have been asked, by the Council +of Bombay, to give my opinion as to whether it is expedient to +render any assistance to Nana Furnuwees. It is, to them, almost as +important as to Nana that Scindia should not obtain supreme power. +I have replied that I could not recommend any such step, for that +Nana's cause seemed altogether lost; and that any aid to him would +be absolutely useless, and would only serve Scindia with a pretext +for declaring war against us. Of course, what you have told me +entirely alters the situation. It will not be necessary for the +Council to assist Nana, but they can give him fair words and, even +if Balloba should win the day, he will have no ground for accusing +us of having aided Nana. + +"It is impossible to overlook the value of your communication, Mr. +Lindsay; and I can promise you that you will not find the +Government of Bombay ungrateful, for it will relieve them of the +anxiety which the progress of events here has caused them." + +On leaving the Residency, Harry returned to the farm where he had left +his horse and, early next morning, put on his disguise again, painted +lines round his eyes, touched some of the hairs of his eyebrows with +white paint, mixed some white horsehair with the tuft on the top of his +head, and dropped a little juice of a plant resembling belladonna--used +at times, by ladies in the east, to dilate the pupils of their eyes and +make them dark and brilliant--in his eyes. + +Soyera had told him of this herb, when he related to her how Balloba +had detected him by the lightness of his eyes. He was greatly surprised +at the alteration it effected in his appearance, and felt assured that +even Balloba himself would not again recognize him. + +He bought a dozen sacks of grain from the farmer and, placing these +in the bullock cart, started for Scindia's camp. He had, during the +night, buried the gold; for he thought that, until he knew his +ground, and could feel certain of entering Bajee Rao's camp +unquestioned, it would be better that there should be nothing in +the cart, were he searched, to betray him. He carried in his hand +the long staff universally used by bullock drivers and, passing +through Poona, arrived an hour later at the camp, which was pitched +some three miles from the city. + +As large numbers of carts, with forage and provisions, arrived +daily in the camp for the use of the troops, no attention whatever +was paid to him and, on enquiring for the encampment of Bajee +Rao--one of whose officers had, he said, purchased the grain, for +his horses and those of his officers and escort--he soon found the +spot, which was on somewhat rising ground in the centre of the +camp. It was much larger than he had expected to find it as, beyond +being prevented from leaving, Bajee had full liberty, and was even +permitted to have some of his friends round him, and two or three +dozen troopers of his household regiment. + +In charge of these was a young officer, who was well known to Harry +during the time of Mahdoo Rao. Seeing him standing in front of a +tent, Harry stopped the cart opposite to him and, leaving it, went +up to him. + +"Where shall I unload the cart?" he asked. + +"I know nothing about it," the officer said. "Who has ordered it? +The supply will be welcome enough, for we are very short of +forage." + +Then, changing his tone, Harry said: + +"You do not know me, Nujeef. I am your friend, Puntojee." + +"Impossible!" the other said, incredulously. + +"It is so. I am not here for amusement, as you may guess; but am on +a private mission to Bajee Rao. Will you inform him that I am here? +I dare not say whom I come from, even to you; but can explain +myself fully to him." + +"I will let him know, certainly, Puntojee; but there is little +doubt that Balloba has his spies here, and it will be necessary to +arrange that your meeting shall not be noticed. Do you sit down +here by your cart, as if waiting for orders where to unload it. I +will go across to Bajee's tent, and see him." + +Nujeef accordingly went over to the rajah's tent, and returned in a +quarter of an hour. + +"Bajee will see you," he said. "First unload your grain in the +lines of our cavalry, place some in front of your bullocks, and +leave them there; then cross to the tent next to Bajee's. It is +occupied by one of his officers, who carries the purse and makes +payments. Should you be watched, it would seem that you are only +going there to receive the price of the grain. Bajee himself will +slip out of the rear of his tent, and enter the next in the same +way. The officer is, at present, absent; so that you can talk +without anyone having an idea that you and Bajee are together." + +Harry carried out the arrangement and, after leaving his bullocks, +made his way to the spot indicated. He found the young rajah had +gone there. + +"And you are Puntojee!" the latter said. "I saw you but a few +times, but Rao Phurkay has often mentioned your name, to me, as +being one who stood high in the confidence of my cousin Mahdoo. +Nujeef tells me that you have a private communication to make to +me; and indeed, I can well believe that. You would not thus +disguise yourself, unless the business was important." + +"It is, Your Highness. Nana Furnuwees has received your message. He +reciprocates your expressions of friendship, and has sent me here +to let you know that the time is approaching when your deliverance +from Balloba can be achieved." + +He then delivered the message with which he had been entrusted. +Bajee's face became radiant, as he went on. + +"This is news, indeed," he said. "That Phurkay was faithful to me, +I knew; but I thought that he was the only friend I had left. Truly +Nana Furnuwees is a great man, and I will gladly give the +undertaking he asks for; that, in the event of his succeeding in +placing me on the musnud, he shall be my minister, with the same +authority and power that he had under Mahdoo." + +"I have, at the farmhouse where I am stopping, a thousand gold +mohurs, which Nana has sent to enable you to begin your +preparations; but he urges that you should be extremely careful +for, as you see by what I have told you, he has ample power to +carry out the plan without any assistance from yourself, and it is +most important that nothing shall be done that can arouse the +suspicions of Balloba, until all is ready for the final stroke. I +have not brought it with me, today, as I knew not how vigilant they +might be in camp, and it was possible that my sacks of grain might +be examined. As, however, I passed in without question, I will +bring it when I next come, which will be in two days." + +"I suppose there is no objection to my telling Phurkay what is +being done?" + +"None at all, Your Highness. He has not yet been informed, though +communications have passed between him and Nana. But, although the +latter was well convinced of his devotion, he thought it safer that +no one should know the extent of the plot, until all was in +readiness." + +Two days later, Harry made another journey to the camp, and this +time with the bags of money hidden among the grain, in one of the +sacks. He saw Bajee Rao, as before, and received from him a paper, +with the undertaking required by Nana. The sack containing the +money was put down where Bajee's horses were picketed, and was +there opened by a confidential servant, who carried the bags into +the tent which was close by. + +As he was leaving the camp, Harry had reason to congratulate +himself on the precautions that he had taken; for he met Balloba, +riding along with a number of officers. Harry had, with his change +of costume, assumed the appearance of age. He walked by the side of +the bullocks, stooping greatly and leaning on his staff; and the +minister passed without even glancing at him. + +Harry, on his return, paid the farmer for the hire of his cart. The +latter was well pleased for, in addition to the money so earned, he +had charged a good price for the two waggon loads of grain. Harry +then put off the peasant's dress, and resumed that of a trooper, +and rode back to Raygurh, where he reported to Nana the success of +his mission. + + + +Chapter 5: Down To Bombay. + + +Harry's stay with Nana was a short one as, in three days, he was +again sent to Poona. This time he was to take up his abode at a +large house, occupied by two of the leaders of Bajee's party; the +rajah having told him that he would request them to entertain him, +if he should again come to Poona. He was the bearer of fifty +thousand rupees, principally in gold, which he was to give to them +for the use of Bajee. He had no message this time for the prince, +personally, Nana having said to him: + +"I want you to let me know how matters are going on. The young man +may do something rash and, if Balloba's suspicions are in any way +excited, he may send him to some distant fortress; which would +seriously upset my plans, for I should have to retain Chimnajee in +power, as representative of his brother. + +"We know that he was placed on the musnud greatly in opposition to +his wishes; and he certainly hailed, with pleasure, the prospect of +Bajee's release. Still, it would not be the same thing for me. A +minister of the Peishwa can rule without question by the people +but, acting only as minister to a representative of the Peishwa, he +would be far more severely criticised; and it is certain that, to +raise money for paying Scindia the sum that has been agreed upon, +extra taxation must be put on, the odium resulting from which would +fall upon me." + +The two officers received Harry cordially. He had personally known +them both and, as Nana's representative, they would have treated +him with much honour, had it not been pointed out to them that this +might be fatal to their plans for, did Balloba hear that some +strange officer was being so treated by them, he would be sure to +set at once about finding out who he was, and what he was doing +there. + +"Matters are going on well," they said. "The old general, Manajee +Phurkay, who was one of Rugoba's devoted adherents, is now staying +in Bajee's camp, and is enlisting men for his service." + +"Where are they being assembled?" + +"In Bajee's camp. He is not interfered with, there." + +"It appears to be a very rash proceeding," Harry said. "It is true +that Bajee has apparent liberty, and can have with him in his camp +many of his friends; but a gathering of armed men can scarcely +escape the eye of so keen an observer as Balloba." + +[Illustration: Harry . . . saw a party of soldiers coming along the] +road. + +A few days later, Harry, being out one evening, saw a party of +soldiers coming along the road from the direction of Scindia's +camp. This was unusual for, in order to prevent plundering, the +orders were stringent that none of Scindia's troops should enter +Poona. He hurried back to the house, and acquainted the two leaders +with what he had seen. They were inclined to laugh at his +apprehension but, when a body of horsemen were seen coming down the +street, they issued orders for the doors to be closed and +barricaded. There were some twenty men in the house, and when the +officer who commanded the detachment summoned them to open the +door, and to deliver the two nobles to him, he was met by a decided +refusal, from the chiefs themselves, from an upper window. + +The officer then ordered his men to dismount and break open the +door but, when they attempted to do so, they were met by a fire of +musketry from every window. Many fell; and the officer, seeing that +the house could not be taken, except by a force much larger than +that at his command, rode off at full speed, with the survivors, to +Scindia's camp. + +No sooner had they gone than the horses were brought out from the +stables, and the two officers, with ten of their troopers, rode off +at full speed. Harry refused to accompany them, as he wished to see +what had really happened, in order to carry the news to Nana. He +therefore rode out to the farmhouse where he had before stayed, +left his horse there, and returned to Poona. + +Here he heard that Rao Phurkay had been seized, and that Bajee +Rao's encampment was surrounded by troops, who suffered none to +enter or leave it. The next morning he went over there and found +that, as the supply of water had been cut off, the garrison had +surrendered; all being allowed to depart, with the exception of +Bajee, over whom a strong guard had been placed. + +Before they left, Manajee Phurkay gave them all directions to +gather in the neighbourhood of Waee. They did so, and were joined +at once by the two chiefs. Nana promptly sent them a supply of +money, telling them to take up their position at the Salpee Ghaut; +where they were speedily joined by ten thousand men, and openly +declared for Bajee Rao. + +In the meantime Balloba, believing that the whole plot was the work +of Bajee Rao, determined to despatch him, as a prisoner, to a +fortress in the heart of Scindia's dominions. He sent him off with +a strong escort, under the charge of an officer named Sukaram +Ghatgay who, although having command only of a troop of one hundred +horse, belonged to an ancient and honourable family. + +Balloba could hardly have made a worse choice. Ghatgay had a +daughter who was reported to be of exceptional beauty, and the +young Scindia had asked her father for her hand. Ghatgay, an +ambitious and enterprising man, had given no decided answer; not +from any real hesitation, for he saw how enormous would be the +advantage, to himself, of such an alliance; but in order to +increase Scindia's ardour by pretended opposition, and so to secure +the best terms possible for himself. The reason he gave would +appear natural to any Mahratta of good blood, as none of these +would have given a daughter of their house to one who, however high +in rank, had ancestors belonging to a low caste. + +Upon the way, Bajee, who was aware of Scindia's wishes, and was +most anxious to obtain his goodwill, urged Ghatgay to give him his +daughter in marriage and, after much pretended hesitation, the +latter agreed to do so--on condition that Bajee would authorize him +to promise Scindia a large sum of money, as soon as he again +ascended the musnud; and that he would get the prince to appoint +him his prime minister, which post would be vacant at the overthrow +of Balloba. This being arranged, Bajee Rao pretended that he was +seriously ill; and Ghatgay therefore halted, with his escort, on +the banks of the Paira. + +Taking with him his disguise as a countryman, Harry, as soon as he +learned that Ghatgay had started with Bajee, mounted and followed +him; and travelled, at some little distance in rear of the party, +until they halted. Then he went to the house of a cultivator, left +his horse there, and exchanged his dress as fighting man for that +of a countryman. + +There was no occasion for him, now, to disguise his age or darken +his eyes and, as before, he hired a cart, bought some grain for +forage, some sacks of rice and other things, and boldly entered +Ghatgay's camp. As the prices he asked were low, Ghatgay purchased +the whole contents of his cart. When this was cleared, Harry left +his cattle and wandered about, saying that he and the animals +needed an hour's rest. + +Presently he passed Bajee Rao, who was standing listlessly at the +door of a tent. + +"I am Puntojee," Harry said, as he passed. "I followed you with the +horse, that I might help you to escape." + +"Stay and talk to me here," the young prince said. "It will seem +that I am only passing my time in asking you questions about the +country." + +"I wanted to ascertain the road by which you will travel, after +crossing the river. I have money with me, and will endeavour to +raise a force of forty or fifty men; with which to make a sudden +attack upon your camp, after nightfall. I will bring a good horse +with me. If you will run out when you hear the uproar, I will ride +up with the spare horse. You will leap on to its back, and we can +gallop off." + +"You are a brave fellow, Puntojee, and I thank you heartily for +your offer; but, happily, I stand in no need of it. I have gained +Ghatgay over, and he will linger here until we hear that Balloba +has been arrested, and that Nana Furnuwees is approaching Poona. +Believe me, I shall never forget your offer, or the fidelity that +has prompted it; and when I am established as Peishwa you shall, if +it pleases you, have any post at court you may desire." + +"I thank you much, Prince; but I am an officer of Nana, and know +that, in acting as I have done, I am acting in his interest, as +well as yours. I am glad that the necessity for making an attack +upon the camp is obviated. I might have had considerable trouble in +raising a sufficient force for such a purpose, for even the most +reckless would hesitate to fall on one of Scindia's officers; and +in the next place, although I doubt not that I should have been +able to carry you off, Ghatgay would, as soon as he had beaten off +the attacking party, have set out in pursuit, and raised the whole +country, and the difficulty of reaching the Western Ghauts would +have been immense. + +"I hope to see Your Highness at Poona." + +So saying, he strolled carelessly back to the bullock cart, waited +till the animals had finished their feed, and then drove off again; +returned the cart to its owner, and started again for Poona. + +On his arrival there, he went to the Residency and informed Mr. +Malet that Bajee had gained over the officer who was escorting him, +and was ready to come back to Poona, as soon as the blow was +struck. + +"It will be struck soon," Mr. Malet said. "All is in readiness. I +sent your report on to the Council, urging that, as it seemed +likely that Bajee Rao would soon be on the musnud, they should +express their readiness to recognize him. I received a despatch +only yesterday, saying that they perfectly agreed with me, and had +already sent off a messenger to Nana stating their willingness to +recognize Bajee as lawful heir to the late Peishwa. + +"Things are working well. The Nizam's general has been ordered to +watch Purseram Bhow, who is raising troops for the purpose of +aiding in crushing Bajee's supporters. Holkar and Scindia's troops +also are in readiness to move and, after the fete of the Dussera, +the regular battalions in the Peishwa's service, commanded by Mr. +Boyd, will march to the Neera bridge, and a brigade of Scindia's +regulars will move against Raygurh. + +"It is evident that neither Balloba nor Purseram has the slightest +suspicion of what is going on, or they would never have despatched +troops from here. I certainly have felt very uneasy, since Bajee +was carried away; for he is a necessary figure, and should be here +as soon as Nana arrives, otherwise there would be no recognized +head. It would have been hopeless to try to deliver him, once +imprisoned in one of the strong fortresses in Scindia's dominions; +and the latter could have made any terms for himself that he chose +to dictate. + +"Your news has relieved me of this anxiety, and I think it probable +that everything will now be managed without bloodshed; and that we +may, for a time, have peace here." + +The next morning, Harry rode off and rejoined Nana, who thanked him +warmly for the manner in which he had carried out his mission, and +especially for his offer to attempt to rescue Bajee from his +captors. + +"It would have been the greatest misfortune," he said, "had he been +carried far away. I should have been obliged to recognize his +brother Chimnajee; and Scindia, having Bajee in his hands, would +have kept up a constant pressure, and might probably have marched +to Poona to restore him; which he would certainly have succeeded in +doing, for the feeling of the population would have been all in +favour of the lawful heir. + +"As a token of my satisfaction, here is an order upon my treasurer +for fifty thousand rupees." + +All being ready, Scindia, on the 27th of October, suddenly arrested +Balloba; and sent a body of his troops, with those of the Nizam's +general, for the purpose of seizing Purseram Bhow. The latter, +receiving news of what had happened in good time, and taking with +him Chimnajee, fled to a fortress; but was quickly pursued, and +obliged to surrender. Bajee Rao was brought back to Beema, eighteen +miles from Poona. His brother Amrud, and Rao Phurkay, were also +released. + +Nana joined his army at the Salpee Ghaut, and Scindia's infantry, +under Mr. Boyd, marched for the capital; which Nana refused to +enter, however, until he had received a formal declaration, from +Bajee, that he intended no treachery against him. This pledge was +given; and a treaty was, at the same time, entered into by the +Nizam and Scindia, both agreeing to establish Bajee Rao on the +musnud, and reinstate Nana as his prime minister. These matters +being settled, Nana returned to Poona, from which he had been +absent for nearly a year, and resumed the duties of prime minister. + +A fortnight later, Bajee Rao was solemnly invested as Peishwa. One +of his first acts was to send for Harry, to whom he gave a robe of +honour, and thirty thousand rupees in money, in token of his +gratitude for the risk he had run in communicating with him, and +for his daring proposal to rescue him from the hands of his escort. + +On the day after Nana's re-entry into the capital, Harry received a +note from Mr. Malet, asking him to call. + +"I expect Colonel Palmer to relieve me of my duties here, in the +course of a day or two. I need scarcely say I shall be glad to be +released from a work which is surrounded with infinite difficulty, +and which constantly upsets all human calculations. Nana is in +power again; but another turn of the wheel may take place, at any +moment, and he may again be an exile, or possibly a prisoner. + +"It seems to me that it would be well for you to accompany me to +Bombay. The remembrance of your services will be fresh, and they +cannot but be recognized by the Council. That body is frequently +changed and, in two or three years' time, there will be fresh men, +who will know nothing of what has happened now, and be indisposed +to rake up old reports and letters, or to reward past services; +especially as the whole position here may have altered, half a +dozen times, before that." + +"I will gladly do so, sir, and thank you very heartily for your +kindness. I will ride over to Jooneer, tomorrow, and bring my old +nurse down with me; and I have no doubt Sufder will be willing to +accompany us. He has rendered good services to Nana; and the latter +will, I am sure, grant him leave of absence for as long as may be +necessary." + +"I think it would certainly be best to take them both down, if +possible. They could make affidavits, in Bombay, that would place +it beyond doubt that you are Major Lindsay's son. It is morally +certain that there are relatives of your father and mother still +living, in England. I do not say that you require any assistance +from them; but when you return home, as everyone does, two or three +times, in the course of his Indian service, it would be pleasant to +find friends there; and it would be well that your position should +be established beyond all question." + +"I will gladly go down with you," Soyera said, when Harry laid the +matter before her. "I am happy and contented here, but should be glad +to see Bombay again. It was my home for ten years. I am very glad you +have made up your mind to go, for it is time that you should take your +place among your countrymen; and the recommendation of the Resident +at the court of Poona is as good a one as you could wish for. + +"I should say that you had better give up, at once, staining your +skin. I can see that you have not used the dye for some days, and +it would be as well to recover your proper colour, before Mr. Malet +introduces you to the Council at Bombay." + +"I will ride down to the town," Harry said, "and engage a gharry [a +native carriage] to carry you to Poona. When we get there, I shall +learn what route Mr. Malet will take, and how fast he will travel; +and shall then see which will be the best for you--to go down in a +gharry, or to be carried in a dhoolie [a palanquin]." + +"But all this will cost money, Harry." + +"I am well provided with funds," Harry said, "for the Nana and +Bajee Rao have both made me handsome presents for the services I +rendered them. There is, therefore, no reason why we should not +travel in comfort." + +They arrived at Poona two days later; and Harry--having ascertained +that the new Resident would not arrive until the next day, and that +he would probably wish Mr. Malet to defer his departure for at +least two days, in order to give him his experience of the factions +and intrigues there, and of the character of all those who were +likely to influence events--rode to see Nana, who had not yet +returned to Poona. + +"I have come, your excellency," he said, "to tell you that it is my +wish to retire from the public service." + +The minister looked greatly surprised. + +"Why, Puntojee," he said, "this sounds like madness. Young as you +are, you have secured powerful protectors, both in the Peishwa and +myself; and you may hope to reach a high office in the state, as +you grow older. + +"I do not know, though," he went on, speaking to himself rather +than to the lad, "that high office is a thing to be desired. It +means being mixed up in intrigues of all kinds, being the object of +jealousy and hatred, and running a terrible risk of ruin at every +change in the government here." + +Then he turned again to Harry. + +"And what are you thinking of doing?" + +"I will speak frankly to your highness. I am not a Mahratta, as you +and everyone else suppose. I am the son of English parents." + +And he then went on to give an account of the killing of his father +and mother, and of how he was saved by Soyera, and brought up as +her son; until such times as he might, with advantage, go down to +Bombay. Nana listened with great interest. + +"It is a strange tale," he said, when Harry brought the story to a +conclusion, "and explains things which have, at times, surprised +me. In the first place, the colour of your eyes always struck me as +peculiar. Then your figure is not that of my countrymen. There are +many as tall as you; but they have not your width of shoulders, and +strong build. Lastly, I have wondered how a young Mahratta should +be endowed with so much energy and readiness, be willing to take +heavy responsibilities on his shoulders, and to be so full of +resource. + +"Now that you have told me your story, I think you are right to go +down and join your own people. Everything is disturbed, and nothing +is certain from day to day here. I was a fugitive but a short time +ago and, ere long, I may again be an exile. + +"Moreover, no one can tell what may happen to him. Your people are +quarrelling with Tippoo, as they quarrelled with his father, Hyder; +and I think that, before long, it is possible they will overthrow +him, and take possession of his territory. + +"Were the various powers of India united, this could not be so; but +the English will always find some ready to enter into an alliance +with them, and will so enlarge their dominions. The Mahrattas may +laugh at the idea of their being overthrown, by such small armies +as those the English generals command; but our constant +dissensions, and the mutual jealousy between Holkar, Scindia, the +Peishwa, the Rajah of Berar, and others, will prevent our ever +acting together. It may be that we shall be conquered piecemeal. + +"I have watched, very closely, all that has taken place in southern +India and in Bengal. I have seen a handful of traders gradually +swallowing up the native powers, and it seems to me that it may +well be that, in time, they may become the masters of all India. +Were I to say as much to any of our princes, they would scoff at my +prediction; but it has been my business to learn what was passing +elsewhere, and I have agents at Madras and Calcutta, and their +reports are ever that the power of the English is increasing. A few +years ago, it seemed that the French were going to carry all before +them; but they, like our native princes, have gone down before the +English; who seem, moreover, to get on better than the French with +the natives, and to win their respect and liking. + +"Well, young sir, I shall be sorry to lose you; because while I, and +with good reason, was seldom able to trust, and to give my absolute +confidence to any of those around me, I have always felt that I could +wholly rely on you. During the past year I have seen much of you, and +have freely told my plans to you, as I have done to no others; and +have chosen you for missions that I could not, with safety, have +entrusted to any of my own followers, knowing that Scindia or Holkar +would be ready to pay great sums for these secrets. None except Bajee, +to whom I sent you with particulars, were aware of the extent of my +plans, or that I was in communication with more than one of the rajahs. + +"You have played your part marvellously well, for I should not have +deemed it possible that one of your race could live so long among +us, without exciting any suspicion. While you remain in Bombay, I +hope that you will act as my confidential agent. I do not ask you +to divulge any secrets you may learn, relating to projects +connected with the Deccan; but I should like to be informed as to +the course of affairs, generally. Of course, my dealings with the +Council there must be carried on through the English Resident; but +there is much information respecting the views of the Council with +regard to Tippoo, the Nizam, and Bengal, that will be valuable for +me to know." + +"I could not so act, your excellency, without permission from the +Council; but I should imagine that they would not be averse to such +an arrangement, especially as, perhaps, you would give me private +information as to the state of parties, here, such as you would not +care to tell their Resident." + +"Certainly I would do so. They change their Residents so frequently +that it would be impossible for new men to really understand the +situation; which you, with your intimate knowledge of Poona, could +readily grasp. Of course the arrangement could only be temporary, +as my own position is so uncertain and, in any case, my life cannot +now be a long one. + +"I should propose that your salary, as my private agent, be a +thousand rupees a month." + +"I thank you much, sir; and if I stay at Bombay, and obtain the +permission of the Council to correspond with you, I will readily +undertake the part. They can have little objection to the +arrangement, as doubtless you have agents in Bombay, already." + +"Certainly I have, but these are natives, and necessarily can only +send me the rumours current in the bazaars, or known generally to +the public; and their news is, for the most part, worthless." + +"I have another favour to request," Harry said; "namely, that you +will give leave of absence to Sufder, in order that he may +accompany me to Bombay. He and my old nurse could, alone, +substantiate my birth and identity; and it would be necessary for +them to give their evidence before some legal authority." + +"That I will readily do. Sufder is honest and faithful, and I can +rely upon him, absolutely, for anything in his sphere of duty; and +have, only today, appointed him to the command of two hundred men; +but although he has a hand ready to strike, he has no brain capable +of planning. Had it not been so, I should before this have raised +him to a higher position. When he returns from Bombay, I will grant +him the revenues of a village, of which he shall be the patal [a +mayor]; so that, in his old age, he will be able to live in +comfort." + +On leaving the minister, Harry went to Sufder's camp. + +"'So you are back again, Puntojee?" + +"Yes, and have brought Soyera down with me." + +"I have great news to tell you," the soldier went on. + +"It will not be news to me, Sufder. I know that your command has +been doubled, and that you will now be the captain of two hundred +men; but I can tell you much more than that. You are to accompany +me down to Bombay, the day after tomorrow, so as to give evidence +about my birth; and furthermore, Nana will, on your return, bestow +upon you the jagheer [revenue] of a village district; so that, as +he says, when you grow too old for service, you will be able to +live comfortably." + +"That is good news indeed--better even than that I am to have the +command of two hundred men, for in truth I am beginning to be weary +of service. I am now nearly fifty, and I feel myself growing stiff. +Nothing would please me more than to be the patal of a village +community, of which I hold the jagheer. However, so long as Nana +lives and retains power I shall remain a soldier; but at his death +I shall serve no other master, and shall take to country life +again. + +"Does Nana know that you are English?" + +"Yes, I have told him my story. I was obliged to give my reasons +for resigning and, as Nana has the support of the Government of +Bombay, there was no risk in my doing so. + +"How long will it be before I get quite rid of this colour, +Sufder?" + +"That I cannot say. I should think that in a fortnight the greater +part of it will have faded out, but maybe Soyera knows of something +that will remove it more rapidly." + +Soyera, when asked, said that she knew of nothing that would remove +the dye at once; but that if he washed his hands and face, two or +three times a day, with a strong lye made from the ashes of a plant +that grows everywhere on the plain, it would help to get rid of it. + +"I will go out, tomorrow morning, and fetch some in." + +When she had made the lye, and mixed it with oil, it made a very +strong soap. + +"How do you mean to dress, to go down, Harry?" + +"I have no choice; but even if I had, I should ride out of here in +my best court suit, and change it for English clothes when we got +down the Ghauts. I may have to come up here again, for aught I +know; and it is better, therefore, that no one should know that I +am English." + +Mr. Malet, however, solved the difficulty; for when, in the +evening, Harry went to enquire about the time that they would +start, he said: + +"I had been thinking of offering you a suit to ride down in but, +unfortunately, my clothes would be a great deal too small for you. +However, I think that, after all, it is best you should go down as +you are. In the first place, you would not show to advantage in +English clothes, in which you would feel tight and uncomfortable, +at first; and in the second place, I think that it is perhaps as +well that the Council should see you as you are, then they would +the better understand how you have been able to pass as a Mahratta, +all these years. + +"I will introduce you, now, to Colonel Palmer. It is important that +he should know you, for possibly you may be sent up here on some +mission or other--for which, having the favour of Nana, you would +be specially fitted." + +Accordingly, the next morning they started early. Soyera had +prepared the liquid soap, but as it was decided that he should go +in native dress, Harry thought it as well not to use it, especially +as the dye was gradually wearing off. The party consisted of Mr. +Malet, Sufder, and Harry; with an escort of ten cavalrymen, +belonging to one of the native regiments. The mission clerk had +been transferred to Colonel Palmer, as his knowledge of affairs +would be useful to the newcomer. Soyera was carried in a dhoolie, +and followed close behind the troopers. + +That evening they descended the Ghauts into the Concan and encamped +there and, on the following day, rode into Bombay; where Mr. Malet +took them to an hotel, principally used by natives of rank visiting +Bombay. + +"You had best stay here, till I send for you," he said, to Harry. +"I shall see some of the Council tonight. No doubt there will be a +formal meeting, tomorrow, to ask my opinion about the probability +of the present state of things continuing at Poona. I shall, of +course, tell them your story; and they will likely request you to +go, at once, to see them; therefore, do not leave the hotel until +you hear from me." + +Sufder had not previously visited Bombay, and the next morning +early he went out, with Soyera as his guide, to inspect the +European part of the town. He was much struck with the appearance +of neatness and order in the fort, and the solidity of the +buildings. + +"It is a strong place, assuredly," he said to Harry, on his return. +"In the first place, it would be necessary for a force attacking it +to cross over the narrow isthmus, and causeway, uniting the island +with the land; and that would be impossible, in face of a force +provided with artillery guarding it. Then, if they succeeded in +winning that, they would have to make their way through the native +town to get on to the maidan; and this would be defended by the +guns from all the batteries and, in addition to the artillery on +land, it might be swept by guns on board ship. Truly, those who +talked about driving the English into the sea cannot have known +anything of the strength of the position. + +"As to carrying it by assault, it could not be done; nor could the +garrison be starved out, since they could always obtain supplies of +all sorts by sea. And yet, except at the causeway, the place has no +natural strength. The Mahrattas acted unwisely, indeed, when they +allowed the English to settle here." + +"They could not foresee the future, Sufder. Now, doubtless, they +are sorry; but if in the future the British become masters of +India, the Mahrattas will have no reason to regret having given +them a foothold. Wherever their powers extend, the natives are far +better off than they were under the rule of their own princes. Were +the British masters, there would be no more wars, no more +jealousies, and no more intrigues; the peasants would till their +fields in peace, and the men who now take to soldiering would find +more peaceful modes of earning a living." + +"But you do not think, surely, Harry,"--for after leaving Poona, he +had been told to call him so--"that the English can ever become +masters of India? They conquered the Carnatic, but even there they +were not safe from the forays of Hyder Ali. Mysore bars their way +farther north. Then there is the Nizam to be dealt with, and then +Berar and the Mahrattas; then comes Rajputana, and beyond are the +Sikhs, and the fierce chiefs of Scinde. It is true that the English +have beaten the peoples of lower Bengal, but these have always been +looked down upon, and despised as cowardly and effeminate, by the +fighting men of all India. + +"Besides, how few are the white soldiers! They say, too, that the +French have promised Tippoo to send a big army, to help to drive +the English into the sea." + +"The French have quite work enough, at home," Harry said. "It is +true that they have got into Egypt, but they are shut up there by +our fleets. Moreover, even were they to cross over into Arabia, how +could they march across a dry and almost waterless country, for a +thousand or two of miles? When they arrived in Scinde they would +find all the fighting men of the province, and the Sikhs, opposed +to them; and they would never be able to fight their way down to +Mysore. The thing is absurd." + +The conversation was interrupted by the arrival of a messenger, +from the Government House, with a request that Mr. Lindsay should +at once attend there. Harry's horse, which had been saddled in +readiness, was brought round; for it would have seemed strange for +a Mahratta, whose dress showed that he held a good position, to go +on foot. Sufder rode by his side, Soyera following on foot. + +Dismounting at the Government House, he threw the reins to one of +the lads, who were waiting in readiness to hold the horses of +officers coming to see the Governor. On Harry mentioning his name, +the native doorkeeper said: + +"I have orders for you to be taken, at once, to the Council +chamber, sahib, on your arrival here." + +The Governor, with four members of the Council and Mr. Malet, were +seated at a long table. Mr. Malet rose and said: + +"This is Mr. Lindsay, gentlemen." + +"Truly, sir, it would be difficult to recognize you as a fellow +countryman, in that garb," the Governor said; "though your colour +is somewhat less dark than that of a Mahratta." + +"Since I left Poona I have ceased to dye, sir; as to my dress, this +will be the last time I shall wear it, unless I should be called +upon to go to Poona again." + +"Your story is a most singular one," the Governor said, "but Mr. +Malet assures us that you are the son of Major Lindsay, and has +been telling us how you escaped the massacre at the camp, and how +your ayah has brought you up." + +"She has come down with me, sir. I thought that her testimony would +be necessary; and I have also brought down her cousin, who was +present at the foray in which my father and mother were killed. My +account will be confirmed by their statements." + +"You do credit to Mahratta food and training, Mr. Lindsay; but Mr. +Malet has mentioned to me that, at one time, you were employed as a +shikaree, to keep down the tigers which were doing havoc among the +villagers near the top of the Ghauts. He has also informed us of +the very valuable service you rendered, by informing him of Nana +Furnuwees' measures for regaining power, and replacing Bajee Rao on +the musnud--intelligence which saved us a great expenditure of +money in preparing to support him; with the certainty that, by +doing so, we might excite the enmity of Scindia. He tells us, also, +why you continued so long in the Deccan, instead of coming down +here; and I think you acted very wisely. + +"We have mentioned your services, in that matter, in our reports to +the Board of Directors; and have said that, partly as a recognition +of this, and partly because you are the son of an English officer, +who was killed in their service, we should at once give you an +appointment, subject to their approval. + +"Now, sir, which would you prefer, the civil or military branch?" + +"I should much prefer the military," Harry answered, without +hesitation; "unless indeed, sir, you think my services would be +more useful in the civil." + +"If we were at Calcutta or Madras, there would be more scope for +you in the civil service; but as we hold, at present, little +territory beyond this island, there are therefore but few +appointments affording an opportunity for the display of the +intelligence which you certainly possess; but, should circumstances +alter, you might, owing to your knowledge of the country and its +language, be told off for civil work, in which the emoluments are +very much higher than in the military branch of the service. + +"You will at once be gazetted to the 3rd Native Cavalry, and do +duty with the regiment, until your services are required elsewhere. +Fresh disturbances may break out at Poona and, in that case, you +might be attached as assistant to Colonel Palmer. + +"Do you think you would be known again?" + +"I think it would be very unlikely, sir. When my skin has recovered +its proper colour, and I am dressed in uniform, I feel sure no one +would recognize me as having been an officer in the Peishwa's +court." + +"Very well, sir. Then you will see your name in the gazette, +tomorrow. You will, within a day or so, report yourself to the +officer commanding the regiment. + +"I may say that it would be well if your nurse, and the man who +came down with you, were to draw up statements concerning your +birth, and swear to them at the High Court. These might be valuable +to you, in the future." + +After expressing his thanks to the Governor and Council, Harry went +out, and rode back to the hotel with Sufder. + + + +Chapter 6: In The Company's Service. + + +There was no conversation between Harry and Sufder on the way back +to the hotel; Harry saying that he would tell the news when Soyera +joined them, otherwise he would have to go through it twice. They +rode slowly through the streets, and Soyera arrived a few minutes +after them. + +"Now," Harry said, "we will go up to my room and talk the matter +over. + +"Mr. Malet has been kind enough to give such a favourable report of +me that I am appointed lieutenant to the 3rd Regiment of Native +Cavalry, and shall be employed as assistant to the resident at +Poona, should there be fresh disturbances there." + +"That is good fortune, indeed," Sufder said. + +"Wonderfully good fortune! and I owe it all, in the first place to +Soyera, and in the next to yourself. You see, I have gained greatly +by taking your advice, and remaining in the Deccan until fit for +military service. Had she declared who I was when she took me down +to Bombay, before, there is no saying what might have become of me. + +"And now, the first thing to do is for me to go out and order a +uniform. When I return I will draw up, in Mahratti and English, a +full account of the manner in which I was saved, by Soyera and you, +from being murdered; and how I have been brought up." + +Harry had learned, at the Governor's, the name and address of an +official at the Judge's Court who would get his statements copied +out, in proper form and writing; and when he had taken them down +from the lips of Sufder and Soyera, he saw this gentleman, who +promised that the documents should be ready by the next day. + +Having thus put his business in train, Harry went to call upon Mrs. +Sankey. She did not recognize him at once but, as soon as he made +himself known, she received him most warmly. + +"You looked as if you would grow into a big fellow, but I hardly +expected that you would have done it so soon." + +"It is more than four years since I left you. I don't think that I +am likely to grow any taller than I am; though of course, I shall +get broader." + +He then told her what had happened since he left her, and how he +had just been appointed an officer in a native cavalry regiment. + +"I am very glad you have come now. My daughters have both married, +and I am going to sail for England in a few days. Whether I shall +stay there permanently, or come back, I cannot say but, at any +rate, I shall be away at least two years." + +"I should have been very sorry to have missed you, Mrs. Sankey. I +have always looked back, with the greatest pleasure, at the time I +spent here." + +"You have kept up your English well," she said. + +"I have followed your advice, and hardly ever missed reading aloud +for an hour, so as to keep my tongue accustomed to it; and I know +many of Shakespeare's plays by heart, and could recite a great many +passages from the writings of Dean Swift, Mr. Addison, Mr. Savage, +and others." + +His next visit was to Jeemajee, who received him with real +pleasure, when he told him who he was. Harry had not learned--nor +did he ever learn--that the kindly Parsee had contributed a hundred +pounds towards the expenses of his education; but he did know that +he had presented him with his outfit of clothes, and had been the +means of his being placed with Mrs. Sankey; and during the months +he remained at Bombay, he paid frequent visits to the man who had +so befriended him. + +The next day he went with Sufder and Soyera, who swore to their +statements before the judge of the High Court. + +As soon as his uniform was ready, Harry went to his regiment--which +was encamped on the maidan, between the fort and the native +town--and was introduced to the colonel. + +"I have come to report myself, sir," he said to the colonel. "My +name is Lindsay." + +"I was expecting you," the colonel said, "for Mr. Malet came in +this morning and told me about you; saying that you would most +likely come either today or tomorrow. I will have a tent pitched +for you, this afternoon; and a soldier told off as your servant. Of +course, at first you will have to go through the somewhat +unpleasant task of learning your drill. + +"From what Mr. Malet told me, I think you are not likely to be much +with us as, from your perfect knowledge of Mahratti, and of the +country, you can do better service in a staff appointment than with +the regiment. + +"You are much fairer than they had given me to expect." + +"I have been hard at work, for the last two days, in getting rid of +the dyes with which I have been coloured, ever since I was an +infant." + +"Ah! You are not very noticeably darker, now, than other officers +in the regiment. + +"Now, I will hand you over to the adjutant. You will, of course, +mess with us today; and I can then introduce you to your brother +officers." + +The adjutant was sent for, and soon entered. + +"Mr. Lewis," the colonel said, "this is Mr. Lindsay, who was +gazetted to us two days ago. He will be very useful to us, if we go +up to Poona again--of which there is always a possibility--for he +speaks Mahratti like a native, having lived among the people since +he was an infant. He is the son of Major Lindsay, who was killed +here at the time of the advance on Poona." + +"You will be a great acquisition to us," the adjutant said, as he +left the tent with Harry. "Most of us speak a little Mahratti; but +it will be very useful to have one of us who is perfect, in that +way. Of course, you have not got your full kit yet; but you will +want a mess jacket and waistcoat. These I can lend you, till you +get your own made." + +"They are ordered already, and I am to get them in a couple of +days. It was so much more important that I should get the undress +uniform, to enable me to begin work, that I did not press the +tailor quite so much as to the other clothes." + +"Are you ready to begin work, at once?" + +"The sooner the better," Harry replied. + +"Then I shall hand you over to the native officer, who has charge +of the drilling of recruits. There is a small yard, behind the +barracks, where Europeans are instructed in the first stages. To +see them doing the goose step would not add to the respect the +soldiers have for their white officers. They are therefore taught +such matters in private so that, when they come out for company +drill, they are not quite at sea." + +Half an hour later, Harry was at work under the instructions of a +native officer. By the time he had finished, a tent had been +erected for him; and he was glad to find a bath ready, for it was +much warmer down in Bombay than above the Ghauts, and it had been +hot work drilling. The adjutant had chosen a Mahratta servant, and +the man's surprise, when the newly-joined officer addressed him in +his own language, was great. + +As Mr. Malet had told him that, except when on duty, the officers +generally wore civilian clothes, he had purchased several white +suits, consisting of jacket and trousers, as these were kept in +stock by a Parsee tailor; and he put on one of these, with a white +shirt, after he had finished his bath. He had scarcely done so when +a bugle sounded. + +"That is the call for tiffin, sahib," Abdool said. + +"Do the officers go in uniform?" + +"No, sahib, not to this meal." + +Just at this moment, the adjutant came in. + +"Come along, Lindsay," he said. "I thought I would come round for +you. It is rather trying going into a room full of strangers." + +There were some twelve officers gathered in the mess tent, and the +adjutant introduced Harry to them, singly. They were all curious to +see him, having heard from the colonel--who had summoned them to +the tent, a quarter of an hour before the bugle sounded--some +particulars of his life; and how he had been at once appointed to +be lieutenant, without going through the usual term as a cadet, as +a reward for important services. + +Their first impression of him was a favourable one. He was now nearly +six feet in height, with a powerful and well-knit frame. His face was +pleasant and good tempered and, although the features were still boyish, +there was an expression of restraint and determination that had been +acquired from the circumstances in which he had been placed. + +He had seen the barbarous splendour of the entertainments at the +Peishwa's court, but nothing like the well-ordered table now before +him; with its snow-white cloth, its bright silver, and perfect +appointments. + +When the meal was over, the colonel said: + +"As duty is over for the day, I think it would be most interesting +if Mr. Lindsay would give us an account of his life, and +adventures. As you are all here, it would save him the trouble of +going over his story, again and again; for you are all, I am sure, +like myself, anxious to know how it was that he has been able, all +these years, to pass as a Mahratta among Mahrattas." + +There was a general expression of agreement. Cheroots were lighted, +and Harry told his story, with some detail. When he had finished, +the colonel said: + +"I am sure we are all obliged to you, Lindsay. You have had a +remarkable experience; and few of us have, in the course of our +lives, gone through anything like the same amount of adventures. To +have been, at your age, a peasant boy, an English school boy, a +shikaree, an officer in the Peishwa's court, a confidential agent +of Nana Furnuwees, and now a British officer, is indeed wonderful. +It speaks volumes for your intelligence and discretion." + +"I cannot take the whole credit to myself, sir. I had two good +friends. My nurse, not content with saving my life, taught me +English, instructed me in the ways of our people, and even in their +religion, and continually urged me to exercise myself in every way; +so that when, some day, I left her, I should in bodily strength and +activity not be inferior to others; and, aided by her brother, +expended all her savings, of years, in having me educated here. +Next to her I owe much to Sufder, who first taught me the use of +arms, and then presented me to Nana. Without such an introduction I +must, had I entered the Mahratta service at all, have gone as a +private soldier, instead of obtaining at once a post at court. + +"To Mrs. Sankey I owe very much for the kindness she showed me, and +the pains she took with me; and I owe much, too, to Mr. Jeemajee, +the Parsee merchant." + +"Yes, you owe much to both of them," the colonel said; "but their +teaching and advice would not have gone for much, had it not been +for your own energy, and for the confidence you inspired in the +Peishwa's minister. + +"What are you going to do about your nurse?" + +"We have not quite arranged, as yet, sir; but she will, at any +rate, remain here for a time. She loves me as a mother; and I think +that, so long as I am quartered here, she will remain. She has +already found a lodging, at the house of a woman of the same caste +as herself; and tells me that she is sure she will be comfortable +with her. If we move, and all goes on quietly in the Deccan, she +will return to her brother's, where she is thoroughly at home and +happy." + +"And Sufder?" + +"He will return, in the course of a week or so. He is greatly +interested in what he sees here, especially in the shipping, never +having seen the sea before. I think that, probably, he will remain +for two or three years with his troop of two hundred men; and will +then settle in the village, of which and the surrounding country he +has received the jagheer. This, although not large, will suffice +for him to live in comfort. It is but a few miles from Jooneer, and +he will therefore be able to be near his friends, and pay frequent +visits to his cousin Ramdass." + +In a short time Harry became a general favourite, and made the +acquaintance of the officers of all the regiments in the garrison; +for his romantic story speedily circulated and, before he had been +a fortnight in the city, he had received invitations to dine at all +their messes. + +After the exciting life he had led, for two years, he felt, on +being released from drill, that life in a garrison town was dull +and monotonous. The simple habits, in which he had been brought up, +did not help him to enjoy heavy meals at regimental mess. +Occasionally he and two or three other officers crossed to the +mainland, and had some shooting in the wild district of the Concan. +But he was pleased when he received an order, from the Governor, to +call upon him. + +"Colonel Palmer," he said, "has written, requesting me to send him +an assistant; as matters do not seem to be going on well at Poona. +He suggested that you, from your acquaintance with the people and +their intrigues, should be selected for the post but, even had he +not done so, I should have chosen you, as being better fitted for +it than any other officer here. + +"Your instructions are simple. You will watch, and endeavour to +penetrate the schemes of the various factions, and assist Colonel +Palmer generally." + +"Am I to go up in my uniform, sir; or to wear a disguise, similar +to that in which I came down here?" + +"That is a matter over which I have been thinking. I have come to +the conclusion that you will be more likely to obtain intelligence +in native garb. All parties look with jealousy upon us, and would +be chary of giving any information to an officer of the Residency; +and therefore, if you have no objection, we think that it will be +an advantage to you to assume native dress. Of course, you could +not go in the attire that you came down in for, although you would +not be recognized in uniform, you would, if dressed as before. + +"I would rather leave that matter entirely to you, and also the +manner in which you can proceed. You must also decide, for +yourself, whether to renew your connection with Nana Furnuwees. It +appears to me that he is the only honest man in the Deccan, and the +only man who takes the patriotic view that there should be peace +and rest throughout the country. He is, however, no more willing +than others that we should, in any way, interfere in the affairs of +the Deccan." + +"That certainly is so, sir; but I know that it is his most earnest +desire to possess the friendship of the authorities of Bombay. He +has frequently told me that he is a great admirer of the English, +of their methods of government, and of the straightforwardness and +sincerity with which they conduct their business. But he is afraid +of them. He sees that, where they once make an advance, they never +retire; and is convinced that, if they obtained a footing above the +Ghauts, there would be no turning them out, and that their +influence would be supreme." + +"Very well, Mr. Lindsay; you showed such discretion and judgment, +during your residence at Poona, that I am well content to leave the +matter in your hands. The appointment as assistant to Colonel +Palmer will carry with it a civil allowance of three hundred rupees +a month. Of course, all necessary expenses will be paid and, should +you find it expedient to use a certain amount of bribery, to obtain +the news we require in other quarters besides that of the minister, +you will refer the matter to the Resident. + +"You will, of course, give your reports to Colonel Palmer, and will +be under his orders, generally. He will be requested to further +your special mission in every way in his power." + +"When shall I start, sir?" + +"As soon as you like, Mr. Lindsay." + +"I shall be ready, sir, as soon as the clothes are made for me. I +must have one or two disguises, of various kinds, to use as most +desirable. Some of these I can, no doubt, buy ready made--perhaps +all of them. If so, I will start at daylight, tomorrow." + +"Very well, Mr. Lindsay. I shall be sending up a despatch to +Colonel Palmer, and it will be left at your tent, this evening." + +On leaving the Government House, Harry went to see Soyera. Scarcely +a day had passed, since he came to Bombay, without his paying her a +visit. + +"I am off again to Poona," he said. "I do not know how long I shall +be away. It must depend upon what is going on up there. Of course, +I should be glad to have you with me; but that would hamper my +movements. I shall, naturally, see Sufder as soon as I get there." + +"But what are you going for? Will you travel as an officer?" + +"No, I shall be in disguise. It seems that things are unsettled; +and I am, if possible, to find out the intentions of the various +leaders, and communicate them privately to our Resident. I shall +have to take to dyeing my skin again, which is a nuisance, but it +cannot be helped. I shall take with me three or four different +disguises, and get you to do the shopping for me. I wish to have +them by this evening, as I shall start in the morning, early. + +"I shall get leave to take my soldier servant, Abdool, with me. He +is a sharp fellow, and may be useful. I shall have to buy a pony +for him." + +"What sort of disguises do you want?" + +"One is that of a native soldier." + +"That is easy enough, as it differs but little from the ordinary +Mahratta's dress." + +"One would certainly be the attire of a trader, in good +circumstances. I can't think, at present, of any other." + +"I should say the dress of a Brahmin might be useful," Soyera +suggested. + +"Yes, that would give me an entry, unquestioned, to Nana, or to any +other person of importance." + +By nightfall, Soyera had bought the three disguises, and obtained +from a native dyer a supply of stain sufficient for a long time; +and Harry had purchased two useful ponies, for himself and his +servant. + +At mess, that evening, the colonel said: + +"So you are going to leave us, for a time, Mr. Lindsay. I have +received a letter, from the Governor, requesting me to put you in +orders, tomorrow, as seconded from the regiment for civil +employment. I won't ask you where you are going. That is no +business of ours. But I am sure I can say, in the name of my +officers as well as myself, that we shall all miss you, very much." + +A murmur of acquiescence passed round the table and, seeing that +Harry, in thanking the colonel, made no allusion to what he was +going to do, they followed the example of their superior officer, +and abstained from asking any questions. + +"I should like to take my man, Abdool, with me, Colonel," Harry +said, later on. "He is a sharp fellow, and I might find him very +useful." + +"By all means. I will tell the adjutant that I have allowed him to +go with you." + +"I am not going in uniform, nor are you to do so," Harry said to +Abdool, when he returned to his tent. "I am going in Mahratta +dress, and I shall take a lodging in the town, and pass as a +native. I know, Abdool, that you are a sharp fellow, and feel +certain that I can depend upon you." + +"You can certainly depend upon me, sahib. You have been a kind +master, and I would do anything for you." + +"What part of the country do you come from, Abdool?" + +"From Rajapoor, in the Concan, sahib. I had no fancy for working in +the fields, so I left and took service with the Company. I have +never regretted it. I have been a great deal better off than if I +had enlisted in the army of one of the great chiefs. The pay is +higher, and we are very much better treated." + +"Well, Abdool, when this business which I am now starting on is +over, I shall recommend you for promotion and, in any case, will +make you a present of three months' pay." + +The next morning they started at daybreak. When a few miles out of +town, they took off their uniforms; and Harry put on the dress of a +trader. There was no occasion for any disguise for Abdool who, like +all the native troops, was accustomed, after drill was over for the +day, to put on native garments. The uniforms were then folded up, +and stowed in the wallets behind the saddles. + +They had brought with them a good supply of grain for their horses, +and provisions for themselves; so that they might not have to stop +at any village. They rode at a steady pace, and mounted the Ghauts +by eleven o'clock. Then they waited three hours, to feed and rest +the animals and, just as the sun was setting, entered Poona, having +accomplished a journey of fifty miles. Knowing the place so well, +Harry rode to a quiet street near the bazaar and, seeing an old man +at one of the doors, asked him if he knew of anyone who could +afford accommodation for him and his servant. + +"I can do that, myself," the man said. "I am alone in the house. +Two merchants who have been staying here left me, yesterday; and I +can let you have all the house, except one room for myself." + +"You have no stables, I suppose?" + +"No, sahib, but there is an outhouse which would hold the two +horses." + +[Illustration: There was a little haggling over the terms.] + +There was a little haggling over the terms; for it would have been +altogether contrary, to Indian usages, to have agreed to any price +without demur. Finally the matter was arranged, at a price halfway +between that which the man demanded, and that offered by Harry and, +in a short time, they were settled in the two rooms of the second +floor. Harry then went out and bought two thick quilted cushions, +used as mattresses, and two native blankets. + +They had still provisions enough for the evening. The furniture was +scanty, consisting of a raised bed place, or divan; two tables, +raised about a foot from the ground; brass basins, and large +earthenware jars of water. Harry, however, was too well accustomed +to it to consider such accommodation insufficient. + +"Tomorrow," he said, "I will get a carpet for sitting upon, and you +will have to get copper vessels, for cooking." + +Abdool presently went out, and returned with two large bundles of +forage for the horses. Soon afterwards they lay down, feeling stiff +and tired from their unaccustomed exertions. + +The next morning Harry went to the Residency. He had again painted +caste marks on his face, which completely changed his appearance. +Telling the guard that he had come from Bombay, and had a message +for Colonel Palmer, he was shown in. + +"You bring a message for me?" the colonel said, shortly; for he +was, at the time, writing a despatch. + +"Yes, sir," Harry answered, in Mahratti. "I have come to be your +assistant." + +"Then you are Mr. Lindsay!" the Resident exclaimed, dropping his +pen and rising to his feet. "I received a despatch, yesterday, +saying that you were coming. Of course, I remember you now, having +seen you on the day I came up here; but your dress is altogether +different, and the expression of your face seems so changed." + +"That is the result of my having adopted different caste marks, +larger than they were before, with lines that almost cover my +forehead." + +"I did not expect you to come in disguise." + +"The Governor thought, Colonel, that I might be of greater service, +in finding out what was passing in the town, and in going +elsewhere, were I to come up as a native. To an officer of the +Residency, all parties would keep their lips sealed." + +"I thoroughly agree with you," the Resident said. "Your disguise +differs so much, from your former appearance, that I do not think +any of your acquaintances, of those days, would be likely to +recognize you." + +"At present I am supposed to be a trader; but I have with me the +dress of a peasant, or small cultivator, which I used when I went +into Scindia's camp. I have also the dress of a Brahmin--one of the +better class--which I thought, if necessary, would enable me to +enter the house of Nana, or other leaders, without exciting +surprise. I also have my uniform with me. + +"I am staying, at present, in the street that faces the market, at +the house of a man named Naroo. I myself am Bhaskur. I have a +soldier servant with me, on whom I can confidently rely; and I will +send him, with a chit, when I have any news to give you, and you +can send me word at what hour I had better call. + +"Now, Colonel, I am at your orders and, if you will indicate to me +the nature of the news which you wish to gain, or the person whom +you want watched, I will do the best I can. At present, I know +nothing of any changes that have taken place, since I left here." + +"The only event that is publicly known is that, while the Peishwa +has carried out his engagement with Scindia and with the Rajah of +Berar, he refused to ratify any treaty with the Nizam; and the +consequence is that the latter's general quitted Poona, without +taking leave of Bajee Rao, and returned in great indignation to +Hyderabad. This matter might have been smoothed over, if Scindia +had intervened, or if the Peishwa had made suitable advances to the +Nizam; but he has not done so. There is no doubt that he thoroughly +dislikes Nana Furnuwees and, instead of being grateful to him for +having placed him on the throne, he would gladly weaken his power. +At any rate, it was Nana who formed the confederacy; and I know +that his greatest wish is to keep it intact, and to secure peace to +the country. + +"Moreover, matters have been further complicated by the death of +Holkar. He left two sons behind him, Khassee and Mulhar. +Unfortunately, Khassee is next door to an imbecile; while Mulhar +was a bold and able prince. The brothers quarrelled: two half +brothers took the part of Mulhar, who left his brother's camp, with +a small body of troops, and took up his abode at a village just +outside the city--and was, I believe, favoured by Nana, whose +interest naturally was to have an active and able prince, as ruler +of Holkar's dominions. Scindia--who was, I suspect, delighted at +this quarrel in Holkar's camp--supported Khassee, and sent a body +of troops to arrest Mulhar, who, refusing to surrender, maintained +a desperate defence, until he was killed. Jeswunt went to Nagpore +and Wittoojee fled to Kolapoore, but they were almost the only +adherents of Mulhar who effected their escape. + +"So matters stand, at present. The fact that the imbecile Khassee +owes his elevation to Scindia will, naturally, give the latter a +predominating influence over him. Thus, you see, the confederacy +has gone completely to pieces. The Nizam is estranged; the Rajah of +Berar has gone home to Nagpore; Holkar's power is, for the time, +subservient to Scindia; and Nana Furnuwees is, therefore, deprived +of all those who aided to bring him back to power. + +"You are well known to Nana, are you not?" + +"Yes, Colonel, he was kind enough to place a good deal of +confidence in me." + +"Then I think you cannot do better than see him, to begin with, and +gather his views on the matter. I myself have heard nothing from +him, for some time. He knows that the Company are well disposed +towards him; but he also knows that they can give him no +assistance, in a sudden crisis." + +"But surely, Colonel, Bajee Rao, who owes everything to him, will +not desert him?" + +"My opinion of the Peishwa is that he is a man without a spark of +good feeling; that he has neither conscience nor gratitude, and +would betray his own brother, if he thought that he would obtain +any advantage by so doing. He is a born schemer, and his sole idea +of politics is to play off one faction against another. I would +rather take the word of a man of the lowest class, than the oath of +Bajee Rao." + +"I am sorry to hear it, sir. He seemed to me to be a fine fellow, +with many accomplishments. His handsome face and figure, and +winning manner--" + +"His manner is part of his stock in trade," the colonel said, +angrily. "He is a born actor; and can deceive, for a time, even +those who are perfectly aware of his unscrupulous character. + +"Remember one thing, Mr. Lindsay: that if you are in any +difficulty, or if a tumult breaks out in the city, you had best +make your way here, at once. A trooper of my escort was thrown from +his horse, and killed, the other day; and if you attire yourself in +his uniform, you will pass for one of them. Whatever happens, they +are not likely to be touched. Both parties wish to stand well with +me and, even were it found out that you are an Englishman, you +would be safely sheltered here; for I should claim you as my +assistant, and an officer in our army, and declare truthfully that +you had only assumed this guise in order to ascertain, for me, the +feelings of the populace." + +"Thank you, sir. I will certainly come here, as soon as any serious +trouble begins." + +That evening, after rubbing off the caste marks and assuming those +of a Brahmin, and putting on the dress suitable for it--padding it +largely, to give him the appearance of a stout and bulky man--he +went to Nana's house. + +"Will you tell the minister," he said to the doorkeeper, "that +Kawerseen, a Brahmin of the Kshittree caste, desires to speak to +him?" + +The man gave the message to one of the attendants who, in two or +three minutes, returned and asked Harry to follow him. The minister +was alone. + +"What have you to say to me, holy man?" he enquired; and then, +looking more fixedly at his visitor, he exclaimed: + +"Why, it is Puntojee!" + +"You are right, Nana. I am sent here to ascertain, if possible, +what is going on, and how things are likely to tend. But first, I +must tell you that I am now here as Colonel Palmer's assistant." + +"I will take you entirely into my confidence," Nana said. "Until +you told me that you were an Englishman, when you took leave of me +two years ago, I could not quite understand why it was that I felt +I could confide in you, more than in the older men around me. I +esteem the English highly, and especially admire them for their +honesty and truthfulness. You at once impressed me as one +possessing such qualities and, now that I know you are English, I +can understand the feeling that you inspired. + +"I am glad you have come. No doubt your Government are well +informed, as to the state of affairs here. I feel the power +slipping from my hands, without seeing any way by which I can +recover my lost ground. Scindia is solely under the domination of +Ghatgay, whose daughter he will shortly marry. I have, of course, +made it my business to enquire as to the antecedents of this man. I +find that he has the reputation of being a brutal ruffian, +remarkable alike for his greed and his cruelty--a worse adviser +Scindia could not have. Holkar was but a poor reed to lean upon, +for he was as weak in mind, as in body. But at any rate, he was a +true friend of mine and, now that he has been succeeded by one even +more imbecile than himself--and who is but a puppet in the hands of +Scindia, to whose troops he owes his accession--his power and his +dominions are practically Scindia's. + +"There can be no doubt, whatever, that Bajee Rao is acting secretly +with Scindia; that is to say, he is pretending so to act, for he is +a master of duplicity and, even where his own interests are +concerned, seems to be unable to carry out, honestly, any agreement +that he has made. + +"I am an old man, Mr. Lindsay, and can no longer struggle as I did, +two years ago, against fate; nor indeed do I see any means of +contending against such powerful enemies. The Rajah of Berar, +although well disposed towards me, could not venture, alone, to +support me against the united power of Scindia and Holkar, backed +by that of the Peishwa. + +"There is but one direction in which I could seek for help--namely, +from the Government of Bombay--but even this, were it given, would +scarcely avail much against the power of my enemies. And even were +I sure that it could do so, I would not call it in. My aim, through +life, has been to uphold the power of the Peishwa, and to lessen +that of Scindia and Holkar and, by playing one against the other, +to avert the horrors of civil war. Were I to call in the aid of the +English, I should be acting in contradiction to the principles that +I have ever held. + +"The arrival of a force of English, here, would at once unite the +whole of the Mahrattas against them, as it did when last they +ascended the Ghauts; and believing as I do in their great valour +and discipline, which has been amply shown by the conduct of +Scindia's infantry, which are mainly officered by Europeans, it is +beyond belief that they can withstand the whole power of the +Mahratta empire. But granting that they might do so, what would be +the result? I should see my country shaken to the centre, the +capital in the hands of strangers, and to what end? Simply that I, +an old and worn-out man should, for a very few years, remain in +power here. It would be necessary for those who placed me there to +remain as my guardians, and I should be a mere cypher in their +hands. Nothing, therefore, would persuade me to seek English aid to +retain me in power." + +"But the English would doubtless act in alliance with the Nizam, +and probably with the Rajahs of Berar and Kolapoore." + +"Possibly they might do so, but what would be the result? Each of +these leaders would, in return for his aid, bargain for increased +territory, at the expense of the Peishwa; and I, who believe that I +am trusted by the great mass of the people here, should become an +object of execration at having brought the invaders into our +country. + +"No, Mr. Lindsay; my enemies can, and I believe will, capture me +and throw me into prison. They will scarcely take my life, for to +do so would excite a storm of indignation; but I always carry +poison about with me and, if they applied torture as a preliminary +to death, I have the power of releasing myself from their hands. + +"Are you established at the Residency?" + +"No, sir; I am living in disguises, of which I have several, in the +town. In that way, I can better discover what is going on than if I +were in uniform, as assistant to Colonel Palmer. Should there be a +tumult in the city, or if I find that my disguise has been +detected, I can make for the Residency; and either put on my +uniform and declare my true character, or attire myself as one of +the Resident's escort." + +"Come here as often as you can," Nana said. "I shall always be glad +to see you. It is a relief to speak to one of whose friendship I +feel secure. As a Brahmin, you can pass in and out without +suspicion; and I will always tell you how matters stand." + +"I have not yet spoken, Nana, of my work as your agent in Bombay. I +have sent you reports, from time to time; but there was nothing in +them that could be of any value to you. At present, the attentions +of the authorities of Bombay, Madras, and Calcutta are centred upon +the probability of war with Mysore. Tippoo has continually broken +the conditions under which he made peace with us, six years ago; +and it is known that he is preparing for war. He has received with +honour many Frenchmen, and is in communication with the French +Government; and believes that he will be supported by an army, +under General Bonaparte and, as it is certain that, when the war +breaks out again, it will need the fighting strength of the three +towns to make head against the army of Mysore, as far as I have +been able to learn they have given but little attention to the +state of affairs in the Deccan. I have therefore been able to +furnish you with no useful information, beyond telling you that the +sympathies of the Governor and Council are wholly with you, and +that they consider that the fact of your being in power here +secures them from any trouble with the Mahrattas. + +"Therefore, sir, I have put aside the allowance you have given me, +considering that I have in no way earned it; and have written this +order upon the bankers with whom I have placed it, authorizing them +to pay the money to anyone you may depute to receive it;" and he +handed the letter to the Nana. + +The latter took it and, without opening it, tore it up. + +"Your offer does you honour, Mr. Lindsay, but it is impossible for +me to accept it. Your information has not been without advantages. +I have foreseen that the Nizam would probably enter into an +alliance with your people; and that the very large increase that he +has made in his battalions, under foreign officers, was intended to +make his alliance more valuable. I, however, have not deemed it +necessary to imitate his example, and that of Scindia, by raising a +similar force. Your communications, therefore, have been of real +value, and have saved a large outlay here; but even had it not been +so, there can be no question of your returning your pay. You +undertook certain work, and you have to the best of your powers +carried it out; and it is not because you consider that the +information you sent me is not sufficiently valuable that you have, +in any way, failed to carry out your part of the contract. + +"I consider it of very great value. In the first place because, as +I have said, it relieved me from anxiety as to the Nizam's +intentions of increasing his army; and in the second place, it +eased my mind by showing that neither Scindia nor Holkar was +intriguing with Bombay, which knowledge is worth a crore of rupees +to me. + +"It is the first time, sir, since I have taken part in politics, +that anyone has offered to return money he has received on the +ground that he had not sufficiently earned it; or indeed, upon any +other ground, whatever. Your doing so has confirmed my opinion of +the honesty of your people, and I would that such a feeling were +common among my countrymen, here. No negotiations can be carried +on, no alliance can be formed, without a demand for a large sum of +money, or for an addition of territory. All our petty wars are +waged, not on a question of principle, but entirely from greed. + +"Let us say no more about it. I am, as of course you have heard, a +very wealthy man; and have so distributed my money among the +shroffs of all India that, whatever may happen here, I shall lose +comparatively little; and I am glad to know that some very small +portion of it goes to one whom I regard as a genuine friend, and +who does not draw a tenth part of what many of those around me +accept, without any consideration given for it." + +"Thank you, sir, but--at any rate while I am stationed here, as +Assistant Resident--I cannot continue to receive pay from you. I +should regard it as a disgraceful action, and absolutely +incompatible with my duty." + +"Well, so far I will humour you, Mr. Lindsay; though from what I +hear, in the Carnatic and Bengal the British officers, civil and +military, do not hesitate to accept large sums from native +princes." + +Harry was well aware that this was so, and that many British +officials had amassed considerable fortunes, by gifts from native +sources. He only replied: + +"That is a matter for their own consciences, sir. They may be +rewards for services rendered, just as I did not hesitate to accept +the sum that you so generously bestowed upon me. It is not for me +to judge other men, but I cannot but think that the custom of +officials accepting presents is a bad one." + +"Where can I find you," Nana said, changing the subject, "if I +should need to communicate with you, before you call again?" + +Harry gave his address. + +"Your messenger must enquire for Bhaskur, a trader from Ahmedabad, +who is lodging there." + +He chatted for some time longer with Nana, and then took his leave +and returned to his lodging. + + + +Chapter 7: An Act Of Treachery. + + +Some months passed quietly. Scindia more openly assumed supreme +power, imprisoned several leading men, and transferred their +jagheers to his own relations. Colonel Palmer had gone down to +Bombay on leave, his place being filled temporarily by Mr. Uhtoff. + +Bajee was, as usual, playing a deep game. He desired to become +independent both of Scindia and Nana Furnuwees. The former, he +believed, must sooner or later return to his own dominions, and he +desired his aid to get rid of Nana; therefore it was against the +latter that his intrigues were, at present, directed. The minister +was still an object of affection to his people; who believed, as +before, in his goodness of character, and who put down every act of +oppression as being the work of Scindia. + +Harry saw Nana frequently. There being no change in the position, +there was little talk of politics; and the minister generally +turned the conversation upon England, its power relatively to that +of France, the extent of its resources, the modes of life among the +population, and its methods of government. + +"It all differs widely from ours," Nana said, after one of these +conversations, "and in most respects is better. The changes there +are made not by force, but by the will of the representatives of +the people, in their assembly. A minister defeated there retires at +once, and his chief opponent succeeds him. The army has no +determining voice in the conduct of affairs, but is wholly under +the orders of the minister who may happen to be in power. All this +seems strange to us but, undoubtedly, the system is far better for +the population. There is no bloodshed, no burning of villages, no +plundering, no confiscation of estates. It is a change in the +personnel of the government, but no change in the general course of +affairs. + +"It is strange that your soldiers fight so well when, as you tell +me, they never carry arms until they enter the army; while ours are +trained from childhood in the use of weapons. And your enemies, the +French, is it the same with them?" + +"It is the same, Nana, so far as their civil life is concerned; for +none carry weapons or are trained in their use. There is one wide +point of difference. The French have to go as soldiers when they +reach a certain age, however much they may dislike it; while with +us there is no compulsion, whatever, and men enlist in the army +just as they might take up any other trade. There is, however, a +body called the militia. This, like the army, consists of +volunteers; but is not liable for service abroad, and only goes out +for a short period of training, annually. However, by law, should +the supply of volunteers fall short, battalions can be kept at +their full strength by men chosen by ballot from the population. +But this is practically a dead letter, and I am told that the +ballot is never resorted to; though doubtless it would be, in the +case of a national emergency." + +"Ah! It is pleasant to be a minister in your country, with no fear +of plots, of treachery, or assassination. Were I a younger man, I +should like to visit England and stay there for a time so that, on +my return, I could model some of our institutions upon yours. + +"But no; I fear that that would be too much for the most powerful +minister to effect. The people are wedded to their old customs, and +would not change them for others, however much these might be for +their benefit. An order that none, save those in the army, should +carry arms would unite the whole people against those who issued +it." + +It was on the last day of 1797 that Nana Furnuwees made a formal +visit to Scindia, in return for one the latter had paid him, a few +days before. Michel Filoze, a Neapolitan who commanded eight +battalions in Scindia's army, had given his word of honour as a +guarantee for the minister's safe return to his home. The European +officers in the service of the Indian princes bore a high +character, not only for their fidelity to those they served, but +also for their honour in all their dealings and, though Nana would +not have confided in an oath sworn by Scindia, he accepted that of +Filoze without hesitation. + +On his arrival near Scindia's camp the traitor seized him and, with +his battalions, attacked his retinue, amounting to about a thousand +persons, among whom were many of his principal adherents. Some of +these were killed, all of them stripped of their robes and +ornaments. Parties of soldiers were immediately sent, by Ghatgay, +to plunder the house of Nana and those of all his adherents. + +Harry was in his room when he heard a sudden outburst of firing +and, a minute or two later, Abdool ran in. + +"Scindia's men are in the town, sahib! They are attacking the +houses of Nana's adherents. These are defending themselves as best +they can. There is a general panic, for it is believed that the +whole town will be looted." + +"Get your things together, Abdool. I will change my dress for that +of a native soldier, and we will make for the Residency." + +"Shall we ride, sahib?" + +"No, we will leave the horses here. If we were to go on horseback, +we might be taken for Nana's adherents trying to make their escape, +and be shot down without any further question. + +"I felt misgivings when I saw Nana going out; but it would have +come to the same thing, in the end, for if Scindia's whole army, +villainous as is the treachery, had advanced against the town, Nana +could have gathered no force to oppose them." + +Three or four minutes later they started, Abdool carrying a bundle +containing Harry's disguises. They made their way through lanes, +where the people were all standing at their doors, talking +excitedly. Continuous firing was heard in the direction of the +better quarters, mingled with shouts and cries. No one questioned +them, all being too anxious as to their own safety to think of +anything else. + +The Residency was half a mile from the town. There Mr. Uhtoff was +standing at his door, and the men of his escort were all under +arms. Harry had been in frequent communication with him, from the +time that he had taken Colonel Palmer's place. The Resident did +not, for the moment, recognize him in his new disguise but, when he +did so, he asked anxiously what was going on in the town. + +"A strong body of Scindia's troops are there, attacking Nana's +adherents. I fear that the minister himself is a prisoner in their +camp." + +"That is bad news, indeed. Nana told me, yesterday, that he +intended to visit Scindia, and had received a guarantee for his +safe return, from Filoze. I advised him not to go; but he said that +he could confide, implicitly, in the honour of a European officer. +I told him that the various European nations differed widely from +each other; and that, although I would accept the word of honour of +a British officer in Scindia's service, I would not take that of a +Neapolitan. However, he said, and said truly, that it was incumbent +on him to return Scindia's visit; and that if he did not do so it +would be treated as a slight and insult, and would serve as a +pretext for open war against him; and that, as he could but muster +three or four thousand men, the city must yield without resistance. + +"I believe that this is the work of Bajee Rao, and of Ghatgay--two +scoundrels, of whom I prefer Ghatgay who, although a ruffian, is at +least a fearless one, while Bajee Rao is a monster of deceit. I +know that there have, of late, been several interviews between him +and Ghatgay; and I have not the least doubt that the whole affair +has been arranged between them with the hope, on Bajee's part, of +getting rid of Nana; and on Ghatgay's, of removing a sturdy +opponent of his future son-in-law, and of acquiring a large +quantity of loot by the plunder of Nana's adherents. + +"You did well to come here for, if the work of plunder is once +begun, there is no saying how far it will spread. I shall ride, at +once, to see the Peishwa, and request an explanation of what has +occurred. There is that trooper's dress still lying ready for you, +if you would like to put it on. There is a spare horse in my +stable." + +"Thank you, sir; I should like it very much;" and, rapidly changing +his dress, he was ready by the time the horses were brought round. + +He then took his place among the troopers of the escort, and rode +to Bajee Rao's country palace, which was some three miles from the +town. + +After seeing everything in train, the Peishwa had left Scindia's +camp before Nana's arrival there; and had summoned a dozen of the +latter's adherents, under the pretence that he desired to see them +on a matter of business. Wholly unsuspicious of treachery, they +rode out at once; and each, on his arrival, was seized and thrown +into a place of confinement. + +The Resident learned this from a retainer of one of these nobles. +He had made his escape when his master was seized, and was riding +to carry the news to the British official; whose influence, he +thought, might suffice to save the captives' lives. + +On arriving at the palace four of the troopers were ordered to +dismount--Harry being one of those selected--and, on demanding to +see the Peishwa the Resident was, after some little delay, ushered +into the audience chamber, where Bajee Rao was seated, with several +of his officers standing behind him. He received Mr. Uhtoff with a +show of great courtesy. + +The latter, however, stood stiffly, and said: + +"I have come, Your Highness, to request an explanation of what is +going on. The city of Poona is being treated like a town taken by +siege. The houses of a number of persons of distinction are being +attacked by Scindia's soldiery. Fighting is going on in the +streets, and the whole of the inhabitants are in a state of wild +alarm. + +"But this is not all. Nana Furnuwees has, owing to his reliance +upon a solemn guarantee given for his safe return, been seized when +making a ceremonial visit to Scindia." + +"You must surely be misinformed," the Peishwa said. "You will +readily believe that I am in perfect ignorance of such a +proceeding." + +"I might believe it, Prince," Mr. Uhtoff said, coldly, "had I not +been aware that you and your officers have decoyed a number of +Nana's friends to this palace and, on their arrival, had them +suddenly arrested." + +Bajee Rao, practised dissimulator as he was, flushed at this +unexpected accusation. + +"I learned, sir," he said, after a pause, "that there was a plot +against my person, by Nana Furnuwees and his adherents; and I have +therefore taken what I considered the necessary step of placing +these in temporary confinement." + +"It is a little strange, Your Highness, that the man who placed you +on the musnud should be conspiring to turn you from it. However, +what has been done has been done; and I cannot hope that any words +of mine will avail to persuade you to undo an act which will be +considered, throughout India, as one of the grossest treachery and +ingratitude. My duty is a simple one: namely, merely to report to +my Government the circumstances of the case." + +The officers behind the Peishwa fingered the hilts of their swords, +and the four troopers involuntarily made a step forward, to support +the Resident. Bajee, however, made a sign to those behind him to +remain quiet; and the Resident, turning abruptly, and without +salutation to the Peishwa, left the hall, followed by his men. + +They mounted as soon as they had left the palace, and rode back to +the Residency; Mr. Uhtoff keeping his place at their head, and +speaking no word until he dismounted, when he asked Harry to +accompany him to his room. + +"This is a bad business, indeed, Mr. Lindsay. I cannot say that I +am surprised because, having studied Bajee Rao's character, I have +for some time been expecting that he would strike a blow at Nana. +Still, I acknowledge that it has come suddenly, and the whole +position of affairs has changed. Bajee has freed himself from Nana; +but he has only riveted Scindia's yoke more firmly on his +shoulders. Like most intriguers, he has overreached himself. He has +kept one object in view, and been blind to all else. + +"His course should have been to support Nana against Scindia, and +thus to keep the balance of power in his own hands. He has only +succeeded in ridding himself of the one man who had the good of his +country at heart, and who was the only obstacle to Scindia's +ambition. The fool has ruined both himself and his country. + +"I think, Mr. Lindsay, that the best plan will be for you to mount +at once, and ride down to Bombay. Your presence here, just now, can +be of no special utility; and it is most desirable that the +Government should have a full statement of the matter laid before +them, by one who has been present, and who has made himself fully +acquainted with the whole politics of the Deccan. + +"It is better that you should not go into the town again. I will +send in for your horses, as soon as the tumult has subsided. We +have several spare animals here, and you and your servant can take +two of them. I will write to the Governor a report of my interview +with Bajee, and say that I have sent you down to give him all the +details of what has taken place; which will save the time that it +would take me to write a long report, and will be far more +convenient, inasmuch as you can answer any point that he is +desirous of ascertaining. I do not think that you can do better +than go in the disguise that you now have on; for a soldier to be +galloping fast is a common sight, but people would be astonished at +seeing either a Brahmin or a trader riding at full speed. I will +give orders for the horses to be saddled at once and, in the +meantime, you had best take a meal. You will have no chance of +getting one on the road, and I have no doubt that dinner is ready +for serving. I will tell the butler to give some food to your man, +at once." + +Twenty minutes later, Harry and Abdool were on their way. Skirting +round Poona, they heard the rattle of musketry still being +maintained; and indeed, the fighting in the streets of the city +continued for twenty-four hours. By two in the morning, they halted +at the top of the Ghauts; partly to give the horses a rest, and +partly because it would have been very dangerous to attempt to make +the descent in the dark. + +At daybreak they continued their journey, arriving at Bombay six +hours later. They rode straight for the Government House, where +Harry dismounted and, throwing the reins of his horse to Abdool, +told the attendant to inform the Governor that a messenger, from +the Resident at Poona, desired to see him. He was at once shown in. + +"Why, it is Mr. Lindsay!" the Governor said, "though I should +scarce know you, in your paint and disguise. The matter on which +you come must be something urgent, or Mr. Uhtoff would not have +sent you down with it." + +Harry handed over the despatch of which he was bearer and, as the +Governor ran his eye over it, his face became more and more grave, +as he gathered the news. + +"This is serious, indeed," he said, "most serious. Now be pleased +to sit down, Mr. Lindsay, and furnish me with all the particulars +of the affair." + +When Harry had finished, the Governor said: + +"I imagine that you can have eaten nothing today, Mr. Lindsay. I am +about to take tiffin, and bid you do so with me. I shall at once +send to members of the Council and, by the time we have finished +our meal, they will no doubt be here." + +"I shall be very glad to do so, sir, if you will allow me to go +into the dressing room, and put on my uniform. I should hardly like +to sit down to table in my present dress." + +"Do so by all means, if you wish it; but you must remember that +your colour will not agree well with your dress." + +"I will remove these caste marks, sir, and then I shall look only +as if I were somewhat severely tanned." + +In ten minutes a servant knocked at the door, and said that +luncheon was ready. Harry was already dressed in his uniform, and +had removed the marks on his forehead; the dye, however, was as +dark as ever. He had, on leaving the Governor's room, sent a +servant down to fetch his wallet, and to tell Abdool that he was to +take the horses to the barracks. + +The meal was an informal one. The Governor asked many questions, +and was pleased at the knowledge that Harry showed of all the +principal persons in Poona, and their character and ability. + +"At the present moment," he said, "the information that you have +given me cannot be utilized; but it would be most valuable, were we +to get mixed up in the confusion of parties at Poona. I gather that +you consider Nana Furnuwees to be a great man." + +"My opinion is not worth much, on that point, sir. I think that he +has, over and over again, shown great courage in extricating +himself from difficulties which appeared to be overwhelming. I +believe him to be a sincere patriot, and that he only desires to be +at the head of the administration of affairs that he may prevent +civil war from breaking out, and to thwart the ambition of the +great princes. His tastes are simple, his house is furnished +plainly, he cares nothing for the pleasures of the table; but he is +honest and, I believe, absolutely truthful--qualities which +certainly are possessed by very few men in the Deccan. + +"I grant that he is not disposed to enter into any alliance with +the British. He has frequently told me that he admires them greatly +for their straightforwardness and truthfulness, as well as for +their bravery and their methods of government, both in the great +towns and in the districts in which they are masters; but he fears +that, were they to send an army to Poona on his behalf, or on that +of any of the other parties, it might end by their acquiring +control over the affairs of the country, and make them arbitrators +in all disputes." + +"No doubt he is right, there," the Governor said, with a smile. +"However, at present we are certainly not likely to interfere in +the quarrels and intrigues beyond the Ghauts; nor do I see why we +should be brought into collision with the Mahrattas--at any rate, +until they have ceased to quarrel among themselves, and unite under +one master. In that case, they might make another effort to turn us +out. + +"And now we will go into the room where the Council must be, by +this time, assembled." + +This proved to be the case, and the Governor read to them the note +that he had received from Mr. Uhtoff; and then requested Harry to +repeat the details, as fully as he had already done. There was a +consensus of opinion as to the importance of the news. + +"Come round again tomorrow morning, Mr. Lindsay," the Governor +said; "by that time I shall have fully thought the matter out." + +"So you have been masquerading as a native again, Mr. Lindsay?" the +colonel said, when Harry called upon him. + +"I can hardly consider it masquerading, as I merely resumed the +dress I wore for many years; and I certainly speak Mahratti vastly +better than I speak English for, although I improved a good deal +while I was here, I am conscious that, though my grammar may be +correct, my pronunciation differs a good deal from that of my +comrades." + +"You speak English wonderfully well, considering that you learned +it from the natives," the colonel said. "At first, you spoke as a +native that had learned English; but a casual observer would not, +now, detect any accent that would lead him to suppose that you had +not been brought up in England. + +"You will, of course, be at mess this evening?" + +"I think it would be better that I should not do so, sir. In the +first place, I should have innumerable questions to answer; and in +the second, which is more important, anything that I said might be +heard by mess waiters. It is quite possible that some of these are +in the pay of Scindia, or Holkar, who keep themselves well informed +of all that goes on here; and were it known that an English officer +had come down in disguise, it would greatly increase the danger +when I return there." + +"I have no doubt that you are right, Mr. Lindsay. Is there anything +new at Poona?" + +"Yes, Colonel; and as it will be generally known in two or three +days, there can be no harm in my telling you. Scindia has made Nana +Furnuwees a prisoner, by an act of the grossest treachery. He has +killed almost all his principal adherents and, when I got away, his +troops were engaged in looting the town." + +"That is grave news," the colonel said. "So long as Nana was in +power, it was certain that Scindia could not venture to take his +army, out of his own country for the purpose of attacking us; but +now that Nana is overthrown, and Scindia will be minister to the +Peishwa, we may expect troubles." + +"Not at present. Scindia's army has, for months, been without pay. +He has no means of settling with them and, until he does so, they +certainly will not move." + +"I do not think that would detain him long, Mr. Lindsay. He has +only to march them into other territories, with permission to +plunder, and they would be quite satisfied. He certainly can have +no liking for the Rajahs of Berar or Kolapoore, for both of them +assisted Nana to regain his power; and an attack upon them would, +at once, satisfy vengeance and put his troops in a good temper." + +"But there is no doubt that the Peishwa will find it much more +irksome to be under Scindia's control than that of Nana. And were +Scindia to march away, he would at once organize an army, and buy +Holkar's aid, to render himself independent of Scindia." + +"They are treacherous beggars, these Mahrattas," the colonel said. +"They are absolutely faithless, and would sell their fathers if +they could make anything by the transaction. + +"Then you do not know yet whether you are to return?" + +"No; I shall see the Governor again, tomorrow morning; and shall +then receive orders." + +"I will have some dinner sent over to your quarters, from the mess. +Do not have too much light in the room, or your colour may be +noticed by the servant. I will let the officers know that you have +returned. No doubt many of them will come in for a chat with you. +As no one can overhear you, I do not think that any harm can be +done by it." + +"I think not, Colonel." + +"I will tell them," the colonel went on, "that you are on secret +service; that you will tell them as much as you can safely do, but +they must abstain from pressing you with questions. We all know +that you have been acting as assistant to Mr. Uhtoff, because it +was mentioned in orders that you had been detailed for that duty; +but they know no more than that, and will doubtless be surprised at +your colour. But you can very well say that, as you had an +important message to carry down, you thought it best to disguise +yourself." + +"That will do excellently, Colonel; and I shall be very glad to +have a talk with my friends again." + +After leaving the colonel, Harry went to his own room; where he +found Soyera, who had been fetched by Abdool. + +"I am sorry to say that I am going away, almost directly, mother," +he said; "but it cannot be helped." + +"I do not expect you always to stay here, Harry. Now that you are +in the Company's service, you must, of course, do what you are +ordered. I am glad, indeed, to find that, although you have been +with them only a year, you are chosen for a post in which you can +gain credit, and attract the attention of the authorities here." + +"It is all thanks to the pains that you took to prepare me for such +work. + +"I don't expect to be away so long, this time. And indeed, now that +Nana Furnuwees is a prisoner, it does not seem to me that there can +be anything special to do, until some change takes place in the +situation, and Scindia either openly assumes supreme power, or +marches away with his army." + +That evening, Harry's room was crowded with visitors. The news of +the treacherous arrest of Nana Furnuwees excited the liveliest +interest; and was received with very much regret, as Nana was +considered the only honest man of all the ministers of the native +princes, and to be friendly disposed towards the British; and all +saw that his fall might be followed by an important change in the +attitude of the Mahrattas. + +Two days later, Harry returned to Poona. The next eighteen months +passed without any very prominent incidents. In order to furnish +Scindia with money to pay his troops, and to be in a position to +march away, Bajee Rao agreed that Ghatgay should, as Scindia's +minister, raise contributions in Poona. Accordingly, a rule of the +direst brutality and cruelty took place. The respectable +inhabitants--the merchants, traders, and men of good family--were +driven from their houses, tortured often to death, scourged, and +blown away from the mouths of cannon. No person was safe from his +persecution, and the poorest were forced to deliver up all their +little savings. The rich were stripped of everything, and +atrocities of all kinds were committed upon the hapless population. + +Bajee Rao countenanced these things, and was now included in the +hatred felt for Ghatgay and Scindia. Troubles occurred between the +Peishwa and the Rajah of Satara, who refused to deliver up an agent +of Nana whom he had, at Bajee's request, seized. As Scindia's +troops refused to move, Purseram Bhow was released from captivity +and, raising an army, captured the city of Satara, and compelled +the fort to surrender; but when ordered by Bajee Rao to disband the +force that he had collected, he excused himself from doing so, on +the plea that he had no money to pay them, or to carry out the +promises that he had given them. + +Scindia himself was not without troubles. In addition to the mutiny of +his troops, the three widows of his father who, instead of receiving +the treatment proper to their rank, had been neglected and were living +in poverty, sought an interview with him; and were seized by Ghatgay, +flogged, and barbarously treated. Their cause was taken up by the +Brahmins, who had held the principal offices under Scindia's father; +and it was at last settled that they should take up their residence at +Burrampoor, with a suitable establishment. Their escort, however, had +received private orders to carry them to the fortress of Ahmednuggur. + +The news of this treachery spread, soon after they had left the +camp; and an officer in the interest of the Brahmins started, with +a troop of horse which he commanded, dispersed the escort, and +rescued the ladies. These he carried to the camp of Amrud Rao, +Bajee Rao's foster brother; who instantly afforded them protection +and, sallying out, attacked and defeated a party of their pursuers, +led by Ghatgay himself. + +Five battalions of infantry were then sent by Scindia, but Amrud +attacked them boldly, and compelled them to retreat. Negotiations +were then opened, and Amrud, believing Scindia's promises, moved +his camp to the neighbourhood of Poona. But, during a Mahommedan +festival, he and his troops were suddenly attacked by a few +brigades of infantry; which dispersed them, slew great numbers, and +pillaged their camp. + +Holkar now joined Amrud Rao, who had escaped from the massacre. The +Peishwa negotiated an alliance with the Nizam. Scindia sent envoys +to Tippoo, to ask for his assistance. Bajee Rao did the same, and +it looked as if a desperate war was about to break out. + +All this time, Harry had been living quietly in the Residency, +performing his duties as assistant to Colonel Palmer, who had again +taken charge there. There was no occasion for him to resume his +disguises. The atrocities committed by Ghatgay, in Poona, were +apparent to all; and at present there seemed no possible +combination that could check the power of Scindia. + +Colonel Palmer, however, had several interviews with Bajee Rao, and +entreated him to put a stop to the doings of Ghatgay; but the +latter declared that he was powerless to interfere, and treated +with contempt the warnings, of the colonel, that he was uniting the +whole population in hatred of him. + +The rebellion under Amrud, and the adhesion of Holkar to it, seemed +to afford some hope that an end would come to the terrible state of +things prevailing; and Colonel Palmer became convinced that Scindia +was really anxious to return to his own dominions, where his +troops, so long deprived of their natural leaders, were in a state +of insubordination. If the Nana were but released from his prison +at Ahmednuggur, something might be done, he said. He might be able +to supply sufficient money to enable Scindia to leave; and the +alarm Nana's liberation would give, to Bajee, would compel him to +change his conduct, lest Nana should join Amrud and, with the +assent of the whole population, place him on the musnud. + +"Nana is the only man who can restore peace to this unhappy +country," he said to Harry, "but I see no chance of Scindia +releasing a prisoner whom he could always use to terrify Bajee, +should the latter dare to defy his authority." + +Harry thought the matter over that night and, at last, determined +to make an attempt to bring about his old friend's release. In the +morning he said to the Resident: + +"I have been thinking over what you said last night, Colonel, and +with your permission I am resolved to make an attempt to bring +about Nana's release." + +"But how on earth do you mean to proceed, Mr. Lindsay?" + +"My plans are not quite made up yet, sir. In the first place, I +shall ask you to give me three weeks' leave so that, if I fail, you +can make it evident that you are not responsible for my +undertaking. In the next place, I shall endeavour to see Nana in +his prison, and ascertain from him whether he can pay a +considerable sum to Scindia for his release. If I find that he is +in a position to do so, I shall then--always, of course, in +disguise--endeavour to have a private interview with Scindia, and +to convince him that it is in every way to his interest to allow +Nana to ransom himself. He is, of course, perfectly well aware +that, in spite of Bajee's assurances of friendship, he is at heart +bitterly opposed to him; and that the return of Nana, with the +powers he before possessed, would neutralize the Peishwa's power." + +"It would be an excellent thing, if that could be done," the colonel +said; "but it appears to me to be an absolute impossibility." + +"I would rather not tell you how I intend to act, sir; so that, in +case of failure, you can disavow all knowledge of my proceedings." + +"Well, since you are willing to undertake the risk, and +unquestionably the Bombay Government would see, with great +pleasure, Nana's return to power, I will throw no obstacle in your +way. You had better, to begin with, write me a formal request for a +month's leave to go down to Bombay. Is there anything else that I +can do, to aid your project?" + +"Nothing, whatever; and I am much obliged to you for acceding to my +request. If for no other reason than that my success should have +the effect of releasing the inhabitants of Poona, from the horrible +tyranny to which they are exposed, I shall be willing to risk a +great deal to gain it. + +"I shall not leave for a day or two, as I wish to think over all +the details of my plan, before I set about carrying it out." + +Going into the city, Harry went to the spot where the proclamations +of Scindia were always affixed. These were of various kinds; such +as forbidding anyone carrying arms to be in the streets after +nightfall; and that every inhabitant should furnish an account of +his income, in order that taxation should be carefully distributed. +To these Scindia's seal was affixed. + +One such order had been placed there that morning. A sentry marched +up and down in front of it, lest any insult should be offered to +the paper. Satisfied that this would suit his purpose, he called +Abdool to him, and explained what he wanted. + +"It will not be till this evening, for I want, before that step is +taken, to collect a party of ten horsemen to ride with me to +Ahmednuggur and back. By this time you know a great many people in +the town and, if I were to pay them well, you should have no +difficulty in getting that number." + +"I could do that in half an hour, sahib. There are a great number +of the disbanded soldiers of the Peishwa's army who are without +employment, and who would willingly undertake anything that would +bring them in a little money." + +"Well, you can arrange with them, today. They must not attract +attention by going out together, but must meet at the village of +Wittulwarree." + +The next morning, Harry went to the shop of a trader who was, he +knew, formerly employed by Nana, and purchased from him a suit such +as would be worn by an officer in Scindia's service. Then he wrote +out a document in Mahratti, giving an order to the governor of +Ahmednuggur to permit the bearer, Musawood Khan, to have a private +interview with Nana Furnuwees. This done, he told the resident that +he intended to leave that night. + +Colonel Palmer asked no questions, but only said: + +"Be careful, Mr. Lindsay, be careful; it is a desperate enterprise +that you are undertaking, and I should be sorry, indeed, if so +promising an officer should be lost to our service." + +"I will be careful, I assure you. I have no wish to throw away my +life." + +When evening came on, he went to his room, stained his skin from +head to foot, put on the caste marks, then dressed himself in the +clothes that he had that morning purchased and, at nine o'clock, +left the house quietly with Abdool. At that hour Poona would be +quiet, for the terror was so great that few people ventured into +the street after nightfall. + +When they approached the house on which the proclamation was fixed, +they separated. Harry went quietly to the corner of the street, a +few yards from the spot where the soldier was marching up and down, +and listened intently, peeping out from behind the wall whenever +the sentry was walking in the other direction. Presently he heard a +smothered sound, and the dull thud of a falling body. + +He ran out. Abdool had crawled up to the other end of the sentry's +beat, and taken his place in a doorway. The sentry came up to +within a couple of yards of him, and then turned. Abdool sprang out +and, with a bound, leapt upon the sentry's back and, with one hand, +grasped his musket. + +Taken wholly by surprise, the sentry fell forward on his face, +Abdool still clinging to him. He pressed his knife against the +soldier's neck and said that, at the slightest cry, he would drive +it home. Half stunned by the fall, the soldier lay without moving. + +[Illustration: Harry ran up to the proclamation and tore it down.] + +Without the loss of a moment, Harry ran up to the proclamation and +tore it down, and then darted off again. Abdool, springing to his +feet, brought the butt end of the soldier's musket down on his +head; and then, satisfied that a minute or two must elapse before +the man would be recovered sufficiently to give the alarm, he too +ran off, and joined Harry at the point where they had separated. + +"That was well managed, Abdool. Now we will walk quietly until we +are outside the town as, if we met some of Scindia's men, they +would question were we hurrying." + +In a few minutes they were outside the city; and then, running at a +brisk pace, they reached the Residency. They were challenged by the +sentry but, on Harry giving his name, he was of course allowed to +pass. + +He went quietly into his room and lighted a candle. Putting his +knife in the flame he heated it, and then carefully cut the seal +from the paper on which it was fixed, placed it on the order that +he had written and, again heating his knife, passed it along under +the paper, until the under part of the seal was sufficiently warmed +to adhere to it. He placed the order in an inner pocket, put a +brace of pistols into his sash, and buckled on a native sword that +he had bought that morning; then he went out again, and found that +Abdool had the horses in readiness, with two native saddles, with +embroidered housings such as was used by native officers; which he +had, by Harry's orders, purchased that morning in the bazaar. + +They at once mounted, and started at a gallop for Wittulwarree. + + + +Chapter 8: Nana's Release. + + +At the entrance to the village Harry found the ten troopers, whom +Abdool had engaged, standing by their horses. He gave the order for +them to march and, at a brisk canter, they started for Ahmednuggur. +It was a ride of some forty miles and, when they approached the +town, they halted until the sun rose and the gates of the city were +opened. + +They then rode in. The men were left at a khan, Abdool remaining +with them. They had been told, if questioned, to say that their +leader, Musawood Khan, was an officer high in the service of +Scindia. + +Harry took two of the troopers with him, and rode to the governor's +house. Dismounting, and leaving the horse in their charge, he told +one of the attendants to inform the governor that he was the bearer +of an order from Scindia, and was at once shown up. + +The governor received him with all honour, glanced at the order +that Harry presented to him, placed the seal against his forehead +in token of submission; and then, after a few words as to affairs +at Poona, called an officer and ordered him to accompany Musawood +Khan to Nana Furnuwees' apartment. This was a large room, at an +angle of the fortress, with a balcony outside affording a view of +the country round it; for the governor, knowing how rapidly and +often the position changed, and having no orders save to maintain a +careful watch over the prisoner, had endeavoured to ingratiate +himself with him, by lodging him comfortably and treating him well. + +The officer opened the door and, when Harry had entered, locked it +behind him. Nana Furnuwees was seated at the window, enjoying the +fresh morning air. He looked listlessly round, and then rose +suddenly to his feet, as he recognized his visitor. + +"What wonder is this," he said, "that you should be here, Mr. +Lindsay, except as a prisoner?" + +"I am here as one of Scindia's officers," Harry replied, with a +smile, "although he himself is not aware of it, in hopes of +obtaining your freedom." + +"That is too good even to hope for," Nana said, sadly. + +"In the first place, sir, are you aware of the state of things in +Poona?" + +"I have heard nothing since I came here," Nana said. "They make me +comfortable, as you see but, except for the daily visit from the +governor, I have no visitors; and from him I learn nothing, as he +has strict orders, from Scindia, not to give me any information of +what happens outside these walls; fearing, no doubt, that I might +take advantage of any change, to endeavour to open communication +with one or other of the leaders. + +"Before you tell me anything else, please explain how you managed +to enter here." + +"That was easy enough, sir. I simply wrote out an order, to the +governor, to permit me to have a private interview with you. I tore +down one of Scindia's proclamations, and transferred his seal from +it to the order that I had written; dressed myself, as you see, as +one of his officers; got together ten mounted men, to ride as my +escort, and here I am." + +"You will be a great man, some day," Nana said, looking at the +tall, powerful figure of his visitor, with its soldierly carriage. + +"Now, tell me about affairs. I shall then understand better why you +have run this risk." + +Harry gave him a sketch of everything that had happened, since his +confinement. + +"You see, sir," he said, as he concluded, "how the situation has +changed. Amrud is nominally acting with his brother's approval, but +there is no question that Bajee fears him. Amrud is in alliance +with Holkar. Purseram Bhow is at liberty, at the head of an army, +and a nominal conciliation has taken place between him and Bajee. +The latter has incurred the detestation and hatred of the people of +Poona and, most important of all, Scindia is really anxious to get +back home, but is unable to do so owing to his inability to pay his +troops and, willing as Bajee might be to furnish the money to get +rid of him, he is without resources, owing to the fact that the +taxation wrung from the people has all gone into the pockets of +Scindia, Ghatgay, and his other favourites. + +"The question is, sir, whether you would be willing to purchase +your liberty, at a heavy price. I think that, if you could pay +sufficient to enable Scindia to satisfy his soldiers, he might be +induced to release you." + +"How much do you think he would want?" + +"Of that I can have no idea, sir. Of course, he would at first ask +a great deal more than he would afterwards accept." + +"Yes, I should be ready to pay," Nana said, after considering for a +minute. "As a prisoner here, my money is of no use to me, nor ever +would be; but I could pay a large sum, and still be wealthy." + +"That is what I wanted to know, sir." + +"But why do you run this risk?" Nana asked. + +"For several reasons, sir. In the first place, because you have +honoured me with your friendship; in the second, because I would +fain save the people of Poona from the horrible barbarity with +which they are now treated; and lastly, because the Government of +Bombay would, I am sure, be glad to hear of your reinstatement, as +the only means of restoring peace and tranquillity to the Deccan." + +"How will you open this matter to Scindia?" + +"I have not fully thought that out, sir; but I have no doubt that I +shall, in some way, be able to manage it, and intend to act upon +his fears as well as upon his avarice." + +"But you say that Ghatgay is all powerful, and he would never +permit an interview to take place between a stranger and Scindia." + +"From what I hear, sir, Scindia is becoming jealous of Ghatgay's +power, and disgusted both by his imperious manner and by his +atrocities in Poona--against which he has several times protested, +but in vain. If I am to obtain an audience with Scindia, it must be +a secret one." + +"But there will surely be great danger in such a step?" + +"Doubtless it will not be without danger," Harry said, "but that I +must risk. I have not yet determined upon my plan, as it would have +been useless to think of that, until I had seen you but, as that +has been managed so easily, I fancy that I shall have no great +difficulty in getting at him. Once I do so, I feel certain that I +shall be able to convince him that his best policy is to free you, +and place you in your old position as the Peishwa's minister as, in +that case, you would be a check upon Bajee Rao, and would be able +to prevent him from entering into alliances hostile to Scindia." + +"Well, Mr. Lindsay, you have given me such proofs, both of your +intelligence and courage, that I feel sure that, if anyone can +carry this through, you will be able to do so; and I need hardly +say how deeply grateful I shall be, to you, for rescuing me from an +imprisonment which seemed likely to terminate only with my life." + +"And now I had better go, sir," Harry said. "It is as well that our +conference should not be too long a one." + +"Well, goodbye, Mr. Lindsay! Even if nothing comes of all this, it +will be pleasant for me to know that, at least, I have one faithful +friend who was true to me, in my deepest adversity." + +Harry went to the door, and knocked. It was immediately opened by +the officer who had conducted him there, and who had taken up his +post a short distance from the door. He led Harry back to the +governor, who pressed him to stay with him; but he replied that his +orders were to return to Poona, instantly. + +After this interview, he went direct to the tavern where the +soldiers had put up, ate a hasty meal, and then mounted and rode +out of the town. When ten miles away, he halted in a grove for some +hours, and then rode on to Poona. Arrived within a mile of the +town, he paid each of the men the amount promised, and told them to +re-enter the town separately. Then he secured a room for himself in +a small khan, just outside the city and, sitting there alone, +worked out the plan of obtaining an interview with Scindia. + +He then told Abdool to go quietly to the Residency, and to bring +out the Brahmin's dress he had before worn. In the morning, Abdool +went out to Scindia's camp with a letter which, when Scindia came +out of his marquee, he handed to him. There was nothing unusual in +this, for petitions were frequently presented in this way to rulers +in India. + +As he did so, he said in a low voice, "It is private and important, +Your Highness;" and instead of handing it to one of his officers, +Scindia went back to his tent to read it. + +It stated that the writer, Kawerseen, an unworthy member of the +Kshittree Brahmins, prayed for a private interview with His +Highness, on matters of the most urgent import. Scindia thought for +a moment and then, tearing up the piece of paper, went out and, as +he passed Abdool, who was waiting at the entrance, said: + +"Tell your master to be here at half-past ten, tonight. The sentry +will have orders to admit him." + +Abdool returned at once to Harry, and delivered his message. + +"That is good," the latter said. + +"You will take me with you, sahib?" + +"Certainly, Abdool, if you are willing to go. There is some danger +in it and, should Scindia give the alarm, you may be of great +assistance, by cutting down the sentry before he can run in. Take +your pistols and tulwar, and bring another sword for me. If I can +once get out of the tent we shall be fairly safe for, in the +darkness and confusion which will arise, we shall be able to make +off quietly. We will ride there, and fasten our horses in that +grove that lies about a quarter of a mile from the camp." + +At half-past nine they started, and reached Scindia's tent at the +time appointed. Harry's belief that he would succeed was largely +founded on the knowledge that Scindia was a weak young man, who had +never been engaged in warfare, and was wanting in physical courage. +An attendant was at the door, and led him to the prince's private +tent, which stood in the middle of an encampment composed of large +tents; for the purpose of receptions and entertainments, for the +abodes of the ladies of the zenana, and for the officers in whom +Scindia reposed most confidence. The retinue of servants, +attendants, and minor officials were lodged in tents fifty yards +behind the royal encampment. + +Scindia was sitting on a divan. Two lamps hung from the ceiling. He +himself was smoking. + +"You have something of importance to say to me?" he said, as Harry +entered, and bowed deeply. + +"I have, Your Highness. You are doubtless well aware that the +Kshittree Brahmins, who formerly held the principal offices under +your father, are greatly offended by the elevation of Ghatgay; and +still more so by his atrocious deeds in the town of Poona. There +has been a private meeting, and twelve of them, myself among the +number, have sworn by the feet of Brahma to take your life, either +by poison, dagger, or musket ball." + +"And you have the insolence to avow that you took such an oath!" + +He sprang to his feet, and would have touched the bell on the table +but, in an instant, Harry sprung forward with a loaded pistol, +pointed at Scindia's head. + +"Stop, sir, I beg of you; for assuredly, if you raise a voice or +touch a bell, that moment will be your last." + +Scindia sank down into his seat again. He had not the least doubt +that the man before him would execute his threat. + +"Your Highness," he said, "I have not come here for the purpose of +assassinating you. I was first on the list, but obtained from the +others permission to endeavour to put an end to the present state +of things, before carrying out our vow. We know that, in spite of +the enormous sums that Ghatgay has raised in Poona, you yourself +have not been enriched; and that you have been unable to persuade +your troops to march, owing to your want of money to pay up their +arrears. We have thought the matter over, and can see but one way +by which you can obtain the necessary funds." + +"And that is?" Scindia asked. + +"That is, Your Highness, to liberate Nana Furnuwees--setting his +liberty, of course, at a high price. In this way you will not only +be able to move your army, but you will cripple the power of the +Peishwa--who would, if possible, overthrow you, now you have done +his work and freed him from Nana. + +"You are well aware, Prince, that Nana Furnuwees always exercised +his authority on the side of peace, and there is no fear that he +will permit Bajee Rao to engage in war against you. He is an old +man, and useless to you as a prisoner. If you exacted a heavy sum +from him it would, in all ways, aid your views." + +"But how do you know that Nana could raise such a sum as would +satisfy the troops?" + +"We have assured ourselves on that score, and I know that it +matters not how much Nana Furnuwees will have to give. What I would +suggest is that you shall seize Ghatgay, and rid yourself of his +domination. He cannot but be as odious to you as he is to Bajee +Rao, and to the people." + +Scindia sat for some time, in silence. + +"Do I understand," he said, "that if I carry out these suggestions, +your comrades will be satisfied?" + +"That I swear solemnly. I do not threaten Your Highness, for my +visit today is one of conciliation. You might, as soon as I leave +this tent, order me to be arrested. In that case I should use this +pistol against myself, and you would seek in vain for the names of +my eleven brethren; but your life would be forfeited--whether in +the midst of your guards or in your tent, whether you ride or walk. +You would be watched, and your servants would be bribed, and your +food poisoned. If the first man fails, he will blow out his brains, +and so will they all; but be assured that the vow will be kept and +that, whether by night or by day, you will never be safe." + +"You are a bold man to speak so," Scindia said. + +"I speak so, Your Highness, because I am perfectly ready to die for +the good of the country, and to secure for it peace and +contentment." + +Scindia rose, and took two or three turns up and down the tent; +Harry keeping his pistol in his hand, in readiness to fire should +he attempt to slip away. At last, Scindia stopped before him. + +"I agree to your conditions," he said, "and the more readily +because I shall, as you say, at once free myself from difficulties, +and avenge myself on Bajee Rao; who is, I know, in spite of his +professions of friendship, constantly plotting against me. Tomorrow +at daybreak an officer shall ride, with a troop of cavalry, and +shall bring Nana here." + +"You have chosen wisely, Prince. It is, believe me, your only way +of escaping from your present difficulties. I know that, already, +your soldiery are becoming mutinous at being thus kept, for months, +away from their country, and receiving no pay. That feeling will +grow rapidly, unless their demands are conceded. As to Ghatgay, the +soldiers hold him in abhorrence, and his arrest and downfall would +cause the most lively satisfaction among them. Your men are +soldiers and not assassins, and the tortures and executions that +daily take place fill them with horror; so that your order for his +arrest will be executed with joy. + +"Now, Your Highness, I will leave you. I believe that you will keep +your promise, as indeed it is to your interest to do so; in which +case you will never hear of myself, or my eleven companions." + +"Do not fear," Scindia said, "tomorrow my messenger shall certainly +start for Ahmednuggur." + +Harry, bowing deeply, turned, passed through the curtain, and made +his way out of the tent. Abdool, who was squatting near the +entrance, at once rose and followed him. + +"Is all well, sahib?" + +"I think so. I have so frightened Scindia that I have little doubt +he will carry out the promise he has given me. I will tell you +about it, when we get back." + +They passed through the sleeping camp, and mounted their horses in +the grove, and rode to the Residency. Colonel Palmer was still up, +engaged in writing a report for the Government. It was a dark +night, and the sentry on duty, knowing Harry's voice, let him pass +without question, not even observing the change in his attire. + +"What! Back again, Mr. Lindsay?" the colonel exclaimed, in +surprise, when Harry entered. "I thought that it would be a month +before you returned--that is, if you ever returned at all, and of +this I had but little hope. As I expected, you have, of course, +found it impossible to carry out your design." + +"On the contrary, sir, I have been, I hope, perfectly successful. I +have seen Nana Furnuwees, and ascertained that he is ready to pay a +large sum to obtain his freedom, and his former position as the +Peishwa's minister. I have seen Scindia. Tomorrow a troop of horse +will start, to fetch Nana to his camp; and Ghatgay will be arrested +as soon as possible, after he arrives." + +"How in the name of fortune have you managed all these things?" the +colonel asked. + +"I will tell you, sir, now that I am back here. I shall tomorrow +reassume my uniform, and there is no danger of my being recognized, +or of trouble arising from what I have done." + +He then related the various steps he had taken, and his +conversations with Nana and Scindia. + +"Upon my word, Mr. Lindsay, I do not know whether to admire most +your daring, in bearding Scindia in the heart of his camp; or the +intelligence with which you have carried out what seemed, to me, an +absolutely impossible undertaking. + +"Light your cheroot. I need not trouble about this report that I +was engaged on, when you entered, but will put it by until the day +after tomorrow, when we shall see whether Nana is brought to +Scindia's camp. + +"You speak Hindustani as well as Mahratti, do you not?" + +"Not so well, sir; but as you know I have, during the six months +that I was at Bombay, and since I have been here, used most of my +spare time working up Hindustani, with a moonshee." + +"I am glad to hear it, for I received a letter from the Governor, +this morning, saying that Lord Mornington has requested him to send +an officer, thoroughly acquainted with Mahratti and with some +knowledge of the people; and that he has selected you for the +service, as being by far better fitted than anyone he knows for the +appointment. A knowledge of Hindustani will, of course, be very +useful to you; but Mahratti is the principal thing, as he is +intending to open negotiations with the Mahrattas, as well as with +the Nizam, to induce them to join in concerted action against +Tippoo. + +"He says that no vessel will be sailing for Calcutta for less than +a month, so you can stay here for a few days, and see how your +scheme works out. It will be a great step for you, and ensure you +rapid promotion." + +"I am indeed obliged to the Governor for selecting me," Harry said, +"and will do my best to justify his confidence." + +Two days later, Nana Furnuwees was brought to Scindia's camp--news +which caused Bajee Rao intense consternation. He at once sent off, +to open negotiations with the Nizam for common action, offering a +considerable amount of territory for his assistance. + +Colonel Palmer rode over the next morning to Scindia's camp, and +found that Scindia had demanded three millions of rupees as the +price of Nana's release, and appointment as minister to the +Peishwa. Nana had protested his absolute inability to raise +anything like that sum, but had offered five hundred thousand +rupees. + +"I can quite believe that he could not pay the sum Scindia +demands," the colonel said, on his return; "and when Scindia sees +that he would rather return to prison than attempt impossibilities, +he will come down in his demands, and Nana will go up in his offer. +It is a mere question of bargaining." + +When Scindia heard of the step that Bajee Rao had taken, he was +greatly alarmed; for he could hardly hope to withstand the Nizam's +army, and that which Bajee himself could raise; and he therefore +materially lowered his demands, and finally accepted Nana's offer +of nine hundred thousand rupees. This arrangement being made, he +permitted Nana to leave the camp in order to raise the money; +receiving his solemn oath that, if he failed to do so, he would +return and render himself a prisoner again. + +However, in a few days Nana sent in the money. Scindia fulfilled +the other part of his promise, and insisted upon the Peishwa's +receiving Nana as his minister. A few days later he had Ghatgay +arrested, by the sons of two of his European officers. + +Scindia was, indeed, most anxious to be off. He did not know that +the Nizam had refused Bajee Rao's offer. He had received news of +widespread disaffection among his troops at home, and felt that he +could not rely upon those with him. As soon, therefore, as he +received the money from Nana, he partially paid the arrears due to +the soldiers. The sum, however, was altogether insufficient to +satisfy the troops and, as Nana Furnuwees found that Bajee was +still intriguing with Scindia for his overthrow, and that no rest +could be hoped for until the latter's army marched away, he +advanced Scindia fifteen lakhs of rupees from his own private +funds. The latter was then able to satisfy his troops. + +Scindia accepted the money, but still remained in the neighbourhood +of Poona. + +These matters were not concluded until months after Harry left for +Bombay. On arriving there he called upon the Governor, to report +the release of Nana Furnuwees. + +"I received Colonel Palmer's last report, four days ago. He has +given me full details of the manner in which you, on your own +initiative, brought about Nana's release, and the approaching +departure of Scindia; and I of course brought them before the +Council, and they quite agreed with me as to the remarkable daring +and ability with which you had carried out what Colonel Palmer +believed to be an impossible scheme. + +"I have pleasure in handing you your commission of captain, and +only regret that we cannot break the rules of the service, by +nominating you major. Tomorrow your name will be removed from the +list of officers of the 3rd Regiment, and you will be appointed to +the staff. You will have a week before you, to obtain the proper +uniform. I shall not require you to perform any duties, and you +will therefore have your time to yourself, till you sail. I shall, +of course, forward my reasons for sending you to Lord Mornington, +and shall give an account of the services that you have rendered; +which will doubtless excite as much admiration in Calcutta as in +Bombay. + +"I shall be glad if you will dine with me, the day after tomorrow, +when I shall ask the members of the Council to meet you." + +On leaving the Governor, Harry at once went to the shop of the +Parsee merchant from whom he had obtained his regimentals, and +ordered the various uniforms required for the staff. He then went +to Soyera and, to his great satisfaction, found Sufder there. The +latter's troop was one of those which had been disbanded when, on +the arrival of Scindia, Bajee Rao deemed it necessary to reduce his +force; and Sufder, after staying for some time at Jooneer, had now +come down to see his cousin. + +"I am glad, indeed, to find you here, Sufder; in the first place, +because it is always a pleasure to meet a good friend; and in the +second, because you can take Soyera back with you, and place her +with Ramdass." + +"But why should I leave here, Harry?" + +"Because, mother, I am to start for Madras in three weeks; and may +be, for aught I know, away for a year or more. Of course you can +remain here if you prefer it, but it seems to me that the other +would be the better plan." + +"I should certainly prefer to go with Sufder to my home," Soyera +said. "I have numbers of acquaintances here, but no real friends; +and Ramdass and Anundee will, I know, joyfully receive me." + +"At any rate, you shall be no burden to them, Soyera. I will give +you a thousand rupees, with which you can pay your share of the +expenses of the house or land; and I will give you a similar sum to +hand to Ramdass, as a token of my gratitude for his protection and +kindness. This will enable him to add to his holding, and to the +comforts of his house. I would willingly give much more, but it +might cause suspicion and enquiry, were he to extend his holding +largely; and the authorities of Jooneer might demand from him how +he became possessed of such means. As I told you, I have received +much money in presents, and could afford to give you very much +more, if it were of any advantage to you. + +"I shall give a thousand rupees also to you, Sufder. They will be +useful to you, when you settle down on the revenues of your +district; and enable you to cut a good figure among the people when +you arrive there." + +The day before he was to sail, a Hindu entered Harry's apartment +and, bowing deeply, handed him a letter. It was from Nana. + +"My good English friend, + +"I send the enclosed bill, upon my agent, as a small token of +acknowledgment for the inestimable service you have rendered me. +During my long life I have had many friends; but these, in +supporting me, acted in their own interest. You alone have shown me +absolutely disinterested friendship. I have always been opposed to +your people interfering in the affairs of the Deccan; but I see now +that nothing save their intervention can save the country from +absolute ruin, owing to the constant struggles for supremacy among +the great rajahs; and I see that it were far better we should enjoy +peace and protection, under a foreign power, than be exposed to +ruin and misery at the hands of warring factions. + +"I grieve that I have not seen you again. Colonel Palmer tells me +that you are about to start for either Calcutta or Madras, to join +the army that is about to act against Tippoo. It is unlikely that I +shall ever see you again; but I shall never forget that, had it not +been for you, I should have ended my life a prisoner at +Ahmednuggur. + +"Nana." + +The bill enclosed was an order for a hundred thousand rupees, upon +Nana's agent in Bombay. + +When Harry went to say goodbye to the Governor, the latter said: + +"It is likely that you will see your old regiment before long, +Captain Lindsay. This morning a ship arrived, with orders from Lord +Mornington for us to send as many troops as could possibly be +spared, to ascend the southern Ghauts and join him near +Seringapatam. Lord Mornington is now at Madras, making arrangements +for an advance; when his brother, Colonel Wellesley, will move +forward with the Nizam's troops. There is still a doubt what part +the Mahrattas will take--probably they will hold aloof, altogether, +until they see how matters go. We know that Tippoo has sent +thirteen lakhs of rupees to Bajee Rao, and that the latter and +Scindia are in constant communication with him. However, at present +we shall take no notice of these proceedings; but allow the Peishwa +to believe that we are deceived by the constant assurances that he +gives us of his friendship, although he has declined to enter into +a treaty with us, similar to that which the Nizam has made. + +"It is enough to have one formidable foe on our hands at a time, +and our experience of Bajee assures us that he will not commit +himself, by openly declaring for Tippoo, until he sees how matters +are going." + +The winds were unfavourable, and it was not until six weeks after +leaving Bombay that Harry arrived at Madras. It was now November, +1798 and, on landing, he learned that General Harris was in command +of the army that was assembling at Vellore, and that the Governor +General had returned to Calcutta. He therefore at once went back to +the ship, which next day sailed for that town. + +On arriving there he presented himself at the Government House and, +on sending in his name, was in a short time shown in to Lord +Mornington's private room. + +"I am glad that you have come, Captain Lindsay," the latter said. +"I wish that you had been here sooner." + +"I came by the first ship, sir, after the Governor of Bombay +received your letter but, owing to contrary winds, we have been +nearly two months on the voyage. I landed for an hour at Madras +and, hearing that you had returned here, I hesitated whether to +come to you for orders, or to join General Harris at Vellore; but I +thought it better to come on, and so again embarked on the ship, +which has only just anchored." + +"You were quite right, sir, for it was an agent rather than a +soldier that I required. I own that I thought the Governor would +have sent an older man." + +"I am the bearer of this letter from him. I believe that in it he +gives his reasons for the honour he did me, in selecting me for the +post." + +"I will look through it, presently," Lord Mornington said; "and if +you will dine with me here, I shall then have read it, and shall be +able to decide where you can be employed to the best advantage." + +The dinner was a quiet one, only the officers of the Governor +General's suite being present. The Governor received Harry with +much more cordiality than he had evinced at their first interview, +and introduced him to his officers, with the expression that +Captain Lindsay had done very valuable service in the Deccan. +Little allusion was made to business, until the other officers had +left, when Lord Mornington said: + +"I have read the Governor of Bombay's letter, and am convinced that +he could have made no better choice than he has done. He speaks of +you in the highest terms, and has given me a slight sketch of your +story, and a fuller one of the manner in which you obtained the +release of Nana Furnuwees. I learn that Nana has always been +considered our friend; although we have not been able to give him +the support that we could wish, as this would have entailed war +with the Mahrattas, which Bombay is in no position to undertake. +Nevertheless, his release will doubtless, to some extent, +counterbalance the duplicity of the Peishwa who, while lavish in +his promises to us, is receiving money from Tippoo; and will +undoubtedly, unless restrained by Nana, openly espouse his cause, +should he gain any successes over us. You showed such intelligence +in the matter that he says I can place every confidence in you. + +"Although the Nizam has been obliged to dismiss the French troops +in his service, and to send a portion of his army to act in +connection with our own against Mysore, he is in no way to be +trusted; being as slippery as the rest of these Indian princes and, +like the Mahrattas, would assuredly join Tippoo if he saw his way +to doing so. This is so certain that nothing would be gained by +sending another agent to Hyderabad. I therefore propose to open +communications with the Rajah of Berar. + +"None of my officers is able to talk Mahratti; though many of them +are, of course, familiar with the southern dialects. The rajah is +already practically at war with the Mahrattas as, for a long time, +his troops have been ravaging the territory of Purseram Bhow; which +he was invited to do by the Peishwa, when Purseram took sides +against him. He is doubtless in some apprehension of an attack by +the Mahrattas and, upon our promising to guarantee his dominions, +and to give him support if attacked, he may be willing to venture +into an alliance with us; and his doing so would, alike, help us in +keeping the Nizam to his engagements, and deter the Mahrattas from +moving. + +"This is the mission that I intend to confide to you. I believe +that it could not be in better hands. If you will call, tomorrow +afternoon, your written instructions and powers to act for me, and +to enter into engagements in my name, will be ready for you; and I +should wish you to start the next morning. You will have an escort +of twenty troopers. These Indian princes have little respect for +persons who travel unattended. + +"You will understand that the instructions recite the maximum that +you are authorized to offer to the rajah. If he will be satisfied +with less you will, of course, grant as little as you can; if he +demands more, you must refer the matter to me. At any rate, so long +as you are negotiating, he will take no active steps against us; +though I have learned that Bajee Rao has already been at work, +trying to persuade him to join himself and Tippoo against us. Were +such a treaty concluded, we could no longer hope to retain the +Nizam; and indeed, should find it difficult to contend against so +powerful a confederacy. At any rate, if the rajah will not join us, +you must endeavour at least to secure his neutrality. + +"The day after tomorrow you will start. I will have a route map +prepared for you. The distance to Nagpore is about eight hundred +miles, and you will get there in four weeks, travelling thirty +miles a day. I have given orders, today, for one of the Company's +ships of war to take you and your escort to the mouth of the +Ganjam; and express messengers have already started, with orders to +the commandant to provide waggons to carry your tent, equipage and +stores. You should, if the winds are favourable, reach there in +four or five days' time." + +"The carts will delay us, sir, and without them we might make forty +miles a day, after we have landed; for the horses of this country +have great endurance." + +"A few days will make no great difference. There are no towns of +any importance on the road to Nagpore, and you would have to put up +at wretched khans, and would be considered as worthy of little +consideration; whereas I wish you to travel in a style suitable for +my agent, and to impress the native mind with your importance. + +"Have you horses?" + +"I have but one, sir, and a pony for my servant." + +"You must purchase another, and a good one, with showy equipments. +You will, of course, charge that and all other expenses, and your +appointment will be a thousand rupees a month. I have no doubt the +rajah will lodge you handsomely. Should he not do so, you had best +encamp outside the town. Do not put up with any inferior lodging." + +"Very well, sir; I shall endeavour to carry out your orders, to the +letter." + +Harry was fortunate in being able to purchase an excellent horse +and, in the afternoon, received his letters of instruction. On the +following day he embarked in a twelve-gun sloop, with twenty +troopers under the command of a native officer. The wind was +favourable and, in four days, they arrived at the mouth of the +Ganjam. + +A large native barge came out to meet them. The horses and the +stores which Harry had purchased, together with some boxes with +presents for the rajah, were transferred to her; and two of the +ship's boats took the barge in tow to the shore. The commandant of +the small garrison there informed Harry that the bullock carts had +already gone on to a village, thirty miles away; and that he would +find all in readiness for him, on his arrival. + +Without waiting an hour he started with his escort and, half a mile +from the village, found the camp already pitched. It consisted of +one large and handsome tent, such as those used by high officials, +and two smaller ones for the escort. He had engaged at Calcutta a +good cook, and this man at once began to light fires, and prepare a +meal from the stores Harry had brought with him. + +The tent was handsomely furnished. A large carpet covered the +ground. There was a bed, four large chairs, and a table; while +between the outer and inner walls of the tent was a bath. As soon +as they halted, one of the troopers rode into the village and +purchased fowls, rice, ghee, and condiments for the use of the +escort, who were all Mahommedans. + +Harry found, to his satisfaction, that another set of waggons had +started that morning for the next halting place; and that he would +find everything ready for him there. This was a great satisfaction, +for he had feared that the work of taking down and packing the +tents would delay his start in the morning, and that at the end of +the day's ride he would have to wait some hours before the tents +came up; whereas by the system of double carriage, he would not be +delayed. + +The head man told him that his party would start in the morning, as +soon as the cart could be packed; that fresh bullocks would be +hired at the village where he would halt, and would travel all +night, so as to be in readiness for him when he had accomplished +another stage; and that this process would be continued until they +reached Nagpore. + + + +Chapter 9: A Popular Tumult. + + +The journey was performed without incident. Harry enjoyed it much, +for this luxurious method of travelling was quite new to him and, +three weeks after leaving the coast, they arrived at Nagpore. On +the previous day the native officer had been sent on, beforehand, +to inform the rajah of the arrival of a high officer of the +Governor General's; and had taken on a letter from Lord Mornington, +accrediting Harry to act in his name. Accordingly, when the party +arrived within a mile of the town, they were met by two officers of +the rajah; who welcomed him in his name, and said that a residence +had been prepared for his use and that of the escort. They were +surprised at Harry's perfect knowledge of their language for, +hitherto, British agents who had come to Nagpore had had but very +slight acquaintance with it, and had had to carry on their +conversation by means of an interpreter. + +The town was large and straggling and composed, for the most part, +of native huts built of mud. There were, however, a few brick +houses, the property of flourishing traders. The palace was a large +square edifice, without any architectural adornments. Trees grew +everywhere in the streets and, in the distance, the town had the +appearance of a forest. + +Harry was conducted to one of the largest brick houses in the town. +A host of sweepers had been at work, carpets were laid down, and +furniture placed in the principal rooms. He had no doubt that it +had been requisitioned from its owner by the rajah for him, and the +furniture supplied from the palace. The principal rooms were on the +upper floor, and there was ample accommodation for the escort +below. + +Harry requested the officers to ascertain when the rajah would be +ready to receive a visit from him, and they returned with word that +he would receive him, in private audience, at eight o'clock that +evening. Accordingly at that hour, followed by four of his +troopers, he rode to the palace. A guard of honour was drawn up at +the entrance, and saluted as he passed in. The entrance hall and +staircase were lined by attendants, and all bowed profoundly as he +passed. He was conducted to a large audience chamber, where the +rajah, attended by his principal officers, was seated. + +The conversation was of the usual ceremonial kind, the prince +expressing his satisfaction that the Governor General should have +sent one of his officers to confer with him, and assuring Harry of +his goodwill and friendship towards the English; while Harry, on +his part, expressed the strong desire of Lord Mornington that the +relations between him and the rajah should be continued unbroken, +and that nothing should ever occur to disturb their amity. The +presents sent by the Governor General were then brought in and +displayed, and appeared to give much satisfaction to the chief. + +After the durbar was over, the latter told Harry that he would +receive him, privately, at ten o'clock next morning. On arriving at +that time, he was shown into the prince's private apartment, and +there explained to him the Governor General's desire that he should +join the confederacy between the Nizam and the English. + +"I have no quarrel with Tippoo," the rajah said. "At present, none +can say how the affair will end. All say that the Peishwa has +agreed to assist Tippoo. He is a match, and more, for the Nizam; +while we know not whether the English company, or Tippoo, is the +strongest. Should I remain neutral, the Peishwa and Tippoo might +eat me up." + +"That is true, Rajah; but you must remember that, in the last war, +the English showed that they were much stronger than Tippoo; and he +was glad to make peace with them, by giving up nearly half his +territories. We are much stronger now. Ships arrive each day with +more and more troops and, believe me, Tippoo will assuredly be +unable to stand against the English power, even if he were backed +up by the whole strength of Poona. + +"Of course, we know that messages have been sent to you by Tippoo, +and that he has promised you a large slice of the Nizam's +dominions, if you will invade them, and so prevent him from aiding +the English." + +Harry saw, by the change in the prince's countenance, that he was +surprised to find that his negotiations with Tippoo were known to +the English Government. He replied, however: + +"It is true that Tippoo has sent to me, but I have given him no +answer. The matter is too important to be settled in a hurry. +Certainly, Tippoo's offers were very advantageous." + +"I can understand that they were tempting, Rajah; yet they entailed +a war against the English and the Nizam, when they had finished +with Tippoo. Instead of gaining territory, you would find that much +of yours would be lost. + +"But undoubtedly, were you to join us, the Governor General would +show that he was not unthankful for the service, and your +assistance would be handsomely recompensed." + +"What does the Governor General offer?" + +"He is desirous of knowing what your own views are, Rajah; and he +will assuredly meet them, if possible." + +"I have not thought of it, yet," the prince said. "I must talk the +matter over with my councillors. We are good friends with the +Peishwa, also with the Nizam, and with Tippoo. We know that the +English are a great people; but we have had nothing to do with +them, save that complimentary messages have been exchanged. +Therefore it is not a matter upon which one can come to any hasty +decision." + +"The Governor General would wish you to think the matter over well, +before deciding, Rajah; and indeed, there is no occasion for undue +haste, seeing that the English army is still lying near Madras, and +is not yet ready to advance. Therefore I will leave the matter for +the present; believing that, in your wisdom, you will be able to +see how matters are likely to go; and whether the English Company, +or Tippoo, are likely to be your best friends." + +It was nearly a fortnight before Harry heard again from the rajah. +The latter had returned his visit, and sent over presents of +sweetmeats and food to his guests. At the end of that time he came +in, one evening, with only two attendants. + +"I have come to speak to you on this matter, privately," he said. +"My ministers are altogether divided in opinion. Some say we should +fight against Tippoo, who is a cruel and implacable foe, and who +has slaughtered all the Hindus in his territory who refused to +embrace his religion. Others say it is better to be friends with +him, for it seems that these white men intend to eat up all India. +Already they have taken the Carnatic and Bengal, now they want to +take Mysore. What will they take next? + +"For myself, I wish well to the English. Though there are few of +them, they are brave and strong; but my council know of the offer +that Tippoo has made us and, unless I can show them that the +English are also ready to give us material advantages, I shall not +be able to persuade my chiefs that our interest must lie in an +alliance with them." + +"That is so, Rajah, and if you will inform me what are your +expectations, I will see how far they tally with those which the +Governor General has authorized me to offer." + +"I am not greedy," the prince said. "I wish only to have what is +fair and just. I think that our aid is worth two crores of rupees +(200,000 pounds) and that the Company should put me in possession +of the lands of Purseram Bhow, together with the land that lies +between us and Malwan, including the territories of the Rajah of +Bhopal." + +"Your demand," Harry said gravely, "is so far beyond what I was +authorized to offer you, that I fear it is altogether useless for +me to submit it to the Governor General. He would, I am sure, +consider that, in naming such terms, you had resolved to make +acceptance impossible." + +"That is by no means my intention," the Rajah said. "Nothing could +be further from my thoughts; and in order to secure an alliance +that, I believe, would be advantageous, I might be able to make +some slight concession." + +"I will send off a messenger, then, submitting your offer and +asking for instructions, and requesting that I may be allowed to +meet you, by further concessions on my part; but I fear that, +strained as the English treasury is by the preparations for the war +against Tippoo, it would be impossible for the Company to pay the +sum you name; nor do I think that they would be disposed to +guarantee you the territory of Bhopal, seeing that we have no +quarrel with the rajah of that country. + +"No doubt, they might be willing to grant you a portion of the +territories of Mysore, lying on the other side of the Godavery, +which would be as valuable as Bhopal." + +As the rajah, himself, was still uncertain as to which side it +would be most advantageous to take; and as he thought that the +campaign against Tippoo would last for many months; he offered no +objection to Harry's proposal. The latter sent off two troopers, +the next day, with a letter to Lord Mornington saying that as the +rajah's demands were, he knew, altogether out of the question, he +had sent them to him simply to gain time; hoping that, before the +answer arrived, the army would have gained such successes over +Tippoo as would induce the prince to greatly modify his terms. The +troopers were charged not to use undue haste, but to travel +quietly, at a rate not exceeding twenty miles a day. + +Two months passed. The rajah was in no hurry, for the two parties +among his councillors were so evenly divided that he was by no +means sure that, even if he wished it, he could put his army in +motion, in support of either the English or Tippoo; and in the next +place, he believed that the latter would win, and was reluctant in +the extreme to take any step that would draw down upon him the +vengeance of the Lord of Mysore. He occasionally saw Harry and, +although he expressed his anxiety for the return of the messengers, +Harry could see that this feeling was only feigned, and that at +heart he was not sorry that he was not yet called upon to decide. + +At the end of a month, Harry had received a letter from the +Governor General, brought by a messenger in the disguise of a +peasant. It only said: + +"March 6th, 1799. + +"The army has left Vellore. On the 11th the Nizam's contingent also +marched, as has that from Bombay. By the 1st of this month all +should have reached the plateau--the Bombay army at Sedaseer, +forty-five miles west of Seringapatam; and the main army about +eighty miles east of that town. By the end of the month, both +should be before Tippoo's capital. Siege will probably occupy a +month. + +"Even if Berar decides against us, its army cannot arrive in time +to aid Tippoo. Therefore, if you can extend the negotiations for a +month after you receive this, your mission will have been +fulfilled." + +This messenger had, of course, been sent off before the arrival of +the troopers in Calcutta and, if Lord Mornington's calculations +were correct, Seringapatam would be invested before they could +return. Three days later, indeed, a report reached Nagpore that +Tippoo had fallen upon the advance guard of the Bombay army, and +had been repulsed; and on the 27th he had attacked General Harris, +and had again been defeated; and that on the 28th the main army had +forded the Cauvery, and had marched to Sosilly. + +This news caused great excitement in the town, although +Seringapatam was generally supposed to be impregnable and, as the +English had failed to take it during the last war, it was believed +that, after another futile siege, they would be forced to fall back +again from want of food, as they did upon the previous occasion. + +The rajah, like the majority, believed that Seringapatam could defy +any assault; and that, surrounded as the British army would be by +the Mysore cavalry, they would very speedily be forced to retire; +and that, although Tippoo might have yielded to the wishes of his +general, and attempted to check the advance, it could have been +with only a portion of his army. + +Including the contingent furnished by the Nizam, the Bombay army +amounted to forty-three thousand men. Tippoo was credited with +having at least twice that force, and his uniform successes against +his neighbours had created a belief that he was invincible. The +rajah, therefore, was well content to let matters rest, until more +decisive news reached him. + +It was on the 7th of April that the messengers returned, with a +letter: + +"We no longer want active assistance from Berar. The army is within +striking distance of Seringapatam, and a few thousand native horse, +one way or another, will make but little difference. You have done +very well in gaining two months, by referring the matter to me. The +rajah's demands are, of course, ridiculous. He is evidently playing +a double part and, if we were defeated tomorrow, would join Tippoo +and attack the Nizam. You can still, however, offer him five lakhs +of rupees; but do not guarantee him any additional territory. + +"The Peishwa is acting in precisely the same way. The army that was +to come to our assistance has not yet moved; and he, like Berar, is +simply awaiting events at Seringapatam." + +The rajah came in that evening. + +"I hear that your messengers have returned, sir." + +"Yes; I am sorry to say that the Governor General considers your +demands are altogether excessive. The treasury is almost empty and, +were he to guarantee you an extension of your dominions, it would +bring on a war with the Peishwa and the Rajah of Bhopal; but he is +willing to pay five lakhs of rupees, to cover the maintenance of +your troops while in the field." + +The rajah flushed with anger. + +"It is altogether insufficient," he said. + +"I do not say that is the final offer, Rajah; that is the offer I +am authorized to make, in the first place. Possibly, if you are +willing to make concessions of a reasonable kind, I may be able to +meet you--and you must remember that the friendship of the Company +is of no slight advantage, and would assuredly be of infinite value +to you, were your territory invaded by Scindia and the Peishwa. +These may, at any moment, make up their differences. Purseram Bhow +may again become the commander of the Peishwa's army and, after the +manner in which your troops have, for the last two or three years, +raided his jagheer, he would be your bitterest enemy." + +Harry saw that this consideration made a powerful impression upon +the rajah, and the latter said: + +"I must think these matters over. The sum that you offer is +altogether insufficient, and cannot be entertained for a moment. +However, there is time for reflection." + +During the next four weeks, Harry saw the rajah occasionally; but +the latter made no attempt to talk business. He was evidently +undecided, in his mind, as to the best course he should take. He +feared Tippoo more than he feared the English, and he still +believed that the latter would assuredly fail in capturing +Seringapatam. Tippoo's offers, too, had been considerably higher +than those of Calcutta, as he had promised him a large slice of the +Nizam's dominions for his assistance. He had therefore determined +to reject the English offer, and to march into the Nizam's country, +as soon as he heard that the besieging army had fallen back. + +Harry's suspicions that this was the case were, to a certain +extent, confirmed by the fact that bodies of armed men began to +arrive, in considerable numbers. He felt that his own position was +beginning to be precarious, and the native officer commanding his +escort brought in almost hourly reports of what was passing in the +city. The population was a mixed one, and nearly divided between +Hindus and Mahommedans. The latter naturally sympathized altogether +with Tippoo, while the former were in favour of taking no part on +either side. + +So matters continued until the 10th of May, when a horseman rode +into the town, with the news that Seringapatam had been captured by +the British, and that Tippoo himself was killed. A feeling akin to +stupefaction was excited by the news; and it seemed, at first, that +it must be false, for it was incredible that Tippoo, with so strong +an army, should have been unable to defend the fortress that, as +was believed, could withstand any attack, however formidable, for +four months. + +[Illustration: As he rode through the streets he saw . . . how +fierce a feeling of resentment had been excited by the news.] + +The rajah sent at once, to ask Harry to visit him. As he rode +through the streets he saw, by the scowling faces of the Mahommedan +soldiers, how fierce a feeling of resentment had been excited by +the news that the native officer had brought in, a few minutes +before. The rajah was deeply agitated. + +"Have you heard the news, sahib?" + +"I have, Rajah." + +"And do you think it possible?" + +"Perfectly; indeed, I have been expecting it for some days, but I +supposed the English general needed time to bring in provisions +from the country round, to form his plans, and construct his +batteries." + +"To me it is astounding!" the rajah said, walking up and down the +room. + +"Of course," Harry said, "the proposal that I made to you cannot +now be carried out; and I do not feel myself justified, under the +changed position of things, in continuing the negotiations." + +"I always intended to help the English," the rajah went on. + +"No doubt, Rajah. I have noticed, for some time, that you have been +gathering a large force here; but you have given me no indication +for what purpose it was intended." + +"It was intended, of course, for service with the English," the +rajah said, "and it would have been set in motion, as soon as the +negotiations were completed." + +"At any rate, Rajah, in spite of the temptations offered you by +Tippoo, you have remained neutral. This will be considered in your +favour, and I can assure you that there will be no breach in the +friendship between yourself and the English; matters will merely +remain as they were, before this war commenced." + +"Except that the Nizam will become more powerful than before," the +rajah said. + +"That will no doubt be so, for he will certainly take a +considerable share of Tippoo's dominions. But that need not trouble +you. I know the desire of the Governor General has always been for +peace. He was driven into this war, by the failure of Tippoo to +carry out his undertaking to release all European prisoners in his +hands, and also by the great preparations he was making to regain +territory that he had lost. But it cannot be to the interest of the +Company that the Nizam should use his increased power to be a +scourge to his neighbours; and I can promise you that any wanton +aggression, on his part, will be regarded with displeasure, and +probably lead to their interference in your behalf. + +"Now, Rajah, I must remind you that I am here as your guest, and I +rely upon you to protect me. As I came through the streets, the +attitude of the Mahommedan soldiers was very threatening; and I +should not be surprised if they attempted to attack the house. I +need not say that any outrage upon the escort of a British agent +would be tremendously avenged; and that you would be more easily +forgiven, had you taken the part of Tippoo, than if you allow me +and my escort to be massacred." + +"I will take immediate steps for your safety and, should any +attempt be made, I shall come with my household guards to your +assistance. A squadron of them shall ride back with you, now, to +prevent any insult being offered to you in the streets." + +"I will relieve you of my presence, tonight," Harry said. "I do not +wish to be an object of strife between you and your people, and +will therefore take my farewell of you, at once. I shall have +pleasure in informing the Governor General of the steps that you +have taken to provide for my safety." + +"And give him the assurance that my disposition is wholly friendly, +and that I rely on nothing so much as to secure his friendship, and +to remain on the most amicable terms with him." + +Harry had no doubt that the assurance was given in earnest. The +fall of Seringapatam, and the death of Tippoo, had been a terrible +shock to the rajah; and even the fact that he had missed his +opportunity of allying himself with the English, was as nothing to +the thought of what would have happened had he declared for Tippoo. + +The rajah at once gave orders for a squadron of his horse to mount, +and continued his conversation with Harry until they were ready in +the courtyard. Then, bidding adieu to the prince, the latter +mounted, and was escorted through the streets by the cavalry guard. + +But although their presence prevented any attack being made on him, +the lower class groaned and yelled, and he had no doubt that, had +it not been for his escort, he would have been murdered on his way +back. + +Directly he arrived he called the troopers to arms, and told them +to barricade the gates, and to be ready to take post at the +windows, in case of assault. Looking out, he saw that the rajah's +men had taken up their position in front of the house. + +A great crowd soon began to gather there. Most of the men were +evidently soldiers, and had arms in their hands. Loud shouts were +raised, and it was not long before a musket was discharged, quickly +followed by others. The native officer in charge of the guard +ordered the soldiers to seize those who fired but, as his men +pressed their horses forward, the crowd closed in upon them, +breaking their ranks and rendering them powerless. + +While this had been going on, the men of Harry's escort were hard +at work in getting up the paving stones of the yard, and piling +them against the gate. The lower windows were all barred and, as +there was no entrance except by the front gate, it was felt that +they could hold the house for some time. + +As soon as the guard were swept away, a portion of the crowd +attacked the gate with showers of stones, while a heavy musketry +fire was opened at every window. So heavy was this that Harry would +not allow the troopers to show themselves there, but posted them +behind the barricades of stone against the gates so that, when +these yielded, they might be able to open fire whilst showing only +their heads over the top line of stones. + +Harry regretted, now, that he had not, when he returned from the +rajah, at once ordered his men to mount and cut their way through +the mob. A few at least might have escaped though, doubtless, they +would have been pursued by the irregular cavalry. As it was he felt +that, although they might sell their lives dearly, they must be +destroyed to a man, unless the rajah sent assistance to them. That +he would endeavour to do so he felt sure, for the massacre of a +British envoy, and his escort, was certain to bring the English +troops to Nagpore, sooner or later; and no assurances that the +rajah had done all in his power to save them would be accepted as +sufficient. + +The house stood in a garden, which extended some distance behind +it; and it was here that the horses were picketed. The front gate +was a very strong one, and was certain to resist all attacks, for +some time. + +Harry called off half his men, and set them to work at the wall at +the end of the garden, which was only constructed of dry mud; +directing them to make a hole large enough for a horse to pass +through. At this side all was quiet, the people in the native +houses there having gone round to the front, to watch what was +doing. Harry stood there for a few minutes, watching the men at +work, and saw with satisfaction their heavy tulwars rapidly cutting +through the soft wall. He told them that, when they had finished, +four of them were to remain to guard the hole, in case any might +try to force their way in; and the rest were to return, to aid +their comrades at the gate. + +He had no great fear that the attempt would be made to enter in +that direction, for the windows in the back of the house were, like +those in front, large; and anyone attempting to climb the walls and +enter the garden would be liable to be shot down from the windows, +as they could not be covered, as were those on the other side, by a +fire kept up from the houses outside. The entrance into the garden +from the house was made by a small door, at the bottom of a +staircase leading from what had been the zenana, for the gardens +were always considered the special domain of the ladies. There was +another small door for the servants' offices, used by the men who, +early in the morning, went in to keep the garden in order. + +When Harry rejoined the party in front, he found that the gates +were yielding. The lower portion had been almost chopped away; but +here the wall of stones prevented an entrance, and the men with +their axes could scarcely reach to touch the upper half. Presently, +however, the hinges of the upper end of one of the half doors +yielded to the weight. A great shout arose from the mob; and the +musketry, hitherto directed against the windows, was now +concentrated on the opening. + +But it was no longer one sided. The troopers, glad that the time +for inaction had passed, returned the fire with vigour. They had +shifted the upper line of stones, so that there was room between +each for a musket barrel and, lying in shelter, they were enabled +to take deliberate aim at their assailants. At every shot a man +dropped, and the crowd opened speedily, and cleared away from the +line of fire. + +There was a pause of some minutes, and then a strong party of +soldiers rushed forward, and began to try to pull down the barrier; +a number of others opening fire over their heads, so as to prevent +the defenders from standing up to fire down into them. It was +evident that, ere long, a slope would be formed outside by which an +assault could be made. + +That his men would for some time repel any attack, Harry thought +certain; but sooner or later it would succeed, and there would then +be no time to retire. He therefore sent a man back, to see if the +hole in the wall was large enough; and he returned directly, saying +that the men there had just concluded their work, and that six of +them were coming back. + +Harry now gave orders, to the native officer who was standing +beside him, to order these men to lead the horses through the +opening. When he had been gone a minute or two, he sent all the +men, except four, to follow the example of their comrades; while +those left with him redoubled their fire, so that their assailants +should not know that any of the defenders had been withdrawn. + +It was not long before a trooper ran back, with the word that all +the horses had been taken through. The news came just in time, for +so much of the barricade had been pulled down that it could now be +climbed. Harry therefore gave the word and, with the last of the +defenders, went off at a run. + +The troop was gathered in the deserted lane at the bottom of the +garden and, on Harry's arrival, the men sprung into the saddles and +galloped off. The rattle of musketry was now very heavy, but it +suddenly stopped and, a moment later, shouts and yells told that +the breach had been carried, and the yard found to be deserted. + +"They will search the house, first," Harry said to the native +officer, "and they will be cautious about it, as they will think +that at any moment they may come upon us, and will be sure that +they would meet with a desperate resistance. I expect that it will +be ten minutes before they discover how we have slipped through +their hands." + +They made a long detour, and then approached the palace from the +other side; Harry having determined to place himself under the +protection of the rajah, for he did not think it possible that they +could escape by hard riding, as they might be pursued by the whole +of the cavalry. Just as they were approaching it, they heard a +fresh outbreak of firing, the musketry being mingled with the crack +of field guns. + +"The rajah has gone out to our rescue," Harry said. "He would have +been too late, if we had stopped there; however, we can rely upon +him now." + +Five minutes later, they rode into the courtyard of the palace. It +was almost deserted, but one of the officials came out and, bowing +deeply to Harry, said: + +"The rajah himself has gone out, with the household troops and a +battery of artillery, to put down the tumult. He is furious that +his guests should have been attacked." + +The firing presently ceased and, a quarter of an hour later, the +rajah rode in. A messenger had been despatched, at once, to inform +him that the British officer, with his escort, had arrived at the +palace. Harry and his men had dismounted, and were still standing +by their horses. + +The rajah sprang from his saddle as he rode up. + +"The gods be thanked that I see you safely here, my friend!" he +said. "When I arrived at your house, I feared that all was over, +for these rebels had gained possession. You must not blame me for +not arriving sooner. When the firing was heard, I feared that the +rabble of the town, aided perhaps by many of my soldiers, were +attacking you; although, until the officer who commanded the guard +I had placed there returned, I did not dream how serious the +business was. Then I got my soldiers together; but this occupied +some time, as many of them were in the town. However, as soon as a +squadron of horse was collected, and a couple of hundred infantry, +together with four guns of a battery, I headed them myself and, on +arriving, opened fire upon the mob; who speedily scattered, some +fifty or sixty of them being killed. + +"Then I entered the house, expecting to find only your dead bodies, +but there were no signs of strife. I questioned some prisoners we +had taken inside; and these said that, just before I came up, a +hole had been discovered in the garden wall, and it was believed +that you had all escaped through that. I was about to ride, with +all speed, to prevent any pursuit being taken up; when a messenger +arrived with the welcome news that you had just entered the +palace." + +"I thank you heartily, Rajah, for having so promptly come to my +aid; though assuredly you would have arrived too late to save us, +had we not, as soon as the fighting began, set to work to prepare a +means of escape. Once we got out, we were sure that you would +protect us, and therefore rode here and awaited your return." + +"'Tis well, indeed, that you thought of that plan, sahib; for I +would not, for half my dominions, that a hair of your head should +have been hurt, while you were here as my guest." + +"It has all ended fortunately, Rajah; and now, what would you +recommend me to do?" + +"You had best stay here, until nightfall. I will ride, now, to the +camps of my men, to reproach them for their conduct; and to ask if +they want to bring the army that has just captured Seringapatam +down upon us. When it is dark, I will myself accompany you, with my +household cavalry, until you are miles away. + +"I pray you to report to the Governor General how grieved I am that +evil-disposed persons should have raised a riot, with the intention +of killing you; and assure him that I did all in my power to save +you, and shall, if they can be discovered, punish those concerned +in the matter." + +"I shall assuredly report very favourably of your conduct, +Rajah--which will, I have no doubt, be warmly appreciated--and +shall let the Governor General know that, from the time of my +arrival here, I always have been treated with the greatest courtesy +and attention by you." + +Leaving the infantry and artillery, with their guns, in front of +the palace, lest any attack should be made upon it; the rajah rode +off with his cavalry and returned, two hours later, with the news +that all was quiet, and that the troops had returned to their duty. + +As soon as it was dark, the party started. The rajah rode at the +head of his cavalry; Harry, at his request, taking his place with +his own escort in the centre of it, so that his presence among them +should not be suspected. + +"It is as well," the rajah said, "that the news that you have left +should not be known till tomorrow morning; for although the troops +would, I have no doubt, be obedient to my orders, in a town like +this there are many budmashes; who might, if they knew that you had +started, ride in pursuit, with the intention of attacking you after +I had left you." + +Once out of the town they proceeded at a rapid pace, which they +maintained until twenty miles away from Nagpore. The rajah then +returned, with the main body of his cavalry; ordering a native +officer and thirty men to escort Harry, until he arrived at the +frontier. + +There was, however, little occasion for this addition to Harry's +force. The news of the fall of Seringapatam had spread like +wildfire, and at each village through which they passed, and at +those in which they halted for the night, the inhabitants saluted +Harry with the deepest respect; and would willingly have supplied +him and his escort with provisions, without payment, had he not +insisted upon their receiving fair value for them. + +At the frontier the rajah's troop turned back, and Harry continued +his journey, reaching Calcutta early in June. + +When he arrived there, he was well received by the Governor +General, who told him that he had rendered a great service, by so +delaying the negotiations that the Rajah of Berar had remained +neutral during the war with Tippoo; and that he would probably soon +require his services again. + +A descendant of the Rajah of Mysore, whose government Hyder Ali had +usurped, was released from captivity and raised to the musnud. +Nearly half the revenue of the country was assigned to him. A large +sum was set aside for the maintenance of the families of Hyder and +Tippoo, and the remaining territory was divided between the Company +and the Nizam. + +A portion was set aside as the share of the Peishwa, although he +had not fulfilled his engagement in any way; but it was to be given +only on the condition that he signed a treaty of alliance with the +English, similar to that entered into by the Nizam. The Peishwa, +however, would not consent to do this; and the territory set aside +for him was, consequently, divided between the Company and the +Nizam. + +Civil war was raging in the Deccan. The widows of Mahdoo Rao had +been joined by a large force, and were plundering Scindia's +villages; while Jeswunt Holkar was also ravaging the country. +Scindia found that it was necessary to appoint Balloba, who had +been for some years in captivity, to the post of his chief minister +and, through him, a treaty was made with the widows of Mahdoo, and +the trouble in that direction ceased. + +The Rajah of Kolapoore was at war with the Peishwa; and the troops +of Purseram Bhow, and those of Rastia, were both defeated. Scindia +and the Peishwa now sent an army of thirty thousand horse and six +thousand infantry against Kolapoore; but Purseram, who was in +command, was defeated and fell, mortally wounded. Another army +joined the defeated force, and invested Kolapoore. + +On the 13th of March, 1800, Nana Furnuwees died; and affairs in the +Mahratta country, that had been to some extent kept in order by his +wisdom and moderation, now became worse than ever. A dispute at +once took place between the Peishwa and Scindia, each being +desirous of obtaining the treasures Nana was supposed to possess. +Scindia seized his jagheer. Ghatgay was released, and obtained his +former influence over Scindia; who seized Balloba and threw him +into prison, where he died. + +The Peishwa, on his part, was determined to destroy all the friends +of Nana and, inviting most of the principal men to the palace, he +seized and sent them all, prisoners, to hill forts. He now, with +Scindia, determined to destroy the family and adherents of Purseram +Bhow. Appa Sahib, Purseram's son, had succeeded him in the command +of the army besieging Kolapoore and, receiving intelligence of the +conspiracy against him, raised the siege and retired to the +Carnatic, and Scindia plundered the whole of Purseram's villages. + +A fierce chief in Dhoondia invaded the newly-acquired territories +of the British, and Major General Wellesley was sent against him, +and totally routed his party. + +Jeswunt Holkar was now becoming extremely dangerous; and Scindia +was at last obliged to march away, with his army, to defend his own +dominions. He left behind him five battalions of regular infantry, +and ten thousand horse and, before he set out, compelled the +Peishwa to give him gold to the amount of forty-seven lakhs of +rupees. + +On his way through Malwan, he sent seven of his regular battalions +to protect his capital. One column, under Captain Mackintyre, was +intercepted on the way, and all killed or made prisoners. Holkar +then fell upon the other party, which he also overpowered and +defeated. He next attacked Scindia's artillery on the march; but +Major Brownrigg, an officer in the latter's service, with four +battalions, repulsed his assailants. + +The Peishwa, while this was going on, was mercilessly murdering or +imprisoning those whom he considered his enemies; and ordered +Wittoojee Holkar, the brother of Jeswunt, to be trampled to death +by an elephant. + +Scindia having sent for Ghatgay to rejoin him, Jeswunt advanced to +meet him, and was signally defeated. He speedily gathered a fresh +force, and wasted not only Scindia's country but that of the +Peishwa; and finally a great battle was fought, near Poona, in +which Holkar, thanks to his fourteen regular battalions, officered +by Englishmen, won a complete victory over the Peishwa's force and +that left behind by Scindia. The Peishwa was forced to fly, and +take refuge at Bassein, where he entered into negotiations for +British support. + + + +Chapter 10: A Mission By Sea. + + +A Fortnight after Harry's return, he was again sent for by Lord +Mornington. + +"Captain Lindsay, I am about to employ you on a mission of a +somewhat delicate character. There have been many complaints that +ships trading among the islands have been attacked and, in some +cases, captured and the crews massacred, by Malays. We recently +received a communication from a native chief, or rajah, who owns +the southern point of the Malay Peninsula. He says that the Dutch, +in Java, greatly interfere with his trade; as all vessels trading +in the East are bound to touch at Batavia, on their way to Europe, +and consequently very few of them visit the Peninsula, as to do so +would greatly lengthen their voyage to Batavia. He asks that we +should make a settlement at the end of the Peninsula, so that our +ships may trade with him; and would be willing to place us in +possession of an island, two or three miles from the extreme +southern portion of his dominions. + +"There can be no doubt that the position would be an extremely +valuable one; lying, as it does, on our trade route to the East. +But it is also certain that a settlement of that kind would be +viewed with extreme jealousy by the Dutch; whose possessions, in +Java and other islands, render them practically masters of the +whole Malay Archipelago. + +"Certainly, at present, our hands are much too full here to permit +of our engaging in any enterprise of this kind but, at the same +time, it is desirable that we should obtain some reliable +information as to the situation there, the power of this rajah, and +the advantages that the island offers in the way of ports, the +salubrity of its climate, and other similar particulars. Its +possession would certainly be desirable, not only as a centre for +future trade with Bankok and the East, but as a port from which our +vessels of war might suppress the piracy that prevails all along +the Malay coast, and in the neighbouring island of Sumatra. Such +information may be extremely useful in the future, and when our +power in this country is consolidated. + +"But this is not the sole object of your mission. You will proceed, +either before or after your visit to this rajah, as we will +determine, to Batavia; bearing a despatch from me to the Dutch +governor, narrating a number of acts of piracy that have taken +place among the islands, and requesting that, as they are the +paramount power in that district, they will take steps, both for +their own sake and ours, to suppress piracy; and offering, on our +part, that two or three of our ships of war shall, if they think it +desirable, aid them in the punishment of the Malays. You will be +accompanied by an interpreter. + +"There are several Malay traders established here; and some of +them, no doubt, speak Hindustani fluently. I will have enquiries +made among them, and will also procure you a Dutch interpreter. + +"I do not propose that you shall go in a trading vessel to Java. +The appearance of such a vessel, off Batavia, would be resented by +the Dutch. Of course, traders do go from here down to the islands, +but only to those not under Dutch power. They used generally to +trade, on their way down, with Burma and Siam; but the Burmese have +shown such hostility to us that it is no longer safe to enter their +rivers, and they have wrested the maritime provinces of Siam, on +this side of the Peninsula, from that power; so that trade there +is, for the present, at an end. I shall therefore send you down in +one of our small sloops. A larger vessel might irritate the Dutch, +and a small one would be sufficient to furnish you with an escort +to this Rajah of Johore--not only for protection, but because the +native potentates have no respect for persons who do not arrive +with some sort of appearance of state. + +"You will, of course, go as high commissioner, with full powers to +represent me. I do not anticipate that you will be able to conclude +any formal treaty with the Rajah of Johore. He will, of course, ask +for an equivalent, either in money or in protection against some +neighbouring rajah. We have no money to spare at present, and +certainly no troops. Your commission therefore will be to +acknowledge his communication, to assure him of our friendship, to +ascertain the suitability of the island that he offers, and to tell +him that, at present, being so fully occupied with wars here, we +are scarcely in a position to extend our responsibility; but that, +when matters are more settled, we shall be prepared to enter into a +treaty with him, to open a trade with his dominions, to pay a fair +sum for the possession of the island, if suitable, and to enter +into a treaty of alliance with him. + +"Of the value of such a settlement there can be no doubt, whatever; +for we may take it that, before very long, some of the Chinese +ports will be open to European traders." + +A week later, Harry embarked on a brig mounting eight guns, and +usually employed in police work along the coast. He was accompanied +by a Dutch interpreter, a Malay trader, Abdool, and four troopers +of the Governor General's bodyguard, in the handsome uniform worn +by that corps. The lieutenant in command of the brig received +Harry, with the usual ceremony, as a Government commissioner. He +himself was at the gangway to meet him, and twelve of the sailors, +with drawn cutlasses, saluted as Harry stepped on to the deck. + +The lieutenant, a young man of about four or five and twenty, +looked surprised when he found that the official, whom he was to +carry down to Java, was apparently younger than himself. + +"I suppose, Captain Fairclough," Harry said with a smile, when they +entered the cabin, "that you expected to see a middle-aged man." + +"Hardly that, Captain Lindsay. I heard that you were a young +officer, who had rendered distinguished services on the Bombay +side, and had just returned from an important mission in the +Deccan; but I own that I had not at all expected to see an officer +younger than myself." + +"I can quite understand that. I have been exceptionally fortunate, +owing to the fact that I speak Mahratti as well as English. Well, I +hope that after your reception we have done with ceremony; and that +you will forget that I am, at present, a civil official with the +temporary rank of commissioner, and regard and treat me as you +might any young officer who had been given a passage in your brig. +I have led a pretty rough life, and hate anything like ceremony. We +may be some weeks on board together, and should have a pleasant +time of it, especially as the whole country is new to me." + +"And to me also," the lieutenant said. "I generally cruise from the +mouth of the Hooghly to Chittagong; and a dreary coast it is, with +its low muddy shores and scores of creeks and streams. In the +sunderbunds there is little to look after, the people are quiet and +very scattered; but farther east they are piratically inclined, and +prey upon the native traders, and we occasionally catch them at it, +and give them a lesson. + +"Well, I shall be very glad to adopt your suggestion, and to drop +all ceremony. I have not often had to carry civil officials in this +craft, she is too small for any such dignified people; but when I +was in the Tigris, we often carried civil and military officials +from Madras, and some of them were unmitigated nuisances--not the +military men, but the civilians. The absurd airs they gave +themselves, as if heaven and earth belonged to them, were +sickening; and they seemed to regard us as dust under their feet. +Whenever we heard that we were to take a member of the Council from +Calcutta to Madras, or the other way, it was regarded as an +infliction of a serious kind." + +"Well, I propose to begin with that, when we are down here +together, we drop titles; you call me Lindsay, and I will call you +Fairclough." + +"With all my heart," the other said. + +"What officers have you?" + +"A junior lieutenant, and two midshipmen. The lieutenant, when I am +alone, always messes with me. We are not so strict, among our small +craft in the Company's service, as they are in the royal navy; and +I think, myself, that it would be ridiculous for me to dine here by +myself; Mr. Hardy, by himself; and the two midshipmen in a separate +mess of their own. That of course they do, for they would not enjoy +their meals with Hardy and myself." + +"I quite agree with you." + +"This is your stateroom." + +"But it is your private cabin, Fairclough, is it not?" + +"Well, yes; but I am accustomed to turn out, whenever there are +passengers." + +"Well, at any rate, I shall feel very much disgusted if you do so +for me. I should be most uncomfortable, so I must insist on you +having your things moved back here. When I tell you that, for +sixteen years, I lived in the house of a small Mahratta cultivator, +you may well imagine that I can make myself perfectly comfortable, +anywhere." + +"It will be quite contrary to the rules of our service," the other +began, hesitatingly. + +"I can't help that," Harry replied. "There are no rules without +exceptions, and mine is an altogether peculiar case. You will +really oblige me, very much, if you will have the change made. + +"I see that you are surprised at what I told you about myself; it +is too long a story to tell you now, but I will, after dinner +today, repeat to you and Hardy some of my experiences; which you +will see have been curious, and account for my having the rank of +captain, and being employed in a responsible position, at my age. + +"I suppose you will soon be getting up anchor?" + +"Yes; the tide will be favourable now, and everything is ready for +a start." + +A few minutes later, the clank of the capstan was heard and, going +on deck, Harry found Lieutenant Hardy preparing to sail. As soon as +the vessel was under way he came aft, and was introduced to Harry. + +The latter had enquired, of the chief of the Governor's staff, what +was customary on these occasions, and whether he was to take on +board a stock of provisions. + +"Not at all," was the reply; "Government makes an allowance for +messing and wine. Sometimes an official will take a dozen or so of +champagne with him, as the allowance, though liberal, would +scarcely cover this; but it is quite sufficient to enable a captain +to keep a good table, and provide port and sherry." + +Harry, seeing that the voyage might be much longer than usual, had +sent on board four dozen of champagne; some of which he thought +might be useful at the table, if the Rajah of Johore came on board +with a number of his chiefs, or if the ship was visited by Dutch +officials. + +The Dutch interpreter was to mess with the petty officers. The +Malay preferred to prepare his victuals for himself. + +The wind was light, and the brig drifted quietly down the river +and, when evening came on, anchored as, on account of the sandbanks +and the lightness of the wind, Fairclough had thought it +unadvisable to continue his voyage at night. As soon as the sails +had been taken in, the two officers went down to the cabin, where +dinner was ready for them. + +It was a pleasant one, for the two naval men were in high spirits +over this change from their ordinary routine, and the prospect of +sailing on a strange voyage. Abdool, as usual, had placed himself +behind his master's chair, but Harry said: + +"I sha'n't want you to wait on me during the voyage, Abdool; the +captain's steward will do that." + +After the meal was over, cheroots lighted, and a decanter of port +placed on the table, Fairclough asked Harry for the story he had +promised him; and the latter accordingly gave them a sketch of his +life and adventures. + +"I no longer wonder, Lindsay, at your having attained the rank of +captain so young. That old nurse of yours must have been a trump, +indeed; but certainly it is wonderful that you should have lived, +first as a peasant and then at the Peishwa's court, so long without +anyone having had a suspicion that you were an Englishman. Fancy +your meddling in politics, being regarded as a friend of the +Peishwa and this minister of his, and being the means of getting +the latter out of prison, and so perhaps averting a war between the +Mahrattas and Bombay! That was a ticklish business, too, at +Nagpore; and you were lucky in coming so well out of it. + +"But after all, I think the most wonderful part is that a boy of +sixteen should have been a shikaree, and killed no end of tigers, +leopards, and bears and, after that, have risen so soon to the rank +of captain in the Company's service. Why, you have seen and done +more than most men double your age!" + +"Yes, I have had great luck, and it is all owing to my old nurse +having taken such pains; first to enable me to pass as a Mahratta, +and in the next place to teach me the English language and English +ways. + +"Well, the story has been an unconscionably long one. I think I +will go on deck and smoke a last cheroot, and then turn in." + +"If you were a new hand from England, I should say that you had +better smoke it here," Fairclough said; "for the mists from the +water and swamps are apt to give fresh hands a touch of fever." + +The time passed pleasantly, as they made direct for the mouth of +the straits between the Malay Peninsula and Sumatra. There was a +light but steady breeze and, on the morning of the eighth day after +sailing, Harry, on going on deck, saw land on the port side. As the +lieutenant, on the evening before, said that they should next day +sight the Great Andaman, he was not surprised. + +On looking at the chart, he said to Fairclough: + +"I should have thought that it would have been shorter to go on the +other side of the islands." + +"It would have been rather shorter; but there are four or five +islands to the north of the Andaman, and another very small one +halfway between it and Negrais, so I preferred going outside. When +we get south of the Little Andaman Island, we shall pass between it +and the Nicobar Islands. I fancy that they, and perhaps the +Andamans, once formed a part of Sumatra. They are scattered almost +in a line from its northern point. The land has probably sunk; and +these islands were, no doubt, the summits of mountains forming part +of the chain that runs through Sumatra. + +"Once through the passage south of Little Andaman, we shall sail +due east for a day or two; and then lay her course nearly +southeast, which will take us right up the straits between Sumatra +and the Malay Peninsula." + +"Are there any islands scattered about there?" + +"There is one nasty little group, called the Arroa Islands, nearly +in mid-channel. I shall take care to pass them in daylight. Farther +down there are several largish islands near the Sumatra coast but, +as the passage is some sixty miles wide, there is little fear of +our running foul of them." + +"Have the Dutch any settlements at Sumatra?" + +"Two or three. Palembang is the principal. It is on a river that +runs down into the Banca Straits. I believe that they have trading +stations at Jambi and Siak." + +A fortnight later the brig anchored off the coast of Singapore. +During the voyage, Harry had had many conversations with the +Malayan interpreter. The latter told him that the chief who had +written might not be in a position to carry out his offer. Not only +were the small Malay states frequently engaged in wars with each +other, but there were constant internal insurrections and +struggles, the various petty chiefs frequently endeavouring to set +up as independent powers. At the present time the tumangong, or +chief justice, had obtained possession of the island of Singapore, +and the adjacent district of the mainland; while other chiefs had +also thrown off their allegiance to the Rajah of Johore, who +himself had usurped the power from the former reigning family. + +"If," he said, "you want only to obtain a place for trade, the +tumangong is no doubt the person from whom you must obtain it; but +if you wanted the whole island, you would have to treat not only +with him but with the rajah as, in case the latter should defeat +and overthrow the tumangong, he certainly would not recognize the +cession of the island to you." + +"Is there a good port?" + +"No; but it is not needed. They do not have hurricanes, here, as +they do in the Bay of Bengal and in the China Seas, and indeed +among the islands; so vessels can anchor off the coast, in safety, +at all times of the year." + +"What is the island like?" + +"It is covered with forest and jungle," the Malay replied. "There +are but few inhabitants, a hundred and fifty or so. Most of these +are my people, but there are a few Chinese and Bugis. The Malays +are not cultivators. They live by piracy, attacking small native +vessels passing through the narrow passages between Singapore and +the mainland. The Chinese cultivate patches of land." + +"Is it fertile?" + +"Very. Rain falls there more than half the days in the year. If the +Chinese had it, they would make a garden of it. It is better, even, +than the land on that part of Sumatra where they produce spices and +grains of all sorts. The Malay Peninsula would be very wealthy, +were it not split up into several kingdoms, that are always at war +with each other. + +"Singapore was a great place, once. Seven hundred years ago it was +the capital of the whole Malay kingdom; but it was taken, a hundred +years afterwards, by the King of Java, and Malacca then became the +Malay capital." + +"The affair does not seem very promising," Harry said, after +repeating to Fairclough what he had heard from the Malay. "From my +experience of the Indian princes, there is very little trust to be +placed in any agreement made with them. They keep it just as long +as it suits them, and then break it; without the slightest sense of +having done anything dishonourable. It seems to me that the +position here is very much like that in the Deccan. Scindia, +Holkar, and the Rajahs of Berar and Kolapoore are practically +independent of the Peishwa, who maintains only a semblance of +authority. From what the interpreter tells me, there seems to be +only a puppet rajah who, today, possesses no authority whatever; +but who, tomorrow, may excite a quarrel among the other chiefs, and +again become their master. + +"I think that, in the first place, I shall have to see this +semi-independent chief, whose possessions Singapore forms part of; +and afterwards the Rajah of Johore, his nominal master. + +"The latter may view the matter in one of two ways. In the first +place, he may consider the island of no importance, whatever; +seeing that, even were he again its master, no revenue could be +obtained from the handful of people living there; and would +therefore be glad to ratify the cession to us, for a small sum. On +the other hand, he may consider that the elevation of the island, +into the position of a great European trading port, would add +greatly to the power and importance of the tumangong, and might +enable him to make himself master of the whole of Johore." + +"It seems a complicated business, certainly," the sailor replied. +"You see, though this rebel chap, having written to Calcutta, may +be trusted to receive you hospitably; there is no saying what the +rajah may think of it." + +"Nor is it clear how I am to get at the rajah," Harry remarked. +"The tumangong would, no doubt, object to my going beyond what he +considers as his territory; as it might seem that, did he let me do +so, he would be recognizing the power of the rajah to interfere in +his business. However, it is certain that I must carry home a clear +report on the situation; and to do that I must, at any rate, +attempt to see the rajah. + +"Of course we must endeavour to learn, from the Malays on the +island, whether Johore still holds any territory running down to +the sea, or whether the coast chiefs have also revolted against +him. In the first case, I will send up a native, to say that I have +a mission from the Governor General of India to visit his court; +but if he is cut off from the sea, I must endeavour to make my way +through, somehow. It would never do to return with only half a +story. I do not suppose the Governor General is at all aware of the +state of things here, or that the chief who communicated with him +is not the acknowledged Rajah of Johore. + +"There can be no doubt that the possession of this island would be +of great value to us, as it would become a centre of trade, not +only with the East, but with all the islands round; except, of +course, those belonging to Holland. Therefore, the first essential +point is to ascertain whether the old rajah is likely to regain his +former authority; and whether, if so, he will recognize, and on +what terms, the cession of the island to us." + +"Well, I am glad, Lindsay, that it is your business and not mine; +for it seems a very difficult affair, and a somewhat dangerous +one." + +Three weeks after leaving Calcutta the brig reached the island and, +at Harry's request, sailed round it, taking soundings very +frequently, in order to obtain knowledge of the depth of the water +and the nature of the sea bottom. Finally they anchored in the +straits between it and the mainland. This varied, in width, from +two miles to a quarter of a mile; and the depth of water, at the +eastern extremity of the straits, was found to be insufficient for +vessels of a large tonnage, though navigable for ordinary native +craft. + +The island itself was some twenty-five miles long and fifteen miles +wide; being, as Fairclough calculated, about a third larger than +the Isle of Wight. No high hills were seen; but the whole island +was undulating, and everywhere covered with forest and jungle. + +Several small Malay canoes had put off to them with fruit; and as, +from what the interpreter had told them of the smallness of the +population, there was clearly no chance of any attack being made on +the brig, they were allowed to come alongside. The supply of fruit +was very welcome, and the interpreter learned something from the +natives as to the state of things on the mainland. + +As to this, however, they appeared to take but little interest. +They admitted that the tumangong was their lord but, as they were +too poor for him to levy any contributions from them, his +mastership was merely a nominal one, and they did not trouble +themselves about him. If he should at any time send an officer and +troops, to exact tribute money, they would simply retire into the +interior, where they could defy pursuit. They had heard reports +that there were wars on the mainland but, beyond the fact that the +rajah possessed very little authority, they were unable to give any +information. They had vaguely heard that some of the chiefs +supported the family of the former rajah. + +On the day after their anchoring, a large canoe put off from the +mainland. In the stern sat two men, whose gay dresses showed them +to be minor chiefs or officials. Harry, who had throughout the +voyage worn only civilian costume of white drill, now put on his +full uniform; as did the sowars of his escort. The ladder was +lowered for the accommodation of the visitors; and these, on +reaching the deck, were received by Fairclough, his officers, and a +guard of honour. The Malay interpreter stood by the captain's side. + +"Why do you come here?" was their first question. + +"We bring a high officer of the Governor General at Calcutta, to +confer with the lord of Singapore," Fairclough answered, through +the interpreter. + +"Our lord thought that it might be so," one of the officials said, +"and therefore sent us off to enquire." + +Fairclough led the Malays to the quarterdeck, where Harry was +standing, with his four troopers as a bodyguard behind him. + +"This is the official whom the Governor General has sent to you." + +The Malays, struck with Harry's uniform, and still more with that +of his guard--all of which were new to them, and impressed them +deeply--salaamed profoundly to him. + +"I have arrived," Harry said, "as the agent of our great governor; +and in answer to a request of your lord, the tumangong, that he +should send an officer of rank here, to treat with him." + +"Seeing this vessel of war," the Malay said, when Harry's speech +had been translated to him, "our lord hoped that it might be so; +and directed us, should this prove correct, to inform you that he +will himself come off to see you, in three days' time. He has heard +of the might of your lord in India, that he has conquered great +kingdoms, that the rule is a wise one, and that the people are well +contented. We love not the Dutch, who are hard masters, and make +the people labour for them; and he desires to be on terms of +friendship with the power which, as he understands, has taken their +strong places in India, so that they have no longer any importance +there." + +"He has done wisely," Harry said, "and I shall be glad to see your +lord, and to tell him what is in the mind of our governor." + +The envoys were then invited to the cabin, where they were offered +refreshments. They ate sparingly, but greatly appreciated the +champagne; and asked, through the interpreter, if they could be +instructed how to make this liquor; and were much disappointed on +learning it could only be made from the juice of the grape, that +grew in a certain land in Europe, and could not be manufactured +elsewhere, though other wines which were equally good could be +made--that as the fruits grown in a hot country like theirs could +not be grown in Europe, where the climate was much colder, so the +grape could not flourish in their hot country. + +Three days later the tumangong came off, in a canoe gaily decorated +by flags, attended by several smaller craft. As he set foot on the +deck, a salute was fired. He appeared much disturbed when the first +gun went off; but the interpreter explained to him that it was a +mark of honour, always granted to native princes of importance. +Seeing that no harm was done by the fire, the Malay approached +Harry, whose escort had been rendered more imposing by a line of +blue jackets, with musket and cutlass, drawn up behind them. + +Harry advanced to meet him, and friendly greetings were exchanged. +He then invited him down into the cabin, where he was accompanied +by one of his chief officers. Harry, the captain, and the +interpreter went down with them. The Malay commenced the +conversation. + +"I hope that you bring a favourable answer to my letter?" + +"The Governor bids me say that he willingly accepts your offer of +friendship, and would readily establish a trading station on the +island of Singapore; but that, being now engaged in a serious war +in India, it is not in his power, at present, to engage in an +alliance that might involve him in war here, since he might be +unable to fulfil his obligations. With us, obligations under a +treaty are regarded as sacred, and to be upheld at all sacrifices. +Later on, when affairs are more settled in India, he will gladly +form an alliance with you. + +"Here is a despatch, in your language, stating his reasons more +fully but, in order to show his friendship, he has sent me down in +this ship of war to explain matters to you, and to assure you that +he appreciates your offer, and will later on accept it; but that he +cannot enter into such a treaty now as, being engaged in war, he +might not be able to protect you from all enemies, should you call +upon him to do so. I am the bearer of several presents from him, +which he has sent as a proof of his friendship towards you." + +He touched a bell and, at the signal, some sailors brought in the +presents; consisting of a handsome double-barrelled gun, a brace of +pistols, some embroidered robes, and some bales of English cloth +and other manufactures; also a dinner service of pottery, an ormulu +clock, and other articles. The rajah, whose face had at first +expressed disappointment, was evidently much pleased with these +presents and, after perusing the letter, expressed himself as well +contented with its terms. + +"I value them all the more," he said, "because they are a proof +that the English do not make treaties, unless able to fulfil the +conditions. This is far better than accepting treaties, and then +withdrawing from them. You can assure the great lord of Calcutta, +although I regret much that he cannot at present form an alliance +with me, that I shall be ready to renew the negotiations with him, +whenever he notifies me that he can do so." + +The champagne was then produced. The tumangong had evidently heard, +from his officers, how delicious was the strange drink, which +bubbled as if it was boiling and was yet quite cold. Two bottles +were put upon the table; and the Malays, after tasting it +cautiously at first, consumed the greater portion--the two officers +only sipping theirs occasionally, and filling up their glasses, so +as to keep the others in countenance. Accustomed to more fiery +beverages, obtained from traders in the Dutch possessions, the +Malays were in no way affected by their potations; although these +evidently impressed them with the superiority of the English over +their Dutch rivals, for the tumangong remarked: + +"Truly the English must be a great people, to make such liquors. +The Dutch sell us fiery drinks, but their flavour is not to be +compared with these. I hope that your lord, when he again sends a +ship down to me, will forward me some of this drink." + +"I have, fortunately, a case of it with me," Harry said. "It +contains two dozen bottles. I will give orders for it to be placed +in your boat." + +He could see, by the Malay's face, that he was greatly gratified, +and he added: + +"I have no doubt, Tumangong, that when I inform the Governor +General that you were pleased with this drink, he will order some +of it to be sent down, when there is an opportunity; so that the +friendship between you and him can be maintained, until the time +comes when he can arrange with you for the concession of a trading +station on the island of Singapore." + +"The offer shall be always open to him; there is no occasion for +haste." + +The conversation continued for some time longer, and then the Malay +and his officers took their places in their canoe and rowed off, +under a salute similar to that which had greeted their arrival. + +"That is quite satisfactory," Harry said to the commander. + +"Yes; there is no doubt that he thought more of your present of +champagne, than of the gifts sent him by the Governor; and your +promise to let him have a consignment, occasionally, will keep him +in good temper. + +"Now, what is your next move?" + +"I think it would be best to finish with the Dutch, first. If there +were any delay in the other matter, they might get news, from +Malacca or some of their trading stations in Sumatra, that the ship +has been here and, in that case, they would guess that we are +thinking of establishing a trading station, and might send and make +their own terms with the tumangong. There can be no doubt that, if +we open a free port here, it will do great damage to them, and +divert a large portion of the eastern trade here; being so much +more handy for all the country craft trading with Siam and China, +besides having the advantage of avoiding the heavy dues demanded by +the Dutch." + +"No doubt that will be the best way," Fairclough said. "We will get +up anchor, tomorrow morning." + +In the course of the afternoon a large canoe came off, loaded with +presents of fresh meat, fruit, and vegetable; sent by the +tumangong, together with some handsomely-mounted krises for Harry +and the officers of the ship. + +They continued their voyage, without incident, to Batavia. Arriving +there, they dropped anchor and saluted the Dutch flag. The salute +was returned from the shore; and, shortly afterwards a large boat, +flying the flag of Holland and carrying several persons, rowed out +to them. + +It was apparent, at once, when they ascended to the deck, that the +visit of the British ship of war was not a welcome one. The +jealousy of the Dutch of any attempt, on our part, to obtain a +footing among the islands was intense; and the opinion on shore, on +seeing the brig, would be that she had come to announce that +possession had been taken of some unoccupied island. Their manner, +therefore, was cold when Harry informed them, through his Dutch +interpreter, that he was the bearer of a despatch to the Dutch +Governor from the Governor General. + +"I may say that it refers," he said, "to the numerous outrages, +committed by the Malays, upon vessels owned by British subjects +trading among the islands; and that he suggests that the Dutch +authorities should join in an attempt to punish these marauders, +from whom they suffer equally with the British." + +"The Governor will receive you, at three o'clock this afternoon. +You will, of course, wish to deliver your despatch personally to +him and, as we shall acquaint him with its import, he will no doubt +be prepared to give you an answer, forthwith." + +Without further words, the officials returned to their boats. + +"They are a surly set of beggars," Fairclough said, as they rowed +off. "I don't think there is much chance of cooperation in that +quarter. Indeed, I am by no means sure that, at heart, they do not +approve of these Malay attacks. At present, they monopolize the +trade in spice. The native craft from all the islands bring their +productions here; and there can be no doubt that the piracies of +the Malays act as a great deterrent, both to the native traders, +and our own from Calcutta and Madras." + +"I think that, very likely, that is so," Harry agreed. "I do not +think that the Governor had any belief that they would cooperate in +the matter, and really only invited them to do so because it would +explain the presence of a ship of war in these waters; so I shall +be in no way concerned, if this part of my business turns out a +failure." + +At the appointed time, the captain's gig was lowered, and Harry and +Fairclough took their places in it. Another boat carried the Dutch +interpreter and the four troopers. They were received, on landing, +by an official and a guard of honour; and were conducted to the +Governor's residence. Another guard of honour was drawn up at the +entrance. They were shown into a large room, where the Governor was +seated, surrounded by the members of his council. + +He rose and advanced a few paces, shook hands with the two +officers, and begged them to be seated, on two chairs next to him. +Harry handed the despatch to him. + +"It is very short, sir," he said, "and perhaps, as you are aware of +its import, you will just glance through it." + +The Governor did so and, afterwards, handed it to one of the +members of the council, and it was passed from hand to hand. + +"I am quite in accord," the Governor said, "with Lord Mornington, +that the attacks of the Malays which we, as well as yourselves, +suffer from are deplorable; and it is greatly to be wished that +they could be suppressed. But I think that Lord Mornington could +hardly have been informed as to the great number of islands +inhabited by the Malays, and the great naval force that would be +required to overawe and punish these freebooters; who are so bold +that they do not hesitate to attack our traders, even when large +ships, and carrying guns for their protection. Nothing short of a +great fleet of cruisers would suffice. + +"In the next place, did we undertake any operations on a large +scale against the Malays throughout the islands, they would unite +against us; and might, in revenge, assail many of our ports, and do +us enormous damage. Even if your fleet performed half the work, it +is we, only, who would be the sufferers. Certainly we have not +sufficient vessels of war to attempt such an operation and, even +were the Governor General of India to send down as many vessels as +we have at our disposal, the force would be altogether inadequate +for such extensive operations. These islands are counted by hundreds +and, on the approach of ships of war, the people would desert their +villages by the seashore and take to the interior--where it would, +in most cases, be impossible to follow them--and all the damage we +could inflict would be to burn their villages, which could be rebuilt +after the ships had sailed away. To exterminate piracy would be the +work, not of months, but of many years. However, I shall consult my +council, and will draft a reply to the despatch, tomorrow. + +"You have had a pleasant voyage down, I hope?" + +"Very much so," Harry replied. "We have had fine weather, and light +breezes." + +The conversation was continued for a few minutes, and then the +little party returned to their boats. + +"There is not much doubt what the reply will be," Fairclough said. + +"No; and on the whole, I don't see that the Governor is to be +blamed; though of course, he has not given us the principal reason, +which is his objection to our flag being seen flying beside the +Dutch among the islands. Still, there is a good deal in what he +says." + +"I think so, too. You see, they are going to send their answer +tomorrow, which may be taken as a proof that they are anxious to +get rid of us, as soon as possible." + + + +Chapter 11: A Prisoner. + + +The next day the Governor himself came off to the brig, and was +received with the usual honours. + +"The council are quite of my opinion," he said to Harry, "as to the +extreme difficulty and cost that an effort to put down piracy among +the islands would involve. Our ships on the station would not be at +all sufficient for such work and, at any rate, it is a step that we +should not venture to engage in, without the assent of the home +government. We shall, of course, write home fully upon the matter, +and shall leave the final decision to them; at the same time +expressing our own views, and giving some idea as to the force that +would have to be employed, the expenditure involved, and the time +required for the operation. + +"This letter contains a reply, as far as we can give it, to the +Governor General's proposals." + +"His lordship will, I am sure, be sorry to hear your views, sir; +but I imagine that he will not hesitate to undertake the work of +punishing, at least, the people of some of the islands where +outrages have taken place, as soon as affairs are sufficiently +settled in India for him to dispense, for a time, with the services +of some of the Company's ships of war." + +As Harry expected, the face of the Dutch Governor showed that this +statement, when translated, was evidently most unpalatable to him. +After a moment's hesitation, however, he said: + +"If Lord Mornington waits until everything is quiet in India, it +will probably be a very long time before he will be able to carry +out the operation you speak of." + +"That may be, sir. I do not know whether you have heard that +Seringapatam has been captured, and that Tippoo, himself, fell in +its defence?" + +A look of amazement, and even of consternation, on the part of the +Dutch officials showed that the news was as unwelcome as it was +unexpected. The loss of their hold in India, by the wonderful +spread of the British power, was an extremely sore point with them. +Nothing would have pleased them better than to have heard that the +power of the latter had been shattered. + +"It is certainly news to us," the Governor said, shortly. "But +there are still other powers in India, that are likely to give at +least as much trouble as Mysore has done." + +"I quite admit that," Harry said, "but have no doubt that we shall +be able to deal with them, as satisfactorily as we have done with +Tippoo; and possibly as quickly." + +"That remains to be seen," the Governor said. + +"Quite so, sir. I have a considerable knowledge of India, and of +its native armies; and I doubt whether any of them are as good +fighters as Tippoo's men were." + +"Was Mysore taken by storm, or by famine?" + +"By storm, after our batteries had opened fire, for a few days." + +[Illustration: 'Well, sir, I will now return to shore,' the Governor] +said. + +"Well, sir, I will now return to shore," the Governor said, +abruptly. "You will please to give the assurances of my high esteem +to Lord Mornington." + +Harry bowed and, without another word, the Dutch officials +descended the accommodation ladder, and returned to shore. When +they were out of hearing, Fairclough burst into a hearty laugh. + +"That was a severe broadside you poured into him, Lindsay. I could +see that they were absolutely flabbergasted, when you told them +about Mysore. Their manner, before that, had been almost insolent. +But you cut their comb finely." + +"I knew that it would be a heavy blow for them. Of course, they +view with intense disgust the spread of our power in India. Not +only has it destroyed their dream of empire there but, in case of +war with them, their islands here will be absolutely at our mercy. +If we are strong enough to win kingdom after kingdom in India, +there should be no difficulty in turning out the small bodies of +troops they have, in their various possessions." + +"Yes, I see that; and the time may come very shortly, for the +French are likely to lay hands on Holland, before long and, as soon +as they do so, we shall be ready to pop down upon them, here. The +days of Van Tromp are long passed, and the Dutch navy has become +absolutely insignificant. + +"Well, I am glad that this is over. The sooner we are off, the +better." + +Half an hour after the Dutch Governor had left, orders were given +to get up the anchor and loosen the sails, and the brig was shortly +on her way north. + +"Now, what is your next move?" Fairclough asked, as the bustle of +getting under way subsided. + +"The Malay tells me that there is a small town on the east coast, +and that this would be the most handy for landing, as from there to +Johore's town is not more than some twenty miles. Whether the road +is open, he cannot say. The news he learned, from the tumangong's +people, was that there was a great deal of fighting going on +between Johore and some of the petty rajahs. What the position is, +at the present, moment he could not discover. + +"I should propose that we drop anchor off the place; and that, if +we find the natives well disposed, the interpreter should make an +arrangement, with a couple of natives, to carry up a letter from me +to the rajah, saying that I have come on a matter of business from +the Governor of India; and asking if he is willing to receive me, +and to guarantee my safety. If he says no, there is an end to it. +If he says yes, I shall start as soon as the answer comes." + +"Would you take some blue jackets with you?" + +"No. If we were attacked by a force of Malays, we should probably +be annihilated even if I took half your ship's company. Therefore, +the smaller the escort I travel with, the better. I shall, of +course, take the Malay, my man Abdool, and the four men of the +escort. That is quite enough, if we get up without trouble; whereas +if there is trouble, the fewer the better." + +"Well, I hope no harm will come of it, Lindsay. Of course, if you +consider it your duty to go, go you must." + +"Yes, I think it my duty. I consider the cession of this island to +be of extreme importance. If we only obtain it from the tumangong, +some day the Rajah of Johore might get the upper hand, and +repudiate the treaty made without his approval and, narrow as the +strait is, he might cross with forty or fifty canoes, make his way +through the woods, and annihilate the settlement at one blow." + +"No doubt that is so," the other agreed. "Well, if you get detained +you will, of course, try and make your way down to the coast. I +will remain at anchor off the town for a month, after you start. If +there is no news of you, then, I shall conclude that it is hopeless +to wait longer, and shall sail for Calcutta with your despatches. +As I was present at both your interviews, I shall be able to +report, from my own knowledge, as to the disposition shown both by +the tumangong and the Dutch." + +Ten days later, they cast anchor off the village. Some canoes soon +came off to them with fruit and other products and, shortly +afterwards, a war canoe came out with the chief man of the town. At +first he was very reticent; but a bottle of champagne opened his +lips, and he and the interpreter conversed for some time together. + +"What does he say?" Harry asked, when there was a pause in the +conversation. + +"He says, sir, that the country is very unsettled, and that it is +unsafe to travel. The town acknowledges the rajah as its master, +and the territory through which the road runs is nominally his; but +it is infested by bands owing allegiance to a neighbouring rajah, +who is at war with him." + +"Have you asked him if it is possible to send a messenger through?" + +"He said that there are plenty of men who would venture to go +through, if well paid. He thinks that two men would be better than +ten, for they could hide themselves more easily in the forest." + +"Well, ask him what he would send two messengers through for." + +The Malay answered that he could not say, until he had spoken to +some of them; but he thought that for ten dollars they would be +willing to undertake it. + +"Tell him that I would pay that, and will give them as much more +if, on their return, they will guide me and my party to the +residence of the rajah." + +The Malay shook his head. + +"They would want more for that," he said. "Two natives could pass +without much danger for, if they were caught, they could say that +they belonged to one of the other bands, but had lost their party. +It would be quite different if they were to have Europeans with +them. + +"How many would go?" + +"Seven of us, altogether." + +"I will see about it," the chief said; "but if I succeed, you will +give me three bottles of that drink." + +"I have very little of it," Harry said, "but I will agree to give +him the three bottles, if he finds messengers to take up my +letters; and arranges with them, or others, to guide us up." + +The Malay nodded, when the answer was translated to him; drank half +a tumbler of ship's rum, with great satisfaction; and then went +off. + +"This is going to be a more dangerous business than our expedition +to Nagpore," Harry said to Abdool, when he told him what the Malay +had said about the dangers, and the state of affairs on shore. + +"My lord will manage it, somehow," Abdool said; "he was born under +a fortunate star, and will assuredly do what is best." + +"I shall do what I hope is best, Abdool; but one cannot answer how +it will turn out. One thing is certain: that if we fall into the +hands of the Malays, we shall meet with little mercy." + +"We should have had no mercy, if we had fallen into the hands of +the people of Nagpore, master," Abdool said. + +"That is true enough, Abdool; and I don't think we should have been +much better off, if Scindia had laid hands on us after we had +bearded him in his tent. I cannot say that this expedition is one +that I should have chosen, were I not convinced that it is my duty. +However, we must hope that all will go well with us, as it has done +before." + +The next day the Malay came off again. + +"I have arranged with two men," he said, "to take your message, for +ten dollars; but if they go back with you, they will require +twenty, because the rajah might detain them." + +"That I will pay," Harry said. + +"But supposing you should not come back," the Malay said, "they +might lose their reward. Will you pay them in advance?" + +"No. I will leave the money in Captain Fairclough's hands, and +whether I return or not he will, before he leaves, pay it to the +men themselves, if they come back, or to their families." + +"That is a fair proposal," the Malay said. "When do you wish the +messengers to start?" + +"The letter will be ready for them, in an hour's time. I will come +on shore with it, see the men, and give it to them, with +instructions. Will they travel by night, or day?" + +"They will start at daybreak," the chief said. "The road is but a +track, and could not be followed at night; for a forest extends +almost the whole distance, and they would find it too dark to keep +to the road. I told them that it would be safer to travel at night, +but they said it could not be done. They would not be likely to be +surprised in the day, as they would travel noiselessly, and would +be sure to hear any movement of a party of men coming along the +road, and could hide in the forest until they had passed. Moreover, +our people do not like travelling in the dark. Evil creatures are +about, and even the bravest fear them." + +"Very well, chief; then I will come ashore in an hour, and give +them this letter." + +As soon as they had left, Harry went down to the interpreter, and +gave him the exact purport of the message to the rajah; leaving it +to him to put it in the usual form in which communications were +addressed to persons in authority, but saying that it was necessary +that he should impress him with his importance, as the commissioner +of the great Governor of India. When this was transcribed, on some +parchment which had been brought for the purpose, Harry went ashore +with Lieutenant Hardy and a strong party of seamen for, although +the local chief had apparently been most friendly, the treacherous +nature of the Malays was well known, and Fairclough thought it as +well to order them to take their cutlasses with them, and each man +to carry a brace of pistols hidden beneath his jacket. + +A number of natives assembled on the shore as the boat approached, +but they seemed to be attracted by curiosity, only. Just as the +boat touched the beach, the chief came down to meet them, attended +by a dozen armed followers. He invited Harry to follow him to his +own house, where the two messengers were awaiting him. They were +both men in the prime of life--strong, active-looking fellows. +Harry, through his interpreter, explained exactly what he wished +done. + +"If you carry out your mission well, and quickly," he said, "I +shall make you a present, in addition to what has been agreed upon. +You will notice the rajah's manner, when he reads the letter; and +tell me, when you return, whether he appeared to be pleased or not, +whether he hesitates as to giving me a guarantee, and whether, in +your opinion, he means to observe it. I shall rely much upon your +report." + +Three days passed, and then a boat brought the messengers off to +the ship. + +"So you have made your journey safely?" Harry said, through the +interpreter. + +"We met with no trouble by the way. This is the answer that the +rajah has sent." + +The letter was a satisfactory one. The rajah expressed willingness +to receive the officer whom the English lord had sent to him, and +to guarantee his safety while at his town; but said that, owing to +the troubled state of the country, he could not guarantee his +safety on the road, but would send down an escort of twenty men to +guard him on his way up, and the same on his return to the coast. + +"And now," Harry said, when the interpreter had read the document, +"tell me what passed." + +"When we said that we were messengers from an English lord, on +board a ship with great guns, we were taken to the rajah's house. +He took the letter from us, and read it. Then he asked some of +those with him what they thought of the matter. They answered that +they could see no harm in it, and perhaps you might bring presents. +He then asked us how many would come up with you; and we told him +four soldiers, as escort, and an interpreter. He nodded, and then +talked in a low voice to those around him, and told us to come +again, that afternoon, when a letter would be given us to take to +you." + +"Do you think that he means treachery?" Harry asked. + +"That we cannot say, my lord. We have talked as we came down. It +seems to us that he could have nothing to gain by hindering you; +but that perhaps he might detain you, in order to obtain a ransom +for you from the lord of India." + +Harry had already enquired, from the chief of the town, as to the +character of the rajah. + +"He is feared, but not liked," the chief said. "He knows that there +are those who would prefer that the old family should reign again, +and he has put many to death whom he has suspected as being +favourable to this. This is the reason why the tumangong, and other +chiefs, have revolted against him. The loss of so much territory +has not improved him and, in his fits of passion, he spares none." + +"What has become of the family of the former rajah?" Harry asked. + +"His wife and child are prisoners in the palace," he said. "Their +friends are surprised that their lives should have been spared; but +the rajah is crafty, and it is thought that he holds them so that +he could, if his position became desperate, place the young prince +on the throne and declare for him; in which case some, who are now +his enemies, might come over to his side. I am told that, except +that they are kept prisoners, the late rajah's wife and boy are +well treated." + +The account was not satisfactory, but it did not shake Harry's +determination. Questioning the Malays further, he found that they +had heard, at Johore, rumours that one of the chiefs on the border +of Pahang was collecting a large force, with the intention of +attacking the rajah; that the people of Johore were erecting strong +palisades round the town; and that the fighting men of the villages +round had all been called in for its defence. + +"When is this escort to come down?" he asked. + +"They started at the same time as we did, my lord, and will be here +by this evening." + +"Very well. In that case I will land, tomorrow morning at daybreak, +and start at once; so that we shall reach Johore tomorrow. Will you +hire four men, to act as carriers for us?" + +At the time appointed, Harry went on shore with the Malay, Abdool, +and four troopers. They had put on full uniform, and Harry had +brought with him, to shore, an assortment of presents similar to +those he had given to the tumangong. The two messengers and the +four natives, as carriers, were awaiting him and, as he went up the +beach, he was joined by twenty Malays with an officer of the rajah, +who saluted him profoundly. The chief of the village was also +there, and accompanied the party until beyond its boundary. + +After passing a few plantations, they entered a dense forest. The +road was a mere footway, apparently but little used. The ground +ascended rapidly and, when they had gone a short distance, some of +the Malay soldiers went scouting ahead; the rest following in +absolute silence, stopping frequently to listen. + +"It is quite evident, Abdool," Harry said, in a whisper, "that what +they said at the village is true, and these people from Johore +consider the journey to be a very dangerous one. They are evidently +expecting a surprise; and I am afraid that, if we are attacked, we +shall not be able to place much reliance on them." + +Abdool shook his head. + +"What are we to do, sahib, if we are attacked?" + +"It depends on what these Malays do. If they make a good fight for +it, we will fight, too; if not, and we see that resistance is +useless, we will remain quiet. It would be of no use for six men to +fight fifty, on such ground as this. They would creep up and hurl +their spears at us and, though we might kill some of them, they +would very soon overpower us. + +"Drop back, and tell the four troopers that on no account are they +to fire, unless I give them the order." + +Presently the Malays came to a stop, and the officer hurried back +to Harry. + +"We have heard the sound of footsteps in the wood, and one of my +men says he saw a man running among the trees." + +"It may have been some wild beast," Harry said. "There are plenty +of them in the wood, I hear, and your man may have been mistaken in +thinking that he saw a human figure. And even if it was so, it +might be some villager who, on hearing us, has left the path, +thinking us to be enemies." + +"It may be that," the officer said, when the words were translated +to him. "But it is more likely that he was posted there to watch +the path, and that he has gone to tell his band that a party is +approaching." + +"Even if it were so," Harry said, "the band may be only a small +one." + +The officer moved forward, and joined his men. Half an hour later, +without the slightest warning, a shower of spears flew from among +the trees; followed immediately afterwards by a rush of dark +figures. Several of the Malay escort were at once cut down. The +rest fled, at full speed. + +Harry saw that resistance would be hopeless, and would only ensure +their destruction. He therefore called to his followers to remain +quiet. The four bearers, however, threw down their burdens, and +fled at full speed down the path, just as a number of Malays poured +out on either side. + +They were evidently struck with the appearance of Harry and his +followers; but were about to rush upon them, when a chief ran +forward and shouted, to them, to abstain from attacking the +strangers. Then he walked up to Harry, who was evidently the chief +of the party. + +"Who are you, white man?" he asked, "and where are you going?" + +The interpreter replied that they were going on a visit of ceremony +to the Rajah of Johore. + +"We are his enemies," the chief said, "and now you must come with +us." + +"This lord--" the interpreter began, but the chief waved his hand +for him to be silent. + +He waited for a quarter of an hour, by which time he was joined by +that portion of his followers which had pursued the Malays. Many of +them carried human heads in their hands and, by the number of +these, Harry saw that very few of his native escort could have +escaped. The chief ordered his men to pick up the packages that had +been thrown down by the bearers, and then turned off into the +forest. + +After a quarter of an hour's walk, they arrived at the spot where a +still-smoking fire showed that the band had halted. No pause was +made, however, and the party kept on their way and, in two hours' +time, reached the foot of a high range of mountains that had been +visible from the coast. The climb was a severe one but, in another +hour, they came out upon a flat plateau. Here, in a small village, +a considerable body of men were gathered; who hailed the arrival of +their comrades, with their ghastly triumphs of victory, with loud +shouts. + +The chief of the band led his captives to a hut, somewhat superior +in appearance to the others, in front of which stood a man whose +bright attire and ornaments showed him to be a chief of importance. + +"Who is this white man," he asked, "and these soldiers who are with +him?" + +The officer repeated the description that he had received from the +interpreter, whom he pointed out. + +"Why was this white man going to Johore?" he asked. + +"He was sent by the white lord of India, my lord." + +"Ask him why he was sent?" + +"I was sent to Johore to ask the rajah if he would grant a trading +station to the English." + +"We want no English on our coast," the chief said. "There are the +Dutch, at Malacca--some day we will turn them out. + +"So he was bringing presents to Johore, was he?" + +"Yes, my lord; these are the parcels," and he beckoned up the men +who carried them. + +These approached, and humbly laid them at the rajah's feet. + +"I have to report, my lord, that there were twenty of Johore's men +with him. These we killed." + +"Did the white man and his soldiers aid them?" + +"No, my lord. They stood quiet, and offered no resistance, +therefore I brought them to you." + +"You did well. You are sure that none of the Johore men escaped, to +carry off the news that we were here?" + +"Quite certain. We have the heads of twenty men, and their +officer." + +"Good! I will examine these things. Put the white man and this +Malay into a hut, and the four soldiers into another. + +"Who is this other man, who is dressed differently?" + +"He is the white officer's servant," the interpreter said. + +"Well, he can go with his master, then." + +The four troopers were led off in one direction, and Harry and the +others in another. It was a hut roughly constructed of bamboos, +thatched with broad leaves, while the entrance had no door. The +interpreter did not carry arms; those of Harry and Abdool had been +removed. + +"Things have turned out badly, Abdool," Harry said. + +"Very badly, sahib. I do not like the look of that rajah." + +"Nor do I, Abdool. I am convinced that he means mischief, and we +must get away as soon as we can. + +"Have you got your knife with you? So have I. We must make a way +out of the back of this hut." + +A group of half a dozen Malays had taken their seats on the ground, +at a distance of some fifteen yards from the entrance; but had +posted no sentries. Behind it, as they were taken in, Harry noticed +that there was a patch of grain, and beyond that rose the forest. + +"These knives are no good against bamboo, sahib." + +"No, I know that; but we might cut these rattans which bind them +together. In the first place, dig down with your knife, and see if +the bamboos are sound underneath. They may have rotted there. + +"You and I will stand at the entrance," he went on to the +interpreter, "then they cannot see in." + +"Bamboos are quite sound, sahib." + +"Then we must try another way. First cut the rattans--but not in a +line with the entrance, a few feet on one side." + +The wood was extremely tough, and it was half an hour before Abdool +could cut through them, and free three or four of the bamboo poles. +While he was doing this, Harry and the interpreter stood talking +together, apparently watching the movements of the Malays. + +"We are going to try and escape," Harry said. "Will you go with us, +or remain here? They will certainly kill us, if they overtake us; +there is just a chance that they will not kill us, if we stay." + +"They will kill us," the man said, confidently. "It may not be +today, because the rajah will be looking over his presents, and +will be in a good temper; but tomorrow they will come in and kris +us. Assuredly I will go with you." + +When Abdool announced that he had cut through the rattans, Harry +joined him, telling the interpreter to wait at the entrance till he +called him. + +"What next, master?" Abdool asked. + +"The next thing will be to pull up the bamboos. If you have cut all +their lashings, this ought not to be very difficult; but it will +make it easier if we cut the ground away, as deep as we can, on +this side of them." + +Kneeling down, they set to work with their knives and, after half +an hour's work, they had laid bare the bottoms of four of the +bamboos, which were sunk two feet into the ground. + +"Now, Abdool, we ought to get them up easily enough." + +With their united strength they pulled up a bamboo, replaced it in +its position and, one by one, got the other three up, put them in +again, and lightly filled in the earth. + +"Now we can go, at a minute's notice," Harry said. "At any rate, we +had better wait till it is dark." + +The sun had just set, when they saw the rajah come out of his hut. +He gave an order, and the four troopers were brought out, and +placed in a line. Four natives took their places behind them, kris +in hand. + +"They are going to murder them!" Harry exclaimed, in horror. + +"Now, Abdool, there is not a moment to be lost; it will be our +turn, next." + +Their guards had all risen to their feet, watching what was going +on. Three of the bamboos were plucked up in a moment. This afforded +an opening sufficiently large for them to pass through and, keeping +the hut between them and the guard, they made their way through the +plantation, and dashed into the forest. They heard yells of +satisfaction in the village, and Harry had no doubt that the four +troopers had been murdered. + +They ran at full speed through the forest and, ten minutes later, +heard loud shouts of dismay; and had no doubt that a party had been +sent to take them out to execution, and had discovered their +escape. It was already almost dark, under the thick shade of the +trees; but for half an hour they ran on, the Malay in advance, for +he could see any obstacles better than they could, the habits and +training of his youth having given him experience in such work. + +For a time they had heard loud shouts behind them. These had been +useful, in enabling them to keep a straight course. The Malay now +turned, and struck off at right angles to the line that they had +been pursuing. + +"We must keep on, for a time," he said. "When they do not overtake +us, they will scatter through the forest in all directions." + +For hours they toiled on, sometimes at an easy walk, sometimes +breaking into a run. At last the Malay admitted that, for the time, +they were safe; and they threw themselves down upon the ground. + +"Tomorrow," he said, "they will take up the search in earnest, and +will track our footsteps. We had better take to a tree, now. It +will not be safe to stay here." + +The others cordially agreed as, for some time, they had heard the +roars of wild beasts, which abounded in these forests; and Harry +and Abdool had run with their open knives in their hands, prepared +for a sudden attack. + +"The others will have gone back to the village, long ago," the +Malay said, when they had made themselves as comfortable as they +could, in the forks of the tree, "except the men who were guarding +us. They will not dare venture into the village, for they would +fear the rajah's anger, even more than death from a tiger. They +will be first in the search, tomorrow morning. + +"Which way do you wish to go, my lord?" + +"I have been thinking it over, as we came. I think that our best +plan will be to go on to Johore. Doubtless the road down the coast +will be watched. How far from Johore do you think we are?" + +"Not very far," the Malay said. "We have been going in that +direction, ever since we first turned--not very straight, perhaps, +but certainly in that direction. I think that we cannot be more +than five or six miles from the town. It lies between the hills we +crossed, and the higher ones beyond. We have been descending a +little, all the time." + +"I am afraid that Johore will not be very pleased to see us +arriving empty handed, and to learn that the escort he sent us have +all been killed. Still, the news that we bring him, that his +enemies are not far off, will be useful to him; and we will offer +to aid him in the defence of his town, if he is attacked. At any +rate, it is a satisfaction to know that we have not very far to go, +and have got so good a start of the fellows behind us that they are +not likely to overtake us, before we get there." + +More than once, during the night, they heard angry growling at the +foot of the tree. Towards morning there was a scraping sound. + +"That is a leopard, sahib," the Malay said, in alarm; "he is +climbing the tree to get at us." + +Abdool was sitting immediately below Harry, and the latter called +to him to come up beside him. + +"Mount as high as you can, my lord," the Malay said. "The trunk is +not so rough, when you get higher; and the beast will find it +harder to climb." + +"We shall do better, here," Harry said. "These two arms, nearly +opposite to each other, are just the thing for us. + +"You go out to the end of one, Abdool, and I will go out to the end +of the other. We will climb out as far as we can, and then he will +have to follow us very slowly, whichever way he chooses. If he goes +for you, I will follow him. If he comes my way, you follow him. +When the bough gets thin he won't be able to turn round, and the +one behind can give him a sudden stab, which will make him leave go +his hold." + +By the time he had finished speaking, they were each far out on +their respective branches, and the leopard was close to the fork. +It paused a moment, looked at the two men and, after a moment's +hesitation, began to crawl out towards Abdool. Harry at once made +his way back to the trunk, and then followed the animal. + +Abdool had gone out as far as he dared and, holding on tightly, +swayed the end of the branch up and down. The leopard, as it +approached him, was evidently disconcerted; and clung to the bough, +which was scarcely six inches in diameter at the point it had +reached. It snarled angrily, as it became conscious that it was +being followed. + +Harry, feeling convinced that it could not turn, came fearlessly up +to it, and then struck his knife into its loin. As the blade was +but some four inches long, he had no hope of striking a vital +point. + +The leopard uttered a roar, and tried to turn and strike at him +with one of its forepaws; but the blade again penetrated to its +full depth, this time on the other side and, with a start, it lost +its footing, clung for a moment to the branch with its forepaws, +and strove to regain its hold; but Harry brought his knife down, +again and again, on one of its paws. + +Abdool, crawling in, quickly struck it under the shoulder and, a +moment later, it released its hold and fell heavily through the +foliage to the ground. For a time it was heard roaring, and then +the sound came only at intervals, and at an increasing distance. + +"That was a good business, Abdool," Harry said, as they returned to +their former post, where the Malay rejoined them. + +"It was well done, indeed, sahib. When I heard the beast climbing +the tree, it seemed to me that, as we had no weapons except these +little knives, he would surely make an end of one of us." + +The interpreter did not understand Mahratti, in which Abdool and +Harry always conversed; but he said in Hindustani: + +"I have seen fights with leopards, my lord, but even with krises, +two of my people would hesitate to attack one--they fear them more +than tigers--but little did I think that two men, with small +knives, could save their lives from one. My blood turned to water, +as I saw the beast climbing out on that bough, and you going out +after it." + +"I have done a good deal of tiger and leopard hunting, in my time," +Harry said, "and know that a leopard cannot spring from a bough, +unless it is a fairly stout one--stout enough for it to stand with +all its paws upon it. + +"Well, the day is beginning to break. In half an hour's time the +sun will be up, and the wild beasts will have all retired to their +lairs. I hope we shall see no more of them. It is all very well to +fight under such advantages; but on foot, were a tiger hiding near +a path, he would be sure to have one of us as we went along. Our +knives would not do more than tickle him." + + + +Chapter 12: The Defence Of Johore. + + +Half an hour later, the little party were on their way. They were +stiff, at first, from passing the night in a sitting attitude; but +it was not long before they were able to break into a trot. This +they kept up for an hour then, to their great satisfaction, the +forest abruptly ceased, and they saw, at a distance of about a mile +and a half, the little town of Johore, lying in cultivated fields +that extended to the edge of the forest. + +They broke into a walk, for a short distance; and then continued at +their former pace, for they could not tell how close their pursuers +might be behind them. It was not long before they saw men at work +in the fields. The interpreter shouted to them that a party of the +enemy were not far behind and, throwing down their tools, they also +made for the town, spreading the alarm as they went. Fresh and +fleet footed, they arrived some minutes before Harry's party and, +as these entered the place, they found the whole population in the +street, the men armed with spears and krises. + +Asking the way, they soon reached the rajah's palace, which +consisted of a central house, round which a number of huts were +built; the whole surrounded by a stone wall, some eight feet high. +The rajah, when they arrived, was questioning some of his people as +to the cause of this sudden alarm. He was greatly surprised at the +sight of Harry, in his full uniform, attended only by one soldier +and a native. + +"How comes it that you arrive like this?" he asked, angrily. + +"Explain what has happened," Harry said, to the interpreter. + +The rajah's brow darkened, as he heard how the escort he had sent +down had been slain, to a man, on the previous day. But his +excitement increased, when told that a strong force of his enemy +was gathered within a few miles of the town; and that an assault +might be immediately expected. + +"Will you tell the rajah that I am used to warfare, and shall be +glad to assist him, to the best of my power, in the defence of his +town?" + +"How many men were there?" the rajah asked. + +"I should think there were a couple of thousand," Harry replied. +"Some of them had matchlocks, but the greater part of them only +spear and kris." + +"And we have not more than five hundred," the rajah said. "We +cannot hope to resist them. What think you?" + +"I will at once go round the town, and see," Harry said. "It may be +that, being accustomed to war, I can suggest some means of so +strengthening the defences that we may hold them against the +enemy." + +The rajah, having heard many tales of the fighting powers of the +whites, said: + +"I will go with you. I would defend the place if I could for, if +Johore were lost, I should be but a fugitive. All within it would +be killed, and I should have to beg an asylum from those over whom +I was once master." + +Calling a party of his men to follow him, the rajah accompanied +Harry to the edge of the town. It was already surrounded by a +palisade; but this was of no great strength, and its circumference +was fully a mile and a half. + +"Tell the rajah that we could make a first defence, here, but his +fighting men are not numerous enough to hold so large a circuit +against four times their number. I should suggest that the whole +population should be set to work to build another palisade, much +nearer to the palace. All the women and children should be sent +inside this, all the provisions in the town be taken into the +palace enclosure, and a large supply of water stored there. + +"As soon as the new palisade is finished, all who can be spared +from its defence should set to work to throw up a bank of earth +against the wall; and upon this the fighting men can take their +places, and should be able to defend the palace against any +assault." + +The rajah listened attentively to the interpreter. + +"The English officer's words are good," he said, "but we have no +timber for the palisades that he speaks of." + +"Tell the rajah," Harry said, when this was interpreted to him, +"that there is plenty of wood and bamboos in the huts that stand +outside the line of the new palisade; and that if we pull these +down, we can use the materials. Moreover, in any case it would be +well to level these houses for, if the enemy fired them, it would +be almost certain to fire the houses inside the palisade." + +The rajah's face brightened. The tone of assurance in which Harry +spoke reassured him, and he said to the interpreter: + +"Tell the officer that my people shall do just as he tells them, if +he will point out where the defence must be erected." + +Harry was not long in fixing upon the line for the entrenchments. +It was some two hundred yards in diameter and, at the rajah's +orders, the whole of the men and women of the town set to work, to +pull down the huts standing within fifty or sixty yards of this. +This was the work of a couple of hours, and the materials were +carried up to the line. The stronger timbers were first planted, in +holes dug for them; and the intervals between these were filled +with bamboo poles. On the inside face other bamboos were lashed, +with rattans across them. As fast as these were used, more houses +were pulled down, until the defence was completed, the crossbars +being some nine inches apart. + +This work performed, the men, women and children brought up what +provisions they had, and their most precious belongings. These were +carried inside the wall of the palace. It was two o'clock before +the work was finished, and there was then a rest for half an hour. + +Then all were set to work to dig a trench, three feet deep with +perpendicular sides, at a distance of two feet from the palisade. A +large store of bamboos that had been too slender for use in the +palisade were sharpened, and cut into lengths of two feet; and +these were planted, thickly, in the bottom of the trench. Others, +five feet long, were sharpened and then thrust through the +interstices between the upright bamboos; the ends being fixed +firmly in the ground inside, while the sharpened points projected +like a row of bayonets, at a height of some two feet above the edge +of the ditch. + +It was nightfall before the work was finished. The rajah had, +himself, been all the time upon the spot; and was delighted when he +saw how formidable was the obstacle that had been raised. One small +entrance, alone, had been left; and through this all the women and +children now passed, and lay down in the space between the new +palisade and the wall of the palace. + +The men were ordered to take post behind the stockade, and a number +of boys were sent out, to act as scouts and give notice if an enemy +approached. The rajah, however, was of opinion that, as the enemy +would know that the alarm would have been given by the fugitives, +on their arrival, and that the inhabitants would be on their guard, +they would not attack till daylight. + +Harry had, at his invitation, gone up at midnight to his house, and +partaken of food; which was also sent out to Abdool and the +interpreter. The rajah would have continued the work all through +the night, had not Harry dissuaded him; saying that, after six +hours' sleep, everyone would work better. + +At one o'clock a horn was sounded and, with the exception of a few +men left at the outer palisade, all set to work again. The men were +employed in digging a trench, a foot in depth, inside the inner +palisade; throwing up the earth in front of them, so as to lie +protected from arrows and spears, until it was time for them to +rise to their feet to repel an actual assault. The women and +children filled baskets with the earth thrown from the outer +trench, on the previous day, and carried it inside the wall where, +by five o'clock, a bank two feet high had been raised; and on this +a platform of bamboos, three feet high and eighteen inches wide was +erected. + +The work had scarcely been finished when a horn was sounded, +outside the town; and the boys came running in, while the men ran +down to the outer palisade. As day broke, great numbers of dark +figures were seen, making their way through the fields on three +sides of the town. + +"The band we saw must have been joined by another. There are +certainly more than two thousand men there. They will undoubtedly +carry the outer palisade. Many of our men will be killed, and many +others will be unable to join us here. I think that it will be much +better to rely on this defence, alone." + +Having now great confidence in Harry's judgment, the rajah at once +ordered a horn to be sounded and, in a short time, the whole of the +men were assembled in their stronghold; and the entrance closed by +bamboos, for which holes had been already dug, close together. Then +short lengths were lashed across them, and they were further +strengthened by a bank of earth piled against them. + +Before this was quite finished, yells of triumph were heard as the +enemy, finding the palisade unguarded, poured in; expecting to find +that the inhabitants had fled at the news of their approach. They +paused, however, in surprise, at seeing another line of defence +outside the palace. Quickly the numbers increased, until a thick +line of dark figures was gathered at the edge of the cleared space. + +Inside the defence, all was quiet. Not a man showed himself. +Doubtful whether the town had not been entirely evacuated, the +Malays paused for some little time, while some of the chiefs +gathered together in consultation. Then a few of the men advanced, +with the evident intention of examining the defences. + +They were allowed to approach within ten yards of the ditch, when a +shower of arrows flew from the openings in the palisade; and two, +only, of the Malays fled back to their companions. The fall of the +others provoked wild yells of anger. A horn sounded, and the +assailants rushed upon them from all sides. When within a few yards +of the ditch they hurled their spears, and shot a cloud of arrows. +A large proportion were stopped by the bamboos, but such as passed +through flew harmlessly over the heads of the defenders; who +replied with a far more deadly shower of arrows. + +Leaping over those who had fallen, the enemy dashed forward. Those +in front endeavoured to check their course, on arriving at the edge +of the ditch; but they were forced in by the pressure of those +behind, and the long spears of the defenders gleamed out through +the openings of the bamboos, inflicting terrible damage. + +In vain the assailants endeavoured to climb out of the ditch. The +bayonet-like line of bamboos checked them; and the arrows of the +concealed defenders told, with terrible effect, on the struggling +mass. At last, at many points, the ditch was literally filled with +dead; and the assailants were enabled to leap upon the line of +bamboos which had so long checked their passage. + +The advantage was but slight. The slippery poles were some six +inches apart and, slanting as they did, afforded so poor a foothold +that the Malays were forced to stand between them, on the narrow +ledge between the palisading and the ditch. Here they thrust their +spears between the palisade; but these were wrenched from their +hands, and scores fell from the blows of kris, spear, and arrow; +until at last their leaders and chiefs, seeing how terrible was the +slaughter, and how impossible it was to climb the bamboo fence, +called their men off; and they fell back, pursued by exulting cries +from the women, who were standing on the platform behind the wall +of the palace, watching the conflict, and by the yells of the +defenders of the stockade. + +Of these but few had fallen, while some five hundred of the +assailants had perished. The rajah was almost beside himself with +joy, at this crushing defeat of his enemy. + +"I do not suppose it is over yet, Rajah," Harry said, through his +interpreter. "There are still some five times our number, and they +will surely not retire without endeavouring to avenge their defeat. +But I hardly think they will attack the stockade again. Possibly +they will try fire, next time; and it will be harder to fight that +than to keep men at bay." + +The rajah looked serious. + +"Yes," he said, "they cannot return to their homes, and say that +they have left five hundred dead behind them. What do you advise?" + +"They will hardly attack again today, Rajah; therefore I shall have +time to think it over. But at present, it seems to me that our only +course is to shoot down as many of those who bring up firebrands as +possible. We have still a number of long bamboos left, and with +these we might thrust away any burning faggots that might be cast +against the palisade." + +The rajah nodded. + +"That might be done," he said, "and with success, no doubt." + +"With success at many points, Rajah; but if they succeed, at only +one point, in establishing a big fire against the stockade; we must +retire within the wall. They cannot burn us out there, except at +the gate; and against that we must pile up earth and stones. But I +should certainly recommend that the roofs of all the buildings +inside should be taken off unless, indeed, you have sufficient +hides to cover them. Still, we need not do that until we are driven +inside the wall. It takes but a short time to take off the broad +leaves with which the roofs are covered." + +During the fight, Harry had taken no active part in the conflict. +He had divided the circle into three, and had taken charge of one +division, Abdool taking another, and the rajah a third. They had +each encouraged the men under them, and had gone where the pressure +of the attack was most severe. + +On leaving the rajah, Harry joined Abdool. + +"They will try again, Abdool; but I don't think they will try to +carry the stockade by assault again." + +"They will try fire, sahib." + +"That is just what I am afraid of. The archers will shoot down a +good many of them, but in such numbers as they are, this will make +little difference; and we must calculate that, at at least a dozen +spots, they will place blazing faggots against the palisade." + +Abdool nodded. + +"I have been telling the rajah," Harry went on, "that the men must +provide themselves with long bamboos, which they can thrust through +the openings in the stockade, and push the faggots away. But even +if we do so, we must calculate upon the enemy succeeding, in some +places, in setting the palisades on fire." + +"That would be very serious; but of course we should go in behind +the wall." + +"I do not want to do that, as long as we can possibly stay here. I +think that, when night comes, we ought to make a sortie." + +"But are we not too few, sahib?" + +"Too few to defeat them, Abdool, but not too few to beat them up. +You see, the wind always blows, in the evening, up from the sea. I +noticed it last night. It was quite strong. What I should propose +would be to pull up enough bamboos for four men to go out, +together, on the side facing the wind. Two hundred men should first +sally out; remaining, as they do so, close to the ditch. When all +are ready, they should crawl across the cleared ground and then, at +a signal, attack the enemy who, taken by surprise, would be sure to +give way, at first. + +"As they attack, fifty men with torches should rush out and follow +them, and set fire to as many huts as they can. As soon as they had +done their work, all should run back, when the signal is given. + +"There will be two advantages: in the first place, the sudden +attack will disconcert the enemy, and render them less willing to +expose their lives, by storming a place so desperately held; in the +second place, the wind will carry the flame over the whole town, +and I hope the burning fragrants will carry the flames over all the +fields where the crops are dry; thus causing them much more +difficulty in obtaining dry wood for faggots, and they will be +exposed to our arrows, much longer, before they throw them against +the stockade." + +"It would be excellent, sahib; but do you think the men would go?" + +"Just at the present moment, they would do anything; they are half +wild with excitement and triumph." + +Harry presently went with the interpreter to the rajah's house. + +"I have a plan to propose to you," he said, "that will render it +much more difficult for the enemy to set fire to the stockade;" and +he then explained his scheme. + +The rajah's eyes glistened with excitement. + +"Nothing could be better," he said; "and there is but one fear, and +that is, that the enemy will follow us so hotly, that they will +enter through the breach before we can close it." + +"I have thought of that," Harry said, "and the order must be that, +when the signal is given, the men must throw down their torches; +and then each man must run, not for the hole in the stockade, but +to the nearest point, and keep along outside the ditch, and enter +by it. In that way the point at which they entered would not be +known and, moreover, they would be able to enter more rapidly, and +with much less confusion, than if they all arrived together in a +crowd. A party would, of course, be left at the breach when they +sally out and, the moment the last man entered, would replace and +lash the bamboos in their position. + +"If, however, we are hotly pursued, you and I, with your own +guards, should remain outside, and keep them at bay until all the +bamboos but one are replaced. This will leave an opening sufficient +for one man, and we must fall back fighting. They certainly would +not venture to follow us through so narrow a passage." + +Two hundred and fifty of the men were brought inside the wall, and +the rajah explained to them the duty upon which they would be +employed. He told off fifty of them as torch bearers; explained to +all, carefully, the plan Harry had devised; gave strict orders that +no sound, whatever, must be made until they reached the houses and, +at Harry's request, impressed upon them the absolute necessity for +not allowing their ardour to carry them too far; but that torches +must be thrown down, and everyone run back, as soon as the horn +sounded. + +There was no doubt that the order was a satisfactory one. The men +raised their krises and spears, and shouted with joy. In their +present mood, nothing could please them more than the thought of an +attack upon their assailants. + +All remained quiet, on both sides, until darkness fell; then the +crash of falling huts showed that the enemy intended to use fire, +and were about to begin the work of making faggots. + +"They will attack an hour before daybreak," the rajah said; "or +may, perhaps, wait till the sun is up for, in the daylight, those +who carried the torches would not be so conspicuous, but would +advance in the midst of their whole force." + +"At what time are they likely to sleep?" + +"Many will sleep early," he said, "in readiness for the fight. +Others will sit up and talk, all night; but those who intend to +sleep will probably do so, in a couple of hours." + +"Do you think that they are likely to place guards?" + +"No; they will not dream that we should have the boldness to attack +them." + +"Let us give them three hours," Harry said, "the sea wind will be +blowing strongly, then." + +The greater portion of the men who were to remain behind were to be +stationed on the side on which the sortie was to be made, so as to +cover the retreat of the others, by showers of arrows. The rajah's +principal officer was placed in command here. His orders were that, +if the enemy came on too strongly, he was to issue out with a +hundred men, and aid the party to beat back their assailants. +However, Harry did not think it likely that this would be the case. +The Malays would be scattered all over the town--some, perhaps, +even beyond the outer palisades--and before they could assemble in +force, the party ought to be safe within the palisade again. + +Just before ten, the two hundred men who were to make the attack +sallied out. They were led by the rajah, while Harry was to lead +the firing party. He chose this part, because he would not be able +to crawl across the open space as noiselessly as the Malays could +do. + +During the day, a number of hides had been hung on the palisades, +so that the enemy should not notice that a gathering of men, with +torches, was assembled there; and in order that the light might not +be conspicuous at this spot, fires had been lighted at other +points, in order to give the impression that the defenders were +holding themselves in readiness to repel another attack. The +bamboos had been removed, ten minutes before the party issued out. +So noiseless was their tread that Harry, though close to the +entrance, could not hear it; and when he looked out, as soon as the +last man had passed, he could neither see nor hear anything. The +men had all thrown themselves on the ground, as soon as they had +passed out, and were crawling forward without a sound being +audible. + +Harry and Abdool had both armed themselves with a kris and spear. +Behind them were the torch bearers, arranged four abreast. + +It seemed an age before the sound of a horn rose in the air. +Instantly they dashed through the opening, followed by the men and, +at full speed, crossed the cleared ground. Already the sound of +shouts, violent yells, and the clashing of blades showed that the +rajah's men were at work. + +Scattering as they reached the houses, the torch bearers ran from +hut to hut; pausing for a few seconds, at each, till the flame had +gained a fair hold. In less than a minute, sixty or seventy houses +were in flames. Harry had the man with the horn with him and, as +soon as he saw that the work was fairly done, he ordered the signal +to be blown. The torches were thrown down, and their bearers ran +back at full speed and, half a minute later, the rajah's men poured +out from the town. There was no pursuit, and the whole band +re-entered the stockade before, with yells of fury, numbers of the +enemy ran forward. + +As soon as they did so, arrows began to fly fast from the stockade +and, knowing that they could effect nothing, without means of +breaking through, the Malays retired as rapidly as they had +advanced. + +Short as was the interval that had elapsed since the first signal +was given, the town was, at the point where the attack was made, a +sheet of flame, which was spreading rapidly on either hand. The +hubbub among the enemy was tremendous. Upwards of a hundred had +been killed, by the rajah's party--for the most part before they +could offer any resistance--and not more than five or six of their +assailants had received severe wounds. + +Loud rose the shouts of exultation from the defenders, as the fire +spread with ever-increasing rapidity; flakes of fire, driven by a +strong wind, started the flames in a score of places, far ahead of +the main conflagration and, in half an hour, only red embers and +flickering timbers showed where Johore had stood. Beyond, however, +there were sheets of flame, where the crops had been dry and ready +for cutting; and the garrison felt that their assailants would have +to go a long distance, to gather materials for endeavouring to burn +them out. + +While the position had been surrounded by a zone of fire, the rajah +had, at Harry's suggestion, sent the whole of the men and women to +cast earth over the dead; piled, at four or five points, so thickly +in the ditch. + +"If the matter is delayed another day," he said, "the air will be +so poisoned that it will be well-nigh impossible to exist here." + +The rajah admitted this; but urged that his men would want to cut +off the heads of their fallen enemies, this being the general +custom among the Malays. + +"It may be so, Rajah, but it could not be carried out, here, +without great danger. Our own lives depend upon getting them +quickly buried. We have no such custom of cutting off heads, in our +country, but that is no affair of mine. But the bodies now lie in +what is, in fact, a grave; and a few hours' labour would be the +means of saving the town from a pestilence, later on. + +"When the enemy depart, I should advise you to build a great mound +of earth over the trench. It will be a record of your grand defence +and, by placing a strong stockade along the top, you would +strengthen your position greatly. I should recommend you, in that +case, to clear the space within it, as far as the wall, of all +houses; and to build the town entirely outside it." + +There was great dissatisfaction, among the natives, at being +prevented from taking what seemed to them their natural trophies. +But when the rajah informed them that the order was given in +consequence of the white officer's advice, they set about the work +readily and, before morning, the dead were all hidden from sight by +a deep layer of earth. + +The next day passed without incident. At nightfall a sharp lookout +was kept, not only on the palisade but from the top of the rajah's +house. It was thought that the enemy, of whom considerable numbers +had been seen going into the forest, would bring up the faggots as +closely as possible, before lighting them. Still, it would be +necessary to carry brands for that purpose and, now that the ground +was cleared of huts, some at least of these brands could be seen, +even if carefully hidden. + +With the exception of the guards, all slept during the day; as it +was necessary that they should be vigilant at night, for the enemy +might, on this occasion, approach at an earlier hour, hoping to +find the garrison unprepared. Harry and Abdool paced round and +round on the platform of the wall but, although a few fires burned +among the fields, no glimmer of light could be seen where the town +had stood. + +"I wish I knew what they were up to, Abdool," Harry said, about +midnight. "I don't like this silence." + +"Perhaps they have gone away, sahib." + +"No, I can hardly think that. I believe we shall have another +attack, before morning. They may bring ladders with them, for +climbing the palisade; they may try fire; but I am convinced that +they will do something. + +"The position is not so strong as it was. If we had had more +bamboos, I should have set our men to dig another ditch, and defend +it like the first; but they are all used up, now. I wish we had +some rockets; so that we could send up one, from time to time, and +see what they are doing." + +Another hour passed, and some of the Malays declared that they +could hear a sound as of many men moving. Harry listened in vain, +but he knew that the Malays' senses were much keener than his own. + +He went at once to the rajah. The chief had been up till midnight, +and then retired; leaving orders that he was to be called, directly +an alarm of any sort was given. He was seated with two or three of +his councillors, talking, when Harry, with the interpreter, +entered. + +"Your people say they hear sounds, Rajah. I can hear nothing, +myself, but I know their hearing is keener than mine. I am uneasy, +for even they cannot see the faintest glow that would tell that a +fire is being brought up. In my opinion, we had better leave only +two hundred men at the palisade, and bring the rest in here. We can +lead them out, at once, if any point is hotly attacked; and it +would prevent confusion, if the stockade were suddenly forced. The +enemy may be bringing up hundreds of ladders and, in the darkness, +may get up close before they are noticed." + +"Do as you think best," the rajah said and, at once, went out and +sent officers to bring in three hundred of the men; and also, at +Harry's suggestion, to tell the others that, when the rajah's horn +sounded, all were to leave the stockade and make at once for the +entrance through the wall. + +Another half hour passed. Even Harry was conscious, now, that there +was a low dull sound in the air. + +"I cannot think what they are doing," the rajah, who was now +standing on the wall, close to the gate, said to Harry. "However +numerous they may be, they should have moved as noiselessly as we +did, when we went out to attack them." + +"I don't think that it will be long before we know, now, Rajah." + +He had scarcely spoken, when there was a loud shout from the +palisade in front of them. It was on this side that the men had +been posted so thickly, as it was of all things necessary to defend +this to the last, in order to enable those at other points to make +their way to the gate. The shout of alarm was followed, almost +instantly, by the sound of a horn and, immediately, a tremendous +yell resounded on all sides. + +It was answered by the shouts of the garrison and, a moment later, +a score of balls composed of matting, dipped in oil or resinous +gum, were thrown flaming over the palisades. These had been +prepared the previous day, and the men charged with throwing them +had each an earthenware pot, containing glowing charcoal, beside +them. Their light showed groups of men, twenty or thirty strong, +advancing within twenty yards of the palisade. + +"They are carrying trees, to batter down the stockade, Rajah!" said +Harry. + +Behind the carrying parties was a dense crowd of Malays, who rushed +forward as soon as the fireballs fell, hurling their spears and +shooting their arrows, to which the defenders replied vigorously. + +"The stockade will not stand a moment against those trees," he +continued. "'Tis best to call the men in, at once." + +The rajah ordered the native beside him to sound his horn and, in +two or three minutes, the men poured in at the entrance. As soon as +the last had come in, the bamboos were put in the holes prepared +for them, with some rattans twined between them. Scores of men then +set to work, bringing up the earth and stones that had been piled +close at hand. + +In the meantime, the three hundred men on the walls kept up a +shower of arrows on the enemy. The battering rams, which consisted +of trees stripped of their branches, and some forty feet long and +ten inches thick, did their work and, by the time the entrance was +secure, the Malays poured in with exultant shouts. + +A large supply of the fireballs had been placed on the platforms +and, as these were lighted and thrown down, the assailants were +exposed to a deadly shower of arrows as they rushed forward. At +this moment the rajah's servant brought up four double-barrelled +guns. + +"They are loaded," the chief said, as he handed one of these to +Harry. + +"How long is it since they were fired?" the latter asked. + +"It is three months since I last went out shooting," the rajah +replied. + +Harry at once proceeded to draw the charges. + +"I should advise you to do the same, Rajah. A gun that has not been +fired for three months is not likely to carry straight, and is more +dangerous to its owner than to an enemy." + +The rajah called up two of his men, and one of these at once drew +the charges of the guns, and reloaded them from the powder horn and +bag of bullets the servants had brought. + +The enemy did not press their attack, but retired behind the +palisades and, from this shelter, began to shoot their arrows fast, +while a few matchlock men also replied. + +"It would be as well, Rajah, to order all your men to sit down. +There is no use in their exposing themselves to the arrows, and +they are only wasting their own. We must wait, now, to see what +their next move will be. Fire will be of no use to them, now; and +the wall will take some battering before it gives way and, brave as +the men may be, they could not work the battering rams under the +shower of spears and arrows that would be poured upon them. + +"I should send the greater part of your men down to get off the +roofs of the huts. Those up here must place a man or two on watch, +at each side, and throw a fireball occasionally." + +In a few moments the enemy ceased shooting their arrows, for the +light of the fireballs showed them that the garrison was in +shelter. + +"There is no occasion for you to stay here, any longer, Rajah. I +will look after matters until morning, and will send to you, as +soon as there is any stir outside." + +In half an hour, the huts were stripped of their most combustible +material. This was heaped up under the platforms, where it would be +safe from falling arrows. The women drew pots of water from the +well, and a hundred men were then left in the courtyard, with +orders to pull up or stamp out any flaming arrows that might fall. +But as the time went on, it was evident that the assailants had not +thought of providing themselves with the materials requisite, and +the greater part of the garrison lay down quietly and slept. + +Harry had waited until he saw the work in the courtyard completed; +and then, with the interpreter, entered the rajah's house. The room +he generally used was empty. Some lamps were burning there, and he +laid himself down on a divan, while the Malay curled himself up on +the floor. + +Harry had slept but a short time when he was awakened by a light +touch on his shoulder and, springing up, saw a woman, with a boy +some six years old, standing beside him. The woman placed her +finger on her lips, imploringly. Harry at once roused the +interpreter. Through him, the woman explained that she was the +widow of the late rajah, and that her son was the lawful heir to +the throne. + +"I have come to you, brave white lord," she said, "to ask you if +your people will grant us protection." + +"That would be impossible," Harry replied; "my people are busy with +their own wars in India and, even were they not so occupied, they +could not interfere in a domestic quarrel between the Malay +chiefs." + +"Why are you fighting here, then?" + +"I am fighting in my own quarrel. I was attacked, and my followers +killed, by the rajah now assailing this place. I, myself, should +have been murdered, had I not made my escape; and should certainly +be killed by him, if he were victorious. + +"I think it likely that, before very long, there may be an English +trading station at Singapore and, if you and your son were to go +there, you would certainly be well received. I shall, of course, +relate your story, which I have already heard, on my return to +Calcutta; and on my explaining that your son is entitled to the +throne of Johore, it may be that some sum would be granted for your +maintenance; for it may well be that, in time, the throne may again +become vacant, and that the people, tired of these constant wars, +will unite to accept your son as rajah. I may tell you that I am +sure the tumangong will grant us a trading station, and possibly +the whole island; but as he is not the Rajah of Johore, although at +present independent of him, we should like to have his assent to +the cession. It is for this purpose I have come here although, up +to the present time, I have not said anything about it to the +rajah, as we have both been much too busy to talk of such matters. + +"It may be years before the English come to Singapore; but my +report will certainly be noted and, assuredly, an asylum would be +granted you, and you would be kindly received. I can say no more +than that." + +"Thanks, my lord, I could have hoped for no more. Forgive me for +having thus disturbed you but, as all in the house save ourselves +are asleep, I thought that it was an opportunity that would not +occur again. I will teach my son that the English are his friends +and, should aught happen to me, and should he ever become rajah +here, he will act as their friend, also." + +When this had been interpreted to Harry, she and the boy left the +room, as noiselessly as they had entered. Harry was well pleased +with the interview. Probably the present man would, when the result +of this struggle became known, regain much of the power he had +lost. Assuredly, as long as he remained rajah, he would now be +ready to grant anything asked for and, as Singapore was virtually +lost to him, his assent would be given without hesitation. If, on +the other hand, he were dethroned, or died, it was likely that this +boy would in time become rajah and, in view of this possibility, +doubtless the Governor would order that if, at any time, he and his +mother arrived at Singapore, they should be well received. + + + +Chapter 13: The Break Up Of The Monsoon. + + +The night and early morning passed quietly. The chatter of many +voices showed that a portion, at any rate, of the assailants were +beyond the stockade; but it was not until nine o'clock that +numerous parties were seen coming from the forest. + +"I suppose they have been making ladders all night," Harry said to +Abdool, who was with him on the wall; from which, owing to the fact +that the house stood on a rising knoll of ground, which commanded a +good view over the stockade, the assailants could be seen. + +"Well, I have no doubt we shall be able to beat them off. We have +as many men as we want for the circuit of the walls and, while we +shall be partly sheltered, they will have to advance in the open." + +The Malays had, indeed, been busy since daybreak in manufacturing +arrows from thin reeds and bamboos, used in the construction of the +huts demolished on the previous evening; tipping them with chips of +stone and winging them with feathers, of which plenty were found in +the houses and scattered about the yard. All felt that this would +be the decisive attack; and that the enemy, after one more repulse, +would draw off. That the repulse would be given, all felt +confident. Already the slaughter of their assailants had been very +great, while very few of their own number had fallen. + +An hour later, large parties of the enemy advanced to the stockade. +This they did unmolested, as the distance was too great for +anything like certainty of aim. The rajah again took his place by +Harry's side. Presently, at the sound of a horn, a great flight of +arrows rose high in the air from behind the stockade. + +"They are fire arrows!" the rajah exclaimed. "I will send a hundred +men down, to help the women to extinguish them;" and he himself +descended, an officer following, with the men. + +The women were all seated close to the platforms and, as the arrows +came raining down, they ran out; being joined by the rajah and his +men. Had the leafy roofs remained in their place, the whole would +have been in a blaze in two or three minutes. As it was, the vast +proportion of the arrows stuck in the earth, and burnt themselves +out; while the few that fell among the debris that had not been +cleared away were extinguished, immediately. For two or three +minutes the showers of arrows continued; and then ceased as, to the +surprise of the assailants, there were no indications of the palace +being on fire. + +Then the signal was given for the attack and, exasperated by the +failure of the plan they had relied upon as being certain to cause +a panic, the Malays, with loud shouts, rushed forward. A large +number of them carried ladders and, in spite of the many who fell +under the arrows of the defenders, the ladders were soon planted +against the walls; and the Malays swarmed up on all sides. + +A desperate struggle took place. Some of the ladders were high +enough to project above the wall. These, with the men upon them, +were thrown back. On others the Malays, as they climbed up, were +met by the spears of the defenders or, as their heads rose above +the walls, with the deadly kris. Their leaders moved about among +the throng below, urging the men forward; and Harry, seeing that +things were going on well, all round, took the guns from the hands +of the soldier who attended him, and directed his aim against +these. + +Three fell to his first shots. As the soldier handed them to him, +reloaded, his eye caught a group of chiefs, behind whom stood what +was evidently a picked body of men. In the midst of the group was +the rajah to whom Harry had recently been a prisoner. With a +feeling of deep satisfaction, that his hand should avenge the +murder of his four troopers, Harry levelled his gun between two of +the defenders of the wall, took a steady aim, and fired. + +[Illustration: Without a cry, the rajah fell back, shot through the] +head. + +As the chief was but some twenty-five yards away, there was little +fear of his missing and, without a cry, the rajah fell back, shot +through the head. A yell of consternation rose from those around +him. Two more shots then rang out, and two more chiefs fell. + +The others shouted to their men, and a furious rush forward was +made. Harry snatched up a spear, lying by the side of a native who +had fallen; shouted to the rajah's guard of twenty men--who were in +the yard below, as a reserve in case the enemy gained a footing at +any point of the wall--to come up, and then joined in the fight. + +The assailants fought with such fury that, for a time, the issue +was doubtful. Several times, three or four succeeded in throwing +themselves over the wall; but only to be cut down, before they +could be joined by others. At last the Malays drew off, amid the +exultant shouts of the defenders. + +In a short time, the attack became more feeble at all points. The +news of the death of their leader had doubtless spread, and its +effect was aided by several other chiefs falling under Harry's fire +and, ere long, not one of their followers remained inside the +palisade. Half an hour later, the lookout from the top of the +rajah's house shouted that the whole of the assailants were +retiring, in a body, towards the forest. + +Excited by their victory, the rajah's troops would have sallied out +in pursuit; but Harry dissuaded him from permitting it. + +"They must have lost, altogether, over a thousand of their men; but +they are still vastly more numerous than your people, and nothing +would suit them better than that you should follow them, and give +them a chance of avenging the loss they have suffered." + +"But the rajah will come again. He will never remain quiet, under +the disgrace." + +"He will trouble you no more," Harry said. "I shot him myself, and +six or seven of his principal chiefs." + +"You are indeed my friend!" the rajah exclaimed, earnestly, when +the words were translated to him. "Then there is a hope that I may +have peace. The death of the rajah, and of so many of the chiefs +that have joined him, will lead to quarrels and disputes; and the +confederacy formed against me will break up and, while fighting +among themselves, they will not think of attacking, again, a place +that has proved so fatal to them." + +The rajah had some difficulty in allaying the enthusiasm of his +men; but he repeated what Harry had said to him, and added that, +since it was entirely due to their white guest that they had +repulsed the attack, there could be no doubt that his advice must +now be attended to, since he had shown himself a master in war. + +"Be content," he said. "Wherever our language is spoken, the Malays +will tell the story of how three thousand men were defeated by five +hundred; and it will be said that the men of Johore surpassed, in +bravery, everything that has been told of the deeds of their +fathers. There is no fear of the enemy returning here. The rajah +and many of his chiefs have fallen, by the hand of our white +friend. Henceforth, for many years, you will be able to rest in +peace. + +"In a month you will have rebuilt the houses, and sown again the +fields that have been burnt. After that, we shall have leisure, and +a treble stockade shall be built, stronger and firmer than that +into which they forced an entry. Your first task must be to carry +the bodies of our enemies far out beyond the town, where their +skeletons will act as a warning as to what welcome Johore gives to +its foes. A present of money will be given to each man, this +afternoon, to help him to rebuild his house, and make good the +damages that he has suffered." + +The interpreter had rapidly translated the speech to Harry as it +went on and, as the rajah ended, and the applause that greeted him +subsided, Harry said a few words to the interpreter, which he +repeated to the rajah. The latter held up his hand, to show that he +had more to say. + +"My white friend warns me that, for a day or two, we must not leave +the town. It may be that the enemy have halted near the edge of the +forest, in the hope of taking us unawares. This, however, can only +be for a day or two, at most; for I have no doubt that the +provisions they brought with them are, by now, exhausted and, if +they stop in the forest, they will perish from hunger; therefore +let no one go beyond the town, for two days. A watch shall be kept +on the roof of my house and, if any of the enemy make their +appearance in the forest, a horn will summon all to retire within +the walls." + +There was feasting that night at the rajah's house. All his +officers and men of importance were present. Sacks of rice and +other grain were distributed among the soldiers and women; some +buffaloes that had been driven inside the wall to serve as food, +should the siege prove a long one, were also killed and cut up; and +very large jars, containing the fermented juice of the pineapple, +and other fruits, were served out. + +During the day the breaches in the palisades had all been repaired +and, at night, the whole population were told to remain within its +shelter, while numerous guards were posted by the rajah. While the +meal at the rajah's was going on, a party of native musicians +played and sang, the Malays being very fond of music. + +Harry sat at the rajah's right hand, and was the subject of +unbounded praise and admiration among the company. Speaker after +speaker rose and addressed him and, afterwards, the interpreter +said a few words to them in his name, thanking them for the +goodwill they had shown, and praising them highly, not only for +their bravery, but especially for the manner in which they had +carried out the orders given to them. The proceedings did not +terminate until a very late hour, and Harry was heartily glad when +at last he could retire to rest. + +In the morning, the rajah said to him: + +"Now, my friend, you have not told me why you have come here. We +have been so busy that we have not spoken on other subjects, save +the war. The message you sent up to me was that you came from the +great white lord of Calcutta, and desired to see me. You may be +sure that whatever you desire of me shall be granted for, were it +not for your coming, I should now be a hunted fugitive, and my +people slain." + +"It is not much that I desire, Rajah. The tumangong is willing to +grant to us a trading station, on the island of Singapore and, +possibly, we may acquire from him the whole island; but we are +aware that he is not the rightful lord of the island, and it may be +that, in time, you may recover possession of all Johore. Thus, +then, I come to you to ask you if you are willing to consent to +this privilege being granted to us; which assuredly will benefit +your kingdom by providing a market, close to you, at which you can +barter your produce for goods that you require, with us or with +native traders from the east. At present, we are not in a position +to plant this trading station in Singapore, being engaged in +serious wars in India; and it may be a considerable time before +things have so settled down that we can do so. I have, therefore, +only to ask your assent to our arrangement with the tumangong, +whenever it can be carried out; and we shall certainly be willing +to recognize your authority, by a gift of money." + +"I willingly consent," the rajah said; "it is, indeed, but a small +thing. So long as I live, I shall be ready to enter into any treaty +with you; and doubtless my successor, whoever he may be, knowing +what you have done for us and our state, will also agree." + +[It was not, indeed, until the year 1819 that the British took +possession of the island, paying sixty thousand dollars to the +tumangong. Shortly after they had settled there the young prince, +who had escaped from Johore, came down there. He was awarded a +pension and, at the death of the rajah, was placed on the throne by +the British, to the general satisfaction of the inhabitants.] + +The next day, a number of men came in from villages scattered among +the hills, who had not heard of the approach of the enemy until too +late to enter the town, and take part in its defence. By this time, +scouts had penetrated far into the forest, and brought back news +that, although there were many dead there, there were no signs of +the enemy. The work, therefore, of rebuilding the town was +commenced; every available man of the garrison, and those who had +come in, being engaged in cutting wood and bringing it in. + +In the course of the next day or two several chiefs, whose attitude +had before been threatening, came or sent members of their families +to congratulate the rajah upon the defeat that he had inflicted +upon his enemies, and to assure him of their loyalty to his rule. + +Harry had stayed on, at the earnest request of the rajah; but he +now declared that he must return to the coast. The rajah's approval +of the cession of a trading port, and of the island itself, was +written both in the Malay and the English languages, and signed by +the chief. Copies were also made and signed, by Harry, to be kept +in the palace, in order that on any future occasion they could be +consulted. + +A great number of presents, of krises and other articles of Malayan +manufacture, were offered to Harry; but he excused himself from +accepting them, saying that, in the first place, it was not +customary for commissioners of the Governor to accept presents; and +in the second that, being constantly employed on service, he had no +place where these could be deposited, during his long absences. + +On the third morning after the retreat of the enemy Harry started, +with his two companions, for the coast; attended by an escort of +twenty men of the rajah's own guard, commanded by a high officer. +There was now no fear of molestation, but the escort was sent as a +mark of honour. Starting early, they reached the coast town in the +afternoon. + +They were received with great joy by the inhabitants, who had been +in a state of abject terror. A runner, who was the bearer of a +message to the rajah from the headman, had left on the morning +after Harry's party had started; and had returned with the news +that he had found the headless bodies of all the escort, but had +seen no traces of the white man nor his followers, who had +doubtless all been carried off by the enemy. The news caused +terrible consternation, as it was thought that the town might be +attacked, at any moment. Those of the inhabitants who possessed +canoes, took to them and paddled away down the coast. The others +fled to the mountains. + +Finding, however, from scouts who had been left, that four days had +passed without the appearance of the enemy, most of them had +returned, on the evening before Harry arrived there. On hearing, +from his escort, of the defeat of the invaders and their enormous +loss, the most lively joy was manifested; and Harry was treated +with almost reverential respect, the men of the escort agreeing +that it was solely due to him that the victory had been gained. He +made, however, but a very short stay in the village; and the +headman at once ordered the largest canoe to be prepared. This was +decorated with flowers and flags and manned by twenty rowers who, +as soon as Harry and his two companions took their seats in it, +rowed off to the brig. + +"Welcome back, Lindsay!" Fairclough shouted, as the canoe +approached; "we could hardly believe our eyes, when we saw you come +down to the canoe. We have been in a terrible fright about you. The +natives brought off news that the escort that had been sent down to +take you to Johore were, every one, killed; and that, as there were +no signs of any of your party, it was certain that you had been +carried off. We sent a boat ashore, every morning, armed to the +teeth; but they reported that the place was almost entirely +deserted, and the two or three men left there said that no news, +whatever, had been received of you." + +By this time, Harry had gained the deck. + +"Where is your escort?" Fairclough asked. + +"I am sorry to say that they were all murdered. However, my story +is a long one and, although the rajah sent down some food with the +escort he gave me, I am desperately thirsty, and will tell you all +that happened when I have wetted my whistle." + +Fairclough told Hardy to come with them below, and Harry's story +was told in full, over sundry cups of tea, which Harry preferred to +stronger beverages. + +"That was an adventure, indeed," Fairclough said, when Harry had +brought his story to an end. "I would have given anything to have +been with you in that siege. I own I should not have cared about +being a prisoner in that fellow's camp, especially as you were +disarmed, and could not even make a fight for it. That affair with +the leopard would have been more to my taste; though, if I had been +in your place, with nothing but your knife and Abdool's, I doubt +whether I should have come out of it as well as you did; but the +other business was splendid, and those Malays of the rajah's must +have fought well, indeed, to beat off a force six times their own +strength." + +"The great point is that I have obtained his ratification of the +tumangong's grant, whenever it may be made." + +"That is satisfactory, of course; but it would not have, to my +mind, anything like the importance of your series of adventures, +which will be something to think over all your life. I wish I had +been there, with my crew, to have backed you up; though I am afraid +that most of them would have shared the fate of your Malay escort, +in that sudden attack in the forest." + +"Yes; with all their pluck, they could scarcely have repulsed such +a sudden onslaught though, certainly, the killing would not all +have been on one side. I am glad, indeed, that Abdool also came +safely out of it; as I should have missed him, fearfully. + +"The interpreter showed himself a good man, and I hope that Lord +Mornington will, when I report his conduct, make him a handsome +present. If he had not got away with me, it is hardly likely I +should ever have found my way to Johore and, if I had done so, I +could not have explained to the rajah that he was going to be +attacked, or have got him to erect the stockade that was the main +cause of our success. In fact, he would probably, in his anger at +the slaughter of his escort, have ordered me to be executed on the +spot. As it was, he did not take either that, or the loss of his +presents, greatly to heart." + +"You saved his kingdom for him, there is no doubt. It is not likely +that he would ever have ventured to defend himself, had it not been +for the confidence that he felt in you, and in the steps you took." + +"No; he told me, himself, that he would have taken flight at once +and, in that case, his kingdom would have been lost; and he +himself, sooner or later, hunted down." + +"And now, I suppose we can start as soon as we like?" + +"Certainly; the sooner the better. I shall be very glad to be back +again, for there is no saying what is going on there. Assuredly, +the friendship of the Mahrattas cannot be relied upon. I know that +we are not likely to make any fresh move, except in self defence, +until Mysore is completely pacified, and a firm government +established. Still, there is never any saying what will happen. +Having been in the thick of the Mahratta business, all along, I +should not like to be out of it, now." + +"Well, we will get up anchor at daybreak, tomorrow." + +All on board were glad, when the news that they were to sail for +Calcutta, the next morning, was circulated through the ship. To the +crew, the voyage had been a monotonous one; the weather having been +uniformly fine, since they started; and they had had no adventures, +such as they had hoped for, with hostile natives. + +Nothing was talked of that night, between decks, but Harry's story; +which had been told by Lieutenant Hardy to the midshipmen, who had +retailed it to the petty officers, and it had rapidly spread. +Abdool and the interpreter were made as much of as was possible, +considering that neither could understand English; and deep were +the expressions of regret that none of the sailors had taken part +in so tough a fight. + +By the time the sun was up, next morning, the vessel was under +weigh and, with light breezes, sailed round Singapore, and then +headed northwest. The winds, as before, were light and, as the +northeast monsoon was still blowing, the rate of progress was slow. + +"I wish we could have got into the Hooghly," Fairclough said, as he +walked impatiently up and down the quarterdeck, "before the monsoon +broke; but I don't see much chance of it. It generally changes +about the middle of April, and we are well on in the first week, +now. At the rate at which we are sailing, we shall take at least +three weeks before we get there. You see, we are only just clear of +the northern point of Sumatra; and it is already a month since we +got up anchor." + +"But we shall have the wind almost behind us, Fairclough." + +"Yes, when it has settled down. It is the change that I do not +like. Of course, sometimes we have only a few days of moderately +rough weather; but occasionally there is a hurricane at the break +up, and a hurricane in the bay of Bengal is no joke. I shall not +mind, much, if we get fairly past the Andamans; for from there to +the mouth of the Hooghly it is open water, and I should be under no +uneasiness as to the brig battling her way through it; but to be +caught in a hurricane, with these patches of islands and rocks in +the neighbourhood would, to say the least, be awkward." + +"Are there any ports among the islands? I recollect hearing an +officer say that there was a settlement made there, some years +ago." + +"That was so. In 1791 an establishment was started in the southern +part of the island and, two years later, it was moved to a harbour +on the northwest side of the bay. It was called Port Cornwallis; +but was abandoned in 1796, being found terribly unhealthy. It was a +pity, for it afforded good shelter when the northeast monsoon was +blowing, and partially so from the southwest monsoon. No doubt it +could have been made more healthy, if the country round had been +well cleared; but it was not found to be of sufficient utility to +warrant a large outlay, and the natives are so bitterly unfriendly +that it would require a garrison of two or three hundred men to +overawe them. We should have been always losing life--not from open +attacks, perhaps, but from their habit of crawling up, and shooting +men down with their arrows." + +A week later, they were some seventy or eighty miles to the west of +the Andaman group. Directly the brig weathered the northernmost +point of Sumatra, the course had been laid more to the west, so as +to avoid the dangerous inside passage. When Harry went on deck, in +the morning, he found that the wind had dropped altogether. + +"There is an end of the monsoon," Fairclough said. "I am just going +to shorten sail. There is no saying which way the wind will come. +The glass is falling fast but, of course, that is only to be +expected. I think, if you are wise, after breakfast you will take +off that drill suit, and get into something better calculated to +stand rough weather; for that we are sure to have, and any amount +of rain. That is always the case, at the changes of the monsoon. + +"You see, it is a sort of battle between the two winds; the +southwesterly will gain, in the end, but the other will die hard; +and it is this struggle that causes the circular storms which, when +they are serious, are called hurricanes, though at ordinary times +they are simply called the break up of the monsoon, which generally +causes bad weather all over the Indian Ocean." + +Towards evening, low banks of cloud were seen to the south, and the +sky looked dim and misty in the opposite direction. + +"They are mustering their forces, you see, Lindsay; and the glass +has fallen so far that I fancy the fight will be a hot one. At any +rate, we will make all snug for the night." + +Sail after sail was taken in, until only a storm jib, a small fore +stay-sail, and a close-reefed main top-sail were left standing. The +bank of cloud to the south had risen considerably and, when +darkness closed in, the upper edge was lit up by the almost +incessant flicker of lightning. The upper spars were sent down on +deck and then, there being nothing more to be done, the crew, who +had all donned rough-weather clothes, awaited the outburst. + +That it would be more than ordinarily severe there could be no +doubt, and the men, clustered in little groups by the bulwarks, +talked in low tones as they watched the slowly-approaching storm +from the south; with occasional glances northwards, where indeed no +clouds could be seen, but the sky was frequently lit up by the +reflections of lightning below the horizon. + +"What do you think of it?" Harry asked the interpreter. + +"I do not like it," the Malay replied. "I think that there will be +a great hurricane. I have seen many changes of the monsoon, but +never one that looked so threatening as this." + +"It does look bad," Harry said, "though, as I have never been at +sea before, at the change of the monsoon, I am no judge at all; but +it certainly looks as if we were in for a bad gale. At any rate, we +shall be safer, here, than we were in that hut in the mountains." + +The Malay made no reply, for some time. Then he said: + +"Yes, sahib, but there was something to do, there. Directly we got +in, you began to prepare for an escape. It was not certain that we +should succeed. They might have come in and killed us, before you +were ready but, as we were busy, we had not much time to think of +the danger. + +"Here we can do nothing." + +"No. But, as you see, everything has already been done. You and I +have not been working, but the sailors have been busy in taking off +sail, and getting down all the upper spars. We are ready for the +worst, now; just as we were when we had opened the passage for our +escape, and we felt fairly confident--although we might meet with +many dangers, we had a good chance of getting safely away." + +"There are the danger signals, Lindsay," the captain said, as a +pale light suddenly shone out above. + +Looking up, Harry saw a ball of fire on the main-mast head. +Presently, this seemed to roll down the mast, till it reached the +top-sail yard; then it broke into two, and these rolled out until +they remained stationary, one at each end of the yard. Harry had +never seen this phenomenon before. + +"What is it?" he asked Fairclough, in an awed voice. + +"They are often seen, before the outburst of a severe tempest. Of +course, they look like balls of phosphorus; but in reality they are +electric, and are a sign that the whole atmosphere is charged with +electricity. Sailors have all sorts of superstitions about them +but, of course, excepting that they are signs of the condition of +the air, they are perfectly harmless." + +He raised his voice. + +"Don't stand near the foot of the masts, lads; keep well away from +them. There is nothing to be afraid of, in those lights; but if we +happened to be struck by lightning and it ran down the mast, some +of you might be knocked over. + +"I don't know why," he continued, to Harry, "the first flash of +lightning at the beginning of a storm is always the most dangerous. +I can't account for it, in any way, but there is no question as to +the fact. I always feel relieved when the first clap of thunder is +over; for I know, then, that we are comparatively safe from danger, +in that way." + +Gradually the stars disappeared. + +"Mr. Hardy," the captain said to the lieutenant, who was standing +near, "will you go down to my cabin, and see how the glass stands?" + +Harry did not hear the answer, when Hardy returned, but Fairclough +said to him: + +"It has gone down another quarter of an inch since I looked at it, +half an hour ago; and it was as low, then, as I have ever seen it. + +"Mr. Hardy, you had better send the men aloft, and furl the main +top-sail, altogether; and run down the fore stay-sail. We can get +it up again, as soon as the first burst is over. Put four men at +the wheel." + +There was still no breath of wind stirring. The stay sail was run +down, but the men hung back from ascending the shrouds of the main +mast. + +"They are afraid of those lights," Fairclough said, "but I do not +think there is the slightest danger from them." + +"I will go up, myself, sir," Hardy said; and he ran up the +starboard shrouds while, at the same moment, one of the midshipmen +led the way on the port side. The sailors at once followed their +officers. + +The latter had nearly reached the yard, when the two balls of fire +began to roll along it, joined in the centre, and then slowly +ascended the topmast. The fireballs paused there for half a minute, +and then vanished. + +"Now, Eden," the lieutenant said, "let us get the work done, at +once, before that fellow makes his appearance again." + +The men followed them out on the yard, and worked in desperate +haste, with occasional glances up at the mast head. In a couple of +minutes the sail was firmly secured in its gaskets, and all made +their way below. + +"Thank goodness, here it comes, at last," Fairclough said; "the +suspense is more trying than the gale itself." + +A low murmur was heard, and a faint pale light was soon visible to +the south. + +"Get ready to hold on, all!" he shouted to the men. + +The sound momentarily increased in volume, and the distant light +brightened until a long line of white foam was clearly discernible. +It approached with extraordinary speed. There was a sudden puff of +air. It lasted but a few seconds, and then died away. + +"Hold on!" the captain again shouted. + +Half a minute later, with a tremendous roar, the wind struck the +brig. Knowing which way it would come, Fairclough had, half an hour +before, lowered a boat and brought the vessel's head round, so that +it pointed north. The boat had then been hoisted up. + +In the interval of waiting, the ship's head had slightly drifted +round, again, and the wind struck her on the quarter. So great was +the pressure that she heeled far over, burying her bows so deeply +that it seemed as if she were going to dive, head foremost. The +water swept over the bulwarks in torrents, and extended almost up +to the foot of the foremast. Then, very slowly, as she gathered +way, the bow lifted and, in a minute, she was scudding fast before +the gale; gathering speed, every moment, from the pressure of the +wind upon her masts and hull, and from the fragment of sail shown +forward. At present there were no waves, the surface of the water +seeming pressed almost flat by the weight of the wind. + +Then there was a deafening crash, and a blaze of light. The +fore-top mast was riven in fragments, but none of these fell on the +deck, the wind carrying them far ahead. + +"You had better make your way forward, Mr. Hardy," Fairclough +shouted, into the lieutenant's ear, "and see if anyone is hurt." + +Fortunately the precaution which had been taken, of ordering the +men away from the mast, had prevented any loss of life; but several +of the men were temporarily blinded. Three or four had been struck +to the deck, by the passage of the electric fluid close to them; +but these presently regained their feet. Hardy returned, and +reported to the captain. + +"You had better send the carpenter down, to see that there is no +fire below." + +In a minute the man ran up, with the news that he believed the foot +of the mast was on fire. Mr. Hardy went to a group of men. + +"Get some buckets, my lads," he said quietly, "and make your way +down to the hold. I will go with you. As was to be expected, the +lightning has fired the foot of the mast; but there is no cause for +alarm. As we have discovered it so soon, we shall not be long in +getting it under." + +The men at once filled the fire buckets and, led by Mr. Hardy, went +below. As soon as the hatchway leading to the hold was lifted, a +volume of smoke poured up. + +"Wait a minute, till it has cleared off a little," the lieutenant +said; and then, to the midshipman who had accompanied him: + +"Go to the captain, and tell him that there is more smoke than I +like, and ask him to come below. Tell him I think the pumps had +better be rigged, and the hose passed down." + +Fairclough, who was accompanied by Harry, joined him just as he was +about to descend the ladder. + +"I will go down with you, Mr. Hardy," he said. + +"Mr. Eden, will you go up and send down all hands, except those at +the wheel? Set a strong gang to rig the pumps, and pass the hose +down." + +He and the lieutenant then made their way along the hold. The smoke +was very thick, and it was only by stooping low that they could get +along. They could see, however, a glow of light ahead. + +"We can do nothing with this," the captain said, "beyond trying to +keep it from spreading, until we have shifted all these stores. The +gang with buckets had better come down, empty them on the pile, and +then set to work to clear the stuff away, as quickly as possible." + +The men, who came along gradually and with difficulty, began to +remove the barrels, coils of rope, and spare sails stowed there. +Several of them were overpowered by the smoke, and had to be +carried up again; and others came down and took their places. + +In three or four minutes the hose was passed down, and the clank of +the pumps could be heard. Mr. Hardy took the nozzle and while the +men, now a strong party, worked at the stores, directed a stream of +water upon the flames. + +For a time, the efforts seemed to make no impression, and the steam +added to the difficulty of working. Another gang of men were set to +work, forward of the mast and, after half an hour's labour, the +stores were so far removed that the hose could be brought to play +upon the burning mass at the foot of the mast. + +The lieutenant had been relieved by Harry, and he by the two +midshipmen, in succession. Changes were frequent and, in another +quarter of an hour, it was evident that the flames were well under +control. The men engaged below relieved those at the pumps and, in +an hour from the first outbreak, all danger was over, though +pumping was kept up for some time longer. + +The captain made frequent visits to the deck. The vessel was still +running before the wind, and the sea had got up. The motion of the +ship was becoming more and more violent but, as there was nothing +to be done, the men below were not disturbed at their work, and +this was continued until smoke no longer ascended. + + + +Chapter 14: The Great Andaman. + + +Leaving a party below, to clear away the burnt barrels and debris, +and to extinguish any fire that might still smoulder among them, +the rest returned on deck. Terrible as was the storm, it was a +relief, to all, to cling to the rail and breathe the fresh air, +after the stifling atmosphere of the hold. + +The scene, however, was a terrible one. Lightning was flashing +overhead incessantly, although the thunder was only occasionally +heard, above the howl of the storm. The sea was broken and +irregular, leaping in masses over the bulwarks, and sweeping the +decks. The force of the wind continually tore the heads off the +waves, and carried the spray along in blinding showers. + +"We are very near the eye of the hurricane," Captain Fairclough +shouted, in Lindsay's ear. "The men at the wheel tell me she has +been twice round the compass, already; but this broken sea would, +alone, tell that. We must get a little sail on the main mast, and +try to edge out of it." + +A small stay sail was got out and hoisted, and the helm was put +down a little. Though still running at but a slight angle before +the wind, the pressure was now sufficient to lay her down to her +gunwale. The crew gathered under shelter of the weather bulwark, +holding on by belaying pins and stanchions. + +Night had now set in, but it made little difference; for the +darkness had, before, been intense, save for the white crests of +the tossing waves. Sheets of foam blew across the deck and, +sometimes, a heavy fall of water toppled down on the crew. A +pannikin of hot soup had been served out to the men, and this would +be the last hot refreshment they would obtain, before the gale +broke; for the hatchways were all battened down, and it was +impossible to keep the fire alight. + +"The best thing you can do is to turn in, Lindsay," Fairclough +said, after the former had finished his soup--a task of no slight +difficulty, under the circumstances. "You can do no good by +remaining up." + +"How long is it likely to last?" + +"Probably for two or three days, possibly longer." + +"I will take your advice," Harry said. "I shall be glad to get +these wet clothes off." + +For a time, he was sorry that he had lain down, for the motion was +so violent that he could, with difficulty, keep himself in his +berth. Being, however, completely worn out by the buffeting of the +gale, the efforts required to hold on, the excitement of the fire +and storm, it was not long before he dropped off to sleep; and he +did not wake up until a ray of dim light showed that the morning +was breaking. The motion of the ship was unabated and after, with +great difficulty, getting into his clothes, he went up on deck. + +Except that the clouds were somewhat more broken, there was no +change. Dark masses of vapour flew overhead, torn and ragged. The +wild tumble of waves rose and fell, without order or regularity. +Forward, the bulwark on both bows had been carried away, and the +deck was swept clear of every movable object. + +One watch was below, the men of the other were for the most part +gathered aft, and lashed to belaying pins. Fairclough was standing +near the wheel. With some difficulty, Harry made his way to him. + +"Not much change since last night," he said. "I feel quite ashamed +of myself, for having been sleeping in my berth while you have all +been exposed to this gale." + +"There has not been much to do," the commander said. "In fact, +there is nothing to be done, except to keep her as much as we dare +from running straight before the wind. We have not had much success +that way for, as you see, the tumble of water shows that we are +still but a short distance from the centre of the gale. I sent the +starboard watch below at four bells and, in a few minutes, we shall +be relieved. Hardy wanted to stay with me, but I would not have it. + +"The cook has managed, somehow, to boil some water, and served a +pannikin of coffee to all hands, just before the watch turned in; +and he has sent word that he will have some more ready, by the time +they come up again." + +He looked at his watch, and called out, "four bells." + +One of the men made his way to the bell, with alacrity. The watch +below did not come up, for a few minutes, as they waited to drink +their coffee. As soon as they appeared, the men on deck went below. + +"All the better for your sleep, Mr. Hardy?" Fairclough asked, as +the other joined him. + +"Very much better, sir. I think the cook ought to have a medal. The +cup of coffee before we turned in, and that we have just drunk, +have made new men of us." + +"You will call me, instantly, if there is any change, Mr. Hardy. + +"Mr. Eden, you had better come with us. The coffee will be ready, +in my cabin." + +There was no possibility of sitting at the table. But, sitting down +on the floor to leeward, and holding a mug in one hand and a +biscuit in the other, they managed, with some difficulty, to +dispose of the meal. Then Fairclough, putting on some dry clothes, +threw himself on his bunk. The midshipman retired to his own cabin, +and Harry went on deck. + +"How are we heading, Mr. Hardy?" he shouted, when he joined the +lieutenant. + +"At the present moment, we are running nearly due east but, as we +have been round the compass, several times, since the gale struck +us, there is no means of saying, with anything like certainty, +where our position is. But I was talking it over with the captain, +before I went down, and we both agreed that, as the centre of the +hurricane is undoubtedly moving to the northeast, we must have gone +a good many miles in that direction. + +"Of course, there is no means of determining how far till we can +get a glimpse of the sun; but there is no doubt that, if the gale +continues, we shall soon be in a very perilous position, for we +must be driving towards the Andamans. We may have the luck to pass +north of them, or to go between them. + +"We tried, last night, to get up a little more sail; but she would +not stand it, and we were obliged to take it off again. So we can +do nothing but hope for the best." + +Two hours later, Fairclough came out again. + +"I am afraid that you have not been to sleep," Harry said. + +"No. I am all the better for the rest, but sleep was out of the +question. + +"How is she heading now, Mr. Hardy?" + +"Northeast, sir." + +Fairclough took his telescope from the rack in the companion and, +slinging it over his shoulder, mounted the ratlines to the top. + +"Have you made out anything?" he asked the sailor stationed there. + +"I have thought, once or twice, sir, that I saw land ahead; but I +could not say for certain. It is so thick that it is only when the +clouds open a bit that one has a chance." + +Although he had taken his glass with him, Fairclough did not +attempt to use it, at present; but stood gazing fixedly ahead. A +quarter of an hour later there was a sudden rift in the clouds, and +a low shore was visible, some five or six miles ahead; and a dark +mass, much farther off, rising into the cloud. Fairclough instantly +unslung the telescope, and adjusted it. A minute afterwards the +clouds closed in again and, telling the man to keep a sharp +lookout, he descended to the deck. + +"We must set the main top-sail on her again, close reefed, of +course. We are running straight for land and, unless I am much +mistaken, it is the great Andaman. There is a lofty hill, some +distance back from the shore. I only caught a glimpse of its lower +part, but none of the small islands have any hill to speak of. The +shore is about six miles off and, as the peak lies about the centre +of the island, and as this is a hundred and forty miles long, we +are some seventy miles from the northern point. + +"You know what that means. However, we must do all that we can, to +keep her off." + +"Ay, ay, sir," Hardy said, turning without another word, and then +gave orders to the men to set the top sail. + +This was done, and the ship's course was laid parallel to the +shore. The wind was now nearly northwest, and she lay down until +the water was several planks up her deck. The crew were all lashed +to windward, clustering where they would be most out of danger, +should the mast go. + +Fairclough stood for a minute, looking at the shivering mast, and +the shrouds stretched like iron bars. + +"We must get the guns overboard, Mr. Hardy; she will never stand +this," and indeed the waves, striking her broadside, were falling +in a cascade over her. + +Calling four of the men, Hardy made his way down into the lee +scuppers, where the water was nearly up to their waists; opened the +portholes and slacked the lashings, when the four guns disappeared +overboard. It required much greater pains to get down the guns from +the port side, as tackle had to be attached to each, so that they +could be lowered carefully, one by one, across the deck; but all +worked heartily, and these also were launched overboard. + +"That has eased her, a bit," Fairclough said, when Hardy rejoined +him. "They helped to pin her down, and I could almost feel the +difference, as each gun went overboard." + +"I am afraid that it will make no difference, in the long run," +Hardy said. "She must be making a great deal of leeway, and I +should say that she will be on shore in a couple of hours, at the +latest. Still, we may have time to look out for a soft spot." + +"We should not have much chance, in that case, Hardy; my only hope +is in another shift of wind." + +"But it will go round more to the north, sir, and then we sha'n't +be able to lie our course, at all. It has gone round a point, since +we got up the top sail." + +"Quite so; and I doubt whether it will go round soon enough to save +us. If it should go round a little more to the north, we must try +and get her on the other tack; but I am afraid, in such a sea, she +will not go about. Of course, our great aim is to reach Port +Cornwallis; or, if we cannot get as far as that, I have just been +having a look at the chart, and I see there are three narrow +straits. How much water there is in them, I do not know. They are +most vaguely marked on the chart. One of them is but thirty miles +north of our present position and, if we find that we cannot make +the northern point, I shall try to get in there. I am not sure +that, in any case, it would not be the best plan; for if there is +only water enough to run a mile or so up this passage, we shall +ground in comparatively still water; whereas, as the wind has been +blowing from every quarter, it is almost certain that there will be +a tremendous sea in the open port." + +Fairclough placed himself at the wheel, and told the two midshipmen +to go round, and tell the crew that there was an inlet ahead, but +the depth of the water was uncertain. When they approached it, all +hands would come aft, so as to avoid being crushed by the falling +masts. A dozen of the men were to take hatchets, and cut away the +wreckage if the mast fell, leaving only a couple of the shrouds +uncut. When this was done, directly the vessel began to break up, +those who could not swim were to make their way by these shrouds to +the floating mast. Those who could swim could make, at once, for +the shore. + +"When all have left the ship but Mr. Hardy and myself, we will cut +the shrouds; and the masts will probably ground, ere long." + +While before the sailors had, for the most part, been gazing at the +coast, on which they had little doubt that their bodies would soon +be cast up; they became lively and active, as soon as they received +the order. It seemed that, after all, there was a chance for them. + +Four hours passed. The wind had now so far headed them that the +brig could no longer keep her course parallel with the shore. Twice +they had endeavoured to put her about, but each time failed; and +she was now making so much leeway that the coast was less than +three miles away. A tremendous sea was breaking upon it. One of the +midshipmen had, for the past hour, been in the foretop with a +glass; and the captain himself now went up, and took his place +beside him. He saw at once that, accustomed as he was to use his +telescope in rough weather, it would be useless here; for the +motion was so great that it was only by following the midshipman's +example, and lashing himself to the mast, that he could retain a +footing. + +"You are sure that you have seen no break in the surf, Mr. Eden?" + +"Quite sure, sir." + +"We ought not to be far from it, now, if it is rightly marked on +the chart." + +Another hour passed, and they were within a mile and a half of the +shore. + +"I think that I can see a break, over there, sir," and the +midshipman pointed to a spot a mile along the coast. + +"Pray God that it may be so," Fairclough said, "for it is our only +chance." + +Two or three minutes later, he said: + +"You are right, there is certainly a break there. There is a line +of surf, but it does not run up the shore, as it does everywhere +else." + +He at once descended to the deck. + +"Thank God!" he said, as he joined Mr. Hardy and Harry who, on +seeing him coming down, had made their way to the shrouds, "there +is a break in the surf. It is not a complete break, but there is +certainly an inlet of some sort. And though it looks as if there +were a bar, there may be plenty of water for us for, with such a +sea as this, it would break in three fathoms of water and, as we +don't draw more than two, we may get over it. At any rate, it is +our only hope." + +"It gives us a chance, if we strike," the lieutenant said, "for it +will be comparatively calm water, inside the bar. Those who can +swim should have no difficulty in getting ashore. The others might +do so, on wreckage. Her masts are sure to come out of her, if she +strikes heavily." + +"I shall be obliged if you will go up to the foretop, Hardy, and +con the brig in; but mind you, come down before we get to the white +water. You may as well send Mr. Eden down." + +Mr. Hardy was not long before he came down again and, at the +captain's suggestion, both he and Harry went below, and armed +themselves with pistols. As soon as they came up again, they took +their places by Fairclough. The seamen had all gathered aft. The +boatswain had cut the lashings holding the spars--that had been +sent down from aloft--in their place by the bulwarks. The boats had +all been torn from their davits, or smashed; with the exception of +the largest cutter, which lay bottom upwards in the middle of the +ship, securely lashed to the deck. + +"Now, men," the captain said, raising his voice almost to a shout, +so that all might hear him, "you have behaved as well as men could +do, during this storm; and I have no doubt that you will continue +to do so, to the end. Remember that no one is to leave the ship, +till I give the order. If you are cool and calm, there is good +ground for hope that all may be saved. + +"If the mast falls, you who have hatchets run forward at once, and +stand in readiness to cut the lanyards; but don't strike until I +give the order." + +They were now fast approaching the line of surf. + +"Let everyone take hold of something," Mr. Fairclough shouted. "If +we strike, we are sure to be pooped." + +Another minute, and she was close to the breaking waves. Everyone +held his breath as, impelled by a great breaker, she dashed into +the surf with the swiftness of an arrow. There was a shock, +followed by a grating noise, and then the brig slowly came to a +standstill. + +"Hold on, hold on for your lives!" the captain shouted, as a wave +even larger than the last came towering up behind them, in an +almost perpendicular wall. It struck the vessel with tremendous +force, and swept waist deep along the deck; while the vessel, +herself, surged forward. There was another shock, but this time +much slighter and, as the next wave carried them on, there was a +general cheer from the sailors. + +"She has floated, she is through it, hurrah!" + +She was, indeed, over the bar. + +"There are men in the water," Fairclough shouted. "Get ready to +cast ropes to them." + +Four men, who had been swept overboard by the rush of water, were +rescued; two others were found dead on the deck, having been dashed +against the stanchions, or other obstacles. + +The brig continued her course, four or five hundred yards farther +then, as the banks of the inlet closed in, Fairclough gave orders +for the anchors to be let go. Everything had been prepared for this +order, and the anchors at once dropped and, as soon as fifty +fathoms of chain had been run out, the brig swung round head to +wind. + +"Muster the men, and see if any are missing." + +This was done, and only one, besides three found dead, did not +answer to his name. The general opinion was that he had struck +against something, as he was swept overboard, and had been killed +or disabled; for all who had been seen in the water had been +rescued. + +"Serve out an allowance of grog, all round, Mr. Eden," Fairclough +said, "and tell the cook to get his fire alight, as soon as +possible. We shall all be glad of a good meal. + +"Well, thank God, everything has ended far better than we could +have hoped for!" + +Two hours later the crew, having got into dry clothes, were sitting +down, enjoying a plentiful allowance of pea soup and salt junk; +while the officers were partaking of similar fare, in the cabin. +None who saw them there would have dreamt of the long struggle they +had been through, and that the ship was well nigh a wreck. It was +now late in the afternoon, and Fairclough gave orders that all +might turn in, as soon as they liked; except that an anchor watch, +of four men, must maintain a sharp lookout, for the natives of the +island were bitterly hostile to the whites. + +"I don't think there is any real danger," he said to Harry, "or +that they will attempt to take the ship. Their habit is, I have +heard, to lie in hiding, and to shoot their arrows at any stranger +who may land." + +They sat chatting, for an hour, after the meal was concluded. Then +the conversation flagged, and Fairclough said, presently: + +"I think that we may as well follow the men's example, and turn in. +I can hardly keep my eyes open." + +The gale was still blowing strongly, in the morning, though its +force had somewhat abated. But inside the bar there was but a +slight swell, and the brig rode easily at her anchors; for the wind +was now several points west of north, and they were consequently +protected by the land. + +The work of repairing damages began at once for, owing to the +length of the voyage, the stores of provisions and water were +beginning to run very short. Two or three buffaloes had been +bought, at the village where Harry had landed but, with the +exception of some fruit, and the meat sent off by the tumangong, no +other fresh food had been obtained, since they sailed from +Calcutta. The boat was turned over and launched; and the work of +making a new fore-top mast, and overhauling the rigging, proceeded +with. + +During the day, several of the natives were observed at the edge of +the forest by Harry who, having no special work to do, had been +asked by Fairclough to keep his eye on the shore, and to ascertain +whether they were being watched; as he intended, when the repairs +were finished, to see if any spring of fresh water existed in the +neighbourhood. He therefore kept a telescope directed on the shore +and, soon after daybreak, made out two little men at the edge of +the trees. + +The natives of the Andaman Islands are among the lowest types of +humanity known. Their stature does not exceed five feet and, with +their slender limbs and large heads, their appearance is almost +that of a deformed people. They use no clothing whatever, +plastering their bodies with clay, or mud, to protect the skin from +the sun's rays. Animals are scarce on the islands, and the people +live chiefly on fish. They carry bows and arrows, and heavy spears; +to which, in most cases, are added shields. They inhabit +roughly-made arbours, and seldom remain long at any spot; moving +about in small communities, according to the abundance or scarcity +of food. They use no cooking utensils, and simply prepare their +food by placing it on burning embers. + +The men first made out soon disappeared but, later on, Harry could +see that there were many of them inside the line of forest. + +"It is a nuisance," the captain said, when he told him the result +of his examination of the shore. "I suppose, in a day or two, we +shall have hundreds of them down here. I don't think they will try +to interfere with us, as long as we are at work; but they will +certainly oppose us, if we attempt to enter the forest, and will +effectually prevent our wandering about in search of water. We +could only go in a strong body and, even then, might lose a good +many lives from their arrows. + +"Of course, we should be able to beat them off; but I should be +sorry to have to kill a lot of the poor little beggars. One can +hardly blame them for their hostility. Naturally, they want to have +the place to themselves, and are just as averse to our landing as +our forefathers were to Julius Caesar and his Romans. + +"Of course they would be, if they only knew it, very much better +off by being civil. We have numbers of things that would be +invaluable to them. For instance, I would willingly give them a +dozen cooking pots, and as many frying pans, if they would let us +obtain water peaceably. I suppose that, at some time or other, +Malays landed here, and carried off a number of heads; or they may +have been shot down by some reckless ruffians of traders, and have +so come to view all strangers as deadly enemies. However, so far as +I have heard, there is no chance of their being friendly; and +native traders say that, of vessels that have been wrecked on the +coast, none of the crew ever escaped. + +"By the way, I believe that fish are extremely plentiful here. We +have a good supply of fishing lines on board, for we generally fish +when we are at anchor." + +"If you will let me have them, tomorrow," Harry said, "Abdool and I +will look after that. I hate having nothing to do and, certainly, +fish would be a very agreeable change, after such a long spell of +salt meat." + +"You shall have them, the first thing in the morning." + +Accordingly, the next day the lines were got out; and the Malay +interpreter, who knew a great deal more of fishing than did Harry +or Abdool, took the matter in hand. The hooks were baited with +pieces of meat, or shreds of white or scarlet bunting. The fish bit +eagerly, and all three were kept actively employed in drawing them +up, and rebaiting the hooks. They were of all sizes, from a quarter +of a pound to four or five pounds and, by dinner time, there were +enough to furnish an ample meal for all on board. + +"I will keep three or four of the men at work, this afternoon," +Fairclough said, "and we will have night lines down. We can salt +down those we do not eat and, at any rate, we shall not be drawing +much on our stores." + +By evening the new fore-top mast was in its place. As the heaviest +part of the work was now done, orders were given for a boat's crew +to start, in the morning, to cruise along the coast and see if any +stream ran into it. Mr. Eden was to be in command. The crew were to +be well armed, but were not to attempt to effect a landing. + +The sea had now calmed down, and the southwest monsoon was blowing +steadily. + +"You had better go south. The land is much higher there, and there +is more likelihood of there being streams. I think you will be able +to lie your course or, at any rate, make a long leg and a short +one. You are to go, as nearly as you can tell, twenty miles. If you +do not meet with a stream by that time, turn back. You will have +the wind free, then, and can be back here well before sunset. Of +course, if you find fresh water, you will at once return. + +"Would you like to go with the boat, Mr. Lindsay?" + +"Very much. My hands are so sore, from hauling in the lines, that I +am afraid I shall not be able to help in the fishing, tomorrow." + +The party started early. It consisted of ten men, the coxswain, the +midshipmen, and Harry. The surf was no longer breaking on the bar +outside. There was a bright sea, with white-crested waves and, +before starting, the captain ordered a reef to be put in the sails. + +"She could carry full sail, well enough," he said to Harry, "but +there is no occasion for haste; and it is always best to be on the +safe side, especially when a middy is in command. Besides, it is +just as well to keep dry jackets." + +A keg of water and a supply of food, sufficient for two days, were +placed on board. + +"I expect you will be back by three o'clock in the afternoon, Mr. +Eden; but it is always well to provide against any accident." + +With the sheets hauled tight aft, the cutter was just able to lie +her course, outside the line of breakers. In a little over an hour +there was a break in the shore, and a stream of some forty feet +wide fell into the sea; and a general cheer broke from the sailors, +who had been put on allowance for the past week. + +"Put her about, coxswain," the midshipman said; "we need go no +farther." + +"Can't we land, and have a bathe, sir?" the coxswain asked. + +"Certainly not. That is the very thing that we mus'n't do. For +anything we know, there may be natives about; and some of us might +get stuck full of their arrows before we could get out of range. +This will be good news, and there will be no longer any need for +your being kept on short allowance of water." + +At ten o'clock the boat re-entered the inlet, and lowered sail by +the side of the brig. + +"You have been successful, I suppose, by your coming back so soon, +Mr. Eden?" the captain said, when they were within easy hail. + +"Yes, sir. There is a small stream, about seven miles from here." + +"That is very satisfactory. Now you can come on board. There is +plenty of work for all hands." + +Everyone, indeed, was busy in repairing damages. The carpenters +were engaged upon the bulwarks and the stern, which had been much +damaged by the wave that had lifted them over the bar. As there +were not sufficient planks on board for this work, canvas was +utilized for filling up the gaps in the bulwarks; and this, after +being nailed to temporary stanchions, was coated with pitch. All +hands worked cheerfully. The change of diet already benefited them, +and the news that there was plenty of fresh water near enabled the +remaining supply to be freely used--a matter of no slight +consequence, to men working in the broiling sun. + +Two days later the work was finished and, on the following morning, +the anchors were weighed and the sails shaken out; and the brig +left the inlet that had saved them from destruction and, after +sailing out to sea a couple of miles, came about and laid her +course for the mouth of the stream. + +The fishing had been continued, without intermission. Watches had +again been set, and the work of attending to the lines was very +welcome, as helping to pass away the four hours of darkness. By the +time they left the inlet, a sufficient quantity had been salted +down to last the ship's company for a week, without recourse to the +salt-meat casks. + +The carpenter, with three or four assistants, had patched up the +second cutter--the boat that had been least injured. The others had +been broken up for firewood, some of the pieces being reserved for +the repairs of the cutter. + +As soon as the brig reached the mouth of the stream she was +anchored, two hundred yards off the shore. The water barrels had +already been got up on deck, and some of these were lowered into +the first cutter, of which Mr. Hardy took the command. It was not +deemed advisable to employ the second boat in bringing water on +board as, if heavily laden, the water would force its way in +through the hastily-executed repairs. The captain, then, +accompanied by Harry and an armed crew, took his place in her; and +went ahead of the larger boat into the stream. + +It was found to be but three or four feet deep, with a slow current +and, for some little distance up, was too brackish to be used. It +was not until they entered the line of forest that it was found +fresh enough. The men in the first cutter proceeded to fill their +casks, while those in the other boat laid in their oars and, musket +in hand, watched the forest. In a few minutes the work was done, +and the first cutter rowed straight for the brig; while the second +cutter followed her, for some distance beyond the trees, and there +waited for her return. + +"So far, so good," Fairclough said; "but I am afraid that we shall +be disturbed, before we have made another trip. No doubt, some of +the natives followed the cutter along the shore, yesterday. I don't +suppose they recognized what your object was, as you did not enter +the stream; but when they saw the brig going the same way this +morning, I have no doubt that they set off in this direction. +However, with one more boat load we can manage, well enough, until +we reach the Hooghly for, with this wind, we shall make a quick +run." + +In a quarter of an hour the cutter was seen returning and, when it +approached them, Fairclough again took the lead. All appeared still +in the forest, and the men had just begun to refill the casks, when +a shower of arrows fell among the boats. + +"Let half your men go on with their work, Mr. Hardy, and the others +stand to their arms." + +Not a single foe was visible, but the arrows still flew fast from +among the trees. + +"Open fire!" Fairclough said. "Fire anywhere among the bushes. I +don't suppose that we shall hit them, but it may frighten them. +They can't know much about firearms." + +From both boats a scattering fire of musketry at once opened, the +men loading and firing as quickly as they could. The effect was +immediate. Arrows still fell, but only occasionally; and evidently +shot at random, for but few of them came near the boats. + +The men in the first cutter were working energetically, dipping +breakers into the water and emptying them into the large casks. In +three or four minutes these were filled, and Hardy hailed the +captain. + +"We are full up, now, sir, both casks and breakers." + +"Then retire at once, Mr. Hardy. We will follow you." + +As they issued from under the trees, the arrows again fell fast. + +"Don't fire," the captain said; "perhaps they may issue out, and +then we will give them a lesson--that it is better not to interfere +with men who are doing them no harm." + +This proved to be the case. No one had been hit by the fire from +the boats and, now that the shooting had ceased, the natives, with +shouts of triumph, ran out from the forest. There were some +hundreds of them. + +The captain hailed the boat in front. + +"Stop rowing, Mr. Hardy, and open fire on them. + +"Now, lads," he went on, to his own crew, "fire steadily, and don't +throw away a shot." + +[Illustration: The rattle of musketry broke out again.] + +As the rattle of musketry broke out again from both boats, many of +the natives dropped. The others stopped, at once. A shower of +arrows was discharged; and then, as the fire was kept up, they fled +back into the woods; and the men, again taking to their oars, rowed +out without further molestation to the brig. None of the crew had +been killed, but four were wounded by the arrows. + +"I hope they are not poisoned," Fairclough said, in a low voice, to +Harry. "I don't know whether they use poison, on these islands; but +we must hope not. However, we will not frighten them by even +hinting at the possibility of such a thing." + +Happily, however, no evil symptoms resulted. The wounds were, for +the most part slight and, the next day, all were able to return to +their duty. The fair weather now set in and, ten days later, the +brig dropped anchor in the river, opposite Calcutta. + +Harry at once went ashore, and handed to the Governor a full report +of what had taken place. + +"I have not time to read this rather bulky report of yours, at +present, Captain Lindsay," the latter said, with a smile. "Please +give me the pith of it, as shortly as possible." + +"The island, sir, is well adapted for a trading station; and would, +I should think, when the forests are partly cleared away, be a +healthy one. I have interviewed the tumangong, who has signed a +document agreeing, at any time in the future that it may be +desired, to cede either a trading station or the whole island to +us. He was greatly pleased with the presents that you sent; and is, +I believe, thoroughly in earnest in his desire for a trading +station to be established so close to him. The Rajah of Johore has +ratified this agreement, and has given his cordial consent for the +cession of the island to us. + +"It seems that he, himself, is an usurper. The rightful heir is a +boy of seven or eight years old, and I think it is possible that, +either at the present man's death, or possibly even before that, he +may ascend the throne. At present, he and his mother are in the +hands of the reigning rajah; but I have promised her that, if we +take possession of Singapore, she and her son can find an asylum +there, and a small pension for her maintenance; and she, on her +part, has promised that she will bring up her son to regard us as +his best friends; and that he, if he ascends the throne, shall also +ratify the treaty, and will become our warm ally. + +"As to the Dutch, the reply of their Governor is with the report, +but certainly it is an unfavourable one; and no cooperation, in the +work of repressing piracy, can be expected from them." + +"I did not expect it, Captain Lindsay; and indeed, as I told you at +the time, only sent you to Batavia in order to account for the +presence of one of our ships of war in those waters. + +"Well, sir, your mission has been, in all respects, most +satisfactory. I shall read your report, and give it full +consideration, at my leisure. For the present you will remain here, +available for any office, military or civil; but at present, at any +rate, you will retain your civil employment. + +"I will not ask you to dine with me, today, as it is hardly likely +that I shall have time to read your report, this afternoon; but I +shall be glad if you will do so, tomorrow, and you can then answer +any questions that may suggest themselves to me." + + + +Chapter 15: Assaye. + + +While the Deccan had been torn by civil war, the Government of +Bombay had extended their territory. The Nabob of Surat, who had +been under their protection, had died; and they had taken the +government of the province into their own hands. A civil war having +broken out, at Baroda, they had supported one of the rival princes; +and had, after a good deal of fighting, placed their candidate on +the throne--various districts being assigned to them, in return for +their assistance. + +Holkar, on hearing of Bajee's arrival at Bassein, placed his +brother Amrud on the musnud, and commenced a series of atrocities, +in Poona, equal to that which it had suffered at the hands of +Ghatgay; respectable inhabitants being robbed and ill treated, many +tortured, and some killed, in order to wring from them the +treasures that they were supposed to have concealed. + +During the months that followed his return to Calcutta, Harry +remained attached to the staff of the Marquis of Wellesley--for to +this title Lord Mornington had succeeded, during his absence, on +the death of his father--and was sent on various missions; among +others accompanying the Governor General's brother, the Honorable +Henry Wellesley, to the court of Oude. He could now speak +Hindustani, as well as Mahratti; and was very useful in acting as +an interpreter, and in aiding to carry on the negotiations. + +In February, 1803, he was sent by the Governor General to join the +force that Major General Wellesley was preparing, in Mysore, to aid +Bajee Rao to recover his throne. The treaty that the latter had +concluded with the Government, on his arrival at Bassein, was a +most advantageous one to the English. In return for their +assistance, he agreed that a force of infantry, with guns and +European artillerymen, should be stationed within his territories; +their maintenance being paid by handing over to the Company a large +amount of territory. The two parties were to support each other in +case of war, and the Peishwa bound himself not to make aggressions +against other states, nor to negotiate with them without the +Governor's consent. The Peishwa agreed, also, to abandon the +Mahratta claims on Surat, and other districts that had been +occupied by the English. + +On arriving at General Wellesley's camp, Harry reported himself to +that officer for service. + +"I am very glad to have you with me, Captain Lindsay. I have +frequently heard my brother speak of your services, and your +perfect knowledge of Mahratti, and your acquaintance with its +people will be of great value to me. + +"You know the Peishwa well. Do you think that he will be faithful +to the engagement that he has made with us?" + +"Certainly not, sir. He has been intriguing, ever since he ascended +the musnud. His duplicity is only equalled by his treachery and, as +soon as he is restored, in Poona, he will again begin his intrigues +with Scindia and the other Mahratta chiefs." + +"That is the opinion that I have formed of him, from what I have +heard," the general said. "However, the terms of the treaty will +render him practically our servant; for we shall maintain a body of +troops near Poona, which will effectually prevent any scheme of his +from succeeding. + +"What course Holkar will take, we cannot say; but the other +Mahratta chiefs have all entered into a confederacy against us, and +we shall have the forces of Scindia, of the Rajah of Bhopal, the +Rajah of Berar, and the Rajah of Kolapoore to deal with." + +The partition of Mysore had, indeed, done much to unite the +Mahrattas together. The ever-increasing power of the British was a +serious source of alarm for, in addition to Mysore, Lord Wellesley +had, without a shadow of justification, obtained the control of +Oude. + +"I am sorry, sir, that the Rajah of Berar has declared against us. +I was nearly three months with him; and should, after the news of +the capture of Seringapatam, have fallen a victim to the fury of +the Mohammedans in the city, had he not taken me under his +protection. But at the same time, I have no doubt in my mind that +he was ready to join whichever side was victorious." + +"You have, then, no good opinion of the Mahrattas, Captain +Lindsay?" + +"I have met but one honest man among them. Nana Furnuwees was not +only an extraordinary man, but devoted his talents wholly to the +good of the state. His word could always be relied upon. His life +was simple, and his habits frugal. I honoured and esteemed him, +greatly." + +"Yes, it was owing to you, as my brother told me, that he was +released from prison. I was greatly struck with the story, when I +heard it; because it showed how much can be accomplished, even by +the youngest officer who is active, and enterprising, and ready to +act on his own initiative. I saw a copy of Mr. Uhtoff's report of +the affair. + +"Well, you will be attached to my staff, with no particular duties, +at present; but doubtless we shall find plenty for you to do, when +we once cross the frontier into the Mahratta country." + +Harry found that, in addition to the eight thousand infantry and +seventeen hundred cavalry, under the command of General Wellesley, +the Nizam's force of eight thousand regular troops and fifteen +thousand irregulars were advancing towards the frontier, the whole +commanded by Colonel Stephenson. On the 25th of March these forces +advanced, and were joined by numerous small Mahratta chiefs in the +Peishwa's interest. General Wellesley's army advanced straight on +Poona, which was evacuated at once by Holkar's force and, as it was +stated that he intended to burn the town, before he retired, the +general hastened forward with his cavalry and, on the 20th of +April, took possession of the place. Colonel Stephenson, whose +cooperation was no longer required, moved north towards the +Godavery, to protect the country against the irruptions of Holkar. + +Four weeks later Bajee Rao arrived from the coast, and resumed his +seat on the musnud amid great rejoicings by the inhabitants; who +had suffered terribly, both at the hands of Ghatgay and Holkar. + +Scindia, having recovered from the effects of his defeat by Holkar, +had returned, crossed the Nerbudda, and encamped on the Nizam's +frontier. He was busy preparing for war, in conjunction with the +Rajah of Berar; and had even made overtures, to Holkar, to join in +opposing the English. Bajee Rao himself, as was afterwards +discovered, was also in friendly communication with Scindia. + +The Resident at Scindia's court was ordered to leave it, unless +that prince retired from his position on the Nizam's frontier. +Scindia, when summoned, sent a defiant reply and, as it was now +evident that war was impending, General Wellesley was invested with +full powers; and Lord Lake, who commanded the army of Hindustan, +was ordered to advance to attack the formidable force of French +infantry, under Perron, and take possession of Delhi, Agra, and +other places held by the Mahrattas. Another attempt was made to +persuade Scindia to retire; but evasive answers were returned, and +it was not until the 3rd of August that the Resident quitted +Scindia, and Wellesley prepared to attack Ahmednuggur. + +The possession of this place was of great importance, because it +was situated close to the Nizam's frontier, and afforded great +facilities for future operations. The town was surrounded by a +wall, flanked by towers; and was defended by a number of Arabs, and +a battalion of Scindia's regular infantry. These offered a vigorous +resistance for, after a breach had been made in the walls, and the +troops had entered, they retired; fighting from house to house, and +keeping up a heavy fire. However, by nightfall they were driven +inside their fort. + +A battery of four guns was erected, within four hundred yards of +it; and these opened with such effect that the governor +surrendered, on being allowed to depart with the garrison and their +private property. + +On the 24th, General Wellesley crossed the Godavery; Colonel +Stephenson moving in the direction of Aurungabad. Scindia and the +Rajah of Berar were now within forty miles of him; but they +suddenly turned off, as if intending to make a dash for Hyderabad, +where the Nizam had expired, three weeks before. + +Wellesley followed close after them, and they then turned and took +up a position to the north of Julnapoor, a town lying east of +Aurungabad. On the 2nd of September, Julnapoor was captured by +Colonel Stephenson; who afterwards made a night attack upon +Scindia's camp, inflicting considerable loss. + +On the 21st the whole Mahratta army, with sixteen battalions of +regular infantry, were encamped twenty-two miles north of Julnapoor +and, the next day, the army marched against them by two routes; +Colonel Stephenson taking the western road, and General Wellesley +the eastern. + +The next afternoon, when about to halt, General Wellesley learned +that the Mahrattas were encamped about six miles from him, on the +banks of the Kaitna. He determined to attack them at once, without +waiting for Colonel Stephenson; for in another day they would, in +all probability, send off their infantry, and begin to carry on a +desultory warfare with their horse. + +[Illustration: Plan of the Battle of Assaye.] + +The general rode on, with his staff and an escort of cavalry, and +obtained a view of the Mahratta host from rising ground. They were +in the fork formed by the junction of the Kaitna with the Juah. +Their right consisted wholly of cavalry, and was protected by the +high and rocky bank of the stream; which was, at one or two points, +impassable for guns. Their left, consisting of the infantry and +artillery, was posted in the village of Assaye, which lay near the +fork of the river. + +The general determined, at once, to attack at this point. The force +under his command consisted of four battalions of Sepoys, and the +74th and 78th Regiments; with the 19th Dragoons, and three +regiments of native cavalry--in all, four thousand five hundred +men. Opposed to them were ten thousand five hundred disciplined +troops, taught and commanded by European officers; Scindia's +irregulars, and the infantry of the Rajah of Berar; with a +well-appointed train of artillery, of over a hundred guns, and some +forty thousand cavalry. + +From the position in which the British force arrived they had to +march, for some distance, parallel with the river; and exposed to a +terrible artillery fire, which created such havoc, especially among +the bullocks drawing the guns, that the cavalry could not move +forward. The infantry therefore proceeded alone, crossed the Kaitna +by a ford; and then, swinging round, advanced against the village. +While they were crossing the river, the Mahratta cavalry were +brought up from their former position, and took post behind Assaye. + +The steadiness with which the little force advanced to the attack, +against so immense an army, had already had the effect of shaking +the Mahrattas. It seemed to them that their opponents must be +conscious that they were invincible. Pouring in a volley, the first +British line charged with the bayonet. The Mahratta infantry at +once wavered, and then gave way; and fell back on their second +line, posted near the Juah. + +As the 74th Regiment passed through the village, a body of Mahratta +horse charged them; but they were met by the British cavalry, who +drove them, with great slaughter, into the river. The second +Mahratta line gave way, with scarcely any resistance; and the +British cavalry, pressing hotly after them, cut them up terribly. +The infantry followed, as quickly as possible. + +But suddenly there was a roar of guns, behind them; and the flying +Mahrattas at once rallied, and faced their pursuers. As they +advanced, the force had captured the Mahrattas' guns; but numbers +of the artillerymen had thrown themselves down, lying as if dead. +As soon as they saw that the British line was still pressing +forward in pursuit, the artillerymen leapt to their feet and, +turning the guns, opened fire. + +The general at once put himself at the head of the 71st Regiment +and the native cavalry and, after a desperate conflict, in which +the general had his horse shot under him, succeeded in recapturing +the guns. In the meantime, Colonel Maxwell with the cavalry had, +again and again, charged the fugitives who had rallied; and +succeeded in completely breaking them up, but was himself killed. + +The battle had lasted three hours. One thousand five hundred and +sixty-six of the British force were killed, or wounded, being +rather more than a third of the troops engaged. The enemy left +twelve hundred dead on the field of battle, and the country through +which they retreated was covered with their wounded. The camp, with +a number of bullocks, and a large quantity of military stores and +ninety-eight cannon, fell into the hands of the victors. + +Scindia, in great alarm, sent an ambassador to the British camp +and, after various conferences, a truce was agreed upon between him +and the general; the conditions being that Scindia should not +approach within forty miles of his frontier, and that the British +should not enter his dominions. + +On the day after the battle of Assaye, the general sent for Harry. + +"Captain Lindsay, I have a mission which you can carry out better +than any of my other officers. I wish you to make your way across +the country, to inform General Lake of the victory we have won; and +to point out that, at present, Scindia is paralysed, and will be +unable to send troops to aid his force in the northwest for, should +he do so, I shall at once enter his territory. + +"Do not run the risk of returning, but tell Lord Lake that my +orders are that you shall remain with him. I do not think that we +shall have much fighting here though, no doubt, later on, Holkar +and the Rajah of Berar will reform their armies and try conclusions +with us again; while, on the other side, there is likely to be +heavy fighting. You must, of course, travel in disguise, but you +are already accustomed to that." + +"I will willingly undertake the mission, sir." + +"Would you like to take anyone with you?" + +"I should be glad if you will give me four troopers, from one of +your native cavalry regiments. I shall, of course, ride as a petty +chief, but I might be interrupted in small villages, were I alone +with only my servant; whereas, if I had four followers, it would +appear natural to them, as even the pettiest leader is always +accompanied by a party, however small, of horsemen." + +"Certainly. I will give orders to the colonel of the 1st Cavalry to +choose four well-mounted men, who can speak Mahratti. There are +many such in his regiment." + +There was no difficulty about disguises, for a large quantity of +native clothing had been found in the camp. Harry chose a dress +suitable for a native in command of some fifty or sixty men; and +the four troopers attired themselves in the garments of native +soldiers, which indeed differed in no way from those worn by the +peasantry. Harry had packed his uniform in his native saddlebag; +and also his cocked hat, after taking out the stiffening so that it +would lie flat; and had exchanged his own saddle for that of one of +Holkar's horsemen. He advised the men to do the same so that, when +they joined Lord Lake, they would be able at once to appear in +uniform. There was an abundance of native swords and spears lying +where the Mahratta force had been defeated. + +Abdool had at once been sent into the village, and had there +succeeded in buying some brown dye, used in colouring the clothes; +and with this Harry stained his face and hands and, two hours after +receiving the order, rode out from camp, followed by Abdool and the +four troopers. + +He considered that there was but little danger in the journey as, +for the greater portion of the distance, he would ride through the +dominions of the young Nizam. He would, however, have to pass +through the territory of the Rajah of Berar; beyond this, he would +enter the country in which the British were already supreme. While +in the Nizam's dominions, he experienced no difficulties; the news +of the victory of Assaye had already spread, and the inhabitants +were relieved of the fears they had been entertaining of a great +raid, by Holkar. The passage, therefore, of a petty chief with four +followers was regarded with indifference; and indeed, he was +generally supposed to be one of the Nizam's irregular cavalry, on +his way with some message to Hyderabad. + +Still less attention was paid to him in the villages of Berar. Many +bodies of the rajah's troops had already passed through, on their +way to Nagpore, and they were naturally taken to be some of the +fugitives. + +They travelled as rapidly as possible. The horses were all inured +to long journeys, and they had made from fifty to sixty miles a +day. They halted at a village, twenty miles east of Nagpore. +Nothing unusual had happened, and Harry had just lain down to +sleep, when there was a sound as of people gathering in front of +his hut. + +He was about to rise, to see what was going on; when the door was +opened, and a number of armed villagers at once poured into the +room, and he was seized before he had time to leap to his feet. He +made no attempt at resistance but, believing that some mistake had +been committed, he angrily demanded the reason of this assault. + +He was dragged out into the street. As this happened he heard +pistol shots and, a moment later, the four troopers rode up. + +One of them had remained at the door of the hut, while the others +had lain down. Seeing a number of people moving about, he had +roused his companions. They had got out of the window at the back +of the hut. Here their horses had been picketed and, mounting at +once, they rode out, just as a body of men made a rush at the door +of their hut. By the use of their pistols and swords they had +broken through these and, seeing the crowd in front of the hut that +Harry had occupied, they charged without hesitation. + +The villagers, unprepared for such an attack, fell back; losing +their hold of Harry, and Abdool, whom they had also captured. The +latter darted away and, in a few seconds, returned leading the two +horses. + +"Shall we set the houses alight, before we start, sahib?" one of +the troopers asked. + +"No; they may rally in a minute or two, and the sooner we are out +of it, the better." + +He turned and started at once and, as he did so, a dropping fire +from matchlocks and guns was opened upon them. The villagers' arms +were, however, wholly untrustworthy, and the powder bad. One of the +troopers was hit in the arm but, with that exception, they rode out +unharmed. + +"What does it all mean, Abdool?" Harry asked as, after riding fast +for a quarter of a mile, they broke into a slower pace. "Of course, +they must in some way have recognized me, for I heard some of them +saying, 'Death to the English infidel!'" + +"It was through me that they recognized you, sahib," Abdool said. +"They seized me before they entered your hut, and tied a bandage +round my mouth, to prevent my giving any alarm. As they took me out +into the road, one of them said: + +"'Son of Sheitan, I knew you directly I saw you. You were with that +English officer, in Nagpore. Then, when I looked at the head of +your party I saw that, though he had changed his dress, and stained +his face to the colour of ours, it was the same man who came as an +envoy to our rajah, and whose house we attacked. + +"'We shall hear what the rajah says to him when we take him to +Nagpore.'" + +"I understand now, Abdool. I have thought of my own disguise, and +that of the troopers; but as you always, except when riding behind +me, dress in your native clothes, it seemed to me a matter of +course that you would pass without difficulty; and it never +occurred to me that you must, during our three months' stay at +Nagpore, have become known by sight to most of the people there. It +is a bad blunder, and it will be a lesson to me, in future." + +Then he turned, and spoke to the troopers. + +"You have done well, indeed, tonight," he said, "and I owe it to +you that I have escaped, if not death, an imprisonment of months. +If I had been taken to Nagpore, and handed over to the rajah, he +would doubtless have imprisoned me; but would not have ventured to +take my life, for he would have known that the part that he had +taken against us would be more readily forgiven, than the murder of +a British officer. But I do not think I should have reached the +palace. Furious as the people must be at their crushing defeat at +Assaye, they would have torn me to pieces, the moment they heard +from my captors that I was an Englishman; therefore I feel that you +have saved my life. + +"How was it that you were not also surprised?" + +When he heard how the alarm had been given, and how they had at +once mounted and ridden out, just as a party were about to enter +the hut, he said: + +"It was well done, and shows that you are quick fellows, as well as +brave. I shall report your conduct when we join the army, and shall +myself give you a batta of six months' pay. + +"Now, we will ride on for a few miles, and then leave the road and +take shelter, till morning, in a wood. The horses have had five +hours' rest at the village, and there will be time for them to have +as much more, before we mount again. + +"It is lucky that you bought some grain for them, this evening, +instead of waiting till the morning, so they can have a good feed +before starting." + +Henceforth they avoided the villages as much as possible, and +passed unquestioned until they reached the Hustoo river which, at +this point, formed the eastern boundary of Berar. They swam the +horses across and, after stopping for a few hours at Dundava, rode +on; and continued their journey due north, and crossed the Sone +river at Maunpoor, having accomplished a journey of nearly a +thousand miles in twenty days. + +On arriving there Harry found that General Lake had left, six weeks +before, and had encamped at Secundara where, on the 26th of August, +despatches had been received from the Governor General, authorizing +active operations against Scindia and his allies; and two days +later the force halted on the Mahratta frontier, within sight of +the mosque at Coel, where Perron was encamped. + +Perron, a French officer in Scindia's service, commanded no less +than forty-three thousand men, and four hundred and sixty-four +guns. About half of these were with Scindia in the Deccan, and the +force encamped at Coel numbered about twenty thousand. + +Perron, an active and ambitious man, had assumed an almost +independent position. A large grant of territory had been given him +by Scindia, and in this he ruled with absolute authority and, had +it not been for the interposition of the British, it is probable +that he would, ere long, have assumed the position of an +independent prince. Indeed, his army of partially disciplined men +was more than a match for the whole force of Scindia. + +At a short distance from Coel was the fortress of Alighur, which +was considered to be almost impregnable. It was defended by a +triple line of walls and fortifications, so that an enemy entering +it would have to advance by a devious route from one gate to +another, exposed all the time to a terrible artillery fire. It was +almost surrounded by a swamp, and the only approach was along a +narrow strip of firm ground, leading to the gate. + +Early on the morning of the 29th, the British troops advanced to +attack Perron's force; but it at once drew off, although the +infantry were supported by twenty thousand horse. Believing that +Alighur was impregnable, Perron left a strong force there under one +of his officers, named Pedron, and marched with his army towards +Agra. + +On the 4th of September a storming party, commanded by Colonel +Monson, left the British camp; and was accompanied by two +batteries, each consisting of four eighteen-pounders. A portion of +the defenders was posted on the strip of dry ground, outside the +gate, where a battery with three guns had been mounted. Before +daybreak, Colonel Monson moved forward, with two companies of the +76th Regiment. The enemy took the alarm before he reached their +battery, and fled towards the gate, without waiting to discharge +their guns. + +Monson pressed after them, in the hope of being able to enter +before the gate was shut; but he was too late. The entrance was +raked by the guns on the walls, which opened with a destructive +fire of grape. Ladders were applied to the walls, but these were +manned by so strong a body of pikemen that it was found impossible +to gain a footing. So bold were the defenders that, as the soldiers +fell back, they ran down the ladders and pursued them hotly; but +were soon beaten off. + +A six pounder was brought up to burst open the gate, but its fire +did but little damage; and a twelve pounder was then employed. The +gates yielded, and the storming party rushed in. But during the +twenty minutes that had elapsed, between the guns opening fire and +the time at which the gate yielded, the troops had been exposed to +a terrible fire, both of grape and musketry. Colonel Monson was +wounded, and the loss was heavy. + +The second gate was forced with comparatively little difficulty, +although a terrible fire of artillery and musketry was kept up, +from the walls on either side of the road, and from the bastion +commanding it. The assailants pressed so hotly, upon the defenders +of the second gate, that they gained the third before the enemy had +time to close it. + +But another and stronger gate had still to be passed, and here a +desperate stand was made. The troops were obliged to take shelter, +close to the wall, until the twelve pounder was brought up. It was +of little avail, for the artillerymen were shot down as soon as +they endeavoured to work it. At length, two or three officers +gathered a party, and made a rush at the wicket gate. Half a dozen +muskets were discharged, together, at the lock; and the gate at +once gave way. + +The whole party rushed forward into the interior of the fortress, +gained the ramparts, and opened fire on the enemy, who in vain +attempted to drive out the force gathered near the gate; and +Pedron, finding further resistance impossible, surrendered. + +The loss of the victors, in killed and wounded, amounted to two +hundred and twenty-three; while that of the garrison, in killed +alone, exceeded two thousand. An enormous quantity of military +stores was found here, the French having made it their chief depot. +The number of guns captured was two hundred and eighty-one. + +On the 7th of September, the army marched for Delhi. On the way, +General Lake received a letter from Monsieur Perron, saying that he +had quitted the service of Scindia, and requesting a free passage +to Lucknow. The easy capture of a fortress that he and his +engineers had rendered, as they believed, impregnable, and the loss +of all his military stores, sufficed to show him that he could not +hope to withstand the progress of the British; and that it was +better for him to resign, at once, than to continue a hopeless +struggle, especially as the loss of Alighur would excite the fury +of Scindia, and possibly lead to his arrest and execution. He had, +indeed, received information that he had already lost Scindia's +confidence; and that intrigues were being carried on, with some of +his officers, to deprive him of his jagheer and command. + +His request was therefore granted and, escorted by a party of his +own bodyguard, and by some British dragoons, he proceeded to +Lucknow and, afterwards, settled in the neighbourhood of +Chandernagore. + +The capture of Alighur had indeed made a tremendous impression upon +the native mind and, as the army advanced, several fortresses that +might have made a long defence were abandoned. + +On the 11th, General Lake's army encamped within six miles of +Delhi; but the tents were but just pitched when intelligence was +received that a large force of the enemy was in position, two miles +distant. It consisted of sixteen battalions of regular infantry, +six thousand cavalry, and a large train of artillery; commanded by +Monsieur Bourquieu, Perron's second in command. + +General Lake at once, with the whole of his cavalry, reconnoitred +the position that the enemy had taken up. It was two miles from the +camp, and consisted of a low hill, covered by broken ground on each +flank. Seeing that the enemy could only be attacked in front, +General Lake ordered the infantry and artillery to come up. + +While waiting for their arrival, the cavalry suffered some loss +from the enemy's artillery fire. The general, seeing that it was +doubtful whether an attack on so strong a position would be +successful, determined to attempt to draw the enemy from it. The +cavalry advanced a short distance and then, as the fire upon them +redoubled, they were ordered to fall back. Their line had hidden +the approach of the infantry from the enemy; and the latter, +believing that the cavalry were retreating, left their entrenchments +and started in pursuit, with shouts of victory. The cavalry opened +right and left, and the enemy found themselves face to face with a +steady line of infantry; who at once advanced, the general himself +leading them, at the head of the 76th Regiment. + +A tremendous fire was opened upon them by the Mahratta guns but, +when within a hundred paces of the enemy, the whole line fired a +volley, and then charged with the bayonet. The enemy did not stand +for a moment but, seized by a panic, fled in all directions, +pursued by the cavalry and the horse artillery battery. These +followed them as far as the banks of the Jumna, and great numbers +of the enemy lost their lives in endeavouring to cross the river. + +The British loss, in killed and wounded, was nearly six hundred +men; while that of the enemy was estimated at two thousand. +Sixty-eight pieces of cannon, two waggons laden with treasure, and +thirty-seven with ammunition fell into the hands of the victors +who, on the 14th, crossed the Jumna, and took possession of the +city without opposition; being welcomed enthusiastically by the +population, who had long groaned under the terrible oppression of +their Mahratta masters. + +Two days later, General Lake paid a visit to the unfortunate +emperor, who was now eighty-three years old. He had been blinded by +his brutal conquerors, and lived in a state of misery, and poverty, +greater than that of any of the tillers of the fields of the wide +empire over which he had once ruled. He lived for another three +years, and was succeeded by his son, Mirza Akbar. + +Leaving a force at Delhi, General Lake marched southward, as the +strong town of Agra was still in the possession of Scindia's +troops. He arrived before the city on the 4th of October and, in +three days, had cut off their communication with the surrounding +country; his cavalry being assisted by five thousand horse, sent by +the Rajah of Bhurtpoor, who had, as soon as he heard of the fall of +Alighur, hastened to enter into an alliance with the British. + +The garrison was strong, and seven battalions of Scindia's regular +infantry were encamped on the glacis, and held possession of the +town. The garrison, however, refused to admit them into the fort; +as they had determined to share, among themselves, the large amount +of treasure deposited there. + +Inside the fort great confusion prevailed. The troops had been +commanded by English officers, in Scindia's service, and these had +been imprisoned as soon as the war broke out. No answer was, +therefore, made to the summons to surrender. + +On the morning of the 10th, Scindia's infantry were attacked. They +fought stoutly, but were finally defeated, and their twenty-six +brass guns captured. Two days later, two thousand five hundred of +them, who had retired when defeated, and taken shelter under the +guns of the fort, came over in a body and took service with the +British. + +Siege operations were at once commenced and, on the 17th, a battery +of eight eighteen-pounders opened fire, with such effect that a +breach was almost effected; when the garrison released the British +officers, and sent them to the camp to offer to surrender. They +were allowed to do so, and to leave the fort with their clothes, +but without arms. Six thousand then marched out under these +conditions. + +One hundred and sixty-four pieces of cannon, with a vast quantity +of ammunition and stores, were found in the fort; together with +twenty-two lakhs of rupees, which were divided among the captors. + +On the 20th, Harry, with his little party, joined the army. He and +his troopers had, at Benares, resumed their uniform. He at once +waited on General Lake, and handed him the despatch in which +General Wellesley had described the victory at Assaye. + +"This is great news, indeed, sir," the general said, "but I cannot +understand how you have brought it here so speedily." + +"I rode in disguise through Berar, sir, and of course the troopers +were also disguised. Except that I was attacked in one village--where +I was recognized by a peasant who had seen me, when I was staying as +the Governor General's envoy at Nagpore, before the capture of +Seringapatam--I got through without difficulty." + +"Yes; I heard from the Marquis of Wellesley that the rajah had been +kept from declaring against us, by a young officer of great +ability, whom he had sent to Nagpore for the purpose, and who +narrowly escaped assassination there when the news of the fall of +Seringapatam was received. I think he said that you had a perfect +knowledge of Mahratti, and also of Hindustani; and that he had sent +you to accompany his brother, General Wellesley. + +"Well, the news of Assaye is welcome, indeed, and Scindia will be +very chary of weakening his army in the Deccan by sending +reinforcements in this direction. + +"I see, sir, that General Wellesley has begged me to temporarily +place you on my staff as, in the present troubled state of the +country, it would be dangerous to endeavour to make your way back +to him. Of course, I will gladly do so, for your knowledge of the +languages will be very useful to me, for none of my staff can speak +either of them well." + +General Lake sent for the head of his staff, introduced Harry to +him, and informed him of the news that he had brought; and then +ordered a general salute to be fired, by all the available guns in +the fort and artillery batteries. It was not long before the roar +of cannon began, telling the army that a splendid victory had been +won in the west; and a short time later notices were affixed to the +gates of the forts, and other public places, relating how General +Wellesley, with but four thousand five hundred men, had routed the +army of Holkar and the Rajah of Berar--amounting in all to over +fifty thousand, of whom ten thousand five hundred were disciplined +troops, commanded by Frenchmen. The news excited the utmost +enthusiasm among the troops, as the disproportion of numbers was +far greater than it had been at the battle of Delhi. + + + +Chapter 16: A Disastrous Retreat. + + +A few days later, the news was received that seven of Scindia's +regular battalions had just arrived, from the Deccan, under the +command of a French officer; and had been joined by five others, +the whole amounting to nine thousand well-trained infantry, with +five thousand cavalry and seventy-five guns. As it was understood +that they were intending the recapture of Delhi, General Lake +marched against them on the 27th of October and, pressing forward +with all speed, came up with them on the morning of the 1st of +November. They at once retreated; and General Lake, whose infantry +was still some distance in the rear, determined to attack them, at +once. As they retired, the enemy cut the bank of a large tank and +flooded the ground, thereby impeding the advance of the cavalry, +and giving time to Scindia's men to take up a strong position +between the villages of Laswaree and Mohaulpore. + +[Illustration: Plan of the Battle of Laswaree.] + +Their right was protected by a deep ravine; their rear by a +rivulet; their front was lined with their seventy-five guns, +chained together so as to protect the artillerymen from a charge of +horse. The ground in front of them was covered with deep grass, +which partially concealed their disposition. + +The three brigades of cavalry charged boldly up, but were received +with a terrible fire, and fell back with much loss and, seeing the +impossibility of carrying the enemy's position without infantry, +General Lake deferred making another attack until they came up. As +soon as these and the artillery reached the spot, he prepared for +an assault. + +The Mahrattas had, in the meantime, changed their position; and +drawn up one line in front and one in rear of the village of +Mohaulpore. The French officer who had been in command of their +army had, two days before, left their camp and ridden to meet +General Lake's army; and had there surrendered, and a Mahratta +officer had succeeded him in command. Shaken by the repeated +successes of the British, he now offered to surrender his guns. An +hour was given him to do so but, as no movement was made at the end +of that time, orders were given for the advance. + +The infantry consisted of the 76th Regiment and six battalions of +Sepoys. One of the three brigades of cavalry was directed to +support them; another was sent to the right to watch the enemy, and +to take advantage of any confusion that might appear among them; +the third brigade formed the reserve. The four batteries of +artillery were to support the attack. General Lake's plan was to +turn the enemy's right flank, and he moved off his infantry along +the bank of a rivulet which ran round near the right angle of the +enemy's new position. The high grass, for a time, concealed the +movement but, as soon as the Mahrattas perceived it they threw back +their right flank, and opened a tremendous fire upon the village. + +The British artillery now opened, but the enemy's cannon were far +superior in number, and were well served; and the ranks of the +76th, who were in front of the advance, were terribly thinned. The +general was with them and, as soon as a battalion and a half of +Sepoys had come up, led them against the enemy's position. + +The latter now opened with canister and, the ground being of a +broken character, the formation of the assailants' line was to some +extent disordered and the Mahratta cavalry charged. They were +repulsed by heavy volleys from the infantry, but they rallied and, +being reinforced, were about to resume the attack, when the general +ordered the 29th Dragoons to charge. They burst through both lines +of the enemy's infantry, wheeled round and charged the cavalry, and +drove them from the field; and then turning again, fell on the rear +of the second line, which was now hotly engaged with the British +infantry who, following the Dragoons at the double, had rushed +forward on the guns, captured them, and driven the first line back +on the second. + +The rest of the British infantry had now come up; but Perron's +regular infantry, who were all drawn from hill districts, and had +been victorious in many a fight, resisted to the last. Two thousand +were surrounded and made prisoners, but the rest all fought until +they fell. + +The victory of Laswaree cost the British eight hundred and +twenty-four men, killed and wounded; but it completed the overthrow +of the whole of the regiments trained by Perron and de Boigne, and +laid the tract of country watered by the Jumna under the power of +the British. + +Harry, who had accompanied the general, having carried the order to +the Dragoons to charge, rode with them and came unhurt out of the +desperate fight. + +A few days later the army quitted Laswaree and moved towards Agra, +resting for a fortnight at Besawur. The great successes gained by +both the British armies had had their effect, and a number of +rajahs came in to make a treaty of alliance. General Lake's force, +after a short rest, then marched southward, and took up a position +at Biana. + +While these events had been going on, a detachment from the army +had entered Bundelcund. This had been under the control of the +Peishwa but, by an agreement made with him in August, it was ceded +to the Company; he receiving, in exchange, grants in the southern +Mahratta country, and near Surat. He sent orders to this effect to +his officers. + +Shamsheer, a descendant of the first Peishwa, refused to obey him; +and the British force entered Bundelcund and, being joined by a +powerful chief--with eight thousand irregular infantry, four +thousand horse, and three regular battalions of infantry, commanded +by a European officer--captured several strongholds. Shamsheer then +treated for peace but, after having delayed the advance for two +months, finally broke off negotiations, suddenly; and the British +at once laid siege to Calpee, which capitulated on the 4th of +December. Finding himself unable to resist the farther advance of +the British, Shamsheer then surrendered. + +In October, Ambajee Inglia, who had acted as Scindia's +representative and held, under him, extensive territories, had +offered to renounce his dependence on Scindia, and become a +tributary of the British. Negotiations were, as usual, spun out to +a great length; but a treaty was concluded with him, on the 16th of +December, by which he agreed to surrender Gwalior and the lands to +the north of it, and to remain as an independent sovereign of the +other territories in his possession. + +A corps, under Colonel White, was sent to take possession of the +fortress. The commandant refused to recognize the arrangement but, +upon batteries being erected, a breach was soon effected, and the +garrison surrendered. + +The news came that Scindia had broken his treaty, and had been +defeated with great slaughter by General Wellesley, who afterwards +besieged the strong fortress of Gawilghur. Guns were brought up, +with great difficulty, over thirty miles of mountains and ravines. +They opened fire on the 13th of December and, as soon as a breach +was practicable, the place was carried by storm, and a large +quantity of guns and ammunition fell into the hands of the British. + +The Rajah of Berar, terrified at the defeat of Scindia, now sent to +ask for peace, and ceded the district of Cuttack; thereby placing +the whole of the maritime provinces, between Madras and Calcutta, +in the hands of the British. Scindia, finding himself forsaken by +his ally, also made peace, surrendering a considerable portion of +his territories. + +1804 opened quietly, but peace was not long maintained. Holkar had, +after his expulsion from Poona, made peace with Scindia and, when +hostilities commenced, had waited to see the result before +committing himself. At first he viewed with satisfaction the +misfortunes that had befallen Scindia and the Rajah of Berar but, +when he saw that they were threatened with annihilation, he +prepared to aid them. He had, however, delayed too long and, when +Scindia and the Rajah of Berar had been obliged to crave for peace, +he kept his army on the frontier of the Rajah of Jaipore, now a +British ally. + +General Lake addressed a letter to him, saying that the British +Government were willing to leave him unmolested; but requiring, as +a pledge of his good intentions, that he should withdraw into his +own territory. Holkar sent back a long list of demands, which were +impossible to satisfy; and also addressed a letter to General--now +Sir Arthur--Wellesley, threatening to overrun the whole country, +unless some of the districts in the Deccan were ceded to him and, +after sending off this letter, he began raiding the territory of +Jaipore. Colonel Murray was therefore sent to aid the rajah, and to +march in the direction of Holkar's capital; while Lord Lake marched +westward, until he neared Jaipore. + +On the 15th of May a detachment captured the strong fort of +Rampoora, the sole fortress which Holkar possessed north of the +Chumbul river; and Holkar immediately fell back. The heat being now +intense, the general left Colonel Monson, with five battalions of +Sepoys and three thousand irregular horse, sent by Rajpoot allies, +and returned to Agra, losing numbers of his men on the march, by +sunstroke. + +Harry had been left with Colonel Monson. The latter, intending to +cooperate with Colonel Murray, entered Holkar's territory and, on +the way, captured a strong hill fort. He afterwards advanced fifty +miles beyond the range of mountains that formed the frontier. + +On the 7th of July he heard that Holkar was advancing, with his +whole army, to meet him. Monson's force was much weakened by the +absence of two detachments, one of which had garrisoned the hill +fort that had been captured, and another had gone to fetch a supply +of grain. Almost at the same time he heard a report that Colonel +Murray intended to fall back. + +After consulting with Harry, who, as one of Lord Lake's staff, was +considered as his special representative, it was agreed that it +would be madness, with so small a force, to give battle to Holkar +and, at four in the morning on the following day, Monson sent off +his baggage and stores; and remained, with his troops drawn up in +order of battle, until nine o'clock; leaving the irregular cavalry, +under Lieutenant Lucan, to follow in half an hour, and bring him +intelligence of Holkar's movements. + +Monson marched twelve miles when a trooper of the irregular cavalry +overtook him, with the news that they had been completely defeated +by Holkar's army, and that Lucan had been made prisoner. The +retreat was continued, and the force reached the pass across the +mountains on the evening of the following day, and took up a +position there. Holkar's cavalry appeared next morning and, on the +11th, Holkar himself arrived and sent in a demand for the surrender +of the cannon and muskets. This was refused, and Holkar, dividing +his horse into three bodies, charged the detachment vigorously in +front and both flanks; but the defenders again and again repulsed +the attack. Holkar then drew off about four miles, and was joined +by the artillery and infantry. + +"What is your opinion, Captain Lindsay?" Colonel Monson said. + +"If we had a regiment of British infantry with us, sir, I should +say that we might attack them, with success; but with only four +battalions of Sepoys, it seems to me that a retreat would be the +better choice of two evils. We shall undoubtedly suffer heavily. +The rain is pouring down unceasingly, and I doubt whether we shall +be able to get the guns along; but we ought to be able to march as +fast as Holkar's infantry and, as to his cavalry, we can certainly +beat them off." + +Two long marches were made. The enemy's cavalry swarmed round them, +but dared not attack; and the force arrived safely at Kotah, where +they expected to find food and shelter. The rajah, however, closed +the gates and refused to admit them; and the force pressed on +towards a ford on the Chumbul. The distance was only seven miles +but, from the incessant rain and the state of the road, a whole day +was spent in accomplishing it. + +The ford was impassable, but during the night it subsided a little, +and they were able to cross. A day's halt was necessary, in order +to procure some grain; and on the 15th, when the march was +continued, the guns sank so deep in the mud that they could not be +extricated, and they were therefore spiked and abandoned. + +Two days later the force reached another river, but it was so +swollen that it was unfordable. The artillerymen were sent across, +on elephants; but ten days were spent in carrying the rest of the +troops over, partly on elephants and partly on rafts. Terrible +privation was suffered, and many men were drowned in crossing; +while the wives and children of the Sepoys who, by some gross +mismanagement, were left to the last, were slaughtered by the enemy +under the eyes of their husbands and fathers. + +On the 29th the corps reached Rampoora; where a reinforcement of +two battalions of Sepoys, six guns, and a body of cavalry, together +with a supply of grain forwarded by Lord Lake from Agra, awaited +them. Notwithstanding this reinforcement, Colonel Monson considered +it his duty to continue his retreat and, on the 22nd of August, +reached the Banass, which was also in flood. Some boats, however, +were found, and a portion of the troops were carried across. + +Early the next morning Holkar's cavalry appeared, and encamped at a +distance of four miles. The next day the river was fordable, and +most of the baggage and four battalions crossed. The enemy's +cavalry also crossed in great numbers, both to the right and left +of the British position. + +Their artillery and infantry arrived in the afternoon, and opened +fire on the battalions still left on the bank. Harry was with +these. Seeing that they were being decimated by the guns, he called +upon the Sepoys to charge. This they did with great spirit, drove +back the enemy, and captured some of the guns; but the Mahrattas +soon rallied and, led by Holkar himself, charged in such +overwhelming numbers that the handful of troops was nearly +annihilated. Harry, seeing that all was lost, cut his way through +the enemy's horse and succeeded in crossing the river. + +[Illustration: Harry succeeded in crossing the river.] + +Colonel Monson continued his retreat, and reached Kooshalpur on the +night of the 25th. He found that the native officer in command +there had declared for Holkar; but that the fort, which contained +the elephants and baggage, still held out. That evening Monson +learnt that some of his Sepoy officers were in communication with +Holkar; and two companies, and a large portion of the native +cavalry deserted. + +The whole of the enemy's cavalry now encamped round the detachment. +At seven in the evening Colonel Monson continued his march, forming +his troops into an oblong, which the enemy in vain attempted to +break. On the night of the 27th, after halting for a few hours, he +moved again, at one in the morning; but had no sooner cleared the +broken ground than the enemy's cavalry made a desperate charge. +This was repulsed with great coolness, the Sepoys reserving their +fire till the enemy were within bayonet reach. + +At sunset the troops, worn out by fatigue and hunger, arrived at +the Biana pass; but the enemy brought up their guns, and the +retreat was continued. The confusion in the ranks, which had been +increasing all day, now extended; and the troops broke and fled to +Agra, pursued by straggling parties of the enemy for the greater +portion of the distance. + +In consequence of this disastrous affair, it was decided that Lord +Lake should immediately take the field; although the wet weather +still continued, and a large tract of country was under water. Four +weeks after the arrival of Monson, with his fugitives, the army +marched out of their cantonment, and encamped on the right bank of +the river. + +The situation was critical. Holkar's army numbered ninety-two +thousand men, of whom sixty-six thousand were cavalry, and he had +with him ninety-two cannon. He had advanced to Muttra, which had +been abandoned at his approach. + +Lord Lake sent for Harry. + +"I have another dangerous mission for you, Captain Lindsay. I +consider it more than possible that Holkar will make an attempt to +recapture Delhi. Colonel Ochterlony, in command there, must be +warned of the probability of an attack. He may be in ignorance of +what is passing here. You will bear this despatch, urging on him to +do all that he can to place the town in a state of defence, and to +summon to his assistance as many irregulars as possible from the +neighbouring chiefs. The distance is a hundred and twenty miles. I +leave it to you whether to go in uniform, or in disguise." + +"I think, sir, that I had better disguise myself as, doubtless, +Holkar's cavalry are spread all over the country intent on +plundering and, should I fall in with them, I ought to have no +difficulty in passing myself off as one of themselves. I will leave +my uniform here, to be brought on with the baggage. They might take +it into their heads to search my saddlebags." + +"I think that would be the wisest plan," the general said. "You +will, of course, remain at Delhi till reinforcements arrive there. +The despatches will be ready for you, in an hour's time." + +There was no difficulty in obtaining dye at Agra, and Harry stained +himself from head to foot, put on the disguise in which he had +ridden with the news of Assaye and, after receiving the despatch, +started at once. The direct road lay through Muttra but, as +Holkar's main body was at this town, he rode to the northeast as +far as Secundara. There was no occasion for any great haste, for it +was certain that some little time must elapse before Holkar could +march from Muttra; and he accordingly stopped for the night at +Coringunga, having ridden about fifty miles. He speedily secured a +room, and Abdool at once set to, to prepare a meal. While it was +being cooked, there was a sound of a body of horse entering the +village. + +"It is unfortunate that we have stopped here, Abdool," he said. "We +are sure to be questioned." + +Ten minutes later the door opened, and an officer of Holkar's +irregular horse entered. + +"I hear that you have just arrived," he said. + +"Yes; I rode in but half an hour ago." + +"Where are you going?" + +"To Sambol. There seems no chance of fighting, at present; and I +therefore left the army to pay a visit, for a day or two, to some +friends. My man has just prepared a meal. Will you share it with +me?" + +"I will, with pleasure," the officer said, "for I have ridden from +Muttra, and may have to wait an hour before my supper is ready for +me. What may be your name?" + +"Puntojee. And yours?" + +"Wisnas." + +The officer unbuckled his sword, and seated himself on the ground, +the room being entirely unfurnished. + +"Were you in that affair, when we chased the English dogs from +beyond the mountains to Agra?" + +"Yes, I was in it; and never wish to campaign in such weather +again. I was wet through for three weeks; and hardly feel that I +have got dry, yet." + +"They are brave fellows, those Sepoys in the English service." + +"They are, indeed," Harry agreed. "It seemed that we must destroy +them; and yet they withstood our attacks, weary and exhausted as +they must have been. The worst of it was that, after all our +exertions, there was no booty to be obtained." + +"Yes, that was bad. One doesn't feel so disposed to risk one's +life, when there is nothing to be gained. We did not even succeed +in capturing their treasure chest. If we could have brought our +infantry up, we should have destroyed them; but they had to march +at the same rate as the guns; and in such weather they could get +along but slowly, for it often required the bullocks of four guns +to drag one through those quagmires. + +"That was where the English had the advantage over us. The road +was, no doubt, bad enough for them; it was infinitely worse for us, +after they had cut it up in passing. + +"It was a mistake when Scindia began to form regiments of infantry, +and Holkar and the Peishwa imitated him. Before that, we had India +at our mercy. What power could withstand a hundred thousand +horsemen, here today, there tomorrow? Then, we had it in our power +to waste all the country, and to starve out the fortresses from +Cuttack to the north. Our territory extended from the great +mountains on the east, to the sea in the west. + +"Now we can only move at the pace of footmen; and while, formerly, +no infantry would venture to withstand our charge; now, as you see, +a handful of Sepoys set us at defiance, repulsed our charges, and +gained Agra simply because our guns and infantry could not arrive +to help us." + +"There can be no doubt that you are right," Harry agreed; "but I +cannot blame Scindia and Holkar for forming regiments of infantry, +trained by foreign officers. They had seen how the regiments so +raised, by the English, had won great victories in the Carnatic and +Bengal; and they did not think at that time that, ere long, they +might become formidable to the Mahrattas. Scindia and Holkar raised +their regiments, not to fight against the strangers, but against +each other. It was their mutual hostility that so diminished the +strength of the Mahrattas. When dogs fight dogs, the wild boar +ravages the land." + +"It is true enough," the other said. "As a nation we might have +ruled Asia but, divided among ourselves, wasting our forces against +each other, we have allowed the stranger to wrest province after +province from us. + +"Now, I will go out and see that the men have all got quarters, and +that the people of the village are feeding them, as they should. In +truth, we have been having a bad time, lately." + +"Yes, indeed; I thought myself lucky, sometimes, to get a handful +of grain after twenty hours in the saddle. + +"It cannot be helped, comrade. We must drive the strangers back +towards Allahabad; recover Benares, Agra, and Delhi; and then we +shall be able to rest in peace, for a time, before we settle +accounts with Scindia, and the others who have made a disgraceful +peace with the English. We shall never have peace in the Deccan +till we sack and destroy Bombay, and force the last Englishman to +take to his ships." + +Harry started with Abdool before daybreak the next morning and, +riding all day, reached Delhi late in the evening. Putting up the +horses, he proceeded to the house occupied by Colonel Ochterlony, +the Resident. + +"Will you tell the colonel," he said, "that I am an officer with +despatches from General Lake?" + +He was at once shown in. Colonel Burns, the commander of the +garrison, was with the Resident. Neither was surprised that the +messenger should be a native, for they knew the difficulties a +British officer would encounter in travelling from Agra. + +"I have ridden with a despatch for you, Colonel, from General Lake. +I am Captain Lindsay, and have the honour of serving on the +general's staff." + +"I am glad to see you, sir," Ochterlony said, kindly. "Your name is +pretty well known, to all of us, as that of an officer who has +successfully carried out several dangerous enterprises; and this +cannot have been one of the most dangerous of them, for indeed, in +that disguise I do not think that anyone would entertain the +slightest suspicion that you are not what you appear to be. + +"I am told you speak Mahratta perfectly." + +"I was brought up among the Mahrattas, sir. I have got through +easily, and only once came upon a body of Holkar's cavalry." + +"You have just arrived, Captain Lindsay?" + +"Yes, not ten minutes ago." + +The colonel rang the bell, and directed a servant who came in to +bring in wine and refreshments. He then opened the despatches +which, after reading, he passed across to Colonel Burns. + +"Of course, we have heard reports of the disaster to Monson's +force. Was it as serious as they say?" + +"It was very serious, sir. I was with them, and they suffered +terribly. They lost their guns and baggage, and at least a third of +their infantry." + +"It is unfortunate, very unfortunate, Captain Lindsay. We have had +so many victories, of late, that the natives must have almost +concluded that we were invincible; but this check will encourage +them, and will doubtless bring many waverers over to their side." + +"I don't think that it was, in any way, Colonel Monson's fault. His +column was to join that of Colonel Murray--who, however, doubtless +learning the great strength Holkar had with him, fell back--and +with only five battalions of Sepoys, and a dozen guns, it was +practically impossible that Monson could, single handed, resist the +attack of ninety thousand men. If he had had with him a couple of +British battalions, and a regiment or two of our cavalry, he might +have held the passes but, alone, it did not seem to me possible +that he could do so; especially when the enemy's cavalry could have +crossed the hills at other points, and taken them in the rear. Even +if he had resisted all attacks, he must have been starved out. + +"As being, in a sort of way, representative of General Lake, +Colonel Monson was good enough to ask my opinion; and I quite +agreed with him that the best plan was to fall back. We believed, +of course, that we should find shelter at Kotah, but two days' +march in the rear and, had not the rajah declared for Holkar, and +shut his gates, all would have been well; for we beat off all +attacks, on our way there. It was his treachery, and that of the +commandant of Kooshalpur, that caused the disaster." + +"Holkar is at Muttra, and Lake is about to march against him?" + +"Yes, sir. If Holkar gives battle there he will, no doubt, be +defeated but, as this despatch will have informed you, General Lake +feared much that, as he advances, Holkar will content himself with +harassing him on the march with a cloud of horsemen while, with the +main body of his army, he marches rapidly north, to endeavour to +recapture Delhi and obtain possession of the Emperor's person. It +is to warn you of that danger that I have ridden here." + +"The danger is, no doubt, serious," the Resident said; "and the +town is certainly in no position for defence. The walls are in a +most dilapidated condition, and would crumble after a few hours' +cannonade. Colonel Burns's force is wholly inadequate to defend a +city of some ten miles in circumference. The irregular troops +cannot be relied upon, in case of need. However, we must do what we +can and, as we may be sure that General Lake will hasten on with +all speed, we shall not have to hold out for many days. + +"Now, Captain Lindsay, as you say that you only left Agra yesterday +morning, and have ridden some eighty miles, today, I am sure you +have need of rest. The general has told me to employ you on any +duty that I may think requisite; therefore, if you will come here +at eight o'clock tomorrow morning, I shall be glad, indeed, of your +services. Where did you leave your horses?" + +"I left them at a khan, a few minutes' walk from here." + +"Then if you will go down, and tell your man to bring them up, they +can be put up in the stables here. I have already ordered a room to +be prepared for you. My servants will give your man some food." + +The next morning Harry, after taking the early breakfast a servant +brought to his room, went down to Colonel Ochterlony's office. + +"I have not brought my uniform with me, Colonel," he said, "for I +might have been searched." + +"That does not matter. Two of my escort shall ride with you, which +will be sufficient to show that you represent me. Here is a list of +the zemindars within fifteen miles of the city. You will, today, +visit as many of them as possible, and request them to ride in to +see me, tomorrow morning. I have directed that you are to have one +of my horses for, after the work yours has just had, it will need +two or three days' rest. + +"Say nothing about the possibility of Holkar's coming here. They +might hang back, if you did so. I would rather meet them as a body, +and open the matter to them, myself. You will be able to see, by +their manner, if any of them have thought of the possibility of the +city being besieged. If they have, some of them will possibly +excuse themselves coming; though I think that the great majority +will come, for they must know well enough that, if Holkar took the +city, his troops would ravage the country, as they have done all +the villages through which they have passed; and that, therefore, +it is to their interest to aid in its defence. + +"I am going now to see the Emperor, and to obtain from him an order +for all the able-bodied men of the city to set to work, under my +orders and those of Colonel Burns, to repair the fortifications at +the points where an enemy would naturally attack them. + +"In any case, where you see that those you call upon make excuses +for not coming in, you have my full authority for telling them that +all who do not do so will be regarded as our enemies, and will be +severely punished, and their estates forfeited. No excuse, +whatever, will be accepted unless, on your arrival, you find that a +man is seriously ill; in which case you will order that his son, or +some near relation, be sent to represent him." + +For the next three days, Harry spent his whole time on horseback +and, although it was evident to him that several of those he +visited were averse to going into Delhi, none of them ventured to +incur the displeasure of the English Resident by an absolute +refusal. Each morning, therefore, Colonel Ochterlony received those +Harry had visited on the previous day. He told them, frankly, that +it was possible that Holkar might appear before the walls; but +assured them that he had no doubt of being able to resist all +attacks, until General Lake arrived, which he would be sure to do +in a few days. + +In the meantime, great numbers of men laboured at the walls. The +battlements had in some cases fallen, and the gaps were filled up +with sandbags. The moat, which had been neglected for many years, +was cleared out; and the side made steeper, so that an attacking +party would have to use ladders, both for descending into it and +climbing out. The bastions were repaired, as far as could be done; +and the houses in the lane that ran round, inside the wall, were +all loopholed for musketry. + +Many of the irregular cavalry had deserted; but the Sepoys stood +firm, knowing how terrible were the cruelties perpetrated, by +Holkar, on all who fell into his hands. Their number was small; but +they were, to some extent, strengthened by the levies brought in by +the zemindars. + +There was no time to be lost for, on the 2nd of September, General +Lake had approached to within a mile of Muttra; which had already +been abandoned by Holkar, whose horsemen made their appearance +before Delhi on the 7th. The irregular cavalry and those of the +zemindars were ordered to attack them but, as soon as they left the +town, they dispersed and rode away. + +The next day the enemy's infantry and artillery came up, and a +heavy fire was immediately opened on the southeast angle of the +city wall. In twenty-four hours the whole of the parapet was +demolished, and some partial breaches made in the wall itself. The +Sepoys, encouraged by the presence and efforts of Ochterlony and +Burns, stood their ground with great courage and, at nightfall, +laboured incessantly at repairing the breaches, and in making a new +parapet with sandbags. + +Towards morning they formed up; passed out through one of the +breaches, led by their officers; made a rush at the battery that +had been doing so much damage, bayoneted or drove off the enemy +stationed there, and spiked the guns. + +In the meantime, some guns had been playing against the southern +walls. Here they were able to approach, through gardens and the +ruins of a village, until near the defences and, establishing a +powerful battery, opened fire, and soon made a breach in the walls +between the Turkoman and Ajmere gates. + +Unable to hinder them the Sepoys, aided by a portion of the +population, worked from the morning of the 10th until that of the +12th to form an inner defence. The houses near the breach were +pulled down, and the materials used for forming strong barricades +at the mouths of the streets leading from it. The houses themselves +were loopholed, and everything was prepared for a desperate +defence. During that day the guns continued to enlarge the breach; +and the Sepoys, who had laboured almost incessantly for four nights +and days, were able to lie down for some hours. + +That night passed quietly. Holkar had probably heard, from +adherents in the town, of the retrenchment that had been formed; +and Colonel Ochterlony believed that the absence of any movement +towards the breach was a sign that he was making preparations for a +sudden attack at some other point. Sentries were placed along the +walls facing the encampment of his army and, just before dawn, the +discharge of a musket, at the Lahore gate, showed that it was +against it that the enemy's attack was directed. + +The Sepoys had been bivouacked in an open space, in the centre of +the city, and they at once proceeded to the point threatened. In +the dim early morning light, a great mass of men could be made out +approaching and, at the same moment, fifty guns opened fire on the +gate, to cover their advance. The cannon on the bastion by the gate +replied, directing their fire on the infantry column. These, +however, pushed forward with loud shouts. Many of them carried +ladders and, although suffering heavily from the musketry +fire--opened as soon as they came within easy range--they placed +the ladders against the wall, and strove to climb them. The face of +the wall was flanked by the bastion and, from this, an incessant +fire of musketry was maintained by a strong force of Sepoys; while +others repulsed, with the bayonet, the efforts of their assailants +to gain a footing, and hurled backwards many of the ladders. +Holkar's men, who had expected to effect a surprise, and carry the +wall before its defenders could arrive there, soon lost heart and +in a short time fled, leaving most of their ladders behind them. + +The little garrison remained under arms all that day and the next +night, expecting another assault. But, on the morning of the 15th, +Holkar and his army were seen marching away in the distance and, on +the 18th, Lord Lake arrived. + +Harry had not taken part in the defence of Delhi. He had, on the +day before Holkar's army arrived before the city, ridden out to +Sekerah, some five-and-twenty miles away. It was some distance +beyond any point he had hitherto reached; but the petty rajah, who +held a wide jagheer, could put five hundred men in the field. A +small British force had been stationed there; but it had been +recalled, at once, when Harry brought the news of the probable +approach of Holkar. The rajah then promised to send three hundred +of his troops, to aid in the defence of the city; but none had +arrived, and Harry's mission was to urge him to send them off, +instantly. + +The rajah had, however, heard that Holkar's force was within a +day's march of the capital and, entertaining no doubt that he would +carry the feeble defences without difficulty, had resolved to throw +in his lot with him. Harry was now riding in uniform, having +obtained the loan of a jacket, trousers, and cap from one of the +British officers of the garrison. The rajah received him in his +palace; and Harry saw at once, by the scowling faces of the men who +gathered round him, that he had only waited for the news that +Holkar's army was near Delhi before throwing off the mask of +friendship. + +"I have come over, Rajah," he said, "to tell you that Colonel +Ochterlony requests that you will send every available fighting man +to Delhi, at once. He prays you to despatch as many as you can +possibly gather together." + +The rajah replied coldly: + +"Why should I do so? By tomorrow night Holkar, with his great army, +will have captured the town. Why should I send my men there to die, +fighting for strangers? I take no orders from them. I have received +the Emperor's, it is true; but he is old and infirm, and is a +prisoner in your hands." + +"I deny that he is a prisoner, Rajah. He is treated with all +honour, and is in a very different position from that which he +occupied when he was imprisoned by the Mahrattas." + +"The Mahrattas are a great people," the rajah answered, angrily. +"Has not Holkar driven a force of the infidels into Agra? And soon, +when he has captured Delhi, he will defeat the rest of them, and +carry his arms to Benares." + +"In that case," Harry said quietly, "it is a pity that he did not +first crush the English army, and then march to Benares, and finish +with Delhi at his leisure. Instead of so doing he has avoided a +battle, and is retiring north with his army." + +"It is not true!" the rajah shouted. "He wishes first to gain +possession of the capital, to liberate the Emperor and, after that, +he will soon make an end of your people." + +He made a sign to those standing round him, who immediately threw +themselves upon Harry. The latter offered no resistance, seeing +that it would only lead to his being killed, on the spot. + +He was at once dragged out from the audience chamber to the +courtyard beyond. He saw the bodies of the two native troopers who +had accompanied him. Abdool, who had also been with him, was +missing and, knowing how watchful and active he was, he hoped that +he might have mounted and ridden off, before he could be attacked. + + + +Chapter 17: An Escape. + + +Harry's arms were at once bound. He was placed on a horse and, +escorted by ten natives, was taken out of the town and, after a +ride of three hours, arrived at the foot of a strong hill fort, +perched on a lofty rock. Here the party dismounted. Halfway up the +hill they passed through a gate in the lower wall; and then mounted +to the fort, where the officer in command received them and, on +reading an order from the rajah, conducted the prisoner into a room +at the summit of the highest tower. His arms were then unbound, and +the governor and soldiers left the room, locking and barring the +door behind them. + +On the way, Harry had thought over his position. It did not seem to +him desperate, if only Holkar failed to capture Delhi; and even if +he did so, there was still some hope. He had no doubt that the +rajah was waiting to see how matters went. If Holkar captured the +city, he would probably send him in to him as a pledge of his +goodwill; but he might still hesitate, until he saw the issue of +the battle that was likely to be fought outside the walls, when the +English army arrived there. He had hitherto affected friendship +with the English; and had offered no objection, whatever, to the +small force being stationed near his town. But, doubtless, the news +of the disaster to Colonel Monson's force had shaken him; and +convinced him that the English were not invincible, and that +Holkar's immense army would inflict a decisive defeat upon them, in +which case those who had shown any friendly feeling towards the +English would be made to suffer for it--by devastation of their +lands, and the loss of their jagheer, if not of their lives. Harry +felt, therefore, that the success of the attack on Delhi would +probably be as disastrous, to himself, as to all the defenders of +the city. + +His first impulse was to look out from the loopholes of the tower. +On the one side, as he had noticed, the rock fell sheer away from +the foot of the wall, to a depth of two or three hundred feet. On +the other side he looked down into a courtyard, sixty feet below +him. This was surrounded by high and very strong walls, bristling +with cannon; and with strong circular bastions at each corner. + +Immediately below him was the flat roof of the house occupied by +the rajah, when staying at the fort; and round the yard were low +buildings, doubtless containing provisions and munitions of war; +and some of them allotted to the picked corps who did duty there, +the huts for the rest of the garrison being lower down the hill, +near the second wall. + +In one corner of the room was a door. On trying it, he found it to +be unfastened and, opening it, he walked out. There was a flight of +narrow stone steps, in what was evidently a projecting turret. +Ascending these, he found himself on a flat roof, on the top of the +tower. He spent half an hour here, examining carefully the features +of the ground and the defences of the fort. The place, though +strong, did not approach, in this respect, many of the hill forts +that he had seen in the Deccan; and he concluded that a British +force of moderate strength could easily effect its capture though, +if stoutly held, it could defy native attack. + +He then returned to the room below. Half an hour later, some armed +natives entered. One of them carried a large bundle of straw, which +he threw down in one corner; another bore a dish of rice, and a +third a skin of water. They had evidently been told not to address +him for, as soon as they had placed their burdens on the ground, +they retired without any remark. + +"This is bad," Harry said to himself, when they had left. "I would +just as lief sleep on straw as on a bed but, if I had had some +blankets, I might have made myself a rope; though I don't think it +would have reached the roof of the house below, much less to the +courtyard, so that idea must be given up. I have heard of fellows +working their way through the floors of their cells; but they have +taken away my knife, and there is not a scrap of furniture from +which I could get some iron to manufacture a tool. There is no +concealing a knife, when they bring my food; for it is sure to be +as it is today--rice, or some other grain, boiled, and not even a +spoon to eat it with. + +"The door seems the only possible way though, at present, I cannot +see where the possibility comes in. It is of solid wood, and strong +enough to cage a tiger. Still, if I am to get out, I fancy that it +must be through the door." + +A closer examination of it did not increase his hopes. Even when he +pushed his hardest against it, it did not yield in the slightest +degree. He sat down on the straw, and turned over every possible +idea in his mind. No scheme of getting out of the difficulty +presented itself. + +"The only chance that I can see is that, instead of four fellows +coming up with the man who brings my food, there may be only two. +Taking them by surprise, and snatching a weapon from them, I might +manage three of them; but I could not even hope to silence five, +before they gave the alarm. + +"I hope that Abdool got away safely. I think that if he did, he was +likely, when he had once shaken off pursuit, to come back and try +to find out what had become of me. His face could not have been +particularly noticed, for I expect the troopers were attacked as +soon as I entered that scoundrel's house; and if he took off his +uniform, and went in in native dress, there would be little chance +of his being recognized. When he finds out where I have been taken, +he will no doubt go back to Delhi, and report; but with Holkar +within two miles, they have too much on their hands to think of +sending to demand my release. If Holkar fails to take the place, +and retires as Lake approaches, there will no doubt be a hot +pursuit; and certainly they could not send two or three hundred men +here. Less than that would be of no good, whatever. The rajah has +committed himself, by the murder of my troopers and, as he cannot +hope for forgiveness, he would either fly to Oude, or else move in +here with his force, with which he would think himself safe from +anything short of an army. + +"It is certain that, with such important work on hand, no men can +be spared for a rescue expedition. No, there is not a shadow of +chance, unless Holkar is defeated." + +Having settled this matter in his mind, and decided that no amount +of thinking would enable him to see a way of escaping; Harry +dismissed the subject from his thoughts, ate his rice, and lay down +as soon as it became dark, having had but little rest for the past +week. + +Two days passed. As he was sitting on the platform over his cell, +he heard a distant boom, and knew that Holkar was besieging Delhi. +The next day, to his satisfaction, the sound of cannonading was +again distinct. + +"At any rate," he said to himself, "Holkar has not carried the +place by a sudden rush. There is a regularity about the fire that +shows that it is deliberate. No doubt they are breaching one of the +walls." + +Going to the other side of the platform, he saw that a good many of +the rajah's followers were standing on the wall, listening to the +firing. The wall itself was some thirty-five feet below the spot +where he was standing; neither loophole of his cell commanded a +view of it, so that a prisoner could hold no conversation with the +guard below. + +Presently another man came up on to the walls, and approached the +group there. He was, like the others, dressed in a small white +turban, a short jacket made of unbleached hemp; underneath which +was a loose tunic, bound at the waist with a sash, and coming down +to the knees. He carried a spear and matchlock, and across his +shoulder a small shield was slung. The others did not turn round +and, when a few yards from them, he looked up at Harry; and the +latter saw, to his delight, that he was Abdool. + +Harry dared not make any gesture that might be noticed; but he +nodded his head slightly, and walked to the other side of the +platform, where he remained for a short time, and then returned. +Abdool looked again in his direction; but continued to talk with +the others as to the attack upon the town, and agreed with them +that Holkar would make short work of its defenders. + +Presently the whole party descended to the courtyard, together. +Some of them went down to the lower wall, to talk to their comrades +there; but whether Abdool accompanied them, or was still in the +fort, Harry could not make out. He did not, indeed, remain long on +the platform but, after looking towards Delhi for some little time, +he went down to his room. + +It was evident that Abdool had enlisted in the rajah's service; and +had, no doubt, been engaged by the governor of the fort. The rajah +would be uneasy in his mind, and would assuredly take on any men +that presented themselves; in order to strengthen himself, if +Holkar failed to take the town; and also to gain the latter's +approbation, by joining him with as large a force as possible. +Probably Abdool had only enlisted on the previous day; and would, +of course, need time to acquaint himself with the fortifications, +the position of the guards, and the manner in which he could best +communicate with him. + +Harry's meals were brought up twice a day, at seven o'clock in the +morning and at nightfall. Hitherto he had been quiet and patient, +as there was nothing to be done but to await the course of events. +Now that he knew Abdool was there, and would certainly endeavour to +open communications with him, it was difficult for him to keep +quiet; and he passed hours in pacing round and round his room. +Occasionally he went up to the roof, but he could see no signs of +Abdool; and therefore remained but a short time on the lookout as, +were he to keep on watching the courtyard, it might attract notice, +and the idea might occur to someone that he was expecting some +signal to be made to him. + +Three days passed without a sign; and then, when the guard came in +with his ration, Harry saw that Abdool was one of the number. As he +glanced at him, Abdool, who was standing a little way behind the +others, shook his head, and retired with them. Harry felt a +momentary disappointment; but saw at once that nothing could be +attempted in broad daylight; and that it was at night, only, that +there was a possibility of success. He thought that Abdool had only +come up in order to see the nature of the fastenings of the doors, +and the general position. + +He was not with the party who came up in the evening but, in the +centre of his rice, Harry found a small piece of paper rolled into +a ball. There was not, however, light enough to enable him to read +it; but he lay awake half the night and, at the first gleam of +daylight, went up on to the platform and, seating himself so that +he was not visible from below, waited till he could see to read the +letter. It was, of course, in Mahratti; and so badly written that +he had difficulty in deciphering it. He finally, however, made it +out. + +"Tomorrow evening, when I come up, we will attack the others, if +all goes well; if not, will try the next evening." + +So intent was he, in deciphering the writing, that he had hardly +noticed the outburst of heavy firing in the distance. He had feared +the enemy had captured Delhi on the previous day, as he had heard +no firing; but now the roar of cannon was very heavy, and he had no +doubt that Holkar was trying to take the town by assault. + +In less than half an hour the sound ceased, suddenly. + +"They have either taken the town, or been beaten off decisively," +he said to himself. + +In the afternoon he saw a party of horsemen approaching, followed +by some palanquins. + +"That looks hopeful," he said to himself. "A messenger has probably +brought the rajah news that the assault has failed, and he is +bringing his zenana here for safety, until he hears the issue of +the battle, which will probably take place in a day or two. I +wonder whether this will upset Abdool's plans!" + +The rajah's return was greeted by the discharge of matchlocks. +Presently, however, this was succeeded by cries of rage and a +clamour of voices. + +"Holkar has been thrashed. Now it is a toss up whether the rajah +will, in his anger, send up and have me brought down and executed. +I think the chances are in my favour. The fellow is evidently +crafty, or he would not have persuaded Ochterlony that he was +friendly towards us; and I think he will hold me as a sort of +hostage so that, if Holkar is defeated, he may make favourable +terms for himself by offering to surrender me." + +It was not until an hour later that Harry heard a party ascending +the stairs. When the door opened, he saw that two of the men +carried torches. Abdool, who was in the rear, closed the door +behind him, and then said, "Now sahib!" and struck down the man in +front of him with his tulwar. + +Harry had risen to his feet, as he heard the men coming; and had +braced himself up for a spring, when Abdool gave the word. With a +blow straight from the shoulder, he struck the man carrying the +dish senseless to the floor; tore the sword from his sash; warded +off a hasty blow delivered by one torch bearer, who was too much +astonished at the sudden attack to act with decision, and cut him +down; while, at the same moment, Abdool almost severed the neck of +the other. + +"Thanks, Abdool," Harry said, grasping his follower's hand, "you +have saved my life!" + +"Not yet, sahib. Our work has but begun. There are other dangers to +be met. However, the arrival of the rajah has been fortunate. The +news he has brought has--but first, let me finish the man you +knocked down." + +"There is no occasion for that. Tear his sash into strips, and bind +his hands and feet; and gag him with his own turban. + +"Now, what is our next step?" + +"I have a rope round my body, sahib, to lower ourselves on to the +ramparts. I am wearing an extra suit of clothes, so that you can +get up as one of the garrison. I think we have plenty of time, for +it is not likely that these men will be missed. Everyone is too +excited by the news, that Holkar has failed to take Delhi, to +notice whether we return or not." + +He took off the outer garment that he had brought with him, while +Harry removed his uniform and attired himself in it and, placing +the turban of one of the soldiers on his head, possessed himself of +a shield, spear, and dagger, and then said: + +"What next, Abdool?" + +"We will put out these torches, sahib,"--these were still burning +on the floor--"the light might be noticed from below, and they +might wonder why we stayed here so long." + +"Are there any guards on the walls?" + +"No, sahib; they have them on the lower wall, but not here." + +The torches were extinguished, and then they went up to the +platform above. They fastened one end of the rope to the +battlement, having first tied knots at short intervals. + +"I will go down first on to the wall, sahib; and if by chance any +man may have come up from below, which is not likely, I can hide," +and he at once commenced to lower himself down. + +In two or three minutes, Abdool was joined by Harry. The courtyard +was dark, save that a few torches burned here and there. A great +babble of talking was going on, and the windows of the rajah's +house were lighted up. + +"What are your plans, Abdool? I see that we shall be able to get +through the gates, here, without fear of discovery. Is the gate +through the other wall shut?" + +"Yes, sahib, it is always closed at sunset. Except where the road +comes up to the gate, there is only one place where the rock +projects at the foot of the wall, and there is a possibility of +climbing down. That was where I had intended we should cross the +wall. The height is but twenty feet, there, and I have another rope +of that length. There are no sentries placed, except over the gate. + +"It is quite possible that, even there, there is none tonight. +There is no order among these fellows, as there is among the +Company's troops and, as there is no enemy near, they think that +such a watch is unnecessary; and if any have been sent there, they +are pretty sure to have gone to the huts, to talk over the news +from Delhi. The matter should be easy enough. + +"We may as well start at once. These fellows will quieten down +presently, and will then be more likely to hear any noise we may +make." + +Looking about, they went down by the stairs leading to the +courtyard and walked carelessly across. Taking care to avoid +mingling with the excited groups and, at the same time, keeping as +far from the torches burning in the courtyard as possible, they +passed through the gate--which was standing open without a +guard--and followed the zigzag road, with towers placed at its +corners, each mounting two guns so as to sweep the approach. + +There were two high walls on either hand, loopholed for musketry; +and Abdool said that there was a platform, wide enough for two men +to pass, along the whole length of it. The road terminated in a +heavy gate, some forty yards above that through the outer wall. A +bastion covered it so that, were the lower gate carried, an enemy +would not be able to bring guns to bear against it. This gate stood +open and, passing through it and behind the bastion, they came at +once upon the low, stone-built huts where the majority of the +garrison lived, in time of peace. + +Several torches were burning here, and round each of these were +groups of men, talking excitedly. Leaving Harry behind one of the +huts, Abdool strolled up for a few minutes, to listen to the +conversation, and then rejoined his master. + +"What are they saying, Abdool?" + +"They are saying, sir, that it was wrong of Holkar to attack the +city, before he had defeated the English. It has cost many lives. +But when the English are defeated he will be able, without doubt, +to capture the city; which probably would open its gates to him, +seeing that no assistance could come to them." + +"No one doubts, then, that Holkar will defeat us?" + +"Not in the least," Abdool replied. "They say that he has two +hundred cannon. These will mow down the English. Then the cavalry +will charge, and there will be an end of the matter." + +"They seem to have forgotten all about Laswaree," Harry said. "But +we had better be going. Where is the way up to the wall?" + +"Close by, sahib." + +They ascended the steps. As far as could be seen the wall was +entirely deserted, and they made their way cautiously until close +to the gate. Harry then stopped, and Abdool went on with noiseless +tread. He soon returned. + +"It is as I thought: no sentries are yet posted." + +"But that tower over the gate, Abdool, is a great deal too high for +us to descend by that rope that you have got." + +"Yes, sahib. We go out by an entrance on to a bastion, flanking the +gate. The rope will be long enough there or, at any rate, there +will be but a very short drop." + +They entered the tower through the door communicating with the +wall. Abdool led the way. + +"Keep close to me, sahib. I went down here this morning, and can +find my way in the dark. I did not think that there was much chance +of our coming this way, but it was better to find out all about +it." + +Moving slowly and cautiously, they came to a flight of steps. They +descended some twenty feet, and found themselves at an open portal, +leading on to the flanking bastion. The rope was soon fixed. + +"I will go first, sahib, and will let you know how far you will +have to drop; for the wall looks, to me, higher than it was at the +point where I intended to descend." + +[Illustration: Abdool at once slipped down.] + +It was tied round the neck of a gun, and Abdool at once slipped +down. There was a pause, then a slight dull sound, and the rope +hung loose. + +"The knot at the end is ten feet from the ground," Abdool said, in +a low tone. + +"That is near enough," Harry replied, and then he swung himself +over. + +When he came to the last knot, he lowered himself to the full +length of his arms and let go. The fall was not much more than a +yard; and Abdool stood close by, ready to catch him, should he miss +his foothold on alighting. + +They at once started, at a rapid pace, down the hill. They had +nearly reached the plain when the deep note of a horn was heard. + +"That is the alarm!" Harry exclaimed. "They have found out that I +have gone." + +"They will soon be after us, but there is no fear of their catching +us," Abdool said, as they broke into a trot. "No one will know, at +first, what has happened. Everyone will run to his post; then they +will have to search the fort, and all the ground between it and the +lower wall. All that will take time. It may be an hour before +horsemen start. + +"I did not think that they would miss you till tomorrow morning." + +"I suppose the rajah sent up for me, to amuse himself by +threatening me. He would hardly venture to do more, until he is +sure that Holkar has defeated us. However, as you say, there is +very little chance of their catching us." + +As soon as they were down on the plain, Harry went on: + +"We had better strike north, for an hour or two. They are sure to +ride across the plain in the direction of Delhi, thinking we shall +make straight for the city." + +"That will be best, sahib." + +Fortunately the rain had ceased, and the sky was cloudless, so that +they were able to direct their course by the stars. For two hours +they kept due north, and then turned west. It was a long journey +from the point where they turned. Harry calculated that it would be +nearly fifty miles. The fort was some fifteen miles northeast of +Sekerah, and they were now farther away from Delhi than they had +been when they started. He felt the advantage of the light native +dress, and the sandals that Abdool had given him instead of his +boots. + +When they came across cultivated ground they walked; but a great +portion of the country was a sandy waste; with the ruins of +villages and temples that had, in the palmy days of the empire, +stood there. Across this they went at a trot, for the sand was +generally compact enough to sustain their weight. + +"We shall hardly get there before day breaks, sahib," Abdool +remarked. + +"No; but that is of little consequence. Probably, by this time, +Holkar will have marched away--either to give battle or, what is +more likely, to recruit; and for many miles round Delhi the country +will be rejoicing, at having been spared the ruin that would have +befallen it, had he taken the city. So I have no fear that we shall +be hindered on the way; for though they may wonder at my +appearance--for the dye has now almost worn off, and anyone can see +that I am a white--they will be all the more willing to render us +any assistance. + +"There is no fear of the rajah's horsemen keeping up the pursuit, +beyond halfway between Sekerah and the city; for they must know +that all the zemindars and people round it are in our favour, and +that they might be attacked, when beyond the limits of the rajah's +jagheer." + +When morning broke they could see, in the distance, the minarets of +Delhi. + +"They must be ten miles away, Abdool, and I will enter the next +house we come to. I fancy, from our position, we must be close to +the residence of the zemindar who, at once, brought in a force of +fifty men to aid in the defence of the town. There we are sure of +hospitable treatment and, indeed, I sorely need rest and food. I +have eaten nothing since yesterday morning and, counting the +distance we made to the north after leaving the fort, we must have +walked nearly fifty miles." + +Half a mile farther they saw a house, and made straight for it. + +"Is Shuja Khan within?" Harry asked an armed retainer standing at +the entrance. + +The soldier recognized Harry--having seen him when he called upon +his master--and replied: + +"He returned last night, my lord." + +"Will you tell him that Captain Lindsay, who was treacherously +captured by the Rajah of Sekerah, has just escaped, and is on his +way to the city; and that he asks for his hospitality?" + +"Enter, my lord," the man said, salaaming deeply. "Our master will, +I am sure, gladly receive you." + +He showed Harry into a large room where, a few minutes later, the +zemindar joined him. + +"Peace be with you, sahib! I am rejoiced to see you in safety; for +I heard, at Delhi, that you had not returned, and there were fears +that ill had befallen you and your escort." + +"My escort were killed, and I myself carried a prisoner to the +rajah's hill fort; and I have owed my escape to the faithfulness of +my servant, who got away when the others were massacred and, +disguising himself, got into the fort and contrived my escape." + +"All honour be to him!" the zemindar said. "Then you have walked +all night?" + +"Yes; we went ten miles to the north first, knowing that we should +be pursued; for we heard the alarm given, just after we started. We +have walked fifty miles and, when I say that I have eaten nothing +since yesterday morning, you may be sure that we are sorely in need +of refreshment." + +"It shall be got ready, at once, sahib; and, while it is being +prepared, you can take a bath and a change of garments." + +"I need the bath almost as much as I need a feed," Harry laughed. +"I have just been looking into the glass, and I see that I am +well-nigh as dark as when I came to you, nine or ten days ago." + +His host led him to a room containing a bath, which was soon filled +by the servants, one of whom brought in a handsome suit of the +zemindar's clothes. It was more than half an hour before he went +down again. As soon as he entered the room, a servant brought in a +meal; consisting of slices of meat on a skewer, and a pillau of +chicken. + +The zemindar sat by while he ate his meal, and Harry gave him a +short account of the manner in which he had effected his escape. +The former, in turn, related the events of the siege; adding that +spies had brought in the news, late in the afternoon, that Holkar +would march away in the morning, as he had heard that the English +army was but two days distant. + +"Was he going to meet the English, or to retire towards Malwar?" + +"That I cannot say, sahib, for the spies could not tell us. +Doubtless he and his army are much dispirited, at their failure to +take the city. But the general opinion of the townspeople was that +he would give battle, be victorious, and would return and continue +the siege." + +"I have no fear of his being victorious. He knows, in the battles +of Assaye and Poona, how Scindia was utterly routed; and how, at +Laswaree and Delhi, the Mahrattas were scattered; and I do not +think that he will venture upon giving battle. But if he does, I +have no fear, whatever, of the result. It was more than his whole +army could do to break up Monson's force, although composed +entirely of native infantry, until it was near Agra. This time +there will be British infantry and cavalry, and the Mahrattas will +never stand against their charge." + +Harry had already enquired about Abdool, and found that he had also +had a meal, and was now asleep. + +"Now, sahib," Shuja said, "it were best that you should rest, for a +time. There will be nought doing in Delhi today and, after the heat +of the day is over, we can supply you with horses and an escort." + +Harry accepted the invitation, for he was stiff and sore from his +exertions. The man showed him to a room that had been prepared for +him, and he was soon fast asleep. He did not awake until the sun +was getting low. He at once went downstairs. + +"The horses are ready," the zemindar said, "but I pray you to take +a meal, before mounting. It is ready, and will be served directly." + +Harry, who had been too tired to do justice to his food in the +morning, was by no means sorry to take another meal. As he rose to +go, he thanked the zemindar most heartily for his kindness. + +"It is an honour that you have bestowed upon me," the zemindar +said, courteously. "You and your brave countrymen are fighting to +free us from the oppression of the Mahrattas, and any one of your +race would meet with a hearty welcome here." + +The horses were now brought round. The one intended for Harry was a +very handsome animal, richly caparisoned. + +"It is a fine horse, indeed," he said, as he was about to mount. + +"The horse is yours, sahib," Shuja Khan said. "He is of good breed, +and will carry you far and fast. I shall esteem it a great honour +that you should ride him. + +"Do not thank me, I pray you. 'Tis but a little thing to do, for +one of our brave defenders; of whose deeds one of your officers was +telling me, when he was deploring your loss." + +"I thank you most heartily, Khan; and, after the manner in which +you have given it, I cannot refuse so handsome a present. I shall +be proud to ride such an animal; and you may be sure that, as I do +so, I shall often think of him who presented it to me; and shall +assuredly mention, to Colonel Ochterlony, the very great kindness +with which you have received me." + +As he rode off, followed by an escort of four of the zemindar's +retainers, he saw with satisfaction that Abdool was also attired in +clean white garments. + +"You have done well, I hope, Abdool?" + +"I have been well treated, indeed, sahib, and the zemindar's head +man told me that I was to consider the horse on which I ride my +own. He will carry me well, for he is a stout and serviceable +animal. I was wondering what we should do for horses; for there are +but few in the city, as most of those owning them sent them away, +with their valuables, on hearing of Holkar's approach." + +"The zemindar is a generous man, indeed. He has, as you heard, +presented me with the horse that I am riding. It is certainly a +splendid animal and, though my own was a good one, this is far +better. In fact, I have seen no handsomer horse, anywhere. + +"I wish you had as good a one, Abdool, and then we need not fear +being overtaken, though half the Mahratta army were in pursuit." + +They entered the city by the northern gate, and saw nothing of the +enemy, who were encamped on the other side of the city. Harry was +most warmly received by Colonel Ochterlony. + +"I have been in much anxiety about you," he said. "That you had +been detained was certain; but I hoped that that petty rajah would +not have ventured to harm you, for he would be sure that, sooner or +later, we should have a heavy reckoning with him." + +"I fancy, sir, that he was waiting for news from here. He was +convinced that Holkar would take the city, and defeat Lord Lake. +Had he done so, I have no doubt that he would either have sent me +prisoner to him, or would have despatched me and forwarded only my +head. As I felt certain that things would not turn out as he +stated, I had no great fear for my life; but I thought that I might +have been kept a prisoner for a very long time, for Lord Lake would +have his hands full in other directions." + +"Then he released you on the news that Holkar had failed to capture +the city?" + +"No, sir; I got away owing to the fidelity of my orderly who, after +riding off himself, when the two troopers with me were attacked and +killed, entered a hill fort where I was confined, took service +there, and contrived my escape. I shall hand in a report with the +details, for your perusal, when things have quietened down a bit. +My man has rendered me other valuable services, and I should be +greatly pleased if, in consideration of the fidelity and daring +that he has shown, you would think fit to recommend him for +promotion as a native officer. He belongs to the 3rd Bombay +Cavalry." + +"I should certainly have pleasure in doing so, Captain Lindsay. I +shall, of course, be drawing up a list of the zemindars and others +who have rendered service, and recommending them for reward to the +Government. If you will give me the particulars as to the man's +name and services I will include him in the list. He has been with +you some time, has he not?" + +"Yes, sir, for upwards of six years. He accompanied me from +Calcutta to Nagpore, when I went on a mission to the rajah, whom it +was desirable to keep neutral until the war in Mysore was brought +to an end. He was at Assaye, and journeyed in disguise across the +country with me, to carry the news of that victory to General Lake. +He took part with me in the cavalry charge at Laswaree, and in the +retreat of Colonel Monson's column." + +"That is quite good enough," Colonel Ochterlony said. "But I should +think that it would be the shortest and best way for you to +recommend him direct to Lord Lake, who would be able to put him in +orders at once. At the same time, I will send to Calcutta a +recommendation that some special reward should be granted to him. +There will be a large number of forfeitures of the estates of those +who have sided with Scindia and Holkar. I make no doubt that, on my +strong recommendation, he will obtain a grant of the revenue of a +village or two. Such a grant would do good by showing that +instances of fidelity, even in the case of a private soldier, do +not go unnoticed or unrewarded. We expect the general's arrival +here in a couple of days." + +"I shall be very glad, sir, if only because my uniform is coming on +with his baggage. At present, with my white face and this showy +native dress, I feel that I am stared at by everyone I meet. The +uniform that Captain Ewart lent me I had to leave behind, when I +made my escape." + +"It will not inconvenience him, poor fellow," the colonel said, +"for he was almost cut in two, by a cannon shot, as the enemy +advanced to the last assault." + +When the general arrived within three miles of the city, Harry rode +out to his camp and, having first obtained his uniform, went in to +report himself. + +"So you got through safely, Captain Lindsay? I supposed that you +had, when the news reached us that Delhi was defending itself +stoutly for, had they not had some days warning, they could hardly +have held out for an hour." + +"This is Colonel Burns's report of the military operations of the +siege, sir; and this is a letter from the Resident; and this is my +own report, of my doings since I left you at Agra." + +"Thank you, Captain Lindsay. I shall have a communication to send +to Colonel Ochterlony this afternoon, and should be obliged if you +will carry it for me." + +Harry bowed and left; and then joined the officers of the staff, +who were just sitting down to lunch, and were all glad to see him +again. + +"So you managed to get through Holkar's lines, Lindsay?" + +"Oh, yes! I met with no difficulty, and only fell in once with any +of his troops. I spent an evening with their officer, and after +that rode through without interruption. There was really no danger, +and I do not think Holkar, himself, could have suspected me of +being a British officer." + +"And now, about the siege. You may imagine that we were all very +anxious about it; for though, of course, we should soon have +retaken the place, there would have been a general plunder and +massacre by that brute Holkar." + +"You must wait for particulars until you get there," Harry said, +"for I know nothing about it whatever, except what I have heard." + +"And how is that?" + +"I was, at the time, a prisoner in the hands of the petty Rajah of +Sekerah. He promised to send in three hundred men. The day before +Holkar arrived, I was sent to urge him to despatch them instantly +to aid in the defence. He was evidently impressed with the idea +that Holkar was going to retake the place without any difficulty, +and would afterwards annihilate our army; so, thinking that was the +winning side, he arrested me, and sent me off to a hill fort, +fifteen miles away, and murdered my two troopers." + +"And how did you get away?" + +Harry gave an account of the manner in which Abdool had managed his +escape. + +"Such a fellow as that is a jewel." + +"He is indeed, Major; and I would not part with him for any money. +He came round with me from Bombay to Calcutta, six years ago, and +has ridden with me ever since. He fought most gallantly, in the +Malay Peninsula and at many other places. In my report, to the +general, of my last adventure I have mentioned his services with me +in my various journeys, and have strongly recommended his +promotion." + +"He well deserves it," the major said. "He has, like you, carried +his life in his hand for, if he had been detected, undoubtedly he +would have shared your fate." + + + +Chapter 18: An Awkward Position. + + +Three hours later, Harry was sent for by the general. + +"I have read your report, Captain Lindsay, and thoroughly concur +with you that the very meritorious conduct of the soldier of the +3rd Bombay Cavalry, who has so long been attached to your service, +should be rewarded. I cannot, of course, promote him in his own +regiment. He will therefore appear in orders, tomorrow, as +appointed havildar in the 5th Bengal Cavalry, which is at present +under my command; with a statement that, having now completed ten +years' service in the Bombay army, and having for six years of it +been serving chiefly in this presidency, and having distinguished +himself by his fidelity and courage, he has now been specially +singled out for this promotion; and will be henceforth in charge of +an escort of twenty men, of his new regiment, attached to the +general's staff. + +"As to yourself, sir, I have, in a despatch that will be sent off +this evening, strongly recommended you to the Governor General for +promotion to the rank of major. You were, I see by our army list, +promoted to the rank of captain, seven years ago, before being sent +to Calcutta; and, considering the distinguished and dangerous +services that you have rendered, I wonder that you have not +received another step. That is, however, accounted for by the fact +that you have now, for some time, been away from Calcutta with +General Wellesley and myself. I am sure that my recommendation will +at once be complied with." + +"I am very grateful for your kindness, sir." + +"You owe it to your own merits, and not to any kindness on my +part," Lord Lake said. "You have an altogether exceptional record +and, even in the comparatively short time that you have been with +me, have performed most valuable services. Colonel Monson reports +most highly of your conduct during his retreat; and the mission +that you undertook, at my request, to Colonel Ochterlony was a most +dangerous one and, in itself, sufficient to ensure your promotion. +There are many zealous officers in the service; but few, indeed, so +qualified, by their acquaintance with the native languages, as to +undertake the missions with which you have been entrusted, and have +so successfully carried out." + +Harry took the despatches and at once mounted his horse; which +Abdool had brought round, as soon as his master was summoned to the +general's tent. After he had left the camp, he called Abdool up to +his side. The latter was still in his native dress. + +"Abdool, I shall have to look out for another cook and body +servant; unless, indeed, I have another trooper told off to me." + +Abdool looked at Harry in astonishment. + +"How is that, my lord? Are you dissatisfied with me?" + +Harry laughed. + +"Not in any way, Abdool; upon the contrary. But your name will +appear in orders, tomorrow, as promoted to the rank of havildar, in +the 5th Bengal Cavalry, as a recognition of your faithful services. + +"It is a great honour," Abdool said, "especially as I have not +served as a soubahdar; but I would far rather stay with you. You +have been a father to me, and I pray you to let me remain as I am." + +"You are to remain with me, Abdool. If you had had to leave me I +should, myself, have told the general that I was sure you would +rather not do so; and that, when you left me, I should myself show +my gratitude for your good services; but of his own accord he has +arranged this. You are not to join your new regiment, but are to +command twenty sowars of the 5th, which are to be attached to those +of the general's staff, for escort duty. In this way you will still +be with me, but as a native officer instead of a servant; and +should I be sent on any special duty you will, I am sure, be able +to go with me, as before." + +Abdool's face brightened. + +"That would be well, indeed, sahib. It will truly be a great honour +to be an officer and, if I ever return to my native village in the +Deccan, I shall be regarded with great respect, and the faces of my +father and mother will be made white at the honour I have won. +Still, I fear that I shall not be as much with you as I have been, +before." + +"Nearly as much, Abdool. I expect that Lord Lake, knowing how much +I am indebted to you, will permit me to take you with me, when +engaged on any detached service; and you and your troopers will +form part of his escort, at all times. Besides, it is likely that, +as matters stand, I shall not be sent away on any special duty for +some time to come. You will, I know, be glad to hear that the +general has recommended me for promotion, also; and that I shall +shortly be a major." + +"That pleases me more than my own promotion, sahib. I thought that +you would have had it long ago, after that business at Nagpore." + +"I had only been a captain then a few months, and was very young +for that rank. It would have been unfair to others if I had been +promoted then. I am still very young to be a major." + +"It is not years, but what you have done," Abdool said. "Did you +not obtain the release of Nana Furnuwees, and so change the state +of affairs, altogether, at Poona?" + +"Well, it was for that I got the rank of captain and, since then, +though I have made a few journeys that would have been perilous, +had I not been able to speak Mahratti like a native, I have had no +opportunities of specially distinguishing myself. + +"As soon as we get to Delhi, you had better order yourself a +uniform. You know the dress worn by the native officers of the 5th; +and you must hurry the tailor on, for you may be sure that the army +will not remain long at Delhi; but will set off to meet Holkar as +soon as provisions are collected, for there is no saying how far we +may have to march before we meet him. I do not think that he will +be in any hurry to give battle." + +On the 18th of October, the army arrived before Delhi. Holkar's +cavalry were still in the neighbourhood; but news came that the +infantry, with a considerable number of his guns and a few thousand +horsemen, had left him. On the 29th he crossed the Jumna, below +Panniput, to attack a detachment of one battalion of Sepoys and +some matchlock men who were, under Colonel Burns, returning to the +station at Saharunpoor--from which he had hastened, when a report +reached him that Holkar meditated an attack on Delhi. He was +overtaken by Holkar at Shamlee. + +The inhabitants of the place joined Holkar, but Burns formed his +camp into a square, and repulsed all attacks; until General Lake, +with six regiments of cavalry, the horse artillery, and a brigade +of infantry, arrived to his relief on the 3rd of November; when +Holkar at once retired, and marched south into the district known +as the Doab, where his horsemen plundered and burnt every village +near his line of route. General Lake followed at once. + +He had, before leaving Delhi, sent the rest of the British +infantry, with two regiments of cavalry, under General Fraser, to +attack Holkar's infantry and artillery; which had retired into the +dominions of the Rajah of Bhurtpoor who, although he had been the +first to enter into alliance with the British, after the capture of +Agra, had now declared against them. They had taken up a position +near the rajah's fortress of Deeg, which was believed to be +impregnable. + +Their position was a very strong one. An extensive morass and a +deep tank covered their front. On their left was a fortified +village; and on their right the fort of Deeg, which was supported +by several lines of batteries. + +Harry had been directed to accompany General Fraser, and was to +take with him Abdool's little troop, to serve as escort and furnish +messengers. Abdool--now in his new uniform--rode at its head, +behind General Fraser's staff, as he reconnoitred the enemy's +position; and felt no small pride in his changed position, +especially as the British officers of the staff, all of whom had +heard of the manner in which he had brought about Harry's escape, +took special notice of him; and on the march one or other had often +dropped behind to have a talk with him. + +The next morning the British troops moved forward to the attack, in +two lines. The 76th Regiment rushed impetuously against the +fortified village, and drove its defenders out at the point of the +bayonet. A tremendous fire was at once opened by the batteries +behind it but, without for a moment hesitating, the 76th charged +them, and were speedily in the thick of their enemies. The 1st +Bengal European regiment, which followed, seeing them almost +surrounded, ran down to their assistance; and were followed by the +Sepoys; and Holkar's infantry, unable to resist the assault, fled +to shelter of their next line of guns. + +General Fraser himself led the attack upon these. They were also +carried; but the general fell, mortally wounded. Colonel Monson, +who now succeeded to the command, reformed the troops--who were in +some disorder, owing to the impetuosity of their charge--and led +them forward again. Battery after battery was captured. Numbers of +Holkar's men tried to cross the morass, but sank in the mud and +lost their lives. The rest took refuge under the walls of Deeg, +whose guns at once opened fire upon their pursuers. + +While the tide pressed forward, unchecked, the Mahratta horse had +ridden down in the rear of the British; and had taken possession of +the first line of batteries, and had turned their guns upon their +late captors. The consequences would have been serious, had not +Captain Norford gathered together twenty-eight men of the 76th +Regiment, and led them against the Mahratta horse. These, staggered +by the daring with which this handful of men advanced against them, +fired a hasty volley and fled. Captain Norford was killed, but the +men took possession of the guns; which the Mahrattas, thinking that +the day was altogether lost, did not attempt to recapture. + +As the fortress of Deeg was far too strong to be attacked by any +force unprovided with siege guns, the British drew back, until +beyond the range of its cannon; carrying off all the guns captured +in the batteries, eighty-seven in number. The total amount of +artillery employed against our troops was no less than one hundred +and sixty guns. Our loss was naturally heavy, amounting to over six +hundred and forty killed and wounded; while that of the enemy was +estimated at two thousand killed, or smothered in the morass. + +The force encamped beyond the reach of the guns of Deeg, awaiting +orders from General Lake. The battle was scarcely over when Colonel +Monson rode up to Harry, and said: + +"It is of great importance that General Lake should receive the +news of our victory, as soon as possible. There is no one so well +fitted to carry it as you are. There will be no occasion for +disguise, this time; for Holkar's depredations must have excited +the whole population against him. At the same time, you had better +take your havildar and his troopers with you. It will command +respect and, if you should come across any small body of Holkar's +marauders, I am sure that you will give a good account of them." + +"Can you give me any indication as to where General Lake is likely +to be, at present, sir?" + +"He marched from Shamsheer to Mahomedabad and, as he probably took +the road through Sekerah, he no doubt settled accounts with that +rascally rajah. I understood, from him, that he suspected Holkar +would make for Sherdanah; as the Begum of that place has five +battalions of drilled troops, and forty guns, which would be a +welcome reinforcement. After that he will, of course, be guided by +Holkar's movements. + +"The reports of the peasantry lead me to believe that the enemy are +advancing in the direction of Furukabad. I should say that you had +best cross the Jumna at Muttra, and ride to Alighur. In that way +you will not be likely to meet Holkar's force; which must, at +present, be beyond the Ganges." + +Half an hour later, Harry started with his escort. He crossed the +Jumna at Muttra, and there learned that Holkar had, the night +before, arrived within twelve miles of the town; and was, as usual, +destroying everything before him. Harry continued his course to +Cod, within a mile or two of Alighur, which he reached late in the +evening. + +The capture of the fort, believed to be impregnable, had had the +effect of producing so profound a respect for the British arms that +Harry, on his arrival, was received by the principal men of the +town; and a large house was placed at his disposal, for himself and +his escort. Supplies were at once furnished and, when a meal had +been eaten and the horses attended to, the troops lay down for the +night. + +Harry had been informed that a horseman had brought in news that +the British army had arrived at Bareilly. He started at daybreak +and, late the next evening, after a ride of over one hundred miles, +rode into Lord Lake's camp. + +"What news do you bring?" the general asked, as he alighted from +his horse. + +"I have to report, sir, that on the 13th the force under General +Fraser attacked the enemy, who were very strongly posted within +gunshot of the fortress of Deeg. After hard fighting he completely +defeated them, captured eighty-seven of their guns, and drove them +from under the guns of Deeg, which at once opened fire on us. The +enemy's loss was estimated at two thousand. Ours was not known, +when I left the camp; but it was roughly estimated at over six +hundred in killed and wounded. Among the former, I regret to say, +was General Fraser, who was mortally wounded by a cannon shot, +while leading on his men." + +"I am sorry to hear of his loss," General Lake said, "while the +rest of your news is satisfactory, indeed. Reports had reached me +that the Rajah of Bhurtpoor had joined Holkar but, after coming +into Agra and begging that we would accept him as an ally, I had +difficulty in believing that he would have turned against us; +especially as he must have known that, if Holkar was defeated, he +would have to bear the whole brunt of our anger--which he could not +hope to escape, as his territory lies within two or three days' +march of Agra." + +The general called his staff, and told them of the brilliant +victory that had been won at Deeg. The news spread rapidly through +the camp, and was greeted with enthusiastic cheers by the troops. +In the meantime Lord Lake had entered his tent, and obtained full +particulars of the battle. + +"I was close to General Fraser when he was struck, sir," Harry +concluded. "He and his escort were with the cavalry, when it +charged the second line of their batteries. Five of the escort were +killed; and I may say that the others, led by their havildar, were +among the first in at the guns." + +"I have just received news," the general said, "that Holkar crossed +this morning, at Surajepoor; and was believed to be on his way to +Furukabad. He is evidently on the march to Deeg and, if he joins +his troops there, they may attack Colonel Monson's force. Therefore +I intend to leave the tents and infantry to follow; and shall start +at daybreak, with the cavalry and horse artillery; and hope to +overtake him, especially as he has lately moved fast, and will +probably rest a day or two at Furukabad." + +The next day the cavalry marched upwards of forty miles and, on the +following morning, continued their journey. They had fifty-eight +miles now before them. With occasional halts they marched all day, +crossed the Ganges at Surajepoor, and pushed on until within a mile +of Holkar's camp. Believing the British to be many miles away, no +precautions had been taken against surprise; and the first +intimation of an enemy being near at hand was the opening of fire, +at daybreak, by Lord Lake's artillery into their camp--the guns +being posted so as to permit the British cavalry to attack, without +coming across the line of fire. + +Round after round of grape was poured into the camp; and then the +guns ceased firing, as the six regiments of cavalry dashed in among +the panic-stricken enemy. Scarcely any resistance was attempted +and, in a few minutes, the ground was strewn with dead. Holkar had +mounted and ridden off, with a portion of his cavalry, before our +men entered the camp; and did not draw rein until he reached +Caline, eighteen miles distant. His troops fled in all directions, +hotly pursued by the cavalry, for twelve miles; great numbers being +overtaken and cut down. The cavalry halted from sheer fatigue, +having performed the almost unparalleled march of seventy miles +since their last halting place; an exploit rendered all the more +wonderful by the fact that they had made a march of three hundred +and fifty miles in the preceding fortnight. + +Their loss, in the action, was only two killed and twenty wounded. +Holkar's loss was estimated at three thousand killed on the field; +and half of his cavalry, which was previously sixty thousand +strong, were now but scattered fugitives. + +That day three royal salutes were fired, for as many victories; +namely, that at Furukabad, that at Deeg, and the capture of +Shaddone--the last of Holkar's fortresses in the south--by Colonel +Wallis. As was expected, Holkar and his cavalry, as soon as they +recovered from their panic, rode to Deeg and joined the remains of +the infantry and artillery there. + +General Lake remained a day or two, to rest the troops after their +exertions. The brigade of infantry that, had been left behind when +the cavalry started on their last march, had been ordered to move +rapidly down to Agra; and to escort thence the heavy guns that +would be required for the siege of Deeg and, on the 1st of +December, General Lake joined the force near that fortress. The +battering train arrived from Agra on the 12th, and the trenches +were opened on the following day. + +In point of territory, the country ruled over by the Rajah of +Bhurtpoor was a comparatively small one. It was inhabited by a +people called Jats, who differed in many respects from the +communities round them. They were hardy, industrious, and brave; +and had, at one time, taken a prominent share in the wars of that +part of India, and had been masters of Agra. They had lost the +city, however, in 1774; and with it a considerable portion of their +territory. Under the present rajah, however, they had regained some +of their lost ground and, on his entering into an alliance with the +British, he had received a considerable increase of territory. + +In these circumstances the defection was wholly unexpected. The +rajah had a standing army of six thousand men; and could, on an +emergency, place fifty thousand in the field. Nevertheless, seeing +how other very much more powerful native princes had been unable to +withstand the British arms, his conduct was not only ungrateful and +treacherous, but wholly unaccountable. + +It was necessary for the army to move forward to Deeg with great +circumspection. Holkar's cavalry constantly hovered round them, and +they had to protect an enormous train conveying the siege +appliances and provisions for the force. In view of the +comparatively small equipage now deemed sufficient, in native wars +in India, the size of that which accompanied Lord Lake's army, on +this occasion, appears prodigious. The followers were estimated at +not less than sixty thousand. Besides elephants and camels, a +hundred thousand bullocks were employed on preparations for an +advance into the town. + +But, during the night, Holkar and the garrison of Deeg retired, and +made for Bhurtpoor. On the morning of the 25th, therefore, the +British took unopposed possession of Deeg; capturing, there and in +the batteries outside, a hundred guns. A week later, General Lake +moved forward to Bhurtpoor. Holkar, as before, had not entered the +town; but had formed a camp a few miles distant. Here he was able +to maintain himself, for the Rajah of Bhurtpoor had called to his +assistance a great marauding leader, Ameer Khan, who was raiding in +Bundelcund; and also a leader named Bapeejee Scindia; and these, +with the rajah's cavalry and that of Holkar, formed so powerful a +force that the British cavalry were fully occupied in keeping them +at a distance from camp, and in protecting the convoy. + +On the day of the arrival of the army before Bhurtpoor, Harry--who +had now been gazetted to the rank of major--was sent to Agra, +thirty-four miles distant, with orders respecting a convoy that was +about to be sent off from there. He was accompanied by Abdool and +ten troopers. At that time Ameer Khan had not appeared upon the +scene, and it was not considered that there was any danger of the +communications with Agra being interfered with. + +Harry reached the city in the afternoon, and waited there until +four o'clock next day; seeing that the preparations for the convoy, +which was a very large one, were completed. It started at that +hour, and was to get as far as possible by nightfall; so that it +would be able to reach the camp by the following evening. After +seeing it in motion, Harry started with his escort for the ride +back. He was some ten miles away from the convoy when night fell. +Bhurtpoor, like Deeg, stood on a plain, surrounded by swamps and +morasses; the situation having been chosen from the difficulties +these offered to the advance of an enemy. + +After proceeding for five miles farther, Abdool, who was riding +with Harry, said: + +"I do not know, sahib, but it seems to me, by the sound of the +horses' hoofs, that we have left the track." + +Harry called a halt; and Abdool dismounted, and found that his +suspicion was correct, and that they had certainly left the road. + +"This is awkward," Harry said, "for we do not know how long it is +since we left it, or whether it is to the right hand or left." + +The night was indeed a very dark one, a mist almost covered the +sky, and it was only occasionally that a star could be seen. + +"We must go carefully, or we shall fall in one of these morasses." + +Two troopers were sent off, one to the right, the other to the +left. One of them, when he had gone about a quarter of a mile, was +heard to shout that he was fast in the morass. Abdool and four of +the men rode to his assistance, and presently returned with him, +having with the greatest difficulty extricated his horse. Nothing +had been heard of the other trooper. Again and again Harry shouted, +but no reply came back. They waited half an hour, and then +concluded that either the man, on his return, had missed his way +altogether; or that he had fallen into a swamp, when they were too +far off to hear his voice, and had perished there. + +Harry again gave the word for them to move on, this time at a walk. +Abdool preceded them on foot. Presently he said: + +"The ground is getting softer, sahib. I think that we are +approaching a swamp." + +"We had better all dismount," Harry said, setting the example. + +"Now, let each move in different directions, going very cautiously, +and calling out if he comes upon soft ground." + +He himself, with two of the troopers, remained with the horses. One +after another, the men came upon swampy ground; one only continued +to find it firm. + +"I suppose that that is the way we came into it, Abdool," Harry +said, as the others returned to the horses. "We must follow him, +and will do it on foot. This is getting serious." + +For a quarter of a mile, they kept on ground that was comparatively +firm. Then the man ahead of them gave a sudden shout. He had +fallen, waist deep, into a little stream. He was soon hauled out. + +"There is nothing to be done, Abdool, but to halt till morning. Let +us go back, till we can find a piece of ground dry enough to lie +down upon." + +They had made, however, little progress when their feet began to +sink up to the ankles. + +"It is no use, Abdool. We have evidently lost our bearings, +altogether. We must stay where we are till morning, or we shall get +helplessly bogged." + +The hours passed slowly and painfully. From time to time, the men +endeavoured to find firmer ground, but always without success; and +it was with the deepest satisfaction that, at last, they saw the +sky begin to lighten. Half an hour later, they were able to form an +idea of their position. + +They were far in what appeared to be a wide morass. There were +pools of water in some places, and it seemed almost miraculous that +they should have succeeded in so far entering the swamp where, even +by daylight, there scarcely seemed a yard of firm ground. Abdool +again went ahead and, step by step, the little troop followed; +frequently having to turn back again, on finding the line that they +were pursuing impassable. + +They were still a hundred yards from what appeared to be solid +ground when they heard loud shouts and, looking round, saw some +fifty horsemen skirting the edge of the morass. When they reached +the point opposite to the little party, they dismounted and opened +fire. One of the troopers fell dead, and several of the horses were +hit. + +"There is nothing for it but to surrender, Abdool," Harry said, as +some of the troopers returned the fire. + +The enemy rode off for a hundred yards; and then, leaving the +horses in charge of a few of their number, they returned to the +edge of the morass, threw themselves down in the long coarse grass, +and again opened fire. Two more of the troopers fell, at the first +discharge. Harry drew out his handkerchief, and waved it. + +[Illustration: Harry drew out his handkerchief, and waved it.] + +"We will not surrender, if they are Holkar's men," he said to +Abdool. "We should only be tortured, and then put to death. If they +are Bhurtpoor's men, we may have fair treatment." + +Therefore, as soon as the enemy had stopped firing he shouted: + +"Whose soldiers are you?" + +"The Rajah of Bhurtpoor's," was shouted back. + +"We will surrender, if you will swear to take us to Bhurtpoor and +hand us over to the rajah. If you will not do so, we will defend +ourselves to the last." + +A native officer stood up. + +"Assuredly we will take you to the rajah. I swear it on my faith." + +"Very well then, send a man to guide us out of this place." + +An order was given. One of the men went back and mounted his horse, +and rode along by the edge of the morass for nearly half a mile. +The others, more slowly, followed him. + +"It is clear that this place in front of us is absolutely +impassable," Harry said, "or they would never all move away." + +"It is lucky that you have not got your favourite horse today, +sir," Abdool said--for Harry had bought, from one of the cavalry, a +horse that had been captured from the Mahrattas, as one was +insufficient for the work he had to do. + +"I should be very glad, indeed, Abdool, if I thought that I was +likely to return to camp soon. But in such peril as this, it is but +a small satisfaction to know that he is safe." + +"What do you think of our chances, sahib?" + +"I don't think the Rajah of Bhurtpoor will harm us. He must feel +that his situation is almost desperate, and it would put him beyond +the reach of pardon, if he were to massacre his prisoners." + +The Jat had now dismounted, and could be seen making his way +towards them on foot; sometimes coming straight, but more often +making long bends and turns. It was evident, by the absence of any +hesitation in his movements, that he was well acquainted with the +morass. + +"If that is the only way to us," Harry said, "it is marvellous, +indeed, that we made our way so far." + +"I think, sahib, that it was the instinct of the horses. I felt +mine pull at the rein, as I was leading him, sometimes to the right +and sometimes to the left; and I always let him have his way, +knowing that horses can see and smell better than we can and, as we +were all in single file, you followed without noticing the turns." + +In ten minutes the man arrived. He spoke to Harry, but his language +differed widely from either Mahratti or that spoken by the people +of Bengal. However, he signed to the troopers to lay down their +arms and, when they had done so, started to rejoin the others; and, +leading the horses, the party followed. The path was fairly firm, +and Harry had no doubt that it was used by fowlers, in search of +the game with which, at certain seasons of the year, the lakes and +morasses abounded. + +When they arrived at the edge of the swamp, where the others were +awaiting them, Harry handed his sword to their leader. He and his +party then mounted and, surrounded by the Jats, rode to Bhurtpoor. +Their entrance was greeted with loud shouts and acclamations by the +populace. Making their way straight through the town, which covered +a large extent of ground, they reached the palace, a noble building +built upon a rock that rose abruptly from the plain. Ascending the +steep path leading to the gate, the party entered the courtyard. +Here the captives remained in charge of the horsemen, while the +leader went in to report to the rajah. + +[Illustration: View of the Rajah's Palace, Bhurtpoor.] + +Presently he came out, with four of the rajah's guard, and these +led Harry and Abdool into the audience chamber. The rajah, with a +number of personal attendants, entered and took his seat. + +"You are an officer in the English army. What is your rank?" the +rajah said in Mahratti. + +"I am a major." + +"Of what regiment?" + +"I am on the personal staff of the general." + +"And this man?" + +"He is a native officer, at present commanding a portion of the +general's escort." + +"How was it that you were alone, last night?" + +"I had ridden to Agra, the day before; and was too late, in +starting back, to gain the camp before it was dark. I lost my way +and, finding that we were in the heart of the morass, we were +obliged to wait till morning." + +"It is well that you did not try to get out. Had you done so, none +of you would be here now. + +"You speak Mahratti like a native." + +"I was some years at Poona and, as a child, had a Mahratta woman as +a nurse, and learnt it from her." + +The rajah was silent for a minute or two, then he asked: + +"Does your general think that he is going to capture my town?" + +"I do not know, but he is going to try." + +"He will not succeed," the rajah said, positively. "We gave up +Deeg, because we did not want a large force shut up there. Our +walls are strong but, were they levelled to the ground, we would +still defend the place to the last." + +"I am aware that your people are brave, Rajah. They fought well, +indeed; and if Holkar's troops had fought as stoutly, the result +might have been different." + +The rajah again sat in thought for some time, then he said: + +"I do not wish to treat you harshly. I can honour brave men, even +when they are enemies. You will have an apartment assigned to you +here, and be treated as my guest; only, do not venture to leave the +palace--at least, unless you leave it with me. There are many who +have lost friends at Deeg, many who may lose their lives before +your army retires, and I could not answer for your safety. Would +you like this native officer to be with you?" + +"I should esteem it a great favour, Rajah. He has been with me for +several years, and I regard him as a friend. Thank you, also, for +your courtesy to me." + +"You will give your promise not to try to escape?" + +As Harry believed that, in the course of a short time, the British +would be masters of the town, he assented without hesitation. + +The rajah looked pleased. + +"You need be under no uneasiness as to your troopers. They will, of +course, be in confinement but, beyond that, they shall have no +reason to complain of their treatment." + +The rajah said a few words to one of his attendants, who at once +motioned to Harry and Abdool to follow him. Harry bowed to the +rajah and, with Abdool, followed the attendant. He was taken to a +commodious chamber. The walls and divans were of white marble; and +the floor was paved with the same material, but in two colours. The +framework of the window was elaborately carved, and it was evident +that the room was, at ordinary times, used as a guest chamber. + +The attendant left them, for a few minutes. + +"This is better than I had even hoped for, Abdool. There can be no +doubt that the rajah, though he put a good face on it, is +desperately anxious; and behaves to us in this way, in hopes that +he may finally obtain better terms than he otherwise would do, by +his good treatment of us." + +"He looks honest and straightforward, sahib. 'Tis strange that he +should have behaved so treacherously, just after the Company had +granted him an increase of territory." + +"We must make some allowances for him. No doubt, like all the +Indian princes we have had to do with, he is ready to join the +strongest side. He heard that Holkar was coming down with an +immense army, and believed that we should not be able to withstand +him. In that case he, as our ally, would share in our misfortunes. +His territories would be ravaged; and he himself killed or taken +back, as a prisoner, to the Deccan. He was probably hesitating, +when the news came of Monson's disastrous retreat. This doubtless +confirmed his opinion of Holkar's invincibility; and he determined, +as the only way of saving himself, to declare for him." + +The attendant now entered, with four men bearing cushions for the +divans and carpets for the floor, large ewers and basins, with +soft, embroidered towels, and a pile of rugs for beds. After he had +retired, Harry went to the window and looked out. Below was the +courtyard, and the room was on the first story. + +"Well, if we are to be prisoners, Abdool, we could hardly wish to +be better suited. A fortnight's rest will do us no harm, for we +have been riding hard almost ever since we left Agra with Monson's +force." + +"It is well, sahib, that you were with us when we were captured. +Had we been alone, we should have had no mercy. It is because the +rajah regards you as such a valuable prisoner that we have been +spared. + +"If you had not given your promise, I think we might have made our +escape." + +"We might have done so, Abdool; but if I had not given my promise, +you may be sure that we should not have been lodged so comfortably." + + +Chapter 19: Bhurtpoor. + + +Half an hour later the attendant entered with two servants, +carrying a large tray with a variety of dishes. After they had +eaten the meal, Harry proposed that they should go up to the top of +one of the central towers of the palace, to obtain a general view +of the country. + +"It would be better to do that than to venture down into the +courtyard, at present, Abdool. The sight of our uniforms might give +offence, as it would not be understood that we have the rajah's +permission to move about the palace. We must wait till the man +comes in with the tray. It is possible that he may understand +enough Mahratti to make out what we want, and will show us the way +up. + +"It would never do for us to try to ascend alone. We might +accidentally open the door of the rajah's zenana, and then I doubt +if even his desire to hold me as a hostage would suffice to save +our lives." + +The attendant understood enough of Mahratti to make out their +request, and offered at once to accompany them. They ascended +numerous staircases until, at last, they reached the flat roof of +the palace; above which rose three round towers, surmounted by +domes. The highest of these had a gallery running round it, a few +feet below the dome. + +The attendant led the way to this and, on reaching the gallery, +they found that it commanded a very wide view over the flat +country. The town itself covered a considerable space, the walls +being eight miles in circumference. At the eastern end the fort, a +square and solid edifice, was built on ground somewhat higher than +the town. It had bastions and flanking towers and, as had been +learned from prisoners taken at Deeg, it had a moat much wider and +deeper than that which ran round the town walls. It was built +within these, one side of the square looking across the country, +while the other three were inside. Although the houses were for the +most part scattered, the town had a picturesque appearance, from +the number of trees growing within it. + +Towards the northeast the fort of Deeg could be clearly seen and, +to the southwest, the mosques and fort of Agra were faintly visible +in the clear air. At a distance of a mile and a half from the city +was the British camp, with its white tents; and an irregular black +mass marked the low shelters of the camp followers and the enormous +concourse of draught animals. + +It certainly seemed a hazardous enterprise for so small a number of +troops to attack such a large and populous town, strongly +fortified, and held by a brave people. Harry remarked on this to +Abdool, but the latter said, confidently: + +"They cannot stand against the English, sahib. General Lake has +always been victorious." + +"He has so, Abdool, and that is one of the reasons why I do not +feel so certain of his success as I did. He has never yet +undertaken a siege, and his impetuosity and confidence in his +troops may lead him to make an attack with insufficient numbers, +and before it is really practicable. I do not think that this town +is to be taken by storm, and I doubt whether Lord Lake will be +content to wait for regular siege operations, before he tries an +assault. + +"Look over there, towards Agra. If I am not mistaken, there is a +large body of cavalry out there. They are certainly not our men, +they are too much mixed up for that. Possibly the rajah may have +obtained the aid of a band of Pindarees, or of some other irregular +troops; at any rate, it will give trouble to the convoy we left +yesterday." + +He looked at the camp again. + +"There is a stir in the valley, and it looks as if they had heard +of that force out there, and are about to start to attack it." + +Three regiments of cavalry set out. As they were getting ready, two +horsemen could be seen to ride off, at a gallop, from a group of +trees half a mile from the camp. As soon as they approached the +mass of horsemen in the distance, they turned and rode off at full +speed. + +"They have evidently no idea of fighting, today, whoever they are. +We may as well go down again, Abdool. This is a grand lookout; and +we shall, at any rate, get a general idea of the direction in which +the attack will be made." + +Two days later they were able, from their lookout, to see that +bodies of men came and went between the camp and a group of trees, +halfway between it and the town. + +"I expect that they are establishing a battery among those trees," +Harry said, "and it will not be long before the affair begins." + +The next morning, six eighteen-pounders opened fire from the wood +and, in the afternoon, another battery of eight mortars began +throwing shells into the town. The guns on the walls answered, and +a brisk fire was kept up, for the next ten days. During this time +several breaches had been effected in the wall, near the southeast +angle, but the defenders had fixed strong wooden stockades in the +debris every night, so that no attack could be made. In order to +prevent this being done with the last-made breach, it was +determined to assault at once. + +The two prisoners had not had the lookout gallery to themselves. +Some of the rajah's officers were constantly there, and any +movement of troops was at once reported by them. The rajah himself +had, twice or thrice, come up for a short time to watch the +operations; and had, on each occasion, talked for some minutes with +Harry. + +"Your people will be mad, if they try to attack us through that +small hole in the wall," he said, on the afternoon of the 14th. +"Were they to level a quarter of a mile of the wall, they might +have some chance, though I doubt whether they would ever get a +footing at the top; but with all my soldiers ready to defend that +small opening, and with thirty or forty guns to fire at your people +as they advance, it is as ridiculous as if ten men should attempt +to take this palace. What do you think?" + +"I cannot say, Rajah. From here I am unable to see what is taking +place at the walls, nor how wide is the breach you speak of, nor +how deep the ditch beyond; therefore I can give no opinion." + +"The English are brave fighters," the rajah said. "They have taken +places in a few hours that seemed impregnable, but they cannot +perform impossibilities. Our walls are defended by forty thousand +men and--although in the open field I do not say that you might not +defeat us, seeing how your troops are disciplined, while with us +each man fights for himself--when it is a question of holding a +wall or defending a breach, I can trust my soldiers. We are twice +as numerous. We have heavier guns, and more of them, than you have +and, as I told you, the English will never get into Bhurtpoor." + +At seven o'clock in the evening, a deep and almost continuous roar +of guns broke out. + +"The assault has begun!" Harry exclaimed. "We shall not see much, +but we may get some idea as to how things are going from the +lookout." + +It was too dark for the movements of troops to be seen, but the +quick flashes of the guns on either side, and a play of flickering +fire along the top of the wall showed that the storming party was +approaching. The attack was made in three parties: one advanced +against a battery which the defenders had established outside the +walls, at a spot where its fire would take in flank any force +advancing against the point towards which the fire of the English +guns had been directed; another was to attempt a gateway near the +breach; while the central column, consisting of five hundred +Europeans and a battalion of Sepoys, was to attack the breach +itself. + +For a time the roar of firing was incessant. The alarm had been +given as soon as the British columns advanced from the wood. +Notwithstanding this, the right column advanced straight against +the battery, captured it, and spiked the guns. The left column, as +it approached the gate, came upon a deep cut filled with water and, +having no means of crossing this, they moved to the support of the +force attacking the breach. This had been greatly delayed. The +ground to be crossed was swampy, with many pools and, in the +darkness, numbers lost their way, and the force arrived at the +point of attack in great confusion. + +A small party of twenty-three men only--of the 22nd Regiment, under +Lieutenant Manser--who formed the forlorn hope, crossed the ditch, +breast high in water, and mounted the breach. In the confusion that +reigned among the troops, some of the officers had lost their way, +and there was no one to assume the command or to give orders; and +Lieutenant Manser, finding that he was unsupported, and could not +with a handful of men attempt to attack either of the bastions, +from which a terrible fire was being maintained, made the men sit +down and shelter themselves as well as they could, in the debris of +the breach; while he himself recrossed the ditch to summon up the +support. In this he failed. All order was lost, and the men who +formed the forlorn hope were at last called back, and the whole +force retired, suffering heavily from the terrible fire to which +they were exposed. Eighty-five were killed and three hundred and +seventy-one wounded. + +A more deplorable and ill-managed assault was never made by British +troops. As Harry had thought possible, Lord Lake had treated the +capture of Bhurtpoor as if it had been but a little hill fort. He +had made no attempt to carry out regular siege operations but, +trusting to the valour of his troops, had sent them across a +considerable distance of plain swept by the enemy's fire, to +assault a breach defended by some of the bravest tribesmen of +India; and had not even issued commands which would have ensured +order and cohesion in the attack. + +The lesson that had been taught was not sufficiently taken to +heart. Some more batteries were placed in position and, on the +16th, opened a heavy fire against the wall on the left of the +former breach, which had been repaired during the two nights +following its successful defence. So heavy was the fire from the +new batteries that another breach was made in the course of a few +hours. The Jats stockaded it during the night, but the timbers were +soon knocked to fragments and, for five days, a continuous +cannonade was maintained and a large breach formed. + +It was necessary to find out how wide the ditch was, and three +native cavalry and three British troopers, all dressed as natives, +suddenly dashed out of the camp. At a short distance behind them a +number of Sepoys ran out, as if in pursuit, discharging their +muskets as they did so. Just as the six horsemen arrived at the +ditch, two of the troopers' chargers were made to fall. The native +havildar shouted to the soldiers on the wall to save them from the +accursed feringhees, and show them the nearest entrance to the +city. The soldiers pointed to a gate near the breach and, as soon +as the men had again mounted, the havildar rode with them along the +ditch, and made the necessary observations. + +Then they put spurs to their horses, and rode off--the Jats, on +seeing that they had been deceived, opening upon them with +musketry. Their excitement and fury, however, disturbed their aim, +and the six horsemen rode into camp unhurt, and reported that the +ditch was not very wide, and that it did not seem to be very deep. + +Portable bridges were at once constructed. These were to be carried +by picked men, who were instructed in the best method of pushing +them over the ditch. To prevent the recurrence of the confusion +that had been, before, caused by the assault in the dark, it was +determined that it should be made in daylight and, on the following +afternoon, the storming party moved forward. It consisted of four +hundred and twenty men from the European regiments, supported by +the rest of those troops, and three battalions of native infantry. +Colonel Macrae was in command. The whole of the batteries opened +fire, to cover the movement and keep down that of the besieged. + +On arriving at the ditch, it was found that the portable bridges +could not be thrown across as, during the night, the garrison had +dammed up the moat below the breach and turned a quantity of water +into it, thus doubling both its width and depth. A few gallant +fellows jumped in, swam across, and climbed the breach; but there +were few capable of performing this feat, encumbered by their +muskets and ammunition; and Colonel Macrae, seeing the impossibility +of succeeding, called them back, and retired under a tremendous fire +from the bastions and walls. + +This assault was even more disastrous than the last, for the loss +in killed and wounded amounted to nearly six hundred. Harry was +deeply disappointed at these reverses, which the rajah himself, +with great glee, reported to him with full details. + +There had been other fighting: two British convoys on their way +from Agra had been attacked by the horsemen of Ameer Khan, Holkar, +and the rajah. The first might have been successful, for the twelve +hundred bullocks were escorted by only fourteen hundred men; and +these, although they might have defended themselves successfully, +were unable to keep the convoy together. The animals, excited by +the firing, were rushing off in all directions when, fortunately, a +body of our cavalry which had been sent out to meet the convoy +arrived, and drove off the enemy with a loss of six hundred men. + +The next morning a general movement could be seen in the British +camp. The rajah, who was immediately informed of it, came up to the +lookout. + +"The English general has given it up as hopeless," he said. "They +are about to march away." + +"It looks like it, Rajah," Harry admitted, "but I should hardly +fancy that Lord Lake will take such a step. He has tried to take +the town by a sudden assault, and I think that he will not retreat +until he has attempted to do so by a regular siege operation." + +An hour later the whole of the tents had been pulled down and, +presently, both the troops and the huge body of followers and +cattle were in motion. + +"They are not going to Agra," the rajah said, after watching them +for some time; "they must be going to march to the north." + +Two hours later, the great procession had arrived at the north of +the town. There they halted, and their long lines of tents began to +rise. + +"They are going to try another point," the rajah exclaimed. "Truly +they are brave men, but they will be repulsed, as they were +before." + +"I fancy they will begin in another way, Rajah, and will make +regular approaches, so that they will not have to pass across the +open ground swept by your guns." + +This indeed turned out to be the case. The trenches were at once +opened and, ere long, two batteries were established at a distance +of four hundred yards from the wall. Two days later another, still +nearer, opened fire and, by the 20th of February, the trenches had +been pressed forward to the edge of the ditch; and a mine sunk, +with the intention of blowing up the counterscarp, and so partially +filling the ditch. The troops intended for the assault took their +places in the trenches at an early hour, so as to be ready to +attack as soon as the repairs made by the garrison in the breach +during the night could be destroyed by the batteries. + +The Jats, however, had been rendered so confident by their previous +successes that, during the night, they made a sally, crept into the +advanced trench--from which the workmen had been withdrawn--and +started to demolish the mine and carry off the tools. As the +storming party moved down through the trenches the Jats--who had +made the first sally--joined by a considerable number from the +town, rushed forward and attacked them; and inflicted considerable +loss before they were repulsed. A portion of them, however, still +held the advanced trench; and when the 75th and 76th, who were at +the head of the column, were ordered to dislodge them, they +hesitated. + +The repulse of the former attacks had had its effect, and the +troops, believing that the enemy would have filled the mine with +powder, and would explode it as they advanced, refused to move. The +remaining men of the flank companies of the 22nd stepped forward +but, as they were too few to attack so considerable a number of the +enemy, the 12th and 15th Sepoy Regiments were called to the front, +and these advanced gallantly. + +The enemy were driven from the trench at the point of the bayonet. +The ditch, however, had again been flooded, and was found to be +impassable; but there was a bastion to the right that had been +damaged by the breaching guns, and the troops at once made for +this. A few men of the 12th managed to climb up, and planted the +flag of their regiment on it but, as only one could mount at a +time, and the Jats were swarming down upon them, they were +recalled; and the force again drew off, having lost, in killed and +wounded, nearly nine hundred men. Notwithstanding the terrible +losses that had been suffered, General Lake persevered in his +intention to carry the place at the point of the bayonet; and on +the following day the batteries opened their fire on the bastion +that had been nearly carried by the 12th Native Infantry. + +The position had become serious. The cavalry had, a fortnight or +three weeks before, defeated those of the rajah and his allies with +heavy loss, and brought in a convoy; and Ameer Khan, who had only +joined the Rajah of Bhurtpoor in the hope of plunder, had deserted +his ally and ridden off, with his following and a large body of +Pindarees, with the intention of devastating and plundering the +district of Rohilcund. Three regiments of British cavalry, under +General Smith; and as many of native horse, with artillery, +followed on his track and, after a pursuit of three weeks, at last +came up with him, annihilated his infantry and captured his guns. +His cavalry, however, for the most part escaped, as the horses of +the pursuers were completely worn out. + +They returned to the British camp, after more than a month's +absence, from a chase extending over seven hundred miles. + +Their absence had greatly increased the difficulties in the British +camp. Without their protection, the danger to which convoys were +exposed was great. Provisions were running short in camp, the +ammunition was almost exhausted, and numbers of the guns were +rendered unserviceable. These circumstances afforded the only +excuse that can be made for a fresh attack upon Bhurtpoor. + +It was even more disastrous than those which had preceded it. The +75th and 76th Regiments, deeply ashamed of their conduct on the +preceding occasion, volunteered to a man; and they, with the other +European regiments and five regiments of Sepoys, under the command +of Colonel Monson, moved out to the attack at three in the +afternoon. Nothing could exceed the courage which they displayed, +and their conduct rivalled that of the storming party at the siege +of Badajos; but they were fighting against impossibilities. The +bastion could not be climbed. Some of the soldiers drove their +bayonets into the wall, one above another, and attempted to climb +up by these steps; but were knocked down by logs of wood, large +shot, and other missiles. Others attempted to get in by the shot +holes that had been made, here and there; but as only one man could +enter at a time, they were killed before a footing could be +obtained. All this time a terrible fire was maintained by the enemy +against our men, showers of grape and musketry swept their lines, +pots filled with gunpowder and other combustibles exploded among +them, bales of cotton dipped in oil fell flaming in their midst. + +For two hours the hopeless conflict was maintained. Then the order +was given to retire, and the men fell back; having lost, in killed +and wounded, nine hundred and eighty-seven of their comrades. Thus +the four assaults had cost the army three thousand two hundred and +three of its best soldiers. The force was still further weakened by +a large number of deaths from dysentery and fever, the result of +the miasma rising from the marshes. + +The camp was now shifted to drier ground, to the northeast of the +town, the movement being harassed by the enemy's horse. The rajah, +who had been jubilant over his success, looked grave when the new +encampment was fixed. + +"They have not done with me, yet," he said to Harry. "Why do they +not go, now they see that they cannot take the place?" + +"Because were they to do so, Rajah, half India would be in arms +against them in a fortnight. Never before, since we set foot in +India, have such defeats been inflicted upon us; and Lord Lake +cannot march away and so own himself entirely beaten. Never before +has an English general out here so blundered. + +"Still, although unable to take Bhurtpoor, General Lake knows well +enough that he can easily repulse all attacks on his camp. He +knows, too, that the greatest efforts will be made to send up +reinforcements. Bombay, Madras, and Calcutta will all send every +available man and, ere long, his losses will be much more than +counterbalanced by the forces that will join him. We have, during +our history, suffered several disasters; but never one that has not +been redeemed and revenged." + +"Holkar was here, this morning," the rajah said, after a long +silence. "He came to congratulate me on our victory. After he had +done so, he asked that you and your troopers should be handed over +to him. I need scarcely say that I refused. You were captured by my +men and, though I am in alliance with Holkar, I do not owe him any +fealty. It is I who have aided him, while he has given but little +assistance to me; and would, I am sure, ride away and leave me to +my fate, if he knew where to go to. But his country, his capital, +and his forts are all in the hands of the English; and he stays +near here because it is, at present, the safest place for him." + +On the 23rd of March, the British cavalry returned. For a month no +attempt had been made to renew the siege, but the camp still +remained as a threat against Bhurtpoor, and the time had not been +lost. Convoys, escorted by strong parties of infantry, had come out +from Agra. Supplies of all kinds, battering guns and ammunition, +arrived almost daily. The armourers worked at the old guns, and +made them again fit for service; and everything showed that, when +the attack was renewed, it would be much more formidable than +before. + +The cavalry were given a few days' rest after their arrival but, +before daybreak on the 29th, they moved out in hopes of surprising +Holkar. He had, however, scouts well posted far out; and he +effected his retreat with the loss, only, of some of his baggage +animals. He retired some miles to the southwest, and again pitched +his camp. + +On the 2nd of April the cavalry, with the horse artillery, again +moved out at midnight and, this time, came upon the enemy +undiscovered; and before they had time to mount their horses, the +cavalry charged them in front and on both flanks, while the +artillery swept the camp with grape. Great numbers were slain, both +in Holkar's camp and in the pursuit, which was continued for eight +miles. The whole of the camp equipage, the greater portion of the +guns, and the bazaars were captured and, during the next day or +two, large bodies of Holkar's troops, considering his case +hopeless, deserted him. When in his flight he crossed the Jumna, he +had but eight thousand horse, five thousand infantry, and thirty +guns; the remains of the great army with which he had crossed the +river, confident of victory, the year before. + +On the following day Lord Lake, who had received considerable +reinforcements, again moved his camp to the southeast of the city, +and prepared to resume active operations against it. The rajah had, +for some time, been in a despondent state and, the next morning, he +came alone to Harry's room. + +"I want to have a talk with you," he said; and Abdool, seeing that +the conversation was to be a private one, at once left the room. + +"My friend," he said, "I have, for some time, felt that my cause +was becoming hopeless. I have never supposed that, after failing +four times, and each with heavy loss, your people would continue +the siege. But I see now that I was wrong. We might repulse another +attack, and another; but of what use would it be? Your people would +only become stronger, after each defeat. + +"I see now that I have acted as one bereft of sense. I had no +quarrel with the Company. They added to my territory, they had +promised to defend me against all attacks but, when I heard that +Holkar was approaching with so vast an army, I thought that surely +he would recapture Delhi, and drive you out of Agra, and perhaps +down to Calcutta; or that, after taking Agra, he would turn against +me. And so, foolish man that I was, I joined him. + +"And now I would fain make peace, and I pray you to go to your +general, and ask what terms he will grant. They may be hard, but I +am in no position to stand out. Ameer Khan has been chased and +routed, Holkar is little better than a fugitive, and owns only his +horse and saddle. There is no one to whom I can look for aid. I put +myself in the English general's hands." + +"I will willingly go, Rajah. No doubt it has been supposed, for +weeks, that I and my escort have perished. And when the general +hears of the kind treatment that we have received--a treatment so +different from that we should have met with, had we fallen into the +hands of Holkar--it will, I feel certain, have an effect on the +terms that he will lay down." + +Harry had, each day, paid a visit to the troopers, who were +confined in a large airy room opening into the courtyard. They had +been well fed, and had been permitted to go out into the open air, +for several hours a day, and to mingle freely with the Jat +soldiers. Half an hour after his interview with the rajah Harry +went down there. To his surprise, he found Abdool and the troopers +all mounted, as well as a party of the rajah's own guard. + +Before leaving, the rajah had returned his sword to him. As he rode +through the streets, followed by his own troopers and with the +rajah's guard riding ahead, the people looked on with curiosity, +but evinced no animosity against him. Successful as had been the +defence, the fact that the British had received great convoys and +reinforcements had caused a feeling of apprehension as to the final +result. Food, too, was becoming very scarce for, although small +quantities were brought in by the side opposite to that occupied by +the camp, this was altogether insufficient for the needs of a large +population, swollen by the fighting men of the whole country. + +Even these supplies had ceased, since the return of the British +cavalry and the rout of Holkar, and the fighting men were losing +heart. Their losses had been small, in comparison with those of the +besiegers; but the defeat of Holkar impressed all with the fear +that the British must, in the end, triumph. They had already done +more than any who had tried to stem the tide of the British power. +They had repulsed them four times, and their defence would be the +subject of admiration for all the native peoples of India. +Therefore, when it was known that the captured English officer was +leaving the town, with his troopers, the idea that the end was near +caused general satisfaction. + +Harry left the town by the gate nearest to the British encampment. +The rajah's guard still accompanied him, but halted halfway between +the walls and the camp; and there dismounted, the officer in +command telling Harry that his orders were to wait until his +return. Numbers of the soldiers had gathered at the edge of the +camp, on seeing the party riding towards it; and when the guard +fell back, and Harry with his troop approached, and it was seen +that it was a British officer with an escort of native cavalry, a +loud cheer broke out. + +Most of the soldiers knew Harry by sight, and all had heard of his +being missing with his escort and, as the time had passed without +any news of him arriving, it was supposed that all had been killed +by the horsemen of Ameer Khan or Holkar. Many of the men of the 5th +Native Cavalry were in the crowd, and these shouted welcomes to +their comrades; while several English officers ran up and shook +Harry by the hand. + +"I have been a prisoner in Bhurtpoor," he said, in answer to the +questions. "I have been extremely well treated, but I cannot tell +you more now. I am here on a mission to the general." + +Curious to ascertain the cause of the cheering, General Lake +appeared at the entrance of his tent, just as Harry rode up. + +"Why, Major Lindsay," he exclaimed, "where did you spring from? We +had all given you up as dead, long ago!" + +"I have been in Bhurtpoor, sir, and am now here in the character of +the rajah's ambassador." + +"That is good news. But come in and tell me, first, about +yourself." + +Harry briefly related how they had lost their way in a morass, and +had been attacked in the morning; and that, finding it impossible +to make a way out, he had surrendered. He spoke in the warmest +terms of the rajah's treatment of him and his followers. + +"We were treated as guests, rather than prisoners, sir; and lived +in a handsome room, got excellent food, and had the run of the +palace. Scarce a day passed on which I did not have a talk with the +rajah, himself." + +"It is an exceptional case, indeed," the general said. "Had you +fallen into Holkar's hands, or into those of Ameer Khan, very +different treatment would have awaited you. And now, what has the +rajah to say for himself?" + +"His plea is, sir, that he believed Holkar's army would assuredly +sweep us away; and that, in that case, he would have been attacked +by him for having formed an alliance with us." + +"His position was certainly an awkward one," the general said. "And +now, what does he propose?" + +"He does not propose anything, sir. He places himself in your +hands. He admits his faults; and is, as he may well be, heartily +sorry for them. He believes that he might still defend his town for +some time but, his allies having been thrashed, he sees that, in +the end, he must be overpowered. He asks that you will formulate +your demands." + +"Your news is very welcome, Major Lindsay; for indeed, I am as +anxious to be off as the rajah can be to see me go. Scindia is +giving trouble again, and has written a letter couched in such +arrogant terms that it is virtually a declaration of war. I could +not leave here until the town was captured; for it would have +seemed to all India that we had been defeated, and would have been +a terrible blow to our prestige. Therefore, at all costs, I must +have taken the place. It will, however, be another fortnight before +we shall be ready to recommence the siege. + +"I do not wish to be hard on the rajah, and I know that the +authorities at Calcutta view the case in the light that he has put +it, and are willing to believe that his turning against us was not +an act of deliberate treachery, but a fear of Holkar. + +"His treatment of you and your escort is, in itself, much in his +favour. Of course in this, as in similar cases, we could deprive +him of his dominions, and send him a prisoner to a fortress; but +the Governor General is most anxious that this business should be +concluded. It has already cost us more men than we lost in the +overthrow of Tippoo's power. He has given me authority to negotiate +a peace, if the rajah offers to surrender. He has named the terms, +approximately; and the rajah's treatment of you will certainly +induce me to minimize the demands, as far as possible, especially +as it is most important that the force shall be available +elsewhere. + +"Of course, the grant of territory made to him will be rescinded. +In the second place, we must, until all the terms of the treaty are +fulfilled, retain the fortress of Deeg, which we shall garrison +strongly. The rajah must pay twenty lakhs of rupees towards our +expenses. We shall not demand this at once, but three lakhs must +immediately be paid. One of his sons must be given up to us, as a +hostage for the fulfilment of the treaty. The rajah must also bind +himself not to enter into any communication with any princes, or +chiefs, at war with us. + +"I think that you will allow that those are not hard conditions." + +"Certainly not, sir; and I have no doubt that the rajah will agree +to them, without hesitation." + +"I will have a draft of the treaty drawn up, in half an hour," +General Lake said. "Of course, you will carry it back to the +rajah?" + +"Certainly, sir. Fifty men of his bodyguard are waiting for me, +halfway between the camp and the town." + +Harry left the tent, and found the officers of the staff and many +others waiting to welcome him back. + +"They will all want to hear what you have to tell, Major," the head +of the staff said. "You had best go into the mess tent, and hold a +durbar." + +The tent was soon filled with the officers, with the exception of +the chief of the staff, who had been sent for by the general. + +"In the first place, Lindsay," one of the officers said, "we take +it that you have come on a mission from the rajah. Does he mean to +surrender?" + +"He is willing to surrender, if the terms are not too onerous." + +The announcement was received with a loud cheer. There was not one +present but believed that the next assault would be successful, but +the cost of the previous attacks had been so great that it was +believed the city would not be taken, unless with great slaughter. +The unhealthiness of the country had told upon their spirits, even +more than the repulses; and the news that they would soon be able +to march away created the deepest satisfaction. + +"And now, for your own adventures, Lindsay." + +"My adventures began and ended in a swamp. It was four o'clock +before the convoy left Agra, and I then rode on fast till it was +night, when I was still five or six miles from the camp. It was +pitch dark, and we lost our way and, presently, found ourselves in +a deep swamp, and could discover no way of getting out of it." + +Then he told them of the attack; how they had been obliged to +surrender and had been guided out of the morass. + +"When we reached the rajah's palace, all our troubles were ended. A +handsome chamber was placed at my disposal, and the havildar of my +escort was allowed to be with me. I was treated rather as an +honoured guest than as a prisoner. I lived on the fat of the land, +and was permitted to wander about the palace, and spent most of my +time in the gallery round the highest tower, where I could see all +that was going on. The rajah himself was most kind to me, and +enquired daily if my wants were supplied to my satisfaction. He +would often come up to the gallery and chat with me, sometimes for +an hour. The troopers, also, were all well treated." + +"You have received a great deal of misplaced commiseration," one of +the officers said. "We have all thought of you as having been +tortured to death, either by Holkar or Ameer Khan; and now we find +you have been better housed and better fed than we have. + +"And you are going back again, I suppose, with the chief's answer?" + +"Yes; I must not tell you the conditions, but I think I can say it +is certain that the rajah will not hesitate a moment in accepting +them." + +"Well, he deserves to be let off leniently, if only for his +treatment of you and your men. It is a contrast, indeed, to what +has generally happened to officers who have fallen into the hands +of any of these native princes." + +There was a general talk until an aide-de-camp came in, and asked +Harry to accompany him to the general's tent. + +"There is the draft of the treaty," the latter said. "I hope that +there will be no delay in returning a prompt answer. I want either +yes or no. These Indian princes are adepts in the art of prolonging +a negotiation. If you see that he has any disposition to do so, say +at once that I have told you that the terms I offer are final, and +must be accepted or rejected." + +"Very well, sir. I hope to return with the answer tomorrow, early." + +And, followed by his escort, Harry rode for the city. The rajah's +guard mounted, as soon as they saw him coming, and escorted him to +the palace. The street leading to it was now thronged with people, +and it was evident to Harry that, among the great majority, there +was a feeling of hope that he was the bearer of acceptable terms; +for among the poorer class the pressure of want was already severe. + + + +Chapter 20: Home. + + +Harry, on arriving at the palace, at once went to the rajah's room. + +"Well, sahib, what terms does your general offer me?" + +"Terms which I think, sir, you will have no hesitation in +accepting. Here is a draft of the treaty that he proposes." + +The rajah glanced at the document, which was written in English and +in Mahratti, for none of the general's staff understood the Jat +language. Harry saw, at once, that the terms were far less onerous +than the rajah had expected; for his face brightened, and the air +of despondency that it had for some days expressed passed away. + +"It is better than I had looked for," he said. "As a rule, the +English have not been merciful to those they have subdued. That the +territory they gave me would be taken away was a matter of course. +The sum to be paid is heavy but, as they have given me time, I can +manage to collect it without much difficulty. This is all that is +demanded; and that they should hold Deeg and my son as a hostage, +until the money is paid, is fair and just." + +"I thought that the conditions would meet with your acceptance, +Rajah; and I may say that your kindly treatment of myself and my +escort has gone some way in mitigating the terms that would +otherwise have been demanded. But the general said that you must +understand that he can make no further diminution of his demands; +and that tomorrow he expects an answer, yes or no." + +"I reply yes, at once, Major Lindsay. A load has been lifted from +my mind. I shall still have my liberty, my capital, and my people; +and am grateful, indeed, for the clemency that has been shown me. I +had relied somewhat upon your good offices; but had small hopes +that, after what has taken place, I should be offered such terms." + +The rajah at once sent for his sons--of whom Harry had seen but +little, for they were always on the walls, encouraging the troops +and seeing that the breaches were repaired, as soon as made. The +rajah read to them the draft of the treaty. They too were visibly +relieved; for they had talked the matter over with their father, on +the evening before, and had agreed that, probably, he and his +family would be kept as prisoners in a fortress, that the +fortifications of the town would be destroyed, and some nominee of +the British Government created rajah. + +"The general has not said which of my sons is to be hostage?" + +"No, Rajah, he left that to you. I may say that he took the same +view of your position as that which you, yourself, explained to me; +namely, that you joined Holkar simply from the apprehension that, +if the English were defeated by him, he would next turn his arms +against you." + +"Which of you will go?" the rajah asked his sons. + +All expressed their willingness. + +"Then I will choose my third son," he said to Harry; "the others +will be more useful here." + +Harry rode out, early in the morning, with the news that the rajah +accepted the terms offered to him. In an hour the treaty was +written out formally, the general affixing his signature. Harry +returned to the city, this time accompanied by a general officer, +and both signed their names as witnesses to the rajah's signature. +Some bullock carts, with chests containing the three lakhs of +rupees, were already in the courtyard; and with these and the +rajah's third son, Harry returned to camp. + +The army afterwards started to meet Scindia, who had advanced with +his army, with the intention of joining Holkar and assisting the +Rajah of Bhurtpoor. He had, for some time, been almost openly +hostile; had sent his relation, Bapeejee Scindia, with a strong +body of horse, to act in concert with the cavalry of Ameer Khan and +Holkar; and had sent letters to the Government which amounted to a +declaration of war. But when Holkar reached his camp a fugitive, +and he heard that Bhurtpoor had surrendered, he at once fell back; +and endeavoured to make excuses for his conduct, alleging that +Bapeejee Scindia has acted entirely without orders, and that he had +himself advanced only with the intention of mediating between the +Rajah of Bhurtpoor and the English. + +No one was deceived by his assurances, but it was thought politic +to pretend to believe them. The Marquis of Wellesley's term of +office had expired, and a successor had come out, with orders to +carry out a policy differing widely from that which he had +followed. The latter had enormously extended the area of the +British possessions in India, the British troops had won a +marvellous series of victories; but this had been effected at an +immense cost and, so far, the revenue drawn from the conquered +provinces barely sufficed to pay the expenses of occupation and +management. + +The treaties, too, that had been entered into with various rajahs +and chiefs might, at any moment, plunge the Government into war in +support of our allies and, accordingly, Lord Cornwallis was again +sent out, to carry out the policy of maintaining friendly relations +with the native powers, and of abstaining from interference in +their quarrels with each other. Indeed, a breathing time was +urgently needed. The rapid progress of the British arms had aroused +a feeling of distrust and hostility among all the native princes; +and it was necessary to carry out a strong but peaceful +administration in the conquered provinces, to give confidence to +their populations, to appoint civil officers of all sorts; and so +to divide the troops that, while they ceased to threaten any of the +native powers, they should maintain order in the new dependencies +not yet reconciled to the change of masters, or capable of +appreciating the benefits arising from orderly rule. + +Accordingly, Scindia's excuses were accepted. A considerable +portion of the dominions that had been wrested from him were +restored; and even Holkar, whose atrocious cruelties to all the +British soldiers and officers who fell into his hands should have +placed him beyond the pale of pardon, was again invested with most +of his former possessions--with the object, no doubt, of +counterbalancing Scindia's power as, had Holkar been driven to take +refuge in the north, as a fugitive, Scindia would have become +paramount among the Mahrattas. + +One of the last acts of the Marquis of Wellesley was to offer Harry +a high civil appointment, in one of the new provinces; but he +declined it, upon the ground that he was about to apply for leave +to go to England. He had, indeed, already formed the idea of +quitting the service altogether. The presents he had received from +Bajee Rao, on his first arrival at Poona, and on being invested as +Peishwa; and the still larger one that Nana Furnuwees had given +him; had been, for the most part, invested in the purchase of land +at Bombay. In the eight years that has elapsed, the town had +greatly increased in size; and the land had been gradually sold, at +four or five times the sum that it had cost, and the proceeds sent +to England. Harry was, therefore, a rich man. + +He had been constantly engaged in service for nearly nine years +and, as he had never been settled long enough to have an +establishment of his own, his military pay had much more than +sufficed for his wants; and the large increase which he had +obtained, when engaged in civil or special duty, had been entirely +laid by. There was, then, no further occasion whatever for him to +remain in the service. At any rate, he determined to obtain a three +years' leave; and before the end of that time, he could finally +make up his mind on the subject. + +A month, therefore, after the siege of Bhurtpoor was concluded, +Harry had an interview with Lord Lake, and requested three years' +leave to go to England. + +"You have well earned it, Major Lindsay. Your services have been +very great and, if the war was likely to continue, I should have +asked you to reconsider your request; but as, from what I hear, a +complete change of policy has been determined upon, and it has been +decided that there shall be no further extension of our territory, +there is likely--at any rate for a time--to be a period of peace. +The board of directors desire to consolidate the territory that we +have gained, and wish to abstain from all embarrassing alliances, +or from any meddling in the affairs of the native princes. + +"You, who have been so long at Poona, and understand the shifty +nature of Scindia, Holkar, and indeed of all the native princes, +must know well that these orders are much more easily given than +carried out. If our restraining hand is removed, we shall have +Scindia, and Holkar, the Peishwa, the Rajahs of Berar, Kolapoore, +and Bhurtpoor at each other's throats again. They will treat our +declarations, that we desire peace, only as a proof of weakness; +and may, at any moment, lay aside their private quarrels to unite +against us; and, unlikely as it may seem at present, my conviction +is that there will never be permanent peace in India until we are +masters from Cape Comorin to the borders of Afghanistan. It may be +another half century, and will certainly only be after hard +fighting; but I believe that, until all India acknowledges our +rule, there will not be anything like permanent peace within its +borders." + +"I am afraid that that is so, sir. The only really sincere and +honest man that I have met, bent upon serving his country, was Nana +Furnuwees and, in consequence, he was equally hated by the Peishwa, +Scindia, and Holkar. I was certainly extremely well treated by the +Rajah of Bhurtpoor; but this was, no doubt, largely due to the fact +that he thought that, if matters went against him, his courtesy to +me would tell in his favour, while ill treatment or murder would +have put him beyond the pale of forgiveness." + +"Your application comes at a fortunate moment, for I am sending a +regiment of Bombay cavalry back to their presidency, and it will be +well that you should travel with it through Jaipore and Ajmeer to Surat, +and so on to Bombay, which will save you a long journey--unless, indeed, +you wish to travel by way of the Ganges." + +"I would much rather go to Bombay, sir. I wish to visit the good +people who brought me up. I will ask you to allow Havildar Abdool +to go with me. I don't know whether he will wish to take his +discharge, but I should think he would do so and, as he belongs +properly to the Bombay army, and is indeed a Mahratta, I am sure +that he would prefer to settle there." + +"I will certainly do that, and will see that the services he has +rendered are mentioned in his discharge; and I will, myself, write +to the Government of Bombay, saying that I had intended to grant +him a small holding, as a reward for his fidelity; and asking that +this may be bestowed upon him, either in the Concan, or in some of +the territory that we have become possessed of above the Ghauts." + +Abdool was greatly moved, when Harry told him that he had applied +for and obtained leave. + +"You will take me with you, master, I hope?" + +"I think, Abdool, that you would do better to remain in your own +country. You would feel very strange in England, among people none +of whom speak your language. You would also feel the cold, +greatly." + +"I would rather go with you, sahib. Were I to go back to my native +village, I should find myself among strangers, for I have now been +nearly fifteen years away; and what should I do without +employment?" + +"Well, we will think it over, Abdool. Lord Lake kindly offered to +write a letter in your favour to the Government of Bombay, asking +them to give you the charge of a village district, which would keep +you in comfort." + +"I should not be comfortable if I were not with you, sahib." + +"Well, Abdool, we are going with the Bombay regiment which starts +tomorrow, and shall travel through Central India to Surat. There I +shall leave them in the Concan, and cross the Ghauts to Jooneer, +and pay a visit to Soyera, Ramdass, and Sufder, and see them all +comfortably settled; and then go down to Bombay. So we shall both +have plenty of time to think it over." + +Accordingly the next morning Harry, after saying goodbye to all his +friends, started. The journey to Surat was nearly seven hundred +miles, and was accomplished without incident. On their arrival at +Jowaur, they ascended the Ghaut to Trimbuck, and then rode to +Jooneer, and another half hour took them to the farm. + +Harry was received with delight by its occupants. It was six years +since he had parted from his old nurse at Bombay, and he had +greatly changed since then. He was now a tall and powerfully-built +man. + +"And so you are already a major, as was your dear father!" she +said, after the first greetings were over. "It seems to me but a +short time since you were an infant in my arms. But what brings you +here?" + +"There is going to be a general peace for some time, Soyera; and I +have had enough of fighting, and am on my way home to England, +where I hope to learn something about my father's and mother's +families. I have three years' leave, and as I am as rich as I could +desire to be, possibly I may return here no more." + +"I shall grieve, Harry; but it is natural for you to do so, and I +shall feel happy in the thought that you have become all your +parents could have wished, and that I have been the means, in some +way, of bringing this about." + +"In all ways, Soyera. I owe not only my life, but all that I am, to +you. Had you been without friends, I would have taken you to +England. But happily you are among your own people, and have now +been living with your good brother and his wife for four-and-twenty +years; and I can leave you, knowing that you are perfectly +comfortable and happy. + +"Have you any desire to better your condition, Ramdass? I owe you, +too, so much that it would greatly please me to be able, in some +way, to show that I am grateful for the shelter you gave me for so +many years." + +"There is nothing," Ramdass said. "I have all that I can desire. +Had I more, I should have greater cares. Those who are rich here +are not the best off, for it is they who are squeezed when our +lords have need of money. My sons will divide my land when I die, +and my daughter is already married and provided for. Had I a larger +farm, I should need more hands and have more cares. The bounty +which you before gave me has gratified my utmost desires." + +A messenger had already been sent off to Sufder, who rode in the +next day. He, too, was well and comfortable, and was viewed as a +man of importance by the villagers. + +Harry remained there four days longer, then bade farewell to those +who had proved themselves his true friends, and rode down to +Bombay. On the road he had a long talk with Abdool, who remained +fixed in his determination to accompany him to England, if he would +take him. + +"Very well, Abdool, so it shall be. But if, at any time, you have a +longing to come back to your own country, I will pay your passage, +and give you enough to make you comfortable for life." + +Harry remained but a few days in Bombay, wound up his affairs with +his agents there and, being fortunate in finding a vessel that was +on the point of sailing, took passage in her for England. The +voyage was an uneventful one. They experienced bad weather off the +Cape but, with that exception, carried all canvas till they entered +the Channel. Here they encountered another gale, but arrived safely +in the Thames, four months after leaving Calcutta. + +It was now January, 1806, and after going with Abdool to an hotel, +Harry's first step was to procure warm clothing for himself and his +follower. The weather was exceedingly cold, and although Abdool +had, as he considered, wrapped himself up in an extraordinary way, +he was unable to keep warm, except when sitting in front of a huge +fire. + +"Is it always like this, sahib?" he asked, in a tone of great +anxiety. + +"Oh no, Abdool, only for perhaps two months out of the twelve. You +will find it pleasant enough in summer and, after two or three +winters, will get accustomed to the cold. You had better not think +of going out, till you get your clothes. I will have a tailor in to +measure you. I should say that it would be more convenient for you +to take to European clothes. You will not find them uncomfortable, +as you have for so many years been accustomed to uniform. They are +much more convenient for getting about in, and you will not be +stared at in the streets; as you would be if you went about in +native costume. However, you can wear your own turban, if you +like." + +Abdool willingly consented to this proposal. A tailor was +consulted, and suggested loosely-cut trousers and a short jacket, +similar to that now worn by the French zouaves, and differing but +little from that of the Indian cavalry. In this, with the addition +of a long and warmly-lined cloak, Abdool professed his readiness to +encounter any degree of cold. + +As soon as his own clothes had arrived, Harry went to Leadenhall +Street and, sending in his card, was shown into a large room, where +two or three of the governors of the Company were seated, +considering the reports that had been brought from India in the +ship in which Harry had arrived. + +"Your name is familiar to us, Major Lindsay," the gentleman at the +head of the table said cordially. "You have been mentioned in +numerous despatches, and always in terms of the highest +commendation. First, by the Governor of Bombay; then by the Marquis +of Wellesley, for the manner in which you secured the neutrality of +Berar, during the Mysore war; then again, if I remember rightly, +for obtaining concessions for our occupation of the island of +Singapore, when we are in a position to undertake it. He also sent +us your report of that business, by which it appeared that you had +some extremely perilous adventures, entailed by your zeal to obtain +the Rajah of Johore's consent to the cession. Sir Arthur Wellesley +mentioned your name in his despatch after Assaye, and Lord Lake's +despatches make numerous mention of your service with him. +Altogether, I do not think that any officer has received such warm +and general commendation as you have done." + +"Thank you, sir. I have always done my best, and been exceptionally +fortunate in being engaged in services that gave me an opportunity +of, in some degree, distinguishing myself." + +"Pray sit down, Major. My colleagues and myself will be glad to +know a little more about you. When the Governor of Bombay informed +us that he most strongly recommended you for a commission, he +mentioned that you were a son of Major Lindsay who, with his wife, +was killed in the Concan, at the time of that most unfortunate and +ill-managed expedition to Poona. We had never heard of your +existence before. Had it been brought before our notice we should, +of course, have assigned a pension for your bringing up and +education." + +Harry, at his request, gave a very brief outline of the manner in +which he had been saved by his nurse, who had taught him English, +and prepared him for entering the service when he came of age. + +"I have returned to England," he said, "partly to find out, if +possible, any of my relatives who may exist on my father's or +mother's side." + +"I have no doubt that we shall be able to put you in the way of +doing so. Doubtless, at the time of your father's and mother's +death, we notified the fact--at any rate to your father's +family--and received communications from them. We will cause a +search to be made. Where are you staying?" + +Harry gave the name of the hotel. + +"We will send you word there, as soon as the records have been +searched. At any rate, it is certain that the birthplace of your +father and the residence of his father will be found, at the time +he obtained his appointment as cadet. I have no doubt that the +letter communicating his death was directed to that address." + +The next day a messenger brought a note to Harry's hotel: + +"Dear Major Lindsay: + +"We find that your grandfather was a landowner in Norfolk. His +address was Parley House, Merdford. The letter sent to him with the +account of your father's death was answered by a son of his; who +stated that his father had died, two months before, and enquired if +any news had been obtained of an infant who, they had learned, had +been born some months before the murder of its parents. We replied +that the report to us had stated, 'body of infant not found.' We, +at his request, wrote to Bombay on the subject. + +"The answer was as before that, although the body of the child was +not found with those of its father and mother, no doubt whatever +was entertained that it had been killed. It was some days after the +catastrophe happened before any report of it reached the +authorities, when a party of cavalry were at once sent out. Many of +the bodies had been mutilated, and some almost devoured by jackals. +No doubts were entertained that the infant had been altogether +devoured." + +"The remains were all buried at the spot where they were found; and +a stone was erected, some months afterwards, by the officers of his +regiment; recording the deaths of Major Lindsay, his wife and +child, at that spot." + +Two days later Harry took his place with Abdool on the north coach +and, after spending a day at Norwich, drove in a post chaise to +Merdford. Here he heard that Parley House was two miles distant +and, without alighting, drove on there. It was a fine house, +standing in a well-wooded park. On a footman answering the bell, +Harry handed him his card, "Major H. Lindsay." + +He was shown into a library and, a minute later, a gentleman +entered. He was about sixty years of age, of the best type of +English squire; tall, inclined to be portly, with genial face and +hearty voice. + +"We are of the same name, I see, Major Lindsay." + +"We are, sir; and, strange as it may appear to you, of the same +blood." + +"Indeed!" he said, shaking hands with his visitor. "What is the +relationship? It must be a distant one, for I was not aware that I +had any connection of your rank in the army. + +"By the way, now that I think of it, I have seen, in the reports of +our campaigns in India, the name of a Captain Lindsay frequently +mentioned." + +"I am the man, sir." + +"I am glad to know that one who has so distinguished himself is a +relation of mine, however distant." + +"It is not so very distant, sir. In point of fact, I am your +nephew." + +The squire looked at him in bewilderment. + +"My nephew!" he repeated. + +"Yes, Mr. Lindsay. I am the son of your brother, also Major +Lindsay, of the Bombay Army. I returned from India but ten days +ago; and learned for the first time, from the governors of the +Company, the family to which my father belonged. Had it been +otherwise, I should have written to you, years ago, to inform you +that I was the infant who was supposed to have perished, when its +father and mother were killed." + +Harry thought that the colour paled a little in his uncle's face. + +"You have, of course, proofs of your identity?" the latter said, +gravely. + +"Certainly. I have the evidence of the Indian nurse who saved my +life, and brought me up; that of a cousin of hers, who was an +officer of the band that attacked my father; and that of her +brother, with whom I resided from the time she brought me +there--three days after the death of my parents--until I was twelve +years old, when she placed me with a lady in Bombay, for two years +and a half, to be taught to speak English perfectly. After that, I +was some three years in the service of the Peishwa. + +"These depositions were, by the order of the Governor of Bombay, +sworn to by them before the chief justice there. My identity was +fully recognized by the Governor of Bombay, who at once recommended +me for a commission, in consequence of some service that I had +rendered to the Government; and the recommendation was accepted by +the court at home, and my commission dated from the time of my +appointment by the Governor." + +"I see a likeness in you to my brother who, when I last saw him, +was about your age. I do not say that you are exactly like him, but +your expression and voice both recall him to me. As a matter of +form, of course, I should like to see these depositions. I am +curious to know the details of your adventures. + +"But that will keep. I will at once introduce you to my wife and +daughter. Like your father, I was unfortunate in my children. I +know that you had several brothers and sisters born before you, all +of whom died in their infancy. I did not marry until some years +later than he did. I had two boys, who were both drowned when out +in a fishing boat at Yarmouth. My daughter was the youngest." + +He rose from his seat and led the way to the drawing room, where a +lady some fifteen years younger than himself was seated at work, +with a girl of nineteen or twenty. + +"My dear," he said, "I have a surprise for you. This gentleman, +Major Lindsay, who has distinguished himself greatly in India, is +our nephew. He claims, and I may say at once that I see no reasons +whatever to doubt it, that he is the child of my brother Harry who, +as you may remember, was, with his wife, killed in India a few +months after we were married. My enquiries resulted in leaving, as +it seemed, no room for doubt that the infant had perished with his +parents, and that its body had been devoured by wild beasts. + +"But it now appears that he was saved by his nurse, who happened to +have a relation who was an officer in the party that attacked +Harry's camp. She took him to the house of a brother, and there he +was brought up; and he afterwards went down to Bombay, where he +satisfied the Governor as to his identity, and received a +commission. I have not heard further particulars yet, but Major +Lindsay-- + +"I suppose I shall come to call you Harry, in time, nephew-- + +"Will tell us all about it, himself. I am sure that you will join +with me in welcoming Harry's boy heartily, and in my satisfaction +that he has proved himself well worthy of his race." + +Harry was a little surprised at detecting a tone of warning, in the +manner in which the last words were spoken; and at the agitation +with which Mrs. Lindsay had listened to her husband. This +disappeared, however, as she held out her hand to him. + +"I welcome you back to England, nephew. Yours is indeed a strange +story. I know that my husband was greatly attached to your father." + +"Yes, I loved him dearly," Mr. Lindsay said, "and can see a +resemblance to him in his son. He is taller and more strongly built +than Harry was. I do not say that the features are very like, but +there is something in the expression of his face, and tone of his +voice, that recalls him to me strongly. + +"This is my daughter Mary. We called her so after your mother. It +was a fancy of mine, for I knew her well before she married your +father. The two families were on terms of great friendship, and for +her sake, as well as for my brother's, I gave her the name." + +"I am glad to meet you, cousin," the girl said, holding out her +hand frankly to him. "It is, of course, a great surprise to us, and +I can hardly realize yet that you are really my cousin." + +"Now, Harry," his uncle said briskly, "I will give orders to have +your things taken out of the post chaise, and carried up to your +room. We shall be having lunch directly and, after that, you shall +tell us your story at full length." + +Ten minutes later they sat down to lunch. When Harry rejoined the +others, he fancied he saw traces of tears in the eyes of Mrs. +Lindsay and her daughter; and he thought that perhaps they had been +thinking that, if their own boys had lived, they also would be +young men now. + +After the meal was over, the squire said: + +"Now, wife, we will all adjourn to the library. It is the most +comfortable room in the house, and the cosiest--just the place for +listening to a long story. I have told William to get two more +armchairs there, so that we can sit round the fire--which is quite +the proper thing to do when a story has to be told." + +The light had faded out of the sky, and the curtains were drawn; +but the squire would not have candles lighted, saying that the +blaze of the fire was the proper thing to listen by. Harry related +fully the manner in which he had been brought up and trained, by +his nurse, for the time when he could present himself at Bombay; +and also his adventures in the Deccan, which had paved the way for +his obtaining a commission. He told the rest more briefly, though +he was obliged, in answer to the questions of the others, to go +somewhat further into his personal adventures. + +"It is a wonderful story," the squire said, when he at last +finished. "There are many things that you have cut very short; and +which you must, some other time, tell us fully. Your poor father +would have reason to be proud of you, indeed, had he lived to see +you now. He thought that he was wonderfully fortunate, in obtaining +a majority at the age of thirty-five; but you have got it ten years +younger. + +"Well, we have not spared you, for we have kept you talking over +four hours." + +Dinner passed off quickly, and when wine had been placed on the +table, and the servants retired, Mr. Lindsay said: + +"You will understand, Harry, that although absolutely certain that +you are my nephew, I do not resign, and offer you my seat at the +head of the table, until the documents that you have brought are +formally examined." + +"What do you mean, uncle?" Harry asked, in surprise. + +"I mean, of course, that as your father's son, this estate is +yours, and not mine." + +Harry rose to his feet. + +"I don't understand you, uncle. I never dreamt for a moment--" and +he stopped. + +"That your father was my eldest brother. Yes, he was a year older +than myself; and at his father's death would, of course, have +succeeded to the estate. But he died before him; and you, as his +son, will of course succeed." + +"But I could not dream of such a thing, uncle. Do you think that I +have come down here with the idea of turning you and my aunt and +cousin out, and taking your place? If I had known it, I should not +have come down at all. It would be monstrous if, after you have +been master here for twenty-five years, I should come down to claim +the estate from you." + +"I am glad to hear you say so, Harry," his uncle said, gravely. +"Naturally, it did not occur to us that you were ignorant that your +father was the eldest son. We thought, from your manner, that you +would be willing to arrange everything on amicable terms; for of +course, legally, you are entitled to all the back rents, which I +honestly say I could not pay. Your aunt's little fortune, and my +portion as younger brother, will be amply sufficient to keep us +three comfortably; but as to paying the arrears, it would be +impossible." + +"My dear uncle, the whole thing is impossible. I have returned home +with an ample amount of money to live in luxury. I did not think it +necessary to mention, in my story, that Nana Furnuwees presented me +with a considerable sum of money; and Bajee Rao did the same. This +I invested in land close to Bombay, which is now covered with +houses, and fetched five times the price I gave for it. In addition +to this, I have been in civil employment for the past six years +and, as I have always been on the move, I have never had the +expense of an establishment, and have thus saved some five thousand +pounds. + +"Therefore I am master of something over ninety thousand pounds; +and can, if I do not return to India--which I have, I may say, +already made up my mind not to do, buy an estate. I have had very +much more than my share of adventures, and have marvellously +escaped. If I return, my luck might change. + +"At any rate, I have had enough of it. I have made a very handsome +fortune and, even putting everything else aside, would rather know +that I owed all I possessed to my own good luck and exertions, than +to an accident of birth." + +"But that cannot be, lad." + +"Well, uncle," Harry said obstinately, "if you choose to see things +in that light, all I can say is, that I shall at once throw up my +leave and return to India; and if you choose to leave this house +and estate, it may go to wreck and ruin for anything I care." + +"Well, well, my boy, we won't say anything more about it, now, but +will leave it to the lawyers to settle." + +"I shall certainly employ no lawyers in the matter, uncle. By all +means, obtain your solicitor's opinion as to whether the proofs I +have put in your hands are sufficient to establish, beyond all fear +of doubt, the fact that I am the son of Major Harry Lindsay. It +matters not whether my father was your elder brother or not, to +anyone except ourselves. I am perfectly satisfied with having +proved, to the satisfaction of all in India, that I am the son of a +brave officer. My object in coming to England was not to see +whether I was entitled to money, but simply to find friends among +the families of my father and mother; and if it were to end in my +turning you, my aunt, and cousin out of the place you have believed +to be your own, for so many years, my visit here would be a dismal +failure, and I should bitterly regret having set foot in England. + +"Please do not let us say anything more about it. The matter, so +far as I am concerned, is concluded; and nothing that can possibly +be said will shake my determination, in any way." + +In order to break the silence, for Mrs. Lindsay and Mary were both +wiping their eyes, Harry went on: + +"Now that we have finished this question, uncle, I will tell you +how I got the ratification of the treaty, that will some day be +made for our occupation of Singapore, from the Rajah of Johore. As +far as the excitement went, it certainly was the most stirring +business that I was ever employed in;" and he at once launched into +the narrative of his capture, the escape, the adventure with the +tiger, and the defence of Johore. + +"It seems to me, Harry," his uncle said, when he had finished, +"that you not only have as many lives as a cat, but as a whole +posse of cats. I cannot but think that it was a wild business, +altogether; and that, having got the assent of the gentleman with +the very hard name, there was no occasion to bother about the +rajah, who seemed to have no authority whatever." + +"But he might have got it, you see, uncle. It may be ten years or +more before a governor general will be able to attend to the +business, and it was as well to get it settled, once for all." + +"What did the rajah present you with for saving his capital?" + +"He offered me a number of weapons and things but, as I had no +place to put them in, I could not be bothered with them. I do not +think that cash was at all a strong point with him, and I don't +suppose he had a thousand dollars in his treasury. I was a little +surprised that he did not offer me half a dozen young ladies as +wives; but had he done so, I should have resisted the temptation, +as they would have been even more trouble than the weapons." + +"You never fell in love with any of the Indian beauties, cousin +Harry?" + +"I have never seen any to fall in love with. The ladies of the +upper class in India, whether Hindus or Mussulmans, always go +closely veiled; and as to the English ladies, in the first place +they were nearly all married, and in the second place I went as +little into society as I could help, being on the Governor +General's staff, and nearly always away on duty. Certainly I never +saw anyone who caused my pulse to beat faster; which I believe, +from what I have read, is one of the many symptoms of being in +love." + +Harry then enquired about his mother's relations. + +"I, unfortunately, can tell you nothing about them. She was an only +daughter when she married your father. Both her parents died, years +ago. They only had a lease of the place they lived in, and I really +cannot tell you anything whatever about them. There was a son, who +would, I suppose, succeed to any property his father left; but he +was a ne'er-do-well, and was seldom at home, and I have never seen +or heard of him, since." + +"Well, I am quite content with the relations that I have found, and +shall not trouble myself to seek further." + +Four days passed. At the end of that time, Mr. Lindsay received a +letter from his lawyer and, after breakfast, asked Harry to go into +the library with him. + +"About that business that we were talking about, I have today +received an answer to my letter. My lawyer is of opinion, from what +I told him of these papers, that your case is a strong one; and +that though, if I chose, I might give you a great deal of trouble, +he thinks that in the long run you would succeed. As I don't want +to give you trouble; and as I am, myself, as completely convinced +that you are my brother Harry's son as that I am his brother, the +matter may now be considered as finally settled." + +"Quite so, uncle. I don't want to hear anything more about it. If +you choose to be obstinate, and turn out, I can only say that I +shall be sorry that the old house, where my father and you were +both born, should go to wreck and ruin. At any rate, let the matter +rest, for the present. Possibly it may yet be arranged to the +satisfaction of all parties." + +"It will certainly not be arranged to my satisfaction," the squire +grumbled, "unless you become master here." + +"We will talk it over, in six months' time." + +He related the conversation to his wife who, to his surprise, +looked pleased. + +"Nothing could be better," she said; "it would be an excellent +plan." + +"What on earth do you mean, Louisa?" + +"You are as blind as an owl, Peter. There can be only one meaning +in what he has said, only one arrangement that could be +satisfactory to all parties." + +"And what is that, my dear?" the squire said, a little testily. + +"I mean, of course, that he should marry Mary." + +The squire sat down suddenly, in his surprise. + +"Such an idea never entered my head," he said. "But why should you +think of it? Why, the young fellow has only been here four or five +days!" + +"That is quite long enough for him to see that Mary is a charming +girl," Mrs. Lindsay said. "He has seen very little of ladies; and +he is, no doubt, struck with the idea that she is an extremely nice +girl. I don't say that he is in love with her, yet; but quite +enough, perhaps, to foresee that, ere long, he will feel more +ardent than he does at present; and that it is the only arrangement +possible, since we are determined to turn out for him. + +"Now mind, Peter, you do not throw out the slightest hint, either +to him or to her, that such a solution has ever occurred to us. It +might spoil everything. It would make Mary shy with him, and might +cause him to be awkward. You give your consent to remain here, for +six months. By that time the question will have solved itself. If I +am wrong, no harm will have been done. If I am right, the +arrangement will be, as he says, a satisfactory one to us all." + +"I was always against cousins marrying," Mr. Lindsay said, +doubtfully. + +"Don't be absurd, Peter. I don't say that, in some cases, there is +not a good deal to be said against it; but where both the man and +the woman are healthy, and come of healthy families, no union can +be more likely to be happy." + +"But I think I have heard you speak--" + +"Never mind what you have heard me speak, sir; circumstances alter +cases, and this case is altogether an exceptional one. + +"We certainly could not wish for a finer young fellow as Mary's +husband. He is a desirable partner, in every respect. He is himself +well off and, although I quite agree with you that, whatever it +costs, we must give the dear old place up, I grant that it would be +very pleasant to avoid so terrible a wrench. + +"The one thing I don't like is that man of his. He moves about so +noiselessly that it is like having a ghost in the room." + +"It is you who are absurd, now, Louisa," the squire said. "The man +has, over and over again, proved himself to be a most faithful +friend to him. I own that it is a little trying to see him standing +behind Harry's chair, without moving, except when his master wants +something; but after all, that is less fidgety than having footmen +dodging about you. + +"Well, Louisa, I will take particular heed of what you have said, +and will be mum as a mouse, until we see how the cat jumps." + +Mrs. Lindsay's prevision turned out correct. Harry remained a week +longer at Parley House. Then he heard that an estate was for sale, +two miles away, and drove over quietly to inspect it. Ten days +later he wrote from London, and said that he had bought the place. + +"He is the most obstinate fellow that I ever knew!" Mr. Lindsay +exclaimed, as he read the letter. + +"What is it, dear?" + +"He has bought Hungerford's place, and never gave me the slightest +hint of his intentions." + +"Well, I think it will be very nice to have him so near us," Mrs. +Lindsay said, decidedly. + +"Oh, of course, and it will be so handy for--" + +"Peter, will you take another cup of tea?" his wife said, sharply; +and Mr. Lindsay knew that he had nearly put his foot in it. + +A week later Harry came down again--to see, as he said, what +required to be done to the house; and he needed no persuasion to +stay at Parley Hall. To decide upon matters, he needed a great deal +of advice, both from Mrs. Lindsay and Mary; and then, having put +the house into the hands of the builders and decorators, he went up +to town again. However, he frequently ran down to see how things +were getting on and, before the alterations were all finished, Mary +had consented to become its mistress. + +Abdool preferred to remain as his master's body servant, as before. +He had even, before leaving India, picked up a certain amount of +English; and had improved considerably his knowledge of the +language during the long voyage. Mary, fortunately, had not shared +in her mother's feelings about him but, on learning that he had, +several times, saved Harry's life, had taken to him greatly. He +never returned to his native land. + +And although Harry and his wife talked, sometimes, of making the +voyage to India, they were never enabled to accomplish it for, as +children grew up around them, Mary was no longer free to travel. +Abdool's devotion was now divided between his master and mistress +and the little ones, who were never tired of listening to his +stories of their father's adventures. + +Mr. and Mrs. Lindsay lived to an advanced age, and died within a +few weeks of each other. Harry then moved to Parley Hall, and sold +the estate he had bought; as the management of one estate, and his +duties as county magistrate, occupied as much time as he cared to +give. The only complaint made against him, by his neighbours, was +that he did not care for field sports. But, as he said, he had seen +enough bloodshed to last him his lifetime; and would neither shed +the blood of bird nor beast, though he had no quarrel with those +who liked that sort of thing. + +He kept up a regular correspondence, to the end of her life, with +his old nurse; and his interest in his Indian friends never abated. +He was an old man when the Indian mutiny broke out, and two of his +grandsons took their share in the long siege of Delhi, and served +with both the forces which, under Sir Colin Campbell, fought their +way into Lucknow, and finally broke the neck of the Sepoy mutiny. + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE POINT OF THE BAYONET*** + + +******* This file should be named 20729.txt or 20729.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/7/2/20729 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: +https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/20729.zip b/20729.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a1f2aa8 --- /dev/null +++ b/20729.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..abe1bbc --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #20729 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/20729) |
